Documente Academic
Documente Profesional
Documente Cultură
JOURNAL
OF THE
CHARLES
C.
TORREY,
New
AND
HANNS OERTEL
Professor in Yale University.
Haven, Conn.
New
Haven, Conn.
//
SOCIETY,
U.S.A.
copy of
this
may be
Money Order for six dollars, or its equivaThe American Oriental Society, New
lent, to
AS
Printed by
W.
TABLE OF CONTENTS.
Page
AITKEN, "W. E. M.
scriptions of Ashurnazirpal
BARRET, L.
130
C.:
...
BLAKE, F. R.:
343
78
FAY, E.
Noun and
W.
its
Modifiers in Semitic
135, 201
391
susisvi-s
now
first
translated from
58
in the
Cuneiform Account of
the Deluge
The
P.:
HAUPT,
1
five
HOYT,
S. F.:
The Name
HOYT,
S. F.:
HOYT,
S.
of the
in
F: The Etymology
LICHTI, 0.:
Das Sendschreiben
Red Sea
Psalm
17
115
16, 10
120
126
of Religion
268
MONTGOMERY,
Magical Bowl-Text and the Original Script
of the Manichaeans
J. A.:
MULLER,
OGDEN,
W.
E. S.
OLIPHANT,
PETERSEN,
S.
S.
429
OLIPHANT,
G.:
Elliptic
16
BM
103
Dual;
W.
434
33
393
414
Tablets 87535, 93828
21
PROCEEDINGS
OP THE
ITS
N. Y.
1912
Abbott
A. V. Williams
The Corresponding Secretary has the honor to report at the outset that
he has received from President Nicholas Murray Butler of Columbia University a message of hearty greeting to the members assembled at this
meeting. President Butler expresses his regret that his duties as presiding
officer at a political convention held at Rochester, N. Y., deprive him of
The formal
Haupt
sentative.
He welcomes the opportunity of mentioning the desire of all
econcerned in this enterprise to give appropriate space to Oriental matters
and especially to Oriental scholarship in America.
Ill
It is a sad
ments as a eoldier, are too well known to need record here. Col. Higginson was a regular attendant at the Cambridge sessions and occasionally
At the last meeting, being unable to be present,
at meetings elsewhere.
he sent a message of greeting, whereupon the Society directed Professor
l/anman to express its appreciation and good wishes.
Lady Caroline De Filippi, nee Fitzgerald, who died in Rome, Italy, on
Christmas Day, 1911, joined the Society in 1886 and became one of its
life-members.
Her
first
aroused by Professor
life,
with him in the work of the Society, and to renew a hearty wish for
continued welfare.
its
Professor F.
W. Williams,
report, as follows:
31, 1911.
Receipts.
Bank
31,
$ 860.94
1910
$ 1216.23
303.55
127.93
dividends
100.00
1747.71
$ 2608.65
Expenditures.
Volume
31
$ 1096.80
53.12
100.00
1358.73
$ 2608.65
if
STATEMENT.
1911
1910
..........
.............
$ 2,914.35
$ 3,052.29
1,000.00
1,000.00
1,950.00
1,950.00
......
.......
........
........
13.07
20.76
284.71
330.05
$ 6,169.03
$ 6,353.10
The
and
follows:
"We hereby certify that we have examined the account book of the
Treasurer of this Society and have found the same correct, and that the
therewith. We have also compared
foregoing account is in conformity
the entries in the cash book with the vouchers and bank and pass books
all
correct.
April
8,
1912.
CHARLES C.
QERTEL
-g^
,.,
Auditors.
I need not repeat what has previously been stated concerning the
condition of disorder which- exists in the Library, making it an almost
impossible task to locate works, other than serial publications, desired
is
in
to
neglect in
ELECTION OP MEMBERS.
The
elected
list):
CORPORATE MEMBERS.
Mrs. Justin E. Abbott
Mr. H. Linfield
Mr. S. T. Hurwitz
Mrs. A. Y. Williams Jackson
Dr. Hester D. Jenkins
Dr. Otto Lichti
Mr.
C. V.
McLean
Dr. Caroline L.
Mr.
Mr.
Mr.
Mr.
Mr.
Ransom
A. Reichling
Wilfred H. Schoff
Martin Sprengling
Emanuel Sternheim
G.
David E. Thomas
1912-1913.
Professor
following nominations:
VI
for himself,
For the first 64 years of our Society's history, it was the actual practise
of the Society (except for some special reason) to re-elect a President at
the expiration of his term. During these 64 years the office was held by as
few as 9 men: Pickering, Edward Robinson, Salisbury, Woolsey, Hadley,
S. Wells Williams, Whitney, Ward, and Gilman. Pickering presided from
the founding until his death in 1846; Robinson, for 17 years, from PickeThe brief incumbencies of Hadley
ring's death until his own, in 1863.
and Williams were terminated by death; that of Whitney, by illness; and
Oilman's incumbency of 13 annual terms, from 1893 to 1906, by advancing
Mr. Salisbury held the office from 1863 to 1866, and again from
years.
1873 to 1881, and his retirement was in both cases due, as I believe, to
his natural disposition to shrink from publicity.
As to the character of
these admirable men, the discriminating remarks of Dr. Ward in our
Journal (vol. 16, p. lix) may be consulted.
At the Springfield meeting of 1905 the nominating committee named
Mr. Gilman for the office of President and recommended (JAOS. 26. 425)
'that in the future the President be requested to prepare an address on
some phase of the progress or significance of Oriental studies, to be read
at the annual meeting.' This recommendation was adopted. In the report
of the nominating committee at the New Haven meeting of 1906 (JAOS.
we read as follows:
This Society has been peculiarly fortunate in its Presidents, and
it has been accustomed to re-elect them from year to year so
long
as they were willing to serve it. In most of the other American
learned societies the presidency is an honor which is annually con-
27. 470)
ferred
mind
it
any new rule be made, but merely that the usage hitherto prevailing
shall not be regarded as having the force of prescription.
Professor Toy was elected President at that meeting. He was followed
by Lanman
and George
in 1907,
F.
I should express
my
Vll
volved in this procedure a double loss: not only is the 'honor cheapened
lessened, but also the opportunity of the President to serve the Society effectively is reduced to the lowest limit.
and
The
and knowledge of the early history and precedents of the Society, such as
it is by no means likely that a man chosen for one year will take the
pains to acquire. He will think of the office simply as an honor, and of
the service which it involves as confined to the sometimes exceedingly
ill-performed duty of presiding for a dozen hours or so at our annual
In fact, the President should be a watchful and active worker
sessions.
for the benefit of the Society throughout his whole term of office.
In a word, then, our recent innovation subordinates the best interests
of the Society from the larger point of view, to considerations which must
inevitably be primarily more or less personal and selfish.
To refer to the matter of the Vice-Presidency it should be distinctly
:
understood that the Constitution of the Society does not recognize any
such thing as a First or Second or Third Vice-President and gives no
countenance to the theory of promotion from the office of Vice-President
to that of President, such as would seem to have been assumed in our
practise. On the other hand, the gift of the Vice-Presidency
indeed a recognition, on the part of the Society, of distinguished service
to the cause of Oriental studies, such as it is altogether proper from time
to time for us to bestow, and it is one which we can bestow without the
most recent
is
be made by any member; that the fullest weight has been given to
of every member of the committee; and, in particular, that
Professor Moore has been neither consulted nor informed concerning the
intention of the committee to nominate him for another term.
may
the views
by Professor
Till
The President again took the chair, and the Society proceeded to the hearing of the following communication:
Professor J. D. PRINCE, of Columbia University:
political
hymn
to
Shamash.
The
SECOND SESSION.
The members re-assembled on Wednesday morning at 9 45
m. for the second session. The President, Professor Moore,
was in the chair. The following papers were presented:
:
a.
Remarks by
Lanman.
An
archaic tablet in
the
Professor
I.
by Dr.
Scott.
Professor
the
Hebrew
M. L. MARGOLIS,
'dtid in
words.
Professor M. BLOOMFIELD, of Johns Hopkins University: On the supposed 'Streitgedicht,' RV. 4. 42.
Remarks by Professor Lanman.
Professor R. J. H. GOTTHEIL, of Columbia University: Some SyroRemarks by Professor Max Miiller and by Dr. "Ward.
Professor C. R. LANMAN, of Harvard University Buddhaghosa's treatise
Hittite figurines.
On
Way
of Salvation'
report of progress.
it
was voted
o ciock.
IX
THIRD SESSION.
The
large
The
presiding.
W.
chistan and
its
At four o'clock the Society adjourned to the room in Philosophy Hall in which the previous sessions had heen held. The
reading of communications was then resumed, as follows:
Dr. G. F. BLACK, of the New York Public Library: The present state
of the Gipsy question.
series of
Pa:
Professor "W.
MAX MULLER,
of the University
At
5:50
Max
p.
The
sign
of Pennsylvania
Gespu
The
Remarks
(ru).
Miiller.
FOURTH
SESSION.
The
He
on March
25, 26,
Directors
and
27, 1913.
following appointments:
Miss E.
Tablet in
S.
OGDEN, of Albany:
TSBA.,
vol. 6, p. 454.
The
story of
Udayana
as
Sanskrit dhend
Pa.:
On
The reading
of papers
in
the following
order:
Rev. Dr. F. A. VANDERBURGH, of Columbia University: Four Babylonian
from the Prince Collection of Columbia University.
Dr. A. POEBEL, of Johns Hopkins University: The Sumerian incantation
tablets
GT.
16. 7.
260277.
The
The
p. m.,
to
meet in Phila-
(b)
(a)
Hopkins University:
On
title:
(a)
On
the
XI
Dr. E. W. BURLINGAME, of the University of Pennsylvania: (a) Dnkkham
ariyasaccam quoted in Bidpai's fables (b) Buddhaghosa's Dhammapada
Commentary,
Professor C. E. CONANT, of Indiana University: Final diphthongs in
Indonesian languages.
Professor R. J. H. GOTTHEIL, of Columbia University: An amulet from
Irbid with a Babylonian and a Phoenician inscription.
Dr. Lucia GRIEVE, of New York The Hindu goddess Devi.
Dr. Mary I. HUSSEY, of Cambridge, Mass. Tablets from Drehem in the
;
The
Theological Seminary
oath in Sumerian inscriptions.
Professor I. M. PRICE, of the University of Chicago: The published
:
from Drehem.
Mr. G. P. QUACKENBOS, of Columbia University: The legend of the
demon Mahisa in Sanskrit literature.
Rev. Dr. W. ROSENAU, of Johns Hopkins University: (a) The argument
a fortiori in Biblical and post-Biblical literature; (b) Old Testament
texts
Some
The
investigations on the
original language of
List of Members.
xiii
LIST or MEMBERS.
The number placed
I.
HONORARY MEMBERS.
1'Iiistitut,
(Rue Garan-
Paris, France.
1898,
I. E.,
Dekkan
Coll.,
Poona, India.
1887.
Prof.
of Jena,
Germany.
1878.
1893.
1903.
Prof.
Str. 14.)
Prof.
KARL
(Biesinger
1902.
Germany. 1905.
Hungary. 1906.
(retired), Rathfarnham,
GEORGE A. GRIERSON,
D.Litt.,
C.I.E.,
I.C.S.
Germany. (Gross-Lichterfelde-
Germany.
Prof.
of Strassburg,
(Kalbs-
1910.
1887.
of Berlin,
Germany.
(Wormserstr.
12, W.)
List of Members.
xiv
1'Institut de France, 18
Rue
er
Franc,ois I
Paris,
,
1908.
Prof. JULIUS
str.
Prof.
18 a.)
1902.
str. 15.)
of Leipzig,
Germany. (UniversitatR-
1890.
[Total: 26]
II.
CORPORATE MEMBERS.
* are
those of
life
members.
Rev. Dr. JUSTIN EDWARDS ABBOTT, 120 Hobart Ave., Summit, N. J. 1900.
Mrs. JUSTIN E. ABBOTT, 120 Hobart Ave., Summit, N. J. 1912.
Dr. CYRUS ADLER, 2041 North Broad St., Philadelphia, Pa. 1884.
Prof. FELIX ADLER, 33 Central Park West, New York, N. Y. 1912.
WILLIAM E. M. AITKEN, Courtright, Ontario, Canada. 1910.
RONALD C. ALLEN, 148 South Divinity Hall, Univ. of Chicago, Chicago, 111.
1912.
St.,
Springfield, Mass.
1904.
MAY
New
Broadway and
York, N. Y. 1907.
Dr. WILLIAM STURGIS BIGELOW, 60 Beacon St., Boston, Mass. 1894.
Prof. JOHN BINNEY, Berkeley Divinity School, Middletown. Conn. 1887.
Rev. Dr. SAMUEL H. BISHOP, 500 West 122 d St., New York, N. Y. 1898.
Dr. GEORGE F. BLACK, N. Y. Public Library, Fifth Ave. and 42 d St.,
New York, N. Y. 1907.
Dr. FRANK RINGGOLD BLAKE, "Windsor Hills, Baltimore, Md.
Rev. PHILIP BLANC, St. Johns Seminary, Brighton, Md. 1907.
Rev. Dr. DAVID BLAUSTEIN, The New York School of Philanthropy, 105
East 22 d St., New York, N. Y. 1891.
Dr. FREDERICK J. BLISS, Univ. of Rochester, Rochester, N. Y. 1898.
FRANCIS B. BLODGETT, General Theological Seminary, Chelsea Square, New
York, N. Y. 1906.
120 th
St.,
List of Members.
Prof.
Rock
Prof.
xv
Island,
111.
an<J
Theol. Seminary,
1900.
1881.
Washington, D.
C.
1896.
Rev. Dr.
2905
West 14th
St.,
1910.
Cleveland, Ohio.
1911.
Prof.
Switzerland.
Prof.
18,
1908.
Pres. FRANCIS
Prof.
RUDOLPH
N. J.
Prof.
E.
Place, Princeton,
1911.
HAMMOND H. BUCK,
Philippine Islands.
1908.
Pa. 1910.
WALTER
1882.
1887.
1905.
1888.
Prof.
ALFRED L.
P. DENNIS,
Madison, Wis.
1900.
J.
List of Members.
xvi
1888.
HENRY FERGUSON,
Prof.
1912.
LEO
J.
N. Y.
1907.
New York,
1907.
Prof. JAS.
120 th
New
St.,
York, N. Y.
1892.
New
Prof. BASIL
Md.
1858.
GEO.
Mass.
Prof.
1909.
St.,
Cambridge.
1857.
Prof.
1904.
1890.
List of Members.
xvii
*Dr. GEORGE C. 0. HAAS, 254 West 136th St., New York, N. Y. 1903.
Miss LUISE HAESSLER, 1230 Amsterdam Ave., New York, N. Y. 1909
Mrs. IDA M. HANCHETT, care of Omaha Public Library, Omaha, Nebraska.
1912.
Prof.
SAMUEL HART, D.
1906.
of Chicago, Chicago,
111.
1886.
Conn.
1879.
Prof.
Univ.), 215
N. J.
HOCK
St.,
Bloomfield,
1903.
Conn.
1881.
WILSON
S.
1885.
New York, N. Y.
1912.
Prof.
MORRIS JASTROW
Philadelphia, Pa.
(Univ.
of
Pennsylvania),
St.
1886.
1912.
St., Brooklyn, N. Y.
Canton Corner, Mass. 1874.
Prof. JAMES RICHARD JEWETT, (Harvard Univ.) Cambridge, Mass. 1887.
CHARLES JOHNSTON, 387 Ocean Ave., Flatbush, Brooklyn, N. Y. 1912.
Prof. CHRISTOPHER JOHNSTON (Johns Hopkins Univ.), 21 West 20th St.,
Baltimore, Md. 1889.
ARTHUR BERRIEDALE KEITH, Colonial Office London S. W., England.
Rev.
HENRY
F. JENKS,
1&08.
Prof. MAXIMILIAN L.
List of Members.
xviii
Prof. CHAELES
Conn.
Prof.
Prof.
St.,
New Haven,
1890.
Mass. 1899.
Miss LUCILE KOHN, 1138 Madison Ave.,
bridge, Mass.
1876.
Museum
of Natural History,
Chicago,
111.
1900.
Tenn. 1901.
Prof.
Prof.
Mass.
1882.
of Art,
New
York, N. Y.
1899.
Prof.
DUNCAN
B.
MACDONALD
Conn. 1893.
Prof.
St.,
New
Chicago,
111.
1912.
D. C.
1899.
List of Members.
Mrs.
Prof.
xix
1892.
Oxford, Eng-
1881.
land.
Prof. J. A.
MONTGOMERY
town, Pa.
Greene
St.,
German-
1903.
Md. 1903.
HANNS OERTEL (Yale
Prof.
New
Dr. CHARLES J. OGDEN, 250 West 88th St., New York, N. Y. 1906.
Miss ELLEN S. OGDEN, St. Agnes School, Albany, N. Y. 1898.
Prof. SAMUEL G. OLIPHANT, Grove City College, Grove City, Pa. 1906.
Prof.
Prof.
Geneve, Switzerland.
1904.
Prof.
1894.
Prof.
1903.
Prof.
Rose
Hill, Cincinnati, 0.
St.,
College,
1889.
Dr.
Prof.
N. Y.
Univ.), Sterlington,
Rockland
Co.,
1888.
GEORGE PAYN QUACKENBOS, 331 West 28th St., New York, N. Y. 1904.
Dr. CAROLINE L. RANSOM, Metropolitan Museum of Art, 5th Ave. and
82d St., New York, N. Y.
1912.
xx
List of Members.
1912.
Prof.
1891.
St.,
111.
1892.
1880.
Prof.
Mass.
St.,
Cambridge,
1893.
JOHANN
MONTGOMERY SCHUYLER,
1906.
1903.
Rev. JOHN L. SCULLY, Church of the Holy Trinity, 312-332 East 88th St.,
New York, N. Y. 1908.
Rev. Dr. WILLIAM G. SEIPLE, 217 Turner St., Allentown, Pa. 1902.
Prof. CHARLES N. SHEPARD (General Theological Sem.), 9 Chelsea Square,
1907.
HENRY PRESERVED
Prof.
1884.
of Prof.
F.
Harper,
Univ.
of
Chicago,
1892.
List of Members.
xxi
Rev. ANSON PHELPS STOKES, Jr., Yale University, New Haven, Conn. 1900.
MAYER SULZBERGER, 1303 Girard Ave., Philadelphia, Pa. 1888.
Prof. GEORGE SVERDRUP, Jr., Augsburg Seminary, Minneapolis, Minn. 1907.
DAVID E. THOMAS, 6407 Ingleside Ave., Chicago, 111. 1912.
EBEN FRANCIS THOMPSON, 311 Main St., Worcester, Mass. 1906.
Prof. HENRY A. TODD (Columbia Univ.), 824 West End Ave., New York,
N. Y. 1885.
OLAF A. TOFFTEEN, 2726 Washington Boulevard, Chicago, 111. 1906.
*Prof. CHARLES C. TORRE Y, Yale University, New Haven, Conn. 1891.
Prof. CRAWFORD H. TOY (Harvard Univ.), 7 Lowell St., Cambridge, Mass. 1871.
Rev. SYDNEY N. USSHER, St. Bartholomew's Church, 44th St. & Madison
Ave., N. Y. 1909.
Rev. HERVEY BOARDMAN VANDERBOGART,
Berkeley Divinity School,
Middletown, Conn. 1911.
Rev. Dr. FREDERICK AUGUSTUS VANDERBURGH, 53 Washington Sq., New
York, N. Y. 1908.
ADDISON VAN NAME (Yale Univ.), 121 High St., New Haven, Conn. 1863.
Miss SUSAN HAYES WARD, The Stone House, Abington Ave., Newark,
N. J.
1874.
Rev. Dr. WILLIAM HAYES WARD, 130 Fulton St., New York, N. Y. 1869.
Miss CORNELIA WARREN, Cedar Hill, Waltham, Mass. 1894.
131 Davis Ave., Brookline,
Prof. WILLIAM F. WARREN (Boston Univ.)
Mass. 1877.
Rev. LEROY WATERMAN, 5815 Drexal Ave., Chicago, 111. 1912.
Prof. J. E. WERREN, 1667 Cambridge St., Cambridge, Mass. 1894.
Prof. JENS IVERSON WESTENGARD (Harvard Univ.), Asst. Gen. Adviser to
H.S,M. Govt., Bangkok, Siam. 1903.
ARTHUR J. WESTERMAYR, 100 Lenox Road, Brooklyn, N. Y. 1912.
Pres. BENJAMIN IDE WHEELER, University of California, Berkeley, Cal. 1885.
Prof. JOHN WILLIAMS WHITE (Harvard Univ.), 18 Concord Ave., Cambridge
Mass. 1877.
JOHN G. WHITS, Williamson Building, Cleveland, Ohio. 1912.
* Miss MARGARET DWIGHT
WHITNEY, 227 Church St., New Haven, Conn. 1908.
Hon. E. T. WILLIAMS, U. S. Legation, Peking, China. 1901.
Prof. FREDERICK WELLS WILLIAMS (Yale Univ.), 135 Whitney Ave., New
Haven, Conn. 1895.
,
HENRY
Murray
St.,
Hamilton, Ontario.
1885.
Madison, Wis.
1904.
1905.
St.,
Prof. IRVING F.
Prof. JAMES H. WOODS (Harvard Univ.), 2 Chestnut St., Boston, Mass. 1900.
Dr. WILLIAM H, WORRELL, 53 Tremont Street, Hartford, Conn. 1910.
Rev. Dr. ABRAHAM YOHANNAN, Columbia University, New York, N. Y. 1894.
Germany.
1911.
S. J.,
Niederwallstrasse
89,
Berlin,
SW.
(Total: 296.)
19,
List of Members.
xxii
SOCIETIES, EDITORS,
I.
AMERICA.
EUROPE.
1.)
Anthropologiache Gesellschaft.
PRAGUE: Koniglich Bohmische Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften.
DENMARK, ICELAND, REYKJAVIK: University Library.
FRANCE, PARIS Societe Asiatique. (Rue de Seine, Palais de 1'Institut.)
:
Bibliotheque Nationale.
dei Lincei.
Some
Difficult
Passages in
the
Cuneiform Account of
in the Johns
This section begins: Al Suripak, dlu so, tidu$u atta, ina Kadi
ndr Pardti saknu, which is generally translated: The city of
Suripak, the city which thou knowest, is situated on the
bank of the Euphrates; see e. g. Geo. Smith, The Chaldean Account of Genesis, edited by A. H. Sayce (London,
1880) p. 279. Similarly Jules Oppert, Le poeme chaldeen du
deluge (Paris, 1885) p. 7 rendered: II est une ville de Surippak,
que tu connais; elle esi situee sur les bords de I'Euphrate.
601 has:
La
sur VEuphrate
The
ville
existe.
of Warka
ago, in the ruins of Fara,
Erech,
2
At
the
time
of
the
Flood, Suripak
Nippur.
SE
of Nuffar
was situated on
of the
Red Sea
at the
of the Flood
(cf.
UG
191).
Ea bade
Paul Haupt,
2
of Babylon. 7
44
Hirah
BL
(cf.
E, about 4 miles
20'
SE
[1912.
N,
Jensen,
p.
The
1,
final
10).
We
m
m
Hammurapi: 8 cimma mar$a
which
expect tldisu atta, not tiduSu. The rendering The city which,
as thou knowest, lies on the Euphrates (EBA 495; cf. JAOS
25, 79) is therefore inaccurate.
ildni qirib
dens',
Ildni before qirbuht is a casus penthe suffix of libba$unu refers to ildni qirbuu. ib Ildni
local gods
1*
dl
of Suripak.
but
is
Yol. xxxii.]
1.
31).^ Jensen (KB 6, 83) transihr "Inneres (hervor)gebracht" was hat [ihren]
bewegt]? and in the commentary (KB 6, 395): Was
Was hat
lates:
Bau[ch
Delitzsch
sie getrieben!
(HW
ihr
Nebuchadnezzar
Similarly
naSarii
litzsch
heart
my
libbi,
(HW
484 b
cf.
(iii,
19)
me
induced
231 a 317 a )
.
7 )
gurruSu) we have according to Delitzsch
not the stem udbalu, to bring, but the stem abdlu (AJSL
SFG 66, 3.
26, 235) to be full; see, however,
6, 320;
These phrases were discussed by Guyard in
88 and 96
a
(HW
(or
KB
(hdmalahu
'did 'l-amri
Abdlu
hdmala
'agrdhu).
Winckler,
renders:
Ufer] des Euphrat gelegen ist, jene Stadt besteht seit alters, die
Goiter in ihr. Einen Flutsturm zu machen trieb ihr Herz an
die grofien
Goiter
the following
line.
mean
mean
to
320,
6,
I have
JAOS
discussed
22, 19
ZDMG
also 16,
(cf.
cxi;
AJSL
19,
199;
21
in
22
63, 517).
Ungnad's die Goiter standen ihr
Qardbu means
very improbable.
ittaqrah, to be attacked; contrast
(=
bardJcu)
means
AJSL
to be propitious, to bless
23, 243)
(GB
and
358*>).
~karabu
Nor
does
Paul Haupt,
4
in
BA
1,
prefixed
not;
Id,
cf.
old,
bardru, to be bright
Zimmern's
I mentioned
bar, pure.
translation
(printed
published)
account of the Deluge, which I
edition
RBA
If
495
(cf.
JAOS
25, 70;
translation of
my
in
had prepared
Schrader's
of
[1912.
11.
13.
ZDMG
adopted
1.
64, 711,
it
in
18).
is
correct,
which I translated
51, 11)
712,
1.
desperate passage
960
JAOS
K
ZDMG
22, 8
(cf.
64,
8).24
III.
is
in
(NE
121, 15)
inschriftliche
15.
This
S. P. II,
made by Pinches,
a copy
is the beginning of 1.
Babylonian fragment
in
my
(Leipzig,
Sintflutbericht
which
old,
lies
and
NE
will
be.
Similarly
lama Hi
tabasi
(NE
3,
(KB
12, 34)
7;
means
a god, as Jensen
I
184) translated
like
(NE
12, below)
thejstory
of
Eabani
(or
Engidu',
cf.
ZDMG
64, 712,
n. 2)
Vol. xxxii.]
Woman
and the
the Fall of
is
29
Man,
course. 30
Nor can we
of
1.
read, with
In the
15.
KB 6,
first place,
we should expect
13,
30, 23).
Ungnad
is
But the
am
inclined
to
Museum
of.
thy heart
the heart to
to
do
make
war,
battle.
on some
disaster.
In Syriac this stem appears, with partial
assimilation of the d to the p, as kappit, to knot, to tie in a
knot.
The Qal is used of plants forming knots; cf. German
Fruchiknoten and Goethe's translation of Cant. 2, 13: der
Paul Haupt,
[1912.
Hebrew this verb means also to resolve. For the postnoun qa$r, knot, cf. Assyr. qicru, knot, Ethiop. qiiegr.
In Arabic we find kabada, to plan (syn. qagada) which may
Biblical
Biblical
stand for
Mpada
to
the
IV. -
In
1922
11.
Deluge we read
necessary precautions.
Assyr. qiqqisu
a synonym of XUQQU
is
= Arab. xu$g,
cottage,
with igaru
(for
Mgaru)
litter,
qa;
shake-down, and
cf.
qiSSdSt
(or
qiSoset}
stalk
of
grain, straw.
CT
48 (No.
14,
The
of qiqqiSu.
tabannu)
Sumerian equivalents
means
a structure (Assyr.
(Sum. gi-ru-a)
The second (Sum. gi-dim) has the same
36, 331)
gives several
first
of reeds.
meaning
(=
Vol. xxxii.]
of reeds. 40
ture
down
(qa'apu)
Assyr. ensu
is
Sum.
buildings; so
frail
structure.
ga'ir)
silt
Andrae 42
"W.
at Kalali
laborers
thatched
(= Heb.
cf.
i.
e.
mentioned
therefore
first
in
1.
The
translation
years ago, in
BA
1,
of this difficult
(KB 6, 483)
nearer the truth than the latest efforts
123. 320,
Jensen, Ungnad,
&c.
no parallel.
The repetition of the words qiqqis qiqqiS igar igar is equivalent to every reed-hut and every brick-house (G-K,
123, c).
has
ass's ears)
affords
The
Y.
In
my
that parisu in
1.
NE
48 I stated
paper on the beginning of
65 of the account of the Deluge meant mast,
49
This interpretation
setting pole.
not at variance with, the tenth tablet of
where we read
that Ximrod and the ferryman of Hasis-atra used 120 parise,
is
NE
Paul Haupt,
Gressmann's
of Death.
[1912.
the Waters
Nimrod built
and the shore of the Island of the Blessed; but this gangway
would have been more than two miles long (cf. JAOS 22,
10, n. 6).
302).
6,
Meissner 50
Setting poles are still employed in Babystates that he was transported to Nippur
a boat by two boys who used bamboo stems, with an asphalt ball at one end, as setting poles. Bamboo stems may
be over 100 feet long, and nearly 3 /4 ft. thick. They are often
in
used as masts.
Nimrod,
it
may
sail
across the
touched the boggy bottom with one of his poles, he could not
it up again, so that he was compelled to take a fresh pole.
They stuck in the quagmire at the bottom of the Waters of
lift
Death; si
cf.
Hinc
omnem
when
Finally,
the mast
the
of his
boat
large stones.
this
Vol. xxxii.]
and throw
bow
way
Warping anchors (German Warpanker) are known as hedges.
and the hawsers attached to them are called kedge-ropes. In
the case of a large vessel the kedge
is
masts.
for
this purpose.
VI.
Tablet in
p. 30,
nn. 32
36;
54
63, 516,
The
1.
42517,
1.
also in
nn.
32;
11.
64, 711,
11.
15
30;
cf. 714,
ad
v.
3;^
20. 43;
11.
3. 8. 15.
must remember that we use back in the same way. Shakespeare says: / bought you a dozen of shirts to your back] cf.
our vulgar phrase to keep a person back and belly, i. e. to keep
him in clothes and food. To back was formerly used in the
sense
of to
clothe.
Ungnad's
renderings
Ganzlich
ist
dein
Paul Haupt,
10
[1912.
= midduda,
mindudd
to
originally
of a thing.
According to
Ark were
and the length was considerably
extent
the
ascertain
AJP
9,
Ark
422.12
Notes.
(1)
Haupt, Das
See
p. 134.
Elul in
ZDMG
64, p. 712,
The
n. 2.
abbreviations used in
ZDMG
GE =
TB = Hugo Gressmann,
(Tubingen,
1909).
Alt-
LT G
A.
(2)
See
(3)
See
(4)
See B.
Hwa
20,
p.
Mei finer,
und Huarnaq
1.
1.
Cf.
1901)
p.
12,
1.
4;
11.
6.
Rumen
(Leipzig,
OLZ
UG 79. 191.
ZDMG 63, 529,
14, n. *;
251;
p.
18,
1.
29.
von
10;
12, 68, n. 6.
TO
1.
NE
50, 208: utulu-ma edle ina mtfal musi $allu, The men
Cf.
down
and rested on the night couches. For utulu and
lay
mdalu see my paper on the Heb. stem nahal, to rest, AJSL
22, 195. 199.
15,
1.
For
AJSL
Ema (HW
10) in
31.
ha'iti,
(6)
(Paris, 1883)
p.
73.
The Arabic
text
(p. 299,
ii,
part 2
below, of the
vol.
Paris
reads
edition)
as
follows:
A.
ZDMG
11
Vol. xxxii.]
OLZ
Cf.
(fo'&e.
251;
12,
See R. F.
(8)
108;
1904)
p.
1904)
p. 83,
(9) Assyr.
5763.
11.
cimmu marcu
Qimmu may be
mama ^s-saifu).
19).
Nor can it
is less probable.
zahtnah, zulimah, trouble, disease.
-*A-J,
cf.
G-K,
401.
BA
TB
53, n. 6;
(12) Cf.
UG 68.
UG 53.
61;
HW
4a
57. 59;
Die
E. Suess,
Sintftut
(Prag, 1883) pp. 21. 24. 4449. 54. 68; also the remarks at
the end of my paper The Dimensions of the Babylonian Ark
in
Praetorius' combination of dbubu with Arab.
9, 424.
AJP
habub
(KAT 2
66, 19)
may
be correct
(cf.
Jensen, Kosmologie,
by Enlil, and he
was the god of storms; Ea, the god of the sea, saved HasisMl sari,
Enlil
atra, but he could not prevent the cyclone.
p. 389).
chiefly
PSBA
(13)
cf.
33, 78;
The
cf.
scriptions de
p. 55.
ibid. p. 80,
mean
and
16, p. 14, n. *;
Sumer
does not
MDOGr, No.
and
it
et
p.
BA
UG
below;
below;
It
79,
in-
This
(Leipzig, 1907) p. 151, below.
the consort of Enlil; cf.
5, 537,
554,
is
Thureau-Dangin, Les
BJBA, German
was induced by
deity
1.
18,
edition,
his consort
Paul Haupt,
12
[1912.
to send the cyclone (cf. 11. 120122 of the Flood tablet, TIG- 56)
send the celestial bull
just as Anu was instigated by Istar to
(UG
1.
33,
dingir
94).
max
is
The
ildni, the lady of the gods.
later
a
is
117
in
1.
adaptation.
28, 116)
belit
edition, p. 82.
GK,
(14) See
143, b;
WdG
2,
name
(JAOS
RBA, German
Istar
Cf.
197.
(1892)
HW
(16)
Tuquntu
AG
be
appeased; see
Heb. mitqomem.
For secondary
= tuqumtu;
thy mind
may
2
cf.
ZDMG
see
63, 518,
1.
37;
below,
cf.
n. 33.
(17)
was,
it
supposed, mind
may be
Jcabtassa iS&'am.
(18)
up
heart"
my
Marduk
regie
(HW
216 b ) the
suffix
Cf.
libba,
-m
Marduk
stirred
dative (German,
is
GK,
WdG
117, x;
Gunk el,
192, A.
dequ
is
(cf.
GB
746 a ).
unwarranted as
as
Code of Hammurapi
had a q instead of &,
earth;
Assyr. raggu,
iad u;
evil
cf.
cited above, n.
it
drqd (Jer.
Heb.
ra';
see
q)
instead of ni^ik
bite,
8).
might be idenfor
10, 11)
AVZKM
ar'a,
23, 361,
cf.
Assyr.
(HW
rugummu
MDOG,
(19) Cf.
cited above, n. 4.
(20) Cf.
Ex. 25,
Stade was
astray,
(tertice
26, 19.
No.
612;
7,
AJSL
p. 2
and
26, 7).
p. 3 of
we must read
Meissner's paper
In 2
ug-hiSsi/aka libbeka
This
14
(cf.
liis&,
,11,
on
Ob.
3).
to lead
BA
n. 11;
means
(in
13
Vol. xxxii.]
134).
11.
(UGr 55) adhere to the transdarkness, which I suggested more than 22 years ago,
but which I declared to be extremely doubtful (JHUC, No. 69,
lation
BA
I showed
p. 18).
1,
Zimmern,
UG
n. 2;
195, n.
upon you
Kibdti
destruction.
is
Heb.
tiitiib
in 2
3, 19.
If kibtu were
a
(H'W 317 )
the
fern,
plural would be kibtdti, not kibdti. Jensen translates: SchmutzC. F. LehmannRegen\ Ungnad: furchtbarer (?) Regen.
in
Haupt,
of his
ix
thesis
dissertation,
inaugural
derived
which Jensen
1883) p.
tain
(KB
see
understood,
xli;
JHUC,
an infamous
beginning of
6,
1.
33
as
lie,
If
Jensen
we may read
233)
Haupt,
Ungnad
GrK,
ezeb
106,
For
ali.
ihr Schatten,
seem to know
5,
my explanation of
471 (Friedrich's remarks in
1)
the
1.
39
g.
had
and Grressmann
At
izlranl in
considered
27. 109):
this
Schb'n
Nor
does
Ungnad
(UGr 8)
of the
of the description
Jensen's meaningless
translations.
Paul Haupt
14
[1912.
a
bamtu, impurity (HW 180 ) or Id ulldti (Zimmern,
Surpu, p. 53, below) and Heb. Id-ken &c.
(24) Gressmann's idea (TIG 123, n. 5) that this text be-
(23) Cf. Id
its
cf.
(the city's)
city of
may
be read iqdtap
1.
22, 11,
4;
KB
ligna,
1.
250,
6,
denotes an artichoke.
UG
284;
Pliny
62, 284.
cf.
JAOS
In
Syriac, Idgnd
152; 20, 262) calls the artiCarduus lenedictus, the blessed
(19,
HW
NE
NiHttu
147, 295).
appears as a synonym of mbittu (cf.
stands for ma'battu, and means interlacement, intertwinement,
interwoven foliage;
'dblnte, dense woods.
Heb.
cf.
'abdt,
leafy
tree;
Syr.
dbe
79
NE
JAOS
25,
(29)
and
AJSL
See
p. 209,
p. 91;
AJSL
(30)
See
15,
n. 54;
UG99.
(1910) p. 38.
see
RBA
71, n. 1; also
476.
193214;
also
Contrast
ZAT
KAT*,
cf.
23, 174;
JBL
21,
p. 202,
n. 33,
Skinner's Genesis,
Gunkel's Genesis
528, n. 3;
23, 228;
especially
= serpent (Aram,
hiuid)
cf.
1.
Nimrod
Vol. xxxii.]
(NE
epic
KB
212;
50,
UG
179;
6,
15
and
36)
Syr.
itmallak
Read
(not tamel)
above, n. 16.
(34) Qiqqisu, at the end of
(33)
fixed
AG
23, 5;
Amos
(35) Of.
house
is
which
is
On
I
pre-
cf.
SFG
cf.
BA
taSib
p. 192,
e.
(cf.
dashed to
NE
g.
For
6, 11:
1.
5.
lo!
142, n.
pieces,
the great
to splinters,
the day
when
I punish her
'11
7).
see
lamb
hammar, hammed
SAI
(38)
Of.
(39)
For the
692
v.
s.
final
in
ZDMG
65, 107.
kikkisu.
k in
sik see
ZDMG
64, 705,
n. 1;
cf.
above, n. 13.
(40)
Qf. Is.
Isaiah in
(41)
Cf.
(42) See
trast
No.
1,
SBOT.
the conclusion of
MDOG,
No.
(43)
On
See
KB
(45)
See
Duval
20 (thesis ix of
(44)
n.
No.
No.
483;
(cf.
cf.
UG
Lehmann).
25, p. 74; con-
No.
43, p. 19.
1. 12.
192.
above, n. 10)
202, C.
356, c;
368, a;
Nol-
JAOS
ZDMG
63, 516,
1.
42.
UG
194, 1. 7.
(49) Contrast
9
of
the
See
(50)
p.
paper cited above, n. 4.
Contrast
Schneider's
(51)
explanation cited in
As
UG
138,
to
ing and subsequently pulling piles used for piers and wharves,
16
the Deluge.
[1912
driven,
it
when
it is
Using a 25 horse-power engine to pull these poles, it is necessary to employ what is known as a triple rig or pulley. Of
course, if such a rig were not used, the direct force necessary
to pull the piles in question would be much greater, probably
about 50 horse-power. I am indebted for information to Professor Gellert Alleman, of Swarthmore College.
The ancient cuneiform poet believed, of course, that paddles and oars
were unknown in the times of Nimrod. Of. EB 4478, 1. 20.
(53)
(54)
Not sut\ Contrast lid 137, n. 2; cf. also pp. 184. 207.
TJG 195 still thinks that Hasis-atra gave the people of
(57)
(KB
6,
were intended for holes in the bottom through which the ship
was supplied with water! A. Jeremias, following Winckler,
gives the meaningless translation: I poured water over the
sikkat in its interior.
(58)
(59)
Cf.
Op.
JAOS;
cit.
13,
Cf. above,
p. 4.
It cannot be length.
BA
1,
124.
>
<-
f\
'
n,
f\
HW
lit.
to try hard.
Assyr.
lu,
ZAT
contrast
p.
189;
and Skinner's
so
close that
no sustenance
is
left to the bigger animal, and, besides that, they are supposed
The
to leave a taint that is highly offensive to the bovines.
damage done by
and their sharp
it
takes the
Vol.
XXXII. Part
I.
15, 1909.
Paul Haupt,
18
to
"be
On
II.
able
(HW
to
365 b).
[1912.
ZAT
1.
10).
Delitzsch
(HW
(HW
decision,
Assyr. jemu,
fibba.
This
is
intelligence,
mean
Art
AJSL
is
(cf.
skill,
knack, just as
German
FSB A
Seleucus
16, 162,
published by Gaster in
to
Judith:
Mdh
translates:
What
is it
Gaster
fibek.
says
that thou wishest? but it means: How art thou? Heb. mi att
Judith,^
Euth
in
thou?
3,
incorrect (see
literal meaning of mdh
is
BA
1,
17,
fibek is
1.
1;
What
AJSL
is
Who
24, 127).
thy report,
news of thee?
i.
The
art
The
e.
the
suffix
GK
The
128, h;
135, m.
traditional Jewish pronunciation is fiba, for jebd, not
HW 297;
(originally tBbS)
2
legend, see
Haupt, Purim
(Leipzig, 1906) p.
7,
11.
3339.
Vol. xxxii.j
stems
19
la?u.
BA
Pael fabbib
(cf.
native, derived
jebiba,
from
BL
fibbd
fibd, jebd
denomi-
is
Assyr. \ernu
jd'mu.
Dalman's Worterbuch
fibd.
(p.
Heb.
156) gives
and Aram,
Art, Wesen,
fibbd,
Euf; but on p. 159 he gives Heb. fib, Art und Weise. This
would seem to be the original pronunciation. The form fibbd
instead of fibd
febd
may be
in-
MSS
Assyrian \e,mu
(for
fa'mu)
speak.
le'u) wise,
stands for
HW
III.
366 ) tablet, stands for tthu,
Assyr. Wu (not li'u,
which corresponds to Heb. luh, just as we have in Arabic,
r$h, wind, and ruh, spirit, whereas in Hebrew, ruh is used for
both wind and spirit] cf. Kings (SBOT) p. 96, 1. 25.2
IV.
may
HW
366 a)
lahd, idlhd,
soiled,
blame and
to
Both Heb.
(growler,
dob,
hummer).
defiled,
disgraced,
11
,
to curse,
but
which
is
said to
mean
bear,
Cf.
WZKM
see
BL
3, 8)
74;
23,
360362.
means according
contrast
AJSL
to
Gunkel,
20
Y.
Ass jr.
discussed in
la',
HW
a kind of wine
Za'w,
nelu',
[1912.
(HW
366 b )
to lick, to lap.
iii,
may
may mean to sip, to swallow, and may stand
as we have uru (cf. Heb. 'aruah, Arab, 'uriatu")
374%
and uru (Arab. auratun ) shame; cf. ZDMGr 65, 108, 1. 14.
VI. For the etymology of Heb. lem, Levite, see OLZ 12,
(
163;
ZDMG
63, 522,
1.
9;
ZAT
29, 286.
BM
16.
York
Part
the
City.
XV
British
Museum
Professor
much
valuable
texts.
I.
Plate
i,
i.
This poem relates to the goddess Mama. Its language reminds us of the phrase in Psalm xix, 11: nM1 t?:TTD
D^BIS "sweeter than honey and the
honey-comb." The poet dwells
on the pleasure of singing the song of the goddess Mama and
the character of her maternal relations.
za-ma-ar
The song
ilat
bi-li-it
of Belit
Hi a-za-ma-ar
ili
I sing.
Frederick A. Vanderburgh,
22
nat
[1912.
ma -ma
za-ma-ra-sa-ma e-li
The goddess Mama, her song more
u ka-ra-nim ta-bu
than honey and wine is sweet;
ta-bu-u e-li di-i$-pi u ha-ra-ni-i-im
sweeter than honey and wine;
di-is-pi-i-im
ta-bu-u
ha-na-na-bi-i-ma Jm-aS-hu-ri-i-im
e-li
m a-ma
iS-ti-na-am u-li-id-ma
ma m a
i-e-na u-li-id-ma
ili
sa-ri-bi
ekalli-$u
ma - ma
$a-la-ti u-li-id-ma
1.
bi'li-it ili
ideogram
for
is
bear the
is
common compound
(Br. 5307
i-li
&
That bi-li5309).
several goddesses
an epithet
title.
NI.NI
ili
is
for
example, was
called Belli ildni: e-a mu-u-ti-sir nak-bi-8u bi-lit ilani mu-rappi-sat-ta lit-ti-8u.
Cylinder of Sargon, line 70.
2.
root literally
ib-ri (*12H):
1.
2d. m.
s.
"surround, protect."
us-si-ra
impv.
3.
ma -ma, the name of a very ancient divinity, as is
evinced by its appearance in personal names of early Babylonian times. It may be found in the name of a man who
ilat
was an
official
23
Vol. xxxii.]
din ^r
Nebuchadezzar
of
Col.
I,
ii,
line 39.
gaUa-tu (III R.
41.
c.
11).
Jianabu) exhibits a curious reduplication of the syllable na. It seems proper here to raise
the question as to whether wine and herbs had any relation
6.
ha-na-na-bi-i-ma
(really
We
u samni
in
know
incantations:
sikari
$i-
Thompson's Devils and Evil Spirits of Babylonia), ar-suup-pu se-gu-su in-nin-nu $a i-na $i-ir-'-i-8a um-sa ka$-da-at
pur-$um-tu ina katd-a elldti li-te-en-ma iStenis bu-lul-ma ina
kak-ha-di-Su su-lmn "the ar-su-up-pu, $e-gu-su and in-nin-nu
whidh in its height its day has reached, let an old woman with
her clean hands grind it, mix it together, on his head place
see
it"
(Headache
(di8-pu)
Series,
In-me-tu
eli-$u
called sarbu.
"fiery
one."
is
Frederick A. Vanderburgh,
24
[1912.
II.
Plate
2,
viii.
as
of the
of coming
Inhabitants were
the
carried
machinations of
away
evil
to
spirits.
in
desolation.
ma
an-nu-um
On
i-ri
8u-ba-ru-u-um lu-u
Protection, let
5
- e-li sa a-a
sa-al-la-at su-mi-ri -
it
ir-$i-id ka-sa-si-im-ma
Yearly (they
i8-um-ma da-mu-u-su
They
seek
its
Sumer be diminished!
ilat
u 8u-u
and he
i$tar
blood; Istar
are
ilat
who go down
(to trial).
Istar,
come
to
u-li i-pa-Sa-lia-am
"My woes
10
(is
i-li
carried away);
a-na-a-ma
ili
offering.
li-el-li
i-lm-uz-ma-kar-ra-di-i-$a
He
n&r
The
n&r
diklat iz-ki-ir
was
raised;
25
Vol. xxxii.]
The
15
3.
idea
effect of
means Babylonia.
$u-ba-ru-u-um, same root
Sumer
of
course
4.
I.
as ib-ru, plate
1,
line 2.
ir-Zi-id.
1.
6.
reference to Istar
7.
ur-du-ni-i-im,
8. i-ga-tu,
1.
1.
and Tammuz
I.
pres.
1.
pret.
m.
from katu.
from aradu.
Tammuz.
from alu "lament."
u-li
9.
i-pa-$a-ha-am seems to be
f.
pi.
of
R.
16. 15
mu ~ lu
(Sum.
HI),
11.
dildat: id or
KAE) =
(A.TUE,)
m.
s.;
the subject
ndru.
idigna
is
Lellu.
(BAE.TIG.
from the
A.TUE.BAE.TIG-.KAE (water-course-cutting-banks-power-
common
spelling
is
Sippar,
situated be-
Frederick A. Vanderburgh,
26
[1912.
III.
Plate
lie
3,
i.
plate 4, plates 3 and 4 forming successive columns in the obverse of the same tablet. In lines 1 to 7, .the petitioner,
is
is
already
going on.
- $i-e-me ik-ri-bi lu na-i-id
hear
al-ti
my
O my
lady, hear
my
ramani
habitation, on behalf of the divine Ramanu!
king of
my
ili
My
prayer
pure; in attack,
is
my
supreme.
5
He
ti-bi-e mi-si'i
it
resisteth
him
not.
gi-U-8u- Ii-i8-me
his
obey.
10
i$-ti-a-nim
a-du-u
The mountain
is
i-li
ma-'hu-ur
li-ib-bu-ku-nim
bi-li-it i-li
* IM
a-na mali-ri-ia
in
my
presence!
ib-bu-Jcu-ni-ma
i'li
bi-li-it
let
let
27
Vol. xxxii.]
I.
to
ik-ri~bi,
lu
i.
adv.
$ar,
god might be
plate
5.
6.
9.
a$-ta-at,
1.
force."
7. ak-li-ni
"food."
8.
i-ra-az-zu,
i-pu--ri O^S),
from rasu.
word
of rare occurrence.
12.
tablet
We
bi-li-it
is
ili
most
by a king
IV.
Plate
4,
ii.
Frederick A. Vanderburgh,
28
Lines
7 to
[1912.
Lines 14 to 19 renew
divinity.
im-lm-ur-su-ma a-bu
He
received
him
i-li
name
My
of majesty he
Turn thee
leader!
to him.
u-ur-$a ma-a-i
a$arid-a ih-hi-i-ka
my
names
my
mighty one!
a na-ap~$a-at ka-la
ni-$i i-ti-i-ka
the
life
of all people!
My
ku-um
bi-li
pa-ra-ak-ki
e-1)i-a-tim
a-na
Adornments
bi-ti-i-ka es-si-id
for thy
is
my
petition,
may
ki u-mi ta-la-ka-am
When
im
pa-a$-&i-ru lu-u
the festal table,
li-ri-i$
may
it
front,
u-um-su
be spread on that day!
The king on
at-ta 8i-me-e
Do
mi
it,
may he honor
ik-ri-bi-i-8u
"With long
15
life
his fortune!
thee!
Vol. xxxii.j
ma-ta-tim $u-uk-ni-$a-am
when
29
Si e-pi-i$-$u
subjugate!
it
is
his work,
i-si-ab-ba-$am-ma
in prayer he desireth
it!
i$-ti-i-8u a-li-ik
From him do
$i
That
tu-pu-un ma-Jji-ir-$u
thou go, conquer his opponent!
is
his
2. ta-ni-it-tim,
3. ih-hi-i-ka
same root as
(nfiN),
I.
1.
impv. with
suf.
-ka.
1.
ma-a-i, adj.
from mtiu.
of
5.
im-ma-ti-ia,
6.
ta-at-mi,
I.
8.
I.
same
1.
pret.
from tamu.
1.
e-bi-a-tim
(SHI),
"produce,
gifts/'
probably for
e-si-id,
e-si-id.
u-mi
hi
16.
Si,
personal pronoun.
17. i-nu-$a,
noun with
suf.
a.
y.
Plate
5,
ii.
an
gods.
offense
brother Samas'.
is
Lines 1 to
position
Ningal.
of
3,
Sin.
8,
the exalted
of
Sin
with
Frederick A. Vanderburgh,
30
[1912.
On
ilu
Ml
i-zi-ib
it lay.
it,
ri-M-is-su ik-ka-ar-si
M-ta-am
is-bu-ba-am-ma wa-ta-ar-bi
He
ilu
estranged to her.
is
first
a-wa-u-da-at i-ra-am
Thou
battle.
ilu
sin
it;
his power.
My
reign his
e-li
'ba-e-ru-ti-im us-ta-ab-ni-i-ma
ilat
it
is
formed.
ilu
his property.
father.
from na'alu.
1.
i-ni-lu,
3.
6.
1.
5.
zi-
from bdru.
7'
31
Vol. xxxii.]
YI.
Plate
Lines
6,
1 to 6, confession of Istar.
Lines
vii.
7 to 12,
reprimand
of Bel.
a-at-ma
a-Jia a$-tu
na-as
is-ta-ri-i-tim it-ta-na-al
The goddess
la ag-gi
let
5
ir-bu-um e-kur
a-na-Uu
a-lii
my
I,
te-ri-a-ku a-Jn
brother,
am
of child
by
my
brother,
who
I
* lM
bel
to
my
pa-a-Su i-pu-8a-am-ma
mouth he opened;
Bel, his
ilat
iStar
iz-za-ag-ga-ar a-na la-pa-tim
He mentions the fall of Istar.
Woe
10
is
child,
ilu
i-8a-am
divine Isum!
a-na
ilu
3.
nin-lil
Belit
8amas u-li-id-ma
ama hath borne a
child.
child.
ag-gi,
ilat
iStar, confirmation that i-tala-pa-tim, root lapdtu.
ri-i-tim in line 3 is correctly rendered i
8.
32
* lM
i-8a-am:
Isum appears
[1912.
in proper
into
The Vedic Dual : Part VI, The Elliptic Dual; Part VII,
The Dual Dvandva.
By Dr. SAMUEL GRANT OLIPHANT, Professor in Grove City College, Grove
City, Penna.
Vedas, and
their genesis
and
relationship.
I.
The
elliptic
dual,
or,
as I should
prefer
to
call it
were
ellipsis,
and
Vol.
XXX,
155
ff.
S. O. Oliphant,
34
[1912.
These conclusions find additional corroboration in the infrequency of this dual even in the ancillary Vedic literature,
ways that they are quite conscious of the syllepsis. In ninetynine of the hundred and forty-five instances in the two Yedas
they seem to have taken especial pains that others should not
misunderstand them by taking the words too literally. Their
methods show considerable variety and artistic skill and seem
important enough to warrant a rather full presentation. They
may be subsumed under eight classes, described as follows:
unexpressed member of the syllepsis
follows closely in the context the dual of the expressed member.
Thus mdtdrd in 4 III, 7, l b referring to dydvdprthivi as the
The dual
I.
of the
5,
7d,
b
140, 3
I,
Similar are,
d
matara, and 8 pitror,
d
matara, and 7
pitroh,
,
C
matara,
pitara, and 3
2 C pitroh, and 4 b matara.
C
I, 159, 2
IX, 75,
Thus this phenomenon
,
is
the
syllepsis.
(a)
Mention.
In VIII,
b
27, 2
naktam
I, 140,
it.
3 b , matara, 3 d pituh,
in Panini,
See,
e.
g.
All
specified.
references
are
to
the
elliptic
duals
RV.
unless
is
cited
the
by PWB.
AV. be
list.
for the
particularly
The
Vol. xxxii.j
d
140, 7
a
pitror, 9
Vedic
Dual
35
matu,
C
IV, 5, 10 pitror, 10 matus,
b
a
VIII, 25, 2 mitra (initial in pada), 2 varurio
I,
(also initial
in pada).
Suggestion.
d
the epithet dvimdtd referring to the ardm as
I, 31, 2
of
parents
Agni, suggests the member implicit in the
(b)
C
pitror of 4
b
a
the mention of Aryamd suggests
V, 3, 2 and X, 68, 2
d
the
and
unexpressed memher of ddmpatl in 2
marriage
.
2 C respectively.
and
VIII,
b
52, l ,
yam,
ksoni
suggestive,
is
if
pada by
not metonymic,
the
of
sdr-
connoted
dydus.
b
146, l ,
I,
(c)
3b
explained by
divdh subdndhur janusi prthivydh.
In 'addition to these twelve, three others are listed under
Bare
class
VIII.
vari,
C
65, 8 .
Conversely
we have the
masculines ubhti,
140, 3
X,
in I,
b
.
As dydvd
is
still
IX,
6,
4 b and ubhe
,
expressed member.
sacdbhuvd and udbhidd, heterogeneous attribdhani, seem due to the thought of the dual ndktd.
In I, 113, 2 cd the adjectives amfte, anud and dmindne may
be taken as neuters in a constructio ad sensum with dydvd as
In X,
c
76, l
utives to
equivalent to ahordtre.
syllepsis is
sometimes sug-
8. G. Oliphant
36
gested by
differentiating
oxymoronic
tinctly
[1912.
sometimes with a
adjective,
dis-
effect.
b
123, 7
I,
entiates
find
ndndrupe applied to
dharil
C
sdmyatoh to dhnos in XVI, 8, 22 and sdm caC
ratah predicated of usdsd in VIII, 9, 12 all serving to mark
a distinction between the expressed and unexpressed members
in
XIII,
2,
of the syllepses.
the use
is
of
distributive
appositives or attributives.
(a) Distributive appositives.
I,
a
160, 3
32, 3
X,
b
pita mata ca.
pitroh, 2
C
3
pitror,
jay a patim vahati.
,
b
,
17 C
(?) I, 36,
a
10, 5
X,
X,
X,
17 C
mitra,
medhyatithim
17 d upastutam.
b
85, 32 ,
C
95, 12 ,
c
d
Ill, 33, l
matara, l
vipat chutudri.
C
a
sindhum matftamam
III, 33, 3 matara, 3
d
IV, 55, 3 C ahani, 3 usasanakta.
,
a
III, 31, 17
I,
142, 7
IV,
d
krsne, 16
dyiibhir
aktiibhir.
b
matara, 7 naktosasa.
C
,
4C matara, 3 d dyam
bhuma.
4b dyaur .... ksah.
22,
a
V, 5, 6 matara, 6 C dosam usasam.
C
VII, 2, 5 matara, 6 b usasanakta.
C
VII, 7, 3 matara, 5 C dyaug ca yam
,
X,
X,
X,
1,
I,
a
matara, 7
b
35, 3
prthivi.
dyavaprthivi.
I, 31,
I,
7b
9a
d
pitror, 8
dyavaprthivi.
d
C
C
110, 8
pitara, 6
pitur + 8 mataram.
a
a
5
ll
121,
pitarau,
dyavaksama.
Ill,
3,
ll c
d
pitara, ll
dyavaprthivi.
a
V, 65, 6 mitra,
,
l c,
a
,
varuno,
mitro, 4
l d , mitro.
C
,
mitrasya.
3 b vipagam.
,
The
Vol. xxxii.]
The AV.
9 b , dampatl, 9 e
2,
7C
vadhvai.
d
vadhii, 7
2a
64
2,
lb
2a
(&)
jayam.
C
patnim, 2 patir.
C
dampatl, 63% nan, 63 patir.
d
VI, 120, 3 pitarau,
XX,
patye.
l c , patibhyo,
XIY,
37
d
varuna.
mitrasya, 5
instances belonging here are:
5a
XIV,
Dual
Vedic
a
34, 16 , pitarau,
mataram pitaram
C
mata, 2
va.
pita.
Distributive attributives.
VI,
b
58, l
a
ahanl, l
X,
C
120, 7 ,
a
,
Qukram
yajatam
anyad.
anyad.
I, 146, l
avaram, param.
(=
pitror
dyavaprthivi).
l c carato (dyaiis),
dhruvasya (prthivi)
distributive appositives are sometimes suggested rather
,
(c)
The
than expressed.
VIII, 7, 22 b ksoni, equivalent to dyavaprthivi,
22 b apah (prthivi), suryam (dyaus).
d
VII, 65, 2 dyava, l a sura (dyaiis), 2 b ksitlh (prthivi).
a
VIII, 31, 5 dampatl, 6, 7, 8, 9, passim, suggest the mar,
ried pair.
X, 162, 4 b
poem
2a
I,
122,
matara
c.
X,
37, 2
2C
b
ahoratre.
2b
2C
krsna.
rugati gvetya, 2
d
naktosasa.
ratrl, 3
,
ld,
4d
usasanakta.
starir (barren night).
6a
I,
d
161, 10
heavens.
and 12 b pitara
dyavaprthivi.
dyavaprthivi.
ll a udvatsv asma akrnotana trnam.
ll b nivatsv apah (akrnotana).
,
ll c
S. G. Oliphant,
38
[1912.
12 a bhiivana.
,
14a diva
AV. XIV,
2,
bhumya.
XII,
The
fVI.
Ill,
3,
7d
3,
14d
3,
27
3,
35 C
l a,
_
1?
l b , priya,
pumans,
context of
hymn
passim.
2,
C
C
Ill, 26, 9 pitror, 9 rodasl.
C
d
VII, 6, 6 pitror, 6 rodasyor.
C
IX, 68, 4a matara, 3 mahi apare rajasl.
b
a
IX, 70, 6 matara, 2 ubhe dyava.
,
5b
rodasl.
4 b matara, 4b
rodasl.
IX, 75,
d
d
12
12
rodasl.
IX, 85,
matara,
a
C
9
6
rodasl
X, 11,
pitara,
devaputre.
X, 140, 2 C matara, 2 d rodasl.
VII. The appositive sometimes refers only
member, by name or suggestion.
,
name.
By
(a)
to the expressed
I, 28,
8 C vanaspatl, 6 a vanaspate.
,
7 a , ayaji vajasatama.
4C 5 b ulukhala.
l c , 2 C , 3 C,
X,
\r
79, 4
o oa
'
'
By
X,
matara, 3
matiih.
b
pitror, 7 , pitur parasya.
5-
'
JL, 8, 7
(&)
suggestion.
a
C
39, 12 , ahani, 12 , duhita
12 d
divah (usas).
a
II, 16, 3
b
ksonibhyam, 3 samudraih parvatair.
b
c
l
l
anudha.
X, 115,
matarav,
,
d
124, 5
I,
X,
a
pitror, 3 , divo duhita.
d
31, 10, pitror, 10
VIII.
Two
II a.
I,
or
gamyam.
more of the foregoing may unite
C
159, 2
pitara
into a complex.
3 d matara.
,
2a
l
2 b matur.
pitiir,
dyava yajnaih
prthivi.
The
Vol. xxxii.J
Ha
39
III.
b
140, 3
I,
Dual
Vedic
matara
7 d , pitroh.
3d
pituh, 9% matu.
+ lib +
IX,
VI.
4 b matara
75,
2a
ubha.
2d
pitror,
divah.
4 b rodasi.
,
lib + IV + VII.
d
185, l
I,
4C ubhayebhir ahnam.
a
|5 samgacliamane yuvati.
,
prthivi.
Ill
+ JVa + Va +
b
123, 7
I,
b.
C
ahani, 7
7b
III
+ Va +
visurupe.
7 a,
7C
d
tamo, 7 usah.
c.
a
53, 2
VII,
a
pitara, 2
purvaje.
dyavS yajnaih
dyavaprthivi.
|l
l2 c
l
IV +
yc +
V,
1,
mahi devaputre.
VII.
4C usasa, 4C virupe.
,
2b
4C
l b,
Va +
prthivi.
d
pratar, 2
&
tamaso.
5% agre ahnam.
usasam.
VI.
VI,
d
17, 7
a
matara, 7 ksam,
,
7b
dyam.
7 C , rodasi.
III,
6,
2% rodasi.
IV,
a
56, 5
b
a
dyava, l and 3
dyavaprthivi.
4% rodasi.
I,
C
b
185, 2 5
,
8d
d
pitror, 2
ll a
dyava raksatam
dyavaprthivi.
prthivi.
eti.
8. G. Oliphant,
40
[1912.
3 a rodasi.
,
4b rodasi devaputre.
,
X,
12,
d
,
4 b dyavabhuml.
4b rodasi.
pitar a,
X,
b
b
59, 8 , matara, 7% prthivi, 7 , dyaiir.
8d
dyauh
8, rodasi.
Yc +
prthivi.
VI.
IX,
70, 2
dyava,
double
3,
l b,
to gods
ref.
and men.
purvye vyomana.
4b madhyamasu matrsu.
,
5b
rodasi.
following:
IY + Ya.
XIII,
2,
3b
b
ahanl, 3
nanarupe.
8 d cukro, 8 d tamo.
5 d , ahoratre.
XYI,
8,
22 C ahnos, 22 C samyatoh.
21 C ahoratrayoh.
,
IY +
VII.
VIII,
9,
sam
12 a usasa,
,
caratah.
12 C suryapatnl.
,
Of the
elliptic
unexpressed members
the
in
others.
used.
used in the
AY.
BY.
of three to two.
The
Vol. xxxii.]
41
Vedic Dual.
is
2Elliptic Duals.
The
following alphabetic
complete for both the Rig
list
of these duals
is
believed to be
RV.
adhvaryu
adhvaryii 4- (pratiprasthatr).
to be supplied with dvd in VIII, 72, 7 b
Cited also for QB. 4, 3, 4, 22 and Katj. QS. 5, 5, 24, 26.
(2)
and
C
I, 16, 5 ,
dhanl
(7)
ahan
d
b
123, 7 ; 185, l
I,
12
MBh.
C
55, 3 ;
Y,
a
82, 8
VI,
b
58, l ;
X,
39,
I,
301.
udumbalau
X,
IY,
IV
76.
(ratrl).
;
b
14, 12 .
= usas
usdsd (5)
+ (nakta).
a
a
14, 3
III, 4, 6
C
I, 188, 6 ;
Eel
gaigne,
Ved.
1.
Y,
krsna
4C
VIII,
b
27, 2
(cf.
Ber-
248, n).
1,
feveta,
cf.
6.
VII,
d
90, 3 ).
II, 39, 7
b
;
X,
d
106, 10
as
the
sing,
of
LRY
GRY
ksdmd
in
42
8. G. Oliphant,
[1912.
sistency.
virtue of con-
and
mead", comparing suyavasdd in I, 164, 40 and Sayana's derivation of the word in our passage from the radical ad. In
either case it becomes another allusion to the Agvina as the
great succorers).
Tisoni (4)
'
a
II, 16, 3
(dyaus)
VIII,
ksoni.
22 b
7,
52,
10 b
b
99, 6 .
(ksona, "earth",
VIII, 6, 2.
Bh. P. Ill,
phenomena
dampati + (dampatnl).
ddmpati (7)
d
a
a
C
b
V, 3, 2 VIII, 31, 5 X, 10, 5 68, 2 85, 32
;
dydvd
dydvd
(4)
III,
4b
6,
dyaus
d
113, 2
IV,
C
95, 12
162,
b
37, 2
X,
and the
dyaus
(prthivi).
a
56, 5 .
I, 20,
35, 5
I, 31,
pita + (mata).
d
b
d
a
a
110, 8
111, 1- 161, 10 12
IV, 33, 2 3
C
36, 3
(rbhunam).
9 a 146, l b III, 3, lie; 5, 8 d 18, l b 26, 9 a
7,
a
;
4C
this
pitdrd (49)
5C
VII,
a
121, 5
a
I, 160, 3
I,
C
(Lanman, NI. 43 3 and Grassmann WB. agree that
anomalous a?ra ei/o^/zevov is a neuter form).
VI,
4b
dydvl (1)
(1) in
sky by night.
I,
(prthivi).
d
b
65, 2 ; IX, 70, 2
VII,
6,
6d
(indrasya);
X,
I,
d
124, 5
a
11, 6
a
(suryasya); II, 17, 7
3a
8,
8,
31,
10 C (agnes).
,
(usasas).
(aparimtayas).
7 C, (tritasya).
c
61, l , (pakthasya).
a
34, 9 ;
The
Vol. xxxii.]
d
140, 7
I,
b
C
C
159, 2 185, 2 5
,
Dual
Vedic
6a
c
7, l ,
III,
43
IV,
5,
1O;
a
VII, 53, 2 X, 12, 4 65, 8 (= dyavaprthivi).
VI, 7, 4
d
IV, 41, 7 comparison with mitravaruna.
d
a
b
b
d
a
X, 39, 6 85, 14 106, 4
VII, 67, l
58, 2
Ill, 54, 16
a
II
I
I
d
131, 5
YV.
of the
mdtdrd
(36)
23, 12.
mata
(pita).
122,
prthivi).
IX,
b
18, 5 ,
(=
rodasi).
c
C
Ill, 33, l 3 comparison with vipat chutudri ca.
C
VII, 2, 5 comparison with usasanakta.
,
b
99, 6 ,
VIII,
mitrd
(5)
= mitra
(varuna).
I, 36,
I,
17 C
so
its
The metre
resolution of
mitrdsya in 10 below,
without any reference to varuna makes it more doubtful
whether we have a dual here at all.
a
a
V, 65, 6 VIII, 25, 2
;
b
106, 5
Sayana takes it as
GWB. and LBV. take
as "freunde".
ulukhala + (miisala).
vanaspati (2), metonym
a
and to be supplied also in 7 a with the adjectives
I, 28, 8
dyaji and vdjasdtamd.
gabaldu
X,
14,
(1)
10
b
;
Cabala
(cjama).
(see Bloomfield:
"Cerlerus,
p. 32).
The
foregoing equation is based on AV. VIII, 1, 9
b
color of these hell hounds is stated in BV. X, 114, 12 to
The
44
8. G.
Oliphant
[1912.
be udumbuldu
ab
55, 2
elliptic duals.
AY.
aghnyas + (aghnya).
a metaphor for the bride and groom; if, as
15
takes it, the two oxen that drew the bridal
Kauc,. 77,
it
is
not
an elliptic dual at all.
car,
ahan + (ratrl).
cihani (2)
aghnyaii (1)
XIY, 2, 16 d
if
XIII,
2,
3b ;
usdsd (1)
XVI,
usas
8,
22 C
(nakta).
VIII, 9, 12
ddmpatl (7) == dampati 4- (dampatm).
d
VI, 122, 3
XII, 3, 7 d 14 d 27 C 35 C
.
XIV,
2,
9 b 64b
,
pitdrdu (3)
pita + (mata).
d
VI, 120, 3
XIV, 2, 37% literal.
;
XX,
34,
mdtdrd
(1)
16% figurative
mata
dyavaprthivi (indrasya).
-f (pita).
1,
XIII,
2,
13 b
preceding;
if literal,
dual
if figurative,
is
parents of Agni.
The following are conftnon to both Vedas:
ddmpati,
RV. X,
b
85, 32
AV. XIV,
ll b
2,
pit&ra,
23 a
2,
ll b
II.
The
Vol. xxxii.]
Vedic
Dual
45
We
compound.
may
select
as
in which the
of a tristubh
syllables.
45 4b
?
word
'The appended
list
RV.
syllables intervene;
this class, in
example of
That
this
is
in Vr.
rather
1
Since writing this I have somewhere seen a statement that Wackernagel has suggested this as an additional explanation, of the much mooted
Homeric 'Aicropluve MoAfoye in A, 750. I regret I have no access to Wacker-
nagel's book.
8. G. Oliphant,
46
[1912.
such as pasu vlra (nom.), Yt. 13, 12; pasva viraya (gen.), Yt. 13
10; pasubya vlraeibya (inst.), Y, 6, 32; antard ae&rya ae&ra-
The
of case.
in the
BY.
e. g.
dydva-
ing feeling
siirydqandramasdu, &c.
In our final type the two members are fused into a unit
of inflection of the prior element; e. g.,
indravdyti, pdrjanyavdtd (voc.), &c. The BY. has 120 cases
of this, or nearly 25%; the AY. has 87 cases, or 33%. This
by the complete
loss
is
servatism seems to be
shewn
is
found.
first
their
prepositional particle.
The doubly dualized dvandva also has
Of the 321
its
favorite positions.
The
Vol. xxxii.]
II
Vedic
Dual
47
in its general
Vedas
can
be
reversed
and
dydvdprthivi
only usdsdndktd, parjdnydvdtd
to naktosdsd, vdtdparjanyd and prthividydvd respectively. The
a
last of these is
elp^vov in
<x7ra
BY.
in the
a
Ill, 46, 5
2-
The
tmetic dvandva.
indrd.
b
c
Y, 45, 4 YI, 59, 3 ,-indr& nv agni.
b
l
indra
YI, 60,
yo agni.
a
indra nu pusana.
YI, 57, l
a
indra ko vam varuna.
IY, 41, l
a
indra ha yo varuna.
IY, 41, 2
a
indra ha ratnam varuna.
IY, 41, 3
a
a
indra yuvam varuna.
IY, 41, 4 5
C
indra no atra varuna.
IY, 41, 6
;
b
68, 5
YI,
indra yo
vam
varuna.
X,
a
12, l
dyava ha ksama.
dyava jajiianah prthivi.
2d
dyava gocih prthivi.
l a VII, 53, 1%
dyava yajnaih prthivi.
raksatam
2d
8d
prthivi.
dyava
13 a
dyava cid asmai prthivi.
20, dyava nah prthivi.
b
I, 63, l
I,
143,
I, 159,
I,
185,
II, 12,
II, 41,
48
G. Oliphant,
8.
b
V, 43, 2
[1912.
X,
X,
46, 9%
d
91, 3
I, 61,
14b
nakta.
C
I. 73, 7 ,
C
42, 5
VII,
mitrd.
VI,
mitrayor an
51, 1,
eti
priyam varunayoh.
in I, 147, l c
58, 3
VIII, 103,
7C
toke tanaye.
IX,
dhvasrayoh purusantyor.
VII, 66, 1*, mitrayor varunayoh.
b
V, 62, 3
mitrarajana varuna, a unique variant and
of hybrid between the types.
,
III.
The doubly
sort
dualized dvandvas.
a
*agriiparjanydu, VI, 52, 16
a
d
a
a
agnlsomau, I, 93, l 5 10 ll
.
agnisoma,
agnisoma,
I,
a
a
a
C
a
93, 2 3% 4 6 7 9% 12
I, 93,
8a
X,
66, 7
C
*drndcitraratM, IV, 30, 18
a
*indrakutsd, V, 31, 9
indrdparvatd,
I,
a
.
a
49, 5
C
*indrdbrahmanaspatl, II, 24, 12
a
a
b
indrdvarund, I, 17, 7 8 9
aira
b
a
b
a
a
indrdbrhaspati, IV, 49, l 2 3 4 6
c
19, l
a
132, 6 .
d
35, l
indrahfhaspdtl, IV,
X,
C
122, 3
indrdpusdnd, VII,
l c, 2C, 3 a ;
Veda
cited.
IV, 41,
l d ; 42, 9 b ,
10 C
VI,
68,
The
Vol. xxxii.]
4C
7 b , 8*;
59, 3
83,
b
b
d
d
d
83, l , 2 , 3 , 7 , 9
VIII,
bb
I, 17,
VI,
a
10% ll VII, 82,
68,
l a, 3C
7b ;
4 d 5%
,
b
b
a
a
59, l , 2 , 6 , 7 .
VIII,
49
indrdvarund,
4a
d
a
82, 8 9
VII,
Dual
Vedic
b
indravaruna, VI, 68, 3
b
35, l
VII,
b
82, 2
C
b
indravarunau, VI, 68, 6 VII, 83, 8
a
5
indrdvarunau, VII, 83,
;
C
85, 2
l c.
155, 2
I,
99, 5
VII,
IV,
4a
55,
b
69, l
VI,
3a
4b 5% 6 a
,
7a ;
a
.
indravisnu, IV,
4b
2,
C
;
7 C.
usdsdndktd,
b
122, 2
I,
6b
4b
186,
X, 36,
VII, 2,
17 a
IV,
30,
turvagayadu,
a
dydvdhsdmd, VIII, 18, 16
41, 7
b
II, 3, 6
a
;
70, 6
b
31, 5
110, 6
IV,
III,
d
55, 3 ;
V,
b
.
dydvdksdmd,
C
31, 2
X,
5C
I, 96,
b
36, l
b
102, 2
b
121, ll
b
140, 13
8b
8,
VI,
b
d
C
a
a
160, 5
159, 5
185, ll
II, 32, l
VI,
dydvdprthivi, I, 31, 8
a
C
b
d
d
3
l
3
2
2
50,
VII, 52,
53,
VIII, 42,
IX, 69, 10 d X,
d
a
10 a
67, 12
93, l
;
I, 35, 9
dydvdprthivi,
3d
160, l
32, 10
C
55, 7
10 b
a
37, 6
10
8b
58, 8
d
;
15
1,
81, 5
C
45, 12
81,
d
125, 6
C
47, 8
d
149, 2
dydvdbhumi, IV,
4b
mitrdvarund,
Vol.
I,
64,
14a
92, ll
a
;
31,
7b
b
;
C
65, 8 ; 66,
110, 9
a
;
a
4, 5
l c,
1, 7*; 2,
d
81, 3
C
96, 16 ;
75,
IX,
c
d
35, l ; 36, l ;
4C 6 C 9 a
,
70,
b
a
113, l , 5 ; 114,
6, 7
b
X,
12,
4b
d
113, 3
X,
b
142, 7
a
65, 9
IX,
5,
6C
b
.
I.
f
f
C
122, 6, 15 ; 137, l 3
XXXII. Part
a
c
112, l ; 115, l ,
a
VII, 62, 4
a
96, 5
d
63, 9
a
*prthividydvd, III, 46, 5
I, 15,
ll d
a
d
C
III, 3,
25, 3
26, 8
30, 4 ;
C
a
b
d
d
54, 6
56, l 3
V, 47, 2 ; 51, ll
X,
d
parjdnydvdtd, VI, 50, 12
*mdtdrdpitdrd, IV,
C
a
61, 8 ; 101, 3
dydvdbMmi, X, 65,
*dhumcumuri, VI, 20, 13 b
mitrdvarund,
b
55, l
a
ndktosdsd, I, 13, 7
89, 6
42 d
97,
82, l
a
a
VI, 18, 15 44, 24 70,
C
b
d
l
VIII, 22, 5 48, 13
44,
2,
14, 2
IV,
a
35, 5 ;
a
14a
52,
d
C
63, 2 ; 83, 8
II,
VII,
68, 10
d
b
b
d
a
152, l 3 7 ; 153, l
4
?
3b ;
8. O. Oliphant,
50
C
II, 27, 5
C
29, 3 ; 31,
a
47, 7 ; 51,
62, 2
a
3% 9
63, l
5d
d
63, 5
64,
IV, 39, 2 5 V,
4a 69, 3 C 4d VI,
,
l c ; 60, 2 a , 3 C ; 61, 3 a 6 b
52,
50, l
VII, 36, 2
C
C
C
C
3
4a
2
4
2
65,
64,
,
4% 5
a
111, 62, 16
4;
41,
67,
;
14a
!;
a
[1912.
62,
a
101, 3 ;
X,
a
VIII, 72, 17
a
C
51, 2 ; 132, 2 .
b
mitrdvarund, V, 63, 2
mitrdvarund,
56, 7
10 b
b
41, l
49 b
b
63, 3
a
;
d
42, 5
108, 14
a
C
71, 9 ; 75, 5 ; 111,
VI,
mitravarunau,
93,
6b
64, 5
122, 9
mitrdvarundu, I, 2, 8
2 C ll b VII, 60, 12 b 61, 2 a
,
b
c
11, l ; 49, l
b
VIII, 23, 30
61, 17
X,
C
23, 5
9;
I, 2,
V, 46, 3
125, l
C
III, 20, 5
b
67, l ;
IX,
7,
8a
VII,
42 b
97,
33,
,
c
.
l a ; 62, 9 C ; 63, 6 a ;
V, 41,
VI,
67,
lc
X,
b
VII, 35, 4
b
a
35, l ; 167, 8 ;
I,
93, 6
4a
25,
4C
VIII, 101,
*giinasirau,
a
57, 5
IV,
C
94, 2 ;
surydmasd, VIII,
C
64, 3
X,
10 d
68,
C
92, 12
b
93, 5
a
.
a
a
a
74, l , 2 , 3 .
somdrudrd, VI,
somdrudrdu, VI,
4b
74,
AV.
agnavisnu, VII,
agmsomd,
I, 8,
a
a
29, l , 2 .
2d
XVIII,
13, 5
indrdpusand, VI,
indrdpusand,
3, l
indrdsomd,
XIX,
a
,
14a
2a
~6 a
10, l
;
IX
10,
b
usdsandkta, V, 12, 6
9,
a
4, l
XIX,
VIII,
>;
indrdsomd, VIII,
d
10, l
XIX,
indravarund,
53 a
a
agriisomau, VI, 54, 2
agnisomdu, III,
2,
7 C.
c
.
C
27, 8 ;
VI,
3,
3b
dydvdprthivi, II,
31, 4;
8, 3;
VIII,
IV,
6,
55, 1;
2,
14;
1,
2;
4; 10,
18;
26, 7; 30, 5;
18;
8, 21,
V,
12, 1; 29, 5;
V,
26;
1.
14, 12.
III, 4, 5; 15, 2;
VII,
22;
IX,
VI,
3, 2;
20; 4, 10;
X,
7,
35;
The
Vol. xxxii.]
8,
XI,
39;
XIV,
1,
dyavabliumi,
XIII,
2;
7,
3, 2;
XIX,
54;
51
1, 5,
XVIII,
31 b
1,
a
4a
I, 20,
2C
mitrdvdrund, III,
a
3, 12
Dual
Vedic
VIII,
IX,
4b
C
2, 7 ;
23
10,
a
2, l .
XI,
b
;
a
11, 6 .
XIX,
b
16, l ;
IV,
c
30, l ;
XIV,
1,
XVIII
54;
mitrdvarundu,
a
III, 25, 6 ;
a
29, l ;
IV,
a
32, 3
VI,
XIII, 1, 31
a
a
C
a
a
mitrdvdrunau, IV, 29, 7 V, 24, 5
25, 4
VI, 89, 3
132, 5
b
b
XIII, 1, 20
XVI, 4, 7; XIX, 10, 4
a
somdrudrd, VII, 42, l a 2
somdrudrdu, V, 6, 5 C 6 C 7 C
The instances in which there is a loss of numerical concord
mitrdvarundu, IV, 29, 6
weak
in the
cases are
b
b
d
V, 49, 5
X, 3, 7 35, 2 a
divdsprthivyos, R,V. II, 2, 3
Those in which there is a loss of concord in case are
;
AV. XII, 4, 26 a
a
indrdvdrunayos, RV. I, 17, l
dytivdprthivibhydm, AV. V, 9, 7;
agnisomdbhydm,
VII, 102,
1;
XI,
3,
XIX,
33;
17, 5.
mitrdvarundbhydm,
8, 23.
25 C
RV.
*vdtdparjanya,
X,
surydcandramdsd,
10
66,
I,
b
.
C
102, 2
X, 190, 3
surydcandramasdu, V, 51, 15
Here, too, there is loss of case concord in the weak cases:
.
indrdpusnos,
I,
somdpusdbliydm,
d
162, 2
d
II, 40, 2
AV.
*bhavdrudrdu, XI,
2,
14
C
a
.
X,
1,
23 a
XI,
6,
9a
XII,
4,
surydcandramasdu, VIII,
2,
15 d
XI,
3,
2b
6,
5b
4*
17 C
52
8. G. Oliphant.
Weak
[1912.
d
vdtdparjanydyos, VI, 93, 3 .
b
XI, 3, 34.
surydcandramasdbhydm, VI, 128, 3
d
5
29,
III,
surydmdsdyos,
The vocatives of these words are naturally not indicative of
;
preceding.
V. The dvandva in
form.
its final
KV.
b
b
b
b
IV, 46, 3 4 5 C , 6% 7
135, 5 ; II, 41, 3
C
d
b
C
b
47, 4
VII, 90, 5 6 91, 2 4 5 6 .
b
a
3 a 139, l c VII, 90, 7 b 91, 7 b X,
23, 2
indravdyd, I, 14, 3
indravdyu,
I, 2,
b
65, 9 ; 141,
indrdgm,
59,
4a
I,
X,
4a
b
C
108, 1% 2 , 3 ,
d
161, l
4 d 5% 7 a
13 a
a
b
d
b
109, 5 6 7 8
,
VI,
b
b
b
d
a
C
2 a 5 C 6a
9a
III, 12, l
indrdgm, I, 21, 5 6 109, l 2 4
a
d 7 a 10 a
C
C
a
b 7a
b
6
8
l
9
15
3
V, 27,
VI, 59,
60,
VII, 94, l
8C 9 C
,
9C
lc
VIII, 38,
a
b
3 b 4C 139, 9*; III, 12, 4C V, 46, 3 a 86,
indragni, I, 21, l 2
b
d
d
a
2
VI, 60, 14 VII, 35, l VIII, 40, 4
X, 125, l d 161, 4 d
b
C
a
X, 116, 9; 128, 9 b
indragnibhydm, I, 109, 3 VIII, 40, 5 12
,
b
C
40, 8
indragnyos, VIII, 38, 10
d
a
rksdmObhydm, X, 85, ll 114, 6
;
*sd$andnct$ane,
X,
X,
90,
*viQvamitrajamadagnl,
a
p&rjanyavdta, VI, 49, 6
d
167, 4
d
.
b
,
*satyanrte, VII, 49, 3
In the following instances the douhle dual of indrdgnl is
practically restored by the metrical resolution.
comparison
.
hy side.
indrdgnl, VI, 60, 13*.
a
indragm, V, 86, l VI,
b 6a
59, 2
,
VIII, 40,
a
60, 7 ;
VII, 93,
l b,
4C
b
indrdgni, V, 86, 4
b
a
X, 65, 2
40, 3
;
8a 9 a
VI,
60,
4C 5 b VII,
,
a
indrdgnibhydm, V, 86, 6
AV.
*aJcsujdldbhydm, VIII,
8,
18C .
*aghaQansaduh$ansdbhyam, XII,
2,
2a
d
b
93, 3 ; 94, 10 ;
VIII,
The
Vol. xxxii.j
*arkdgvamedhdu, XI,
6b
23 C
XI,
a
ahordtrdbhydm, VI, 128, 3
8,
e
,
7b
20 b
5,
d
32 C
2, 5
XII,
53
7C.
7,
8,
ahordtre, X, 7,
9 b 36 d 52 b ; 2, 49 a
Dual
Vedic
XIII,
2,
5%
6,
7 b ; 7,
XV,
6, 6;
43 b
XIV,
14 d
18,
2,
XII,
4a
40 b
1,
XIX,
XV,
ahordtrayos,
XVI,
6, 6;
9, 3
*dddnasamddndbhydm, XI,
a
*indravdyu, III, 20, 6
21 C
8,
b
d
IX, 1, 12 C
indrdgm, III, 11, l
C
indrdgni, XIII, 1, 31
b
C
d
C
a
III, 3, 5
V, 7, 6
IV, 30, l
VI, 104, 3
indrdgni, I, 35, 4
a
d
d
a
C
132, 4
VIII, 1, 2 16
3, 19
2, 21<; IX, 2, 9
X, 1, 21 C
C
a
b
a
C
XI, 8, 5 XIV, 1, 54 XIX, 10, l 16, 2 20, l
.
IX,
10 b
3,
12
1,
indrdgnibhydm, V,
indragnyos,
XVI,
8, 24.
c
*uchocanapra$ocandu, VII, 95, l
C
C
3
4C
2
unmocanapramocane, V, 30,
.
XIV,
*rsdmObhydm,
1,
ll a
C
*kapotoluJcabhydm, VI, 29, 2
*paldldnupaldldu, VIII, 6, 2
d
*pitdputrdu, VI, 112, 2
a
.
prdndpdndu, III,
a
a
11, 5 , 6
a
13
5,
24
7,
prdndpdndbhydm,
25
b
VII, 53, 5
XVI,
4% 26
8,
II, 28,
4d
a
;
VIII,
XVI,
2,
ll a
X,
7,
34a
XI,
4, 7.
a
*bodhapratibodhdu, V, 30, 10
XIX,
*brahmardjanyabhdm,
d
*rodhacakre, V, 1, 5
C
C
vydnoddndu, XI, 8, 4 26
b
53, 2
VII,
4, 5
32, 8.
vrlhiyavdu, VIII,
2,
vrihiyavdbhydm, X,
*satydnrte,
I, 33,
2b
4,
6,
24d
13 a XII,
;
1,
42 a
XX,
*sadohavirdhdm, XII,
The number
18 a XI,
1,
38 a
of a7ro
thus employed.
54
S.
G. Oliphant,
[1912.
III.
What
is
dvandva?
What
Diametrically
questions.
The
dual?
elliptic
What
of the dual
between them?
traditional
elliptic
name
by
or
whole number of
represent the one
its
Indo-European, as shown
Greek dual
ro/cije
Svo>,
duals
elliptic
and
and the
syllepsis,
if
applicable to
satdyus
(sc.
asti
may warrant
(ace. du.)
the
pu~
&rdmca.
2
Surviving in this meaning in the Spanish
informs me.
3
los padres, as
34) to be
Dr. C. J.Ogden
from *ptevas
= Greek
The
Vol. xxxii.]
Vedic
Dual
55
by an easy figure may be the parents of the sacrifice. Mornand evening, a necessarily complement al pair, may be
imagined as parents, and in fact are actually so called in more
than one Vedic passage (e. g., I, 142, 7 C V, 5, 6 b VII, 2, 5 C
b
VIII, 99, 6 ). If Bloomfield is right in identifying the hounds
of Yama with the sun and moon, the elliptic duals udumbaldu
and Qabdldu, admit the same explanation. Only mitrd remains
and IV, 41, 7 d shows that mitrdvdrund are compared to pitdrd.
Thus one syllepsis and its analogical and figurative inclusions
account for every elliptic dual in the Vedas and also for the
few others cited from the grammarians and lexicographers.
This is the whole story for Sanskrit and for Avestan with its
ing
unique
elliptic
are
doubtful.
Aiavrc, so ingeniously
dual.
Spora-
cited.
Some
XXIII,
not
accepted
Europeanism of the
elliptic
and
its
1 There
were, for instance, two Cereres, one native, one imported. The
former was the daughter of Caelus and Vesta and wife of Sicanus, king
of the Siculi. She taught the Siculi the use of grain. Also Proserpina
is
with Terra,
Cupidines.
Luna and
Cf.
also
identified
plurals Veneres,
S. G. Oliphant,
56
[1912.
An
example
like
RV.
bc
Ill, 7, l
sam
carete,
is
on
its
jection.
of dual.
of the
compound is undoubtedly, indisputably pro-ethnic in IndoEuropean and has a far wider range than can be traced for
is a simple asyndeton.
the
Vedic
turvagam yadum,
by
turvagesu yadusu, Avestan Vand&rvmainiS Ardjataspo, Lithuanian tetes mates, Lettish mi/ch-au/as, Old Bulgarian bratft
the
elliptic
dual.
Its
obvious
origin
to
Vedic.
The
latter
is
common
to all the
Indo-European group.
The
Vol. xxxii.]
The general
loss
57
Vedic Dual.
less
demonstrable.
We
of Vedic
we
i/or?/*t>a,
It
is
distinctively
now
in the other,
This
strictly
hieratic
though
variant
it is
now
in one class,
Aryan.
it
became propagative
The
practically to
double dual is not due to a
somewhat
after
the
manner
It presents
Newark, RJ.
THE chdyandtaka
is
skrit
least
seven
this category
of Subhata,
belong at
Ramadeva's
bay, 1900; cf. also Schuyler, 85). This is the earliest extant
play of its type. According to its prastdvand, it was produced
during the reign of Tribhuvanapaladeva, a Chaulukya king of
12421243
(Bendall,
JRAS,
1898,
who
ruled in Gujarat
229230,
Catalogue of
in
the British
1 This
translation was originally presented to the Society in 1906.
Almost immediately afterward I learned that Professor Richard Pischel
was working on the drama, with special reference to the longer recension.
am
various readings of doubtful or difficult passages," it seemed to me presumptuous to issue my translation, especially as he proposed to give one
in his own edition. Professor Pischel's death so sore a loss to Sanskritists
Dutangada, at
lation
may
serve to give
literary worth.
Vol. xxxii.]
59
Saiva temple at Devapattan or Somnath in Kathiawar, Bombay (Bendall. JRAS, loc. cit.- Forbes, 147148). The exact
time of year at which the play was produced is given by the
In
his
Das
7),
1243.
altindische
many Dutditgadas
summary
recht,
Catalogus Catalogorum,
i,
257;
ii,
of these
55, 205;
iii,
as there
cf.
Auf-
55); but
in
present translation is based. Of the longer recension, as represented by a manuscript of the India Office, Eggeling writes
this version
his
sources
6ekhara, Bhavabhuti,
Dutdngada
is
and
divided,
three scenes; and from a comparison of it with the correspond108, 123) it would
ing portions of the Rdmdyana (vi, 41, 107
seem that
its
The meaning
Wilson
2
Specimens of the Theatre of the Hindus, ii,
390) supposed it to denote 'the shade or outline of a drama,'
and that the Dutdngada 'was perhaps intended to introduce
a spectacle of the drama and procession, as it is otherwise
(Select
difficult to
its
Louis H. Gray,
60
have
[1912.
Levi (Le Theatre indien, 241 f.) dubiously sugde 1'expliquer par "ombre de drame"
si les regies de la grammaire ne s'opposaient a cette analyse
du compose chaya-nataka. Elles admettent du moms une exeffected.'
gests:
'On
serait tente
is
in miniature];
cf.
for
his
5:
called
set
(cf.
Pischel, 19f.).
suggestion has been made by RajendraMa Mitra (Catalogue of Sanskrit Manuscripts in the Library of his Highness
the Maharaja of Bikaner, 251) that the Dutaiigada 'was evident-
The
ly
Vol. xxxii.]
Dramatic Literature,
i,
108,
.237238;
cf.
61
also
Gayley, Re-
lala
Mitra be taken
still
more
strictly,
find its
and
neda,
Cervantes,
it
mode
as in
would forbid us
(loc.
on which is based the brief note of Klein, op. tit., iii, 369)
and by Aufrecht (Catalogus Codicum Sanscriticorum Biblio-
cit.,
to Subhata's
some extent as
play,
his model.
501
6th
series,
x,
172; Bastian,
Eeisen in Siam, 328, 503 504; Moura, Royaume de Cambodge,
ii, 444
458; P. W. K. Miiller, Nang, siamesische Schattenspielfiguren, supplement to Internationales Archiv fur Ethnographie,
vii;
Louis H. Gray,
62
these
The
[1912.
source
of the
Rama
elaboration
of
its
dramaturgy, we gain
In Java the
Kama
little
light
on the
be treated in the
cycle may
Dutdngada.
dramatic categories of the wayang purwd, a shadow play produced by puppets of buffalo leather; the wayang topeng and
the wayang wong, produced by masked and unmasked men
respectively, and the wayang beber, in which pictures are un-
rolled
corresponds very probably to the Sanskrit sutrahis name seems to signify merely 'stroller,
and
it has been suggested that he was primaristrolling player,'
a
who
rendered
ly
priest
worship to the ghosts represented by
Hazeu,
9),
dhdra, although
in
in
der
Welt-Liter at ur
In conclusion a word may be added regarding the remaining Sanskrit plays classed as chdydnatakas. The Harid(y)uta
is anonymous and of uncertain date, but is clearly an imitation
of the
scenes,
Vol. xxxii.]
63
of the
106
(p.
108).
parinaya
of
is
still
shorter.
An
is
given
by Eggeling
The
241).
THE DUTANGADA.
DRAMATIS PERSONAE.
IN THE INDUCTION.
The Stage-Manager.
Vildsavati, an Actress.
IN THE PLAY.
Rdma, a Prince
of India.
Sard.
Raksasi.
Demons.
Sitd.
Louis H. Gray,
64
ACT
(Induction,
[1]
[1912.
I.
Invocation.)
May
And
The
And,
brides of
further,
How
Did
men know
And that
He brake
Stage-Manager.
wings.)
(Enter an Actress.)
[2]
Actress.
Here I am,
husbarfd.
May my
lord
tell
what
is
to
be done!
Stage- Manager.
who
3
own hands,
Ramayana
i,
67).
1622).
4 The modern Adam's
Bridge between India and Ceylon.
5 The
bija, or allusion to the subject-matter of the entire drama
iv,
(cf.
A Chaulukya
(12421243;
7
monarch
of Anhilvad,
who
see Introduction).
incarnation),
Vol. xxxii.]
65
The undertaking
is
excellent,
husband!
Voice (within).
Upon
Suvela's
Who
for
what
(Exeunt.)
(Enter
Rama
Rama
Good Laksmana,
(to Laksmana).
The ocean's passed, and now the monkey-host
Hath swallowed up the demon-capitol;
While I that speak have played the man to-day,
Aided by Fate, or by yon mighty bow.
[3]
Laksmana.
Noble
sir,
what advantage
is
to a coward's soul?
Vali.
Sugrlva, who, after Vali's death, married Tara, his brother's widow.
The
first scene,
is
based on Rdmdyana,
58-73.
Vol.
XXXII.
Part
I.
vi, 41,
Louis H. Gray,
66
[1912.
And, furthermore,
While half thy
And
And wax
let
2
Against that mighty fiend whose necks are ten,
And yet this flesh our wonder doth reveal; 3
But thou
thyself, in
Curtailest thine
own
What
Or
Or
head, speaks).
4
message shall I bear to Lanka's gates?
mighty hosts
for thee?
[4]
And what
Rama.
Friend,
Swift haste thee now,
say:
361; ii, 130) or from the H\topadea (ed. Peterson, i, 22), and repeated
in Sanskrit anthologies (see Bohtlingk, Indische Spruche, 1255). Durga-
i,
it
is
Dutdtiffada.
2
Havana.
Of course an
allusion to the familiar 'horripilation' constantly menThe reference to Vali's deeds of prowess
Lanka
yana
vi, 41,
61
72.
The Bombay
editors
Rama
in
Rdmdwho
Catalogus Catalogorum,
i,
Vol. xxxii.]
67
Thou
was
afar;
Angada.
deal.'
Sire,
fall,
life
of Vali, good!
or death.
hand
The
And
Come
by the
look
sire,
then!
forests
sea,
adorned
(Exeunt.)
(Enter
I hear that
[5]
And
Rama
mine isle,
and
heard,
naught
is
is
seen. 3
And, furthermore,
How
comes
it
Of my grim
(ii,
37
of the
1
is
based on Rdmdyana,
vi,
7490.
41,
2
or
An
Meghanada (Rdmdyana
3
*
5
vii,
vii,
27
by Kavana and
29).
5*
Louis H. Gray,
68
[1912.
Mine arms
moon
eclipse the
of Indra's pride,
And
Mandodari
(aside).
doom
the tree of
Upon
(Aloud.)
Wonderful, wonderful!
The surging
cries of wrathful
monkeys ring
Within thy house of dalliance, my lord!
Havana (contemptuously). O, queen, sweet is thy speech by
nature, but enough, enough of this terror at the sound of
What
Mandodari.
Still,
[6]
Havana
My queen,
not be, since she by force was stolen
And was not given back to him straightway;
But lo, to-day the surging sea is bound,
It
may
Havana
(to
weeping.)
Friend
Vibhisana).
Vibhisana,
what
speech
is
thine?
Sire, lord of Lanka, consider well!
twain
be more than men, and these great apes
They
Be more than members of the monkey-folk;
Vibhisana.
Behind
for
free,
doom
of
for
the race of
Raksasas!
Havana
(angrily
family,
Ah
in terror.)
fall
(Seizes
him
Vibhisana
69
Vol. xxxii.]
Malyavan
sider well
whether
evil
sana.
Ha!
Havana.
Art
terror, stands
Havana
thou,
like
too,
to
him?
(to
in
(Malyavan,
silent.)
my
capital,
2
join that hermit, and make thy skill in ethics known! I
will not slay thee again! 3
Vibhisana. What needs must hap doth not happen otherwise!
(Exit.
Prahasta.
Sire,
llama's envoy.'
Havana
[7]
(contemptuously).
[7]
'I
monkey, saying:
am
(Enter
Ahgada
(looking at
Havana, aside).
Havana, that fain would wreck the world!
But in his groves shall Rama launch his darts!
Ahgada
'Tis
(Aloud.)
Ye
Who
He
is
That
fills
(Several
Haksasas assume
the form of
Havana.)
Ravans
O
In sooth we heard that thou wert multiform;
The one subdued by Kartavlrya's arm 5
Another given as food to dancers vile
By wanton slave-girls of the Daitya lord;
And to a third 'tis direst shame to speak;
How many
thou fiend?
art thou,
Who
Havana
Who
2
3
Rama,
Vibhisana,
second blow.
if
struck
from
by Ravana
Comp. Mahdviracarita
See Visnupurdna
iv, 11.
included
scene.
once,
would never
live to receive
Louis H. Gray,
70
[1912.
Angada.
And
I,
now,
son.
And, furthermore,
the messenger of mighty Ram
That slew my sire, whose valor thou dost know.
am
Ravana
[8]
What
(to Angada).
doeth Rama?
Naught.
Afigada.
And
Ravana.
He
now
yet but
naught!
Angada.
Ravana.
Why
Angada.
Ravana.
Angada.
Who
Ravana
(in alarm).
What now
his lap
is
Rama's course?
Angada. Upon
Yea, and the foot of him who Aksa slew, 2
Then on a golden deer-skin soft reclines;
And glanceth at the arrow keen and straight
By Laksman made
to_ slay
the demon-host,
gesticulating contempt,
Prahasta.)
As my
Prahasta.
(Exit
Prahasta]
False Maithill.
lord commands.
enter a
Victory, victory,
my
Ravana.)
false!
thou knowest
yana
3
spouse!
v, 47).
Maithill
is
Ravana.
Vol. xxxii.]
[9]
Angada
in
(aside,
sorrow).
of her
who
Would
way
be
Havana.
sent
Lady daughter
by Rama!
even Janaka's
daughter
go the
ill
71
So
'0,
woe?
And
like the
2
(Enter, with a toss of the curtain, a
RaksaSl^)
Raksasl.
Heard
Ravana
(in distress).
Ah
Ill
Angada
[10]
Ravana.
What
Angada.
evil deeds,
Wherein thy
And
Ravana
of thy
Raghu's son!
Thou knave
(angrily).
false statement to
make Rama
Rama.
retire
from Lanka.
Louis H. Gray,
72
[1912.
Angada.
To
fell
And
And
chill
hand;
glaive?
Havana
me!
Angada
(anxious to be gone).
And
He
2
3
form of a man
4
his sword.
Celestial musicians,
An
An
obscure allusion.
allusion to Havana's victory over the semi-divine Yaksas at
Kailasa, a peak of the Himalayas (Ramayana, vii, 14 15).
Vol. xxxii.]
shaken
pillar of
73
of lotuses!
too,
He
Yea, furthermore,
Thou
Since he
Yet, more than this, we know the true nature of thine attachment to the service of the Lord, 3 but thou art proud in
vain!
Why
cruel:
Which he
5
destroyed in olden days of sin.
Hearken, thou ten-faced fiend! we shrink not in terror of
the words which come from the hole within thy face!
(Exit Aiigada.)
Voice (within).
Thou
And
Swift
Havana
being slaughtered!
(Enter
slain
by
limbs.)
Rama (Ramayana
i,
26).
who
18).
iva.
fifth
head
Louis H. Gray,
74
[1912.
Demons.
shame
'Tis
hands!
isle.
Havana
out
Havana
(Enter
terribly.)
or without
Hemangada
Rama!
brides
will
be with-
(Exit.)
wandering in
killed
The
lord of
A
[is]
headless thing
Citrangada.
by
ly
this
upon a
Good
hero's couch.
friend, long
have we travelled
fearless-
path of sky!
(Loud noise within.)
spouse
keen.
Bard.
Celestial bards.
The
108.
Comp.
(Pickford's translation,
3
4
Rama.
demon slain by Durga.
ancestor of
5
135148).
Bhur, bhuvah, svah, a cry of mystic power as early as the Yajur Veda.
Kakutstha, king of Ayodhya, was the father of Raghu, and thus an
Vol. xxxii.]
75
And
set
by
Rama
Citrangada
(to
Hemangada,
wonderingly).
G-ood Hemangada,
whom
gods and demons bow through the might of his exceeding majesty. But he who, in ages past, in his devotion
to the foe of cities,
all
Who
And
Siva's bride,
3
thought the world, yea, and its Lord, his own,
fain would lay his hands on Brahm's five heads,
What
Are now
defiled
'Where
There-
is
but wealth
is
Siva.
Siva.
An
obscure allusion.
in the
Louis H. Gray,
76
[1912.
Voice (within).
Its banner-pole all gashed with Rama's darts,
Its charioteer a-faint in streams of blood,
The
And
Of Ravan's
To Lanka,
now comes
steeds
stalls.
(Again within.)
And
thou, mahout
Fast
tie
And
Rama
nigh!
1
(crowned with flowers, going to Ayodhya, to Sltd, pointing out
Hew
Rama
Comp. with
himself.
this
speech
of the Mahdvlracarita.
Rdmdyana
vi,
123, 3
15,
and the
last act
Vol. xxxii.]
[15]
And
delight,
flavor sweet.
77
The
THE
traditional
Traditional View.
of the Jewish
views
D.,
grammarians on the
hy Baer in his article on "Die
article, which forms the basis of
set forth
this
mary tone
is
to
be
sign
is
to
He
in outline as follows.
I.
The
light
Metheg
(bp ana).
1, 26).
will
Die Methegsetzung nach ihren uberlieferten G-esetzen darMerx's Archiv fur wissenschaftliche Erforschung des alien
Testaments, Bd. 1, Halle 1869 pp. 5567 and 194207.
2
S. Baer,
gestellt,
in
The Hebrew
Vol. xxxii.]
e)
e.
rrn,
f) in
g.,
n\T (Gen.
79
Metliey.
consonant of
initial
rpn,
i, 29).
e.
g.,
D^ns,
and
in
feftf.
II.
ino).
a)
b)
e. g.,
^n
(Ex.
2, 7).
c)
the
first
syllable
or Segol,
accent,
g.,
e.
the
before
is
ro^nn&n (Gen.
marked by a
disjunctive
3, 24).
e)
g)
with the
junctive accent,
with the Pathah of \TJ
and
before
Maqqeph and
with Zarka.
B. with Shewa in the
initial syllable.
1.
a)
word
syllable,
1 The
Metheg with n. interrogative is regularly placed to the right of
the vowel to distinguish the n from the article, except in the poetical
books:
5
cf.
Baer, op.
That Pathah
cit.,
p. 196,
ft.
nt.
1.'
is
shown by
Frank R. Blake,
80
when they
are
accented
[1912.
great Rebia
Vl^S * (Ps.
with
e. g.,
25, 2).
c)
d)
2.
and the
syllable,
D^nsrnl
b) with the
first
(Gen. 10,
Shewa
when
tone
e.
g.,
14).
Darga
as
Kadma
e.
g.,
e. g., ll
yn&'l (Gen. 24, 9).
with
a
final
b)
guttural consonant of a word closely
connected by Maqqeph or conjunctive accent with a
word beginning with a guttural, e. g., *)DDn yoa (Gen.
syllable,
44, 2).
of certain
dissyllabic
words,
e.
g.,
must be remembered that they were not the same men who
1 When
Metheg is affixed to a composite Shewa
Shewa and vowel as here, cf. Baer, op. cit., p. 202,
it is
ft.
placed between
nt.
Vol. xxxii.]
81
prominent uses are practically unknown, e. g., the use of MeThere is no reason, theretheg before a Hateph (I. B. d) 2
.
why
fore,
cause
is traditional, its
acceptance or rejection will depend
on
its ability to
largely
explain the actual phenomena.
As a matter of fact the traditional classification of the
it
the
made
the
uses of
Metheg
is
certainly to be desired.
The underlying
Principle.
The general principle which underlies all the uses of Metheg, according to the traditional explanation, is that of emphasis,
but the emphasis is certainly not always an actual emphasis,
1
the
Cf. C.
Hebrew
Frank R. Blake,
82
[1912.
indicated by Baer's statement 1 cf. I. B. b. The fundamental use of Metheg seems to have been, not necessarily to
emphasize, but to call special attention to; it was thus a sort
as
is
c)
an accent, or accented
Metheg used
syllable.
Metheg used
to call attention to a
Vowel.
likely to
is
thus marked
may be
This Metheg
ing cases,
(1) It
is
long or short.
employed with a long vowel in the follow-
viz.:
is
before
2, 16):
Maqqeph,
e.
g.,
final
*h
r\&
(2)
]arrfy (Gen.
Maqqeph
a Sere regu-
larly becomes Segol; cases like KJ'D^ (Gren. 47, 29) and
jan ^Jlfi5 (Gen. 3, 3), where there is no danger of a mistake
without Metheg, have followed the analogy of the first
two cases, the point of contact being that both sets of
cases end in long vowels.
It is used with Sere which is to be retained in Nasog
Ahor,
e.
g.,
4, 25),
1.
12, 1);
The Hebrew
Vol. xxxii.]
83
Metlieg.
is used with a
long vowel before Shewa, the Shewa
being silent as in ]1Bha (Gen. 46, 11), ISNirtp'pS (Dan. 5,
12), or vocal as in njyjfj (Gen. 1, 2), TC (Gen. 22, 12),
Here originally as in (1) the Metheg
'Tl? (Gen. 3, 5).
(3) It
was used
to
an improper pronunciation,
prevent
e.
g.,
iodxa,',
(4)
It
is
Metheg
as
This Metheg
(1) It
is
viz.:
ing cases,
is
attention to the
to call special
JTTJ
expect Segol or Pathah, e. g., rPiT, JTJV, &c.; the Me(Gen. 26, 3), rpm (Gen. 12, 2),
theg in forms like rpn
is
20,
JTTTJ (Gen.
probably due to the analogy of the
7),
(2)
It
is
used to
situation
(Nu.
where
23, 7),
to
an
^TQjJ (Nu.
a,
D'BhjJ
vowel in a
e.
and
g..
"^THX
D'Bhtf in
*J
cf.
111118.
Konig, op.
cit.,
pp. 104
in these
111.
6*
forms
Frank R.
84
e.
Hatuph),
11), *|Bfos;
the
to
g.,
(1
*\T\tftb
Sam.
[1912.
15, 1),
yr\jf}
The extension
infinitive
Blake,
(I
Sam.
of "this
24,
Metheg
form 112??
(Jos. 4, 7) is apparently
without special reason, as 6 is the regular vowel in such
forms; possibly it is due to formal analogy with the imlike rntpgf.
The fact that Metheg was ordiemployed to mark a long Qames before Shewa,
would naturally lead to a confusion between 6 and a,
peratives
narily
and
6
this
is
preserved
with 6 in forms like
(3)
why
The Metheg
is
I^JS, ?|Sj;B
attention
to
Qames
(a)
is the proper
even though the N has appar-
so a l so w ^ n
ently quiesced, e. g., 'J'WJ, *wb, ^KJ, & c
similar forms of HUT, viz., niJTJ, nirrt, njrPS, &c., because
they were read ''J'INJ, &c.
- :
(4)
after
the
(Ps.
1, 1),
Accentual Metheg.
The
third
is
to call
have originated from the fact that in certain forms the Metheg marked a vowel which bore the secondary accent (cf.
above pp. 83, 80). This use may be subdivided as follows.
I.
accent.
This
Exemples are
1
is
Baer's
Dlfcjn
Baer-Delitzsch
(Gen.
lias
injtel?
so
1,
called
ordinary Metheg
27), njIKD (^en. 10 18 )
(I.
A.).
>
Vol. xxxii.]
85
(Ezek. 42, 5), ng-*ft (Gen. 7, 1), ^nrninjp (Gen. 35, 20). The
vowel of the open syllable is usually long as in the examples
cited, but it may also be short as in *lS"^
(2 Sam. 5, 11),
tfnj (Jos. 14,
1).
tajm (Gen.
4, 12)
22, 13)
(Job. 17,
9),
&c.,
ordinary Metheg.
varies.
ni|?p^ (Gen.
1, 10),
(Gen. 12,
16), &c.
sibilants
after
the
e. g.,
=!,
the
nnn (Gen.
following
2, 12), rnfej
(Lev. 25, 34), tiffi (K-vau 23, 18)" :ng (Ps'.' 55, 22), Djrn (Ps.
In the first case the forms are probably meant to
28, 9), &c.
be
read
ul-miq~ueh,
regarded as short,
ukh-mo,
us-te,
the u being
with
the following
syllable
u-fa-Jwtk,
before
forms, as
is
shown
still
more
clearly
an open
Metheg.
The
the
Metheg
tke
first
8f>
Frank E. Blake,
7,
nteo^
27),
[1912.
be read
*;
forms
HiltDH
hd-e-lekh, ha-liin-ndm.
is
^h
',
article like
and forms
closed,
ham-'at,
that way.
of accentual
is
that
it
B2n
viz.
Metheg
offers
above
Cf.
p.
79,
ft.
nt. 1
viz.,
Cf.
Baer
nn
7.
the
This
Vol. xxxii.]
the
The a
n.
87
in these forms
II.
Metheg
lable
is
article,
syl-
position
)D,
doubled consonant,
and
WDBh
mVbr^
TO'&K (Gen.
32, 27),
According to Baer
(Ex. 16,
to>nn
D5rinCD
(Deut.
used only in
the third syllable before the tone with the short vowels a, i,
2
when the first syllable before the tone has Shewa, and
e, u
the word in question has a disjunctive accent. It is true that
this variety
ditions, but
of
Metheg
does
it
n%n-)D (Gen.
30, 16),
is
this
9),
Metheg
is
g.,
niton-ty. (Ex.
&>ann (Job. 30, 14), &c.
probably due to the fact that a
niDip&rrteD
(Ezr.
i, 4),
(Gen. 6, 6),
This use of Metheg is
special stress fell on the vowel in each of these cases.
the article and
e.
That
prefix
final
Why
particles,
1
Olshausen apparently regards this Metheg as accentual, cf. Lehrbuch der Hebr. Sprache, Braunschweig, 1861, p. 88, e, 1.
2
According to Baer the vowel o, Qames Hatuph, is not included
because Qames with Metheg is ordinarily long Qames and confusion would therefore have resulted, e. g., nirjJfc-^3 (Gen. 7, 11) &c. All
the examples given by Baer (op. cit., p. 199,
27) are cases in which
the o vowel is the vowel of ^3. As it would be quite natural for the
here,
word meaning
Frank R.
88
The
fact that
question in
all
Metheg
cases
is
Blake,
[1912.
would seem
always hear a special stress. This stress was ordinarily preserved hy tradition only in cases where the syllable in question
was the only other syllable of special prominence in the word
the tone syllable.
of a word was
besides
No Metheg
the
accent
mbrn
(Hab.
3, 6),
The Metheg
&c.
in the
e.
g.,
Ypjn (Gen.
22, 9),
open
be
syllable,
D^nsa (Gen.
it
may be
that
of
two
conflicting
e.
g.,
nS^n
In
22).
this
^"12
to the place for the secondary tone, the long vowel seeming
to all the most emphatic element outside of the syllable with
primary tone.
copulative
e. g.,
(Gen. 13, 15), TOJDJ (Gen. 27, 29), *$3&fi (Dent. 6, 7),
&c., are perhaps properly classed under this head, 1 taking
the secondary accent for the same reason as the preposition
IST-ft
hy*,
is
short,
to be read
&c.
It is also
two
in the
indicated
best
by the
fact that
Vol. xxxii.]
possible,
however,
'a-Mid,
u-me-bd-ra-khe-klia
&c.; if this
is
the
that
in
(cf.
89
long,
an open
is
below
p. 92),
under
u-ve-okh-le-khd,
(I).
III.
Metheg
nected by
is
employed in the
first
Maqqeph
jiH^ (Gen.
4, 26),
of
two closed
syllables con-
13-TOD,"!
e. g.,
(Gen. 33,
Jljrnisnj?
"
11),' &c.
first syllable,
(Gen.
4, 16),
The Metheg
seems to indicate that the secondary tone, which would naturally fall on the syllable which is accented when the word is
authotone, i. e.. on the last syllable, has been retracted to the
preceding syllable in order to prevent the secondary and primary accents from standing in adjoining syllables. Cases like
Sfr-isn (Gen. 31, 32), ^-nj?fi (Gen. 7, 2), ^PIKI (^ en 28 4 )>
-
>
Segol for Sere. When the accent of the word after Maqqeph
was a conjunctive accent, the secondary accent on the preceding word was not so prominent and so was not specially
(I),
constitut-
Maqqeph,
TV-Tri (Gen.
Of a
e.
g.,
II^'NTJ (Gen.
1, 3),
and
"li"Vn (Gen.
5, 18).
is
first
>
Frank E.
90
Blake,
[1912.
with the Metheg in such forms as irifc-tey. (Jos. 18, 20), which
calls special attention to the fact that the imperfect has an 5
in spite of the
Maqqeph.
IV.
Metheg
is
of cases
is,
The
exhaust
it
is
is
it
employed.
difficult
to say
There are
what is the
\by
r (Gen. 36, 23),
Ton
1),
&b (Ezek.
(Nu. 31, 12), '375 ( Jer *% 16 )
These Baer groups under the euphonic Metheg,
ni
is
not
satis-
factory.
It is not impossible that in some cases the sign was used
to call attention to a short vowel.
This was perhaps the case
Edomite proper names nV?J, ]jby (Gen. 36, 23; 40). Here
some probably pronounced a long vowel in the first syllable
as is indicated by the
equivalents of nj^y, viz., TwAon/,
FwAw/z, r<oAav: the Massorites on this supposition would have
in the
LXX
Cf. Baer,
op. cit,
end of paragraph.
p. 202,
35; p. 203,
37; p. 205,
40, all
near
Vol. xxxii.]
JH
^n
The Metheg
in forms like
'O'tt is
regarded by Baer as an
vocal,
To
open.
Shewa was
was
Metheg
employed.
accented with Pashta are perhaps
The forms
and
TIM
"TPJ
these
accent,
*J3J"]J.,
words
the
when
It
&??")!.
is
may
be,
however, that
to be
by Pashta, were
Examples
e.
g.,
of individual
NW
4),
:n-n'
syllable.
In
"]BttB^
o;
the
in the first syllable is perhaps due to the irregular pronunciation of X Several of the imperfect forms of BtoB have
Metheg
value
the Metheg, by an extension of the use of the accentual Metheg to a closed syllable, may be intended to mark the second-
Frank R.
92
Blake,
[1912.
1
In
ary accent in the second syllable before the tone
1^1 the Metheg is perhaps intended for the so-called euphonic
.
III. A.
Metheg (Baer
b).
Repetition of Metheg.
(Num.
26, 31),
inborn
(Gen.
niilD^n^ (Ezek.
9,
ll),
42, 5),
nrinw
(Gen. 12,
3),
nj%"0:rj$ (Gen.
34,25), &c.
When
places or
it
noted the primary accent, e. g., Byni:t#JT$9 (Is. 55, 9), DfiVVnjipBfc
This Metheg denotes a tertiary accent as in
(Ps. 18, 46), &c.
the
first
case.
22, 28.
the tone
tone,
e.
g.,
^Effr^
^n^l
Cf.
Brockelmann, Grundrijf,
p. 103.
17,
aa.
Vol. xxxii.]
the
accentual
rPiJ7*^1 (den.
Metheg
9, 15),
is
if
e.
g.,
Dl^lfojj
it
of
had accentual
instances like
9. 3),
(Nu.
&c.
apparently treated as
following the analogy
omitted,
'.:>
here
is
"
nijbfc
? (Gen.
6, 13),
for originally,
and
tt^TlgJ
In
syllable,
first syllable
^Gen.
may
(cf.
7),
take an accentual
above
(cf.
above
p.
82),
llj|p (Hos.
p. 89),
e.
g.,
4, 17).
18)
13-a6-'3
above
p. 91.
Occasionally
TM^l
e.
were primary
Is
(
(cf.
22
>
above
>
p.
92).
The
of inconsistency in its
application to the text of the Old Testament, and also to a,
certain amount of confusion as to the meaning of the sign
after its application, especially as this was not the work of one
man working
different times
and misunderstandings,
and in
were in all
is
Baer-Delitzsch.
2 If this
form is to be read Winfltfn (cf. Burney, Notes on Hebr. text
of the Book of Kings, Oxford, 1903, pp. 208, 280; also Stade and Schwally
The Books of Kings in SBOT ed. by Prof. Paul Haupt, Leipzig, 1904,
p. 201), then the Metheg of the first syllable is like the first Metheg in
forms
Frank R. Blake,
94
[1912.
From
Metheg was employed to call attenboth long and short vowels, it happens that it was
used not only with a long Qames, but sometimes also with a
Qames Hatuph (cf. above p. 83 f.). The Jewish grammarians,
tion
to
syllables, it
as to
e.
g.,
Shewa
vocal, viz.,
cases in which
lia-ie-tlidh,
we have a
&c.
On
and
Shewa are considered by the MassoShewa being therefore vocal, e. g.,
and JTHn (Lev. 7, 33) 4 and certain of the
closed syllable with short vowel
13
f.,
e.
g.,
5),
^hfr
fact that, in
JTJT, JITP
with a pre-
Cf. Gesenius-Kautzsch,
1909, p. 52, v .
2
3
Vol. xxxii.]
95
syllables,
are
perhaps,
as
we have
seen,
Use
of
Hatephs
Hateph
vowel,
after
Metheg
(cf.
Metheg.
There seems to have been a tendency that was not commark vocal Shewa after Metheg by a
Hateph. This tendency seems to have originated from the
close association of Metheg with a following Hateph in words
where the Hateph stands under a guttural, where of course
pletely carried out, to
it
is
14, 10),
fftiJN
(Gen.
e.
g.,
9, 21),
nh2
(Gen.
D^'S "(Gen. 4,
(Gen.
From such cases it was extended
18, 13),
TlffJ*
to
vicinity
of
an u or
Hateph Qames
used; e. g., ro^ (Ex.
nnn
18),
(Gen. 2, 12), nn^ (Gen. 2, 24),
is
>6^
(Gen. 29,
3),
^"On^
3, 18),
(JobVl^
IJjfiJ
13).
(Gen.
1,
njt}#
This use
9),
authorities to cases in
e. g.,
6),
Wn
repeated
immediately,
e.
^"nb
g.,
(Ps. 68,
7),
are exceptions
1
These
rules,
of the
*.
though said
to be rules of
Ben Asher,
by the evidence of the best manuscripts. Still they represent the ideas
of certain of the grammarians, and as such are worthy of note: cf. Gesenius-Kautzsch op.
cit. p.
55
foil..
p. 71
in
f.
text of the
Hebrew
Bible,
JHU.
Frank R. Blake,
96
[1912.
precedes
doubled, results from the fact that in all cases except those
in which the Hateph follows a guttural, the Hateph is due to
the
vice versa.
[cf.
instead,
e.
(Nu. 13,
20),
g.,
DJTfcnn
example
HDDDr!
(Lev.
3, 3),
with rnj?Bn
We
in
In a number of
(Jon. 4, 11),
cases,
bbn
(Ps. 113,
1).
we
find
of the article or
like *J?jto
dicate that
it
While it seems probably that this antithesis between Metheg and Daghesh was recognized, and made use of to a
Vol. xxxii.]
certain extent, it
of the Old
97
text
Testament,
because
doubtless
it
to the
served no
Relation between
One
of the
to Baer,
the
light
accents,
e.
it
is
into
instead
certain
of DlJjn,
conjunctive
while the
(Gen.
19)
heavy Metheg is never supplanted in this way.
It is to be noted, however, that even when according to
what appear to be the Massoretic rules, such change is possible,
2,
fflfefn
g.,
made 1
Moreover the
W~^2
accentual
Metheg
the tone.
it
Metheg
That the
so-called
a conjunctive accent
24, 7)
3,
for
heavy.
is
*?
Tjjll ?,
IjteBh
(Ezra
so-called
The
Methiga
difference
for
4, 1)
IJJOt^J,
Metheg
is
^"irriK (Deut.
replaced by the
2.
It
is
1
Prose
Cf. AV. Wickes, A Treatise on the Accentuation of the
Books of the 0. T., Oxford, 1887, pp. 67, 73, 80, 81, 91, 97, 109, 110, 111
A Treatise on the Accentuation of the
Poetical Books of the O. T.,
,
Frank E.
98
Slake,
[1912.
Metheg
all
these
is
Numerous
as
enumerated, the category of its activities has not yet been exThere are several other diacritical marks which are
hausted.
Metheg
of the uses
in form
of
,
the
identical with
to prevent
its
ym
&$
The Paseq
nn
Ttt (Hos.
4,
19) &c.
and
is
used
which ends and the other begins with the same consonant,
inn ? (Ps. 141, 4), tyj ]3 (Cant.
g., fth
h*1J (Ps. 68, 21), jn
The chief differences between Metheg and Paseq
4, 12), &c.
in this case seem to be first that Metheg is used in the case
1
e.
of a guttural including 1, while Paseq is used with other consonants including *|; secondly that in the case of Metheg the
two consonants are not necessarily identical, while in the case
For the
identity of Silluq
in
form
cf.
Wickes
Vol. xxxii.j
which
this
so,
99
though there
is
one instance in
is
#m
from the Metheg used with consonants, which for some reason,
perhaps by accident, was placed after the word instead of under
the final consonant.
The
placed,
g.,
6DN'n
m,T (Ex.
nitf
15, 18),
in^n
(1
Sam.
14,
45),
D^rrty.
From
basis
which
and not
are to be separated
sounding combination
tically
&
rU-HD
"YlSn
ployed occasionally
e.
DrririK
g.,
VI&1
(Gen.
longs what
divine
Drnr>
17, 13),
is
it,
e. g.,
mm
11),
goiflrj
is
(Ezek.
it
D^K
(Nu.
v?
3, 27).
name from
associate
(Gen. 22,
yatfih
bi&n
5, 22),
Here
also
be-
D'rftg (1
Sam.
as
it
forms
Frank E.
100
Blake,
[1912.
Munah Legarmeh.
Legarmeh
or
in
a straight
is
mark
is
similar to
Metheg,
It has
account of
its
ambiguity, as Metheg in this position already had a well defined positive signification, so it was placed above the consonant
in question, and here, probably for reasons of convenience, it
was written
in a horizontal position.
Conclusion.
discussion
may
be briefly sum-
the
p. 18.
v),
(")>
cf.
Merkha
Accent, of
Vol. xxxii
101
The
historical
conceived
of
as
follows.
From
lable,
as
ginated,
recitation of the
text.
a whole word.
consonants.
to
call
the
to
have
conclusion.
as for
is
This
example
is
its
From the fact that Metheg was very frequently used before
a Hateph in words containing a guttural has arisen a tendency
Frank E.
102
Blake,
[1912.
to use a
Hateph
accident, to be regarded
devel-
The
for
The
sign denoting melody for a nota bene or accentual sign.
fact that Metheg is not retained in addition to the musical
accent
is
the
of cases
and
varieties,
to
ascribe
to
this
Metheg
cases
which really
fixed a priori,
an open
vocal, its
in
which
it
occurs.
it
Nevertheless in spite of this fact, Metheg taken in connection with the other pointing, and our knowledge of the
a study of
Metheg
of those
who make
Hebrew grammar.
is
the significance
Massorites.
damental and
to
much
of a
number
of the
thoroughgoing investigation of the principles, funderived, of these marks would, I think, reduce
Hebrew
Bible.
.,.1
New
Albany,
York.
marked
diversity of
still
remains
unexplained.
The
be
Elamitic equivalents] are given under a Babylonian or NeoBabylonian denominative usually to be found at the left of
each case.
are
fairly
distinct types
One
is partly
linear and partly
is
the
other
pictographic;
partly cuneiform
and apparently the style of a later period. It is with the
archaic signs only that this paper is to deal, but the suggestion
cuneiform but
of writing.
still
may be made
VOL. XXXTI.
Part II.
p. 293.
104
E. S. Ogden,
[1912.
of
It
would be
for
by a
signs
many
Of
course
it
is
when
De Morgan,
common which
vi, p.
60, 61.
Pumpelly, Ex-
Vol. xxxii.]
105
connection between the Minoan civilization of the Mediterranean basin, and the culture not only of the Mesopotamian
great "Hinterland" of Elam. The
direction of the transmission of the culture and the possible
but
Valley
also
part played in
of the
it
by the Hittite
future
investigation.
call attention to
to
writing.
To
facilitate
All
in
civilization
must be
left to
the
that
passing
this the
the text.
Case. A. The case sign is ^-, NU, the original meaning of
which seems to have been "to be hostile, to destroy" and as
will be shown later its earliest form was the picture of a
weapon
or
Elamitic characters
it
must
also
Elamitic,
Listed Nos. 408, 416, 417, 501. Babylonian, Kec.* Nos. 257,
517 bis. The Babylonian SU
abatu, to destroy, (Br. 8650)
ahazu, to seize, (Br. 8651) sahapu, (Br. 8737) to overthrow,
The origin of the pictograph is not clear.
destroy.
'See
2.
No. 154.
leads
to
for
An
analysis of the
it
is
a pictograph representing
3,
and
This sign
part.
NEIT,
to indicate hosti-
at present ascribes to
3.
*^X^
it
is
this
heading see
De Mor-
E.
106
S.
Ogden,
[1912.
is
NU
account for
may
its
Babylonian.
4. This sign
is
presence under
is
Possible
clearly a
first
part
a growing plant
or
and
signs.
plant or
unmistakably a plant
sign,
140,
J
SE
where
(List 92,1, d)
1
,
2
The sign may be therefore tentatively read here
papyrus
as an Elamitic determinative for plant or wood comparable
to isu in Babylonian.
b) The second part of the compound (see for Elamitic forms
Liste 71
2, and for Babylonian, Bee. 19) has been already
identified with
balu, to destroy (Br. 1961).
It is clear from the archaic form that this character and
.
^ NU =
not
^=
KITE,
PAP
(see above)
was the
of the
original
compare
NU-U
(isu)
its
for
cutting
1992);
1582).
2.
and
Two
Elamitic
also the
signs
(Liste
19,
20,
Evans, op.
page 114.
22)
may compared
cit.
41, 42,
and Evans,
op. cit.
Vol.xxxii.]
107
The Cretan
NA
Case C.
either
This
MA
gf
is
or
archaic form was ~-%T~"~l which Prince describes as "a representation of land, earth", 2 and which is not unlike the character
here found. If the latter, the primitive meaning would seem
to have been "to cut, divide, apportion"
some kind of an implement.
1. For possible Elamitic, see Liste 543
lonian, Rec. 10, in which case it is the
MA
2
mentioned above.
4.
Compare
in Babylonian.
1.
tan
With
jxjp
(List 98)
Evans
DU, be
*
as
a
and
the
64
and above)
symbol
palm
plentiful (see Rec.
of prosperity and plenty was probably not confined to Babylonian.
Case E.
Case F.
sign
is
its
one hand and of amelu (Br. 11256), bultu (Br. 11258) and
baltu (Br. 11257) on the other, the two latter being used
instead of the more ordinary US, H?|,
^fffef: although
UEU
is
of generation.
1.
2
3
op. cit.
op. cit. p. 98.
p. 228.
3,
and
E. S. Ogden,
108
Rec. 26.
The
rihu, (Br.
5042) and
latter
NITAH =
2.
The Babylonian
GIS
== ridu,
(Br. 5401),
is
GA =
US
equals
[1912.
LIK
Kalbu, dog.
Case G. The case sign is obliterated, but the contents of
the case are olearly related to those of the preceding one in
are
and
much the same way that Babylonian
MAH
NITA
US.
related to
1.
Rec. 27.
UKU,
2.
GAN,
an irrigated
field.
GAN
but
identified this Elamitic sign with the Babylonian
is
difficult to understand except
its presence here in this group
by an association of ideas peculiarly Semitic. This inter-
names
sign
is
pretation
its
GA
is
three
which
bear.
is
wholly
tenable.
3.
Case H.
Case
1.
place for
Case
late.
No
it
J.
Case sign
is
^,
inu, eye.
All variants of the same sign for which see for the
1, 2,
Elamitic Liste 612, and for the Babylonian Rec. 238.
It
3.
represents the side view of the eye ball with the "eye-string".
c
Case K. Case sign is g|Y
SIG. Its primitive meaning
value 216,000.2
green".
SIG, arku,
or
Vol.xxxii.]
2.
This
3600x 60
109
J^ <7>
viz.
Likewise a numeral. 2
^=
1.
The Elamitic form is given in Liste 653, with which
compare also Liste 26, 27, 28, from which it will he seen that
Pere Scheil has already identified this sign with Rec. 206 (cf.
also 476, 489) SAR
gitmalu, kissatu, etc., and the numeral
3600 (Br. 8234).
2. For the Elamitic see Liste 700, (cf. also 637), and Delegation en Perse, vol X, PI. 4, D.
XX,
See The Haverford Library Collection, Pt. II, pp. 16, 17.
See The Haverford Library Collection, loc. cit. and Hilprecht, B. E.
p. 26.
E.
110
S.
Ogden,
[1912.
is
Case
The
JR.
of the
meaning
case
sign
light".
1.
is
given
in Liste
832.
similar
meaning
(List 56)
by than Cretan
^^j^H
bronze.
2.
Compare
361
3,
tentatively iden-
tified
a burning torch.
3. Here the Elamitic
is
and has
AZAG
AN
iC.
symbol
5.
sign
No
similar sign
itself
and no
clue as to interpretation.
The
Case sign
cause to go;
GUB,
is
as follows,
GIN,
somewhat undetermined
force.
The
to go:
Du
and
TUM,
BA
to
with
2,
5,
6,
all unidentified.
Compare the Elamitic forms Liste 533 5. Also the Babylonian TUM (Rec. 310) meaning to approach violently.
4. No similar form known in Elamitic but Babylonian TUM
(Rec. 311) means kablu, loins (?) (Br. 4958) and bears the same
3.
is
The
Vol. xxxii.]
Ill
by the case
sign,
manner
and yet
after the
subtle
of syllabaries.
Secondly,
Tablet
Case
Elamitic
Babylonian
abyloniar
Ideographic value
su
-V
KUR, PAP.
NU - salmu
(ALAM)
\f/
NU
Case
GAL-ZU
NA
Case C
MA(seeJ.A.O.S.
XXIV,
Case
Case
DU
p. 389)
Tablet
Case
i
Elamitic Babylonian
Babylonian
Ideographic value
cx
TUM
TUM
X3
is
P.
HOTT, Johns
a translation of 'EpvOpa
6d\a<ro-a,
which
is
(OLZ
12, 163)
thinks
crossed the
ciii,
the
ancestors
of the
Jews
that
Red Sea
See Professor
(1)
16,
Haupt
Ungnad
JHUC,
No. 163,
Wo
his
below;
cf.
lag das
paper on
Driver,
1910) p. 65;
Semitic Languages.
syriologie.
a
p. 52
and
= Johns
of his article
JAOS =
Hopkins
Schrader, Die
BA = Delitzsch
Keilinschriften
edition,
Sarah F.
116
Hoy
[1912.
I,
basin of the Bitter Lakes, while the water in the shallow lower
basin receded at low tide. Although the Bitter Lakes and
the
Red Sea
are
the tide
Canal,
Lakes.
east-wind
all
that night,
But when the Egyptians tried to follow the Hebrews, the wind
shifted, and the water, which had been driven away by the
strong east-wind, came back, so that Pharaoh's chariots were
cast into the sea, and they sank as lead in the mighty waters
(Exod. 15,
10).
Professor
Haupt (OLZ
12,
esting
dotus
this catastrophe in
general,
by
Zimmern
and
talistische Literaturzcitung.
sophical Society
Winckler
(Berlin,
1903).
of the
PAPS = Proceedings
(Philadelphia).
ZDMG = Zeitschrift
Morgenlandischen Gesellschaft.
See Professor Haupt's papers on Archaeology and Mineralogy in
JHUC, No. 163, p. 52; Moses Song of Triumph in AJSL 20, 149; The
(1)
ZDMG
the Origin of
63, 529.
Judaism
in
PAPS 48,
368;
Midian and
The Name of
Vol. xxxii.]
the
Bed
117
Sea.
could not swim were drowned, while the others were slain by
This flood was regarded by the Greeks as a
the Potideans.
by a southeasterly storm at
sea.
Strabo
According
(779) the name^ed Sea was derived
from the color of the water, which was supposed to be due
to the light of the sun, or to the reflex of the mountains surto
rounding the sea. Some said that there was a red spring
whence red water emptied into the sea. Others derived the
name from a Persian, Erythras, who was said to have been a
Perseus.
of
The famous
Eitter (1779
of his
mean
not
skin,
rather,
but,
a paleface. 2
In
p.
52
his
b
)
Professor
derived the
Haupt
(1)
Strabo says:
^<paivofj.^vi]3
op&v
Sea,
KO.T'
tpvOpaLvo^vuv
irt]yT]v
(2)
'Epvdpav
avd,K\a<riv t
airo
arroKataeus
TW/&S Tt]v
0d\arrav
airb TTJS
afKportpus
Haupt's paper on
Red Sea in OLZ 12, 246.
See Professor
the
TTJS
yap \tyeiv
etre
701/3
et/cd&'*
XP
tSi *
efre airb
KrijcrLair
"J*
rur
TQV
Sarah F. Hoyt,
118
[1912.
bitter
bitter salt
it
remained
(magnesium
do not grow
Bulrushes, of course,
water, but marshes are full of them. Strabo (804)
states that the canal from the Nile, which established a water-
in
salt
way between
Bitter
In
on Archaeology
originally
a part of the
Red
Sea.
The red
color
of their
But Professor
the
Red
Haupt
first
Red Sea
water of the
color; but an
is,
as
name
The
reddish
(or
the same phenomenon was noticed near Rhode Island in Narraganset Bay. If the water is covered with these algae, a great
fishes
many
die.
water becomes
Egyptian plague,
(1)
See Professor
p. 529,
11.
14. 28;
The
algae
offensive.
cf.
OLZ
12, 251.
{Sinai in
ZDMG 63,
The Name
Vol. xxxii.]
oj the
Red
119
Sea.
Prof.
impossible that
God
by a natural
cause.
phycese).
Postscript.
Haupt
has called
of luxuriant bulrushes, extending several miles north of Eziongeber. These bulrushes are due to the presence of innumerable
fresh -water
springs.
The marshy
plain
Red
VOL XXXTI.
Part
II.
F. HOYT,
is
Professor
Haupt
lation
of the
as
passages,
of Micah, 1
Book
phecies in the Old Testament, nor are there any Messianic psalms
"We find Messianic prophecies both in
referring to Christ.
Eduard Meyer
is
Psalm
16,
which
is
We
Thou
suffer
pretation,
(1)
AJSL
(2)
See
27, 50).
See
KATs,
p. 380.
1.
11
(=
TJie
Vol. xxxii.]
the
e.
of Sheol.
abyss
does not
It
121
16, 10.
mean
is
Sihhet,
Even
corrupt,
if
the final
justified.
In the
destroy;
first place,
the
Hebrew
hasideka,
of the
apostate
Hellenizers,
who
faithfully
Maccabees.
Who
Who
is like
is like
Haupt:
unto Thee,
unto Thee
JHVH, 'mong
the gods?
1
following the Septuagintal Sc8oJao-/x Vos V ayibis (AJSL 20, 161).
Wellhausen says in his notes on Psalms 29 and 58 in the
Of
JHVH
Inferior to
And
We
all
I say:
Thee are
the
superb ones
1
forsooth,
To Thee I flee;
My boon thou art!
God!
Preserve me,
7^
holy
in
hi,
ones;
whom
literally,
the
they delight.
beside Thee,
the emphatic
Naught
prefixed
is
particle.
(1)
Red
9*
name
of the
Sarah F. Hoyt,
122
Professor
ahout
The
B.
c.
first
follows
Haupt
there
states
[1912.
167,
Numerous
Verses 5 and 6 have been restored in Professor Haupt's address on Purim (p. 18). 1
In verse 5 we must not substitute
TDH for
Haupt,
^"1U
the Masoretic
prefix
TDfi
*JD1fl
"pBlfi,
to T&in,
nriN.
we
but
with Professor
must,
or rather
thus reading:
in the
JJOlfl,
Similarly,
so-called
which
TDH
is,
of Derision
the Masoretic
HDp
is
*isb,
The Masoretic
pointing
and
TOR
The
ever
line
TDTl
^"m T&in
supporting
my
nn
means Thou
art for
lot.
Exploration Fund
are
we
told
that it is still
Statements
for 1894,
Quarterly
allotment
of
in
the
land
Palestine
to exclaim
at
customary
In an
J^.s.-u
yo
stand up for
Time
will
<*JJ1,
it,
May
uphold
Allah
it,
not permit
stand
maintain
me
my
l)y
lot,
it,
defend
i.
e.
May He
it.
or pnn, supplication it is difficult to believe that this corruption should have occurred in the titles of half a dozen psalms
;
to cover
and
to close
to cover, corresponds
Vol. xxxii.]
in
Psalm
123
16, 10.
to Arabic
may
the
leather straps.
(Josh.
CTVfcD.
9, 4)
skin-bottles,
number of
mended
allied stems
the primary meaning of the stem DfiD was to bind', the t may
be an infix, so that DflD is connected with the Assyrian
kamu, to bind, to enclose. This may mean to put on bonds
or fetters,
or
to
restrain.
oratio
soluta
= prose.
The meter
of
this
psalm
is
we have
in
The Hebrew
sections,
of which
each
nn
a rnrr6
THDK
TDK
nnn
nnstr
124
[Sarah F. Hoyt,
[1912.
njyn
77011
N-O
10
]rirr*6
mrr ojpin
mfc
11
<riK 2 (a)
11 (7)
nnfi'
D^JIK irw
Tfifl
This
may be
4 I
all
will
Nor
is
grand
will I
JHVH
Thou
Thee are
that
is
my
pronounce
vrw
is
[ ]
wherein
[they] delight.
and offerings,
names with my lips.
mine
my cup.
my lot.
portion,
upholding
JHVH
I praise,
who has
Even
at night
my
given me counsel;
8
thoughts exhort me.
my
spirit rejoiced;
will
remain in
My
(S)
their libations
their
Even my
(js)
art!
my
share,
art forever
6 Rich possession
rt]
translated as follows:
3 Inferior to
'
if
n::'?
Michtam of David.
1 Preserve me,
to Thee I fly.
God,
2 To JHVH* I say:
My boon Thou
And
EH 4
cninsy
flesh
security.
(1) Their heart was always glad, and their spirit rejoiced, at the beginning of the Syrian persecution. When the situation was most desperate, when the martyrs were subjected to unspeakable tortures, they
cheerfully submitted to them. Their spirit could not be broken. But
now they hope that their flesh, too, will remain in security, so that they
will be able to defend themselves against their relentless persecutors.
Vol. xxxii.]
10
11
in
Psalm
16, 10.
my
(8)
2 the Lord
4 They have many idols,
8
I have set JHVH
(e)
9 therefore
(a)
(/3)
With Him
at
my
right
life
to
Hades,
(7)
11
the most
125
THE Oxford
religion
modern
writers.
This etymology,
given by the
Roman grammarian
4th
c.)
Roman
religionum
A. D.)
(end of
metus ab eo quod mentem
who
animum
of Classical Literature
(2)
Christopher
4, 7.
See Retractiones,
1,
13.
Vol. xxxii.]
Tlie
Cartwright (1602
within
united)
(1
7721834)
the
It is
1
They are not reliyated (or
1658) wrote:
same communion', and S. T. Coleridge
not even religion', it does not religate, does
W.
Gladstone (18091898)
E.
But
in
127
Etymology of Religion.
De Natura Deorum,
to
it,
Cicero
2, 28, 72,
said,s
Re-
but with no
derives religio
from
relegere, as meaning to go through or over again in reading, speech or thought. Cicero says, Qui omnia quae ad cultum
deorum pertinerent
diligenter pertractarent, et
tamquam
relegerent,
Aulus Gellius
(16, 388):
6tQ>v
6-n-iv
OVK
aAeyorre?.
Professor Skeat,
of the University
of Cambridge, says in
seems to he connec-
ted with the English reck, to heed, to have a care for. From
Teutonic base rak, Aryan rag, the derivation may be traced
time,
Thou carest
Our term
not.
religion
conscientious scruple.
is
religion
express
to
my
person.
of the inner
James
religion
is
in 1649
by
Thomas
Baylie.
(3)
(4)
See
(2)
New
Inn, 1,
1.
2, 84.
130.
of
Sarah
128
lier
[1912.
Latimer
(c.
14851555)
justice,
(Act
soul.
For
Hoyt,
4,
promise.
religious
who
is
Relegere
op-
An
Jew
irreligious
and opposed
diligence,
neglects the
to negligence.
law and conscience, heed of duty, intaking pains, painstaking scrupulosity. This explains
the connection of religion with ciAyo?, pain, and Sv<n?Aey7J?, painful.
But, as Walde says in his well-known Latin dictionary, 3
an idea of choice and interest may be connected with religion.
Lat. diligo (that is, dis + lego)
may be associated with
There may be a picking out, as in
reckoning, electing.
Strict observance of
volves
the
German
phrase,
Soldaten ausheben,
Walde).
If all points are carefully considered, Cicero's view would
seem to be preferable, so that religion is not derived from
It is true that a clause from
religare, but from relegere.
Cicero's Oratio de Domo, 105 is cited, Nisi etiam muliebribus
religionibus te implicuisses, in proof that Cicero himself could
not help connecting the word religio with the idea of obligation.
4
occurs religione obstringere, and
So, in the Second Philippic,
De Domo,
in
But
106. 124
the
present,
most sure of
of
course,
himself
Works
(1)
See the
(2)
See Sermon 21 of
Corrie (Cambridge,
(3)
we
find
domum
religione obligare.
See
of
is
all
great men,
The commentator
always
excepted.
usually the most mistaken
Jeremy Taylor,
Hugh
Latimer;
1,
an ex-
edition of Rev.
George
E.
1844) 1, 392.
AloisWalde,
See
Romanum.
Oratio Philippica,
2,
33.
83:
Obstrinxisti
religione
populum
Vol. xxxii.]
The Etymology of
129
Religion.
in
versity.
interest.
While engaged
the
and
similar
errors
therein
recorded.
To
these
errors
the
82 long.
is
and
face
Notes on a
Vol. xxxii.]
Collat.
of some UnpubL
Inscript.
131
etc.
At
US, 1. 2, is written as a)
tukulti, 1. 3, as b); ma,
things.)
as c); nis, 1. 5, as e8, d); (a variant noted by Budge and
1. 5,
King, ni-es following $ak, probably explains this); ha, 1. 10,
1
1. 11,
as g); ni, 1. 14, as h); ik, 1. 19,
as
1. 27,
as k).
Ekal i? dap-ra-ni is
is,
20,
i);
j);
written again after is urkarinni pi with ra, 1. 27, written as 1).
as e); lu,
as
Im,
1.
la,
1.
1.
Two
si,
1.
30,
written as
correction
Of the three
and
is
inscriptions
engraved on the
1.
lib,
1.
vertical erased,
mdtu
is
Adar, 1.1, is
1. 4, as
as
1. 6, as
hid,
8ar,
u$,
2,
r);
q);
s).
1.
as
as
as
1.
1.
18,
7,
13,
22, as w);
v); ra,
u); si,
t); mar,
23, as x); ar, 1. 24, as s)2; si, 1. 24, as y), with the last
errors,
written as p);
ad,
finest stone.
1.
cf.
While
n).
The
suffix of gimri,
1.
19, referring to
8u.
beginning of the
this
line.
is
regularly.
C,
though
so conspicuously situated,
so beautiful a bas-relief,
1
In the plate at the end of the article I have given the form as it
actually occurs, and also the ordinary form at this period. Within brackets
I have included a reference to Budge and King, Annals of the Kings of
Assyria (Brit. Mus., 1902), p. 212 ff. The number is the line number of
Layard, op. cit., which they have retained; the letter is their subdivision
of the line.
2
This
is
W. E. M. Aitken,
132
Ru,
1.
written as
is
2,
z),
[1912.
1.
9,
4,
is
is
written
written as
a');
1.
8ar,
5,
as
1.
17, as n');
1.
lu-bar,
1.
ra,
1.
19, as u');
as x'); kaspi,
cf.
In
i').
1.
1.
11
-pi zna,
18, as o');
1.
19, as r'); a,
1.
1.
li,
1.
18, as p');
ri,
19, as t');
1.
te,
19, as v );
1.
20, as y').
lias is
In
1.
ma,
1.
19,
19 tamdti
is
as w');
is,
1.
20,
crowded into
z'),
omitted.
Those ancient men whose business it was to write the cuneiform (they were not mere stone-cutters), to write the king's
inscriptions, joined the wedges together carelessly, made signs
2
inaccurately, added and omitted
signs, even to the extent of
half a line.
After I had finished my work I noticed that
Budge and King has made a similar statement: "From the
numerous mistakes and inaccuracies which are manifest in many
of the copies, it is clear that the work was often done in haste
and was entrusted to unskilled workmen and artisans, who
were not infrequently unable to read the signs they were engraving"
The evidence
3.
of
hasty
and
unskillful
work
is
Lyon
in Keilschrifttexte Sargon's,
Memoires,
1
This
is
Tome IV,
Layard,
King
when
his eye
caught the su of
Itat-su,
1.
4,
and he started over again, writing five words twice. Taksud (ud) he
wrote incorrectly first as a"); the second time it is correct. In 1. 13 the
scribe's eye fell from [Mbrdte to the quite similar its of u-ham-ma-tu,
and so he omitted Jcibrdte P sarru la ki-bit pi-su, and produced an untranslatable sentence. This is all correctly written in A, B and C.
l
Op.
cit.,
p.
LXXII f.
ol.
>f
xxxii.]
Notes on a
Collat. of
etc.
133
Hammurabi;
lot
tere,
tnd
it
)xtual
tave occasionally
to
note
errors
V R
47.
In
1.
XXV
(op.
cit.,
p. 148,
n. 43),
reads
it
8ar-ra ki-ma,
and
translates
cf.
IR
17, 32,
W. E. M. Aitken, Notes on a
1 34
a)
for
(Ib)
^<
Collat.
of some
[1912.
for
<
b')
(9b)
c)
(10 c,
2) -YYf
etc.
b)
(2b)
c)
(3b)
d')
(lid)
SHY?
d)
(3b)
e')
(12 a)
J!L
e)
(7 a)
f) (12 b)
f)
(7 a)
,,'IBr
g) (7c)
g) (12b)
li')
(12 b)
h) (8e)
i )
(13 a)
i)
(12b)
j')
(13b)
j)
(13b)
k')
(13 b)
1')
(13d)
k) (18 a)
1)
fcfl
(19b)
m') (14c)
-
m) (20b)
n')
(17 a)
(17d)
n)
(20b,2)
o')
o)
(19 a)
P')
P) (la)
(17 d)
q) (18 a)
q)
(ib)
r')
r)
(4a)
s')
s)
(6 a)
t')
t)
(6b)
u) (19b)
u)
(lib)
v)
(16b)
w) (19b)
Brflfc
v')
,.
-JI
(19a)
(19b)
(19b)
w') (19 c)
x) (20 c, 1)
x)
(19b)
J) (21 b)
7)
(20b,2)
z')
z)
(3 a)
a)
(5 a)
(14a)
a") (4d)
|-
for
for
BLAKE, Ph.
D.,
THE
racter.
We
Greek
or
cases, or
we may
start
differ-
1
Grundriss der vergleichenden Grammatik der indogermanischen SpraDelbriick's Vergleichende
chen (3 parts in 5 volumes
Indices: 3 rd part
der
Syntax
indog. Spr.), Strassburg, 18861900: 2n-i edition of first two
1911. Brockelmann has promised a Comparative
parts, Strassb. 1897
Cf.
u. verb. Aufl.
1901,
II.
10
Frank E.
136
Blake,
[1912.
obedience
man would
of
In the present
article
is
Semitic languages
The
view.
and the
their
relative
affected
a,re
position
in
the
combination
is,
of
of ex-
viz.,
indetermination (indefinite
article).
e)
f) interrogative
qualification (interrogative
pronoun or ad-
jective).
g) indefinite
qualification
(indefinite
pronominal adjectives^.
m) sentence
To
the noun).
these may be added
n)
Indo-European languages,
pp.
88103; 181221.
Vol. xxxii.]
137
e.
indicated
is
g.,
by a
suffix, e. g.,
regularly
nor
is
the
element
that
'my dog';
expresses the
idea
on
the
modifying
always grammatically dependent
noun, e. g.,
'all men* is expressed in general
the
indefinite
by
pronoun 'all
possessive
adjective
^3
Hebrew
is
given in parentheses),
viz.,
Assyrian
a)
(Ass.)
b) Arabic, Classical (Arab, or 01. Arab.)
Lihyanic
(Saf.)
Mineo-Sabean (Min.)
Mehri (Meh.)
d) Ethiopic
(Eth.)
Amharic
Tigrina
Tigre
e)
(Lib.)
Safaitic
e)
(Amh.)
(Ta.)
(Te.)
Post-Biblical
(Mish.)
Moabite (Mo.)
Phenician (Ph.)
f)
Biblical
Christian Palestinian
Jewish Palestinian
Samaritan
1
Some
modifiers
the
is
of the
(Chr. Pal.)
(Jew. Pal.)
(Sam.)
noun with
single modifier.
Frank R.
138
Blake,
[1912.
Malulan
(Mai.)
Syriac, Classical
(Syr.)
Aramaic of Babylonian
Mandaic (Man.)
Modern Syriac (Mod.
Talmud
(Bab. Tal.)
Syr.)
where Hebrew
is
Sama-
Safaitic,
Phenician, Zinjirli,
Lihyanic,
Christian Palestinian, and Mandaic words are written
in Hebrew characters, Mineo-Sabean words in Arabic cha-
employed.
ritan,
racters.
literation.
The
chief works
and
F. Delitzsch,
Grammatik der
1,
Berlin, 1908
Comp. Or.)
Grammatik, 2 te Aufl., Berlin,
Assyrische
Eth.
Dillmann-Bezold,
Athiopische
Grammatik,
2 te Aufl.,
A. Dillmann,
Lexicon
linguae
latino, Lipsiae,
Amh.
F. Praetorius, Die
amharische
(Praet.
I.
Guidi,
Amh.
aethiopicae
1865
u.
Leip-
cum
indice
Lex. Ath.).
Sprache, Halle 1879
(Dill.
Spr.).
Grammatica elementare
della lingua
ama-
A. d'Abbadie, Dictionnaire de
Ta.
Halle,
Vol. xxxii.]
J. Schreiber,
Te.
E. Littmann,
139
Language, 2
vols.,
Arab.
( Wright -DeG.
A. Socin,
Or.).
Berlin,
W.
Spitta,
Grammatik
lectes
des
Vulgardia-
Sprache,
1861
(Wahrm. Prak.
Handb.).
Arab.).
Palastinische Arabisch, Leipzig, 1910.
L. Bauer,
Das
W.
Le
Marc,ais,
D. H.
Miiller,
Epigraphische
Denkmaler
aus
Arabien,
Essai sur
1882
les Inscriptions
[extr.
du JA],
p.
du Safa, Paris,
296f (Hal. Insc.
Saf.).
Heb.
KAW,
Abh.
VI
Wien,
(Jahn,
Meh. Gr.).
te
Gesenius-Kautzsch, Hebraische Grammatik, 28 Aufl.,
Leipzig, 1909 (Ges. Heb. Gr.).
Gesenius-Buhl, Hebraisches u. aramaisches Handworterbuch iiber
d.
A.
T.,
Frank R. Blake,
140
A. Geiger,
Lehrbuch zur Spr ache der Mischna, Breslau, 1845 (Geig. Spr. Misch.).
Karlsruhe
Neuh.
8.
[1912.
u.
neuhebraischen Sprache,
Leipzig,
1884
(Sieg.-Str.
Spr.).
Herner,
F. Philippi,
Stat. Con.).
Mo.
K.
Smend
and
Ph.
P. Schroeder,
Phb'n.
Spr.).
A. Bloch,
Phoen. Gl)
M. A. Levy,
Phonizisches
Worterbuch,
1864
Breslau,
K. Marti,
(Marti,
Bib. Aram.).
G. Dalman,
Grammatik
Judisch
des
te
Arawaisch, 2 Aufl.,
Palastinischen
Jud. Pal).
G. B. Winer,
Grammatik
des
biblischen
und
targu-
Th. Noldeke,
ZDMG,
nischen Dialect,
527 (Nold. Chr. Pal).
D. J. Parisot,
Le
ser.
dialecte
9,
pp.
443-
neosyriaque de Mdlula
tome
440519
22,
11,
(Parisot,
1898,
pp.
JA,
239312,
Dial Mai).
Vol. xxxii.]
Th. Noldeke,
i6
141
Aufl.
Oxonii,
Syriacus,
1868
Th. Noldeke,
C. Levias,
A Grammar
Man.
Gr.).
the
M.
Manual of
Th. Noldeke,
Aramaic Language of
Babylonian Talmud, Miinchen, 1910
(Marg. Man. Bab. TaL).
Grammatik der Neusyrischen Sprache,
A.J.Maclean,
Margolis,
the
the
Syriac,
Cambridge,
1895
(Macl.
Vern.
Syr.).
Other Languages.
Delhriick, Vergleichende
A. Erman,
Agyptisclie Grammatik,
Gr.
Steindorff,
The determinate
Simple Determination.
or definite state of a noun
is
expressed in
The
noun
Errnan, Agypt.
(?r., p. llOf;
in Coptic
der Altbulgarischen Sprache, Heidelberg, 1909, p. 142; F.Kurschat, Gramma tik der Litauischen Sprache, Halle, 1876, pp. 406408; Delbr. Verg. Syn.
III. p. 89).
Frank E.
142
and
modern
Blake,
[1912.
by 4 la or A
Arabic
of the
Lihyanic inscriptions, and in the other languages, by a particle whose
original form was probably ha:* e.g.,
Arab. ^IJLjl al-maliku 'the king.'
bic
Za;
its
in the
dialects,
by J\
in Tigre
Safaitic and
al;
dialect
Te.
Afl-fl:
Lih.
nan
'the house.'
Heb.
^EH
'the king.'
Ph.
nyffn
'the gate.'
Mo.
naan
'the high-place.'
article
a definite noun.
H9fc
'the kings.'
is
*
employed,
a,
a plural ending in
e. g.,
tives, *My*> ha- 'uld'i, nto, etc., cf. Brock. Comp. Gr. pp. 316, 317 ( 107 c, f).
In some Southern dialects of Arabic ^\ im, am is used as article instead
of ,J\, but without assimilation of final m; e.g.,
j~o\ am-birru 'piety',
? L^ax\ am-fiidmu 'fasting'; this article ^\ contains the same demonstrative element as Assyrian amvnu 'that': cf. Brock, op. cit. p. 317 ( 107e),
246 Ba);Wright-DeGr Arab. Gr. I. p. 270.
p. 469 (
2
Regarded by Littmann (Te. Pron. p. 299) as ultimately identical Math
the demonstrative root al (cf. preceding n.). It may, however, have been
developed from the preposition j\ la used with a definite dependent noun
as in Ethiopic o>2V&: AlT^: natd-u la-negul (cf. p. 145). Here the determination of negus is due to the combination of suffix and preposition,
but in Tigre la
and so used as
nomenon
itself
was regarded
the
as preposition.
Cf. Brock.
cf.
Vol. xxxii.]
Syr.
|A
143
i3te 'kings.'
S'lhft
constructions,
ceptions,
it
but in
Modern
lost.
In the Modern Aramaic dialect of Tur-Abdin a new preformahas been developed from the demonstratives
viz.
m.
u,
u hmoro
?,
pi.
an,
e. g.,
'the ass.'
In Mineo-Sabean the
n
f.
definite
state
e.
is
indicated by a final
g.,
In Amharic the
definite state of a
by -u for the masculine, -ttu for the feminine, but very often
the sign of determination is omitted as in poetical Hebrew
and in Phenician,
e.
g.,
The ending u
is
154; Nold.
bOB;
Marg.
Han. Bab.
also
the
-m or
Frank E. Blake,
144
-a
is
was
Eastern Aramaic
in
lost later
and a word
without
it
may he
[1912.
(cf. above).
Assyrian
either with the -m or
llu-m
e.
g.,
a g d the god
dj
'
*'
Tigrina,
definite
by employing various constructions, to express the determination in certain cases. Sometimes a language which has a regular definite article possesses these definite constructions as
well.
In Assyrian,
in the sense
of a definite article.
nouns after
to be confined to
In Syriac
in Ethiopic
seems
this use
it is
most common
Eth.
-P
a<4.l, v?^*
the pillar.'
d)Ayh:
kamaze
rni&ptn
]iyotf
no
Simon of
'St.
AA^ :o>hm H
)>
Ta.
Te.
From
will
come when...'
rtft^
ffDflrt*
ClMP
'the
time
-z),
-Ufa,
of
Amharic.
The
Gr.
suffix
472
(top).
cf.
Comp.
145
Vol. xxxii.]
In the case of a
definite
noun which
is
dependent on an-
The
it is
In Assyrian a noun depending on another noun is preceded by 3a; a governing preposition is repeated; a noun depending on a verb stands without preposition: e. g.,
T 'X
aplttrSu $a
son of
e.
Izdubar.'
su$i Sarrani
kings
Y:
'to
is
g.,
frStf^y
wisdom
*10A,rh
ATfHl
qaddim-hd
la-jebab 'the
beginning of
beginning to wisdom).'
AOOA fit i lale-hu la-la la bet 'against the
(its
flmT
A-flCyj
OA^
samai-o la-Urhdn
1,
is regularly preceded
by the
tho after another noun the genitive sign VjE. \
may be employed,
e.
g.,
^T^t
:
j
majamaria-a nai fefrat 'the
of
creation.'
the
beginning
ft*fl : kamd-u n-at sab 'like this man.'
:
the wise.'
Frank E.
146
U&cn>5py
n?***
of the king.'
&JP ft**} i fcfl*
Slake,
[1912.
noun and
a preposition
may
the-
X--; this
is
person singular
low):
e.
sign of genitive
(cf.
-,
suffix
of third
g.,
e.
g.,
U^-H>! ot-f
win
id-e
de-sdjana 'from
the
hand
of
Satan.'
lo^j
MO^
The
^^,
it,
g.,
lah
nimd
'to
the
fish.'
147
Vol. xxxii.]
oA pid^-uh
'uit
li*a
voojw
In those languages
which
light.'
defi-
article, similar
Hebrew the
article is omitted
with a dependent
common
noun,
being
respect at least independent of Aramaic,
'the god of Daniel.'
Bib. Aram. 5$%?p*l nrb
in
this
^ n$
^ TiHttK
Nn'JN
Sam.
7>"ajm
Mish.
Dn?Dq h&
D^
In Biblical Hebrew
passage,
'the
name
e.
g.,
of God.'
Ammonites;
thy servants/
7
'the
fire
of
the
wise.
JTIK
7
tnjn 'the knowledge of God.
this
construction
occurs in
one late
viz.,
7
e.
g.,
Arab.
Ijo-,
^}
-6
unh
J^Bri *6 ITINI
11
BtoK
'and
the
'a
man
shall
sparrow
4, 10).
1,
2).
alive
his brother.'
Ch. Pal.
!r fcOD*6
nrp
fcOirtt^
nrp
pnBH
'that
Frank E.
148
Hebrew (here
construction after
N^?
Under the
same
e.
g.,
'at
n?
[1912.
Biblical
this
Slake,
1S
'
head
these
PiniK 'the
NJHN nrva
nm
or
Pal. NDVYp
Jew. Pal. Nmt?
Cli.
30).
constructions
emphatic
Sam.
7).
5,
suffix,
pH
(Dan.
3,
'in
e.
g.,
same land/
'on the
Tim
'at
same
day.'
nm
noun, e. g.,
Eth. a^M
Ta.
frit
flXrt.
XtJafr
/Lfr&Ra*
'unat
man/
This status
is
best represented by
1
The element jv seems to occur also in the common Mandaic more
remote demonstrative pxaxn which Noldeke thinks is a combination of
demonstrative elements
n> JYI, iv: cf. Man. Gr. p. 91 f; also Geig.
Spr. Misch. p. 36; Uhlem. Inst. Sam. pp. 31, 162, 163; Nold. Chr. Pal
p. 471; Balm. Jiid. Pal. p. 113.
For
relics
all
the
Semitic
cf.
Brock.
Originally
by the
also
fact
there
that
was no
many
article
of the older
Vol. xxxii.]
members
descendant Tigrina.
viz.,
Assyrian, in
Ethiopic,
many
and
its
149
modern
means were employed a) pronominal elements, chiefly demonand b) the personal pronominal suffixes.
strative,
From pronominal
and Aramaic families of speech. In Phenician and archaic Hebrew, represented by the language of Hebrew poetry,
the article is not yet absolutely necessary to denote determination.
In Arabic (North and South), Aramaic, in Hebrew
tic,
In the
prose, and Moabite, the article is fully developed.
Eastern Aramaic dialects its definite force has so faded out
that these languages have practically returned to the articleless condition of the primitive language. In one of these, again,
the dialect of Tur-Abdin, a new article has been developed
'that.'
governing word. This construction is found to a certain exall the languages, but is most fully developed in the
tent in
Abyssinian
It
occurs
in
Amharic
in
languages,
article;
in
Frank E. Blake,
150
[1912.
In some languages the weakening of the force of the demonstrative pronouns, which process resulted in the development of the regular article, is still going on. So especially
in article-less languages like Ethiopic and Tigrina, but also
Jewish Palesti-
nian.
Case Determination.
Leaving aside the primitive case endings, which are an integral part of the noun, under this head are to be classed the
various prepositions and postpositions which have been developed to denote case.
Ass.
$a
Eth.
H-,
Amh.
?-,
fcyf
Ta.
Te.
Arab.
-J,
1- nai-, ne-
^x;
li-,
>
Meh.
Heb.
da, de, di
The same
U*
U>,
b,
Jb>;
metfi, beta
Min.
115119;
min
2
mal, haq, de, dial
Set,
ndi
(Mod.) fUu,
pp.
Ky-
ia-
-b,
is
-b
cf.
7981.
CU^o
b in
in Jerusalem, Jjl^>
cf.
g).
Wahrm.
PraJc.
Handb. pp.
Vol. xxxii.]
Comparative Syntax of
Ph.
Mish.
PN,
t?
^,
-h
Syr.
-:,
-V;
-"H,
tlie
Combinations,
d'c.
151
-"p
Man.
Bab. Tal.
Mod. Syr.
Bib. Aram.
"H,
Jew. Pal.
Ch. Pal.
-1
-b
'
Sam.
"b, "I, *n
Mal.
ti, il, ti-l
These genitive determinants
the genitive.
They may
all
Aram,
t?,
de, di,
ti,
Mod. Arab,
de;
b)
Te. nai,
c 2 ) prepositions
Ta. ne,
to,'
Closely connected with this class of determinants is the Arabic de$u (with its full series of case, gender and number forms)
monstrative
which
stands
are
to
languages
(cf.
my
Contribs. to
Comp.
Phil.
Gram., JAOS,
vol.
XXVII,
1906, pp. 325 f., 338340; also my article The Tagalog Ligature and
Analogies in other languages, JAOS, vol. XXIX, 1908, pp. 227231).
5 In
Coptic the preposition ente originally 'together with' is also used
as genitive determinant, cf. Steind. op. cit. p. 80.
3 The element
did is identical with Ethiopic,^'a, which is used with
106 f.
suffixes to form possessives, cf. Brock. Comp. Gr. p. 315,
VOL. XXXII.
Part
II.
1 1
Frank E. Blake,
152
the preceding noun.
H has the feminine
%t and
CS>
fern.
[1912.
M"f
pi.
In Assyrian and
employed without
ceding noun. In
vJX^> may have
the forms,
fern.
^lx*
*Uo beta'et',
Sume (cf. under
metd'et,
Smtf,
Eth.
H-nfcrt.
Heb.
Ass.
Arab.
JX*JJ li-l-maliki 'of the king.
Mod. Arab. CUXJI \> del-bint 'of the girl.'
discussion of the
The
accusative
mining
sign.
is
The
many
follows, viz.,
Amh.
-1,
Meh.
Heb.
Ph.
-n 2
fa, te*
n
JVK
Syr.
Man.
-b
Bab. Tal.
*
Similarly Egyptian
m. nu,
2
pi.
f.
Praetorius
rection,
is
viz.,
f.
nt, pi.
ni\ cf.
Erman,
-J,
-%>:
cf.
Amh.
f.
3 Cf.
Jahn, Meh. Gr.
ployed does not appear.
p. 70;
it is
em-
Vol. xxxii.]
Mod.
Syr.
Bib.
Aram.
153
-h
Mai.
Ch
'
Pal
Jew.
b
7
TV
f
'
Sam.
-h
rp,
an
three
a)
definite
indefinite
object,
They are
of
sorts, viz..
Amh.
which
-n,
and
enclitic
is
is
and
article
finite
other enclitics,
Aram.
le\
suffixes,
but
precedes
all
'my
lej-e-n
with
possessive
g.,
h)
e.
this is proclitic
noun.
and
is
its
Heb.
ntf,
ticles
are
stance,'
It
Meh. ta, te] these parderived from a noun meaning 'essence, sub-
Phen.
all
Aram.
fPK,
and stand,
of course
is
in
JV,
Heb.
ns
tfQtfn
>
D 73$n~riN
WBW
Sam.
fP
'coelum.'
JW
1
is
e.
late passages in
g.,
position a
directly,
know
e.
this
'to,'
while
g., edified
man.'
Of.
those
I.
Kiiapp.
A.
Grammar
are governed
life
hombre 'I
of the Modern Spanish
"W.
which
este
Frank R.
154
Vn
'and
'BfoK rfeg-te-nKI
all
Blake,
[1912.
of
(cf.
The
number of
e.
&
g.,
1FJ&
lej
kue
is
9*
uo
iaha
may
have spe-
or 'abata] 'ummati
g., cu>l, cuxl 'abati
or ummata; and several classes of words may make a special
vocative form by a shortening at the end, 4 e. g., <^_jy Taiiba
vocative forms,
cial
from
^->y
preceded
e.
Cf. Del.
3
4
Cf.
Ass. Gr.
101.
II. pp.
8789.
of
155
Vol. xxxii.]
these
'aiiuhd,
Ua^l,
it
is
is
in
indefinite
directly
a following
dified
the noun
forms,
unless
it is
mo-
or
genitive, accusative,
by
prepositional
phrase; in these cases it stands in the accusative, with nunnaWhen no
tion, except when modified by a definite genitive.
is
used
After
these
rules
same
1^1, (j^\ b
interjection
apply.
b
b
b
article, e. g.,
man
or other.'
beasts.'
UJU> b
ing a hill.'
id lmira n min
zaidi n 'oh
'aiiuhd 'l-maliku
id\iiuha
,
t
'l-maliku
The
b m
b id
r<%/i
'abuia 'oh
all
the
g.,
'oh man.'
sidi '(oh)
sir.'
my
father.'
a vocative in Syriac,
Mandaic, Modern Syriac, and Malulan. To what extent its
use is due to Arabic influence is uncertain.
particle
is
used also
noun
of
ol,
1;
before
o,oJ,
m;
as vocative determinants,
&&2
1
Dbj IK 'oh
^ol,
e.
is
'oh men'.
used as a vocative,
Heb.
Bib.
Aram.
g.,
evil world'.
e.
g.,
Jew. Pal.
KJHK
Sam.
'oh land.'
definite state of
Frank E.
156
Blalte,
[1912.
With
The
properly so-called,
and
tion,'
g.,
&
\
OA4*
city.'
sea.'
Indetermination.
The
indefinite
state
of a
noun
is
indicated, a)
by the ab-
rule in all
noun
n
^IU
-a w
is indefinite,
e.
g.,
Arab.
maliku", -i
'king, a king.'
Min.
f-~t? bit-m 'house, a house.'
The nunnation is used in triptote proper names in Arabic,
but without indefinite force, e. g., jo^ zaidn n 'Zaid.'
*
cf.
pp. 494-499.
2 In this
construction the noun is regarded as a genitive depending"
on the second part of the preposition, which functions as a noun, the
genitive sign ? being omitted according to rule, after the element of the
preposition
and Praet.
3
*
which stands
The -m and
-n are
cf.
This
cit p. 326).
ma
is
originally
Amh. Spr.
identical
pp.
413415.
indefinite-interrogative
473).
first:
Amh.
Vol. xxxii.]
e.
157
the bare
lost,
g.,
J^
dialects of the
Bib.
Syr.
Mod.
Syr.
JLjul
ftdi&
Ta.
^K,
-nXd
K\JtfC
frfl
:
'
'ahadu
hade sab
OC.P
bffesi 'a
'a
audit bdria
certain maid.'
'a
is
g.,
*in
lid
JL*
Eth.
Amh.
It
^ U*.^
e.
So in Egypt,
Tripoli,
(< ahad)
Eg.
mi
J-Ut
Tl.
iidhid,
uahad
is
used,
vXa-U
J
uahad
n
'
[
f
er-rajel
A
uahderrajel
uahad el-mrd
uahdelmra
*
With
but
in
Tlemsen had
is
>
'a
man.'
'a
woman.
this use
i with
be compared the use of Amharic Kl
3
number
is
a
when
meant, e. g.,
X\& flfl* 'and-u sail 'a man (one of a number mentioned).'
In Biblical Hebrew this use of the numeral is rare it may
stand before its noun: e. g.,
finite article is to
'one' out of
article
DJlh 'a
|5
in
'a
and the indefinite flH* : bezu 'much, many,' cf. op. cit.
In Hebrew, Syriac, and Mandaic this same definite character of the numeral 'one' is evidenced by the fact that it may stand
other cardinals
pp. 301
303.
(cf. p.
153)
n&*,
h:
cf.
Nold.
Man. Gr.
Frank R.
158
It
more common
is
Blake,
[1912.
numeral
re-
noun: e. g.,
gularly follows
in DISIDI^B 'a philosopher.'
its
nn rtlto 'a
In the Arabic
(<$ai 'thing')
skull.'
is
dialect
it
ddr
81
is
without
article, e.g.,
'a house.'
haja
'a matter.'
force of
"Hfr
indefinite article,
h-Hvh
zeku
Tfhe.
is
g.,
kuahueh
'a
rock,
certain
rock
Some
and Tangier
of 'some
?,
e.
g.,
Mesopotamian fard
may
(cf.
p. 188).
Simple Qualification.
Position.
The
regular position of the descriptive adjective in primitive Semitic was probably after its substantive, 2 as is shown
by the
fact
that this
is
all
of
Arab.
Min.
Meh.
1
^-Jia
-U*
?
^XX*o
f -jjj\
king.'
children.'
al
position
dinals,
of the descriptive adjective, as of the demonstratives, carto have been before the noun: cf.
Delbr. Verg. Syn. III. pp. 89, 91, 93, 94, 102. In the later development of
of the languages, however, postposition is frequent.
many
Vol. xxxii.]
Heb.
21B
Ph.
Bib.
'good king/
DBHp-n Di^K
Aram.
^D
nn
Sam.
159
'great king.'
DJ^?
'great people.'
liamrd kaiies 'good wine.'
Mai.
1^.4
JAao
mi
K13i
KB^D
anna
Syr.
Bab. Tal.
Man.
Mod.
NStfl
'great man.'
'righteous man.'
fraM
lio^ IJ^a
Syr.
this
preposition
is
and
Eg. Arab.
^^ ^^
*3^l*. i^*5)
J*aj lkja-po ?
Syr.
ia
N^Bi
rwni
~halaite
tffip'HD'n 'of
the polished
soul.'
)DWn WDSH
Man.
'the
pure
sign.'
Mod.
Syr.
USJ ^a^
UA* tN.A'tmw
good tree.'
miskantd lianna 'poor Hannah.'
Mai.
?.><;
WVJ&
Te.
XVft
?f JP-fl
In
9C
fl>0
XVfl
medr Sandi
sandi medr
{(rood
*
'ends saidb
saidb ends
land
>
<old
man>
the adjective
is
free as in
Frattk E. Blake,
160
^afr
fl*fl
is
7,V dbm
is
[1912.
considerably more
common
gadal
^TX
the adjective,
e.
g.,
'a
true
Concord in Case.
adjective regularly agrees with its noun in case, gender,
number, and determination.
The concord of case is of course confined to those languages
An
case,2
e.
'.
g.,
may
JSUJl jo 5 b id zaidu
\
[
'i
ilu
'l-'aqila
e. g. r
Concord in Gender.
The concord
able
2
(cf.
165, 92.
final
p.
Voi.xxxii.]
161
line
is
form
Modern
in
both genders, e.
Assyr. naru marratu
for
is
used as a
common
g.,
Arab.
4-*.Ja*
Heb. nVna
Mod.
eggs.'
Mnne
Syr.
'hot springs'.
7
mdduna
'ancestors of old.'
may
(cf.
below),
e. g.,
(sg. taht
yvgC
><;
or
In Tigrina the
same
and
in the plural,
the masculine
finite article,
is
an archaic and
determined
Ta.
it
V^P
Amh. h
flavor 1
biblical
(l^
:
kefu
fiVC
set 'a
bad woman.'
'my
little
daughter.'
Concord in Number.
Cf. Praet.
2
Amh.
Spr. p. 161,
126
c.
Reck.
St/n-
Verb- P- 89
Frank E.
162
Nouns with a
Blake,
[1912
collective
adjective
Ass.
Arab. ^^JUk
Eth.
fl-flA
flH-^l
qaumu" zalimuna
pE
DJjrt
'violent people.'
saV -many
people.'
walk in darkness
1).
In Hebrew the
e.
attribute,
beziihdn
g.,
D^K.'a
just God.'
plural:
e.
g.,
mudunu"
=5-
plural
maduna
e.
g.,
'ancestors of old.'
'the
invited
ladies'.
tdhdt (sg.
talit)
zalmet
(f.
sg.)
(f.
sg.)
'dark rooms.'
'black clouds.'
fltM
Arab. Vul
p. 142.
sinners.
Vol. xxxii.]
of nouns
Plurals
broken plurals)
163
may
*fltM
OfLfJ
:
flH'21
'ahzdb bczulmn
fi/hH-fl
naudMt
'aitger
signs.'
7
'many people.'
'long walls.'
fllM
mdtdt
fc&ffife
Broken
though
of nouns,
e.
t^yC
but
g.,
l
'great signs.'
also,
flCrct
Oflj&t
lights'.
(UPf
^T
:
Midldn saiwc
fli-f
/irhH*fl
semdglU
'strong, men.'
setoc 'old
women.'
An
adjective modifying
a noun which
is
at the
same time
between 11 and 99, the adjective may agree either grammatically with the noun or logically with the cardinal, e. g.,
Eth. fl-dOt
u"gt
#rtL<rj
ua-'ebnrdn 'seven
^A
arbalitaSer
Eg. Arab, o-^t^ c^U^
**?j\
'fourteen good books.'
Ititab
faiiibm
Frank E. Blake,
164
01.
Arab.
b^U M^y
I
.."'
>
i*^*- ***
1
[1912.
t^
Y f, nn ainara
^nnvnnn
if>runa
ndciriiian
{
1
\ ntigiriiiata'
'twenty dinars of el-Melek, en-Nagir.'
dual, if we except certain isolated forms in Ethiopic and
Aramaic, is found only in Arabic, Classical and Modern, MineoSabean 2 Mehri 3 and Hebrew. In Classical Arabic an adjec,
tive
01.
Arab.
^^
^U-Lo
^^LJ\
outer doors.'
Cf ^z^J\
^UJ1
houses.
Heb.
el-beten
el-Jmbdr
'the
two large
Determination.
In those languages that have developed a definite or inform of the noun, the modifying adjective has in general
the same form as the noun; so regularly in Arabic, Hebrew,
and Western Aramaic except Malulan*: e. g.,
Arab. f .Ja* ^^> maliku n anmu n 'mighty king.'
definite
(J>
(cf. p.
203).
In Greek the
article is.
959).
Vol. xxxii.]
been
distinction
all
165
lost: e.g.,
*-^ j^,
*vnj>_ 15? 1
rich man
i;.*^ K7>nj; N-oa J
Tal.
D1 *UH 'a high roof.'
Syr.
<
j^j^
Bab.
mi
Man.
great man.'
133
'a
&na:i 'a
BIBO
NtfBO
"n:i,
righteous
man,
the
righteous man.'
Mod.
Syr. J^i
Mai. &wi#
Mmyd
'great stone.'
'brillaiit sun.'
e.
lack of concord
g.,
im* ^jcxm
Syr.
is
JKVI ^Xo,\.
fcn^itf
W&
Man.
Mod.
Syr. jjul
jo
Mai.
hamrd
n^n
]y3#
n^ w^a
7
e.
man/
'honest people.
In Phenician the
the attribute,
small man.'
'a
g.,
article
may
holy gods.'
is
Hebrew
cases occur in
(in
most cases a
1 In
Coptic the article stands only with the noun, e. g., p-rome n-sabe
Hhe wise man' (cf. Steind. Kopt. Gr. p. 84). In Indo-European, the
article generally stands first before adjective and noun. In Old Bulgarian
and Lithuanian the article stands after the adjective, e. g., Old Bui.
above
p. 148, n. 2.
when
Greek Gram.
2
Cf. Ges.
p. 208,
noun,
959.
126 w,
x).
Goodwin,
Frank E.
166
Blake,
[1912.
In Arabic, both
pTn
'the
Classical
raw herbs.'
and Modern, an
adjective modifying
a definite vocative without article takes the article itself, e. g.,
Cl.
<5~>U b id fdsiqu 'r-riddiiiu 'oh thou unrighteous
^>j&
man, the
apostate.'
stead,
g.,
^.=^1
but,
j*r^.y\
2/ neruh
J-*4-t
mountain.'
In the
dialect of
Tunis the
combination
the
before
construction
is
^="'
rare,
la-'enas
Mob
Mil la-sawb
'ends
may
and
my$hah
IffU
article
noun
g.,
er-razel
J**.\j)\
In Tigre,
e.
of
<
is
the old
man
e.
g.,
suffix is regularly
-1
combination
case
it
is
or the other
it is,
is
is
by the
ar-
p. 84).
cf.
usual
This
n. 1);
is
the
in these
to the adjectiv?.
construction in Indo-European,
cf. p.
165, n. 1.
Vol. xxxii.]
167
noun by virtue of being a proper noun, or by a sufelement takes the 1: if both are specially determined,
both take 1. These rules apply generally speaking to the combination of the noun with pronominal and numeral
adjectives
tide, the
fix, this
as well.
e.
g.,
flCF oDfciP^-}
:
plague'.
au 'amlak-en
i
ftt
;
&>flftpl
n*
?!
rajm-u-n
lebs-iid-n 'her
'adis-u-n sem-e-n
In Hebrew and
'my new
long dress.
name.'
an adjective modia
name
is
sometimes
without
article. This is a
fying
proper
relic of the primitive
of
Semitic
when
there was no
period
article.*
e.
less
frequently in Syriac,
g.,
Heb.
p^n
1i3
When
the noun
'First Tishri.'
'Second Kanon.'
Double Qualification.
modified by two adjectives, 2 the adjec-
is
tives
first,
e.
g.,
1
Of. Brock. Comp. Gr. p. 469 ( 246 d /8); Ges. Heb. Gr. p. 429 ( 126 y);
Noldeke, Beitr. zur Semit. Sprachivissenschaft, Strassburg, 1904, p. 48, n. 2.
2
Sanskrit, like Arabic, employs no conjunction in this case; in Greek
cf.
12
Delbr.Verg.
Frank R.
168
Heb.
Blake,
^n
^"ttrn Sltsn
nn
[1912.
'the great,
good God.'
'a
'
'
evil plague.'
nXfl.
%%
fegum
'he is
Amh. nCW'Fy
o^XI
I'l^^'Py1
At
'
M-JB1J
lion.'
:
kura-itu qald^di-itu-m
set
'the
Tigrifia the
in Ethiopic
an-naiiiru alal-kaukabu
Arab. ^-.=^\ j^\ ^*yU\
'ahmaru 'the bright red star.'
<^.yt cr^-y^ ^^ r*^ ^-swi 'allahi 'r-rahmani
'r-raMmi
'in
the
name
of
God,
the
compassi-
Ta.
hf X dCf
:
0*ij&
servant.'
(1H"*
7-n<5
frfl-fr
is
repeated
Construct Chain.
its
construct chain.
In Arabic and Hebrew the adjective may govern the noun, e. g.,
Arab. ^LLi J-Z+A. jamilu fi'lika 'thy handsome behavior.'
Heb.
D^ng ^^n 'smooth stones' (1 Sam. 17,40).
With
struct
this is to
adjective.
development of
this,
be compared the Coptic construction of noun in conThe more usual construction with n is perhaps a
inasmuch as n is also the sign of the genitive. Of.
Vol. xxxii.]
169
Arab. ^yjJLJ\
Eth.
evil
To be compared with
woman.'
Amharic construc-
WKl
&a* ddrios-em
i
(I&*
ia-fUand-u
man.'
'the spiritual dark-
Demonstrative 2 Qualification.
Position.
'this
man.'
'this
high
e. g.,
place.'
'this stone.'
fiK
suffix
Dl s n iniK
e.
g.,
'that day.'
Hit
NTTO
'this house.'
'this land.'
Amh.
Spr.
249.
pp. 317-320,
2 For the forms
of the demonstratives, cf. Brock. Comp. Gr. pp. 316323, and the various Semitic grammars under the head of demonstratives.
The personal pronoun of the third person is used for the more remote de-
12*
Frank R.
170
In
Biblical
passages,
Aramaic
it
also precedes,
it
Blake,
[1912.
though in some
regularly follows,
e.
g.,
Syr. J^OD
e.
g.,
JLJO,
Jew. Pal.
pn
fcnmy
'this occurrence.'
pn
pn 'this house.'
pn Ky 'this people.'
Man.
inn
fcO^ND
'that king.'
'that world/
inn N^K
Mai. hod himta
'this woman.'
hun-ah hannd 'thy brother
Mod.
In
U^,
Syr.
oo,\,
le-lio
this.'
side.'
Min.
^> %n
>-p<">
Eth.
TOi^
Amh.
JFF
Ta.
Mtt-toi'et-kokliob 'that
Te.
flXrt.
(I*?
fly&
zentu beesi
'ella
bahdl
'this
man.'
woman.'
'this
star.'
commandment.
In Amharic preposition
is
A^jB
This
is
pp. 297-299.
by Littmann,
cf.
Te. Prqn.
Vol. xxxii.j
171
Arab.
IJ^A
J^-H
IJ^A
Eth.
'the
Min.
a > -^sS> mh/d-n %n 'this (?)'
n Modern Arabic, preposition of the demonstrative
is
regular
in
the
the
forms
case of
without -A lia,
except
monosyllabic
which regularly follow the noun; the demonstrative \S*> hd^d
I
follow a
may
^b
e. g.,
In the
dialect of the
cities
with
article,
except
dol,
which always
follows,
e. g.,
>
In the standard
is
preserved in the
expression,
cusyll
^>
man.'
It
is
difficult
'ez-nagar 'ezm
to say
this speech ;
positions
of North
'ez-nagar-eziu
Xa<^
European
cf.
p. 158, n. 2.
Frank E.
172
Blake,
[1912.
If this
latter.
most
meaning.
dialects the
Aramaic
The modern
reversed.
is
dialects
postposition
Modern Arabic and Tigrina have developed an emphatic demonstrative construction in which a noun may be modified by two
demonstratives, one before and one after.
Concord.
case
Ethiopic,
Ass.
e.
in
viz.,
g.,
Sarru annu
'this king.
Arab. ^^Lr^Jl
Eth.
noun
which have
to those languages
its
o^A
nd^dni r-rajulani
'these
two men/
A
and ace.)
rJ^.y\ cr?A hdftaini 'r-rajidaini (gen.
"Hi* 7-flC tentu gebr 'this thing.
7
Hit
The concords
7-fl
of gender
practically without
exception in all
Tigrina, e. g.,
Ass. Sarrani
anmdi
'these kings.
Heb.
riBteg 'this
ntftil
nVH
Bib.
Aram.
woman.
D'tfJKfi 'these
men.
tj^K
Syr.
Min.
Meh.
^d
Miut
similar construction
is
common
in Tagalog, the
most important of
ito 'this man,
5
viz., ito-ng
tawo-ng
Vol. xxxii.]
173
tive,
e.
'r-rijdlu 'these
men/
'l-mudunu 'these
hdftihi
g.,
girls.'
cities.'
55
is sometimes construed
according to the sense; for example in Egyptian Arabic,
^UJl en-nds dol 'these people.'
Jy
^> CjU*.^
"HW
Ht
:
(lArt.
zmiu
rtXrt.t
'this
of
man.'
be'esi 'this
za.il be'estt
rules
woman.'
07^
Determination.
e.
fact, and
and Tigrina,
very
represent this
g.,
$arru annu
Ass.
modified by a
'this king.'
Eth.
Hit
Ta.
XHXD-
.flArt.
:
zeutu
cities.'
M'M
'this
man.'
an additional indication of
Man.
definiteness. 2
Of. Schreib.
Tig. p. 28.
(cf.
Frank R. Blake,
174
[1912.
'this stone.'
*\ym
'this gate.'
the noun,
article as
e.
g.,
U
;
(D&>tt
AtUh
The
article, e. g.,
JiTihC
ft
ba
zili-u
horse.'
-nlt?^
:
}7C
rCWftl
e.
g.,
AA.
4.0
AfcflHT
'ellifara
A7
'this people.'
Arab.
J^j-N
Mod. Arab. J^>
b J^.y\
Min.
c>V^
Ht nonn
Mo.
Bib.
Aram. HiT
haftd r-rajulu
J* hal rajul
ar-rajul da
n s tr ~ n ^ n ^ s
'this
high
>
'this
man.'
inscription.'
place.'
Erman, Agypt. Gr. p. 110 f.; Steind. Eopt. Gr. pp. 45,46); so usually
Indo-European except in Greek, where the article stands before the
noun whatever the position of the demonstrative may be, e. g., o5ros 6
974).
drfp or 6 &vyp o5ros 'this man' (cf. Goodwin, Greek Gr. p. 211,
1
This is true at least of the texts examined by Littmann, cf. Te. Pron.
in
pp. 297-299.
Vol. xxxii].
Sometimes,
especially,
may
v^f.
Syr.
*A*
J-^'t
Bab. Tal.
m&y
\VN
BWK ^n
The
'this
e.
g.,
'
man.'
n^S
fcttn
KYI
construction
Hebrew
Wri
The
175
'this generation.'
njn tf"n
'this
e.
g.,
man.'
is
modified by the
nK
sign
is
g.,
Ht
pT
'this plant.'
This
tive
the article
is
article: e.
nt,
demonstrative usage as
we have
it
in Assyrian, the
Abys-
unknown
of the
in Classical
Hebrew,
in the
to be regarded as a survival
Hebrew of the Song of Deborah.
is
e.
addition
state,
and
a prefixed demonstrative
g,
Jin
KDV
'this day.'
(cf.
This n
Brock.
126 y).
Heb. Gr. pp. 428, 429 (
not the Hebrew article tho it is ultimately identical with it
107a). It is a demonstrative particle
Comp. Gr. p. 316,
is
bic lv>A AaSa, which was employed in this and other cases in imitation
of the Hebrew article. Cf. Uhlem. Inst. Sam. p. 116 f.
Frank R.
176
Blake,
[1912.
When
e.
guages,
g.,
Ass.
Arab.
*-J*J\ ^iXXJl
Eth.
"HVF
Heb.
njn ^nan
Syr.
u"
W"
'this
^sn
great
king.'
In Amharic
minate
in this case only the adjective takes the deterThe acarticle, tho even this may dispense with it.
cusative
jective,
jB.1i
with
stand
may
-"I
e.
both
demonstrative
and
ad-
g.,
;M4?
I^jBATi
power
of thine.'
:
idc-en zenguer-itu-n
qamis
(ace.)
Interrogative Qualification.
Adjectival.
noun may be modified by the interrogative ideas expressed by 'which?' 'what?' 'whose?' 'how much?' 'how many?'
'Which?' is expressed -in most of the Semitic languages by
the particle ^ ai or some of its derivatives, viz.,
Ass.
sg. du, pi. duti
Arab.
masc. ^\ 'aiiu n,
2
Arab.
Eg.
^gJl 'erihu
fern. AJ\
^-^^
'aiiatu*
'enhi.
pi.
p4**\
'erihum
sg.
like
'ai,
pi.
Heb. ^nan
Jtft
mn
'aidt
*\Q9 (2
Ch.
1,
modi-
not simply the noun but the combination of noun and demonstrative
'this people of thine, the great people.' Cf. Ges. Heb. Gr. p. 427, n. 1.
2 In Palestinian Arabic the forms are in
general the same as in Egyptian, but with numerous variations, cf. Bauer, Pal. Arab. p. 73.
fies
Vol. xxxii].
Ta.
and
sg.
pi.
Te.
masc.
Heb.
masc. and
Syr.
masc.
Bab. Tal.
fi
p%
'a,
UJ
'aiw,
fern.
fern.
*O
JSJP
npK
KJNK, fern.
XH
'aian,
111
<&c:
'eiaw,
'am
TN,
pi.
Tl
fern.
KTTI,
pi.
V
1^ H
KTH
fern.
is little used, the mascuform before all nouns singular and plural.
In Ethiopic the forms given are used only of things.
The interrogative word regularly stands before its noun, and
is treated as an adjective, except in Classical Arabic, and in
the case of Egyptian Arabic ^, where it takes the modified noun
in the genitive.
Egyptian Arabic enlu, enhi may follow their
The concords
noun.
nite:
in Christian Palestinian
or the
state
gularly
in Syriac.
e.
Ass.
du
Eth.
fi
A?
found
ft^t
rt^t
Jtft
tXHH^
OPT ZH>
Te.
fc
flUAt
&
flFV
sadta (ace.)?
;
'aft
JL^I
*l
'at
'aia bahdl
n^n"l
fcOBD
Syr. U*o;
commands?'
what time?'
laidn gize
2^D Nr
K^ao JUJ
Syr.
'which hour?'
'ai sa'dt
'aw.
Ta.
Mod.
is
g.,
p*wr\
KTK
)^";
:s
'which scribes?
'which torment?'
spirit ?
pM
Frank E.
178
Blake,
'aiiu rijdli n
'aiiu 'aini n
'which men?'
(fern.)
^\ ^
min 'enlnbeled
wiw 'aif fce/ed
[1912.
'which eye?'
,
from
wMch
vill
Tl.
is
somewhat
different, e.
article,
g.,
men?'
women?'
In Mandaic 'which?' as adjective occurs in only one passage, being there expressed by liDNH, viz.,
"in
1iOnn 'in which place?'
In Hebrew when the modified noun depends on the preposition p, the preposition stands between the two elements of
the interrogative,
e.
g.,
."
t^J.
fl>X*F
'who
is
In Amharic
adverb
noun,
e.
fl-nA
H^frJi
man
iat
the
'where
?'
used
as
an
adjective
before
the
g.,
is
e.
g.,
Sam.
K"Q:i
Syr.
/t-*^
Bab. Tal.
Km
The
interroga-
'which man?'
^s- KTJng ]b
13i
]0
'to
1 The
personal interrogatives are derived from a stem man, except in
Hebrew and certain Modern Arabic dialects where they a*re formed from
a stem mi cf. Brock. Comp.Gr. p. 326 f. (110c, d).
Vol. xxxii.]
Amh.
"71
Ta.
<*
D '}
fifl*
cv^&Jh
fl^l tfpv
:
interrogative pronoun
of the languages to express 'what,
The forms
Eth.
y^
Amh.
yj
Ta.
9*l?
Meh.
hasan
Te.
<*-, -("L
Heh.
no
Syr.
teg ah 'in
be-man
The neuter
179
are, viz.,
ment
men
mental
mi
Bah. Tal.
<KO
no
in0
Man.
Mod. Syr. -,0* mndi
In Amharic the same idea
Jew. Pal.
is also
expressed by adjectives
derived from the personal interrogative, which are, however,
used with both persons and things. They agree with their
noun
in gender,
viz.,
masc. ^V'ffl*
fern.
mdndcaii
flYffW; mdndcaiitu
"VS^fW mdndcaitu
These interrogatives regularly precede the noun.
pic there is concord of case. e. g.,
:
Eth.
Amh.
yV? Ofrfl
ylt WS?
yl tAHTI
\
*})
In Ethio-
(ace.)?'
creature?'
mandment?'
^^vn*i U-ment&i fflfin 'by what power ?'
Ta.
(iyj;t\e
Te.
X-n^ ^ft^
K-fl
Syr.
Man.
Mod.
,~*x
v,
Heb.
ff^ft^V
...
'eb-mimasl\> 'with
what parable?'
-i
7
.
V6 mi-masl
in0
'what power?'
'to
what
city?'
Frank R. Blake,
180
Meh.
da
da
da
[1912.
Posi>esive.
nomen rectum
form,
e. g.,
Arab.
ftt
Eth.
<& J. beta
Heb.
'p-n^a
Mod. Pal. Arab, ^.^o
Man.
m
Ta.
pan. inffn
a)
'whose house?'
^^^ finjen mm
'whose cup?'
ot
mannu
->
iiad
man
whose son?'
JVD
Sam.
{
~ ,JD
} 'whose daughter?
Jew. Pal.
j
p nn
In those languages which have developed a special preposition to indicate the genitive, the interrogative may stand
after this preposition.
The prepositional phrase, usually follows
the modified noun in all the languages except Amharic, where
it
Eth.
ft^
Amh.
f^Yl
Jew. Pal.
Syr.
Mod.
Meh.
Hff
pi
&.
*.
bet
ia-mdn
lej
'whose son?'
(c?a )
(is
habrtt
Quantitative.
The
how many?'
For
what
3
With regard
181
&c.
Comparative Syntax of the Combinations,
Vol. xxxii.]
Classical
this
combination
is
placed
e.
g.,
W)W
}
^Jb^^?i^?j
N3
Ij^-j Jbaa Ntp
Heb.
Syr.
<
how many
times?'
?]
'how
mimafan
tfl'ikendai
Ta.
baskets?'
Amh.
ftlt
flit
fliPY
flit
A^t
sent sauoc
:
<how
men?
many
years?'
II. p. 126.
2
the
example
p. 187: in
plural
Frank E. Slake,
182
Ta. *TK.C
7flCt
'how
many workers?'
many persons?'
kendai ntfrelti (sg.) 'how many days?'
'akeVau 'engera 'how much bread?'
hendaigabarte
Mndai 'aMldt
:
hli&W AT}
Te.
[1912.
(pi.)
(pi.)
'how
for
^^
Indefinite Qualification.
indefinite
The
pronominal
principal ideas
are, viz., all, every, each, no, some, any, a little, few, much,
many, a
certain, same,
self,
All, Every.
expressed in all the Semitic languages by
3
In general the pronoun
pronouns derived from a root ^3
may stand in the construct state before the noun, or it may
'All,
is
every'
The
construction
is
Phenician
(?),
found. In
Modern
Mandaic
Biblical
may be
used after
No example
The material
~kall,
is
not
certain;
after the
cf.
noun
like bl
Kopt Gr.
p. 84.
Vol. xxxii.]
<&c.
183
(bis),
in
when
Syriac
noun
the
24,28);
possessive suffix,
is
'every.' e. g.,
'all princes.'
<Loj,,o J.^ Jmllu madinati n
'every city.'
Arab.
'all
the
city,
the whole
city.'
JS
>*xjl
Ta. H-A,
&a>-
Heb.
kullu 'l-muduni
TJ?-^3 'every
'all
ayn
'all
p^n
Ph.
ta
cities.'
city.'
the men.'
the people.'
the attackers.'
'all
DDT8 ta
Syr.
U.J*
'all
people.'
yio ^3
'every city.'
'all
3
Bib.
the
city.'
the
all
Mo.
'all
Aram.
'jte"!?!
JUwl
Syr.
The second
'the
whole kingdom.'
Mod.
believers.'
'every king/
nobD'^3
Bab. Tal.
possessions.'
'all
^D
'all
VD 7m?
things.'
''/jaM 'every
man.'
found in Assyrian, Arabic, Ethiopic, Amharic, Tigrina, Hebrew, Syriac, Mandaic, Babylonian
Talmudic, and Modern Syriac. In Ethiopic and Amharic it
is the
only, in Tigrina, the usual construction. In Assyrian, Ethiopic, Syriac,
or
construction
is
either before
the noun.
and Hebrew
The
*
suffix
Of.,
Of.
it
always, in
of the
Amharic
VOL XXXII.
it
II.
p.
p. 67.
193
b.
13
Frank R, Slake,
184
[1912.
her with the noun, but in Ethiopic and Amharic the suffix of
the masculine singular is most frequently used for both genders
In Arabic and Hebrew the noun is always definite, in Syriac and Mandaic, always in the emphatic state;
in Amharic the noun may take the definite article. When the
and numbers.
is
e.g.,
kaU$wa matati
Arab.
U^
lg
} an(j s ;
<Loo..Jl
Eth.
tofak(L:kuettu beesi
<
<
all
men>
the earth;
all
ttl -.medrkuelld
ki
nagast Jcuellomu )
m> }7/w^ kuellu
manget 'every kingdom.
:
Ta.
H-ft*
H'A-
fr1.Pt
HA* *&
kuettti
gegewt
'all
(the) flowers.'
7
city.
kuellom heddnat
'all
children.'
'all
kuellan 'ahmelti
plants.
the
sick.
H*fU
nabza medrl kuellVd
whole land (Matt. 9, 27).
'in
this
'every thing.
7
fr&V mangest
liuliia 'every
1Kb
women,
kingdom.
7
'agar-ttu
Heb.
riV$
^^.
'all
Israel.'
Tg
'all
the
'all
the men.'
H\3
Syr.
^i^o^Knr
city.
tall
the
cit
Vol. xxxii.]
'all
Mod.
185
<&c.
the men.'
oj
Jlxil
Bab. Tal.
Kty
^13
'all
whole earth/
the world/
^LJl en-nds
el-kull 'all
'all
article
1
,
e.g.,
the people/
the land/
its noun, tho it may stand before the noun in the construct;
gabbu regularly stands after, but rarely takes a suffix: e. g.,
ildni
gimrasun
gimir Hani
matdti gabbu
<
a^
>
'all
lands/
whole land.'
mdtu
In Arabic, both Classical and Modern, 5^^. (Eg. Arab.
garni -) has the same constructions as J^, e. g.,
gabbiSa 'the
^^^^ |
jami'u 'I'dlami
Cl.
'
Mod. jam*
The
dWam^
<
all
the world;
Arab.
^U*'
^U*
book
Eg. Arab.
1
common
TL
one
after another/
Jb^ Jb;
Said by Mar^ais to be
state, e.g.,
by dollar/
and not unknown
p. 178.
13*
Frank R.
186
Heb.
[1912.
DP DP 'every day/
*A*
>xajt
Syr.
yiu}
'every seven.'
yitti
K^KD KD^>D
Man.
'every king/
p pl
Sam.
by city/
'city
Amh.
JLa.
Blake,
OA ^
OA ^
.~
<-
lat
lat
man/
,
every day>
|
j
3; the conjuncg.,
Heb.
Syr.
is
e.
UAS
JU*
>n^
Man.
generations/
y.o^
BHS ?
day.'
is most
commonly expressed
on
the
which
the noun depends; in
preposition
ty doubling
Ethiopic the prepositions that are chiefly so employed are fl ba-,
A Za-, and H ^a-; in Tigrina the chief reduplicated forms are
(HI babe-
or
fl'fl
this idea
11 nene-,
bebe,
K&
nanai',
Ta.
doubled:
is
Mtl HAA
\
flflHtf /**
A.OjE.9
OA^J
e.
Amh.
g.,
JTj&OA^fT
l
nene- elat
its
kind/
'for
food
day/
every day/
(V*1
(H7U
(U7U
ndbab; in
fl, the
preposition
for every
llOA^f
(H1
'every year/
The
it till
7lby_
tongue?' (Job.
6,
30).
in
my
187
Vol. xxxii.]
Arab.
^jj&
p*\j>
JA
any money?'
XyUM
Eth.
avtpQh
'emdehra manael
'after
some
days/
manman]
(m
manma
aumma, iaumma
Eth.
ffDJ.
:
,
^"W
mannu, ment
-i,
-M,
0!
Te.
ao*\a*i
mandcau (and
9^3*?.
feminine forms)
its
man, mental
manm a
E. g.:-
aumma
Ass.
Sarru
Amh.
"Vf fl*
^Vf ^"F
Ta.
APA.
Te.
-0
ID 1
I'didl
o^^^i ftt
:
dib
house.'
at
ail.'
n:H
^nn
'any city at
all.'
death.'
Special words for the idea of 'some, any' outside of the class
have been developed in some of the languages.
just considered
with nouns in the plural, tho the singular may also be used;
in Tigrina and Tigre the singular is apparently employed, e. g.,
Amh. #1#F J7C
'anddc nagar 'any opportunity.'
:
188
Frank R. Blake,
[1912.
vessels.'
'aidle
"^
-;'amle saiioc
Ta.
madtl S0me
''
kendai
Te.
7A fl-fl
In Arabic the noun Jp*^
'I
VU&i
'some people.
>
l)tidu
Modern Arabic
01.
Jajo
^x oy>l
ja^> badu
^uxJl
evils
badi n 'some
e.
g.,
$-$irri 'dhiianu
min
Dnn
is
some-
g.,
158),
e.
may
(cf.
g.,
Mesopotamian
>^^\ >j
children.'
Si
Tangier
^S ^^>
In Syriac ^r* Q<!1P i use d as an adjective with either singular or plural nouns in the sense of 'some'; it may stand either
before or after the noun,
'np
e.
NtffaA
g.,
'some
men/
that
'.
Words meaning
'some'
may
in
many
Ta.
lea-la-
189
Vol. xxxii.]
French
the
So
in
Arabic,
Eth.
Heb.
5,9).
Sam.
D1K
Syr.
-OOHOO\,I 40
Man.
frniJl
\"nTpbn
JO
^^
y*o
'some blood.'
JD
N^N^KB
JD 'some of
JNrDTO
our blessing.'
No.
The adjectival idea 'no' is expressed in general by an indeterminate noun in connection with a negative, most usually
with the negative meaning 'there
^^
Arab.
way
Heb.
is
not,' e. g.,
laisa la-hu
^^J
<*J
mdhla$u
'he
had no
of escape.'
7
Drf?
'there
is
Amh.
tt7^n
our
'for
land there
Ta.
-flCy*"?
there
W9"
'in
off
no
is
is
may
be preceded by
No examples
Spr. p. 426
<D
e.
g.,
cf.
Praet.
Amh*
Frank B. Blake,
190
manuman
Ass. ilu
ul
Sarru iaumma ul
^l^fr ylti
Eth.
fc.eT'/A
'Uan&u
m&ntanl
com
'ye
any burden.'
ylti.
co/W^ti
god/
'no king,'
>flXfl.t
he should take no
be'esita 'that
fi/3r7<14*
'no
[1912.
(H^
wife.'
ita^-mentani
"i-tegbaru
of the noun.
Heb.
ta, e. g.,
'ye shall
n&JP
Aram,
Bib.
is
"jirb
Jew. Pal.
J^K
Sam.
pT
Eth.
blti
*?:>
o>H-ft
nmns
7-0^
In Syriac
^,^0
Vl
:rfi<5ft
'and
'i-tegbaru
^ 'ye shall
]^D"n
^'^Q^
no
voo.^v
1H2^
^.^. J-a^ro
!?g
work
{5bD
ntae
JJ
|
)
left.
heavy
(work
no ad
of
e. g.,
comes
g-,
toot
J- t
.J
Jl
jL^iol
ri
/^
'i*c
la
'wr7?d
^
mada
'ua
^
5n
'no
road was
found.'
JJMQJJD
aa
^o
jl
la
person.
certain.
7
of expression.
In Arabic
it
indefinite noun,
may
e.
after the
g.,
i
Probably this statement is true with regard to Christian Palestinian,
and perhaps also with regard to Malulan, but the construction is not
mentioned by the authorities.
VoL.xxxii.]
U
To
certain
'a
rajula-mmd
J.^.j
191
man/
W)
ba'du 't-taldmifti
'a
-flXft
*ebrdmt
be'esit
'ahadu Wesi
and Tigrina. 2
in this sense,
Ta.
e.
***&
In Syriac
^^
In Tigrina
it
tiy&V,
is
Mde
y.,^
Amharic
may be employed
it
N"D3 Ninn
KJWK
In Modern Syriac
is
certain Samaritan/
'a
e.
g.,
certain enmity/
g.,
'a
certain
'a
certain
KVin
it
is
e.
'a
Hn^n^J^S
The
'one'
sdmerdiii
expressed by
noun,
hade
g.,
i
e.
man/
woman/
g.,
ideas
'a
be-peldn zavnd
'at
a certain time/
~be-peldn
duktd
'in
a certain place/
Little,
Few,
little,
'few
are expressed
by the following
words, viz.,
Ass. igu
Arab. J*J
qcMlu*,
Mod.
qalil
Some
examples given
only once.
it
certain youth.
in this meaning in
Hebrew woman.
man/
certain
'a
certain
'a
in Tigrina texts
it
occurs
3 With this
indefinite use of the demonstrative Ninn is to be
compared
the use of the Ethiopic "Hh- : as indefinite article (cf. p.
158).
Frank R.
192
-MT
Amh.
T*^
Ta.
f^4n
Jjedat
jeqit,
;
sg.
fr<V
and
Blake,
[1912.
pi.)
qelu
queriib,
Heb.
Syr.
Mod.
Syr.
Ch. Pal.
inflected,
The
the word
is
as descriptive adjectives.
The Aramaic words,
however, have a tendency to precede the noun, and in Ethiopic
and Tigrina preposition is the rule. The Samaritan forms stand
construction
before the
Ass.
itti
uqu
Arab.
J*c^*
malu n
J^
rijdlu
n
qalilu
Eth.
'WP ^VOA.
Amb.
fr
IXTitjR
^^fl
lieda^
(IP
Ta.
igi
Vi
Heb.
maual
'a
sauoc
'a
few
p. 31.
'few men.'
I
fishes.'
Meh. Gr.
few days.
,
Of. Jahn,
property.
7
"Ijg
Syr.
little
nestai '&$&
TQM
qalilu
few men.'
7
'a little
sun.
'a little
comfort.'
Vol. xxxii.]
193
^p
]0
Mod.
^p
<a
Syr.
'in
little
time.'
Jew. Pal.
niDD TJN
clothing.
pnu
Sara.
'a little
K'D ljn"S
'a little
ptD nyn'S
water/
7
Much, Many.
The ideas 'much/ 'many' are expressed by the following words, viz.,
Ass.
madu
Arab.
kathwu"; Mod.
^JX
flH"i
Amh.
-OH
Itatir
1
pi.)
tew^,
X^7
fee^w,
Heb.
Bib.
sg.
and
'ejeg
ni
Aram,
fcoal?
Ch. Pal.
^iD
--^ ^p
U; rdbd
Mod. Syr.
Man.
tysl
In Amharic, Christian Palestinian, Modern Syriac, and usually
in Mandaic, the words are invariable, and in Syriac it may
remain without inflexion. Where singular and plural forms are
Syr.
distinguished,
precedes
noun
Ass.
e.
g.,
Arab.
JU
j*J
kilabn"
kaMrima
katMru* mina
Eth.
TAl
flH"V
Of.
definite
"dtK
rt-flX
htye'&n
~bezuli
81.
property.'
,
*lMm\
Uzuhan 'many
sinners.
7
194
Franlc E. Slake,
Ta.
Amli.
-flH"*
fl-d
flH"}
7fl<5
-fltt
beziih sab
flfl*
Heb.
'many
people.'
bezitJi
[1912.
sau
bteu
21 njpo 'much
^JN 'many
DH
cattle.'
men.'
'many pains'
flesh.'
U*^
Bib.
)^Dt
times.'
Jew. Pal.
po
^5i
.Man.
Mod.
^K^D 'many
]^ jnw )3HD
Aram.
f^l
JLai
la.fioa.ro
J^;
Syr.
I
jL^i
2,
48).
^)DD
'many years.'
'many souls.'
'much honor.'
ra6a Igam 'much
r6
llofiooxo
susautite
A
^ A ^.^
*VA
susaiiate raba
splendor.'
many
horses.'
is
it
rubba-hum
rijdla
'many men/
stem
is
"1HK,
definite state,
e.
g.,
Ass. Sanu
J
*i&2i
Amh.
rt,1
Heb.
kdle\
leld
dOA
ba'ed
I
I
195
Vol. xxxii.]
Aram.
Bib.
Ch. Pal.
Jew. Pal.
Syr.
Man.
These adjectives follow the construction of ordinary adjectives
except in the case of Syriac, where it regularly precedes the
noun,
e.
g.,
Arab.
"
inn
DnnK
Eth.
*iV&
-flJirt.
XyaO.C-
Amh. A4
M/e'
HffD.e
fta*
A,ft
tJ^n
em-bd ed zamad
l
leld
'another man.
fce'esa
J
A^Y^Vht
'of
another
tribe.
Syr.
^j^l
Jlfioo
Various.
The idea
different kinds
of 'various,
of
pressed simply by
some. of the Aramaic
dialects.
Sam.
Syr.
^-
Mod.
Man.
ranga 'various
^1il
fcmfcO
In Amharic
'of
various colors.'
'various kinds.'
)T
]Kt
colors.
and A?
by the repetition
:;
i .
also occurs,
A>1
xo
A/I
xo
&$ &&
:
e.
:
g.,
)
i
zavfy**
A
n"
{
[
&W
lela
, -
ba-leld
^
J 'amlak
'various, different gods.
lela\.
7 w
km
.
,..
leiu]
la-leld
of disease.
daiie
'with
various kinds
Frank R. Blake,
196
&&
h&tR*?
mot
la-leiu leiu
2Vfc
leiu leiu
[1912.
'in different
'ardmt
deaths.'
kinds of animals.
'different
viz.,
Syr.
JLaij
(N;j}l):
e.
g.,
^^o
e.
genitive,
<k*1^ftJ\
g.,
fruit.'
Both.
expressed in various ways. In Assyrian it is indicated
kilalldn, kilallen, kilalle used as an adjective after the noun, e. g.,
'Both'
by
is
ina
both
In Arabic
sides.'
rivers.'
^^
is
suffix,
e.
kildni in the
article, or it
may
g.,
kild 'r-rajulaini
ar-rajuldni kild-humd
<
both
men ;
h&&m fc.W
Ta.
XR7
11
-.^jE. :TiMtf
Heb.
Same, Self.
In many of the Semitic languages there
for 'same', the simple demonstratives
having
is
no
this
special
word
meaning.
Vol. xxxii.]
197
ing;
may
'in
which
-.
same
sacrifice.
than 'same'.
In Ethiopic the emphatic pronouns formed by adding the
suffixes to Aft and
may stand before a noun in the sense
of 'self, same,' AA, is used with a nominative, fU? with an
'self
accusative:
AA7
e.
g.,
<??-hn*
definite
noun,
e.
g.,
book
the same
itself,
book/
-^
hu) 'the
The
similar
man
is sometimes expressed by O^ or a
nomen regens before the noun, or by the prosg. standing in apposition to a noun modified
idea
of 'same'
word
as
noun of the
3.
by a demonstrative,
%dtu
e.
g.,
'r-rajuli 'the
'aid
same man/
[distance/
same
Hu
self,'
is
e.
noun
in the sense of
g.,
way
in Syriac
(cf.
below).
Cf. Dill. Lex. Aeth. cols. 142, 722, 830, 869, 918, 919, 967.
Frank R.
198
Blake,
D^n
[1912.
nsn
1&SJJ
'the fruit
itself.'
'same'
may be
expressed by a repeated
,j
c*y
OQI
w>o*
The
idea of
AJ 'soul' or
<*a jj
'self'
3^
ncj?
<?{[
'self,'
Amh.
e.
'soul,'
'the
|5bn
In Amharic 2 QAfl^'
in Tigre
sense of
rb 13 rb
yioioB
jLja>uw
same
nature.'
same disciple.'
oo NroSID "TO PD 13 na 'in that same wagon/
in apposition to a noun is expressed by
CH^ nisrfe
ooooiA
in 13 in 'the
NJ3
'to his
e.
g.,
king himself.'
'Fate
itself.'
fl
'head,'
g.,
iWTtD-
aAO/F
negti-dcau lalabet-u
'their king,
himself.'
Ifhtl
Te.
^t
&fr
<?fh
dauU
Such.
'Such' is ordinarily expressed by some combination of the
7
particle hi, Jca 'as, like, and a demonstrative pronoun; the
Ethiopic form
is
1
t?&3 is also thus employed in other Aramaic dialects
in Jewish
Palestinian Dli 'bone' also seems to occur in this construction.
;
In Tigrina 002V
Praet.
Tiff.
bd'l 'lord' is
Spr. p. 160.
cf.
199
Vol. xxxii.]
regularly so preceded; in Amharic the idea may be expressed by a relative clause consisting of the adverb 'thus -f
r
relative + verb 'to be'; generally speaking the word for 'such
form
is
may
precede or follow:
e.
g.,
Ta.
fl-fl
h^Ro*
Amh. M&\]
sab
&a>-*\
kamzm
"7^
such a man/
nde7i ialla-u-w
maman
(ace.)
'such faith.'
A-d
Te.
tft&hfL
Heb.
Bib.
tr-K
Aram,
nj-j?
J.*^ ^-^o,
Syr.
vo,
VJC
li
KBTi
^^
)^n
'such pains.'
such a deed.'
y.U }nj;iD ]JJ ^ "I?
'such
a thing.'
r XDjriB Kjn Tp
'such
oppressions.'
JbjS-ol ]'^n ^K~ 8i?^K
Jjo,
lj
'in
JLalot
hatkha (prob.
before the
noun
Net
JLa
in this meaning,
=
e.
Not /zo^a T! Q,
hadakh
hada n&Sd
\
<guch people.'
signs.'
Enough.
2
expressed in various ways.'
In Arabic it is rendered by doUXJb Wl-kifaiati
'Enough'
e.
ficiency/
is
'in
the suf-
g.,
Cf.
In Modern Syriac
after the
noun
(cf.
pression iesedud
'it
p. 121): in Syriac 0,-s V13 and jxa*o (pBD) mean 'enough', but
they do not seem to be used attributively in Ethiopia the idea may be expressed by a relative clause with the verb AhA I 'akhala 'to suffice;' *Tn1 :
Meh. Gr.
ma 1an 'measure '-j- genitive also seems sometimes to have this meaning (cf. Dill.
col. 222): in Amharic the idea is expressed by ?"Kl2f* \ iam'which
suffices' used as an adjective (cf.Isenb. Amh. Diet. I, 89; II, 75.)
ibaqa
VOT,. XXXII. Part II.
14
Lex. Aeth.
200
JU
In Hebrew
construct
mdlu n
before
[1912.
it is
occur in Biblical
nfcP
&c.
for,'
e.
g.,
Numeral
By
Qualification.
Construction of Cardinals.
reversed concord
is
preserved in most of the Semitic languages,
hut in some either the feminine or the masculine forms have
1
type.
paratively rare masculine forms are regularly used with feminine nouns, the feminine has become the usual form with all
cardinals
dialect of Kurdistan.
So
in Classical Arabic,
Meh. Gr.
p. 75),
Hebrew,
p.
130
f.
VOL XXXII
Part III
Tl. p.
155.
15
Frank E.
202
Blake,
[1912.
classes.
e.
>^;
^>Ujl
'two' is also
^>U$\
g.,
broken plural
lis
if
there
is
one,
The numeral
paucitatis.
and
broken
plural,
o^
4o\J&
&j\
OU>
e.
g.,
banuna
thaldthattt
'three sons.
bamna
'three sons.'
Contrary
by the genitive singular
genitive plural) of the
A3U
c)
<JjUS*
(in
word
poetry
sometimes by the
for 'hundred,'
e.
g.,
'eleven'
M^
d)
The
singular,
e.
g.,
is
however,
ate
like
numeral.
The intermedi-
iia-
Vol. xxxii.]
'alfd
iia-arbdatiC
dmara"
dinar i n ua-mi*atu
'alfi
lia-arbduna
'alfa
'offi
203
dindri"
dmdri n iia-thamdnuna
'2,144,080 dinars.'
athiidba n
ithnatai
'five
'asrata
pieces of cloth.'
n
'asbdja
'twelve
hundred years.'
In Modern Arabic the constructions of the numerals are the
same as in the Classical language except in the following
cases.
When
is
O^v? cxt^
With
found,
e.
the
latter
g.,
numerals from 2
10 the singular
is
sometimes
g.,
<*o^
<*^.>L^.
<^*^j\
arbda gineh
'four pounds.'
3100
Frank R.
204
S*
nmrn
tJini
'hli
'$ri
$r
'mh
(pi.)
'r 'm-m
"If-m
(pi.)
V& j
four
hasf's (a measure).'
sV
\
'three offerings.'
(pi.)
(sg.?)
7?s/*
ws
[1912.
'$Wi-w
V6'
Blalce,
'lf-m (sg.)
'seventeen cubits.'
cuhits.'
(sg.) 'fourteen
'twenty thousands.'
'forty thousands.'
twenty
arba Sama
(sg.)
'four candles.'
The numeral
in
e.
-I,
g.,
In Hebrew
'one' is
an
adjective,
-in
nnfr?
e.
g.,
before or after
it
as adjectives, or before
it
in the construct,
e. g.,
'two men.'
'two
in
women.
(134e).
Vol. xxxii.]
205
'three days/
'three sons.'
'three cities.'
niJ3
The numbers
from
with
'eleven'
'three daughters.'
to 'nine-teen' usually take the
plural,
certain
e.
g.,
in
'eleven sons.'
DW
'twelve bullocks.'
'twelve rams' (Nu.
'eleven days.'
D^N
DV "sj inK
The
frequently
7,
87).
may
'forty cities.'
'twenty cubits.'
'sixty rams.'
stf
'thirty men.'
Wl Q V^
^
The
'
sixt J
after
pre-
'
20).
take the noun after them, 4 sometimes in the singular, 5 sometimes in the plural; all forms may stand in the absolute state,
For the use of singular and plural with the numbers above
and
p.
90
day,
less
'ten' cf.
ff.
ru^ year, Bh
man,
person, Bltf
Btea
ne
cw&i,
tfri&e,
t^nh month,
These nouns are in most cases the same as those mentioned in the
case
of
the
'teens,'
viz.,
tf', DV,
tf|>3, hftti,
and
^H
"is
(a
D^K'ntJ^tf
]S
thousand,
certain measure).
as,
e.
g.,
2).
The nouns which stand in the singular are in general the same as
which are placed in the singular with the 'teens' and 'the tens',
those
cf.
&,
viz.,
1V
y^ ^
talent;
Frank E. Blake,
206
of both 'hundred'
e.
[1912.
in
g.,
'a
hundred
thousand men.'
'a
fflK
tftf
years.
hundred men.'
hundred (loaves of) hread.'
'a hundred bunches of raisins.'
'three hundred foxes.'
'six
'two
<a
thousand
'six
goats.'
thousand camels.'
when they
it
n?3
UtUf]
DW}
JTIN
tfi^
'teens'
n '75
e.
g.,
years.'
'127 years.'
J^ H
In Phenician the noun modified by the numeral usually stands
before it in the plural, tho some cases occur in which it is
found after it in the singular, e. g.,
(sg.)
Dt^fi?
(pi.)
'fourteen years.'
(pi.)
'one
hundred pounds.'
''sixty years.'
in the
viz., r\bx is
viz.,
indecisive,
it
may be either
absolute
or construct; probably one form was meant in some cases and the other
The other forms are always in the absolute, viz., niNls,
in other cases.
Dsb. The form s fi^, however, is not used as a regular numebut only in the indefinite sense of 'thousands.'
2 This
statement is made by Winer, Gram. Chat., but all his examples in which the numeral follows are taken from Biblical Aramaic, cf. p. IllD^nNtt,
ral,
Vol. xxxii.]
207
Jew. Pal.
'seven days/
]"W nyat?
pa ID? ntyn
pDJJ nail
sons/
'fifteen
p&D pyaiN
pDy KWm jn& ny
'forty sockets/
20 rams' (Gen.
Sam.
J^IDV
32,
and
14).
pt? 1DV
pn pin
pa nn
IDjnn
'ten years/
'two bulls/
'two sons/
men/
'twelve
palm trees/
hundred men/
an adjective and follows the
'seventy
'four
'three'
e.
g.,
'one side/
to
'ten'
nD
'hundred;' as
plural, except, as in Arabic, in the case of
in Arabic and Hebrew they may stand before or after the
noun, before
it
Tin yaiK
'the four
'three
'four
g.,
winds of heaven/
men/
hundred/
'ten kings/
The higher numerals also take the noun in the plural, but
stand without exception as adjectives after the noun, e. g.,
'twelve
'thirty
months/
days/
']
'
Of. p. 205, n. 2.
Frank E. Slake,
208
[1912.
always precedes. Except with 'one' the noun stands generspeaking in the plural; in Mandaic, however, some instances of the singular are found, and in Malulan the singular
it
ally
is
absolute
is
^ H~^I P&'TOW
t.m^KiI
Syr.
Man.
JL^ao
pn
N'OKVKtt
1DJ>rOn K2&
'the
two
e. g.,
angels.'
Mai.
tlotd
'three days.'
yam
flotd
Mod.
Syr.
Syr. (U*>)
JLjul
y^
,j-o
^fro^ (Ntt? ) D1
1
11
im
pDJJ 'twenty-one
days.'
noun after
Man.
Syr.
*:
e.
g.,
JLa*, ^^a^
IJ^
i^ ]^$
Uoi
J^.ail
nn
rij;?1
thousand
KJ-1^ 'six
cities,
years'.
preserved in a
is
Dekapolis.'
In the languages of the Abyssinian group also the adjechas become the regular one. It is the only
construction in Amharic and Tigrina, and the usual one in
The numeral regularly precedes the noun in all
Ethiopic.
three languages. The reversed concord of gender, as we have
seen, has been given up, except in comparatively rare instances
in Ethiopic.
With the numerals from 'two' upwards the
rules for the concord of number are as follows.
In Ethiopic
tival construction
Vol. xxxii.]
the
plural
frequently
the singular
in
209
<&c.
tho the
may
may be
numerals,
e.
beings stand
living
the plural,
g.,
Eth.
Wartu ua-Mastu
'thirteen
'elf
ftUT-C
Mas
AjECHF
A-FF
mato
'ahgur
cities.'
lej
'a
women.'
hundred
boys.'
9
nomen regens
0-fco*
kamesta 'edau
'five
ft,
e. g.,
men.'
as
e.
its
Often
noun,
g.,
ina i$ten
umi
'in
one
day.'
me
'two days.'
The constructions of the other numerals are not entirely
clear, as they are usually not written out, but the following
Sina
ft
in
the
construct
or
as
an
210
Frank R. Blake,
ana
irbit
'to
nagmade 'team of
Seldlti
b)
Sare
irbitti
ume
'three days.
[1912-
four.
follow the
noun
e.
g.,
kibrat irbitti
kibrdti
"
Icibrat arba'i
kibrdti
c)
arba'i
(genitive)
to
take
the
noun
in
the
e. g.,
In parent Semitic,
had
in all pro-
The
their
or adjective.
The
noun seems
to
it is
was
more
1
In Old Egyptian the cardinal ordinarily stands after the noun, which
usually in the plural; in the Pyramid texts the cardinal may stand in
apposition before the noun; in New Egyptian the cardinal usually stands
before the noun, to which it is joined by the genitive n: similarly in
is
Coptic;
noun
construction of adjectives, those from 20 up the construction of substantives the adjectival construction gains on the substantive construction
;
in the
I.
521535,
pp.
espec. 522.
cf.
Vol. xxxii.]
likely that
211
by the
numeral
In general the lower numbers seem to have preferred a
plural noun, the higher numbers, a singular noun.
The original status of the numerals has been best preserved
in Arabic and Hebrew, and many traces of it are found in
the other languages, but in the Aramaic and Ethiopia branches
the numerals have passed over more or less completely to an
The common use of the genitive sinadjectival construction.
gular after the higher numbers, and the rare ue of an accuafter certain numbers which we find in Arabic,
sative plural
Determination of Cardinals.
The combination
those
used ordinarily
is
it
between the
only
it
numeral:
'tens' it
e.
may
stand
it
is
g.,
e
Cl.
it
is
to multiples of 'hundred',
Arabic
it
n -.17
ath-tlialathata
^7
oaral
v
,7 <
'l-asara
the thirteen.
as-saVatu na-'s-sab'una
'the seventy-
seven.'
XSU&UH
Eg. j+s>
^y&*2 j^jyi
In
Classical
adjectival,
dou*-ji.l
el-udhid
tie-arm
'the twenty-one.'
is
article, e. g.,
When
stands usually only with the nomen rectum, tho cases occur
in which it stands before the regens, in which case the combination has become practically a compound, 1
i
cf.
p. 284.
e.
g.,
Frank R. Blake,
212
^.rL Jiamsatu
[1912.
men.'
When
article is
'as-sab atu
seventy-seven camels.'
l
^Ua. ^ixp
AJftUJl
'atli-tlialaihatu
a$ara
jamala"
'the
thirteen camels.'
when
article;
the
construction
first
first
it
is
alone
the article
e.
is
g.,
iysx*J\ ^~>\j&\
duftUUI
numeral precedes
el-biiut et-telate
C^^-N
iie-a^rm 'the
thirty-three houses/
^^\
'the
el-Jjamsm
J^3j*^\ el-qurft$
fifty
piastres.'
fad da
'the
eight
piastres.'
j*.j*j
<^^.l
twenty-five
el-lmmsa tie-a$rm
^^jo^Ml el-arba'm
^J^LO
humar
'the
asses.'
'the
gandfiq
forty
chests.'
In Mineo-Sabean the
the noun
times with
numeral,
e.
-n
g.,
^1
definite
**j\
article is regularly
D^JH
e.
g.,
men' (Jud.
18, 7).
p}?n ^n
litfJJ
The
1
the
first
Anak.'
cardinal
usually
takes
the
construction
n of
of
Hommel, but
Vol. xxxii.]
descriptive
tho
adjective,
in
number
of cases
it
213
stands
g.,
The
first.
accusative
hVJHlt
tHVF
e.
f.).
g.,
stars.'
'ardt-u
166
copC
is
mato saiwc
hundred men.'
two blasphemers.'
'the four
and agrees
plural
suffix
Syr.
^o
r p\l.li
rto
few
wcaAToio*
V?**'*
Kt^X
te
Eth.
VI
'the
II'THFI
jmwn
two
rhTi-rt
worlds.'
kel#e-hdn 'edatti-M
sati atl-lift.
tas'ati-M
'his
~hezb 'the
nine
This construction
passage,
Many
cf.
of
tribes.'
spirits.'
viz.,
]inr6fl
form
is
two hands.'
of
the
the
K ST "O$
Aramaic
'these three
dialects
so in
13, 14.
f.
Frank R.
214
Blake,
[1912.
'the
fk\.a
days.'
four daughters
in law.'
Ch. Pal.
KTin TiymK
Kr6 Knt^an
K7m&
Sam.
commandments.'
Ordinals.
Special forms for the ordinals usually occur only for the
ten numerals, in Modern Syriac only for the first two. 1
first
the ordinal
is
e.
g.,
Ass.
Arab.
time.'
first house.'
first
woman.'
Meh.
Heb.
<J^\ k'l^Jl
gaien solit
D1 H
Eth.
(iwaviit
Amh.
(\
Ta.
fourth year.'
Ai^Ct'.lfl^t: 'aSarte seat 'the tenth hour.'
^^n
Aram.
Bib.
faff a*
Ortt
;
^OD^-
ba-Sdlest
;
Wat
bdrdtand-u
dmat
'in
the
Del. Ass.
Praet.
Dalm.
Amh.
Gr. p. 192.
2 In
Egyptian and Coptic the ordinals may stand either before or after
the noun; in Coptic the two are joined by the genitive sign n; cf. Erman,
t.
Gr. p. 131; Steind. Kopt. Gr. p. 90.
Vol. xxxii.]
W&n
Sam.
*n 'the
215
Comparative Syntax of
fifth son.
nn^n
Jutl
Syr.
Mod.
Syr.
JL**
is
employed it stands before the ordinal, the whole
combination being treated as one idea. 2 e. g.,
cxo jy 'auualu baiti n 'the first house.
01.
article
Eg.
auual marra
*;* Jjl
cuJlxJl et-tdlit
fy.
Sometimes in
special defiform of the noun, the article may be omitted either
wholly or partly. So in Hebrew with the noun or with both
noun and ordinal: 3 in Amharic with the ordinal; in Amharic
ite
the ordinal in this case stands very frequently after the noun.
This omission is especially frequent in the enumeration of days,
chapters, or the like.
Heb.
\ltf
Wn
g.,
7
(iMlt ?
Amh.
e.
#1
^"0^ Hmf?
:
8).
1,
31).
The cardinals are frequently used for the ordinals, not only
when the corresponding ordinal does not exist, but also often
when the corresponding ordinal is in use. The cardinal may
be used as an adjective, or
The
it
may
construction
is
and Hebrew
it
may
In Coptic likewise the first ordinal may stand in the construct before
noun; cf. Steind. Kopt. Gr> p. 90.
2 To be contrasted with this is the Amharic construction of the ordinal
1
its
'first'
3
as genitive to its
noun
Gr. p. 428
(cf. p. 217).
(
126 w).
Frank E.
216
Blake,
[1012.
and Mandaic the cardinal regularly preusually in the singular, but in Mandaic
and in a few cases in Amharic the plural is used. In Arabic
the cardinal takes the article like an ordinal; in Hebrew the
in Amharic, Tigrina,
The noun
cedes.
article
e.
is
g.,
J1
CU'^J1
^A ^+\
cx*J\
el-bet
9^
Arab.
o^r^*
al-baitu
'l-
i$r&na 'the 20 th
house/
Eg. Arab.
el-lamasta$ar 'the 15 th
house.'
nyX^
Eth.
toO^Ct
the 110
n^oD^r
Ov>C-$
?M'
la-
th
amat
'in
year/
the
year 1000.'
Heb.
DV
inn
'in
'in
Man.
NT!
DVn
N11n
iTOV
Amh. a^ ^ X\&
1
X^t
'in
the eleventh
year.'
7o*
qan
day.'
:
&a-7-4fi lta-200,
81 gamanat
Ta.
n*Ct
^J^
ft9t
hour.'
The
construction
is
found in
Cf. Ges.
In
Heb. Gr.
p.
456
134 o).
the examples given by Nold. Man. Gr. p. 348 f., except this
one the numeral precedes and the noun has the plural form as in the
second example. With this plural is to be compared the plural which is
2
all
occasionally found in
p. 329 (top).
Amharic
cf. last
Vol. xxxii.]
Arab,
s^.1
<JJ1
x^ &
fi sanati
'alfin
mina
217
l-hijrati
'in
&<3y$
^^
vhti
mtfa
'in
'in
Eg. Arab.
wagon No.
Heb.
Jtttfn
Ph.
30.'
Bib.
Mod.
wl
Syr.
Jjo*>
mwa
article is
used
in the
noun
e. g.,
Similar, tho not directly allied with this, is the Amharic construction b.y which the ordinal 'first' is placed in the genitive
after its
noun
(cf.
p.
169 above),
i
e.
ia-fitana-ii
Nominal
g.,
sau
Qualification.
Construct Chain.
The
after or,
possible
to
consider the
cardinal a
genitive
as
here:
but
it
is
also
it
(Hartleben) p. 32,
VOL, XXXII. Part
III.
16
Frank E.
218
in
It
all.
is
Blake,
[1912.
Hebrew; in Assyrian, Etkiopic, Amharic, Tigrina, Tigre, Phenician, and Aramaic, and in Modern Arabic and Mishnic Hebrew,
it is more or less
completely replaced by other constructions;
in the Eastern Aramaic dialects the use of the construct is
more restricted than in the Western, and in Malulan, Modern
Syriac, and Amharic it has been practically lost, occurring
The two words of the
only in a few standing expressions.
construct chain form one idea, and cannot be separated by
another word except in certain special cases. 2 The first word
loses its primary accent, and usually suffers a modification in
form. The second word stands logically in the genitive, but it
is
only in Assyrian and Arabic that it is also genitive in form;
in the other
languages it is the same as the nominative. In
1
possible to
definite
rectum
Of. Parisot, Dial. Mai. p. 506; Wold. Neus. Spr. p. 117 ff.; Praet. Amh.
Spr. pp. 195, 196.
2 This is almost the
only species of nominal compound known to Semitic,
tho even here no real compound is formed save in exceptional cases (cf.
1
pp. 211
f.,
4454;
is
-}-
pp. 485
For cases
construct
cf.
515.
in
Hebrew
in
which the
article
(127f,
Vol. xxxii.]
219
<&c.
Ass.
bob
biti
bel
Hani
Arab.
'a
cxo
v*lU
king's
daughter,
princess.'
Min.
>XLo
Eth. (D&
Ta.
^^V
Te.
Ml
bit
;
<0At
ljte
n^
fcO^D
1*1)
Syr.
axa*
UJOJD ouoi
When
word
of God.'
the
girl.'
'a
king's daughter.'
'the king's daughter.
king of the
man's heart.'
'the
'a
land.'
NSfctt
i^p nn
'the
noun with a
n
na
^BH
pNH Tte
Ph.
mik-n
ualda neguS
&7RM*h
a iiad
Heb.
Bib.
cxo
T7-/"
possessive suffix,
money.'
Holy
Spirit.'
a proper name or a
the combination is necessarily
is
definite, e. g.,
Heb.
Heb.
Arab.
e.
son.'
fathers.'
also
g.,
*I*n
<UJ\
my
^ ^1
J^ JJ3 ^
'the
life.'
may
article,
^xxU.1
e.
g.,
J^yi
^J\
^j-u^s*.
hasanu
man
of
'l-iiajhi
The
tho of course
it
16*
220
Frank R.
Blake,
[1912.
treated as
if
it
the article,
e.
g.,
sative,
is
'n-ndsa (ace.)
The anomalous construction al-qdtilu 'n-ndsi
fusion of (a) and (c).
(c) al-qatilu
is
due to a con-
first
Eg. Arab.
Te.
AQ^
element, e. g.,
^UJl el-md-ttard 'the rose water.'
ft^
la-la'al-bet 'the
^^
Arab.
C^+*JJ\
5^
'n~nu'mana 'Hira
z^a. Mratu
Numan.'
(capital city) of
3
*
cf. p.
151.
n. 2.
s
cf.
For cases
in
Vol. xxxii.]
Arab.
O^o g^^>
<UJl^
AJ>^
'inna
'8~$dta
a'LixJi
^1
tasma'u $auta,
ua-Udhi, rabbihi
1*1* ^?
Syr.
fl^'tenl
Ta.
^a
voice,
hears the
by God, of
its
master.'
)13N 'Oa'H
Hpl!
>
v^ Nr6a
toa,
JLcujj yjul
'the sheep
221
'eleids 'in
e.
construct,
g.,
JM
?:C
When
is,
e.
g.,
^ J-^^
Jo
Arab.
1J^* Jj*i
'lldhu iada
qaja'a
^7
man
ua-rijla
An
tb&
^k e
{.
r jk eg
the
off
an d people of Israel.
who
'those
cut
hd%d
fa'ala
Jiitn.
'God
aJUl
write
and read
their
The
c)
(cf.
pp.
225238).
e.
a ATIQ
&ftftA
ua-hezba
<
'the
tribes
and
nagada 'eerd'el
Arab.
b)
*<, 3
j Zaid
saifu zaidi? ua-rumhu-hu)
^ U^
may be
g.,
Frank E. Blake,
222
Eth.J7.: Xft/b2V
oWHft-
'the
[1912.
tribes
and
of
people
When
'l-l)arri
Heb.
niKfcrn
Eth. hyxin
ua-l-bahri
D'B^n
'nfef
T
and sea ;
tvw
ia><r>j>:c
the God of heaven and earth
j
'amldka samdi iia-medr]
This combination may also be expressed in several other
i
<
ways, viz.:
a) the nomen regens may be repeated before each genitive;
b) the nomen regens and the first of the modifying nouns may
form a construct chain, and the second stand after a parindicating the genitive;
the
genitive of both nouns
c)
ticle
particle:
may be
such
e. g.,
indicated by
Eth. Fftot
u ergiti m
'the
HAT tbnM&9
:
shepherds
of
Lot
and Abraham.'
g,
Assyr.
lilt
nakamati 'treasure
houses.'
'precious stones.'
aline nisiqti
i
of the land).'
:
'agma gdbaiidt
'ribs
(bones of the
side).'
of Christians).'
>1,
ol,
xxxii.l
xxxii.]
Comparative Syntax
Sunta of the Combinations, &c.
Comparative
Heb.
WW
^a
223
'Benjamites.'
Kia
is
it
used,
e.
regens,
g.,
8^(5
Eth.
W ^
Te.
&*<{:
Arab.
AJ^*S
;
rfi$Vh
weapon.'
&IA&
When
is
and Aramaic;
When
in
is
definite,
definite
definite
and
indefinite,
distinguish
between
g.
Arab.
'a
x^Jl
Heb.
n^H3 2nt
ri|B
Bib.
e.
mm
nS
Aram. ?1 Kr6
nm
Sam.
Itstyp
'the great
)D!?n
'in
(thy great
work of JHVH.'
temple.^
and true
law).'
In Coptic when the nomen regens of a genitive combination is modiby an adjective or another genitive, this additional modifier is added
after the genitive sign ente, cf. Steind. Kopt. Gr. p. 81.
2 Altho
this passage, Ezra 5, 8 is usually translated 'the temple of
the great God,' [so A. Bertholet, Die Bucher Esra und Nehemiah (=
Abt. XIX of Marti's Kurzer Handc. zum AT.) Tubingen & Leipzig, 1902,
1
fied
p. 21]
nection of
1"\
with
m not
nil
nh
unlikely.
JV3
'this
temple'
Frank E.
224
Eth.
DajR
Ofc,2
a>l
Blake,
c
'a&n
[1912.
apada
warn
wwn
Ass.
Ambiguity
in
may
many
In
nomen regens
or
nomen rectum.
Arab.
cxo
r -v-o
(^J\^
^7
babu
g.,
baiti
...
batii n
kabiru n
'a large
house- door.'
7>k
kabm n
'a
door of a
large house:
'the large
Eg. Arab.
^
~&\ cu^J\ ejb bab el-bet el-kebir
i
-L^-L
T-.I
door
f the house.'
77
large house.'
Heb.
Ass.
el-bet 'the
J
man's good
150 'the man's good son.'
sangu $ru $a Bel 'high-priest of Bel.'
namgaru zaqtu sa epe$ taliazi 'the sharp battle.
sword.'
Eth.
00 At
OAjfc
Xlt
ftll
day of judgment.'
the nomen regens is modified by a demonstrative, the
demonstrative has in general the same position as the adjec-
When
tive,
tho in Ethiopic
The
it
stands
article required
(king's house).
Vol. xxxii.]
Heb.
^J^'T^N
n{H
'this
good-for-nothing
225
man (man
of no account).'
1
Bib.Aram.n5 ! Nrjb-rP.
Sam.
p D\1^K nPB
"HW
Eth.
o^ftt
Oft.
:
'this
'this
camp
cnjftl
udn
of God.'
zati
'this vinyard.'
w&ta
Prepositional Phrases.
positions, the
positional phrases,
dialects, viz,,
it
'
in
field.
The
c)
e)
other prepositions,
ficant role.
insigni-
obsolescent,
which
ever,
it
but
also
to
is
awkward
or inadmissable.
(0)
The
first class
of prepositions
1 Of.
In Coptic the genitive sign n is employed not
p. 218, n. 1.
only to indicate a genitive but also to connect noun and attributive adSimijective, cardinal, or ordinal; cf. Steind. Kopt. Gr. pp. 83, 89, 90.
larly the so-called ligatures in the Philippine languages are employed both
in genitive and adjectival relations cf.
article The Tagalog Ligature
;
my
vol.
1.
c.,
231.
Frank E. Blake,
226
In Assyrian the
employed as follows:
$a
relative
[1912.
dependent noun
may
be
genitive in a construct
chain, with or without suffix on the nomen regens, refer-
'in
mazda.
mutu $a a$$ati
..
'the woman's husband/
mussu a a$$ati
ildni $ut Same erciti m 'the gods of heaven and
,
modified by a possessive
other modifier, e. g.,
is
when
the
earth.
nomen regens
Mdme
emphasis at the beginning of a sentence with retrospective suffix on the following dependent noun, e. g.,
abikta-8u aStakan 'of so and so .... I
$a
for
NN
'of
Media ....
may
Kit Wll
ment.
e.
g.,
'elat
'enta
kuenane
'the
day of judg-
a) after proper
state,
ftt
e.
i
in the construct
g.,
hfo?" Hj&lhS
in Judah.
beta
b) after
Vol. xxxii.]
227
c)
^y?
llihJi.fi
of the
nOrtt
^COt
new
covenant.'
O0.e
HH-ii
suffix,
or follow-
la-elat
za-kwnane
'on the
WW
rt(m
Hfttt-h
'the
rfcfav
HOJ&^fi
kola
Jiaql
e.
g.,
mandrakes/
e)
when a noun
is
before
the
first
may
0<fij&
conaC'l
?ft't
HAT
may
g.,
oJHfrfl^y11
2VJ5
WH6/F*}
'.
?rt,?n
eth (ace.)/
tfrli
Wtt&lr
228
Frank
Ha*/?f a*
Blake,
[1912.
zaiid-dgaii 'the
ia-faMMn
crown of
the wise.
u~m
WT-y
IK-I
f.eOf-ay
oJl^-y
iiandem
iaqob-em
tTflT
ia-iosd-m
tV-X7
<t(Lr*l?
ia-
ia-iehudd-m ia-stmon-em
When
of
to the genitive:
g.,
y"W
t07^t
:
o*y : ia-qedusdn t$gffl
hdimdnot-dcaii-m 'the hope and belief of the saints/
sign of the genitive ? is quite frequently omitted, the
?4&<VJ
The
e.
\
?ffD-f-o*
hftP
ia-mato-ii
'alaqd
e.
g.,
commander
'the
of
hundred.'
A^i^fl^
h(l&
When
commander
of a
hundred.'
iiada
its
so
on
indefinitely,
the ?
of the
subordinate
Vol. xxxii.]
229
last
?5^:C
first
single ?
is lost.
ia-medr nagastat-em
YIP*?*??*
'and the prince of the kings of the earth/
:
&(($*
e. g.,
'alaqd
Son of God/
flOaft !
gize, 'at
Some
9"Cfr
ZH>
instances
also in Tigrina
Amharic,
e.
g.,
of eternity/
life
With regard
to the application of the article and the acthe genitive phrase is treated just like an adjective
166 f.). When both elements of the combination, however,
cusative
(cf. ,p.
-1,
Art. ^O^^CD-
h&S*
e.
is
g.,
hundred/
:
Ace. ?ft0*
&"}
ia-bet^el-u
fcftfM
son of
man/
ia-darat lebs-ti-n
'his
death of a
upper garment
(his
breast- clothing)/
?,*F1
^V'flft
ia~darat-&-n
lebs
'the
clothing
of his
breast/
f&R&M &#
:
i
Cf. Praet. Tig. Spr. p. 212 f.; Littm. Te. Pron. p. 292.
In Tigrina
the use of the construct chain in such expressions instead of the locution
with
also
e. g.,
X1M
a<!to
rCWh
cf. op.
instead of
et loc, cit.
is
230
Frank R.
i
Blake,
[1912.
in heaven.'
fcm
relation,
e.
g.,
of
M/
e. g.,
Aramaic the two constructions are used side by side, in Biblical Aramaic, with about the same degree of frequency, while
Jewish Palestinian the relative construction has gained considerably on the other; in Syriac and Mandaic the relative
in
Of.
Homm.
This $> with its genitive may be used in apsessor' (cf. p. 151, n. 1).
position to a preceding noun, in which case it is very much like a genitive sign, cf.
n
j> JA.J rajulu %u mali
JLo
'a
man
of wealth)/
O^
On
Arab.
^^)
Eth.
Hrt^fr
XA
Te.
^Juixi
Homm.
zarlamg
'.
'ella
'a leper.'
'amadd 'unjust
people.'
A4*^^V
Afiy"J
Min.
O^fl
la-
C^>
amen
$t
'the believer/
nsq-m
Gr. p. 415
'she of
186 a
N.=Goddess
S);
Littm.
of
Te.
N/
Pron.
p. 305;
231
Vol. xxxii.]
1
is usually
In Biblical Aramaic the nomen
dropped.
without
in
the absolute or emphatic state
suffix
stands
regens
relative
according as it is definite or indefinite; in Syriac and Mandaic it stands regularly in the emphatic state, though the absolute is also used in rare instances.
In practically all the
dialects when both nomen regens and nomen rectum
are determinate in sense, the nomen regens may take a suffix
referring to the nomen rectum (cf. p. 145 ff.). As in Ethiopic, the
Aramaic
W^
Aram.
Bib.
irtt 'a
stream of
head of
rraftn 'the
name
PlBtf 'the
Syr.
J~~ NBNn
ialij
NBD3
te
Mod.
Syr.
gold.'
of God.'
'false
money.'
king of Babylon.'
HI? 'the son of God.'
'the
]vbwt
(Roman)
fire/
'every
military
office.'
la^w,
Seudqit
Jietiidtd
'forgiveness
of
sins.'
When
used,
g.,
Bib.
nb
JVn
^jj
'the gold
and
silver
Syr.
)o !
ij^ttfl
^a^
nnT
MJ'ijplB "1^8
'Adam's breaking
of the covenant.'
In Phenician the
relative plus
dependent noun
is
quite fre-
e.
g.,
pBP
For an explanation of
this
macom
ending
cf. p.
146.
and god-
Frank E.
232
The second
grina,
Blake,
[1912.
of prepositional phrases
in all of
class
nomen rectum.
In Tigrina and Tigre the word
ndi (<Eth.
*t<P
neudi
used to introduce phrases of this type. In Tigrina the order of the phrase is free like that of the relative
phrases in Ethiopic and Aramaic, tho the natural position
'possession') is
is
by the relative in Ethiopic: in Tigre the phrase stands regularly before the noun, tho it
Ta. 7A.1
may
*fcH*n
follow. 1
gaffld ndi
e.
g.,
'oihzdb 'Galilee of
the
heathen.'
?j&X7!Lfrfl/h>
fr&ft
ndi~egzVaHher qedus
'a saint of
God.'
Ktf\
'I,
Te.
j&
&9"9t
however,
(L
}&
am
fr&ft
XW Wfr
i
dialects,
replaced by a noun meaning 'possession' governing the genitive and standing in apposition to the nomen r eg ens.
These nouns are the genitive signs ^Ux (Syria and Algeria),
chain
may be
^<^
^^
O^->, O^^o
tnetu,
nomen
least, it
regularly
regens
may
8uiut,
takes
,^$0^:0
Ux>
e.
g.,
my
companion.'
j,>u*XxJl
JU
c_jUXJ\
el-kitdb
book.'
Cf. Litt.
mdl et-tdlmid
'the pupil's
Vol. xxxii.]
233
haqq
el-musafir 'the
el-asakir
eg-Qanduq
traveler's trunk.'
lU~Jl
window
'a
el-garni
of the
mosque.'
Here
North
in
^>
to
also
is
strative b,
Africa,
e.
g.,
cu-UJl
girl/
(tree
of
olives).
(0
Prepositional phrases of the third class are found in Arahic,
Ethiopic, Tigriiia, Hebrew, Biblical Aramaic, Samaritan,
rarely in Syriac.
and
^UJJ ^1
^J
follows,
viz.:
a)'
the
as
ff^ft^
MiOrtiP**
of your father
o>
A^e-C
iieluda (ace.)
la-abu-kemmu 'children
(Matt. 5, 45).
la-medr 'salt of the
$u
earth' (Matt.
5, 13).
b) to
1L&YZMI fra*
i
of
c) after
them
XA
'ella
atf/W
found.
is
bftC
when the
after a negative,
definite, e. g.,
'i-ietrakab
lomu
'no trace
'asr
Arrfrtft
ojfcrtZ
of,'
A&6tia>-&
e.
g.,
ua-'ardcfi-hu la-
John
below, p. 244
f.).
cf. p. 220, n. 4.
Strictly speaking this belongs to the discussion of the pronoun
its modifiers, but it is added here for the sake of
completeness.
2
VOL. XXXII.
Part, ITI.
17
and
Frank R. Blake,
234
e)
[1912.
is
nomen rectum
character of the
(cf.
p. 145):
e.
g.,
of
mehrat-u la-egzVabher
'the
mercy
God/
(DCP rtj&Xt
i
7*C
medr
iiarq-a la-ieHii
'the gold of
that land/
fta* rtftft-h
sem-u la-abu-ka 'the name of thy father.'
In Tigrina a phrase introduced by the preposition 1 ne 'to'
;
ne-egzVabher
maVak
'the
angel
of God.'
flftjB^
Ifr^jP
h are
watchmen
of Saul'
(1.
Sam.
14, 16);
are, viz.:
a) to
nrf?
mate
b) to modify
itive or
a possessive
suffix, e. g.,
c)
isp-^
'in
e.
g.,
in
129
which
c, g).
b is
cf.
Ges.
235
Vol. xxxii.]
DV
njBto
Dil^Jtt
8,
'on
14).
h is in general the
same
as in
an indeterminate,
e.
g.,
1
Aram.
Bib.
^T?"! ?
N 8T
^9
'
a kin g of Israel.'
burnt offerings for the
Lord
Sam.
of Heaven.
K'rOto 3*6
Y$
rvrt
nr6n OV
'the third
Adar.'
Sam.
c)
JIITp'SB^ nrtfOn
nW3
'in
going out.'
modified
a
noun
by a genitive, e. g.,
already
modify
'the
3
n^3
W^Di
Sam.
nnnp pD^
family chief of the
family of Kohath.'
to
^-
Ua^^
^o
and
n?;D^
e.
time,
N;sna
JO
g.,
'on the
north
of the enclosure.'
'thirty
months
Cases like:
Ua
IWa
'in
the
life,'
In Malulan
common
il
is
dairaiwt
il
pait
il
genitive determinant,
e.
g.,
Of. Nold.
247).
17*
Frank E. Blake,
236
[1912.
an indeterminate,
e.
g.,
haiiu n
*.
of possession after an indeterminate noun, the object of the preposition in this case
being the plural of the governing noun followed by the
b) to
the
express
genitive
e.
g.,
jsa& qa$ru
win qucuri
qa$ru maliki"
n
'a
royal
rnaliki"
castle.'
min quguri
'l-maliki
n U-l-maliki 'a castle of the
qa$ru
king.'
n min
Ux>
'a
qagru
maliku
multiki fdrisa
king
of Persia/
to modify a
c)
^x?\
sjl^^ot 'agharu-hu
e.
g.,
relatives
of the Jinn/
In Ethiopic a phrase
for a partitive genitive,
fl*ftv
tW}
Xyi
after
e.
&y-
or
sometimes stands
g.,
XJ^A-OX
among
'the
men.'
also, like
may
h<*
l
gfa^ffut
dmata 'em-Jiemat-u
of Noah's
Ict-noh 'in
life
(when
Noah's life).'
Phrases of this sort
languages,
e.
g.,
Sam.
mm
pW
Bib.
Aram.
^AjE.o't
it
was
also
JO D^D 'water of
the
river.'
floors of
summer.'
(e)
The
is
min ba'dika
'thy
Vol. xxxii.J
Eth. ftyO
4fh
237
flrfifl^
(lXTi*
Heb. nJ>
&(**>
Vtip* 'her
D^m $B
Sam. IfcJD
husband with
her' (Gen.
nfcPD} 'prince
3, 6).
1, 1).
Other Forms.
Heb.
Bib.
rinfcltf
TSga
e. g.,
the harvest.'
'joy in
more
closely.
Ethiopic this
is
itPN
when
is
it
without
article,
Eth.
M* mvp
;
'ehtu
to the
ftvn
aO^
*ynh
'eribale-ka 'there is
sister
e. g.
according
flesh.'
Hfclnfch
no other
K'*n
"l^fcj
'his
za-ba-8ega
=n^
D^Tl^n
a3
God
bti'da
'amlaka za-
beside thee.'
*&) 'theflocksofherfather.'
'the butler and the baker
1^
Jerusalem in Judah.'
'the
water
firmament'
under the
(Gen. 1,7).
Frank E.
238
rnn#
Mish.
rtiSO
Blake,
[1912.
nj# 'thesleepofthemorning.'
'the reward of the com-
W n?&
mandments.'
b& VT*pn
)1in
Aram.
Bib.
D^rPl
"H
N^yn
man of
the captives.
HK1SN
of the king.'
'the
baker
itebl
nnVl
'the sheep of her father.'
n^"| ^?')0
Sam.
'a
15?
my
mnam nmii
Mai. gabrno til-ma lida 'the
(
men
'the fishes
of the river
(Nile)/
of Malula.'
Arab. *LJ\
Alg.
JLo
L-a-^cJ\
king's sword.
The
is
sessive suffixes. 1
the
suffix,
Cf.
The combination
306313
105),
147)
stan,
pp. 110113. Goodwin, Greek. Gram., pp. 31, 82 Delbr. Verg. Syn. III.
pp. 91 93. In a number of the Malayo-Polynesian languages similar
enclitic pronominal forms exist; so in Malay, Javanese, and the Philip;
pine languages:
1906, pp.
in
365386
Hungarian and
p.
386
Turkish:
cf.
(espec.
bot.).
Possessive suffixes
F.
Ney,
v.
27.
Ungarische
Tiirkische
occur also
Sprachlehre,
Gram.,
Berlin,
Vol. xxxii.]
The noun
is
made
239
definite
Arab.
'ardu-hn
<*oo)l
'his country.'
in
Heb.
njjis
<**.;!
Syr.
Arab.
is
MM
Malt,
meaning possession
article,
e.
may
noun with
it
modifying
is
possessive suffix)
g.,
possessive suffix
definite,
and an
adjective
when one
distinguished.
Western Aramaic.
Arab.
is
if it is
a cardinal, but
it
may
also
be
*l^j.Jl
Heb.
ngmn
Amh.
jtSTltF
&*
*
T"|;
2V#
Contrast with
this
il
6 irari^p <rou J
Of.
Grammar,
2
p.
206
tuo padre
(946);
noun modified by
e.
g.,
'thy father.'
C. N.
Grandgent, Italian
Of. p. 219, n. 2.
In Maltese this is probably due to the influence of the Italian construction, e. g., la sua figlia; cf. Brock. Comp. Gr. p. 470, n. 2.
3
Frank E, Blake,
240
[1912.
ne$uh lebb-achu-n
hearts' (2 Pet.
(ace.)
'your
pure
3, 1).
suffix often
e. g.,
it,
ina emqi
wise heart.'
life.'
Amh.
7i
;M*
^jfc&Ti
ielih
power
Ta.
XHy
Heh.
Sam.
)^
'OIDD
words of ours.'
Syr. ^*Xoi ^Aao J^n )^p
w^^jt
Mod. Syr.
1*1 'aha Seuaiti 'this neighbor of mine.'
'these
Just as
it is impossible to express the combination of inderegens with definite rectum by a construct chain (cf. p.
2 18 f.), so ordinarily the combination of indeterminate and personal
finite
(cf.
pp.
Arab. ^U
225238):
-I
e.
g.,
Emphatic.
cf.
is
241
Vol. xxxii.]
phasis on the possessive, though in some cases these constructions have become practically equivalent to the noun + suffix.
(a)
An
suffix
may
be
is
noun
in
Classical Arabic;
e.
UK
Heb.
the
after
noun
in
g.,
'Tilfc
(2
Sam.
19, 1).
Sam.2
p^Bl
priK
Eg. Arab.
^A Ur^
^^
Cl.
spirit'
(Dan.
let-ha
ana badan-i
151
Arab.
yb
Ul
my
ra in-hu huua
<*ol^
7, 15).
own bodies.'
Mia 'her own house.'
'and your
body.'
'his opinion.'
i^-^*
suffix;
SdSu ma$ak'8u
$a kd8u
'his
own
skin.'
This construction
is
in those languages
which
is
just
with suffixes after verbs and prepositions; cf. Ges. Heb. Gr.
p. 459; Uhlem. Inst Sam. p. 148; Wright-De G. Arab. Gr. II. p. 282. In
Mehri the independent pronouns are used to emphasise suffixes after a
verb or a preposition, but not a nominal suffix; cf. Jahn, Meh. Gr. pp.
as frequent
28, 130.
The cases
in Tigrina in
is
placed ab-
MCyy
fiM
e. g.,
Abraham
our father,' do not belong here, cf. Praet. Tig. Spr. p. 291.
Similar to this is the Coptic construction of absolute personal pronoun after a noun with possessive article (cf. p. 242. n. 1) for the sake
of emphasis, e. g., pa-eiot anok 'my father,' cf. Steind. Kopt. Gr. p 44 f.
is
As
this
is
Uhlemann
it
is
uncertain
Frank E.
242
Blake,
[1912-
this
form
suffix. 2
Sometimes the possessive stands after the noun in the construct state; so in Ethiopic and Syriac (rarely): e. g.,
Eth. flfcft : Rft? : l&ese tfaia 'my husband.'
Syr. voc*\, ?
ja<u.o
own
person.'
noun, which
may
or
may
suffix.
1 The
independent possessives are formed in almost all the languages
which make them by adding the suffixes to certain forms connected with
the sign of the genitive. These forms are, viz.,
Ta.
or
-,
Meh. da:
its
XM-:
cf.
t-, V^-:
plurals
cf.
Dill.-Bez. p.
cf.
p. 30; it is
304
used attributively.
Syr.
-V:
Man. -^1:
cf.
cf.
^
Ph.
-to:
cf.
2),
333.
18, 69.
Mod. Arab.
-^*
CX*>
(Jerusalem):
Gramm. Vul
cf.
Aeg. p.
uagan
'side'
are
employed with
Amh.
suffixes
cf.
Spr. p. 119.
316,
Cf. the
D. Whitney,
cf.
"W.
243
Vol. xxxii.]
e.
regens.
g.,
own disciples.'
HXTtfth
fl?
wife.'
ndidtu lota
'his place.'
JVft
?? $>&
In Syriac, Babylonian Talmudic, Mandaic, and Modern Syriac,
it regularly stands after the noun; the noun may be with or
without suffix in Syriac and Mandaic, always without in Modern
2
Syriac, and apparently also in Babylonian Talmudic; in Syriac
when the noun has a suffix the possessive sometimes precedes e. g.,
;
6^,
Syr.
JUoj
r&n
KJ1T 'his
'his
'thy
JKT1 KWa
JK^n )Ntm^
Man.
Hn
Bab. Tal.
'in
own
own
own
girdle.'
zeal.'
dwelling.'
our splendor.'
'our clothing.'
i!S
'my mansion.'
H^H am
'his gold.'
it
cf.
may
'amldk thee
e.
g.,
be emphasized by Jl?
h.^h
God has blest.' With
fiyo/lft
e. g.,
-f suffix,
TWUAh
this is to
be compared the use of Arabic U\ 'ma in similar cases, e. g., <^b\ <JXXi\^
saw thee; cf. Wright-De. G. Arab. Gr. II. p. 283 (top);
and also the use of the Assyrian independent genitive and accusative
l
ra'aitu-ka 'iiia-ka l
forms, e. g., iikaUim-anni idsi 'he showed me, kdsa luqbi-ka thee will I tell'
(cf. Del. p. 351). Morphologically the -iia of Jnia, the id of idti, idsi, and
1
the Arabic
2
Cf.
'iiid
are indentical
cf.
Tal. p. 69.
p.
314
160
b, d).
244
Frank E. Blake,
on?
Ph.
[1912.
'through
their
protection.'
mtNl
^
^ W3
Mish.
Bib. Heb.
1, 6).
pronouns are
used in apposition to a noun with the definite article, the whole
combination being practically equivalent to a noun with the
el-kitab betd'i
'my book.
'my houses.'
Jl^
(JU
In Assyrian the
Bag.
bUa attunu
attuni
<
my
father>
aMbani
'our remaining.'
the use in the Assyrian of the Amarna letters of
an (probably connected ,with demonstrative annii) + suffix, instead of a simple possessive suffix; the modified noun seems to
Similar
is
e.
g.,
(<=)
suffix
?
1
suffix may also follow its noun does not
"Whether the preposition
appear from the examples given by Dill-Bez. p. 416. With this usage
are to be compared the so-called mediate (mittelbar) suffixes in Tigrina,
These are composed of prepositions (in Amharic
Tigre, and Amharic.
rt,
Vol. xxxii.]
245
ma'aza
lotu
'its
odor.'
ua-lati-ni
water
is
mai
flowing.'
Nominal Apposition.
noun may be modified by another noun standing in apposition in the same case; in Arabic a noun in apposition to
a vocative in the nominative case form
either
or one
may stand in
may be common,
the
first
of two nouns in
A common noun
noun
may be used in
apposition to another
common
The
apposi-
tives that
first
noun
singular,
is
e.
noun
is
g.,
guarded
places.'
&&:
7yjy
fl?iA>
Amh. flC^
TiU
X4t gaMnam
;
iT-w
Jd^
&6?
man. a king.'
Mroc-enaUiat 'my servants the prophets.'
flC $eh derim ber 'a thousand dirhems of
silver/
somewhat
similar indecision
p 196
t
f.
In Indo-European, apposition
Frank B.
246
mddgd uehd
Heb.
[1912.
jug of water.'
quera$ 'enjera 'a bit of bread.
Arab.
Blake,
'a
widow woman.'
'a
virgin maid.'
'true words.'
rn?tt 'a
^BK
HD
of fine flour.'
'a seafo
Bib.
nn
Man.
Mod.
^p nn
^l ftnau
]in
JLUMUB
Syr.
JLu^
his house.'
of wheat.'
qamha
fa'na
load of meal.'
'a
When
is
common noun
preceding case.
e.
g.,
ama u
I$tar
OLGft
rffcV*}
Arab.
his
own
offspring.'
Amh. Xt2*
Art*C
I.,
and
Marduk 'Marduk,
bel ildni
Eth. ft?-?
o>7i
iV^t'F
jo^
^^L\
b
v*Jy^.l
^s-
id
'etegfa-Uu
uaSU 'Queen
Yashti.'
'aliu-ka zaidu
'thy
muhammadu
Zaid.'
brother.'
prophet.'
1
Similarly common epithets often precede in Indo-European, e. g.,
Sanskrit raja varunah 'king Yaruna,' M. H. Germ, der herre Sifrit 'the
lord Siegfried.' Of. Delbr. Verg. Syn. III. pp. 198, 199.
Vol. xxxii.]
*&B TH
1V\ ^&n
Hebr.
247
'King David.'
?^0 'king Anastasius.'
DIBDiK 'Anastasius the king.'
3btt
*D<4^xuf
When
it is,
ed.
languages, e. g.,
Eth. AX?aX?
Ta.
F*l\
AfrflCyy
"VCfT
la-egzVeiala-'abrehdm
his mother.'
Mary
s
D"n
'his
brother Abel
*)D1^p
Man.
my lord
^3iT n $
Heb.
'to
Abraham.'
yftQTh mes mdridm mes-eno-u 'with
MMiy mw MNB^
/*
HnaHi
(ace.).
son Joseph.'
the spirit
'his father,
only the
AW/TF
WP&
la- aster
la-neget-Uu
'to
Esther
the
queen.'
i iabateh
ia-na od uaddj 'the friend of
father
Naod.'
thy
<D*
la-bdrocu la-nabndt
'to
his
servants, the
prophets.'
fr^THd-
Adverbial Qualification.
Circumstantial.
noun or
stantial
is
Frank E.
248
Blake,
[1912.
noun
DjJ'H is
governing noun; the adverbial forms are invariable; hence sometimes by analogy the noun or adjective is uninflected. 2 e. g.,
7
lv^<
dwati
towards Medina.'
n
'Zaid
bakiia"
jd'a zaidu
"
A
came
weeping.'
l
laqaitu
Amru
Eth.
(DM
tfXft.
amra n
bdkiia" 'I
met
weeping.'
th-H-
ua-liora
flKrt.
&*Tk?
terrified.
i
rakabkeuomu feSuhanWiomti
found them joyful.'
or
Mud
main behind
IT'iaJ
Chto-
hdta
'I
Ta.
tttr?
ietrefu 'adarn
sad.
w-
shall re-
fl^jEi
^t^t
^^
ferdh-u
open.'
7
'he fled naked.
Mdame
([&:?
>(10a><4<
MzU
Trf*
Trf?.?-
AlK?
'I
\
ferdi-u sadaduo 'they drove him forth naked.'
iTlT(D&&il)e- eur-uze4avialde w'ho was born blind.'
t
ftiHd
'allau
Ma*
dr'fcfi?
be-melu-6m
iegl&iu
#&? MAT,
:
'abdage
'all
kuellom
the people
door.'
Of. Praet.
Examples
in
Vol. xxxii.]
(\f.
rh
flX<K
'Hanna
iasus
Amh. 9*&C9"
Wthll
249
(If.
ifl^Y
fl^Am
:
ftd>
ffD.P'H'
'eraqut-u-nkarsacaii 'amallafa
'he fled from them naked.'
o^rt^
ia-mabalat-u-n-em bare
full
(hands) and
JHVH
Ojjn
^r\
&
'ye shall
not go forth
empty-handed.'
sent
Syr. JL
into
* o,a^. 0*
it
<^o
;jjnj?
'the
n^
in
^1
'and he went
first/
noun may
'only, alone',
'Also' is expressed
Eth.
-i,
-X -m,
Amh.
WF
Ta.
-0*1,
Arab.
UoM
Heb.
05, *)8
dagmo
M7
viz.,
-M
i
-uen,
Mam
'aida*
III.
18
Frank B. Blake,
250
[1912.
to
after
noun following
Eth.
e.
it.
ffMlX
g.,
iasus-ln
"
ua-iasus-hi
\
}
'Jesus
also.'
also.'
also.'
M?
^K$
DfcOnas
t-o,
Syr.
Only.
The
viz.,
Eth.
OAt^i
Ta.
-flAt
Amh.
fl;f;
is
also.'
among the
prophets?'
MMt
&fa
6eca
kKi faqaj,
^1
Arab.
Eg. Arab. LAS, ,^0 /a$af,
in ?, frj, 'tj
Heb.
?a
^airw
bess.
Syr.
Mod.
Syr.
;uAa ^r6a
**l 'ahci
and follow
noun; 2,
their
classical
Arabic
faqctf,
which means
and Id gairu
literally 'and that's enough,' or 'and that's all,'
3
the
end
of
'not besides,' regularly stand at the
sentence; in
Egyptian Arabic the words may precede or follow their noun:
pi and *JN precede the noun. e. g.,
Hebrew
Eth.
nfcfc
arhtt
bffeti
Mhtit-u 'the
man
alone, only
the man.'
:
noh IdhtU-u
'only-
Noah.'
Gr. p. 84.
3
With
va-bds
as dos
Vol. xxxii.]
Ta.
ATI a
Amh.
hjfclKe-
flrht^
Y1&
251
h-fl^o*
<&c.
ft#C
ka-iehud
nagad ka-
Arab. k&
Eg. Arab. J^ys
^~o
Cl.
Heb.
n1
'only Noah.'
H'r^
Syr.
NlH^nbn
priest.'
Simple Emphasis.
In some of the languages a special adverbial particle of
pronominal origin is employed to emphasize the noun. Such
particles are found in Assyrian, Ethiopic, Arabic, Hebrew,
2
Syriac, and Mandaic, viz.,
Ass.
-ma
Eth.
-a
Te.
Syr.
oo,
Arab.
Heb.
-ma,
tu*
-J
\i
Man.
^JT.
kema
in
la-
-b
$ar
A^ur-ma
ina Satti-ma
regularly
'king of Assyria.'
iati 'in
particles
my
campaign.'
With
fca is
hu
in
its
e.
g.,
Used
*t*
301-303.
18*
Frank E. Blake,
252
Eth.
fl^fll*
*,
a$*\iUfrav
shoulders.
[1912.
own
heiauan kema
ft**
kema 'merely
^esfa fcar
into the
belly.'
fifi
ft'Mlftir
ft^
'afcfro
alone.'
U< p^ oo,
Syr.
NW
Ua-sV
TU
in
K^rb
'for
she
is
like
a building.'
oo ik*xa^ in
e.
g.,
nW
Heb. Tl
'verily a dead dog' (Ecc. 9, 4).
In Syriac a somewhat similar emphasis is conferred by placing
the personal pronoun of the third person before the noun or a
noun with modifiers; the pronoun agrees with the noun in
gender and number: e. g.,
NWK
004
1H 'he, Jeremiah.'
iK^oa
With
NO,
this
M ot
n:nn
construction
nn s n
is
'this blessing.'
to
be
compared the
Biblical
Aramaic
'she,4he Euha.'
Sentence Qualification.
A
may
noun
pronoun;
For
and the
1
It
is also
p. 110,
Vol. xxxii.]
may
pronoun,
253
The
first
construction
found in
is
all
The
the languages.
1
The relative
usually stands immediately before the verb.
clause regularly follows its noun in Assyrian, Arabic, Hebrew,
it
and Aramaic, though in Assyrian, Syriac, and Mandaic instances of preposition are sometimes found; in Ethiopic, Tigrina,
and Tigre it may either precede or follow; in Amharic long
relative clauses usually follow, while with short clauses preposition is the regular rule, tho even in this case the relative
when
its
Ta.
sg. Ti
is
ze-
and XlT
extremely rare,
XA:XV:
pi.
1
et are also
its
'ella 'elle
(the demonstratives
employed
as relatives)
X"H
'e*
cf Praet. Tig.
.
Spr. p. 165.
Arab.
^JJl
allaffi,
f.
^\
f.
^^\
some
cf.
dialects)
Min.
Meh.
otherwise
rt,
?):
"NPK
Mo.),
(also
la-, Id-:
Mod. Arab.
pp.
270273.
pl.la,le,li: cf.
I.
it
Amh.
(J.1
?,
elle
<t?
(cf.
ia~,
viz.
Wahrm.
Prakt.
Handb.
p. 181:
forms
cf.
In some
relatives,
Hebrew
forms
(
the article
of
the
in
is
relatives
in
general,
cf.
326
109).
1
In compound verbal forms in Amharic and Tigre, the relative reguwith the auxiliary (cf. Praet. Amh. Spr. p. 255); Littm. Te.
larly stands
219221.
Frank R.
254
nomen rectum
clause standing as
e.
Blake,
[1912.
an antecedent
to
(cf.
below).
g.,
Ass.
mdtu 8a ak$udu
Eth.
whose husband
HH-ft"
'the
jaATH
KmfrfldtC
who
Hher 'God
dead.'
is
holds
all things.'
Arab.
<*J
Meh.
O^-k
my
children.'
Ta.
rt-fl
Te.
. .
tt AXrtW 8-TX
i
Amh.
'and
la-'esateid
'&
matter which
honorable.'
is
(la**?
Jfld
pm
Heb.
nan
Bib. Aram.
a 1^
t^^n
D^n n
3b
'the
kandgdrd iahona
is
"Grod with
tt^S 'the
us".'
here.'
erected.'
Syr.
^ajD? fo&. ? lb
n^n
hSfF[
rta
'the
'there
word of God
thought.'
Man.
KMTI
nin
ln
K^y ^H
A
1
image which he
'and brought
me
The
pound
'that
^^n^l
relative
pronoun
in
Mineo-Sabean
is
saw.'
a garment
if it is
short,
Homm.
Vol. xxxii.]
255
that
is
flfcTT
great).
1rtt AAt
ba-enta
?i1*Hl
AtffDfrX
P")*
Mafat
lelU
the
'in
'enkdb 'et-mage
meat
'from
The
tive
relative clause
pronoun
and Modern
may
is
is
indefinite: in
Mehri the
relative
is
whose subject
more common
is
a noun with
is
in poetry
very common
is
Ass.
liltu
Arab,
o^
Meh.
Heb.
risit tetui
^J
J^
JUo
rajulu
Modis
also omitted,
is
built.
an
e. g.,
n
iuqalu laliu zaidu
who was
hdbu
in
suffix,
in relative sentences
'a
man
called Zaid.'
'a
man
<
1S "^9D,.
^?5tf 'the
that trusts in
an
W&
Sam.
\ft
rrt
KJHK2
'in
a land which
theirs.
*M*
Syr.
3T^
KBfa
'a
HOW
OKI
KlllfcO 'a
not
Job.
Man. 3
is
Earn.'
Coptic
The
forms
relative
latter as in
similar
may
Arabic; cf.
Omission of the relative is also common in English.
3
The omission of the relative is specially frequent in Mandaic in clauses
which give the name of a person as here; cf. Nold. Man. Gr. p. 460.
219
221.
Frank E. Blake,
256
Mod.
[1912.
Syr.
In Amharic the
9* of ?y
is
retained)
a&
hft
(for Sh-)
ha*
uada kalbara
'towards a
hfl(?
taw**^
l\?
(for ??<rz..)
a^rt^
ia-ka-)
M^'a* ba-misaru
do
sau
honorable.'
drums.'
(for
is
who beat
^^fc^
4
(W<^-)
(for
man who
who
iniquity.'
a-H'aoma^
ia-ta-)
'ej
'in
ba-taqammafa-bat (for 6a-mthe hand of the one who sat upon him.'
A??t-)
(for
In Amharic the
clause
relative
is
may
above),
e.
g.,
died) father.'
tayaddalu-t Sawdc'thewho-were-killedmen'.
iazzaza-ii-en querban-u-n 'the sacrifice
he ordered.'
(ace.) which
In Tigre a
MM 40
9M
1
\il&
e.
i
rth-flX'F
(relative
g.,
(or'
(dib-a Id-karaii-o)
i
1 4hJP
:
A^l O^t
:
:)
place in
'the
him.'
auxil. verb)
lying-upon-it bed.'
Cf.
30, pp.
D. H.
Miiller,
117124.
by relative pronoun.
Der
status constructus
e.
g.,
im Himyarischen, ZDMG.
Vol. xxxii.]
Arab.
^Xjco
iaumi iub'athuna
'ild
<Jl
257
<&c.
'till
the day
Eth. &*?.
ftV0
tfD'POA
-MM
lemdda
when David
Heb.
TS
f"6$fl
Min.
^>
'the
days
(of
him)
the time
'at
thou
when
wilt
send'
JHVH spoke
^
Hebrew
fydtht
(that) happened.'
l
lm
r'
'the
relative
ytin 1^
D'H'iDS
is
often intro-
custom
reigned.'
the hand
JocX^ vXjo
\j
Heb.
nagSa ddint
the
cuS'jo*.
In
duced by a
'by
"(Ex. 4,13).
Hirp IS^l OVa
n^D'^
of eating together.'
17^ : #2^ maiid'la
'at
^"^3
'all
this is
by a sub-
especially frequent
the time
"sjipljn
is
king's
Nominal Coordination.
Two on more
coordinated nouns
may
in
some languages be
1
joined together without conjunction; so in Assyrian, Amharic,
Modern
Syriac:
e.
Same
Ass.
biltu
g.,
ergiti
'of
mandattu
'tribute
and
offering.'
in
cf, op.
cit.
pp.
190192.
Frank E.
258
T^Wi hfrM
Amh.
and
Blake,
'aluld-n
guegsa-n
[1912.
(ace.)
'G-uegsa
Alula.'
$TC KIP t -^
1
and
U^
Ta.
bolt.
I O.P fr
#<?fr
nabnat
'orit
saraga
gw#/
'wall,
door,
'the
phets.'
^17^
M^
iihj&aJt
'the
Eg.Arab.
<*j^v>JX*<o\
Vienna,
Berlin,
dria.
Mod.
Constantinople,
Alexan-
perie
'the Scribes
and
Pharisees.'
however, they
Ordinarily,
is
and
simple,
consists in join-
the different words together by some form of the conjunction ua. If there are three or more words so connected,
ing
the conjunction
so in Ethiopic,
Talmudic
Mandaic.
may be
Hebrew,
apparently
(here
e.
omitted before
all
the
regular
construction),
and
g.,
Sa Same
Ass.
Arab.
ay
<^x!^
'abtilm
ua-ummuJiu
'his
father
and
his
mother.'
*^
J^ kullu M'i
^.JI 3 *UJI O x>
mina '8-a i ua-n-na ami tja-n-nahli ua-z-zari 'all
kinds of flocks and camels and palms and grains.'
Eth. "Mlft^ OKDJ&I Mbest ua-uain 'bread and wine.'
DACWh floXoi* somson iia-abuhu tia-'emmu
'Samson, his father and his mother.'
12V cotMdft mangeSt hail tia-sebhat 'the
kingdom, the power, and the glory.'
J^-
jj)\3
I_5
his
What
two
the construction
articles
259
Vol. xxxii.]
pm
Heb.
and earth/
Dl&tfn 'heaven
S
1??3 TJ9*
J*ft
and maid-servants.'
Aram.
Bib.
I<
nap}*
1|5'
'gifts
J}]?
honor.'
Knoll KJTOte
and honor.'
glory,
^P
n I^O^
<to
'the
kingdom, power,
Azariah.'
Syr.
K*fo
U*
!JMo
JL*JB
Njn1 N #
S
Bab. Tal.
Man.
Knfc6P1Bn
'a
cock,
KWB1 ^^1p
an
and a
ass,
candle.'
wnyi
Mod.
fcnu
Syr. UIOJUAO
!;<**
Sometimes with groups of more than three nouns the conjunction is used in more than one case, tho not in all. This
is due
ordinarily to the fact that all the elements are not
coordinate,
others;
it
may
This phenomenon
is
if
not
languages.
to the sun,
all
of the
Biblical
Ara-
all
the
host of heaven.'
an assembly.'
rv6n;rib 'myrrh, aloes, and
calling of
jj
cassia,' 1
Tto
'Eliphaz the
'O^Pin TD^
Bildad
the
Temanite,
Shuhite, and Zophar
the Naamathite.'
DS Ttt$H
1
Perhaps the first two are to be considered as more closely connected
with one another than with the third element. This is indicated by the
that
occurs
in
it is
260
Frank E. Blake,
Bib.
Aram.
[1912.
JVtirfy ftrbw?
councillors, his
s
s*
i:nn Ky^-ntfnay
^?p
NTO^
^ID
'the
NJJK
of gold
and
stone.
KJpH Kljote
NBj?rn
'the
kingdom, power
glory.'
mantels
Man.
'the in-
'wild ani-
mals, cattle,
nVW wn WWn
and
Eg. Arab.
light
and
'magnificence, splendor,
honor.'
J^^^
a cloak and a
fez.'
it
is
7
of two nouns; when the element to be connected by
consists of two or more words, the conjunction is not necessar-
first
added to the
ily
the others.
first
When
element, but
of
to be connected
The
last
preceding.
element
is
e.
g.,
Vol. xxxii.]
mafras masabar-m
vastation.
rtftC^
'destruction
and de-
devastation.'
CH'rtt
IM-
and of
ia-galamotoc 'endt
'the mother of
huln
rekuesat
ia-medr-em
harlots
earth.'
and great
tion
261
<&c.
all
phets.'
^-jyo ODOD^
mamanat
ia-
and pride of
life.'
*WCC wtytfi
>
and
of the eye
lust
frJiTaj.1
A^tpVl
(rhjfco^aj^)
'unat-mn hemat-en
(or
mangadi-uen
neiuatuen)
and
'to
way,
Judah
his brethren.'
ne-quaVd-n neno-u-uen^
its
'the
'to
mother.'
iasus daqa mazdmurt-u-iwn 'Jesus
and
his disciples.'
Conclusion.
The
noun
No example
of
probability applies to
1
it
in
this
use
as well as to
is
available,
all
IP*"}.
2
The preposition on which the first noun depends
repeated as here, cf. Praet. Tig. Spr. p. 340 f.
is
almost always
Frank E.
262
Blake,
[1912.
'one*.
a construct chain.
The
itself
interrogative 'which'
is
Numeral
appositives,
accusative.
is
qualification
ordinal numerals.
The
or they
expressed
may
stand as adjectives or
take their noun in the genitive or
cardinals
may
noun
in the genitive.
languages,
the construct chain.
in
Vol. xxxii].
263
common
viz.,
(a)
common noun
denot-
a proper.
Adverbial
etc.,
is
qualification
expressed
by an appositive in
and pronom-
tives
or
certain pairs.
The most
characteristically
the use of the possessive suffix to express determination; the use of the article with both adjective and noun,
and not once with the combination; the use of the article
are,
viz.,
all
Addenda.
References.
C. Brockelmann, Grundriss der vergl.
Sprachen, Bd.
II.
Syntax
(Lief.
1.
to
u. 2,
Modern Hebrew
Frank E.
264
[1912.
Blalte,
vowel written
Add
cf.
list
p. 138.
Determination.
The
at end):
e.
is
n.
g.,
ft&
uald-u
'egelrla
dakhdrd
praised-one.'
*4
J
:
'egel
emm-d
tel-d
'to
her
mother she
spoke.
On
rt,
e.
g.,
n*F
Qlfttfrftf*
Sometimes an adjective
words,
cf.
Brock. Syn.
p.
An
class,
cf.
to
specially
cf.
Steind. Kopt.
265
Vol. xxxii.]
Brock. Syn.
203
p.
p. 159].
[cf.
For
cases in
rian adjective precedes its noun, see, besides p. 159, pp. 223 f., 240.
Certain classes of adjectives in Arabic, Classical and Modern
with
the
cf.
alone,
adjective
Brock.
[cf.
166],
e.
g,
adjective modifying
e.
[cf.
p. 164],
g-,
rf?
it
teeth'
(Dan.
7, 7).
Demonstrative Qualification.
A
noun,
for
e.
1A-
hA
g.,
'all'
In Tigre
suffix.
'all
his daughters.'
'all
people.'
hullu
lohai
'all
the
before
the
mauaqel
hillocks there.'
In the
dialect
of
Tlemsen
el-hull
[cf.
may
stand
p, 185],
e.
g.,
III.
19
[cf.
Frank E. Blake,
266
may be
'self
[1912.
indicated by a personal
wn
t|
participle D^ltf,
rr*m
D^ltf
e.
g.,
Lord himself
will
indicated by the
is
g.,
'various things.'
Numeral
Qualification.
ten' (inclusive)
To examples
(cf.
add,
p. 215),
Aram.
Bibl.
omission
of the
ID
;n^n
?!?
Nominal
third kingdom.'
'a
Qualification.
p. 221].
noun
It
is
b<">crt
mardt
AUA,*
h?
ftt
'ettd
Za(relative)-/zaW2
'et
'affet la (article)-
let 'at
the door of
the-in-which-the-bride-is house.'
([(Offi
<t&17.
a determinate genitive
take the indefinite
iiahdah
is
bit
Syn.
p.
may
article, e. g.,
236)
[cf.
the
Mod.
man'
(cf.
Brock.
of,
regens
ing of 'the well
;
known/
'already mentioned:'
K^rn
fty*\
'the
r\rm
e.
g.,
mentioned) temple.'
Vol. xxxii.]
267
already enumerated,
viz.,
silk.'
7
n
n
rdqudu halla 'a vessel of vinegar.
Heb.
nnjon "JJTT^
nnj D'an?n
'on the
38, 14).
'the
28, 18).
In the Aramaic
may take
p.
259
[cf.
dialect of
cf.
suffix
Brock. Syn.
p. 239].
Nominal Apposition.
Arab.
&U
e.
g.,
^>-
Jj&\
J^
min
ahli
^U>J^
its
noun
'an sulaimdna
rajuli
of the people of Mecca.'
in
...
man
<*JJ1
Ll^-o
^JL^^o
'ila
J\^-o <J\
gird(i
mustaqwii
Adverbial Qualification.
In addition
in Semitic
Arab.
is
to
^U* JU JJ
,JA 'aid
talli
dli
hundka
e.
g.,
'on a high
hill there.'
19*
Das
Sendschreiben
den
Catholicus
des
der
Patriarchen
Armenier.
Barschuschan
By OTTO
an
LICHTI,
des
sich selbst
an den
Nach Wright (A
225
unter dem Namen Johann X, gewahlt im Jahre 1058 (BarHebraeus, Cliron. Eccles. I. 437 ff., B. 0. II. 141. 354). Er
dankte jedoch bald ab, und zog sich zuriick in ein Kloster und
widmete sich dem Studium. Beim Tode des Athanasius wurde
er wieder erwahlt zum Patriarchen 1064 und wirkte nun in
Wie
dieser Kapazitat bis zu seinem Tode im Jahre 1073.
uns Bar-Hebraeus berichtet, hat Johannes Barschuschan mit
dem Patriarchen von Alexandrien, Christodulus, langere Auseinandersetzungen wegen der Mischung von Salz und 01 mit
dem
i
An
versity.
Weise gehabt.
May
1911, at
Er
Yale Uni-
Vol.xxxii]
Am
p. 252).
ist
der
Abdruck von
dem
Die
Siegel eines Jakobitiscben Patriarcben eingeklebt.
Unterscbrift lautet Ignatius, Patriarch von Antiochien genannt
:
ist
verwischt),
33. der
dafi
zusammen
ge-
aussprechen.
Einleitung.
"Wir haben zunachst die Uberschrift, die nicht vom Verfasser
des Briefes stammt, sondern jedenfalls von dem Abschreiber.
1
Chaldaer. Es war der Sohn des Presbyters Hasan und seit 1142 Monch im
Kloster Sergii. Gestorben ist er 1163 (v. Jos. S. Assemanus Orientalische
BiUiothek, in einem Anszug gebracht von A. F. Pfeiffer, Erlangen 1776.
Dieser Ignatius ist ohne Zweifel identiscn mit unserem Sender
p. 305).
des Briefes von Barschuschan, der dazu seinen Kommentar gemacht hat.
Die Titel Maphrian, Metropolit, Catholicus, sind wohl zu verschiedenen
Zeiten identisch gewesen, obwohl der Maphrian urspriinglich ein untergeordneter Kleriker war (siehe dazu Pfeiffer).
270
Otto Lichti,
[1912.
Mar
Patriarchen,
111.
Jolianan,
Hierauf
Barschuschan, an den Katholikus der Armenier."
in
den
welcher
des
der
liblichen,
Briefes,
eigentliche Anfang
folgt
biblischen
(mochte
man
,,Johannes,
Gottes Oberhirte."
besteht:
Einfiihrungsworten
sagen)
ein
die
Gnade
Dem
,,Eins in
flei&ig
seine Lehre.
erklart, wie
ihm, durch Bilder, die uns heute kindlich (um nicht kindisch
sagen zu miissen) vorkommen, wie dies: Es sind drei Personen,
wie z. B. Adam, Seth und Eva; oder die Sonne, ihr Licht
und
und
2a
dann
folgt
Christi
und
ein
liber die
Bekenntnis
Naturen
Das Stichwort
hier
Natur
Personen",
in
drei
ist
elstens Jbodi-o
J^io (?ol)^o
die
liber
in der Trinitat
und
Menschwerdung
und in Christo.
(KXka
zweitens:
JJUA
Jbuo
^j
,,Eine
^*o
bekannt werden
'^^
soil
.Vm^ioj
Natur des Gotteslogos, welcher Fleisch wurde", (pta ^o-ts
rov Ocov Xoyov a-co-apKuncvov). Nachdem Barschuschan den heidnischen Wahn des Sabellius abgewehrt und den Ketzer Arius
abgefertigt hat, beruft er sich auf den Theologen Gregorius
als Autoritat fur seine Glaubenslehre. Es gibt nur eine Gottheit, aber drei Personen (Qnomi) oder Hypostasen. Die nachsten Satze bilden den Ubergang zum eigentlichen Thema des
Briefes
,,den hassenswerten Gebrauchen" der Armenier, das
im grofien und ganzen mafivoll behandelt wird.
3 b wird zuerst die Benlitzung von Salz und Ol und dann
JoC^S
eine
,,Darliber dafi
Vol.xxxii.]
wurde von Wasser, Luft, Feuer, Erde und Geist gevon 5 Substanzen. Jesus mufi daher in der Eucharistie auch vollkommen, als aus 5 Elementen bestehend, darSalz und 01.
gestellt werden unter Melil, "Wasser, Sauerteig,
Jesus ist eine besondere Spezies (Art) zwischen Gott und
Menschen, die mit seinem Tod am Kreuze wieder erloschen
ist.
Der Gegner seiner Dogmen gedenkt unser Autor fleifiig.
Nestorius und Theodor von Mopsueste werden der Gottlosig-
Adam
bildet, also
Leo und
Raubersynode, Chalcedon.
dagegen ist ihm ein rechtglaubiger Vater. Gregor Thaumaturgus ist er nicht abhold, obwohl dieser den Ausspruch tat:
,,Gott hat gelitten, aber ohne das Leiden zu empfinden, auf
die
Cyrill
unsterbliche
8 b folgt
"Weinbecher mischen.
9
10
wendet
der Kreuze
10 spricht
vom
Siindenbekenntnis, das
wenn
sie
hatten.
S.
335357) enthalten. Die
Herrn Georg, des Oberaufsehers der
272
Otto Lichti,
[1912.
schrieben
ristie),
solle,
als
des
Sauer-
teigs,
(in
wegen
des Salzes
Schaffung
Adams
aus vier
daft
Ma-
Ihr den
LeibChristivollkommenmacht,
als Zeichen des
"Wassers, "Wasser; als Zeichen
Wassers; Mehl
und nehmt
des Feuers.
ll b
Verfasser versucht
Geburt am
zu beweisen, dafi
der
Wie oben bemerkt, hat hier wohl der Brief des Barschuschan geschlossen. Was nun noch folgt, ist jedenfalls Zusatz
von Isaak von Antiochien, dessen Unterschrift unser Schreiben
Aufierdem ist es ja auch aus dem Schreiben selbst ersichtlich, wie auch schon T. M. bemerkt hat, dafi der letzte
Teil nicht von Barschuschan stammt.
Da heiM es namlich
auf Blatt 20 a ,,Wie wir durch das Sendschreiben des Patriarchen Mar Johanan oben gezeigt haben" (siehe S. 295, 15).
Wie auch schon T. M. bemerkte, wird nun die ganze Schreibweise anders. Barschuschan war ein gemaMgter Apologet, dagegen tadelt der nach Blatt 13 schreibende Verfasser, wo er
nur etwas zu tadeln weifi; sucht scheinbar nach Mifibrauchen
in der armenischen Kirche, um dagegen losziehen zu konnen.
So ahnlich meint wenigstens Ter-Minassiantz. Ich kann mich
der Ansicht nicht so ohne weiteres anschliefien. Lassen doch
tragt.
Vol. xxxii.]
geriigt
So wirft
vor, dafi sie
Mar
Opfer darbringen.
Wie
danken gekommen
sein,
Mar
sollte
wenn
die
G-e-
blutige Opfer gebracht haben? ,,Jeder der erlost ist mit dem
Opfer des Sohnes Gottes, wird nicht einfiihren Opfer, damit
er nicht
Justitia"
(v.
p.
299,
If.).
noch Opfer bringt, dafi er auch den Sohn verleugnet und halt
sich gut mit den Juden".
,,Verflucht ist, wer nach diesem
noch
(Opfer Christi)
Opfer bringt" (v. p. 300, 14 f., 17).
von
Edessa
wirft den Armeniern vor, dafi sie von
Ja'qob
an
dahinlebten
sittenlos
,,Einige ihrer
(v. p. 303).
Anfang
Lehrer sind einerseits Juden, andre andrerseits Phantasten.
Deswegen folgen sie den Juden darin, dafi sie Lamm, Unge-
und reinen
sauertes
opfern
Aus
."
(v.
(nicht
mit
AVasser
gemischten)
Wein
p. 303, 16 ff.).
Zitaten und den
man
diesen
als
guter Armenier
Man kann
274
Otto Lichti,
[1912.
um
Yon
ochien,
dem
wie
slichtig,
Adressaten
(siehe T.
Yon
manche
seiner
als ,,dickkopfige
M.
wiirdigen
Yorganger,
die
ihre
p. 118).
13 b
15 b
und der
Priester
vom
Haupt
zu legen.
ihm
Nach
recht eigentiimlich; seines Wissens haben wir in der armenischen Literatur kein Zeugnis fur die genannte Sitte. T. M.
nicht.
Vol.xxxii.]
Tieropfer gebracht wurden, und doch liegt das klar auf der
Hand, wenn man die oben genannten Satze liest (v. p. 273).
Ein argumentum e silentio hat wenig Wert, einen Beweis zu
Hierauf wird die
liefern, oder Hypothesen aufzubauschen.
Disziplin in der armenischen Kirche geriigt, die sehr disziplingewesen sein muft. T. M. meint hierzu, ,,wenn man dem
los
sein.
Es
ist
zwar
nicht zu leugnen, daft die noch zu nennenden Mifibrauche vorkamen (Also doch!), bedingt durch die unstate und unruhige
Lage
des
Catholici; wir
konnen
Miftbrauche wirklich
meinte
er,
er
Ubertreibungen.
wenn man
viel
alles wiifite,
trauriger
und
Und
dann ware
triiber
ist.
bekommt
Kornchen Wahr-
,,In diesen
ist"
(Ter-Min. p. 110).
17 af wird dann die erbliche Succession der Catholici in Ar-
menien getadelt, weil diese Sitte bei keinem andern Yolk der Erde
gefunden wird, aufier bei den Arabern, deren Kalife auch erblich aufeinander folgen.
276
Otto Lichti,
[1912.
der Sohn des Gregor Magistros, auf den Catholicusthron erhoben worden, und er regierte bis 1105, nach der gewohnlichen Annahme, die freilich nicht ganz einwandfrei ist.
Wahram,
gefolgt
dann kann
Jahr-
hat;
und
(2) hat
die
jedenfalls Ignatius
,,dafi
Priester
ordiniert
werden, ohne dafi sie eine Stelle haben." Yon diesen wird
auch Bestechung genommen.
18 a handelt von dem Siindenbekenntnis der Armenier, siehe
allda (p. 293).
19* wird die Heuchelei der
lich
in Selbstgerechtigkeit besteht.
am
fest
6.
Januar feiern. Selbst wenn man friiher das Weihnachts6. Januar gefeiert hat, so haben die hi. Vater dieses
am
Datum, wie
friiher heiraten,
usw.
delt.
wie auch
,,euer"
z.
20
23 wird die Bewahrung jiidischer Gesetze behanNoch einmal kommt Weihnachten und Epiphanien aufs
Mitte des
12.
Bar Hebraus
Vol. xxxii.]
lasse.
legte die
Abhandlung
sie
sie
Nach
einiger
schickten ihn
dem
des Barandreas" usw. Man sieht daraus, daft wirklich Mifibrauche in beiden Kirchen Armeniens sowohl. wie auch Syriens
bestanden.
Syrische Texte
A. Sendschreiben des Barschusclian (Cod. Berlin.
ov->t?
JLaco
Sachau 60)
1++^.
IJOJJD
oo
i
ln^\^
^j
oS
^oaa
oo^
o^fto^t-? JLuJj
p.
113
26.
cliungen zur altchristlichen Literatur, Bd.
f.,
in
278
Otto Lichti,
0>
Jboa-oi
JLuOJ
^Q-plo i^Nv^
^^opo9JL)Lo
Jj^o
>^
^o
.UQ,. 1^9
OA^
.jo
^AA9
.^XJX=0
.^^o
y^(
Oot
cx-oj
JLm^
>.L>
t
^3
001
<
001
foC^N
NXQJL^
.jL^Aj^o
jL^i
.JLov^S <Jr>o\\o>9
(loV^I'o
JN
[1912
^o
t-^o
?$^=>) 061
+**
1
'
t.ju
^t^t-io
.o
.oCSS
Jjua^o
a^
Jlj
^
(K^^^lo
J^jtOtA K^OJL (Kju^ 09
0^90 VI
Q-Xo
001
.ilo^X
(t-=
|J90
K^oo!
.JJU9
)J90
0<
JD9J
^^a ^v^
.{ioo^S (*> .JLaoot (x>
.(lo^-wX
.{
.{K^k^oja^Do {^21X0.1^0
VI
001
Jlal
>o
jlo
KXi
11.
JJ
Ji^V>
^O
tx^xj
jLftJ^O
Uandglosse:
)JQI
.^(jU>09
rr
.(Kju^O
)=>k
v tlo ^.
iloJbwX.1
{OOI
t^Xt?
(901
001
^0
^9
V^
.K
ol
Vol. xxxii.]
DasSendschreibend.PairiarchenBarsckuschan,&c. 279
601
111.
fo1 -
JJ
v^o {0^9
.^oo^v
^JL'JLo
)lO t
n\^
^x>
JJj
601
Jboo-Loo
)J{o
^^
>>\v>
^00^X00
|J
ff
JUL^D
.9! {La^t^
o^
'^
j;
m^hS
^aj^oKj;
{K\^o9
.loot
Vo .9JL tlax*
<
mo \\.9ojp
W->
)i^\o9Q
+o
jJ
01
i.,y>t^*^>
Ms.
isoiiiao.
Ms.
VI
280
Otto Lichti,
[1912.
)*Q>\v>9
Jbw^io
JLiout
.JLa-.^jLa
^(?
Jbk
.^Q^IQJJ^WOJXJQD
JJo
>
loot
Li(
^3
)Jo
IV.
lOl
7)
^. ^^
%.>.
JMK*
AVA^
,\. VA.^.
*
i
^>
JJoojt?
^o?
.Loot
6 01
otto-ot
kajJ
9tt
.{9QJ
J^-oot
JL^JV^
^9 ^^iOO
.JL^o
.(it
pot
.JL^JU9
JLbw9t
.^*Jl?
tK^io
^9)J
^OtOwuDVaj
.09t
toot
)jyv
)Jo
)J?
Ms.
.jb^oo
.pno\\o>
^09JJ
t^fiaa
toot
6o
^09(9
O1
Vol. xxxii.J
|^\.v*ft-^^
Ms.
JLuJLi09
JLffiOAA jlo.
III.
Olj->
MS.
.3
VI
ft V*
JJ
jLulAJDO
|lOM>.
20
fc^ss^
JbiiO
282
Otto LichtL
JLjo*
V^^
v^^ JioJLoa
Jbd*AJu;
JL^jLo
.ou.*a
JJ(
^i
jk
iv>
nr>
[1912.
.9QutJoo;a
JJLo
jJo
)J
^39
60 ^
JQJDJ
uuo^ioj
JJo
^JL
^
IJQJUD
001
k*9o^j
JU-J
fol.
;a
(VoXoa
06*
oiJLo
u9
601
.ajuuV-U
a-iJL?oi
joot
iv>*;
vi\
)JU
o (001
0010
t
)J
ts .*
^
*H
"
?a
.f
Fehlt im Ms.
JlJU
Vol. xxxii.]
o.X;
*M .JU>
Jimovti
\\o3o
.0300
JJ
(HWS
Jv*v>
)Jo
)J
(po(
)l
JjJ
^t-io
pot?
x^
^o^
yjo
t-A
.^t\^ o^olio
jojio
coa^jl^
01
.U.^
o{
iv'
)J
.J
Jta;
,^
OOOt
)Jo
MS. ^AJ
^*.A^A
0001
{j^^m^O JLooX9
)Jo
jlt^ffl^
)J
.0001
\Vi
y~{ ^Oo^^Jbw ^O
^*^.A39
ji,
Randglosse: ^^.all
.^\.
^,^^
1^*11,
JLao^a
'
'20*
19
284
Otto Lichti,
.oooj
)J
;.v>v
]L;~oQj
^3JL>
OOCH
*^ Ajtx>
[1912.
JL^ooVo
Jlviv>S>.o
MO--
-^?
.?j
fc*~*
)J
iv-& ooo
0001
jlo
mN
po!
iv> .01
)J
JI-W^D
00)
.JLo^JtO
.(K^Jt
v.
,1*399
po{
(90^9
^;
nvo 90ju^
^QV
JLx>
ol
^
IV^
n.
U09I
<
>^>
jloiVl
.0)9
VI.
fol.
)J
)J
(laiAAO
.ypKl!
^^QD9
Jb^KjD
)J
JLjLO-0-JO
jots-a^o .otQ^Qju
)j,^\v> )Jo
JJ9
Vol. xxxii.]
.jLjU*J3
JLJLAO
fv^9O
JL>O99O
.)j.utOpO
|J
^O |jL^L*OpO
jrt.a\
)J
OJLA
jlo iiS.v>
jL*&jt9
T^^?
ooot
jL*cLajo
.*viv>
JLa^j
Jlo^jto
Jlmno
<*
JLoooviJ
Jl
jl
a>a
hN ja.ao
o(
.oo
oo^^
Jl9o
h nn
><=))
ocx
(00^9
(J
)J
JU.?(o
,~o
JLm^uoo
Jl^i
*,\j
t-^o
oot9
JbLDot
^o^o
.ok 1j&*D
JK\^ ^oo^XoX
JLa
YIL
.9oN^cuo
MS. ^lUJ_flO
)JL^JO
.^SLJO
pajajo
o,nv>
ooKio
foL
286
Otto Lichti,
t--o
oo i
JJ
WQJL
(JLojx-L>
[1912.
(ijo
jovvia
$..**
.o;_o9
ob
jxX
JJ
JJj
>Q.xA^a
{K^^LA9
^o
J.vi\v\
0X0
)^v^ a v>\
JJo
.JLojt
Jjo
j;^,
|J
JLjLCJtuX U
.(iaaa
oot
,001X0
)Jo
Jl
J^AA
Jbo
>j
^O
6oi9
po{
001
ioX
^i.\rj
JJ
(ot^S
.^ipKtt
0X0
0X0
-ftftMftoi^
JLAiOJ
Jlv>.hv>
JJ
JJo
.^i
JLajtsnuj
jLaoo>
yj
^O
Oi
JLjui9
jln.vtv
too*
Ms.
t loxao
Randglosse:
lx_tt>oj.
.{Jbwf^
lk*&
2
JJLuuO
Ms.
^^-j Jo jft^A^
Jl!
s-
Vol.xxxi
Vol.xxxii.] DasSendschreibend.PatriarchenBarschuschan,<S;c. 287
JLXXo
.Jv>v>>)J
JIJ
J^o
jboo-
JiAV
V
JlJLiO?
(jot
^^
^wJ
oJ^ivt^.
Jbi
(U-
(oot
fol.
o(
6(
JjL.o
.(
^9
JJU.D
.(to
(loiv>
I..JD
^o o(
^O
6(
6(
.0^
JLIJ9
^9
JLooX
f*
.jLopto
JLoJibo
JLoibo
(o9
(oot
9)^
Ms.
)ioo
OQJLJLtlo
1
.JLo^jto
^^i
V^
JjLioL
90
.JL^DJ9
288
Otto Lichti,
[1912.
.^^>{
nnva
.-^3
~t
(00^9
9
3o<9
jloot
^-o
^o\*9
.Jlv>
Jboa*
JL^^
oi9i|Jo
,vtvo
.^axo
KIJLOO
jbo
nr>o^fY>a^oi9
o9JJ
(9]^ 0001
JL^9
o.a
jjov^
oi
oot
OQJQD!
vjuJ99
^oto
.JLaa-?
ooi
{9O)
QVO
OOOf
.000)
1^09
JJLO;
.J^i't^
lioVaf
iflpov>r>
.]UxJ99
JJO)
<nr>>nio^j
^monrto^a
.J901
OJD9JO
o^OQ^a
.JL*9*JD
"^
^t-ofo
.,U..t.j
JLuJ990
{jot
.JLov^S
OV-OU990 ,-00^39
^> Q^
olJLo
tlt-^a
OfiOt
.JLwJ99o fc*~9
'^CXJDiio
V^^XJDli
Jl
>t
o t?)^?
VoftJI.^
00)
Vol.xxxii].
X.
fol.
13 b
,lL^a ov>nr>o
Jjjo
Jlo
|c*jto!9
JWo
.<-^ut
0001
010
mn
00^9
^^^^
IJLA^JOO
JLftJL9
I+JJAQQ
lkz>)
IbuJLd
JJ(*
~ot
11?
(^
^aa
-)^;
joot
Ipojbo
^,-ZJL^
Jb^i
N^>
^fccLl
JJ
JL*-Dj
^^^
ooot
(jjb^w JLiOfja
KXi ^o
iJt
{oot
^*)^o{
Jbj9
|Jt
ju!
Joto
090
JL^o
)J
fJLaJo
11!
NJL^
IK
001
ji^oo^
ov2>
Ill**
)J
^i
>;
n .v>o
iK^Q.^JD9
oC^
^o
^s^ioo
A.^J^o9 {oop
|j90ia^0 jKnVial
^^jo
00)
.v^sj^oo
&$
y0
j)^v>
yj
JJ!
^
*
09
o^9 opoad
ooC^ ^adt
^3
U?
{I;
9pL^OO
90^00
^^QU*
^oo .0001
(010
011^9
.jkYl.,O9
\B9o|a )^UJ9
OO1
^ nr>9
0011
Fehlt
im Ms.
jbauot
290
Otto Lichti,
nv Ha-*
^y>
jju
6{
IjJ^,
[1912.
^o Jbaio^ ^oo^Xo
JL**o9
ov^J?
^i.i;
{i<Louo jbo^Voio
iv^oj^oo
JLaJv^oo
.Jlbo
(0*9
n.v>o
)jQJLO9
u^
lv%v^
^f>
t^Xyt^
JLwifcta!^.
^N.'^^o* x. *
A_>L
OOlo
lyq .^v
t >*
ft
^v>
{9^
o(
fol.
XI.
JCH-0
f'T
^^
01
K^(
(f-*
V>
.JLiQQ
Jlr
VJ
tit
otv^ua
)J
Ms.
^CW
*9
ooi
^00^
U AV> AV%Q
?o
>
JL3onm>>j ^o
JLsonnno>{
l^^.
.nN
Jlsfo
^o
^9
.001
r\
^^j*
Jjoio
oov>
.JLa*o*o
^^coo OCM
yQ^ji^o
OM^O
^.^sa
JLanrnr>>?
.JBJJ
099
JUuJuo
JLo^
^o
DasSendschreibend.PatriarchenBarschuschan,&c. 291
Vol.xxxii.]
l ^o o( u^^flolJ^o
JLaonnr>>>{
;
JJ
o.anru<i
(A^i ^o
JLao
>J9
.)JQ
n~
.J
t-^>
.JLso
n nr>
-/^*
^jj
)^AN.ft^
fol.
16 a
XIL
001
JJL2DO
|JO
.
JLD90
-^^>o>
^oioSv
ot
j;nnv
)jO
iOAOtO
|J9
JjLOOfO
.Jj^Ju!
^3^00^00
"^XJDKiOO
.0)tsAV ^V)
!i{
Jj^o!
.JL^9t-0
o^
AuCOJO
W^
-^-^p
?^^0
^>>v*
(l-^?
.|j't^>{
Jj^ju{
o{
^LiLo
f^^
^*t
{it
itoioa-uD
.^-U
XIII.
001
)o>io
.001
!9l(9
or v> \
t
Jt*9
o^
OJDQJO
JJ(
.^oo
(v-??
('t^Ot-a
o^viv
^^Xjt
JJj
ft
V)O V
17 a
292
Otto Lichti,
JLu(
1)9
[1912.
^c
JJ^OOO
CXHUO
JQJU9
XIV.
fol.
^5
17* *f io.Aoto
tlo. ft*
\olJLo?
Jii
^ov
001
)Jlao
n \ >o
^oNXJ^o
Jlso n
jj
^9
yjao
nr>
)ji
^.
nr> >;
^.nr>
j>\n\a>'o{
.;
JlouX
j* (oo
o{
uoi;
)J9
Jllo
.JjuCS
(joi
JLflOLSJJo
oyi\UJ9
*>
<>)J
^oj
Ji
00*9
.<DO;_gtd9
J\i
(901
<V
t ^
AA
.N.^
jrvNo v>
AO U^.
fsv*
xv.
17
^*;nnv>9
|J9
t-o
Do
.(jc
^K^o!
LO-DOI
061
DasSendschreibend.Patriarchentarschrischan,&c. 293
XVI.
\t)
^^
fol.
18*
JK
JJjo
(^oo
]>>
ok-
^01^9
JLJUA
001
i3o
oo*
JLj';
oj
vooiX
$)J
vi^ojtio
^OOM^JO
iao
*j)J
^oi^oi
v3(
)J
*-so
JLio?
oot
JN
o!*
(iopajLa
{io*kJL
{001
Q;
o(
Q.V>
^o]Lo
jj
)J
JL*J?
.(ooi
loot
il;^np)^
.""^o
KA>jji!o
(0010
-uo^/N
o&oto
ot
nvVv
loot
Jla.nn
a.^9
]L9X uX v Uo
JLooja^oo
.;
m v 9J
.ooi
)J
^p
U?
jJi?
JJL^I
(Jo
,vtvv>o
Ms.
.JLuapoo
|jbV>?
.|u>9ojo
JL&^oi
o; nv>
A, nvo
09
294
Otto Lichti,
[1912.
(Id
JjLDOtO
Jb>>
OC*
.*
^p
i-i/v*
XYII.
^^
K*!o
.{)Lai^;ojUL>tooo
J^au,A.flDJL^
^9
Jt
XVIII.
Jj?
Hi
QJOf
XIX.
fol.
19
^o
^090.^09
(laju^jtojt ^i-^J
xx.
U?
^9
yOop
ool
Vol. xxxii.]
O-LJQ-OD
..QJOi
v*^V_.W|t
jJbs^O
.uODO9^1CLX^lS9
p*^o ^^DO
.av>\io o^ox>b
>U
XJL
v&e<QDO
.j^'JL^ ojLLoi{
^a
>r
tjU^so
om^ilo
i:
.^
fol.
20
io^o
oiw.oi?
JbLdoto
Jlao nrh>,>)J
*ooio
Jl
.jLlonrn
ClS>^a.AJ
001 if*^*?
.OA.JL
iK^o
^A9
>
JXJL
JLo^Jto
J ^S;^o
>
OQ~
^Poi
v|
.tt^JL
ooot
v=
ajo
.jlytNv^
010
^V
JLcooVo
loot \*(
Jv^v^y*
jju^Xo
.JLo^J^o^
tOJot?
J^-^
jLa^o
010
^0^00^19
oJL^u
.(\ut>
^.iob
01
^OtVlVJ?
^^o^
loot
.{oo
(t-X-?
XXI.
|nt>nvti>
oiloVo^j^
(JL^ss
iV-^-X
.Jl
Ms.
>\oy
ooot
)j
^.
nr>
>
JLAJ
296
Otto Lichti,
(jjbw
)joi!
it-**-
[1912.
^sfe .vpou^o
^f
onoijo
*u^\
.0001
{904*009
IO..DOI
0001
000
0001
21
x^JO
>
K*2k
A*
0001
0001
t^-^
.!jo4J
)JLDO*
J'-
^^
jUxJw ool
OOi
JLL09
LO-DOI
001
00010
.0001
0001
^.JDOI
0001
Ox.
O^LJO-JDO
^.0^^090
^.0010
jL^;
004.^
00019
{^CH
<T>
^t
001
OOQ1
{001
fol>
OQ9-
J^\X>OJL
*99
IJQIO
Jl>nr>\
0001
Ms.
^.
(001
JL
99)^0
.^oA^joo .(^jLu^o
^
ooN
^>^
Jbo^ jjiia-l
^t-^-^-
.u&fiOJ9
tool
{900900
Vol. xxxii.]
toot
001
oviNtio
iuQ^^9
*.
(iov=*(
onm ^
0001
^f* 01
)Jo
)J
^
>Q>\^Kft>{
O?
,jDO
(Jo
JJ{
.wD
XXII.
oot
604
.^CQJO
.^
>^>^>
^
"
^9
J^a-.
foot
oot
it
001
Jbsoa-
601
)j
*^
.jljt-t-jD
^>o
JL^CLJt9
JU>
1 "
JLu099
ilaiovvt^
ypovi^o
nr>
i^
f(
JLu099
^QA^^
)i
^.
m ,-^s
QjujLjul!
|J
ooio
OO19
1
Ms. ^XA!!O.
VOL. XXXII.
PART
Irrtiiraliche
III.
Wiederholung im Ms.
21
298
Otto Licliti,
ftovma
.^fiouj?
JLoJLiojo
-^'j
000)
20
j;
mv^ij?
^?
^JUA9
^o
01^9
04^9
KA.OO!
Jboo-
fkjQLaio?
r~o
^O
^j-3 foop9
JLjoow?
0001
(jjo^o^
^OOy.N VI
-JL*A>9
[1912.
*QNO
j^a^
^AX
0^9 60
uujSi
Xot ooo
JU9
J^OGu^
.JLu^
99jb
(*&=>
Jiot
JB.
I.
^^U
JLiA^OJL ^9
{9^9 <ma,.9Qjao
(Cod
jm
Jfe^ic. Pa?a^.
fol 139
r.
'po
b.)
0001
001
0001
jLu^9 (0019
JJ
OP090
01
o+a
ooi
ooi po
)Jo
i;|V
1 Die
folgenden Stiicke sind aus dem Kodex Bibl. Mediceae Palatinae
num. 298, antea 111 (cat. p. 197). Wie oben gesagt, habe ich die Abschrift vom Herrn Professor Brockelmann benutzt.
3
4
Im Kodex
Im Kodex
v. a.
steht hier
steht hier
beginnt nun.
Vol. xxxii.]
2)asSendschreibend.PatriarchenBarschuschan,&c. 299
<ju?
JJ
foot
Jlj
.(U
01
061
oop?
ol
Jlj
JLua?
oopj
1
3
5
Kodex hat da
Im Kodex steht
Im
Original
v. b.
Im
beginnt nun.
Original
oil
2V
300
Otto Lichti,
Of-X OO+Jdi
JJo
ji^J jLuaj
jw
.o\*
[1912.
iJ^Xo,^^^^
'^t^^i
cxJtaj
(i
~ju>
ouo? oo
(j^Jut
)J
l+s*> 0001 O
\A
JOO
JLu^9 0^090 01
i
O01
001
2.
001 JL^dQJ
*.=>
Palat. fol.
140
0^
r.
H^iov)
b.)
^>oto
y
n>^v> ^jjo
loot
i;
v> v
)J
JL9Q^9
o;oi9
JJo
"^
JLjLaj
^o
.JLOQ^JO
.JL^9to
i\*io
061
(;^p
ja.>nr>9
.JL
Jl^oa^
^^o
0*0
iV-^O-i?
9axA^.a
tpot
r. a.
beginnt nun.
JLo^U>O
{y^j'iX? Ra^oj
.)jLa$n
Fol. 140
\ o *>?o
^ol
JJ9
061
Fol. 140
r.
Jlvinr)
nN
b.
jJo
jLuu
beginnt nun.
Vol. xxxii.]
DasSendschreibend.PatriarclienBarschuschan^&c. 301
3.
140
r.
b.)
"i-- YE*
j^-*v>^
(Voi
j
iVSio JK o*
ojiioj*
^po^No-a)!
j,
J^>>bo
^~(J
/iv
^^^
{Lo*>
)J
Jbo
4.
(Gxi.
ot
140
r. 6.)
140
v.
5.
a.)
Loot
6.
]L\X ^
Uberschrift
ist in
Uberschrift
ist in
Fol. 140 v.
Ebenfalls rot.
Kod.
a.
Rot geschrieben.
Rot geschrieben.
beginnt hier.
*
Ebenfalls rot.
140
v. a.)
302
Otto
7.
(Cod.
.0001
>
BM.
.JLuuJL^09
JLooj ^4>
)J(
Jooi
J(AAV>
oK*J9
(Cod.
BM.
.Jiojo^o9
[1912.
140
^ayaao iv^d
JLuu
8.
LiMi,
ili
t^
JboKju?
s-OtoK^t
6.)
;vi^N
JLjio
toA
V^-^.?
)j
{iQJU90L^O
.^Pn.^DO
|J
Jlj)J
JJ9
Jjo^A
^3iaAJ
)J9
V
vjl
9.
(CW.
BM.
JJ9
01
>
Rot.
Im Kodex
!oo,l.
Ro
t.
Rot.
JJo
OWO^O? ^sOO
.(;l'99
^?
JJ
^OCH^
JL^Q-
^A9i
^00.*
JJ?
v.
i^^B
.^^O^
JLjL
140
)Jo
o{
oKJ
t-oo
^9
>
a.)
OfK^ij^09 i990iC^
(j!V
v.
v. 6.)
of
.{1JJ9
Vol. xxxii.]
DasSendschreibend.PatriarchenBarschuschan,&c. 303
10. (Cod.
r.)
on..-, .N.o
VQ^O(J
)Jo
|J
JLaLoo
.toot
|Jt
)J
.{lo^x9
9
J09i
.^ov^
jLu^9 jUVo^o
11. (Cod.
Hoot
OVA
tio^d;
JjLdot
JL^cx-o
^3
)i
^m
.-y
JLa'
JJ?
JiaVx>
^0190(9
JJ9
Jlv>\V9 O^9
Jlo
A
5
.
^^;
^6^
nv>9
oo
.^t*
.H,vi
Rot.
4
..
Kodex
ioo*.
m\
)*
>v>
)J
,.
t.
Im Kodex
^JL^aa.
10
Kod: u!
.JL90
v\
304
Otto Lichti,
{;nnr ^o-oli
[1912.
of*
OCX
12 (Cod.
JLp)iv>\o
OM^X?
^o?
)J
fol 141
Jfedic. Palat.
i&Z.
!J^bou
JLi^oi
t-
(Li
o! jLcibaiaJ
r.)
oolo
JJ
.099
^9
JL^o
9ai.j9
JJo
.JL9Q-9
)J
Jfedzc. Pa^a^.
13. (Cod.
a^;
.O^JDI
fol 141
v.)
.JLiio9)J
<mo.*.^jaX
^o
jo. A \oljlo
(00^9
.^090^^0
foot
3
4
5
JbxiK^o
Im P Ji>^m,-n\
.(001
il^09 wK^o{
^oo
J iN {9
.
eingeschoben.
Fehlt in P; dafur:
Fehlt in P.
P
P
hat hier
Jto,,
Rot geschrieben.
Nfji^
004
7
j.> ?
o^o.
Rot geschrieben.
8 'Kodex hat
vo^.^ ,V. Tarun (auch Tarjun, Taronkh, usw.), eine Festung
an der arinenischen Grenze; siehe Muller, Fragmcnte Historicorum Graecorum V, 215, 264. Fur die ganze Stelle siehe auch 180, 344.
Vol. xxxii.]
JLoc*
.lr+.
^nrualkae
tlo^
looto
^pot^N.
|J
loot tao
IO^JUD
>v
.J
loot
L*Ko
)Jo
ooo
)J?
iKao^.o
jL>
JL^^nS
)Lx
JJt
.JLu^jtio
Joot
JL\V
toot
u^OQ.^
(oot
III
u?
.Jl
Kodex
\n\v\
hat
Gewohnlich ano^oj^oo?.
Kodex vrcai^jo^.
&
3 Kodex
Kodex loo,.
1 Rot
geschrieben.
JLo
306
Otto Lichti,
[1912.
Ubersetzung
fo1 -
den
i-
foi.
in Ewigkeit, Amen.
Es ist ein Gott, der tiberall und in uns alien ist, o geistlicher und heiliger Vater! und ein Herr, Jesus Christus, in
welchem
alles
beschlossen
ist,
tionen
des
nach.
Wir haben
"Wort:
dem Wesen
(ovo-ia)
Wenn
ein-
(325).
(Orat.
XXXI.
Groften
sie (die
sagen
Und
Eunomianer), sind dann nicht drei Gotter?
ist,
130, 14).
Vol. xxxii.]
1
dringe bei uns der heidnische Wahn des Sabellius ), und wir
am Ende gar tun nach Art der Juden. Auch nicht drei nach
dem Schisma
grofier,
am
des Arius 2
Das Bose
groi-J,
grofiten.
1st
lehrte.
Der Vater ist Yater ohne Anfang, das heifit ohne Zeugung.
Der Sohn ist Sohn und nicht ohne Anfang; denn er ist vom
Yater gezeugt worden. Der Heilige Geist ist ausgegangen vom
Yater und mit dem Sohne. Ein Wesen, eine Gottheit, ein
Reich, eine Obrigkeit, ein Wille, (und) eine Macht und eine
3
Nicht drei Substanzen, oder drei Gotter, oder drei
Tatigkeit.
leitende Prinzipien, oder gar verschiedene und sich gegeniiber4
stehende; sondern es ist ein Gott nach Natur und Wesen
;
i.
e.
getrennte Eigenschaften
der
heiligen
Arius (256336).
3
Eigentlich sagt Gregor so: Die Eigenschaften (Gottes) sind: des
Vaters, dafi er ohne Prinzip und Anfang ist und hei&t Prinzip als das
Ursachliche, als die Quelle, als das ewige Licht; des Sohnes, daft er zwar
keineswegs ohne Prinzip, aber doch das schopferische Prinzip des Weltalls ist.
(Orat. XX. 8 p. 380.)
Beziiglich des Heiligen Geistes lehrte Gregor, indem er Johannes 1 9
auf die drei Hypostasen der Gottheit anwandte, und sagte: Es war Licht
und Licht und Licht, aber ein Licht, namlich ein Gott. Was auch dem
David vorschwebte, wenn er sagt: In deinem Lichte sehen wir das Licht.
Denn jetzt schauen und verkiindigen wir es auch, indem wir aus dem
:
dem
Heiligen
3 p.
XXXI.
557.)
4
pais, reXetais,
na.6'
eaurd?
ist
vfacrTtixrais,
MVTO
findet.
seine beste
folgende:
apiO/j.$
^(o.v
diapercus,
0iW &
rpurlv ISd-nyr
voe-
XXXIII.
Lauras u0eo-rw-
16 p. 614.)
(Orat.
Erklarung
Einen ahnlichen Ausdruck finden wir in Gregors Reden ,,Wir wolleu
eine und dieselbe Natur der Gottheit festhalten, welche in dem Hervorgehenden erkannt wird, wie unser Inneres in dem Verstande, der Ver<T(us
nunft und
dem
Geiste".
(Orat.
XXIII. 11
p. 431.)
308
Otto
liefie,
sagt.
LiMi,
[1912.
Merkmale, wie
ist.
11.
kam vom
Dreieinigkeit
Himmel berab, unverandert, namlicb der Sobn, der vom Vater
3
gezeugt war im geistlicben Sinne. Er ward Menscb
gleicb
wie wir, um unsertwillen obne Unterschied, da er seiner Natur
Einer aber von
dieser
beiligen
worden war.
Herrlicbkeit
wiederkommen, zu ricbten
Lebendigen und die Toten,
wie die Stimme des Engels den beiligen Aposteln verkiindigte;
wie dies ja in der Scbrift der Acta Apostolorum gescbrieben
er
die
stebU
7 heiftt es
Wer
zu vergleichen?
ist
137
tiber die
MACHTE
SIE
NATUR.
derblichen
*
zum
Acta 10
.,
unverderblichen
42.
p. 421.)
Vol. xxxii.]
sott
eine
Natur dee
gottlichen
ist.
Aber
es
Nestorius,
451.
(451).
6
Cyrill f 444.
Eutyches, f 458.
7 Auch hier ist unser Autor wieder
Gregor gefolgt, der an zwei verschiedeneq Stellen ungefahr dasselbe sagt: ,,Der LOGOS Gottes, der
ewige, unsichtbare, unbegreif liche, unko'rperliche, das Grundwesen aus dem
Grundwesen, das Licht aus dem Licht, die Quelle des Lebens und der
Unsterblichkeit, der Abdruck der urbildlichen Schb'nheit, das feste Siegel,
das unwandelbare Bild, die Begrenzung und das Wort des Vaters
ER
310
Otto Lichti,
dem
[1912.
und Macht,
und
natiirliche
Menschen zu
fol.
an Eure
fiir
uns
Worten
als
Willen
IV.
'
tJoer
Ihr
und dem
von denen das Eine vergottlichte, das Andere vergottder neuen Verbindung, o der wunderbaren Vermischung!"
(Orat. XXXVIII 13. p. 671; XLV. 9 p. 851.)
licht
Geiste,
wurde.
Vol. xxxii.]
I)asSendschreibend.PatriarchenBarschiischan,&c. 311
und
die
Wir
Juden
lamm
Adam
xweiten
von dem, was Adam hatte. Wenn jeder Leib aus vier Substanzen besteht, wie ist es dann moglich, dafi Adam aus vier
Substanzen vollkommen war?
Da
er
Leib und das Blut Christi dar zum Gedachtnis seines Todes,
wie er im Obergemach zeigte,
offenbarte. 2
denn Wasser und Mehl bilden noch nicht den Leib Christi in
der Vollstandigkeit. Auch nicht die beiden Elemente, Staub
und Wasser, konnten oder konnen den Leib Adams darChristi
aufgestempelt,
vom
die
Priester
am
friiheii
Morgen gebacken
Dafur
werden.
ist ein
Der Wein, der beim Abendmahl gebraucht wird, ist der persische
Schiraz-Wein, der reiner, vergorener Traubensaft (nicht mit Wasser gemischt)
ist.
am Nachmittag oder Abend gefeiert, sonVormittag; aufier am Weihnachts- und Ostersonntagsabend und
am Griindonnerstag Nachmittag.
* I Kor. 15
47; Rom. 5 12 f.
2 Mat. 26
26.
Die Eucharistie wird nicht
dern
am
312
Otto Lichti,
Denn
stellen.
sie
[1912.
am
Leibe Christi
ist
kein
Adam
zu mir ziehen." 2
im Evangelium
ziemt
es
Salz
Sauerteig zu nehmen in Eucharistie.
das Symbol der Liebe Gottes zu uns. Denn es
sich,
wiederum
ist
,,Ihr seid
gelium
8.
Also
ist
es
notwendig,
Job. 12
Matt. 13
Job. 3
Sonderbar
Matt. 5
Mk. 9
Christi,
dem
o. 379).
33,
usw.
16.
ist
im Leib
32.
daft
13.
50.
Lev. 2
13.
Vol.xxxii.]
er
bestimmt hat,
es sei
Denn
in
denn,
derjenige,
Philosophen
ajfirmativa
man
gebraucht
(Tr/aoo-Sio/oicrriKa
hier
den
Terminus:
,,definita
2
KarafanKa.) universell einschlieftend".
Denn
nun
und
lehrt
,,alles"
Gebote
ein.
Es
gebracht wird.
(Oblate),
alles,
als
die,
- -
ist.
Diese
- - iiber diesen
Gegenstand
wenig anstatt viel
Worte nun
mogen genug
sein.
Uber OlivenoL
Wir gebrauchen
Broten, welche mit Ol bestrichen wurden, und mit den Leuchtern und den Lichtern. 4 Ebenso war das Olivenblatt, welches
die Taube 5 dem gerechten Noah zur Abendzeit brachte, ein
Zeichen
*
des
Hiob 6
Namlich
2
3
Matt. 28
Endes
Die Kinder 6
der Flut.
welche
6.
19.
Gen. 8:3.
VOL. XXXII.
Part
III.
* Ex. 29
Matt. 21
2.
15.
22
ihm
f
c
l-
314
Otto Lichti,
[1912.
zugejauchzt haben mit Olzweigen, symbolisierten die Barmherzigund das Heil, das er selbst brachte von der Flut
keit Gottes
Auch
der Siinde.
der Samariter
*,
Rauber Gefallenen erbarmte, als dieser hinabging von Jerusalem nach Jericho, ist Christus, welcher die Menschen rettete
mit seinem Blute. Mit Wein und 01 verband er seine Wunden und heilte ihn. 2 Aber auch der Menschensohn wurde
3
gesalbt fur uns, von seiner Mutter und den andern Weibern,
4
da
der
Lukas
dreimal;
bezeugt liber eine, und
Evangelist
andern Evangelisten (bezeugen) liber eine andere, welche
salbte. 5
Also diirfen wir auch 01 darbringen beim
lebendigen Opfer, dem Abendmahl Christi; wie auch Salz ein
Symbol der Liebe und Barmherzigkeit Gottes fur die Menschheit ist. Aber wenn einem Priester an Glauben mangelt, und
die
ihn
er dabei
unbarmherzig
Auch
ist,
Dingen nicht
der
foi.
fiber
aft
und
esse,
Und nachdem
kam Jesus und
sagt Christus zu
sie
bereitet batten,
er
,,Seht, es
~i
Luk.
ist
vollbracht";
8
2
10~: 33.
und damit
Luk. 10
besiegelte er vollstandig
34.
Job. 12:3?
Haaren.
4 Luk. 4
e
Matt. 26
salbte
die
3738.
:
26.
Fiifie
Mk. 17
Luk. 22
8.
3;
Matt. 26
8
sie
mit ihren
f.
Luk. 22
16, 37.
Yol.xxxii.]
DasSendschreibend.PatriarchenBarschuschan,&c. 315
Darauf nahm
und nachdem
er
,,Brot",
um
Wie entkommt
dies Ungesauerte,
Das alttestament-
in
dem Wort
liche
einzuscbliefien.
Lamm
keine Tiere
ist
hat
abgeschafft
abgescbafft
mehr
opfern,
alle
Welt ist. Wenn Moses abgescbafft ist mit Christo, und die
Torah mit dem Evangelium, und der Sabbat mit dem heiligen
Sonntag, so ist notwendigerweise auch Ungesauertes abgeschafft
worden. Wenn Ungesauertes besteht, und das Lamm noch
3
Berecbtigung bat, so ist also bis jetzt der Gesalbte Gottes
noch nicht getotet worden, und redet Paulus falsch, wenn
er
sagt: ,,Unser
geopfert fur uns."
Passahlamm
4
Wenn
ist
Christus,
noch das
geschlachtet
und
Ungesauerte
besteht, so ist unser A. T. nicht erneuert worden, und der
erste Adam ist nocb in seiner Siinde.
Und wahr wlirde das
T
schriftliche
ort der Juden, Toter Gottes, dafi bis jetzt Christus
noch nicht gekommen ist. Fur Christen ziemt es sich, einem
jetzt
jlidische
Wenn
1
solltet:
Wober
batten
sie
gesauertes
ff.
Randglosse: ,,Diese wurden erneuert, Und Verheifiung auf VerheiBung wurde uns gegeben. ,Abgeschafft' steht geschieben an der Stelle
wo: ,Erneuert ist das Alte ."
3 Dies deutet doch wohl auf
Lammopfer hin.
* Kor. 5
7.
2
22*
316
Otto Lichti,
[1912.
die
dem
haben,
schneiden lassen nach der Taufe: Siehe, ich Paulus sage euch:
,Wenn ihr beschnitten werdet, wird euch Christus nichts
ntitzen". 2
Sabbat
v.
JJber das
Also
feiert,
Dtn. 16
2 Gal. 5:2.
3.
Meines Todes steht nicht dabei.
:
Job. 19
34.
DasSendschreibend.PatriarchenBarschiischan,&c. 317
Vol. xxxii.]
Wein
bei ihren Opfern, welche ausgeschlossen sind vom christAuch sind sie ausgeschlossen vom wahren
lichen Glauben.
ziemt es
sagt:
Wasser
dafi
verkiindet,
schreit
ist
,Gott
getotet
vi.
Wegen
vollzieht.
auch
es
und
nicht,
Kanones wird
es
,,Geht
und
den
lehrt alle
3
sagt Christus, ,,und taufet sie auf den Namen des
Das ist die
Yaters, des Sohnes, und des Heiligen Geistes".
wahre Regel des (rechtglaubigen) orthodoxen Glaubens, welchen
Volker"
welche
'
sie
taufen,
heidnische Lehre!
statt
Himmelreich". 5
ins
unser Vater.
und der
.Rest
ganz fremd.
1
Das
Durch
lischen Vaters.
ist
die
sie
taufen,
dem Glauben
Auch wieder
zum Gebet zu
s
rufen.
J o h.
(Miss.
5.
Welche Spiegel-
folt
'
318
Otto Lichti,
[1912.
der
G-emeinschaft
sollte
dem
cher
Christus
gehort,
wie
geschrieben
steht.
Soviel
daruber!
Tiber
d. h.,
hosdovdnutun. 2
stehen
und
vom Kot
fallen,
ist
01)
hat an der Salbung des gottmenschlichen Hauptes und zum auserwahlten, priesterlichen Volke Gottes berufen ist. Diese Salbung soil gegen
Yerderbnis der Siinde schiitzen und Bewahrung der Taufgnade wirken.
teil
Armenisch
Mat. 3
fiir
die Beichte.
8.
2 Petri 2
22
,,Der
Hund
kehrte
um
die
5
Sirach 31 (34)
30.
319
Wahrheit bekehrt.
am
fiir
4
Yergebung, sagt die Schrift, welche nur im Wort ist, damit
du nicht Stinde auf Siinde haufst. Also ist die Beichte nicht
schon, welche nicht aus der Wahrheit, sondern aus der Falschheit ist. Diese ziemt sich weder den Priestern, noch den Diakonen, noch den Laien. Dies geniigt uns soweit.
VIII.
den Abend des MittwocJi und Freitag.
Tiber
der
als
der Schopfung,
heilige
klugen Berechnung.
sagt der Apostel.
verlieren nichts,
wenn wir
nicht essen. 7
nicht zu Gott,
wir essen, und
Dariiber nun, dafi
wir daran festhalten, dafi der Anfang des Tages vom Abend
und nicht vom Morgen ist. Es ist zu ersehen aus dem, das
1
2 Sam. 12
Mat. 26
Sir.
Randglosse
34
16.
70.
Rom.
23;
:
,,Die
Luk. 23
42.
f.
sei
genannt nach
der Sonne, welche iiber die ganze Schopfung ist; der Montag nach dem
Mond der Dienstag nach dem Mars der Mittwoch nach Merkur ; der
;
Donnerstag nach Jupiter; der Freitag nach Venus; und der Samstag nach
Saturn. Diese ISTotiz ist von fremden Weisen."
6 Luk. 24
1
7 Paulus
Speise aber empfiehlt uns Gott nicht;
sagt etwas anders:
weder sind wir, wenn wir nicht essen, geringer, noch sind wir, wenn wir
essen, vorziiglicher".
(1 Kor. 8
8).
:
ff'.
fo1 -
10
320
Otto Lichti,
[1912.
aber Christus
in
der friihesten
heilige
niclit
auferstanden.
folgt.
Denn
In
dieser
Nacht
er ist auferstanden
Mar Ephram. 2
(natlirlich)
foL
jr re itag;
dies
der liber
Mat. 12
Sancti
Das Weihnachtsfest.
feiert,
nach
G-ewohnheit.
alter
Wisse,
40.
Ephraem
Syri Opera
Tom
I. p.
13
ff.
man
,,In
Vol. xxxii.]
Herr,
daft
alles,
woriiber
Ungewiftheit
ist,
Natur der Sache, oder von der Gewohnheit, oder von der
1. Yon der Natur: die Empfangnis,
Schrift festgestollt wird.
und
Geburt
Erziehung 2. von der Gewohnheit die Lehre der
Grammatik, oder Zimmermannskunst, oder Schmiedekunst
3. von der Schrift, endlich: die Beschreibung der Geburt Jesu
Zu der Natur und der Gewohnheit gesellt sich
Christi, usw.
:
die
einerseits
schien
usw.
Der
sechste
Monat
ver-
Sitte
der Armenier, jener dickkopfigen und hartnackigen Leute, die nicht zur
AVahrheit iiberredet werden so daft sie nach der alten Sitte am 6. Januar
;
f.)
nehmend an den
Rand
S. 164.)
Luk.
26.
Luk.
alter
36.
Sitte,
322
Otto Lichti,
am
im Monat Oktober
(Tisrin),
seinem Yater,
frohe Botscbaft
[1912.
nacbdem Zacbarias,
worden war,
nacb dem Sonnenjabre berecbnet, am 23. September, an welcbem Tage wir und die Griecben das Fest der Yerkiindigung
des Zacbarias feiern; und wenn du zablst und recbnest von
zum
die
elften;
iiberbraclit
bis
25.
so
Vol. xxxii.]
feiert,
Mar
Auf
beiligen Geburt,
Yon
festgestellt,
jedes
firr
sich,
nach der
schonen
Macht
der "Wahrheit
des Geheimnisses; wie ja auch bestimmt war die Zeit der Geburt unseres Heilandes, und die gottliche Erscheinung. Dies
das
ist
Argument
Erscheinung
fiir
und
x.
Daruber,
daft die
nung veranderten
Vater viel Passendes an der kirchlichen Ordin der Kirche ohne Verweis zur Qeltung
brachten.
heilige
alle
wurde.
30 Jahre einmal.
Auf
jedes
schiedene Ereignisse
der 5000 usw.
fo1 *
und
324
Otto Lichti,
[1912
und sie gieften Wasser in den Abendden Kelch der Danksagung misclien; auch
nehmen sie Wein und Salz in der Eucharistie. Eins von
diesen tun jene niclit, mil vielen andern Dingen. Nicht nur
feiern sie das Fest nicht an seinem Tage, sondern sie feiern
es am Sonntag.
Es ziemt sich aber gar nicht, daft an ihm
noch ein Fest gefeiert werde, aufter dem Gedachtnis der Auf-
mahlswein, indem
sie
erstehung.
und
Deswegen
ist
Wenn
herrlich.
nicht aufhoren
an ihm.
lichen Auferstehung
ist
es,
Wegen
der groftartigen
ihn beobachten
daft wir
und
und
herrfeier-
lich
wir aber die heilige Feier am Schluft des Mittwoch und Freitag anfangen, so haben wir dafiir kriiftige Beweise und wahrhaftige Zeugnisse. Erst ens, daft das erste Yolk, welches Gott
kannte und sowohl nach der Ordnung, wie nach den G-esetzen
Yom Munde
wandelte, war das Yolk der Kinder Israel.
G-ottes wurde ihnen anbefohlen durch Mose, daft sie am Abend
anfangen sollten, ihr Fest zu feiern und ihre Sabbate zu halten,
und so tun sie bis zum heutigen Tag. Zweitens aber, da der
Nacht vor
und
Pomp und
Vol. xxxii.]
Wenn
er
DasSendsclireibend.PatriarchenBarschuschan^c. 325
aber aufbricht, geht er ganz schlicht, nur wenige
bemerken seine Abreise. Also tun wir wohl, daft wir zuerst
den Einzug feiern, mehr als den Abschied. So wie wir auch
die Geburt unseres Herrn sehr ehren und vor her fasten; sei
es nun, daft
man
40 Tage
fastet,
Hymnen
verfaftt
sind,
Weissagungen, mehr
als iiber
dem
Sabbat.
Doch
bis
gibt es
noch
viele
Griinde
dafiir, daft
Tag oder das Fest bei seinem Eingang mehr als bei seinem
Ausgang gefeiert wird. Also haben wir Recht darin, daft wir
der
fo
\
XL
Daruber, dafi ein Priester den Bischof
segnet,
Es
ist
vom Bischof
von seinem bischonichen Genossen, sondern nur von Patriarchen, welcher grofter ist als er; well ein Bischof einen andern
Bischof nicht ordinieren kann; nicht einmal ein Patriarch kann
allein ihn ordinieren, wenn nicht ein andrer Bischof, oder zwei
mit ihm sein sollten, wie es in den Kanones befohlen ist. Ein
326
Otto Lichti,
[1912.
'
XIL
und Bestechungen 1
werden und einer uberbietet den andern, und sie jagen
einander von der Herde weg.
Dartiber,
ihre
daft
eingesetzt
Wiederum haben
durch
Bischofe
sie
Geld
am
aller schimpf-
lichsten
"Wenn
ist.
ist
als
der,
auf ihn; und nachdem er ein Jahr oder zwei oder ein wenig
mehr
wenn
in
und
nimmt seinen
ist,
kommt
ein anderer,
und
dafi
Hindernis,
wenn
Und
Sprengel.
ein Sprengel
eine
so
Menge
XIII.
17
Auch
die
und Konvente
ist
ebenso
be-
schaffen.
an
sich
Noch im
15.
heifit,
die Aufsicht
des
Jahrhundert wurden die Bischofsstiihle an den HochstDie Kleriker erpressten Geld vom Yolk, urn die
bietenden verkauft.
Vol. xxxii.]
DasSendschreibend.PatriarclienBarschuschan^&c. 327
was es auch sei, und ist fortan Herr des Platzes und
Machthaber in allem. Er kauft und verkauft, baut und zerstort, und er macht zu seinem Erben, wen er will. Er unterKlosters,
jeden Tag wird jedem fur seinen Bedarf Speise gegeben, einfach
und
wen
er will.
karglich.
Und
Der Abt
behalt,
wen
er will,
und jagt
fort,
im Kloster nichts
laufen
von
einem
zum
andern
Ort
und wechseln
gelten,
bestandig
von einem Kloster zum andern. Wenn aber liber ein "Weilchen ein andrer kommt, und dem Herrn des Ortes mehr Geld
gibt, wirft er den vorigen hinaus und nimmt seine Stelle. Und
die Briider selbst, weil sie
XIV.
ffber
den
'achfolge
Thron
des
Katholikats,
jiner
vom Heiligen
Geist und von der Heiligen Synode geDiese Sitte haben nur die Araber, dafi bei
ihnen ein Herrscher, namlich ein Kalife, durch erbliche Nach-
wahlt
ist
billigt
worden
ist.
folge
eingesetzt
wird,
Muhammed stammen
sollen.
es
namlich verboten,
dafi
ein
fol-
17
328
Otto Lichti,
[1912.
XV.
Uber Priester, welche ordiniert werden,
ohm dap
haben.
Ebenso, wenn
ihm
und
ist;
XVI.
fol -
18 a
schon
ist.
verliest
ihm
alle,
sogar solche,
seinen Sinn gekommen waren; und dabei kampft mit ihm der
bose Gedanke von diesen Dingen, welche er horte, welche nun
hat, ja
existierten
die er
auch lernte zu
ihm
sie
indem
kommen
sie in
Wiederum hat
ihr Bekenntnis
und
und Schaden
und bestandig halten
seinen Sinn
ihre
Lehre
viel
Ahnliches
329
dem Menschen,
wurde, ward ein Apostel, und stieg auf und wurde erhoht zum Rang der Zwolfe, und schrieb das heilige Evangelium.
fertigt
es vor,
bleibt,
am
kehrte Sunder)
einer
daft
Auch von
der
Ordnung der
Priester
Dummheit
ist
zu opfern, wie
doch wunderbar.
Wer
nicht wert
ist,
G-aben
der wiii'dig aein, einen Priester zu ordinieren, daft er opfern kann? Oder einen Altar (einzuweihen),
worauf das slihnende Opfer dargebracht und vollendet wird?
sollte
Novatian
Mariasse 2 Chr. 33
Matt. 26
(c.
VOL. XXXII.
200255).
:
13.
13.
Part III.
23
330
Otto Lichti,
[1912,
XVII.
foi-
19 a
Wiederum
ist
Lebenswandel
ihr
Ostentation, nicht in Wahrheit und Aufrichtigkeit ist. Aufierund vor den Leuten zeigen sie sich gerecht, Abstinenzler,
Naziraer, keusch und heilig; aber inwendig ist ihre Lebens-
lich
weise liederlich.
im
heiligen
Uber
sie ist
Evangelium
steht.
XVIII.
Daruber, daft
sie
am
sie nicht
teilnehmen
Diese scheinbaren Monche, in ihren Gewandern, sind eigentMonche; man halt nicht einmal geistlichen Gesang
lich keine
und Gebet
liber sie.
Aber
unter tausend
hatte mit
XIX,
fol '
b
Daruber, daft
bei
der heiligen
Taufsalbung.
Uber
Sie wahren
nimmt
von der
iiberhaupt nicht
Ordnung. Jedermann
Taufe weg den Sohn seines Bruders, oder den Sohn seiner
Vertrag
als seinen
die
XX.
fiber
IJber das Fest der heiligen Geburt, welches sie nicht gleichwie jedermann feiern, sondern dabei ihre eigentiimliche Sitte
halten, apart von alien Volkern, welche den Gekreuzigten
Vol. xxxii.]
DasSendschreibend.PatriarchenBarschuschan,&c. 331
waren nicht die ersten, die das Evangelium aksie nun wiinschen, ihr Eigenes aufzurichten,
zeptierten,
und die Gewohnheit, welche sie empfingen von den Aposteln,
preiszugeben. Sie waren im Gegenteil die allerletzten, die
an das Evangelium glaubten, durch den heiligen Gregorius im
Jahre 863 des Alexander. Nachdem sie Christen geworden
verehren.
Sie
dafi
kamen
selben Tage,
feiern die
am
so
Armenier)
viele
am
selben
sie
behaupten,
vordern gepflegt
des
Mar
ist,
so
Johannes. 1
wurde erneuert.
laM 30 Jahre
Kinder hatten,
Yieles
ist
abgeschafft worden,
man
Auch dies,
Ho hat
abgeschafft, dafi
man
und
vieles
sich taufen
als
sie
in der
Und
vieles
die Passion
mehr
gefeiert wurde,
1
Hier steht also ausdriicklich, daG nicht das ganze Schreiben von Job.
Barschuschan ist. Siehe Vorwort, p. 2.
23*
20 a
332
fo1 -
20
Otto Lichti,
hlittenfest auf
fest
ordneten
[1912.
sie in
Forschen von
wurden.
XXI.
Tiber die
des judischen
Wahrung
Gesetzes.
Darliber, dafi die ersten Christen viele Gebrauche der jlididischen Gesetzesbeobachtung bielten, welche die heiligen Apostel
und
aufhoben und
obwohl
Jlinger
foi.
2i a
dafi
trieben,
sie eine
liber die
Geschichte der Feste ^rlangten, welche nicht geziemend vervollkommt seien; da man erstens das Fest der Geburt am
Abend
in
Bethlehem
feierte,
und dann
in aller Eile
man
zuriick
nach Jerusalem,
feierte,
um
bis
zum
und Er-
Jordanflufi
zu
suchungen an,
an
die Patriarchen,
standen;
Volxxxii.]
DasSendschreibend.PatriarchenBarschuschan^&c. 333
zu bereclinen.
scliichte
Und
sie
rechnung der Monate und Jahre und fanden, dali das Jahr,
in welchem unser Herr geboren wurde, das 309. Jahr der
Griechen ist; und sie fanden, dafi der Anfang des Monats
Kanun
am
II. (Januar)
20.
Tag
des
Kanun
I.
(Dezember)
nach der Sonnenrechnung fiel; also am 25. in diesem (Sonnen-)
Monat waren es sechs Tage im Monde, welcher als Mond des
Januar gereclinet wurde. Sie bestatigten genau, dafi am 25.
Dezember nach. der Sonne unser Herr geboren wurde in diesem
Jahr. Am selben Tage nun feierten die Heiden das grofie
Sonnenfest, weil gerade zu der Zeit, am 24. und 25. im Monat,
die Jahreswende ist. Ich sage im Dezember, Marz, Juni und
September. Die Wende des Kanun, weil die Sonne gen Siiden
sinkt bis
zum Rande
bereit
alle
zusammen
einmiitig,
dafi
am
25.
und abge-
schafft werde
Berechnung nach dem Monde, da sie steigt
und fallt, und ungenau ist; namlich darin, dafi die Summe der
die
zugenommen
hatte.
XXII.
Wiederum untersuchten und lerechneten auch die heiligen Vater,
daJS unser Herr im 30. Jahr getauft wurde, welches das 339.
der Griechen ist, und im 15. Jahr des Kaisers Tiberius, welcher
die Stadt Tiberias am galilaischen Meer baute, wo der Jordan
foi.
22 b
334
Otto Lichti,
[1912.
ebenso
worden in
auch das
Kirchen
alien
[heilige
aller
sollte;
Tag, an welchem
man
i.
e.
der 14.
Und man
feierte das
Dinge am
heiligen
Sabbat
Unterschr ift:
Ignatius, Patriarch von Antiochien, genannt Matthaus, im
Jahr 1111 nach der Liste der 133. der Jakobitischen Patriarchen, Matthaus aus Mardin.
Vol. xxxii.]
Wiederum
Die
eine
Lammer
von Opfern
Lamm
Gottes, welches
befreit.
Nachdem
geworden
angenommen.
Die heutige Kirche
doch nicht
jiidisch,
dafi
die
nicht
sie
Opfer
aufier
brachte,
Gottes,
ist
ist fiir
jetzt,
wie
Leib brach.
Und
nun, ein Mensch sich verirrt und ein Opfer bringt wie der
Jude, so verleugnet er also all die Passion des Eingeborenen.
Jeder, der erlost ist mit dem Opfer des Sohnes Gottes, wird
nicht einflthren Opfer, damit er nicht verurteilt werde von der
Gerechtigkeit
(justitia).
Kein Mensch
Lamm
fiir
seine
Fliehe fort
opfert
nach dem
so ist das
vom
dich mifc den Juden, welche den Sohn getotet haben. Wenn
du opferst, hast du Teil mit den Juden, die den Sohn ge-
kreuzigt
kennen,
um
336
Otto Lichti,
[1912.
"Wer aber heute noch Opfer bringt mit Vorsatz, der ist ein
Jude und verlaftt die Ordnung des Eingebornen. Wenn nun
ein Priester Salz nimmt, um es zu segnen, damit er das Opfer
essen
daft
auch
unter
sich
die
das Priestertum
"Wer
die
die Opfer, damit sie nie wieder gebracht werden; wer denn
erkiihnt sich, sie heute noch zu bringen?
jemand wagt,.
ein Opfer zu bringen und verachtet das Gebot, so entfremdet
Wenn
er
sich
alien
Geheimnissen
des Eingebornen.
Siehe zu, du
Kluger, wenn ein Mensch irrt und bringt Opfer, daft du nicht
Wenn du
issest von dem Geopferten und dich verunreinigst.
Er
opferte sich
auf Golgatha fur die Sunder; wer also ein anderes Opfer bringt,
wird nicht angenommen. Aber die Juden leugnen, daft der
Sohn G-ott sei. Deswegen bringen sie Opfer, da sie ihn nicht
kennen. Die Gemeinde des Sohnes verwirft Opfer, da sie nicht
in ihr sein sollen; da sie aufblickt zum Herrn, welcher ein
Opfer wurde, damit er die Opfer abschaffte. Und sein Leib
und
sein Blut
auch lehrte
als er seinen
ist.
Vol. xxxii.]
Mar Ephram.
1.
Em
geschafft wiirden.
erst en,
jenem
Lamm
gekreuzigt wurde.
Wer
niefienden besser, sie essen ein totes und ersticktes Lamm, als
wie ein Lamm, in welchem die Leugnung der Juden versteckt
-
Es
ist.
"Wein
ist
als eine
besser,
er
Opfergabe.
3.
Mar
Ein
Ishaq.
die in Christo
tage
fiir
gestorben sind. Mit dem Blute der Tiere werden heute die
Und mit dem Priester, welcher
Yerstorbenen nicht erlost.
Salz segnet, sollst du nicht im Gebet stehen, damit nicht die
Engel dich schelten, wenn sie ihn in Gehenna stilrzen.
4.
oder
Ungesauertes
als
ist,
Hostie
Ja'qob.
am
Lamm
opfert;
Opferheiligtum.
338
Otto Lichti,
[1912.
Jeder, der heute ein Lamm oder Ungesauertes darbringt, verleugnet den Vater, welcher seinen Sohn opferte, damit er ein
Opfer
sei.
5.
Der feurige
Wir beobachten
Ignatius.
die
6.
Gregorius Thaumaturgus.
Nicht kann ein Christ die Nacht des Mittwoch und Freitag
aufgeben, ohne verdammt zu werden mit denen, die unsern
Herrn
fesselten
in der
Nacht
des Freitags
Und
iiberlieferten.
brachen, damit
sie
wiirden.
7.
Johannes sagt:
Solange die Welt tot war, opferte man Ungesauertes, weil
Ungesauertes tot ist. Seitdem aber Christus gekommen ist,
welcher das Leben ist, opfern wir gesauert Brot, welches
Leben
ist,
zum Beweis
8.
Dionysius sagt:
Es
wenn
die gottliche
Lamm
tes,
oder ein
der
soil
ob er treu
ist
im Glauben, oder
nicht.
9.
Mar
Hab
Wenn
ist.
Tiere
tat,
Severus.
issest,
was Basilius
mit
Sohn.
der Grofie
Ochsenfleisch
aft,
setzte er vomPriestertum
10.
scherzen
und
ziirnen Gott.
und
geiziges Herz,
fleht,
Denn
er
340
Otto Lichti,
[1912.
trennt sind durch den Glauben, so ziemt es sich, daft bei ihren
Gedachtnisfesten man sich trennt von ihnen; weil die Heiden
und Juden Opfer, die Christen aber Vigilien und Opfergaben
haben.
11.
Das Yolk
der Armenier
Yon
ihnen
"Wahrheit abgebracht haben. Einige ihrer Lehrer sind einerseits Juden, einige, andrerseits, Phantasten.
Deswegen folgen
sie
reinen
Wein
dafi
sie
Lamm
opfern und
unrein erklaren
gehen
lassen.
Den Arabern
folgen
sie
darin,
dafi
sie
drei
wegen
ist dies
ein heidnischer
heiligen Kirche
fremd.
12.
Mar
Johannes.
fur
den Christen,
daft er
Ungesauertes
esse,
ist es
nicht
(damit er
Vol.xxxii.]
DasSendsclireibend.PatriarchenBarscliusclian,&c. 341
mit den Juden verdammt werde), es sei denn aus Notwendigkeit der Reise; well, gerade wie das Essen von Gesauerniclit
grofi,
13.
Nachdem
er Katholikus
nicht
mit ihnen
zum
ersten".
Und
zum
letzten schlimmer
Weissagung
war aus der "Wahrheit; weil er je 40 Tage fastete, wie auch
Moses und Elias, und auf ihm war die Gabe der Weissagung.
Zu seiner Zeit wurde auch Koustantin glaubig, der siegreiche
Konig, und eins wurde der Glaube an Christum allerorts.
Deshalb riihmten sich die Armenier des Gregorius, welcher sie
belehrt hatte, weil er von Eusebius in Caesarea gelehrt wordeii
nahm von
sie
d.
Patr.Barschuschan, &c.
[1912.
critical notes,
Edited,
A.,
(see this Journal vol. 26 p. 197 and vol. 30 p. 187). The same
freedom has been maintained in regard to the form of presenting the material, but as heretofore the transliteration is
The
offered,
but
it
is
text as constituted
rather
is
reality.
solely,
made towards
felt
only
Texts.
if
Yedic
cation which would have some finality may properly be undertaken when the whole, or at least half, shall have been published in this
The
manner.
as soon as possible.
The transliteration
is
and the
"z"
(=
344
L.
C.
Barret,
[1912.
literation the
of classical texts.
Introduction.
It may be
signs are only four I think.
noted here that in this ms. a ligature which seems clearly ttr
appears very frequently but not always for tr: and one ligaf.
52
a,
and unclear
the hint.
The grouping
this book, eight
correctly
of the
belonging to the
hymns
fifth
the end
is
38 the end
in
hymns
anuvakas with
five
first
hymn which
anuvakas
hymns
which
is
opposite
f.
63
b.
maintained in
is
not numbered.
All the
indicated but no
not indicated.
is
There are a
Colophons, glosses, &c.
sort that may well be -recorded here.
opposite
is
in each;
hymn
hymn
In the
left
margin
3.
23
there
to think that
10 and 11 of
bit of
in between
stt.
hymn
25,
st.
1 is
Vol. xxxii.]
345
Veda.
we have the
following table:
26 hymns have
5
11
===
11
,,8
,,9
4
a
1
6 stanzas each
hymn
has
10 stanzas
11
12
=
=
=
35
32
is
10
11
12
=274
40 hymns have
New and
11
156 stanzas
old material. -
stanzas.
new
in structure
we have
is
in
form which
is
closer to the
24*
346
L. C. Barret,
[1912.
ATHARVA-VEDA PAIPPALADA-QAKHA
BOOK THREE.
1.
[f.
49 a
Q.
ofh
namo ganadhipataye
3.
z z
1.
2.]
4.
om
varcasodhi
tvam
irnah pra-
nath madhyamestheha
ma
sau kalpayad
digah
viriipah
sarva
s
tas
hvayahtu daga-
mim
ugras
sumana vaceta
|
yadi
Vol. xxxii.]
duto
jata agnir
bhavantu bahum
va jarase
baliiii
347
dadhati
|
gre mitravarunobha vigve deva marutas tva hvayantu sajatanam madhyaniestha iha sa syah sve ksetre saviteva vi raja z 4
z a pra drava paramasyah paravatag give te dyavaprthivi ba|
bhutam
tad ayam raja varunas tathaha sa tvayam ahvat tsvez 5 z indra idam manusyah prelii sam by ajnastba
varunena sanividanah sa tvayam ahvat sve sadbastbe sa devan
nam
ehi
6 z patbya revatir
babudha
virupab sarvas sangatya variyas te akran tas tva sarvas samvidana bvayantu dagamim ugras sumana vageba z 7 z yad
atra ta indras kevalir vigo
aj arena bavisadbi tva gamayamasi
|
balibrtas karat z 8 z 1 z
With
In
st.
3b
2.
[f.
49
C.
a,
3.
1.
17.]
7.
49
b.]
rbhir akramit.
anu tva harino vrsa padbhi9 catuvisane vi gva 9uspitam yadi kin
ttriyam akramit.
apa
id
muncantu
a-
z 2 z
ksettriyat.
Read: harinasya raghusyado 'dhi glrsani bhesajam sa ksetriyam visanaya visucmam amnagat z 1 z anu tva harino
|
348
L.
ak'ramlt
C.
Barret,
[1912.
2 z
iva chadih
3 z
yasya muncatam
yad asutes
kriyamanayas ksetriyam tvabhy anage vedaham tasmin bhesate z 5 z apavase naksatranam apavasa
utosasam apasmat sarvam amayad apa ksetriyam akramit z
6 z apa id va u bhesajlr apo amivacatanlh
apo vigvasya
|
hemistich of
st.
4 and the
first
of our ms.
3.
[f.
49
b,
1.
7.]
3. 6.
g.
puman pummama-
sa hattu gatfn
kan yah-
mam
9 caharh dvesmi ye ca
In pada c read hantu gatrun, in d
tan agvattha nisnihi gatfn
|
mam.
vrtraghna medl as in Q.
is
the
itself.
yathagvattha
eva prdanyatas tvam abhi
tistha saha-
sva ta
In pada b read nig grnasi; in c prtanyatas; and
This stanza is not in Q.
of d read ca.
yathagvattha vi bhinagchahta haty arnave
|
at the
end
eva
me
gattro cittani
Yol. xxxii.]
349
Veda.
sina
bandhanat: in
nirbadhapranuttanam.
prainan nadami manasa pra
9rtyena vrahmana prainan vrksasya 9akhaya a9vatthasya
nudama[f.
50
a] si
z 3 z
[f.
50
Q.
3.
a,
1.
it is
1]
13.
yad adas sampratir ahav anadata have tasmad a nudyo nama stha ta vo namani sindhavah z
In a read samprayatlr, in b hate: in
c a nadyo.
yat presita varunena
t sibham samavalgatah tad apunor id indro vo yatih asmad apo
anu sthuna
In the first hemistich read varunenac chlbham samavalgata:
in c it seems necessary to read apnod indro vo yatir; in d
sthana.
indro
This
is
nama vo
indro
|
hitam.
350
L. C, Barret,
sihdhamana upenyah
cyate
[1912.
b we
for
may read
tivro raso
grharh
The
ms. corrects
prga to
to gam.
In pada a we may read id apa ahur, tho asur with TS.
would seem better; in b itya seems possible, but all the other
texts have it tah.
In cd read madhuprcam arangama a ma
yad
ik
pafyamy
uta va
6 z
2.
7 of the Q. ver-
d. St.
40. 5.
5.
[f.
50
Q.
1.
a,
3.
11.]
2.
amumuhad
agni
yani cittani vo hrdi vi vo dhamatv okasah
dhra-
jya
ta
|
tan
visuco
vi
nagaya
vi sam akutuyathato
muhya-
cittani
amisam
|
cittani
daha
hrtsu 9okair grahyamitras tapasa vidhya 9atfn.
sena
asu ya
Vol. xxxii].
[f.
50
b.]
351
Veda.
aratim
c,astim
sa
citta
mohayatu paresam
nirhastanc,
ca
jahi z 4 z
amisam
f.
50
b,
1.
z6z5zalz
1.
6.
[f.
50
Q.
b,
3.
1.
2.]
1.
agnir no vidva
n praty etu gatrun pratidahann abhicastim aratim sa menam mohitu paresam
ca
jatavedah
yuryam ugra maruta Tdrge
krnavaj
nihastarig
stha-
asman. ga
vrttrahan agnig ca dahatarh
tvam
indra
abhi
tarn
tfyatam
prasuta indra
prati
|
jahi
prati-
namohanam
esam
me-
kr-
etu parajitah z
352
L.
C.
Barret,
[191
Read: agnir no vidvan praty etu gatrun pratidaliann abhisa senam mohayatu paresam nirhastaiig ca
gastim aratim
krnavaj jatavedah z 1 z yuyam ugra maruta idrge sthabhi
preta mrdata sahadhvam amimrdan vasavo nathitebhyo agnir
yes&m vidvan praty etu gatrun z 2 z amitrasenam magliavann
asman gatruyatam abhi tarn tvam indra vrtrahann agnig ca
dahatam prati z 3 z prasuta indra pravata haribhyam pra te
|
vajrah pramrnan yahi gatrun jahi pratico 'nucah paraco vigvistam krnulii satyam esam z 4 z senamohanam krnava
|
vam
The reading
struction (KZ.
of our ms. in
2 supports Aufrecht's recon27. 219), yet I venture to print the above for
In st. 6b it is entirely possible that we should
the Paipp.
read ghnantv for 'gnis
tv, in
7.
st.
agreement with Q.
50
[f.
Q.
b,
3.
1.
12.]'
9.
ekaatam viskandhani
visthitas prthi
punah
The forms
in
pada a may be
it
is
In
yathabhicakra as in Q.
in
sutre pi9unkhe khugilam yad a badhnantu vedhasah sravasyam 9usma kababam vadhrim krnvantu bandhurah.
Read pigange khrgalam in a, badhnanti in b; gusmaiii kaba-
vam
in
c.
Q. has gravasyum in
c.
Vol. xxxii.]
353
Veda.
yena
sravasyo carata devayavasuramaya gunam kapir iva dusanarh bandhura kabhavasya ca
In a read sravasyac caratha, although sravasyo points toward the cravasyavac. of Q.; for b deva ivasuramayaya: in c
dusano, and in d kabavasya.
[
[f.
51
a]
of Q. ab:
first
uttaravanto
[f.
51
a,
1.
1.]
Q. 19. 56.
Read babhuvitha
Q.)
and
rupam apiguhamanah
The ms.
Read
c
corrects to (vicjava)ya(va).
bhisajyam.
mahimanam rcchah
vabantu
patyam
sa svar
aniana
It seems to
'bhi devan,
me
which
trayastrih9a-
is
Snaganah.
354
L. C. Barret,
caranty
[1912.
adityaso varune-
nanusista
dhi jajnise
duram
z 3 z
Read: vidma
'dhipa iha te
yahi duram
z 6 z
z.
9.
[f.
51
a,
1.
13.]
ambatma pusat
srta padvat srjata satyayajnihandutan asmai visaya hantave var ugram arasarh visam aheyam arasam visam nirvisarh
Out of the first five words, even if they are correctly divi-
yeyam
srjami
and
the
probably
colon
should
stand
after
han-
different.
all
It
is
clear
st.
1.
mamahi
u-
3 z
Vol. xxxii.]
355
Veda.
aditim
kanlni-
kam asmai
Read guraputram
in b.
yo devanam purohito
a-
51 k] smai z
var
tave
|
* * * *
var
ara-
ugram
z 5 z
*anag
candan
arkan
asmai
visaya
han-
6 z
The
anag
yama
s pari
[f.
51
b,
1.
191. 13 abc.
3.]
7 z
te
mrtyur eko
nas krnvantu bhe-
sajam devasenabhya
punar no yamas pitrbhir dadatu punar mittravaruna
ghamano
vato gnih aaghagansas punar dat punar no devi nirrtir dadhatu ya devi
|
prahitesus
patag tapase va
pitaro
srakso
tena tvam
|
356
L. C. Barret,
da 9ivo na
9astur a cara
ma
te
[1912.
sahasraksa bha-
manyu
metur
gat.
jahi z z
om yan dvisma
tan jahi z 5 z anu 2 zz
Read: mrtyur eko yama ekas sarvesu garur ud bhava te
nas krnvantu bhesajam devasenabhyas pari z 1 z punar no
s
yamas pitrbhir dadatu punar mitravaruna vato 'gnih aghamaro aghagansas punar dat punar no devl nirrtir dadatu z 2 z
ya devl prahitesus patas tapase va mahase vavasrsta somas
tvam asmad yavayatu vidvan pitaro va devahuta nrcaksasah
|
tarn jahi z 6 z 5 z
St. 3 has appeared
11.
[f.
Q.
51
3.
b,
1.
13.]
26.
atha raksamantram zz zz
raksa ye sthasyam pracyam digi hetayo nama devah
tesam vo agni
r isavah te no mrdata to no vruta tebhyo namas tebhyas
om
syam daksinayam
te
[f.
ta
no mrdata
sthasyam udlcya
praviddhyanto
di9i
bhyo namas tebhyas svaha z raksa ye sthasyam dhruvayarh di9i vilimpa na-
Vol. xxxii.]
ma
nnam
devas tesam vo
357
Veda.
yami garma
Read: raksa
ye sthasyam pracyam digi hetayo nama detesam vo agnir isavah te no mrdata te no 'dhi vruta
tebhyo namas tebhyas svaha z 1 z raksa
ye sthasyam daksinayam di^y avisyavo nama devas tesam va apa isavah te
|
vas
no
z 2 z
raksa
|
kama
sthasyam udlcyam
te no
digi
&
vata isavah
digi
nama
vilimpa
ye
devas tesam vo
|
z 4 z raksa
ye sthasyam dhruvadevas tesam vo 'nnam isavah te no
|
z 5 z
raksa
nama
pravidhyanto nama
|
yam
nama
vruta tebhyo
Qarma
It seems clear to
hymn
no.
of
is
to be muttered.
12.
[f.
52
Q.
ntar
s
yo
vrttre
antar yas
a,
3.
1.
Of. Introduction.
10.]
21,
etat.
358
L. C. Barret,
a,
[1912.
read 'gmani in b; ya a-
aindrana saratham
johavimi prta-
nasu sasa-
hyam tebhyah
Read ya indrena
in
c,
in
vigvadavyah in b:
a,
tebhyo in d as above.
yo devo vigvad yam a kamam ahur yam datara pratigrhnantam ahuh yo dhlra caktus paribhur idabhyas tebhyah z
Read: yo devo vigvad yam u kamam ahur yam datarain
pratigrhnantam ahuh yo dhlrag gakras paribhur adabhyas
|
tebhyo
z 3 z
yam
tva
manavah
varco-
Read manavah
[f.
52
b.]
Read
in b, sunrtavate in
c,
and tebhyo
in d.
a uksannaya
in d.
vidyutam anusaficaranti
astv etat.
Insert anv after prthivim in
a,
b.
vrhaspatim varunarh mittra agnyam hiranyapanyam savitaram indram vigvan devan angirasam havamahe indram
in ab,
vadavyas tarn
kravyadyam asisamam z
2 z
Vol. xxxii.]
359
Veda.
52
[f.
Q.
b,
3.
1.
atho yo
6.]
5.
ball
me
in a.
dhmam
in
c,
and
a,
for
be considered.
yam
nididhi
ma
after sahayusa.
datto
varunena sakhyah
dirghayutvaya gatagaradaya
Read agann in a; perhaps sakhyah can stand but I rather
think it is only a corruption of gistah which Q. has.
|
25
360
L.
C.
Barret,
[1912.
stir
dhayopastim krnu
53
medinam
z 3 z
[f.
a]
Read: upastir astu vaigya uta cudra utaryah
parna randhayopastim krnu medinam z 8 z 3 z
sarvans tan
|
53
[f.
Q.
a,
3.
1.
1.]
23.
yena veha dadhmasi yat te garbho yonim etu pumahsarh putram janaya tvam puman anu jayatam bhavasi
putranam mata
bhadrani
ca
yani
bijany rsabha janajatanam janayasi
yati tais tvam putram vindasva sa prasur dhenuka bhava
krnomi te pra|
ma
babhuva
ta|
ud
ya vrsabho retasa saha
irhga-
radam. z 4 z
Read: yena vehad babhuvitha nagayamasi tat tvat idain
tad anyatra tvad apa dure ni dadhmasi z 1 z a te garbho
yonim etu puman bana ivesudhim a viro 'tra jayatam putras
te dagamasyah z 2 z pumansam putram janaya tam puman
anu jayatam bhavasi putranam mata jatanam janayag ca yan
z 3 yani bhadrani
bijany rsabha janayanti ca tais tvam putram vindasva sa prasur dhenuka bhava z 4 z krnomi te pra|
Vol. xxxii.]
pita'
tas
tva
361
putravidyaya
z 7 z
in 3d.
and
2,
bhah
[f.
53
a,
1.
9.]
yam tva vato varaya raridra nabha maharsatasyas te vi9vadhayaso visadusanam ud bhare
a 'varayad is possible; for the first half of pada b noplausible suggests itself, although I have thought of some
of rudra or of ardra.
Padas cd can stand.
i
In
thing
form
cf. Q. 4. 4. 1.
It seems
clear that for padas cd the second hemistich of st. 1 is meant
to stand here too, for the ms. sometimes fails to indicate a
when
refrain
it
should;
cf.
Paipp.
2.
19; 29;
yam
vapam adhi puskare
Though not good
to be supplied
rnave
|
from
tasyas te
and
tvaditir
49.
avapad
bija
metrically this
st.
may
1.
dusanam agrabham
In a bharam would seem
a,
but
madhyam
corrects to prthi(vi)g.
25*
362
L. C. Barret,
16.
[f.
53
a,
1.
[1912.
17.]
paidvo
prtanayu svaha soma hihsis soma hihsito si svaha
The first of these two formulae we might read paidvo 'si
prtanayus svaha: soma hinsis may stand (cf. RV. 9. 88. 4),
and at a venture I would conjecture somahinsito 'si svaha for
si
the
rest.
vrahmanama
hinsir
vrahma
hihsito
svaha
One would expect here a parallelism to the preceding but
I am unable to work it out satisfactorily; what is given does
[f.
53
b.]
si
nabhud
vrahmanam
In the
visasya
na moksase
|
first
division of
reading.
'hir
samusto
jivan na moksase
'hir
nirvlto
'rasas
me
[f.
53
b,
1.
5.]
ekaatam
tesam matasy osadhe
samudram
bhesajani
sthitah
At
tasy.
If
cine"
sibly
in
we may take adibhesajam to mean "the original mediwe have at the beginning two padas which might posstand: Q. 4. 6. Ib is dagaclrso dagasyah. For the rest,
addition
to the division of
for
Vol. xxxii.]
consideration samsravany
on what
is
to
me
363
Veda.
light
wholly obscure.
muncami tva gapathyad atho varunad uta ayamasya padbhi9advi9ad vi9vasmad deva duskrtat.
The ms. seems to correct dvi to dbhi.
Read uta in b: and padbic,ad in c. This stanza appears
|
tho
6.
Q.
96. 2
with muiicantu
ma
in a,
varunyad in
b,
and
kil-
bisat in d.
ngadyo tam
ani9at.
z 2 z
The
first
d may be compared Q.
18.
[f.
53
3.
Q.
b,
1.
15.]
22.
babhuva
t
sarve savitur
mahyas
Read prathatam
in
a,
ta-
In
we
will
have to read as
mittra-
The
In a read
mitrac,, in
d manjantu.
364
L.
C.
Barret,
[1912.
yat te varco jatavedo vrhad bhavaty ahutarh tena mam abhya varcasagre varcasvinarh krdhi
Read adya varcasagne in cd. In Q. these padas are 4 ab
and 3 de; Q. has ahuteh and krnu.
yena haste varcasa sambabhuva ye|
Read
is
in Q.
st.
dyam udayan in c.
abc with a new pada d.
hasti in
a,
What we have
here
stivarcasam. z 3 z
This is the sixth stanza of the third
hymn
of the fourth
anuvaka.
19.
[f.
54
3.
Q.
mama
a,
1.
7.]
19.
sam aham
e-
viryam balam
tfnarh bahu
ojo
tiksamyahsas
a-
vrgcasi
pharsor
agnes
tlksnatarad u-
ta
am
a-
yudha sam 9yasy esam rastram suvirarh vardhayasva yesam ksattram ajaram astu jisnu ugram esam rastram suvirarh vardhayasva
yesam ksam ajaram astu jisnu ugram esam cittam bahudha vi9varupa abhi prayata jayata prasuta sam 9yami nir ayudhani
Vol. xxxii].
[f.
54
tiksna
b.]
365
ugrahaba-
vah z 4 z
Read: saihgitam ma idam
samgitam ksatram me jisnu
aham esam r as tram gyami
gatrunam bahun sam esam
vrahma
mama
samgitaiii vlryarii
1 z
sam
vrgcami
2 z
tlksmyansas
agnes tiksnatara uta
indrasya vajrat tiksnlyanso
yesam asmi purohitah z 3 z adhas padyantam adhare bhavantu ye na in dram maghavanam prtanyan ksinami vrahparagor
savo
z
4 z
In
'baladhanvano
so
ugrabahavah
st.
correction
yama
abalan
liatograyudna
Ixxxi
(cf.
Whitney's Translation
ff.).
20.
54
[f.
Q.
3.
b,
1.
2.]
12.
ihaiva dhruvamya minomi galam kseme tisthami ghrtam uksamana tarn tva fale sarvavlras suvira abhi san carema
Eead dhruvam ni in a, tisthasi in b; tarn in c, and supply
j
sunrtavati
|
Head
prati in
a,
uc chrayasva in
d.
dharuny
sutadhanya a tva vatso mayi
asyandhamana
goma-
chraya-
med
asi gale
grhag chanda
a kumara dhenavasyaya
366
L. C. Barret,
[1912.
chandas
latter's
mean
d; colon after
pada
b.
saha
anu 4
z.
21.
[f.
54
b,
1.
14.]
Q. 4. 22.
imam
tvam
ekavisa krnu
radhaya-
smahamuttaresu
ayam
dhanapatir dhananam
astu
ayam
vigam
vigkrpatistu raja asminn indu mayi varcahsi dhehy a[f. 55 a] varcasam krnuhi
9atrum asya idam bhaja grame
svesu gosva nis tarn bhaja yo mittro
varsmat ksattranam ayam astu rajendra 9atru rahsya
dhaya sarvam asmai asmai
sam duhitam gharmaduheva dhebhurvasu
dyavaprthivi
|
num
vayarh raja priye indrasya bhuyah priyo gavam osadhmam utapam yunajmi tarn uttaravahtam indra yena jayante yas tva karad ekavrsam ja
nanam uta raj an u|
Vol. xxxii.]
ttamam manavanam
uttaras
367
Veda.
ke ca
sthe
|
hahsi
ma-
6 z 1 z
This
hymn
2. 4. 7.
8,
and our
text
is
in
22.
[f.
55
a,
1.
8.]
is
supported by
c.
ye haranty
amuteyam
praticaksini
L.
368
meaning
tion"; in
C. Barret,
[1912.
as asuti, which seems to mean "brew" or "concocb write causadhe, in c sadanvaghnl. The hemistichs
apakritasy osadhi
9vavasyavasya gaksusa
prati
pagya
kimidinah z
z 2 z
sam gudadhvarh
samanam
sarh
[f.
55
a,
1.
Qyavagvasya
16.]
[f.
55
b.]
ceto stu
aditir
prthivl kalpa-
srjami sarh
uta
putranam
ya duhitaro vah sam vo jayanarh manasa
manahsi
sarh
patmamm
Vol. xxxii.]
369
Read: sam gundhadhvam sam pibadhvam annam vo madhumat sahah vratam vas sarvam sadhryak samanam ceto
stu vah z 1 z sam janidhvam indrag citta vo 'stv ayam vo
yad vairahatyam u bhimam asld
'gnir ni harah gamayati
z
ut
deva
2 z gam vagy astu vrhaspatig gam.
vigve
prSvayantu
ubhe
antariksam
uta vo marutvan gam
gam
dyavaprthiv!
|
vaginy astv aditir devaputra z 3 z kalpetam dyavaprthivl kalpantam apa osadhlh kalpantam agnayas sarve asmai gres|
sam
tliaya sarvada z
astu vah
z 5 z
and
74.
24.
55
[f.
Q.
3.
b,
1.
8.]
27.
om
atha raksamantram.
praci dig agnir adhipatir asito raksataditya isavah tebhyo na-
mo
dhipatibhyo
rsibhyo
dvesti
dadhmas
tarn
namo vo
yam
u prano
ja-
hatu z daksi-
dig vavaruno dhipatis prajaku raksata mittra isavah udici dik somo dhipatis svajo raksata vata isavah z dhruva
ci
dig vi-
namo
dhipatibhyo
nama
raksitubhyo
stu
yo
patir
asito
raksitaditya
isavah
|
tebhyo namo
'dhipatibhyo
370
L.
C. Barret,
[1912.
namo
dvesti
z 3 z
prdaku raksita mitra isavah
tebhyo
somo 'dhipatis svajo raksita vata isavah tebhyo
z 4 z dhruva dig visnur adhipatis kalmasagrlvo raksita virudha
isavah
z 5 z urdhva dig vrhaspatir adhipatig
tebhyo
'dhipatis
udlcl dik
isavah
tebhyo namo 'dhipatibhyo namo
namo
vo 'stu yo 'sman dvesti yam
namo
raksitrbhyo
isubhyo
ca vayam dvismas tarn vo jambhe dadhmas tarn u prano ja(}vitro
raksitaganir
hatu
z 6 z
25.
55
[f.
Q.
4.
b,
1.
18.]
11.
[f.
a.]
9a
in a,
dadharorv in b:
pa9ubhyo
vi
a, perhaps pyayet in b as
'sya in c, doho 'sya in d.
loka in
caste tvayarh
anadvan indrasya
adhvanah
sam bhutam bhavisyad bhu-
ya 9akro a mimite
indras
sa
Whit-
in a, trayan
carati vratani
and a mimite
in b: bibhrac
in d.
tin
ni yajno
in b:
Vol. xxxii.]
indra esa
s tapata
371
na sarisad
suprajas
in
dva-
rhythm (and
balam.
viduh
Read
for
madhyam
yavS,n.
padbhis sedhim
r
ahitah: in c praclnam, in
dan
|
z 11 z
372
L.
C. Barret,
[1912.
ucyate
gaphas somyah pargvam sarva yac, casya kusthikah.
This might have been a scholium standing once in the bottom
margin; the letter i standing at the end of the next to the
|
last line of
f.
initial of
indro
balenasya.
indro balenasya paramesthi vratenaina gaus tena vaigvadevah
yo sman dvesti yam ca vaya dvissas tasya pranan asa
vi
26.
[f.
Q.
56
b,
7.
60.
1.
3.]
grhan esi manasa modamanojam bibhrad vasumatis sumetaghorena caksusa mittriyena grhanam pagyah paya ut tarami
ime grha mayobhuva u|
vamasya
tisthantas te no ja-
nantu janatah
sunrtavantas
hasamuda
iravanto
subhaga
aksudhyastr-
dhyastr-
esam adhy
etu pravan
esa so-
manasso bahuh
Vol. xxxii.]
373
Veda.
payasvantah purna vamasya tisthantas te no janantu janatah z 2 z sunrtavantas subhaga iravanto hasamudah aksuI
The
z 6 z 1 z
variations
generally
cordance.
in
svadusammudah.
27.
[f.
56
b,
1.
13.]
sam vam
yam indram
krnor
a-
[f.
57
a.]
havyo babhuva
samjaya yatha
mrad devatte
ayam
viro prati
imam
hi gatrun prati
indra
|
te
randhayasvagnis
ja-
gar ma te raja
374
L.
C.
Barret,
[1912.
z 6 z 2 z
cannot be mistaken.
brings
difficulties
In
with
is
it;
in Ic
About st. 5b I
is pure conjecture.
but the reading given seems possible.
pada d
of
ful,
28.
57
[f.
a,
1.
am
very doubt-
7.]
sam spretham
atmana
sam
sam
sam vam vrahmukhabhyam
tanubhyam
somas
sam spar9amanaspatis
yabhu vam
In d read spargayatu,
or
possibly
spargayatu.
Cf. C. 6.
74. 1.
me
For the
cline
to
first hemistich I can get nothing satisfactory; I inthink that some accusative should stand in place of
me dahinam kame,
yah premas prenyam asld dattah somena babhruadhi 9rutam mano mayy asya manahitam
nam tasmad
|
nu
in
1
b babhruna: in
ab and 1. 1. 2d.
In
c read
Vol. xxxii.J
375
Veda.
and therefore cannot feel sure that they belong with this
For the rest I think we may read: caksur akac.am
bhimam mampacjam abhirorudam priyamkaranam uttamam
madughena tad abhrtam. Of. Q. 7. 38. Ib and our next
verse.
hymn
st.
2.
tvam hasi
dham
nkaranam ucyase
priya-
Read: tvam hasi varcasyo atho hasi sumangalah atho sarvasam vlrudham priyankaranam ucyase z 6 z 3 z
The ms. gives no indication of the end of this hymn and
I have made this arrangement principally because the norm
of this book is six stanzas: it seems not impossible that the
last two stanzas should go with the next hymn, but the
connection does not seem close enough to force us to such an
|
arrangement.
29.
Q.
pratici
somam
[f.
7.
57
a,
1.
16.]
38 (in part).
imam khanasy
dhim vitantrim
osa-
a-
parayato nivartanam
amusyaham parayata ayato mano agrabham agrabham hastim mano atho
hrdayarh manah mayi te
57
cittam
mayi vratam mamed apa
[f.
b.] manahitam mayi
kratav aso mamasa9 ced asT
nutahtunarh
dapi
ayatah
patirahdhani
nabhyasam kirtay9
cina
nadyas tirah
mahrm
yam
tva
26
pra-
376
L.
C. Barret,
[1912.
tlci
yato nivartanam
yat z 6 z 4
Pada b
Paipp.
5 with
2. 79.
ankena me nyanayat
30.
[f.
57
b,
1.
for
pada
d.
4.]
Q. 19. 57.
yatha kalam
teka
mam
rajano
i-
ka-
niska-
tan-
vas pari
dvisater
nir
samasi z 5 z anu 6 z
dvisamasi z
Vol. xxxii.]
377
kalam.
ity
first
eka
part of this
1 z
preceding line
this
latter
name
is
is
31.
Of.
57 b,
[f.
MS.
is
14]
1.
2. 4. 7.
apo
dattoditirh
bhihta
divas
[
prthivya
uror
antari-
ksat ta-
smai
ksattraya
deva
agni
indra
neta
vrahmanabhyah
surya
prajabhya abhya
osadhibhyas svaha
apah devag cojo mittravaruna
yamarh
tapah devas pitaro mavyas kravyapah devapsusado path
napat tannu26*
378
L.
58
[f.
a/]
C. Barret,
[1912.
napam naragansapo
pate apo dehy aditim bhihdeva prajapate apah deva paramesthin apo dehy aditim
bhihti devas pruror
antariksat
tammai
ksattraya nena prahmanathivya
ti
divas
suryapo
&
varunaryamann apo
I z
deva
divas
2 z
divas
traya na ihi
svaha z 8 z
is
also
[f.
58
a,
2.
34.
Q.
patih
ta
compelling.
32.
mah
devac,
devSc,
1.
4.]
prajapater jayamanas praja jatag ca ya iasmai prativedaya cikitvan anu manyataih esam
niskritas
te yajfii-
sthar priyam
devanam apy
mumukta
Vol. xxxii.]
379
Veda.
jabhis
prajabhis sarh-
vidanam prajanantah
rantabhyarh
gaccha
grhnantu devas pranam angebhyas pary a caprati tistha garlrais svargarh yahi
prati
pathibhi
civebhih
z 2 2
apy etu pathah z 3 z ye badhyamanam anu didhyana anvaiksanta manasa caksusa ca agnis tan agre pra mumoktu devah
prajapatis prajabhis samvidanah z 4 z yesam tprano na badh|
nanti
samvidanah
eka-
mumoktu
rupah
bhis
indras tan
|
prati tistha
2 z
dyam gaccha
garirais
and KS.
30. 8
our
stanza
first
is
[f.
58
Q.
a,
2.
1.
16.]
6.
mamas
tasrah
|
mahate saubhaga-
115
ca tistha
380
ma
ya
[f.
L. C. Barret,
te
58
[1912.
b.]
risamn upasatta
ma
ihaivagne
tva dabhah purvacitta nikarinah
ksattra-
agne suyamam
astu
tubhyam uta
sattra
vardhatam
te
niskrtah ksettrana-
sajatanarh
ma
mestheha
ti
atatlr ati
any
tir
madhya-
ati
|
nuho
nirr-
nikarinah
hatam
te
ksatram suyamam astu tubhyam uta satta vardz 4 z ksatrenagne svena sam rabhasva
'niskrtah
ati dvisah
vi^va hy agne durita cara tvam
sahaviram
athasmabhyam
rayim dah z 6 z anadhrsyo jataveda
anistrto virad agne ksatrabhrd didihiha vigva amivah pramuncan manusyebhya^ givebhir adya pari pahi no gayaih
tir
aratir
aty
z 7 z 3 z
In
Ib
is
it
Vol. xxxii.]
381
Veda.
texts.
In
is
st.
Q.
7.
34.
Read rohatha
in
Q.
58
[f.
g.
to jato arocathah tarn
correction to adya.
3.
b,
84.
7.
1.
Our
st.
1.
10.]
20.
rayim
and rayim before the period and
cd,
numeral.
datararh
The
pra
uciryo vrttra-
to Indra.
ing:
It seems then that there
is
is
no.
5.
suhaveha havamahe
tha nas sarvam
ij
janas sangasatyam
sumana
hasat.
ya-
382
The
L.
C.
Barret,
omission of pada a
is
probably accidental; in Q.
[1912.
it
is
ya codaya
In pada a read agne; it seems very probable that vrahmanam in b is only a corruption of vrahma yajnam as in Q.
vajasyedam prasave sambabhuva ya ima ca vigva bhuvanany antah utatichantam damayatu prajanam rayim dhehi
sarvaviram
ni
yacchatam.
While it seems
in Q. too I think we
is sam babhuvema ca
emend
to
on
the
basis of dittography.
sam
babhuvema
might
For our pada c read utaditsantam dapayatu prajanan; yacchatam in d.
duran me pafica pradigo duram urvi yathabalam.
prapeyam sarva makutlr manasa hrdayena ca
In a read duhram, in b duhram urvlr: in c ma akutlr.
rect
reading
saya riyatam z 4 z
Head: gosanim vacam udeyam varcasa mabhy tarunyamhi
a rundham sarvato vayus tvasta posaya dhriyatam z 10 z 4 z
It is possible that the end of pada b has gotten confused
with the beginning of pada c, and that we ought to read as
in Q. mabhyudihi.
The form suggested for d appears Q. 6.
|
141. Ib.
35.
[f.
59
a,
1.
7.]
Q. 19. 15.
yata indra
sakti tava
pad9
catuspada
Vol. xxxii.]
383
Veda.
ma
na sonararusir usa gur visucir indra druho vi na9aya indras tratotu vrttraha parampa no varenyah ca raksata
caramatas sva
sva
sva
madhyatas
pa9cat
purasthan no stu z rurum no
lokam anu nesi vidvan svarva jyotir abhayam svasti
ugra ta i sthavirasya
|
ma
vrhanta
9arana
a-
bhayarh dyavaprthivi
stu
ubhe
anu z 7 z
In 1. 10 the ms.
yaih mitrad
yah
bhavantu
6 z 5 z
anu
36.
Contains
me
7 z.
[f.
RV.
prehi
59
a,
1.
102. 4,
1.
18.]
6,
9,
10.
hatsu ca ugram
avase sarh si9imahe sa tvam na indra havanesu
|
cit
tarn
mrda
goji-
384
L.
C. Barret,
[1912.
ta
vedaham indra priyam asya 9evadhirh yad asya nama guhyam samike
sarhyaj jayapi maghava mamam praty admakam vidhmo vihace havam gamat.
z tva jayema tvaya
yuja vrta vrdho asmakam ahgum uta va bhare-bhare as|
mabhyam
sugam krdhi pra
rivas
gattrunarh
indra va-
maghavan
vrja
tvam
de-
a-
dam
ma
Eead:
Qatamutis khajamkarah
akalpa indras pratimanam ojasa sa
tvarn na indra havanesu mrda z 3 z vedaham indra priyam
|
purah
z 6 z
for
st.
RV.
st.
In
RV.
The ms.
corrects to jayami in
st.
and asmakam
in
st.
5.
Vol. xxxii.]
37.
devair datto
[f.
smara
si
59
b,
1.
Veda.
385
10.]
smara smaro si
manassara
amusya
yathaham ka-
sanka|
hanam anya-
naranandah
pramuthyato manumaho naivo nastakarta arnavah ave9inls
pradrupo ropayisnur etas tvabhya prahino vrahmana rtukantuni rtvida
gramabhyasini svapna yacchatu dudhna manomuha
ave9inis
pradrupo ropo ropayisnur eras tvadya prahinomi vrahmana indragnl
mittravaruna cebhyotayata dyavaprthivi ma[f. 60 a.]
a9vina devas savita bhaga9 ca manatari9va
studhnayantu naram asa trtrayas trihtva
bhudhnahtu
devagni9 cid yam upa te bharadvaja9
9as
cam uta yas trin9atah9 chinne
vanordhvarh dhana pra plavasva z etas patyanty abhyo
|
tigraho
ni9irso
nipati-
yam
daya bahuh z
In
f.
59 b
60 a
dhyo
Out of
f.
1.
1.
2 z
3.
cular intent
For the
is
not.
first
stanza
we might read
the
following:
smara
smaro 'si devair datto 'si smara amusya manas smara yathaham kamaye tatha gocayasya hrdayam. Next we seem to
|
386
L.
(7.
Barret,
[1912.
The next pada would seem to be hanam anyanaranandah meaning perhaps "may I smite those women who take
pleasure with other women's husbands"; and next we seem to
have pramuhyato manomuho. After this I can get nothing
helpful until the sixth line below where the reading might be
chinne vana urdhvam dhana pra plavasva.
evasya.
We
A bold rewriting
girsato ni pattata adhyo vegayami te.
would give a second hemistich for this stanza thus: tas tvaIt looks however
san uttaravatir bodhayantir upa sabham.
as if the stanza ends at the colon after vrahmana: perhaps
this last clause which appears three times in the hymn might
be read etas tvad adhyah prahinomi vrahmana. Out of stris
pra purogavam I get nothing; but for the rest it seems fairly
safe to read tas tva trnam iva c,ocayan atho tva rodayan
bahu.
of course
will
with
offered
anuvaka.
38.
Verses found in Q.
taram agre
[f.
4.
60
14;
a,
9.
1.
5;
7.]
and Kaug.
68. 26.
ajo hy agner ajanista 9okat so pa9yej janitena deva devatam agrayan tena rohan aro-
bibhrata
adhvam
rtyanam.
s svasti
vidvahso vitenire
|
dyam rohantu
ra-
samudram payasam
Vol. xxxii.]
ruhantam
tena
|
387
Veda.
te
sukrtasya
arham
ham
t
svar jyotir
61
[f.
a.]
agam aham.
janan.
lokam
angirasas pratarn lokam anu pra jnesma yena va sahasyarh vahasi yena ya sarvave-
dasam.
agam aham
svar jyotir
kam
8 z ajo
tarn
'sy
aja svargo
'si
tvaya
lo-
9 z yena
angirasas prajanan
va sahasram vahasi yena va sarvavedasam tenemain yajnam
no vaha svar devesu gantave z 10 z ajam ca pacata panca
caudanan
ajam pancaudanan paktva devalokan samanaguh
|
z 11 z 3 z.
In
388
jr.
Barret,
[1912.
reason to
is
39.
[f.
60
b,
1.
st.
11
is
really
3.]
ya te praja
agnis te tarn
adyamah
punar dad vaigvanarah
Read parabhud in pada a; in b dhruvena is pretty clearly
the first word, and sam bharami may be the verb, but I can
For padas cd we might
get nothing more out of the pada.
read agnis te tarn t*adyamah punar dadad vaigvanarah: pada
c lacks
one
syllable.
kamaya dhehi
a,
grahya
nirrtir
it
of the pada.
sam srjmam
In a we may read yad agne: in b I would read
skanda, for d retodha ugrah prajaya sam srjainam.
tarn adhi
Of. Q. 5.
25. 8.
neto devas-
Vol.xxxii.]
389
Veda.
This appears in Q. 5. 25. 1. In a read yoner, in b samasrtam seems possible; Q. has samabhrtam. For c read reto devasya devas, and for d sarau parnam iva dhan seenis possible;
Q. has gepo garbhasya retodhah sarau parnam iva dadhat.
indrasya jatasya prapapata nabhis tarn ekodenas prajagrahas kamT tvaya vayam vrahmanas somapas supaya
s sutayana suyate z 4 z
ti
The
first letter
one
is
to
division of
is
not certain.
words
indicates.
I can do no
The stanza
no. 4.
lost.
40.
[f.
60
b,
1.
14.]
sa
dadham.
ro
tenaham anyesam
striyo
dhyadinad uta
[f.
61
dam
a.]
pura sa-
yityadi
jagat.
z 5 z a 8
zz
s
samaptah zz
Read: tyajanat tyajanam jatam tyajanam jayate c,ara naina gocati yas tva bibharti tejana] z 1 z pavitram asi
|
sati
murcham ayamahe
|
dadhan z 3 z tyajanam me vigve dev&s tyajanam pitaro dadhan tenaham anyesam striyo^* *** z4z * * * tyaksaiii
|
390
L.
vam idam
tava
C.
Barret,
jagat
6 z 5 z
Veda.
anu 8
[1912.
kamo ayam
ity
tah zz
In
sary.
Ib garah seems entirely possible though not necesThe reading given for Sab seems possible, but the
st.
word odanebhyas creates doubts; I should think that something like dhanubhyas karnavadbhyah would fit the context better.
said this
hymn
is left
in
an uncertain
state.
POSTSCRIPT.
In each of the following stanzas the first line of transliteration does
not correspond exactly with the ms. in spacing: in hymns 8. 5; 12. 8;
In each case the line of transliteration
16. 3; 18. 3; 22. 4; 25. 12; 34. 8.
should be indented a
little
way
word of the
line is
which
will
1.
which
65,
is
By EDWIN W.
addressed to Agni,
we
FAY,
ing pddas:
like
the
result
played a
for
of
role,
which
'cavus', (2)
spirant
for
susi-
a frequent variant
is
'reed,
shifting,
susi-svis.
(cf.
also
susi-ra-s
(1)
es.
With
'in
tation
gains
'waters'
point for
with the
'dry'.
1.
65. 2 c
The production
selves
is
not rather to be
27
392
[1912.
wherein
For the
posterius,
-&vi-,
it
is
Apella.
'cutter'
But
(of
am
if
right in deriving materia from *(t)materis possible that *mdter- 'mother' also
it
timber),
Testimony to the
'cutter'.
activity
of
woman
as a 'cutter'
there his
share
we may
think,
and
consumption or to be dried.
better displayed,
is
in the following:
In these
(sic)
(sic)
she
her shambles.
is
a butcher,
In the
vation goes for anything, woman is still the carver.
fusion
the
inevitable
therewith
of
of
shaping
*(t)mater-
final
mamma
is
Postcript.
cf.
In
sus'i-s'vis
with reduplication,
cf.
sam-sUvarl
(in
K. Z.
1. s.
c.).
-sisvis,
Sanskrit dhena
By
Avestan daena
= Lithuanian daind.
GEANT OLIPHANT,
Dr. SAMUEL
Professor in Grove
The two
meaning
its title.
found;
c
ghantuka I, 11, in the Unadic/anasutra (268 j of Hemachandra 4
and in Sayana.
The PWB. defines dhena in the sg. as "milchende Kuh" and
for I, 2, 3,
Thus RV.
d
11, 3 ;
b
101, 10
I,
8., 33.
Vdj.
a
Tdit
KS., 40, 7
;
QB.,
7,
5,
TB.,
2, 8,
AV.,
XX,
3, 9,
3
2,
6,
6C
Q.,
6a
17, 18, l
RV. VII,
Ndigh.
RV. IV,
S., 4, 2, 9,
11; Ap.
b
17, 6
Dhena
26 d
94,
MS.,
a
4C
C
127., X, 104, 3
brhaspateh in MS., 1, 9,
;
6,
58,
17;
6a
2,
7,
17,
94 a
10,
40 a
2C
13,
38 a
MS., 4, 14, 10
b
C
8V., 2, 150
RV., X, 43, 6
C
C
2
2
33,
AV., XX, 25,
2; KS., 9, 10; GB., 2,2, 9; Tdit. Ar.,
;
RV*
=
=
V,
62,
3, 6, 5,
XX,
Vdj. &,
17 a
= AV.
d
Ill, 34, 3
RV.
16, 21;
1.
(2.
(2.
271) of this
267) defines
27*
394
8.
G. Oliphant,
[1912.
six
definition
in
all
siders
instances by "Stimme", "Lieder" or "Schall", but conthis difficult in Y. 62, 2 and desiderates "Strome".
Zunge,
1),
strome", either literally or figuratively, and in those two instances it still refers to potable fluids.
The table opposite shows at a glance the various renderings proposed in each instance.
In view of this diversity of interpretation which attaches
several incongruous meanings to what would seem a single word,
it
its
opment.
Among
these
we
X,
104, 10
utdpi dhend
puruhutam
strength and goodly praise
lite
\
Indra.
Yea, also
dhena praises him, invoked of many).
It seems clear as Ludwig observes "dafi es nicht Kuh oder
Milch bedeuten kann". So Grassmann's sober second thought leads
him here to substitute "Lippen" in his RV. for the ''Milch(Heroic
is
Vol.
Sanskrit dhend
395
396
S.
kuh" of
his
n. 1) says:
O. Oliphant,
[1912.
"La vache
la priere"*
passages in the
RV.
that
contain
this verb.
thesis.
So let us examine only the
in
exclusive of our passage
thirty-one instances
which there is an absolutely clear expression. In seven passages the subjects are decisive; viz., I, 142, 4, matir\ VII,
bias
24, 5,
arM;
45, 4,
girah; 91,
2,
sustutir;
93, 4.
girbhir vi-
prah; 94,
5,
verb.
In three passages, VIII, 43, 22, 24; 44, 6 - - the
immediate juxtaposition of the verb $ru shows that song or
prayer is meant and in X, 66, 14, the same is clearly shown
by vdcam. In thirteen passages the expressed instruments of
VIII.
gird (II,
6, 6;
III,
namasd (V,
namasd girbhir
12, 6;
1, 7;
60,
1),
X,
If then
Sanskrit dhena
Vol. xxxii.]
lation, the
397
five to
one in
favor of song.
this
mightily in
Hymned
our thoughts).
all
We
to
uplifted
and the
d
stotdra 5 d brdhmdni 6 a suvrktim 7 b
grndnah
grndntah 4
c
a
c
There are references,
grnvantam 11
giro 7 , Imvema 11
or
of
to
the
oblation
soma in 1 ad 2 bc 3 b
expressed
implied,
b
b
6
and 7
but more than half of these are in the first two
stanzas and they do not dominate the entire hymn as do the
former.
As Oldenberg
idea of "drink",
(p.
98
f.)
mad
feels
this
verb
is
supports the
predicated of
in
Y,
his worshippers
I, 5, 7,
10;
it
and we have
his
is
shown
9, 3, 9; 10, 3,
In
fact,
every
own word
it
(Maghavan came
And
and
in
VIII,
of the songs of
32,
22
men
for
and
398
8.
G. Oliphant,
[1912.
tisrdh pardvdta
ihi
five,
statement that
his
reference
fsmdm
is
to
Dhenah
of b
fsmdm
(Having heard,
Agvins, look upon the many prayers of the Rsis).
stomdn
upa
turdsya dargathah griye
(For his glory, look ye on your zealous worshipper's lauds).
yuvabhydm vdjinivasu prdti stomd adrksata
(By you, lords of the swift steeds, our lauds were beheld).
The very name Veda shows that the fundamental idea is that the
songs have been "seen" by their composers.
Sanskrit dhena
Vol. xxxii.]
399
1 ab ,
Even Oldenberg
plied
libation
98)
(p.
is
in
is
im-
it
represents the
it
would seem a
But
libation.
is
In
1-
141,
I,
ydd Im
matir
The songs
Oldenberg
of
as they flow).
(p. 97)
In
2
I, 67, 7
b
;
63,
14
12, 2
y,
b
,
21
b
,
b
;
VII, 43, 4
we have mention
in I, 79, 3
The dhend
samydk sravanti
sarito
puydmdndh
mrgd
1
nd dhend
400
G. Oliphant,
8.
(Our songs,
[1912.
on together,
Oldenberg
(p.
may
"flow".
In VIII, 1
deerns
this passage
They
49, 6
They
gushing spring.
copious
gir
97)
described as "flowing" in
is
a stoma
may be "pressed"
the
one previously
and "poured out". These passages, with
cited, amply demonstrate the fluidity of songs in the RV. and
IX, 4
reading in
108, 7
is
correct,
and 10
in the third
It
fourth
or
is
in 5
pada.
c
,
In
in
always
exact formal correspondence with these, we find urmayo ghrThe streams of ghrta are mentioned in every re. of
tasya.
,
point,
is
is
hymn
(Your strong
pour forth
ing the
We
as a steed, the
air).
may add
also that in
VIII,
13, 8,
Sanskrit dhena
Vol. xxxii.]
401
We
noted.
(Let us
let
This
is
Ghrtd
is
dominant.
reference to the
Stanza
is
ndma guhyam
of ghrtd.
forth in song. In 2 d
it
on Vdj.
it
among
manasd ca puyamdndfi
gab-
402
8. O.
Oliphant,
[1912.
But
Oldenberg's theory.
we have
sdm it sravanti sarito nd dhendh
antdr hrdd mdnasd puydmdndh
in Tdit. 8. IV,
9,
2,
6,
This
natio
is
17; QB.,
on
is
2,
11 and Ap.
Tdit. 8. glosses
.,
13, 38;
17, 18,
KS., 40,
1.
7;
MS.,
2,
7,
The commentator
Vid. n.
1,
on
first
page.
Sanskrit dhend
Vol. xxxii.]
"the
food
is
Avestan daena,
403
<&c.
said,
on each of the
later occa-
If
is
it
once
We
the
verbs as mad, srj, pinv, aviskr. etc. and the fact that songs
as well as food and drink actually "strengthen" Indra and
the devds.
In
I,
55,
is
called
by worshippers;
When his fair Indrahood he shows *mong men,
The Bull is lovely; one to be desired is he, the Bull,
Whene'er with peace the Maghavan promotes our song).
st
Sayana glosses dhendm invati, 1 by ^stutilaksandm vdcam
d
prerayate, and 2
by zyajamdndih krtdm stutim
Either of these makes excellent sense. The former
vydpnoti.
is
suppor-
abhi
grmhy a ruva
(Come
praise
also,
VIII,
13,
acclaim
it).
27-
sadhamddyd
yujdndh somapltaye
ilid tyCi
his
404
8. G.
Oliphant,
[1912.
dun steeds,
soma come hither
wealth-increasing,
for drinking the
The second
singing).
C
supported by such parallels as VIII, 13, 32
vfsd yajno yam invasi vfsd hdvah
(Strong the worship that thou dost promote, strong the invo-
is
cation),
and X,
C
188, 3
tdbhir no
may he promote
7sd dhmdm yogam invati
(With
and
I,
18,
yajndm invatu
these
The
latter
have found,
our worship),
of our psalms).
either.
The passages
I, 10, 4;
VIII,
above and
many
others give us the friendly, peaceful songs of Indra. The warsongs of his pealing thunder as it reverberates among the
Thy war
And
all
abhistane te adrivo
manydva
Sanskrit dhend
Vol. xxxii.]
405
V, 61,
if
on chariots borne),
(To
thee,
One
on chariots borne,
Arise, as if
I,
101, 10
syasva gipre
srjasva dhene
d tvd suQipra hdrayo vahantu
ugdn havydni prdti no jusasva
(Rejoice in these
dun
steeds of thine,
Indra;
thou thy jaws; let loose thy voices twain.
fair-cheeked god,
thy dun steeds thee bring,
Ope
Let
And
Sayana interprets the dual dhene as pdnasddhanabhute jihvopajihvike (tongue and epiglottis becoming effective for drinkHe would have been more consistent had he said
ing).
speech". Oldenberg (p. 94) ridicules Geldner's
"Zunge" as not accounting for the dual, but when he comes
to the interpretation of the passage (p. 99) he finds the dual
"effective
difficult
for
and
dismisses
also vielleicht
We
Thus
we
dhiyo
dsrhsy
have
(I,
it
dsrgram
151,
6),
(Till, 27,
girah
(I,
9,
4),
etc.
dvasrjatam
dsarjl
11),
asrksata
(VIII, 52,
9);
glided
406
8. G.
Oliphant,
[1912.
87, 3, 5;
supported by 11
in
camp that
is
We
Mm
Oldenberg thinks
no
army
of
demon
warriors.
This
fits
our
general
inter-
women.
Sanskrit dhend
Vol. xxxii.]
the
for
Avestan daena,
407
<&c.
We
his
women.
I,
2,
dhena
jigdti
da fuse
uruci somapltaye
In
Yayu
summoned
is
to
rsi's
invo-
approving voice
is
will drink
tial
characteristic
god.
him
here.
In III,
1,
9,
the reference
is
IV.
28
408
8. O.
Oliphant,
[1912.
in which mati, dhiyd and dhdrayd are associated; IX, 63, 21,
Such
in which dhtbhir and dharayd are associated; etc.
of
as
connection
dhend
the
show
how
natural
"songs"
passages
may
quote Y,
13-
VII, 101,
1;
IX,
107, 5;
is
X,
Cf.
e.
g.
III, 34, 3
\\
And made
is
proved by
\\
2,
1-
By
became sweet-voiced
for Indra).
Sanskrit dhend
Vol. xxxii.]
409
who worship
superstructure.
This
is
V,
62, 2
tat
is
your greatness;
(Each day they have milked the kine that stand here.
You have caused to swell all songs of the svasara;
Your
At first
single tire
hither).
pinv
is
used also with dhiyah, the synonym of dhendh accordwe have given throughout. Thus
I,
151, 6
and VII,
82, 3
as in our pass-
fails,
as
it
will
support
may be
and "songs".
It
is
still
consistently rendering
dhend by "Stimmen" thinks the association with svdsara difficult and desiderates "Strome".
Only in this passage does
G-eldner render dhend by "Kiihe" and that because of svdsara.
These have taken the word in the sense of "cow-pen, stall", etc.
But Geldner (op. cit. Ill, 113 ff.) has more recently argued
that this word signifies a time of day, identical with the
28*
410
8. O.
Oliphant,
[1912.
to Tdit. Br.
We
In three
of these five
and
in
references to songs,
etc.,
2,
1,
Night
Indra
is
We
cows swell with milk in the next stanza. The same idea is
not needed here. Whether, however, dhend in this mooted
we
passage are,
morning
as
sacrifice, or
calves, or,
the roar
hymn
We
find this
word
||
of out-poured song
also in
is
brought,
its
prayer).
a
35, 9
KS,
and again
glirtdQCut
is
is
shown by VIII,
That
51, 10
Sanskrit dhena
Vol. xxxii.]
411
found only
is
vi$vddhend,
in
IV,
19, 2
and 6
tvdm mahim avdnim vi$vddhendm
turvitaye vayydya ksardntim
(For Vayya and Turvlti thou didst stay
The mighty stream, on flowing, aroar with
song),
song).
quite
and dance
at their liberation.
It
admirably.
in the
RV.
9,
literature
we
in Tdit.
find
Ar.,
senendrasya
pusnah
agneli
vasundm gdyatrl
rudrandrii tristuk
\
visnor anastuk
dditydndm jagatl
||
||
We have already listed the other five works in which this
is given in whole or
Some of these, as the GB, 2, 2, 9
part.
and thus, by supplying the missetc.,
give senendrasya patm,
make
clear
it
that
we have here a list of the
word,
ing
"wives" of the several deities. An examination of this "Catalogue of Wives" reveals how truly each is the necessary
complement of her lord and his practically constant companion.
Indra, warrior god, and his army; V&yu, the god of wind, and
i
This
passage in
itself
may
be said to
clinch
the whole
The word
is
actually the equivalent of the brhas in
as
Bloomfield once remarked.
Professor
brhaspati,
milk".
412
8. O.
Oliphant,
[1912.
dhend
Naigh. 6, 17, quotes RV. I, 101, 10 and adds
dadhdteh, -- "dhend is derived from the verb dadhdti". As
he has already defined dhend by listing it as a synonym of
vdk, it would appear that he uses dadhdti here in its sense
of "fix in thought, as a prayer, etc."
c
Lastly Hemachandra's Unadiganasutra 268 has the gloss dhend sarasvatl mdtd ca dhenah samudrah
\
Of
We
it is
In the case of
it
is
their
commending
worshipper and expressing
their appreciation of the strength imparted to them by the
songs, or their war-cries and battle-shouts as they engage in
combat with their foes. The streams, too, sing their joy at
their release and roar in praise of the great deity that
the
gracious words,
effected
it.
Dhend
is
(1) religion, especially the Ahuran religion, also (2) a theological-philosophical concept of the totality of the psychic and
religious properties of man. It is the spiritual ego, the immortal part of man, the mental Aoyos. Of. Bartholomae, WB. s. v.
is
and
life is
their
religious
1
Unless dhend is masc. dual; then sarasvatl is the river and the reference has no connection with our subject. Of. n. p. 403.
Av.
taeza,
Lith.
staiga,
mesas,
maesa,
resa,
raesa,
raiszas,
vedas,
vaedd,
vaidas,
hedas,
zaea,
euzda, etc.
maiszas,
Sanskrit dhena
Vol. xxxii.]
constitute
their
poetic
literature.
Here
is
expressed
413
their
thought about the great anonymous Devas, the moon god and
the sun maiden, the morning and the evening star, Perkiinas,
the god of thunder, etc., beliefs which transport us back to
the primal days of our race. Like the Sanskrit dhend, the
Lithuanian daind is a voiced Aoyos, but unlike the former it
frequently descends from the divine heights and becomes of
Thus dhend, daend and daind are all
the earth, earthy.
thought, but thought in its higher and spiritual reaches. Both
phonetics and semantics proclaim them own sisters in the old
Indo-European family
By way
of
circle.
in the
etc.
RV.
it
may
in every passage in
consistently be inter-
decidedly
that indubitably signify songs, prayers, etc., but not all are so
used with havis or its synonyms. It is so completely identified with Vayu that it is metonymic of him.
Our interpretation is supported by Naighantuka, Sayana and Vdj. S.
It has the irrefragable support of the "Catalogue of Wives". Only
in the commentators on a "contaminated" version of one Vedic
passage, plus five passages in Sayana, does it fail in support
of the ancillary Vedic literature.
It is not difficult to posit
this.
It furnishes the Sanskrit member, otherwise
an equation with the Avestan and the Lithuanian.
Passages which Oldenberg finds difficult become easy. Every
argument he uses against it, is amply refuted by the passages
quoted from the RV. The cumulative effect is overwhelming
for dhend as a synonym of dhi, vdcas, glr, stoma, arka, etc.
reasons for
missing, of
By WALTEB
and Prakrit.
Vedic, Sanskrit,
PETEESEN,
culties in the
And
culties.
in
a discussion of
making
"What
is
sideration
,
materially simplified.
itself,
is
And
since this
Classical 5
or
at least
Cf.
e.
JRAS.
the
g.
was related
1904. 457
below
is
which
3
*
it is
ordinarily applied.
5 So
Hoefer,
Prakritae 25 f.;
KZ.
24. 614.
De
Handbuch
Intr. p.
V;
Jacobi,.
Vol. xxxii.]
Vedic, Sanskrit,
and Prakrit.
415
taken.
for
The number
all.
of phonetic
as well as morphological
peculiarities
to Sanskrit, prove definitely that Prakrit
nearer to the Vedic than to the Classical Sanskrit,
unknown
is
much
and that
kasati "kratzen":
Lith. karszti;
prauga
*prayuga, titau
himself:
"Daneben
*titasu,
quote Wackernagel
der
aber
war
priesterlichen Sprache)
(sc.
(wenigstens in bestimmten Volksschichten) schon zu der Zeit, da die uus er-
To
etc.
haltenen
liber
und
Hymnen
jene
hymns two distinct groups of Indian diawere developed and separated by an uncrossable gulf 3
So
e.
g.
the
Nom.
and Prakrit.
150;
Thumb,
PI.
= Prkrt.
op.
cit.
19.
Of.
Of.
Bradke,
ZDMG.
2.
40.
110
673
f.;
ff.;
Franke,
Thumb,
XVII.
loc. cit.
loc. cit.
Of.
ceding the Christian era Sanskrit and the vernaculars (Prakrit) were so
416
Walter Petersen,
[1912.
can
hymns
or of a
Vedic in
its
close
to the
character.
we
Now
amply
Bradke himself
sufficient.
He
that the
oldest
But
this
possible for
Aryan language
into "Altindisch"
it is
to
and then
argument
tries
ZDMG.
40. 669.
Vol. xxxii.]
Vedic, Sanskrit,
and Prakrit.
417
gained
to be put also the development of Pali from "Altpresumably on the ground that fifteen hundred years
be amply sufficient for even such large dialectical differto arise!
First a large period of time is claimed as
probably needed to develop comparatively small differthen this large period is in turn used as proof that
is
indisch",
would
ences
being
ences,
difference
is
very slight,
sical
for the
we accept
If
assume at least
ly
slight
Sanskrit.
this
we should have
to
milleniums to account for the comparativedifference between the Avestan and the Classical
five
When,
kind,
very hard to believe that the Bigveda was enough later than
the period of Indo-Iranian unity to account for the large
change from primitive Aryan to Pali; for the fact that the
Bigveda
is
yet
full
Panjab, and that the larger part of the later Aryan India
had not yet been settled 2 would make it exceedingly improbable that the Indian Aryans had been in the Panjab a very
long time before the hymns were composed. We would hardly
,
and then
to
resume
it later.
Nor
Of.
ff.;
different purpose.
Thumb,
op.
cit.
14.
418
Walter Petersen,
[1912.
The
of language develop.
greater:
is
it
difficulty
impossible for
me
to conceive
But
let us assume for argument's sake that there neverthewas ample time, in what relation then would we conceive
the language of the Bigveda to stand to these vernaculars?
The first alternative that might occur to us is that Yedic, like
the later Classical Sanskrit, was already a petrified language, kept alive only by the priests and literary men. But
In the first
to this idea there are several grave objections.
place the character of the Vedic language and literature is
such that scarcely any one has seriously doubted that it was
close to the living language of the time of the poets. 2 There
may have been dialect mixture and archaisms and poetic
peculiarities of diction, and the actual spoken language differed
from that of the hymns as the Greek vernaculars of the Homeric age differed from the language of the Homeric poets,
or as the popular languages to which any literary dialects owe
their origin differ from the latter, but no more.
Moreover, if
Vedic was a dead language when the hymns were composed,
how can we assume that this old language escaped complete
dead language is perpetobliteration in so long a time?
uated only in its literature, and when it dies before a literature is produced, as it would have to in this case, it will be
less
before
forgotten
1
the
How
it
retention
itself.
It
is
Gram. 3
20; Grierson,
XV;
JRAS.
Wackernagel, op.
1904. 471.
cit.
XVII; Macdo-
Vol. xxxii.]
Vedic, Sanskrit,
and Prakrit.
419
how
this older
language (supposing
it
to have
been
new and
f.,
who
one.
*
Phonetik*
Universality in fact
Sievers, op.
cit.
731.
is
in this
way
728.
a characteristic of
all
gradual changes.
Cf.
420
Walter Petersen,
[1912.
rs>s, etc.
The development
should have
completely
of all of these
obliterated
the
rt>t,
new pronunciations
old,
if really,
as
is
claimed, Vedic and Prakrit were successive steps in the development of the same language. The existence of Prakrit forms
with the above mentioned peculiarities in the Kigveda proves
conclusively therefore from this point of view also that the two
can not have been chronologically successive stages of one and
the same language.
It follows that Vedic and Prakrit are sister dialects instead
of being related as mother to daughter.
In some way or
other they must have been differentiated from their common
ancestor, so that 'both could continue to exist side by side. It
obvious, however, that this differentiation can not have been
is
Vedic and Prakrit can not have been contemwhich arose in different localities; for it is
poraneous
incredible that all people in one section of the country should
be so conservative in their pronunciation that they continued
local,
i.
e.
dialects
would appear as though the language they spoke was immeasurably a more recent or modern stage than that of the former.
"We should in vain look for analogies to this. Evidently the
cause of the differentiation must be sought in different social
strata of the same communities, one a strongly conservative
*
In the light of the following these changes were not gradual, but
due to the substitution of one sound for the other. Here we argue from
the standpoint of those who maintain that Prakrit is a direct descendant
of Vedic. If that be true, these changes must be gradual.
Vol. xxxii.]
Vedic, Sanskrit,
and Prakrit.
421
disappear if we assume that Vedic and Prakrit were castelanguages from the beginning, and that the differences originated with the differences between the castes. And since the
origin of the castes was intimately connected with the difference between Aryan and not- Aryan, we may say that Yedic
was the language of the higher or Aryan castes, 2 while Pra-
krit
castes.
As
upon
But since these black aborigof speech as well as linguistic habits that
differed widely from those of the Aryan invaders, they were
unable to learn the language in the same form as the one in
ines
society.
had organs
which
it
to suit their
Of. Baden-Powell, JRAS. 1899. 328, who states that the middle and
lower castes were either not Aryan at all or badly mixed, while the
2
Of. Hirt,
Die Indogermanen
ZDMG.
101.
Oldenberg,
51. 275:
422
Walter Petersen,
[1912.
his
many
common
Prakrit were
common
to
all
of the
dialects
racial peculiarities
also
And
these peculiarities primarily affect the phonological aspect of a language, it is intelligible that the Prakrit peculiarities in the Veda are exclusively phonological. 1
Moreover,
since these sound-changes from primitive Aryan to the earliest
since
it
is
The
dialects
ferior
race
further
is
sound changes.
many
peculiarities
are similar to the mistakes of children.
or
tion
Franke compares
e. g.
the
is
same
common
substitu-
to
both.
for zwischen,
woore for Worte, aam for Arm, golle for Golde, bume for
This want of discrimination
Blume, daitipf for Bleistift.
between different sounds, usually characteristic of childhood, is
just what we would expect of a race inferior in intelligence
2
In
learning a language so largely different from its own.
1
Of.
Wackernagel, op.
cit.
XVII:
,,Keine
sichere
Spuren mittelindi-
teristic
Aryans.
Thus,
r, ^,
1,
ai,
au,
and h are
all
lacking in Prakrit.
Vol. xxrii.]
Vedic, Sanskrit,
factor alone
and Prakrit.
423
Tims
in all
becomes much
skrit
for
to retain
ment
of their speech.
Classical Sanskrit
Yedic
of the Yedic
direct
only very slightly and may with propriety, as they are below,
be designated as "Yedic". It was natural after the difference
between Yedic and Prakrit had once been developed, that the
it
have an acquaintance with Prakrit also, and sometimes, perhaps, they would even condescend to use it themselves, e. g.
to make a command clearer. In this way there was a bridge
Cf. Franke, BB. 17. 73, Pali u. Skt. 88; Rapson, JRAS. 1904. 450 ff
So Franke, BB. 17. 82; Rapson, ioc. cit. According to our view the
Vedic had only one direct descendant and did not split up into two
1
streams, as
is
2.
110
f.
Grierson,
JRAS.
1904. 472.
3
The absence
Thumb, Hdb.
VOL. XXXH.
in Skt. of the
is
d>l shows
Skt. 91.
Part IV.
29
424
Walter Petersen,
[1912.
tact with the lower classes, gradually let the Prakrit take the
place of their pure Aryan mother tongue. In the beginning,
however,
it
was not
thus.
women
as well as
men, spoke the pure Aryan language when the enslaved Dasas
first tried to learn the language of their conquerors.
In
this
way
is
explained
both the continuity of development between Vedic and Sanskrit in literature, which is the unanswerable objection against
those who maintain that Sanskrit was a late artificial product
and never was a spoken language, 2 and at the same time the
growing
formations. 3
As
in
all
and
this
all
new formations
are,
of course, to
grammatical system by Panini, 4 after which the language becrystallized and no longer showed even a
semblance of growth.
came permanently
2
3
4
like
any other
polite language,
those
living
Rigveda 3. 44 f.
BB. 17. 86; Rapson, JRAS. 1904. 441.
Cf. Wackernagel, op. cit. XXIII.
Cf. Franke, BB. 17. 80.
That Sanskrit was a spoken language, but not really a
Cf. Lud;wig,
Cf. Franke,
living lan-
Vol. xxxii.]
and Prakrit.
Vedic, Sanskrit,
425
this
it
the 'change of
early
I.
E.
ai
Vedic period) to
(doubtless
e,
still
similarly of
so pronounced in the
au to 6, ai with long a
for ideas hitherto unfamiliar. As well might we argue that the Germanic
languages are dead because many words designating objects which are
now familiar are Latin borrowings.
1
Of. Grierson, p. 480 of the above.
2 Of.
Rhys Davids, Buddha Dec. 1903 p. 254 f
.
The
though
their treatment in euphonic changes, implies that they were true diphthongs in the Vedic period. The Pratisakhyas must have received a
tradition in this respect, and this tradition certainly could not have antedated the Veda, since grammatical studies originated in the very desire
28 a; Macdonell, op.
to interpret the Veda. Of. Whitney, Skt. Gram.
cit.
38
f.
29*
426
Walter Petersen,
[1912.
to ai
with short
a,
cit.
296
f.
spoken as a caste language throughout the whole Aryan territory of India. "When therefore it is maintained e. g. by Macdonell that "there is no doubt that in the second century B.
C. Sanskrit was actually spoken in the whole country called
by Sanskrit writers Aryavarta, or 'Land of the Aryans', which
lies
statement
is
range",
the
peculiarities,
The
of them.
these different
to
but
yet
there must
actual
literary
related
the
dialects
result
that
easier because the dialects displaced were themselves fashionable languages, and not, as e. g. in G-erman, popular dia-
cit.
2
28 b.
Of.
Rapson,
p.
article.
Vol. xxxii.]
lects,
this
Vedic, Sanskrit,
and Prakrit.
427
real
dialects
popular
which was so
of Prakrit
by
the
polite
language,
mutual
intelligi-
almost identical
related
dialects
beginning.
course, that the
of
of
Franke
Arya-
it
from where
it
all
the
It cannot be
as
to
the
my
My
skrit"
do not necessarily conflict with the above theory. Accit. 49 the results of Franke's examination of
cording to op.
JRAS.
1904. 451
f.
428
[1912.
inscriptions, which
people as possible,
often not the vehicle of literary works, since they, even when
they finally appeared, were written in the imported Classical
Sanskrit,
from most
of
should
have
localities.
stand
if
Carthaginian Deity.
By W. MAX
MULLEB, Professor in the E. E. Seminary, Philadelphia, Pa.
Remarks on
the
call
her
in
or Tanit, as
it
has,
image
of Aphrodite
Tanais
(rrjs
'A^poSir^s
TavatSos);
in
the
seems to be disputed, as in
1 This
paper, after having been read before the American Oriental
Society at the meeting in New Haven, in 1906, was mislaid by its author,
and not found again by him until the present year. Ed.
Evidently, because the diphthong was felt to be too strongly unTanit is written by Clermont-Ganneau, Lidzbarski, and others
Hebrew.
up
430
W.
Max
Mutter,
[1912.
We
that
the Persian
know now
which form
sufficiently
well
Conse-
lars
Artemis,"
e.
i.
existed.
2.
Akerblad
(Gesen. p. 117).
is
said to have
Modern
(!)
compared the
goddess
Neit
(Ni?i#)
know, of course,
t(not to) cannot be connected with proper names; such a connection as the good
pioneer Akerblad ventured is quite impossible, not to speak of
the various other improbabilities of his bold comparison which
articulo
ta."
"praeposito
that the Egyptian feminine article
scholars
already Movers rejected (although he strangely kept the conclusions in the form of that vocalisation!).
Finally Gesenius desperately referred to proper name like
Tennes, Mutten-Mythonius; to city names with prefixed t- (see
3.
etc.;
like
None
Masintha,
deserves
Masinissa,,
now any
dicussion.
etc.
Tennes, however,
"arguments"
seemed to
still
be meant in Chantepie de la Saussaye, Lehrbuch der Religonsgeschichte^ I, 235 (Fr. Jeremias): "the divinity TNT, after a
Greek personal name to be pronounced Thent". If Jeremias
really meant the Sidonian king Tennes, adduced by Gesenius,
we ought
demand some
name,
Cp.
tation.
to
for the
Movers
I,
626.
Remarks on
Vol. xxxii.]
the
Carthaginian
deity.
431
be traced epigraphically to Phoenicia, 1 I consider it inadmissible to use an argument from any Phoenician name.
Consequently, the old attempts at vocalizing those 3 consonants fail completely. I regret that, after having destroyed
the old theories, I cannot offer any substitute for them; there
hardly any basis for the pronunciation of that enigmatic
is
name
(cp.
offer at least
That
"local
or
of
even
Libyan
name
"Berber, Berberic")
Cp.
g. Kabylic thamdint, from Arabic medme
This formation agrees too remarkably with the divine
feminines. 1
"city".
name
suffixed
ts) -h
e.
TNT
to be
name
sider this
accidental.
as
and one or two weak consonants, among which the n may take
the
first,
it
present,
loci.
title
"TNT
I, 19,
important
TNT",
is
the
first
in Greek Artemidoros.
betrays
may have
432
W.
Max
Mutter,
[1912.
This simple result becomes very complicated only if we compare the name with that of Anna, the sister of Dido. Doubt-
Anna
is
be seen
names.
Hanna
of
(or to
change
it
to
7i);
if
The
much
against this.
It
without
initial
h.
It
is
true,
the
alleged
name
of a
Hanna cannot be proved with certainty epiand we need not trouble ourselves much with
Punic goddess
graphically,
that suppositional form. Still, I confess not at all to be satisfied with the above explanation: Anna (whatever its initial
be) as a Semitisation ^of a supposed *Tannath. I consider
theory not very plausible and would prefer leaving the
explanation of the relation of the two names in doubt.
may
this
it
titles
of our god-
Ovid. Fasti III, 523; Yarro in Servius, Aen. IV, 682; cp. Movers
612 who, however, does not notice the identity clearly.
I,
N3n seems masculine, the well known Hanno. Prof. Torrey directs
attention to a seal which he considers Punic, mentioning an Kama*
I feel strong doubts whether this proves to be a female divinity. [The
2
my
seal was published in this Journal, XXVIII (1907), 354. Its genuineness
has been questioned t?y Lidzbarski, Ephemeris III, 69, but on insufficient
grounds. Ed.]
Remarks on
Vol. xxxii].
dess
"the mistress
TNT
433
is
called
explanation,
1904,
IX,
no
difficulty.
The
for
Museum
dialects.
As a sample
bowl-text
Mr. Wm. T.
1910 11 Mr.
Ellis,
of
In the winter of
through Mesopotamia and was
Swarthmore, Pa.
Ellis travelled
mounds of Nippur.
was greatly impressed by the remains of the excavations
made at this site by the University of Pennsylvania expeditions, and has been urging since his return home that American
scholarship should resume "the operations begun on so stupen-
He
scale.
Among the curios he acquired at Nippur from
the Arabs were three inscribed bowls, doubtless private spoils
from the strata uncovered by the excavators. One of these is
dous a
illegible,
and the
to, is
one
is
the one I
now
publish.
The bowl
is
Vol. xxxii.]
usually
Text (Plate
rr
PDK
\<Eby Dty^i
TI . * . n
p]am
feoat ja
m^pi
K-OD ty nn
nt
for-
i).
mm
*
nnra
jnt?
rr rr rip rr] IT
11
nin
nnni
^
in
n^ Kim
pteow
K^I
m
pam
ttfri
rn^pi
Translation.
[A charm
for
ever.
Amen.
Ya, Ya, Ya!, seven [times?]. Avaunt, avaunt to the [southern?] bolt (pole?) of the heights of the house (?) whose flames
are the lightnings, lightning of fire, and the [northern?] bolt
of the shades of darkness, and their chariots the chariots of
bonds, links of brass and lead and iron, and they are sealed
in the name of Samhiza, the lord Bagdana. Be there sealing
and warding for G-eniba bar Dodai and for his house, wife,
children,
harm
[Dodai].
Commentary.
I speak of the script below. The orthoepy (e. g. fc6nfcO,
P&DD&), forms (e. g. ron, "his sons", Mandaic), and vocabulary
are such as appear in the similar bowl-texts. The client's
Error for
James A. Montgomery,
436
name
known
is
in the Palmyrene,
cf.
elsewhere, and
I have found
[1912.
The
syllables
iT,
etc.,
Ht,
etc.,
are
from Jim,
"avaunt". "What follows is obscure.
an obstruction, water-dam, 1^0*0, a bolt, and
Syriac I^L
the term may be understood from the Babylonian myth of
Tiamat's hide fastened up as the firmament with a bolt, 1 or
else of the function of the sky as the dam-breast to the celestial waters.
The following word may possibly be read WSDTl
feminine
but why so with 4ODD?), and the reference
form,
(a
be to the southern bolt, or pole, of the sky, the source of the
lightnings, the second use of N*DD meaning then the north pole,
the abode of darkness. The demons are commanded to flee
to the ends of the earth.
"The heights of the house" is obHt
JDi?.
nt,
scure
KDn
(for
XXX,
204).
astrological
jtyw/mra,
Newbold, JBL,
see
The
I can explain it
which is used of the "undoing" operations of demons
The
deity,
whose
appears in one of
seal
is
referred to,
other texts.
(e.
g.
The
gods.
The
personal
name
suggests
to
fallen
angel
me
my
first
is
syllable
also
the
is
added,
Samhiza; Prof.
Gr.
F. Moore
Semyaza
in
Book
of Enoch.
iv.
I have found a
1.
139, "he
fastened
a bolt".
2 Dr. von Oefele
suggests to me that in the astrological scheme for
drawing horoscopes the peak of the "tenth house", which is at the
zenith, is the abode of fire.
A/
QC7
a?
XD
/n
TN
CD
CA
"A
JJ
-O
'<
cu
\
Plate
Col.
1,
2.
Vol. xxxii.]
number
of connections
angelology.
Mandaic Amulet published in the de Vogue Florilegium), otherwise it is pagan and shows no direct Jewish influence, the
formula "forever and ever, Amen", being a magical commonNiHfiDK
place.
.=
fcOBD,
cf.
Ethiopic
Mastema.
The
texts
chief point
is
made a
the script.
detailed
of interest in
In
The
1 and
1,
times disappearing.
V, with an elaborate flourish from the head to the
left.
Final
3,
further
fall
p. 348.
The
ac-
Manichaean
Schriften, 167.
James A. Montgomery,
438
companying
table,
Plate
Magical Bowl-Text
etc.
[1912.
2,
is
The Turkish
differs
in keeping
it
1 turned to
from
the
left,
as
its
1.
Syriac texts and in this lack the alphabet agrees with the
my
Manichaean.
thus an interesting
script has
provincial Syriac
forward. It is the alphabet which was used by the
Our
history
they
China.
for
the
Turkish
dialect
end of the
first
millennum.
We
well
the
This
is
oriental
Jew, Samaritan,
sects;
peculiarism
each
the
Christian
churches,
Manichaean,
party develSyriac
the native
from
its
own
oped
peculiar literary vehicle, starting
literary
It
may
of Manichaeism.
Probably
now
TLZ,
1912, 446.
JOURNAL
OP THE
CHARLES
C.
TOEREY,
AND
New
HANNS OERTEL
Professor in Tale University,
New
Haven, Conn.
Haven, Conn.
THIRTY-THIRD VOLUME
CONNECTICUT,
MCMXIII.
U.
S.
A;
copy of
may
be
Money Order
lent, to
or
its
equiva-
Society,
New
Printed by
W.
TABLE OF CONTENTS.
Page
...
BARTON, G. A.
Months
297
CONANT,
C. E.
EDGERTON,
265
.
F.:
GOTTHEIL, R.
150
158
Zum
EPSTEIN, J. N.
295
Two Forged
Antiques
279
263
306
,.
281
193
HOPKINS, E.
55
Ohio
JASTROW, M.:
JACOBI, H.:
167
Wine
On Mayavada
180
51
214
259
MARGOLIS, M. L.
Old Latin
MERCER,
S.
A. B.:
254
The Oath
in
Cuneiform Inscriptions
33
145
NEGELEIN, J.
v.:
I.
PRINCE, J. D.
H.
SCOTT,
W. H.
S. B.
in the
Sumerian Inscriptions
Centuries
209
of the Erythraean Sea
Mohammedanism
in
Borneo Notes
:
349
for a Study of the
Its Influence
lonian,
402
345
Two
YLVISAKER,
16
10
Era
The name
217
363
DUN
of the Christian
SCHOFF,
PRINCE, J. D.:
SCHOFF, "W.
71, 121,
The Cock
PETERS, J. P.:
PRICE,
Atharvaprayascittani
Some Notes on
OGDEN, E. S.:
313
Collection,
24
397
PROCEEDINGS
OP THE
MEETING IN PHILADELPHIA,
PA.
1913
and Thursday of Easter week, March 25th, 26th, and 27th, 1913.
The following members were present at one or more of the
sessions
Adler, C.
Ellis
Arnold
Barret
Barton
Bates, Mrs.
Bender
Bloomfield
Boiling
Brockwell
Burlingame
Cams
Clay
Cunningham
Edgerton
TOTAL:
The
Room
56.
session
was held in
at
11
The reading
The Committee
Professor
A. Y. Williams
come
have sent
and appreciation.
the correspondence with foreign members
letters of acceptance
may be specially
mentioned an interesting letter from Mr. Ely Bannister Soane, written at
Chia Surkh in Southern Kurdistan and dated May 26, 1912, in which he
makes some noteworthy remarks regarding the sect of the Ali Illahi and
their possible connection with the Yezidis, numbers of whom are scattered
Among
through Kurdistan.
He
writes:
which
common
if
origin,
which have
Ill
the
modern
ritual also
loss of several
work.
Kev. Dr. Arthur
(JAOS. 22
Hindu conception
249308).
Professor William Watson Goodwin, the distinguished Greek scholar of
Harvard, has likewise died since the last meeting. He was one of the
oldest members of the Society, having joined in 1857, and he always
attended some of the sessions when the meetings took place in Boston or
[1901], p.
Cambridge.
.the
Homeric
who
are associated
Professor Lanman spoke briefly on the character and achievements of Professor G-oodwin; Professor Bloomfield, on Professor
Ludwig; Professor Barton, on Dr. Blaustein.
follows:
IV
31, 1912.
Receipts.
31,
1911
$ 1358.73
$ 1305.20
75.00
Life membership
Contribution for the Library
Sales of the Journal
100.00
345.36
State National
Bank
128.14
dividends
50.00
Bank
Withdrawn from Savings Bank
Sale of 13 shares of National
stock
2600.00
1017.08
5620.78
$ 6979.51
Expenditures.
$ 1208.21
57.34
21.76
....
Editor's honorarium
200.00
200.00
21.30
....
150.50
3842.91
5702.02
1277.49
$ 6979.51
STATEMENT.
1911
$ 3052.29
1000.00
1912
$ 3178.21
1000.00
1950.00
20.76
330.05
225.51
380.38
1787.50
990.00
^"6353J.O $ 7561.60
NEW HAVEN,
all
correct.
Conn.,
March
17. 1913.
CHARLES C. TORREY)
( Auditors.
HANNS r\
OERTEL
-a-
Professor
Albert
T.
Clay,
presented the
following report:
During the past year much has been done in classifying the books of
Under my predecessor the serial publications were classified and given their own shelf number.
Since then many new serials
have been added to the Library, but they have been placed on the
the Library.
inventory of
loguing them and completing the classification. We have also some 244
volumes ready for binding, which will represent an outlay of about $200.
This has been provided for by the appropriation made one year ago.
The catalogues of manuscripts were also catalogued under my predecessor,
as well as the Bibliotheca Indica, but the work has not been kept
up
to date. This is now being done.
In addition we have commenced to
make
way
Journal.
ELECTION OF MEMBERS.
The
VI
CORPORATE MEMBERS.
Mr.
T.
Ramakrishna
at
New York
1913-1914.
to
nominate
officers
1913
Grottheil, and
Montgomery, and nominated the
following,
duly elected:
Professor Paul Haupt, of Baltimore.
Professor Morris Jastrow, Jr., of Philadelphia; Professor Hanns Oertel, [of New Haven; and Professor George A. Barton,
of Bryn Mawr, Pa.
President
Vice-Presidents
Corresponding Secretary
of
New
York.
Recording Secretary Dr. George C. 0. Haas, of New York.
Treasurer Professor Frederick Wells Williams, of New Haven.
Librarian Professor Albert T. Clay, of New Haven.
Directors The officers above named, and Professors Richard Gottheil,
of New York; Charles R. Lanman, of Cambridge; E. Washburn Hopkins,
of New Haven; Maurice Bloomfield, of Baltimore; George F. Moore, of
Cambridge; Robert Francis Harper, of Chicago; Dr. William Hayes
Ward, of New York.
SECOND SESSION.
The members reassembled on Wednesday morning at 9 35
m. for the second session. The President, Professor Moore
was in the chair. After the election of a corporate member
:
a.
Vll
Dialectic
Remarks by Professor
Haupt.
Professor G. M. BOLLING, of the Catholic University of America: The
Santikalpa of the Atharva-Veda.
Professor C. C. TORREY, of Yale University:
possible metrical original
of the Lord's Prayer.
Remarks by Professor Moore.
exploration
Michelson.
Israel.
Montgomery.
Professor Max Miiller made a few remarks, presenting a
specimen of the Kunjara language of Dar Fur in Arabic script.
At noon the Society took ^a recess until a quarter before
three o'clock.
THIRD SESSION.
The afternoon session was opened at 2 55 p. m. in the large
lecture-room at the Dropsie College, President Moore being in
the chair.
President Cyrus Adler, of the Dropsie College, made a brief
address explaining the foundation and purposes of the College.
Professor Bezold, who was present at the meeting, was invited
:
to say a few
dic-
tionary.
After the election of an additional corporate member (included in the list above), the reading of papers was resumed,
in the following order:
Dr. E.
ghosa's
Vlll
Mr. W. S. KUPFER, of New York: On some modern vernacular folkRemarks by Professor Gottheil.
songs of India.
Dr. A. EMBER, of Johns Hopkins University: Some Egyptian and Coptic
etymologies.
Dr. F. EDGERTON, of Johns Hopkins University: Pancadivyadhivasa,
choosing a king by divine ordeal.
Professor P. HAUPT, of Johns Hopkins University: Two poems of
Haggai in the Book of Zechariah. (Presented in abstract.)
Professor P. HAUPT: The fifth Sumerian family law. (Presented in
abstract.)
Allu, Mesu.
On
At
FOURTH
The
Society met
Thursday morning
Pennsylvania, the
for
in
the
Room
President,
SESSION.
fourth session
at 9
40
a.
m. on
chair.
IX
and the
munications respectively.
On motion the following resolution was unanimously adopted
The reading
order
in
of papers
in the following
by the author.
Professor M. JASTROW,
the Pentateuchal codes.
Brock well,
Jr., of
Wine
in
Moore.
Professor J. A. MONTGOMERY, of the University of Pennsylvania: A
Mandaic inscription on a lead tablet. -- Remarks by Professors Max
Miiller, Gottheil, and Barton.
Mr. William T.
Ellis exhibited
in form, inscribed in ancient Chinese characters, for the inProfessors Haupt and Brockwell
spection of the members.
it.
The
Professor G. A. BARTON,
kings of Adab.
of
Bryn Mawr
The
College:
The names
p. m., to
two
meet at Cambridge
of
(Presented in abstract.)
(b)
Some
title:
Syriac grammatical
structions.
Vikramacarita.
Dr. A. EMBER, of Johns Hopkins University: The origin of the pronosuffix of the third person masculine singular, in Egyptian.
minal
Professor
America:
(a)
I.
Hebrew language
in Palestine.
Iranian Miscellanies.
W.
Dr.
Mary
I.
The
epic Narada.
reign of Ellil-bani.
Professor A. V.
in the
The chrono-
On Vedic
Dr. A. POEBEL, of Johns Hopkins University: (a) Nisan; (b) Gold and
Babylonia in the third millennium B. C.; (c) A new Creation and
silver in
Deluge
text.
An
unread Baby-
New York: A
study
XI
Rev. Dr.
W. ROSENAU,
of
Hebrew
Johns Hopkins University (a) Some psychotext of Maimonides; (b) The Strack edition
:
List of Members.
xiii
LIST OF MEMBEBS.
The number placed
I.
HONORARY MEMBERS.
10.)
1'Institut,
Paris, France.
(Rue Garan-
1898.
I.
E.,
Dekkan
Poona, India
Coll.
1887.
W. RHYS
1899.
1909.
1907.
Prof.
of Jena,
Germany.
1878.
ADOLPH ERMAN,
1893.
1903.
Prof.
RICHARD GARBE,
Str. 14.)
Prof.
KARL
University of Tubingen,
Germany.
(Biesinger
1902.
Germany.
1905.
Rome,
Prof.
Germany. (Gross-Lichterfelde-
of Strassburg,
University of Gottingen,
Germany.
Germany.
(Kalbs1910.
List of Members.
xiv
1'Institut
de France, 18
Paris,
1908.
Prof. JULIUS
strasse 18 a.)
Prof.
1902.
strasse 15.)
(Universitats-
1890.
II.
[Total: 26]
CORPORATE MEMBERS.
members.
Rev. Dr. JUSTIN EDWARDS ABBOTT, 120 Hobart Ave., Summit, N. J. 1900.
Mrs JUSTIN E. ABBOTT, 120 Hobart Ave., Summit, N. J. 1912.
Dr. 'CYRUS ADLER, 2041 North Broad St., Philadelphia, Pa. 1884.
Prof. FELIX ADLER, 33 Central Park West, New York, N. Y. 1912.
RONALD C. ALLEN, 148 South Divinity Hall, Univ. of Chicago, Chicago, 111.
1912.
St.,
Springfield, Mass.
1904.
York,
Y.,
1907.
1898.
Rock
Prof.
Island,
111.
1900.
1881.
List of Members.
xv
St..
Cleveland, Ohio.
1911.
Prof. JAMES
HENRY BREASTED,
111.
1891.
HAMMOND H. BUCK,
111.
1892.
Philippine Islands.
1908.
1910.
1893.
Dr.
F.'
WALTER
1907.
*
EDWARD
1888.
Prof.
ALFRED L,
1900.
Dr.
List of Members.
xvi
Prof. LEVI
H. ELWELL, (Amherst
111.
1901.
Amherst, Mass.
1883.
Texas.
1888.
HENRY FERGUSON,
1876.
St. Paul's School, Concord, N. H.
FERGUSON, Peking-, China. 1900.
Dr. HENRY C. FINKEL, District National Bank Building, Washington, D.
Prof.
Dr.
JOHN
C.
C.
1912.
Rev. Dr. FONCK, Institute Biblico Pontifico, Via del Archelto, Roma,
Italia.
1913.
120th
New
York, N. Y.
1892.
Prof.
nati, 0.,
1890.
Prof.
Prof.
111.
1886.
1879.
Prof.
Univ.), 215
List of Members.
xvii
N. J.
1903.
*Dr. A. F.
Rev. Dr.
*Prof. E.
Conn.
St.,
Brooklyn, N. Y.
299 Lawrence
St.,
1893.
1899.
New Haven,
1881.
1885.
New York, N. Y.
1912.
Prof. CHRISTOPHER
New Haven,
St.,
St.,
Conn.
1913.
Office
London
S.
W., England.
1908.
Prof. MAXIMILIAN L.
1890.
ROLAND
Mass.
1899.
bridge, Mass.
1876.
List of Members.
xviii
Museum
of Natural History,
Chicago,
111.
1900.
1912.
Dr. OTTO LICHTI, 146 Tremont St., Ansonia, Conn.
H. LINFIELD, 52 Middle Divinity Hall, Univ. of Chicago, Chicago,
111.
1912.
Tenn. 1901.
Prof.
i.
Els.
111.
1912.
1912.
1871.
Mass.
1882.
of Art,
New
York, N. Y.
1899.
Prof.
Prof.
College,
Broad
Philadelphia, Pa.
1913.
Prof.
Prof.
Prof.
MAX
C. 0.
Chicago,
111.
1912.
D. C.
1899.
town, Pa.
1903.
Prof.
List of Members.
xix
Miss ELLEN
Prof.
Prof.
S.
Geneve, Switzerland.
1904.
Prof.
1894.
Univ.), 542
1894.
West 114th
New
St.,
York, N. Y. 1879.
Rev. Dr. JOHN P. PETERS, 225 West 99th St., New York, N. Y. 1882.
WALTER PETERSEN, Bethany College, Lindsborg, Kansas. 1909.
Prof. DAVID PHILIPSON (Hebrew Union College), 3947 Beechwood Ave.,
Rose
Hill, Cincinnati, 0.
1889.
1912.
University, Baltimore, Md.
Dr. WILLIAM POPPER, University of California, Berkeley, Cal. 1897.
Prof. IRA M. PRICE, University of Chicago, Chicago, 111. 1887.
Dr.
Prof.
N. Y.
Univ.), Sterlington,
Rockland
Co.,
1888.
GEORGE PAYN QUACKENBOS, 331 West 28th St., New York, N. Y. 1904.
RAMAKIRSMA, Thottakkadu House, Madras, India. 1913.
Dr. CAROLINE L. RANSOM, Metropolitan Museum of Art, 5th Ave. and
82d St., New York, N. Y.
1912.
G. A. REICHLING, 466 Nostrand Ave., Brooklyn, N. Y. 1912.
Dr. JOSEPH REIDER, Dropsie College, Philadelphia, Pa. 1913.
Prof.
1891.
Prof. PHILIP
St.,
1913.
New
York, N. Y. 1894.
Rev. Dr. GEORGE LIVINGSTON ROBINSON (McCormickTheol. Sem.), 4 Chalmers
Place, Chicago,
111.
of Art,
1892.
1880.
Mass.
St.,
Cambridge,
1893.
J. J.
1897.
xx
List of Members.
1894.
Philadelphia, Pa.
State,
1912.
Washington D.
C.
1913.
1903.
Rev. JOHN L. SCULLY, Church of the Holy Trinity, 312-332 East 88th St.,
New York, N. Y. 1908.
Rev. Dr. WILLIAM G. SEIPLE, 110 East Twenty-fifth St., Baltimore Md.
1902.
1906.
Pall Mall,
MAYER SULZBERGER,
Prof.
GEORGE SVERDRUP,
Prof.
WM.
C.
1888.
1907.
Rev.
1909.
List oj Members.
xxi
ADDISON VAN NAME (Yale Univ.), 121 High St., New Haven, Conn. 1863.
Miss SUSAN HAYES WARD, The Stone House, Abington Ave., Newark,
N. J. 1874.
Rev. Dr. WILLIAM HAYES WARD, 130 Fulton St., New York, N. Y. 1869.
Miss CORNELIA WARREN, Cedar Hill, Waltham, Mass. 1894.
Prof.
Mass.
Rev.
1877.
LEROY WATERMAN,
Prof. J. E.
Prof.
Govt.,
JOHN
1877.
1908.
New
JOHN E. WISHART,
HENRY
St.,
1911.
Madison, Wis.
1904.
1905.
St.,.
Prof. IRVING F.
Prof. JAMES H. WOODS (Harvard Univ.), 2 Chestnut St., Boston, M*ss. 1900.
Dr. WILLIAM H, WORRELL, Hosmer Hall, Hartford, Conn. 1910.
Dr. S. C. YLVISAKER, Luther College, Decorah, la. 1913.
Rev. Dr. ABRAHAM YOHANNAN, Columbia University, New York, N. Y. 1894.
Germany.
1911.
S. J.,
Niederwallstrasse
89,
Berlin,
SW.
(Total: 309.)
19,
List of Members.
xxii
SOCIETIES, EDITORS,
AMERICA.
I.
II.
EUROPE.
1.)
Anthropologische Gesellschaft.
PRAGUE: Koniglich Bohmische Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften.
DENMARK, ICELAND, REYKJAVIK: University Library.
FRANCE, PAF.IS Societe Asiatique. (Rue de Seine, Palais de 1'Institut.)
:
Bibliotheque Nationale.
Seminar
f iir Orientalische
Sprachen.
(Am Zeughause
1.)
Bloomsbury, W.C.)
dei Lincei.
List of Members.
xxni
III.
CHINA
ASIA.
INDIA,
The Anthropological
Society.
(Town
Hall.)
Simla, Punjab.)
CEYLON, COLOMBO Ceylon Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society.
JAPAN, TOKYO: The Asiatic Society of Japan.
JAVA, BATAVIA: Bataviaasch Genootschap van Kunsten en Wetenschappen.
KOREA: Korea Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society, Seoul, Korea.
:
NEW
PHILIPPINE ISLANDS:
SYRIA:
New
Plymouth.
St.
IV.
AFRIKA.
V.
3 Hess
Revue de
Str.,
Munich, Bavaria),
M. Jean
Reville, chez
M.
E,
(J.
C.
List of Members.
xxiv
Munich, Bavaria).
St.,
Chi-
111.
Panini
Office,
(India).
LIBRARIES.
them
of the fact.
complete as
may
It
is
thereof.
list.
Hebrew Union
College, Cincinnati, 0.
Library of Congress,
Washington, D.
C.
Constitution
and By-Laws.
xxv
of April, 1897.
CONSTITUTION.
ARTICLE
ARTICLE
I.
The objects contemplated by this Society shall be: cultivation of learning in the Asiatic, African, and Polynesian
languages, as well as the encouragement of researches of any sort by
1.
II.
The
The
The
3.
4.
The
collection of a library
2.
and
cabinet.
all
the
members present
at the meeting.
Board of Directors.
The Secretaries, Treasurer, and Librarian shall be
ARTICLE VII.
ex-officio members of the Board of Directors, and shall perform their
respective duties under the superintendence of said Board.
ARTICLE VIII. It shall be the duty of the Board of Directors to regulate the financial concerns of the Society, to superintend its publications,
to carry into effect the resolutions and orders of the Society, and to
Easter week, the days and place of the meeting to be determined by the
Directors, said meeting to be held in Massachusetts at least once in three
years.
One
or
xxvi
may
Constitution
also
and By-Laws.
shall
determine.
ARTICLE X.
There
shall
ARTICLE XI.
This Constitution
may be amended, on
a recommendation
members present
at
an
annual meeting.
BY-LAWS.
I. The Corresponding Secretary shall conduct the correspondence of
the Society, and it shall be his duty to keep, in a book provided for the
purpose, a copy of his letters; and he shall notify the meetings in such
accounts and vouchers, and to inspect the evidences of the Society's property, and to see that the funds called for by his balances are in his hands.
The Committe shall perform this duty as soon as possible after the New
Year's day succeeding their appointment, and shall report their findings
to the Society at the next annual business meeting thereafter. If these
findings are satisfactory, the Treasurer shall receive his acquittance by a
certificate to that effect, which shall be recorded in the Treasurer's book,
and published in the Proceedings.
IV. The Librarian shall keep a catalogue of all books belonging to the
Society, with the names of the donors, if they are presented, and shall at
each annual meeting make a report of the accessions to the library during
the previous year, and shall be farther guided in the discharge of his
duties by such rules as the Directors shall prescribe.
V. All papers read before the Society, and all manuscripts deposited
by authors for publication, or for other purposes, shall be at the disposal
of the Board of Directors, unless notice to the contrary is given to the
Editors at the time of presentation.
VI. Each corporate member shall pay into the treasury of the Society
an annual assessment of five dollars; but a donation at any one time of
seventy-five dollars shall exempt from obligation to make this payment.
VII. Corporate and Honorary members shall be entitled to a copy of
all the publications of the
Society issued during their membership, and
Constitution
shall
also
and By-Laivs.
xxvii
have the privilege of taking a copy of those previously pubcan supply them, at half the ordinary selling
price.
mailed to them.
failure so to qualify
shall
be construed as a refusal
become a member.
to
fall
If
X. Six members
shall
to adjourn.
SUPPLEMENTARY BY-LAWS.
I.
1.
The Library
shall
all
members
of
the Society, at such times as the Library of Yale College, with which it is
deposited, shall be open for a similar purpose; further, to such persons
as shall receive the permission of the Librarian, or of the Librarian or
Assistant Librarian of Yale College.
2. Any member shall be allowed to draw books from the Library upon
pensated.
Researches in the
lecent
Sumerian Calendar.
By
Mawr
College
of these
uncertainty
Ezen-Bau
He
Each
of the
three investigators
who
treats the
calendar of
of the
Ur
period,
and
believes
JAOS, XXXI,
251
ff.
ff.
ff.
ff.
George A. Barton,
[1913.
the
before
Ur dynasty
or
about 4400
- -
4500 B. C.
Such wide
differences
who engage
teacher
or pupil,
science,
and
and
It
He
is
devotees
of the craft,
and
is
So long as we
from imaginative literature and to find
standing room in the realm of science, it is quite right to test
each theory by such facts as can be ascertained, and in this
It is with
testing the humblest workers may find a place.
every quarter.
strives
this
to
escape
Myhrman,
lists
of
months
There is
year beginning with a month G-AN-MAS.
such
a year.
of
no
in
decisive
evidence
offered
really
support
It is true that in the
account
published in CT,
great grain
of a
GAN-MAS
to
SE-
IL-LA, but that does not prove that the year began with
GAN-MAS, but only that at the beginning of that month was
Vol. xxxiii.j
the
to be put into
circulation.
modern
firm might for economic causes run their fiscal year from Feb.
1st to Jan. 31st, but this would not imply that the calendar
of the time did not begin its year with Jan. 1st.
That the
authors
the
of
this
tablet
of
with
is
&E-IL-LA
began
year
shown by the
KIN-KUD
xii,
GAN-MA!,
40,
and
If the year
9).
the intercalary
month should
On
EAH,
(viz:
KUD
This
is
from Drehem published by him one can see the year shifting
from one system to the other, sometimes DIR-EZEN-MI-KIGAL 3 being the intercalary month, and sometimes DIR-SE-
KIN-KUD.*
As SE-KIN-KUD
is
a name which
signifies
Ur
of
For some
reason, probably because interwere not appointed often enough, it had been
at Telloh.
months
drawn back one place
calary
in the calendar.
At Drehem we
see
my
find.
It accordingly necessi-
2
s
La
Op.
trouvaille de
cit. p. 6.
JAOS, XXXI,
65.
Ibid. Nr. 2.
259, n. 1.
1*
George A. Barton,
months out of
its
of misconceptions.
[1913.
the notion that the barley harvest ever came as late as JulyAugust, and that the date harvest came in July. These are
modern conditions
when the
Indeed,
agricultural names were fully understood.
on Langon's theory the month names must have become fixed
about 4400 B. C. and the process of dislocation must have
been far advanced by 3000 2800 B. C., where we must place
fullest forms.
They
still
whole
sentences,
the present state of our knowledge this is not a serious diverthat SE-KINgence, though his reason for choosing it, viz
:
KUD
and SlJ-NUMUN
the time where we later
1
JAOS. XXXI,
Zwemer, Arabia
"
DP, Nr.
99.
259, n.
1.
Vol.xxxiii.]
Babylonian seasons.
late as the
previously
time of
period between
short
BAR-ZAG
in the
month-name
stellar
dy-
of the period of
ITU MUL-BABBAR-SAG-E-TA-SUB-A-A,
JHF- *?
^!!I UH I? I?) with ITU
Urkagina,viz:
(i.
Ur
^W
(i.
e.
period at Nippur.
of course, possible.
He then takes
BABBAE, which
BAR-SAG as the name of the star, instead of interpreting
SAG in the sense of "front" or "leadership" as I would do, 3
and takes the reading BAR-ZAG as another spelling for this.
of
is,
There
134 it
is
is
spelled
Though the
the
texts
Ur names
is
right, since in
BAR-ZAG
is
spelled differently
or
GAR
GA-RA
presence of the
introduces an element which
>f- <J]f
in
in"
EAH
H^g0).
two
the
both the
is
fied
star,
When
writing two
I recognized it as an intera
of
the name was not then clear
calary month, though
part
1
Stat. E, v,
Cf. JAOS,
12;
years ago,
stat.
G,
iii,
5.
Ibid, 266
f.
George A. Barton,
to me.
Assyrian
is
2J
[1913
The
is
very
ty ]]
>^f |J.
ty ||
puzzling, and two years ago I was inclined to regard it as
"day 2" inserted in a peculiar way. Analogy of later texts
proves, however, that that is impossible.
Hammurapi, for
example,
script),
NAN A
tered". 1
||
BABBAE
E-TA-SUB-A-A.
the
closing
Langdon
month
supposes.
DP
It
is
out
fire
from heaven".
Kugler
Kugler
shows that about 2700 B. C. the Leonid meteors which now
come about the middle of Nov. fell about July 14th. According to the data given by him, the Persid meteors, which now
fall in August, then fell about June 25.
At that time, accordthe
would
include both these showmonth, June-July,
ingly,
and
a month might, well be named for them. Langdon
ers,
interprets
it
name
Similarly Bu
II kam, and
88512,
NANA
ZAG-GAR
Bu
12 (OT, VIII,
9159, 320
3)
is
dated in
is dated
Ia- an
iii,
SABA-NI-
In
Sterrikunde
my
former
und Sterndienst
article I
read the
ff.
and ZA,
XXV,
278.
this is incorrect.
Vol.xxxiii.]
Of the
Drehem SE-KIN-KUD began the year estaba presumption that the same was the case at Umma,
the statement itself does not prove it any more than the
statement that from December to November is twelve months
the fact that at
lishes
cially
XXXI
should
to light, the table of months published in vol.
be corrected as in the following list. The position of those
of the
as yet be accurately
not accurately determined astro-
Probably it was
but came somewhere near
ascertained.
nomically,
the
date
harvest.
It
tember.
Second month,
Third month,
(??)
Fourth month,
(??)
ITU
ITU
ITU
ITU
ITU
ITU
ITU
EZIN- dBA-U
EZIN-BULUK-KtMNINA
EZIN-SE-Kt
EZIN-AB-UD-DU
GAB-KA-ID-KA
SI-GAB-MA
UZ-NE-GU-BA-A
George A. Barton,
ITU
ITU
ITU
I ITU
ITU
ITU
ITU
ITU
ITU
Sixth month,
Seventh month,
[1913.
GAL-SAG-GA*
AMAR-A-A-SIG-GA
AMAR-A-A-SI-DA
AMA-UDU-TUK
SE-KIN-KUD
MAL-UDU-UR
MAL-UR
SIG-BA
SIG- dBA-U-E-TA-GAR-
RA-A
ITU
ITU
ITU
ITU
ITU
UDU-SU-&E-A-IL- d NINA
UDU-SE-A-IL-LA
UDU-SU-&E-A-KU
UDU-SU-E-A- d NINA
UDU-SU-SE-A- d NINGIR-SU
ITU SE-GAR-UDU
ITU KARU-DUB-BA-A
ITU KARU-IMI-A-TA
ITU SI-NAM-DUB-NI-BADUR-BA-A
ITU-K ARU-IMI-DU- A 2
Eighth month,
Ninth month,
ITU HAR-RA-NE-MA-A3
ITU HAR-RA-NE-MA-A-
This conjecture
the feast of Tammuz
1
that this
was a
is
ITU- d NIN-GIR-SU-E-BIL
(?)
AN-TA-SUR-RA
ITU AN-TA-SUR-RA-A
came
feast
(?^
of
in the winter.
Tammuz,
(cf.
Umma
and Jokha
tentatively here.
2
writing
my
former
article.
It
Yol.xxxiii.]
ITU EZIN-BULUK-KtMNINGIR-SU
Eleventh month,
Twelfth month,
Intercalary month,
TA-UB-A-A
ITU BABBAR-MIN-GAL-LA-A
Hymn
Political
Shamash.
to
By
J.
DYNELEY
New York
City.
of
ama$-&um-ukm, the rebellious viceroy and
of the last great Assyrian king ASur-bdni-pal, is of
peculiar interest, because it is more than the ordinary invocation of a king to a god. After the usual praises of the
This
hymn
brother
30:
viz.,
not become a
The
David
had
Myhrman
cuneiform
text
is
published by
Babylonian Hymns and Psalms
without photographic
Plates 22
23,
Semitic-Babylonian
H.
if it
fact.
in
(Philadelphia, 1911),
reproduction. The plates, although mutilated here and there,
are plain enough to indicate the nature of the inscription,
which is couched in fine style, characterized by an abundance
of epithet, giving a literary merit to the production far above
that of the ordinary conventional prayer. The whole hymn
breathes a sincerity entirely natural in view of the special
Obverse.
1 (ra)-bu-u
git-ma-lu a-pil Hi
Samas
Vol. xxxiii.]
-tu
Political
Hymn
to
Shamash.
11
dannu
of
*
.
....
U-ti-kaVu-taq-qu~u
(upon?) thy house the
(eli?)
out (bounteously).
il
Annunald il Igigi v
Annunaki (and) Igigi pour
il
Me um-me
The
righteousness.
(me).
son.
light.
iccur nuri
(XU-CAB)
(?),
lance;
12
J.
Dyneley Prince.
[1913
my
span
20
21
22
house.
(at-taz-}
mat Hi ....
I proclaim the father
the land of ...
23
(my
24
do thou order;
life)
dum-mi-iq
going do thou
my
favor.
Do
26
Reverse
27
Righteously
28
may
I walk;
my
partner
may
I overcome!
In
'
thy
30 daian (DI-KUD)
judge, let
31
33
Me maGoddess Me
favor
34
he
with joy
nil?)
li-iz-ziz
Me
il
/
the
house
of
my
ri-
Goddess
of favor.
lu-(ndk)-Jdr qa-bu-ua
m ^y
32 U Me
me change my command!
ri-Sa-a-tu bit biltuia (BIL-TU-MU)
(
tribute
may
ina damiqtia
may she be strong
li-iz-ziz
for
my
ol.
Political
my
progress
xxxiii.]
The
foot of
power
35
A-A
36
li
Hymn
may
Shamash.
to
make
she
13
perfect
my
for
May
A-A
favor!
they are
destroyed.
38
il
39
il
Barn-Si alu(?)-ka
40
il
Me
il
city
ru-bu-ka
Goddess
41
ri-a-a ri-e-mu
do thou grant mercy!
at-(ta)
Me
thy prince
Me
-lea li-tib-bu
Goddess
be
may thy
GA(?)-TU-LAL
.
42 KA-KA(?)-MA(?)
a prayer
sweet!
il
Sam-Se
Grammatical Commentary
1.
ina
seventh
arxi Bdbbar-ra
in
the
month
8ama&
of
the
Tc&ntum
Ti&ri, which was dedicated to
The form Babbar is a reduplication of Sum. bar,
month,
the sun-god.
the primary meaning of which is 'divide, penetrate' (see
MSL., 53 and cf. below on line 4). The reduplication has
first line
my
its
of the in-
UB-KAL
is
clearly
combination of
KAL =
abkallu
'leader'
kal and
lig
in Semitic,
dannu
from Sum.
UB =
'mighty'.
ab-kal,
is
ff.
na'adu,
'be lofty'
The
and
familiar
probably a
14
/.
Dyneley Prince.
AB =
8ama8
4.
is
[1913
also as a prefix in
here called
il
am
cally,
while Bdbbar
UD =
5.
9,
cf.
24 ff.
ana.
Arnolt, Dictionary,
10; 12.
disregard
suffixes
Note
for
s.
v.
tappu.
the
characteristic Babylonian
indication that these
an
case-endings,
early date.
14.
line
as the
god of plenty,
as in
7.
18.
difficult
the 1 p.
cation.
of safety
for
his worshippers,
and
penetrating power.
19.
XU-CAB =
He
is
iccur
therefore a
nuri 'bird
also
weapon
of
light',-
of defence.
because of his
38,
and
is
also
is
not
Vol. xxxiii.]
26. At-tu,
Political
Hymn
to
Shamash.
15
'be dark,
cloudy
36.
il
A-A
38.
Here again
42.
KA-KA-MA
'incantation,
exorcism'.
We
as this
hymn
testitu 'prayer',
abu 'father as in
Sum. inim-inim-ma
,
expect rather
is
whom
she
ama$.
line 22.
Sem. Siptu
Sum. a-ra-zu
an invocation. GA-TU-LAL
malu 'he full +
GA-TU
malu.
The
following
Hieroglyphic
454
ff.
By
Tablet
Menant 1
dis-
it
little
of writing.
Two
1.
2.
characters at the
The
left.
3
4
Bryn Mawr.
Some Notes on
Vol. xxxiii.]
17
for other
listed
the
and couched
as
is
far
equations
these
assigned
in the phraseology of
unknown
characters
accepted.
As
That
unknown.
a)
and
locality as yet
of certain of the
81727,
fore
is
What
as
as
has
influence
If
so,
E. S. Ogden,
18
Col.
Col.
I.
Cases
3)
4)
The
The
2.
1,
II. Cases
3, 4.
"gTf
IgTf
CaseTs,
case sign
case sign
= ?
- ?
is
RA
is
NAM
is
AB,
(Hinke 113).
(Hinke 37).
The
6.
[1913.
case sign
ES
(Hinke
77).
2
(Rec. 344, 550 bis), abu, father;
r|,
Allied with this
nasiku, prince; sibu, old man.
5) fcfc3T
sign
AB =
is
^r,
littu,
offspring;
mtru, the
young
6)
AB,
AB
E$
house, inclosure.
Col. III. Cases
The case sign
14.
The
sign
ZA =
tions
Later
it
it
(Hinke 206).
b) asu, physician,
a) (is) sigaru,
is
a compound of PIRIK
lion, and
stone, jewel. In the early archaic inscripis
or according to
AZ
restraint.
Langdon 3
(Paris, 1908).
3
(hi).
Some Notes on
Vol. xxxiii.]
"An ointment
The use
is
of
19
AZ =
BAL =
GU =
LAL =
AZ.
a dog.
(is)
(LAL
to yoke).
samddu,
(is)
a synonym of Sigaru.
There
connection between this $igaru
as
is
and iSkaru
GAE
(is)
KAE,
or
probably a
SI.
(is)
GAB,
fetter or chain,
if
scribed.
^^ = ZH
UR
ZA
1)
(?)
\\,
UB.
lion colossus.
(?)
MAH
is
the
MAH
TIE.
is
whereas umu,
labbu,
and
2)
tjfA
(abari)
jfjf,
-(ilu)
form
PIEIK.
NlfflUZ +
ZA
of fetter;
cf.
(Br. 8182).
DAK. NUNUZ. GU
Is this the
The pictograph
mru, yoke
same as erinnu above?
represents a link-chain
plus the
3)
t|A +
NUNUZ + ZA (Eec,
Sigaru, chain or
(is)
|f
^i^jT,
cian.
AZA
fetter.
The pictograph
58.
The
202).
Briinnow,
case sign
is
GIE
Primarily this
is
GIE
(Leyden, 1899).
2*
20
E. Ogden,
S.
[1913.
EF^
d)
Even the
=
=
=
= <^ =
<3> -
a)
<ttzr
KIS
(Jd).
GIR,
sandal, foot.
ANSU,
ass.
PIRIK, UG,
lion.
show interchange
and
^Hr~ -
5)
(H.
W.
AZ
ZA,
<^gr^
6)
this.
<g, GIR
7a5^w,
foot;
(Rec.
224,
step; ga&ru,
226,
$ep tt ,
224),2
supl.
Without
powerful.
syl-
The
equals tallaktu, padanu, urhu.
a
sandal
with
thongs. The
pictograph represents
or
G-IR
G-IR
sakkanakku
expression
labic value
it
NITAH =
and the
association with
emuku
Qjlr^
= NE
(?),
namru, bright,
niiru,
light.
The pictograph
Nusku. 3
the
Its
presence here
confusion
between
accounted for by
is
NE =
and
<(^
A
E=-
^^l|,
8)
<JF="-
fire.
= NE
kinunu, brazier.
(?),
the
2
IV, Cases
1, 2.
The
GUNNI
(?)
For pictograph
NE =
ID
case sign
(Of.
Br. 9703)
see Rec.
176 and
below.
is
BAR,
SI,
SU,
UG-UN
Some Notes on
Vol. xxxiii.]
21
SI-GUNU
this sign. 2
=
-KH?
i)
^|Af,
DAR
(Rec, 34)
SU
(Rec. 48)
-KH1 -
2)
r|4iy
45
Cases
3,
4.
e,
f,
The
The
AS + A +
GA.
seems to be composed of
For a possible connection compare
sign
case sign
is
(Hinke
172),
SAL
8adu, to press.
SU
SUM
Case
5.
(Rec.
59),
ddjddu,
be
plentiful.
List of Signs
Found on
Periods.
2
See E.
S.
p. 26
ff.
22
E.
Cases
Col. I.
46.
(Hinke
S.
The
Ogden.
case sign
zinntetu,
167),
[1913.
is
AL, SAL, MUEUBT
woman; uru, pudendum
=
=
=
4)
5)
6)
(broken).
SAL,
>-,
<{p[,
MUEUB
Cases
The
7, 8.
170)
Jyjg
7)
case sign
~beltu,
SAL +
= JNTN"
KIT
(Hinke
lady, mistress.
NO
Ef,
is
The
case sign is
structure
(Hinke 136)
.Mu, storm-demon; $aru, zakikku, wind.
Idtu,
p. 131);
=
BL =
2)
fpff
3)
LEL,
gfy^f.
HPI
LAL
E LIL
*
(?)
M.
(Br. 6249,
(?)
cf
^^\
.TT
Ut
3799),i
irsiti]
Ut
E LIL
-
seri;
Ut
zakiki.
'
Cases
47.
The
case sign
is
BAE,
DAG
BAE
(Br. 5528)
net; suparruru, to spread out, DAGrapadu, to spread out; naMru and naga$u, to destroy.
= parru,
4)
Jpf
5)
fff^y
= ? BAE
= 5iJ, BAE,
(?)
to spread out.
6)
Jjg[
^|,
DAK
(?), I,
UD =
NA,
The
stone or jewel.
SI,
sign
jg =
Cases
8.
jg|,
The
was originally
pictograph is analogous, NI
ness", or a "shining stone".
7)
ZA
case
GUG,
sign
GUK
is
+ ZA,
NI +
The present
"full of bright-
(?).
iku, canal.
|g
8)
Cases
9, 10.
Langdon,
Vol. xxxiii.]
Some Notes on
f,
"
LAL =
11.
The
23
Case
Ut
E.
LIL,
Ut
irsiti;
case sign
is
fiffirl E. LIL.
Cf.
M.
3799).
258).
UDU
11)
Jig
hand
is
or side,
ZAG =
and of
DA =
idu,
and
side,
it
exchanged.
M^]
3)
^4 N ^
burning torch.
tion
torch;
demon?
^y|^|
For a
It
SE^vf
82
5>
^lf,
name
(sign
G-IBIL
(Br.
9702)
and
KI-IZAKKU)
AZAG-
sickness ?
is
torch burned
4)
GIBIL Rec
^^!>
compare <Y^|
kilutu,
gE^jf
or
ID
(Rec. 115)
idii,
Ep^| =
5)
gunu wedges.
Rec 176 )
|E|E<> ZAG" (
-
emuku, power.
Also a$mi,
P& tu hand
eSretu,
>
shrine.
'
side
'
The
altar
compare
ZAG-AN
(usug)
eSretu
(Br.
Ward,
Gudea, B.
op. tit. p.
3,
3617.
devotee. 2
6499);
GA
light
dull-red
baked
New York
clay-tablets,
each
City.
five
and a
Nr.
Memoranda
month
1.
of
to
date
this time
was Ur.
reverse nine.
The
The obverse
Obverse
BAH
Ten
zid
ud-min-kam
d-uru
ia ka zid kaskal-su
five
i-me-ta Sukkal
for
an-$a-an-ki~$u gin-ni
on going to AnMn.
5
BAR
Ten
ia
zid
ud-min-kam 8d-uru
meal for two days in the
(ka) of
ka zid kaskal-$u
ka of meal on the journey,
five
lu-na-la-a gm-gl$
for
city
at
city,
Vol. xxxiii.]
Three Babylonian
25
sa-bu-um-ki-$u gin-ni
on going to Sabum.
ka zid lugal-ma-gur-ri Sukkal
Five ka of meal for Lugalmagurri the messenger,
ia
10 nand-erin-ki-ta gin-ni
coming from Susa.
BAE
Ten
(ka) of
meal
for
city,
Reverse
ia
ka zid kaskal-su
ka of meal on the journey,
five
i-ti-da
Sukkal
on going to $imd$.
15 ia ka zid dingir-ra-ne sukkal
a-dam-dun-ki-ta gin-ni
The month
The
equals
first
'ten',
of Simanu.
BAE
BAE
and KIT.
BAE
with ka
Here ka must
The
duties
of
Sukkal
(LAH),
equal
to
sukattu,
also
called lu"h, were more than those of merely bearing a message; they were doubtless administrative and representative.
This is confirmed by such expressions as the following which
F- A. Vanderlurgh,
26
[1913.
^am
is
Nr.
Memoranda
the month
for
in
to
is
AnSan.
old Babylonian;
2.
Aim
of
is
also
The nature
not divulged.
-Their
consumed by
Sabum, as well as
of wine
of the mission
of
fact that they are offiobverse contains thirteen lines and the reverse nine,
The
cials.
made with a
clear,
although
fine stylus.
Obverse
ia ka ~ka$
Five ka of wine,
$U"dingir-nin-$td Sukkal
for $u-nin8ul the messenger,
ia
five ~ka of
nand-erin-ki-ta gin-ni
coming from Susa.
BAH
Ten
JcaS
$a-uru
for
premiere
Three Babylonian
Vol.xxxiii.]
27
ka of wine
ka of wine
dumu nu-banda
10 sa-bu-um-ki-ta gin-ni
BAR
Ten
(ka) of
city,
Reverse
DI
ka$ sd-uru
15
DI&-AS
ninety
(?)
ka$ kaskal-su
(ka) of
nim an-$d-an-ki-me
for the ruler of the AnSdnites,
an-d-an-ki-8u gin-ni
going to AnSdn.
ia ka ka$ i-sar-ba-kal $ukkal
Five ka of wine for Isarbakal the messenger,
20 ia ka ka$ ba-ba-a
ka of wine
five
dumu nu-banda
for
Babd the
junior overseer,
nand-erin-ki-ta gin-ni
coming from Susa.
itu
gan-ma$
The month
of Airu.
is
a,
'weighing-man'; here
(TU)-^ (ITS)
1
in
Nr.
Tablet
simply gm-gi$.
gal]
3.
gl
ka
gin
we have gm-
F. A. Vanderburgh,
28
6.
One
[1913.
ka$ (BI);
plain
other
the
this Tablet.
The
sa-plant,
made, may
fibre with which ropes were made,
the word being connected with sa used for 'net'.
'man of wooden weapon'; the value
7. lu-gi
(IZ) -ku
in this connection, I must say, is not determined. In
of
is
KU
the
14. If
the sign
DIS
if it
stands for
stands for
nim an-$a-an-ki me
'one', it
'sixty',
16.
saku
me
i.
17. gir
for
sepu
whom we
also
'foot';
emuku
'power'; then
an
official,
this officer
seems
a nu-banda\
22.
in
The month
the Tablet
Babylonian.
ting
itu
Memoranda
oil
itu
is
gud-si-di
'direc-
bull'.
and
also
for ihe
of
3.
month
women
and Susa.
lines
twelve.
is
left side.
Obverse
DIS
Sixty
ka$ du lugal
(?)
(ka) of best
common
wine,
Three Babylonian
Vol. xxxiii.]
DIS
u-ba-apa-te-si a-dam-dun-ki
for Uba patesi of Adamdun,
a-dam-dun-ki-ta gin-ni
PA
ka$
Twenty
BAB-ww
ka zid
oil for
four days,
who
ia ka ka$ es ka gar
Five ka of wine, three ka of food.
Reverse
10
I S d-gam ni $d-uru
sixty (?) vessels of oil in the
city,
kaskal-u
on the journey,
dingir-ma-su $ukkal
for Dingirmasu the messenger,
nand-erin-ki-su gin-ni
going to Susa.
DIS
a-gam ni-gi$
sixty (?) vessels of
oil,
i$-me-a lu-kabar
for
I$mea an
official;
food,
29
F. A. Vanderburgh,
30
[1913.
oil
(per diem),
ne-ra a$ ag hu-hu-nu-ri-Jd
me
20 lu i$-me-a lu-kabar
for
l$mea an
official,
Im-hu-nu-ri-Jci-ta- gin-ni
two ways
are
and
'Ten', 'twenty'
represented
'thirty'
by the use of the upright and one, two or three horizontals
5.
to be represented in
in these Tablets.
val.
line 18,
val.
BAK =
thus,
respectively;
and
ni$',
the
AS
'ten',
'thirty'
=
=
PA =
val.
w;
val.
eSu.
is
used;
'twenty',
Down
ES
below,
'thirty'
eu.
6.
a (ID) -gam
'vessel'
some
of
sort,
gam
itself
being
equal to kipattu.
16. ni-gi$
'oil
of
wood'.
In
lines
six
and ten
gis
is
omitted.
d$ a
the line
is
Month
written in the
Assyrian ideogram
is
itu gan-gan-na.
Three Babylonian
Vol.xxxiii/j
Cities
Tablets,
31
as
lizes
king of Ur,
Laga$.
calls
himself patesi
Shushan
sources
we
of
Mimas'.
of Ur, de-
stroyed by Bur-sin.
Adamdun.
From
certain tablets
we
learn that
Adamdun
was a
Date of
the Tablets
2
3
4
5
in
the
time of Sargon
I:
ezin gan-ma$,
S. 99.
PL
7;
32
[1913.
instead of simply gan-ma$, and the third month ezin gud-dune-sar-sar, and not simply gud-du-ne-sar-sar, as in the DynasThe name of the ninth nonth was written ezin
ties of Ur.
:
of cities
supreme
at
Ur.
when Dungi,
or
The Oath
in Cuneiform Inscriptions.
A. B. MERGER, Professor in Western
Seminary,
i.
By SAMUEL
Theological
Chicago, HI.
The Oath
in
Sumerian Inscriptions
1
.
Sumerian
We
we
an abundance, as Langdon's
Sumerian and Babylonian Psalms well demonstrate. In this
later class of Sumerian literature no indication of the taking
of an oath has thus far been found, and even if there should
be found such an indication it would not help us in the study
of the growth of oath-taking, since obviously the same reference may have in mind different incidents. We shall, therefore, confine our study to oaths found in commercial and
of such
literature
possess
historical inscriptions.
ments,
yet they
research, since most of
in their
action.
often
rulers either
date formula, or as parties interested in the transThose documents which are primarily historical we
shall study later, but shall now confine our attention to contract or commercial literature.
Tablettes de
d' Assyriologie,
RTC. Recueil de
t
ZA. Zeit-
I.
34
S.
The very
A. B. Mercer,
[1913.
known Sumerian
for
BA
approach
ETC
12
15,
to this
13
of sale
have,
lit.,
as
it
Nos.
place).
besides
the
RTC
See
Sumerian
2
S.
p.
if.
for
RTC
full
list
of
literature.
to this period,
namely
11,
contain no
mention of witnesses.
3
compound
Transliterated and
Sprechsaal,
translated
by
S.
Langdon
p.
205
ff.
in
ZA XXV. 12,
Vol.xxxiii.J
which
also
contains
evidence
the
of
35
Inscriptions.
presence
of witnesses
On
King
of kis, contem-
Face
action
took
place
before (pan) La-mu-um priest of Za-Malof Kis", which would be in the temple of
of
See p.
34, n. 4.
Compare
examples in the
3*
S.
36
A. B. Mercer,
[1913.
naturally
and
all
come from
we meet with
are often given. Further, there are other contracts that are
merely sealed, while still others are drawn up in the temple
of a deity
g.
(e.
RA
VIII, Nr.
1,
As such contracts
ki, E. d.-Nin-mar-ki-ka).
not deem it necessary to name them, but
are
many
I shall
shall confine
my
Following are
all
will
contain an oath.
It
is
also
This
come
from the same place. There are a few whose dates either are
not given or are defaced, but we are pretty certain that they
belong to the same dynasty since they were found in the same
place and bear the same marks of composition and arrangment
name of the
Hammurabi
This
the
During
this
king.
early
is
period such
either
The Oath
Vol.xxxiii.]
there
is
in
no invocation at
all,
or merely the
name
is
invoked.
I.
22772219
Reign of Dungi
ITT
1.
five different
which
slave,
This
923*. 1
is
transactions:
is
37
Cuneiform Inscriptions.
1.
of the king
invocation.
B. C.
containing an account of
confirmation of the sale of a
tablet
sworn to (nam-erim-am 2
is")
An
act of repudia3.
guilty in the presence of the assessor.
tion on the taking of an oath (nam-erim-am), before the
4.
Then
the assessor.
follows the
who seems
Then comes,
name
pa-te-si)
to
suits.
as
is
for the
above
five
my
note
it
5
or curse and, when used in the oath
indicated
that
curse which would fall upon the performula,
idea
of malediction
12
Genouillac in
d'Ur".
2 For a technical discussion of this word see
my Inaugural Dissertation,
The Oath in Babylonian and Assyrian Literature, Munich 1911, p. 26 f.,
which will soon be published by P. Geuthner, Paris, with an Appendix
by F. Hommel.
3
See,
for
full
for
many
name
as the
5
later
it
does in
this tablet
In
38
8.
A. B. Mercer,
[1913.
jurer.
the contestants in a dispute the truth under penalty of malediction 1 and when the name of the king was invoked it was
done with the purpose of making the oath more solemn and
,
its
preservation.
The
oath formula from that of the earlier tablets. First, the names
of the parties to the contract are given; secondly, the object
and nature of the transaction are noted; thirdly, the mention
of any extra incidents connected with the transactions; fourthly,
ITT
936*.
details
is
first
dealing
the second
is
(ba-na[gi-in])
interesting
before
because
an
its
ETC
formal
oath occurs.
seemingly without definite cause repudiates his wife before conThe oath (nam-erim-am) is taken
summation of marriage.
before the assessors,
Ur
Lama
RTC
291 f.2
Galu-duga
fails
to
pay Atud
for a
slave
F, Pelagaud,
Babyloniaca III,
The Oath
Vol. xxxiii.]
39
in Cuneiform Inscriptions.
which he has received from him, but Atud receives in compensation one of Galu-duga's own slaves. Alia son of Galuduga and another person take an oath (nam-erim-am) evidently
that the slave for compensation would be given to Atud. The
.
oath
the
is
The
patesi.
date
is
that
Ur d -Lama
when
Bur-Sin
year
is
is
that
complained
An
transaction.
ITT
752*.
The
transactions.
Ur
ITT
of a girl
Lama
830*.
of the sale
is
property. The tablet has been broken at the end of the first
transaction but we can be tolerably sure that an oath was
taken as in the other two, each of which has nam-erim-am
before the assessor.
(di-kud)
It
is
who seems
lated
2
Tar
is
better
In any case
40
8.
A. B. Mercer,
[1913.
d
the
6.
ITT
taken to
an
3516.
court
assessor
This
is
case
and an oath
is
is
of seizure.
The matter is
taken (nam-erim-am) before
confirmed.
Reign of Gimil-Sin.
certain
is
ratified
man
Pel.
house and a
is
present.
Pel.
ETC
Two
An
is
295 f.
is
taken
(nam-erim-l)i in-tar).
4.
ITT
An
judge.
5.
ITT
746*.
The
testimony, as
it
seems,
contested, but the- purchaser on presenting a superior
testimony takes an oath (nam-erim-am) before an assessor and
is
is
ended.
ITT 733*.
dispute about a cloak in which an oath
taken (nam-erim-bi in-tar) by the slave that he did not
6.
is
It is interesting to
give the cloak to the man who stole it.
that the oath was taken in the temple of Ninmarki
(E-d. Nin-mar-M-ka) before an assessor. Relatives of the inter-
note
la
prem. dynastie",
RA
VII.
2, p.
65
ff.
The Oath
Vol.xxxiii.]
41
in Cuneiform Inscriptions.
ITT
929*.
2802.
in
8.
ITT
badly broken.
An
oath
is
is
of witnesses.
9. ITT
3542.
Another badly broken purchase contract
which contains an oath ([n]am-erim-bi i[n-t]ar) and witnesses.
Reign of Ibi-Sin.
1. ITT 920*.
house was given to Ud-id-da by the patesi
which he gives away by contract. Ud-id-da desires it back,
arguing that he had no right to give away such a gift.
magistrate takes an oath (nam-erim-bi in-tar) that Ud-id-da
had given away the house. The man who received the house
together with a witness also takes an oath (nam-erim-bi ib-tar).
There were two assessors, three
Ud-id-da loses the case.
three
and
judges,
personally named witnesses.
Undated.
It
Ur d
priest (sangu).
2. ETC 294 f.
This tablet contains a sworn receipt for the
payment of a slave. An oath was taken (nam-erim-bi tar-dam)
that the slave was received. Witnesses are mentioned by name,
Cf.
above
Cf.
ITT
p.
40 note
960* p. 47.
1.
42
S.
and an
Pel.
3.
There
assessor.
no oath
tablet but
XY
A. B. Mercer,
is
an additional
affair
on the same
taken.
VI)
(PI.
is
[1913.
XVI.
document
an oath. The varying
forms of the expression of swearing are: nam-ne-ru-am (twice)j
and nam-ne-ru (seven times).
4. Viroll.
Compt.
which nine
in
mutilated business
5. ITT 1010*.
very imperfectly preserved text. It seems
that a previous judicial decision is changed by the authority
of a patesi, tJr- d -Lama.
An oath is taken (nam-erim-li inand
are
witnesses
present.
Although there is no
[tar]),
evidence
Lama would
by that name,
to conclude that
it
Those contracts
II.
in
of the
king
is
invoked.
Reign of Dungi.
RTC
1.
289 f.
who
her
case
case
in the
presents
interested persons, perhaps the witnesses, take
(nam-erim-am), but it is not at all sure that the
Two
an oath
swearer
The
oath.
transaction took
will
place
before
an assessor and
patesi.
Myhr. IV
An
fails to
The
Comptabilite Chaldeenne, par Ch. Virolleaud, Poitiers, 1903.
author has not published the text of this tablet. He gives a trans1
literation
See above
p.
38
Tello
and
is
preserved in the
f.
and
direct
so,
statement comes
may
The Oath
Vol.xxxiii.]
43
in Cuneiform Inscriptions.
fact that
the oath
is
sworn by invoking
name
the name
the
in
nesses.
Reign of
Bur -Sin.
1.
3,
No.
4).
king he swore").
2.
Myhr.
day a
cific
bi
The name of
name of the
The name of the king is invoked (mu lugal"by the name king he has sworn"). "Witnesses
loan.
ni-pad-da,
are present.
3. Myhr. YII
An agent buys a palm
(PL 8, No. 14).
grove for his patron. The agent and the seller, so it seems,
- ratify the transaction by taking an oath ([i]n?
[pad?])
before the royal judge.
Then another oath is taken by the
name
4.
of the king
'Myhr. PL
silver in
(mu
10,
No.
which a receipt
18.
is
5.
PL Y, No.
22.
commercial
trans-
This is an important dotwo chief reasons: first; it shows that the legal
literary form known in Nippur and its suburbs (for Drehem,
where it was found, the Sumerian name of which has not yet
been identified, is such a suburb) was the same as that used in
Lagash and Ur. Secondly; its interesting date formula and the
mention of the city of Ur show us that while the account was
the
cument
It
for
p. 42;
below
RTC
293,
is
present.
below
p.
44;
ITT
932,
below
p.
45;
and ITT
960,
p. 47.
called in
Modern Arabic
44
S. A.
B. Mercer,
[1913.
drawn up and
city,
Enlil of
recognized in Ur.
cument and because
On
it
lated,
Obv.
XX
2.
XXI
3.
U-tud-da
U-tud-da
4.
Ur- d -Dumi-zi-da
Ur- d -Dum-zi-da
and Nu-ur-i-li
5.
20 kids
sil-ga
21 female kids.
sal-sil-ga
u Nu-ur-i-U
Rev.
1.
mu
lugal-U in-pad-da
Month
3. itu Su-e$-$a
mu
4.
Uru-ab-ki-ma
2. sag
dim
of Su-es-sa,
the construction of the
of
year
throne of Enlil.
RTC
actions.
293 f.
In the
first
ETC
(mu
p. 43,
1
note
1).
3.
Vol.xxxiii.]
XXI.
45
Inscriptions.
Pel.
The second
is
marki-ka
is
The sentence
a personal name.
runs:
Mud -Nin-
mu
Notice
goddess.
firms that.
3.
to be
is
The presence
of witnesses
Myhr. II
An
office.
is
of the
(PI. 2,
oath
and dating
this.
Myhr.
VI
(PI. 6,
No.
13).
a loan or investment.
time
Oath
(mu-lugal in-pad).
as such.
them.
6.
ITT
932*.
law-suit in
which a complaint
is
addressed
the
to
46
A. B. Mercer,
8.
[1913.
is
badly perserved.
ITT
8.
an oath
3470.
is
before witnesses.
ITT
9.
Another case of
3523.
is
seizure,
as
ITT
name
3516, but
of the king
complaint
(mu
ITT
12.
3538.
business
transaction
concerning
real
the
certain
The
dynasty.
Sumerian form
interesting
giStag,
Semitic
occurs in Obv.
1.
6 which
is
its
used so
Hammurabi
well mean, as
ZA XXV, 12,
18.
Vol.xxxiii.]
The Oath
in Cuneiform Inscriptions.
15.
name
of the king
47
is
is
Reign of Ibi-Sin.
1. Gen. Dreh. 5539.
dispute about cows which is settled,
and an oath by the name of the king is taken (mu lugal-bi in-
before witnesses.
*? Gen.
2.
nesses
Dreh. 5540.
loan negotiated in presence of witby taking an oath by the name of the king (mu lugal-
bi in-pad).
Pel.
XIX
of a park.
hrase
mu
(PL VII)
The
condition of transaction
lugal,
off.
but no more
direct
is
introduced by the
of an oath
evidence
3. ITT 931*.
law-suit concerning a man's right to take
concubine in case of the barrenness of his wife. The text
it
Face
1.
Cf. p.
40 No.
6.
48
8.
A. B. Mercer,
[1913.
Among
the
many
to
period previous
historical
the
inscriptions
belonging to the
is
to
who
See
p. 42, n. 3..
variations of the
ni-tar-ra,
the holy
number
of swearing.
The Oath
Vol. xxxiii.]
49
in Cuneiform Inscriptions.
period commercial literature has shown a progressive development in the method of oath-taking. In transactions of the earliest periods no oath is recorded.
This was
this
During
due,
the idea
of
tablets
fairly
ETC
however, evident.
is,
very word
religious
for
witness,
as
we have seen
Ur-Ninan period
Susa) there
is
still
no expression of an oath, at
least in con-
The
transaction
is
also referred to
the
and
but,
two
where a simple oath is sworn: and secondly, where
an oath is taken by invoking the name of the king. Here
also the oath was sometimes taken in a specific place.
The only historical inscription representing the whole
Sumerian period which contains an oath belongs to the dynasty
of Ur-Nina, and the reign of Eannatum king of Lagash
c. 2900 B. C.
Here we see the oath in a form which is not
found in any commercial literature of the Sumerian period,
but which is common in both historical and commercial inscripforms;
first,
tions
which
VOL
of later
is
times.
the
XXXIII. Part
of
I.
50
S.
A. B. Mercer,
The Oath
was pronounced. Here we have the older form, the maledicand its successor, the oath, side by side in an important
tion,
transaction.
As
Although in very
more
prevalent.
late
On Mayavada, by HERMANN
University of Bonn,
In
Germany.
my
last article
now
schools
way
in the
here
of
we
are concerned
Badarayana
(B. S.
as illustrated
see
JAOS.
31. Iff.
2 Anandasrama
An English translation of ---the text
Series, No. 10.
and Commentary has been issued in India; but the book has not been
accessible to me.
4*
Hermann
52
Jacoby,
[1913.
1
The chronological relation between Badaraby Gaudapada.
and
Gaudapada will be discussed hereafter; for the
yana
present
we have
Gaudapada
to
deal
as far as
is,
with
his
we know, the
philosophical
first
author
opinions.
who
for-
argument
Sankara 2
in II
is
in
untrue:
a dream
are 'seen'
this
is
differ
and are
'untrue'."
And
to establish the
1 I
fully concur with Mr. Barnet in his review of Max Walleser, Zur
Geschichte und Kritik des alteren Vedanta (Heidelberg 1910) in JRAS
1910 that Gaudapada is the" name of the author and that it has not
Nyaya
principles.
On Mayavada.
Vol. xxxiii.]
53
is
with
acquainted
the
unyavada
the
or
The answer
The opponent,
things.
is
in
karikas
25
27,
shows
un-
the
reasonableness of assuming objects existing beside and independent of ideas (prajnapti, citta). This refutation is, as the
commentator
tells
us,
Yijnanavadin school,
who combat
'
more
decision of the
Yedantin
(citta)
still
final
does not
originate, nor does the object of the idea originate; those who
pretend to recognise the originating of ideas, may as well
recognise the trace (of birds) in the air". For here the fundamental doctrine of the Yijnanavadins, which admits only a
to the
Sunyavada
only,
as
I hope
have established
to
former
in
by Dr. Walleser on the ground that the Gauda^padlya Karikas only are quoted in ancient Buddhist books
as an authority on Yedanta philosophy.
Even in case this
troverted
alleged
1.
c.
a point
p. 23.
would not
of
quotations,
at least of
Yedanta philosophy.
an
And
outsider,
besides
to
the
Hermann
54
On Mayavada.
Jacobi,
[191
Buddhists
the
as
they could not well have ignored the Gaudapadl, since that
work taught a philosophy which resembled their own in many
regards.
or
Yijnanavadins
Mayavada on
the
other;
on
2.
one
the
side
and
of
Gaudapada's
The probable
history of the
originally the doctrine
Mayavada may be
briefly
some school of Aupanisadas, it became an orthodox philosophy, when it had successfully been made the basis of interpretation of the Brahma
sutras, already by earlier writers and finally by the great
ankara. For the two Mimamsas are the preeminently orthodox systems; but we should never lose sight of the fact that
they are originally and ..primarily systems of the Exegesis of
the Revelation, the Purva Mlmamsa of the Revelation as far
as it is concerned with sacrifice (karmakdnda), and the Uttara
Mlmamsa with regard to Brahma. These two schools of
described:
of
Haribhadra, Saddarsanasamuccaya v.
p. 661 ff. see above vol. 31,
JRAS 1910 p. 128 ff.
pancS Katha
2
s
WZKM
vol. 22, p.
136
ff.
see also
3; Siddharsi,
p.
above
6 note
Upamitibhavapra-
3,
vol. 31, p. 8,
note
1.
By
E.
W.
The phonetic
forms
is
consonant.
The
mountain
affinity
caves,
ure connected with the god of luck, finally the mystery and
these need only to be mentioned to
revelling of the Kabeiros
But
be recalled.
as for Kabairas
or
Kuberas, w ho would
r
The
fact
is,
when
April, 1912.
Athens.
E. W. Hopkins,
56
[1913.
Thus the
traits
Kuhera
for earlier
and
is
guhera, godhera, kathera, kutera, gadera, gudera, etc., a formation which begins early and till late remains active enough
to
Yet the
-era
words stand in
-eru forms, and these again (maderu, saneru, etc.) are merely
variants of older or perhaps more elegant forms in -ara, -aru,
and -ru (cf. patera
patara
pataru; also satera
satni).
to the
T/3i0vceX&
is doubtless a
phallic conception parallel
&avov of Theocritus.
Vol. xxxiii.]
57
But
if
deserves.
no more than he
His name
dansera from dam, guhera from
it
is
little fellow.
gull, etc.),
may
of cover, of
hiding.
(guh, "hide"), allied etymologically again with guhera
as "blacksmith", with that association of smith and secrecy
seen in the case of the Kabirs and other gnomes. Our Kubera
spirit
Guhyaka
is
patara
"flyer", bird) to
and
waterfall.
Nala
is
identical with
or water-sprite
(cf. nalind)
the place of water (spirits). 2
Narayana means
The form Kaubera is used
Nalasetu).
(cf.
Kubera or
drama concerned with his
daughter-in-law (Rambhabhisara, H. 8694), but not of his son
of the followers of
(as patronymic).
1
is
It is
E. W. Hopkins,
58
[1913.
He is
assigns him a nymph-mother called Ilavila.
the
who
hide
lord
of
in
treasure
spirits
primarily
(and find)
the mountains. The one son he has lives with him in the
literature,
Kubera and
by
own
his
appears
in
underling,
as
full
Mani-
(or
Mani-) bhadra
(or -vara),
name
and
people",
who
also
first
of
This epithet
to
iva
iva
is
is
and Kubera).
Cf.
Guha
to
Kubera
as son of
(cf.
iva.
trisirsan
probably at
and
trisiras,
Vol. xxxiii.]
the Atharva
Veda and
59
variant forms. 1
AY.
8, 10, 28, so
Mbha.
7,
69, 24:
'sid
Virdt,
vrsadhvajah
in SI. text, cd
''sit
Kuberakah).
Harivansa, 382 f.:
Yaksdis ca sruyate rdjan punar dugdhd vasumdhard,
(v.
hyakas
invoked
together
Prosperity,
who
and
is
especially
1
Here and in the following I omit the macron over
written in Sanskrit words.
e,
not usually
60
E. W. Hopkins,
[1913.
with the idea that she is really Kubera's wife, as was actually
imagined in post-epic literature despite Visnu's claim upon
the lady. When a man marries and when a man digs for
treasure, he makes offerings to Kubera as the spirit of good
luck and prosperity in general. But the adoration of Kubera
and the offerings made to him were regularly similar to those
offered to his coadjutor the Jewel-spirit; though once identified
with
those
epic hero
Kubera
The view
head,
is
is
offered
to
a recognized
god,
In the epic he
historical facts.
is
is
He is always a
one
of
that
Gruhyaka "hiding-spirit",
spirit-clan to which are
dubious
such
as
animals and plants of
characters,
assigned
recognized spirit-power, and in particular the half-gods or
half-divine dioscuroi twins (Avins), though later (Puranic)
tradition asserts definitely enough that Kubera, together with
his follower Nandlsvara (also the name of Siva's follower and
was a "god with human nature", manusyawhich there is no basis at all in the early texts.
One may assume that all demoniac forms were "degraded
tribes" of Hindus; but this opens up a question similar to
that as to the interpretation of European fairies as wild
men, etc. One might say that the Sabalas are wild demoniac
mountaineers and that Kuberas and Sabalas (k
s, r
1)
were originally one (cf. kimidms and simidas as demons); but
that would be guess-work and after all would not help us to
determine what the epic Hindus thought of Kubera. Both
epics state plainly that Kubera was not at first a god; but
godhood was given to him as a special boon.
of Siva himself),
prakrti, for
and the
that
is
Vol. xxxiii.]
61
beings
own
aeroplane,
And
yet
gods, seers,
angels,
and
etc.,
Kubera has
his
which was
especially presented to him by the Creator, and which has
the reputation of being the fastest car on the road of spirits.
very
large
roomy
car,
stepping
it,
car,
is
the
poet
calls
is overcome if
which comes vahana is used of the spirits called G-uhyakas
as "carriers" of Kubera's car.
"By the G-uhyakas", it is said,
"is carried, uhyamanam, the car of Kubera".
In other words,
as explained above, the Naras are spirits, and Kubera's car is
harnessed by spirits, sometimes described as Guhyakas and
sometimes as mysterious horse-like birds or bird-like horses,
absurdity
who
the
are
is
called
not
Gandharvas
much doubt
now named).
E. W. Hopkins,
62
but
not
quite
man
is
[1913.
identical
like the
greedy
got only by scaling cliffs,
of cliff-caves, the bees build.
to
steal
the
jar in a cave,
buried underground
is
to this day.
"Kubera's
is called
Kubera",
i.
e.
gold.
see;
64, 18
into pyrites;
though
and it
it
is
Vol. xxxiii.]
63
The moly
"Kubera's Gold",
Another mark
(of
if it
of
Hermes) may
also
be compared with
Kubera
is
his interest,
almost a foregone conclusion, since it is Kubera who possthe mountain-top on which the playground is found.
But the only play known to the gods is the dance, and this is
the real meaning of d-krida (krld "play" is really the same
is
esses
with kurd, "leap, play, dance"; cf. Grk. kordax). The akridabhumi, "ground for dancing", is also said to belong to the
spirits who especially act as attendants of Kubera, probably
the
spirits
of dancing waters.
One of Kubera's spritelike
is his trick of keeping spellbound a chance
characteristics
visitor
from,
the
earth,
who
is
travelling
through the
hill-
At
lasts,
passage
of time.
gdndharvah) and
As he
is
lets
departs,
Kubera
but because he
is
rather a
Guyaka than a
he
conceals
E. W. Hopkins,
64
[1913.
theless,
Kubera has
one of the regents of the constellation under which a successsearch for treasure may be prosecuted is the Serpent of
the Depth, Ahi Budhnya, and the treasure is found through
the combined aid of Agni and Kubera. 1
ful
The
king
serpents.
Likeness
also
in India, stolen
illustrates
the
by the
connection
cealing"
Kubera himself
is
the
gold
first
of the
and
possibly represented
to
likely
Vol. xxxiii.J
65
Hermes, and except for his association with Wind and Fire,
Kubera has no likeness with Hephaistos.
The luck-function of Kubera and his kind stands of course
in
attribute of
on
it,
that
is,
but
at will;
also,
of
his
birth
is
his
own
grandfather,
complete
Both
in
the
Veda and
It
is
a later
tradition
(still
Yeda, "the Fathers (ghosts) and the good people" are distinguished from each other, as both together are distinguished
from the gods (AY. 8, 8, 15, etc.). Exactly so in the Great
GuhydJi pitrganali sapta, "G-uhyakas and the seven
groups of Fathers" (3, 3, 43) are differentiated, as in another
passage (7, 69, 10 f.) "the seven seers, the good people and the
Epic,
rarely leave
the
of gods
host
hills, though they occassonally join
and
admire
a
watch
conflict
who
and
demons, Fathers,
spirits
Fathers".
as messengers,
their
is
of heaven,
saints
I.
E. W. Hopkins,
66
that
the Guhyakas,
are earth-goblins,
sprites.
of
[1913.
whom Kubera
is
chief,
who belong
or
to
this
and not
go to the land of the peace-loving (not martial) Hyperboreans (Northern Kurus). Kubera's own world, in the formal
enumeration of all possible worlds of spirits and gods, stands
almost at the bottom of the
list,
than the world of Death (Yama), which of course is underground. It is thus located far below the world of the real
gods and turns out on examination to be in fact nothing
save the mountain-region round the upper reaches of the
fact
Ganges
(his
the North", became thus exalted ever with the clear understanding that divinity was given him because he "clove to
the Father-god" and was virtuous, instead of siding with his
brothers, the Raksa-giants, who strove against the gods.
Kubera changes his form but once. That is when the gods
may be due
to confusion
Of. the
10, 89.
especially
Vol. xxxiii.]
since
67
Kubera seems
being that
Yama
of
Kubera.
He
who
so incorporated themselves.
But later
great
he was assigned a son, on earth, as were the other gods,
because he was then risen to the position of guardian god.
the
devas
mean
to
Hermes stands
"charming").
nymphs", Rambha, who was turned into a rock, like Niobe, for
certain indiscretions less innocent than those of her Hellenic
suffering.
The
attention
lower
paid
in
the
marked contrast
to the indifference
mythology
displayed toward this most valuable survival of antiquity
both in Greek epic poetry and in earlier Brahmanic poetry
with the exception of the Atharva Veda. Elsewhere we pick
up as we can what the poet has unconsiciously let fall. Here
we
is
find
in
itself
presented as worthy of
Thus Kubera
regard.
the
place.
I have
attendant
of Siva have
names
E. W. Hopkins,
68
[1913.
At one
while at another,
a sort of Kurhaus),
is
one
is
is
said to "obtain
even "the
ill
travelling merchants,
in Buddhist stories.
It will be
shrines.
remembered
in the tale of
and then, when he finds she is only human, concludes with the prayer, "Manibhadra, king of Yaksas, have
mercy upon us". This "JeweF'-spirit shares with Kubera the
us weal"
title
Yaksas
as
well
of this
spirits
gradual
as
ilk,
evolution
the lord of
yet
into
all
an illustration of his
For
god.
example, the technical
of Kimnaras" is not actually given
this
is
simply
Kimnaresvara, "lord
till a later
period than that in which he
(informally) master of these spirits, just as he
title,
to
him
called
a god
he
made
is
is
is
spoken of as
not actually
lord of Gruhaykas andRaksasas, spirits "concealing" and "guarding" (also "injuring"). From this point, with the advance in
trade
and
exploration,
Kubera
rises
to
be lord of
all
the
It is
disposed,
When
may
Vol. xxxiii.]
69
When he
he
becomes
the
point
inevitably
gets
"god of the
North" though still by grace of Siva, his friend and over-lord.
Rubensohn, in his Mysterienheiligtumer in Eleusis und
Samothrake, after saying very reasonably that both names
and number of the Kabeiroi are still quite doubtful, suggests
and
fairies
spirits
that
to
may
their
(p. 128).
home
in
because
the
these
because they
survive at
all,
attachment to Rhea
that of the
is
is
part
identical
with Kubera's.
Yittada,
Yasuda
1
,
Pingaksl,
"lord
of beings"
(spirits),
Kubera (= Kabairas)
is
spirit,
trove,
and
who
whose
is
i
Vasuda is also "earth". Parallel forms are Yasudhara, Yasudhara,
Yasumdhara, of which the first is one of the names given later to
all
70
productivity
genius invoked
(as
whose Guhya-name
"for the
man"
[1913.
in marriage),
reflected in the guhera, "smith", lohaas near a counterpart to the Greek Kabeiros as
is
ghataka, is
could be wished.
"great
than the epics shows that the "servants of Kubera" were particularly annoying to children, and these must have been housespirits who plagued children (as described in Hiran. GS. 2, 1, 3, 7;
not included in the list at Parask. GS. 1, 16, 23), as did Diva's
evil mother-spirits.
That Kubera
is
not
If
iva
had been
as non-local as
formed, perhaps kubja (see above), "bent", with too few teeth
and too many legs. Then, instead of referring Kubera to
kul), the wise men invented the word vera, gave it the meaning
ugliness,
gnome.
His later
title,
his character as
"Lord
of Love",
is
a Peeping Tom, or
connected with his
attributes
is
Atliarvaprayascittani.
of Kcenigsberg,
University
Germany.
Om
namo 'tharvavedaya *
atha
karinani praya3
sarvatra
punah kavyakhyasyamo vidhy-aparadhe
krtvo 'ttaratah prayascittam prayascittam va krtvo 'ttara||
ryam 4
'to yajfie
2
scittani
tah samadhanam 4 yat purvam prayascittam karoti grhaih pasubhir evai 'nam samardhayati yad uttaratah svargenai 5 'vai 'nam 5
tal lokena samardhayati 6
katham 7 agmn adhaya 'nvaharya
1
B om namo
namah
und fiigt
om namo
brahmavcdaya C
ganesaya
atharvavedaya
||
25. 1. Ifolg.
karmopapate
yaradhe; dafiir setzt K.
hinzu: sa ca catuhprakaro bhavati akaranam nyunakaranam
s
atiriktakaranam ayathakaranam ce ti; Asv. Pray. Ib: ... srautaprayasci2
||
^rautaprayascittaanyatha-karane ca bhavanti
srauta-karmasu bhrama- pramadabhyam akaranasya 'nyathaM
karanasya va sambhavitatvena karmanam asamgatva- pattisamkaya lokanam
ttani
candrika
vihita-'karane
1. 1
apravrtter asakya-'nustbana-laksanam apramanyam prasajyeta ato 'karana'nyathakarana-dosa-dustany api karmani krta-prayascittani samgani bhavamti ti karma-nirvahakani prayascittany ucyamte
yatha "hur acaryasa ca 'py akaranad bhavet
anyatbapadah
prayo vinasa-paryayah
|
karanad va
[pi]
samadhanam
s.
3 B
Anm. 6.
5 C
svagnam
B karyam krtvo
Nach K. 6. 25. 1.
sarva
6
'ttaratah
1
sollen
rituelle
karttavyam tan na 'sti ced vyahrtihomah karttavyah kalas tu prayascittanam nimitta-'nantaram rsta-'bhave pratinidhih dazu Comm.: mukhyasya 'bhave pratinidhir upadatavya eva pratinidhih sadrsah ajya-payasoh
j
parasparam pratinidhitvam
vastv-alabhe tu
grahyam
Brahm.
7.
12. 4.
tadrsa-yathoktayathaha kaumdinyah
tad-anukari yad yava-'bhave tu godhuma (!)
|
iti
manuh
(corrupt!).
Vgl. Ait.
72
J. v.
Negelein,
[1913.
9
9
rapanam aharet katham iti prana va ete 9 yajamanasya
10
tesu
mitesu
daksinagnav
'dhyatmam nidhlyante yad agnayas
|
10
juhuyad agnaye 'nnadaya 'nnapataye svahe 'ti kaajyahutim
tham agnin adhaya pravasati 11 yathai 'n&n 12 na virodhayed l3
14 sasvad 14 brahman
anigamo bhavati pranan va eso
api ha
|
'nucaran
15
krtvS carati yo
gnm adhaya
17
prosya vo 'patistheta
agnin adhaya pravatsyan
tusmm vai 18 sreyamsam 19 akanksanti 19
ty ahus
tusnim eve
7
|
katham
16 'ti
pravasati
yadi manasi
20
21
21
'bhayam vo
||
||
yuna
29
caksuso
dhrenai 31
tais
||
30 manasa
brahmana srotrena "gnl'dgatra
tva paiicabhir rtvigbhir daivyair abhyuddha-
ramy
32
'gnir
36
jyotir
jyotir
n Ait.
"nagnadyav ahutim
13 BC
navarohayed
15 A navaranu B nucaran
14 A
B
hayasa B ha sasva C ha sasvat
der mindestens iiber eine
zu
unterscheiden
zwischen
es
1st
prasavatl;
Nacht sich hinausziehenden, voriibergehenden Ortsveranderung (Ap. 6.
n AB pravat24. 1) und der dauernden Ubersiedelung (Ap. 6. 28. 1).
8 B sravanam
Brahm. 1. c. 8.
12
A pranaprte
A yathai 'nam B
10
yathai 'nan
1(J
co 'bhayam haivasyupatistheta (D
syan prosyams co 'patistheta HC
Yielleicht: pravatsyan prosivams co 'patistheta 'bhaye hai 'va
"tisthet).
.
19 A
18 A cai 'va
syam iti
sreyasamm akamksamti B sreyasa
2
21 fehlt
C kurvito
kamamksamti C sreyamsamm akainksamti
bei
bei
22
B chayamnam
verderbt.
Zeitbestimmung Ap. 6.
"yarn iti bhyuddharen
Ait. Brahm. 7. 12. 3.
so
3i
dgatra
33
1.
wie A, nur:
2s
krtva
36
B manona
dvaryuna
32
ma
34
papmano
papasarvam
Ap.
6. 1. 8.
BD
*
j
ist
vgl. die
B
vergl. Ap. 6. 1. 6ft'.
gnidhriyenai
Dieser Passus ist bei B verderbt:
uddharamy
rabhy
Ap.
udhrtyamana uddharana papmano
sambhedanad;
.
BCD
6. 1. 7.
25 D
adhivrksasurya avihsurye va
26 In den Mss. verderbt.
Verbessert nach
2:
2?
2t
sa-
Athai vaprayascittani
Vol. xxxiii.]
sayam
iti
agnir
suryo
73
3.
1.
37
iti
jyotih surya
arseyas tat pasyann
jyotih
pratar
ahavanlyam abhyuddhared atha yasya "havanlyam abhyuddhrtam adityo 'bhyudiyat ka tatra prayascittir darbhena rajatam
|
carur va
samsthitahomesu mitrah
nityah purastaddhomah
varune
ti 46
samsravabhagaih samsthapayed
juhuyat 2
||
ahutl
|
4S
vai 'tabhyam
rgbhyam
||
evai
37
4i
in
'nam
Ap.
as
6. 10. 8.
agnim fehlt
ostlicher
Kaus.
vgl.
lokad avarteta
tal
bei
atha
**
K.
6. 51. 3.
47
Sinn nach
gleich:
44
39
<<>
huyama-
K.
25. 3. 17.
ni
48
'samsthita
prdn
6. 25. 3.
ein
Richtung
S. 6. 9.
udeti;
C "ddhomam
ahutlm C ahutlti
D ma
*&
AV.
u ^ e ti dem
nachdem er
49
die
Pi ay. 7 b:
visesah
punar-unnayane 'yam
|
homah
so
D ma
74
J. v. Negelein,
nam
nam
[1913.
aparena "havamyam daksijanv acyo 'pavisati yat srucy atisistam syat taj juhuyad
atha yatrai 'va 'vaskannam bhavati tarn desam abhivimrjya
51
'ti
pranmukho (!) 'pavisya 52
vimrgvarlm prthivim avadaml
|
53
gnir bhumyam
cet sarvam eva
iti
tisrbhir
54
'tha
alabhya 'bhimamtrayeta
'medhyam apadyeta ka tatra prayascittir aparena "havamyam usnam iva bhasma niruhya tatra tam ahutim
57 ca bhavati 58
yac carusthajuhuyat tad dhutam ca 'hutam
yasya 'gnihotre
59
yascittir
AV.
51
63
|
54 Mit
3 AV. 12. 1. 19.
K. S. 25. 2. 11.
Die Liicke reicht bis zu den Worten: tvaya ('gr.e
52 c f.
12. 1.29.
tisrbhir bricht
ab.
25. 2. 5
Citats MS. 2. 13. 22 c.
11,
Vgl. K.
auch
unten 1. 5.
der
s.
des
Zerbrechens
sruc
wird;
zugleich
gedacht
*" Comm.
Kaus. 6. 1 Vait. 16. 17.
Vgl. Ait. Brahm. 7. 5.
prstham) des
wo
tad
etad
tato
|
tata
||
sapratha asl
ti
(Asv.
3.
ahavanlyam anugamayitva
purjatas
Vol. xxxiii.]
Atliarvaprayascittani
75
3.
||
||
||
||
surpadanadi-pathlkrtih karya
samista-yajusa urdhvam cet tadaiva gava'tikrama-"dy-upastbaaamtam krtva karma samapya tesv eva 'gnisv anvadhaagnina vyavaye tu pathikrty eva
na-"di-pathikrti karya
astakapalah
vettha hi vedho .... sukrato (Asv. 3. 10. 12)
a devanam api kalpayatl 'ti
tato visnu-smaranam
(ibid.) anadvan daksina
karma-madhyad anyatra
||
||
||
||
||
[|
||
baudhayana-mate[n]
||
||
||
||
||
||
||
||
|]
||
||
||
|]
||
25. 19;
Asv.
2. 17. 15)
tat[t]va
||
||
j|
||
||
||
||
[]
||
||
||
||
|J
||
||
||
||
||
||
||
||
||
|]
||
||
||
||
||
76
J. v. Negelein,
[1913.
svahe
vayam aruhemadha devaih sadhamadam madema
66
'tat
smrtam
sarvatrai
prayascittam antaragamane
||
'ti
[|
yajnasya
samtatir
asi
yajnasya
vasunam rudranam
||
ma brahma
pramathistana
||
ma
medham ma no diksam
no
ma
no himsistam yat tapah siva nah samsvamta ayuse siva bhanamas te pathya revati 7 ^ svasti ma paravantu matarah 72
75
74
ma na apo medham 76
ma
svasti
punarayanah
yanah
77 iti
78
78
atha
maitv
yasya "havanlyo 'gnir
punar
indriyam
ca^l:
79
ka
tatra
yat
jagryad garhapatya upasamyet
prayascittir
|
7i
Nach
Bl.s
72
Soweit
AV.
19. 40. 1
ff.
Das
ist
Vielleicht
1st
||
dadha (Asv. S. 3. 12. 23) ity upatiniyam praniya agne samrad ise
stheta tatah prakrtam karma samapya tapasvatistim kuryat athava "havaniyad eva(!) ahavaniyam praniya daksinagnes ca "haranam krtva prakrtam tapasvat[i]stih athava sahabhasmanam ahavaniyam daksinato viba|
||
I]
||
homam samapya
tapasvatlstih
||
cf. Agn.
tyupasthanam krtva "havaniye 'nvadhano-'pasthane kuryat
Pray. 12 a: yadi garhapatyo 'nugacched anvahitam garhapatyam anugatam
utpadayisyaml "ti samkalpya garhapatya-'nugata-bhasmana pradhana-'ranl
|
Vol. xxxiii.]
77
5.
1.
Atharvaprdyascittdni
prancam udvartayati tena "yatana[c] cyavate 79 yat pratyancam asuravad yajnam tanoti
yad anugamayati "svara vai
'nam tat prana 8 hasyur 8 iti si va 8
'tha nu katham82 iti
sabhasmakam ahavaniyam 83 dak$inena 84 daksinagnim parihrtya
|
<>
garhapatyasya "yatane pratisthapya tata ahavaniyam 84 prabhadrad abhi reyah prehi 86 'ty etayarca garhanayed 85
87
ajyam 87 vilayo 'tpuya caturgrhitam grhitva "havamyapatya
garhapatyav antarena vyavetya juhuyad
ayam no agnir
88
iti
u
va
etena
adhyaksa
dvabhyam
asya samtvaramanasya
|
89
tyau
devan
papmanam apahatah
90
tad anumantrayate
prthivim turiyam
95
etabhih
ity
prthivim
95
turiyam
manusyan 96 yajno 'gat tato ma dravinam asta 97
98
divi turiyam 95
amtarikse turiyam 95
(apsu
turiyam
99
99 aha 99 bhutani tani
devan yajno 'gat 10
tato
apsv
ity
|
ma
dravinam asta
lcl
trataram indram
|)
japati
103
|
'ti
102
vai yajnasya
tad varunam 105
yad
104
tad vaisnavam
viristam
yayor ojase
yad guspitam
bhuyisthSm rddhim apnoti yatrai ta
107
atha 'dbhutesv eta eva
visnu-varuna-devatya rco japaty
|
93 cf.
ndate
95 cf.
tyo)
(C:
BCD
Ait. Brahra.
va
.;
102
asvinyaha
AV.
9^
DaB
hier
textkritisch
selbstverstandlich,
99
ACD
etv
AV.
emtv
19. 16. 1.
2:
trti"
98
aristamm
cf.
Cone, 'vim
devanam
7. 5.
BD
eine
devan
Interpolation
aber interessant;
dieselbe
100 AC
amgat B gat
BCD etatt dessen: yatrai
104 A dusitam C usitam
to? BD
japamty
101
asvityaha
7. 25. 1.
103
AOD
aristam
ist
fehlt
logisch
bei D.
ABC
aristam
beginnt,
'ta
visnu-varuna105
C varunam
78
J. v. Negelein,
tisro
tisro
japet
japet
||
[1913.
iti 108
[|
yajnaprayascittasutre
i()S
scittir
|
hutva
stad
'tha
110
"havanlya
ajya-"huti
etabhyam rgbhyam
ity
atha
samsthapayed
samsravabhagaih
"havamye
tabhyam
114
115
tvaya yajnam vitanvata
iti
ced apahareyuh
pratardoham
etayarca
krtva tena yajeta
|
dham
trataram imdram
12
ity
'tha "havanlya
'tha
etayarca
|
sayamdoham
dvai-
ajya-"hutim juhuyat
cet sarvam eva sa-
amdram puronnayyam
vyapadyeta ka tatra prayascittir
dasam mahendram va sannayyasya 122 "yatane pratisthapya
121
tena yajeta
indram
120
"havanlya
108
ajya-"hutim juhuyat
ity
trataram indram
12
ity
etaya
nirvapet
'
CD
1J 8 Nach
sanrajyam
sannajyam
Analogic des Folgenden miiftten
wir vor pratar erganzen: sayamdoham ced apahareyuh; vgl. unten 4. 1;
us Brahm. Pray. 21 b: [sannayyam] kesakitadina
9. auch Ait. Brahm.7. 4.
iti
pratardoham dvaidham dohayitva
121 B sannam120 AV. 7. 86. 1.
(m)atamcya pracareta cf. unten 4. 1.
122 B
C
jyam CD eannajyam
samnajyamsya D sanasannajyamsya
123 B
124 ACD
jyamyasya
havanlyay
mrupya B tirupya
;
|j
Vol. xxxiii.]
rca
cet
'tha
prayagcittir
yajerann
yajeta
dram 120
nirupyai
tha
"havaniya
etayarca 1 atha
|
ity
||
||
125
bhavanti
in-
127
"jyahavise-'stya
129
naya ca
'taya
madhya[s] tv eva
12 ^
acaksate
vyapadyeran ka tatra
havimsi
'tani
ajyasyai
eva
sarvany
tair
79
Atharvaprayascittdni 2. 2.
'bhyuddrstan!
bhavisyati
'ti
'ty
na pratihara-
bruyad adarsam ca
13
sa syad
'dya purastad iti tarn tu kim iti bruyad atha va
eva 'dhas tarn eva prayascittim krtva yajete ti dvaipayanah
131 vai
132
krtasya
prayascittir bhavat! 'ti langalih
samapyai 'va
133
133
133
tena havisa yad-daivatam tad
atha
dhavi[h]
syad
nyad dhavir nirvaped agnaye datre purodasam indraya pradatre purodasam visnave sipivistaya purodasam athai 'tan 134
134 tredha
135
yathamruptams
kuryad yatha brahmano-'ktam
136
agnim vayam tranityah purastad dhomah sainsthitahomesv
taram havamahe 137 ya imam trayatam asmad yaksmad asmad 138
yo 'nyo
125
aiva
cf.
abhimrset devamjane
|
Kaus. Brahm.
'ty
4. 2.
1st
(gemeint
sesa-'bhave punar mamtravan nirva[pa]di kuryat ajyabhaga- namtaram sarvaprayascittam visnusmaranam ca kuryat
pakat
purvam havisam kesa-"dy-upahatau (cf. unter 2. 6) praksalanena proksanena va suddhih .... yada havir apakvam bhavati .... vidagdhe [havisi]
sistena pracaret
||
||
||
scittam
||
||
||
dravye 'dhvar-
||
(cf.
Ap.
9. 10. 5)
||
||
||
api khalu
prayascittir
iti
ksipra-samskaratam
vijnayata
anukter
iti
||
iti
||
K. S.
fehlt bei B; D ka
B samapyeva
drstamty
||
[|
||
cf.
athaniruptas
samsthitahomesv
asmadama punah
||
31
ff.
||
baudhayanena"vahanadi-purvakalady-
drstabhyustanlty
25. 4. 37
(1.
128
ksatasva
drstabhyustanity
va
A avasya
D krtasyai
!3 2
drstabhyu13
va
samathaiva
BC athatiruptams
D yad dhavisyad
136 A saDeutet auf Gop. Brahm. 2. 1. 9.
138 B
13 ^ A huvamahe
samsthitahomesu
134
133
135
BCD
D "smadamayutah
s.
Paipp.
2. 50. 1.
80
J. v. Negelein,
amayata[h]
138
madhyata opya
acaksate
*ty
i9 AV.
142
trataram indram
139
|
[1913.
'ti 14
141
143
||
1*0
7. 86. ].
yathapakrti"
cf.
AV.
7. 26. 3.
||
A utha? BC upya?
'mavasya-bhramena caturi
atha
dasyam sannayye parigrhite candrodaye na jate 'kale prakrtTsti-devatasthane agnir data imdrah pradata visnuh sipivista iti devata yastavyah
tatra nirvapat purvam akale pravrttam iti jnane uktadevatabhyo vrlhm
||
adhivapami tati (hati? dati?) adhivapady astasu kapalesu adhisrayati sthulataran tamdulan indraya datre iti budhya caru-dharmena sayamdohe
adhisrayati anun tandulan caru-dharmena visnave sipivistaya pratardohe
sesam a[ma]vasya-tantram
tasam yajyanuvakyah
'dhisrayati
agne da
|
||
||
sunumatah (RV.
datuh
u (RV.
3.
24. 5) sa
yamta
|j
....
magham (RV.
3. 13. 3) ity
agner
!|
RV.
7. 99. 7); pra tat te adya (RV. 7. 100. 5); iti visrioh sipivistasya
nirvapad urdhvam akala-jnane tan eva tandulams tredha vibhajya purvavad
istim kuryat
na 'tra punaryagah purodasa-srapananamtaram pratardohe
dugdhe jate purodasam ajye viniksipet
dugdham api yatha na nasyati
vratacari sayam-doham dugdhva svo
agni-samsargena tatha raksaniyam
bhute darsayagah karyah yage krte akalajnane prayascittam punarya<?as
ce 'ty eke
asomayagino 'pi(!j akalajnane sarva-prayascittam punaryagas
143
cety eke
Agn. Pray. 3 a:
yady amavasyam paurnamasim va
'tiyad yadi va 'nyasya 'gnisu yajeta yadi va 'sya 'nyo 'gnisu yajeta (cf. unten
5.5) yadi va 'sya 'nyo gnir agnin .vyaveyad (d. h. wenn ein weltliches
Feuer die sakralen stort; s. unten 2. 7; 5.4) yadi va 'sya 'gnihotre upasanne havisi va nirupte cakrivac chva puruso va viharam antariyad (cf. oben
1. 3) yadi va 'dhve(I) pramiyete 'stih (vgl. unten 2. 8).
Comm.: yady amavasyam paurnamasim va svakale 'krtva tiyat(!) yady agnihotradravye
||
||
||
||
kusesu 'pasadite yadi darsapurnamasadisu havisi nirupte cakrivad rathasakatadih sva agnih puruso va manusyajatih sarva (Text: sarve) agninam
'tikramet yadi va yajamano 'dhvani gramamtare mriyetai 'tesv
anyatara-nimittesu nimitta-'namtaram
agriih pathikrd vettha hi vedho
J
adhvana a devanam api pamtham aganme ti (RV. 6. 16. 3; 10.2.3) anadvam
daksina vyavaye tv anagnina prag ister gamimtarena (1.: gam amtarena)
madhyena
||
Aiharvaprayascittdni 2.
Vol. xxxiii.]
atha
'to 145
81
3.
amavasya
!ti 146
bhavisyati
atha sa
|
krtva yajete
ti
ti
langalir
15
'va tena
svagr still
samapyai
151
atha 'nyad dhavir nirvaped
agnaye pathikrte 152 purodasam. indraya vrtraghne purodasam vaisvanaram 153 dvadasakapalam purodaam nityah purastaddhomah
samsthitahomesu 154 tvam agne sapratha asi 155
yena patha
vaivasvatah 156 sasa ittha mahan asi 157 vaisvanaro na utaya 158
iti
madhyata opya samsravabhagaih sainsthapayen mahapa159
160
thikrti ty acaksata
tad ahur na
pattayos
ubhayor api
vih
151
syad
svahe
ty
evam eva
vasano mlalohito
karat 164 svahe'ti
|
prmati
yasasa
so
syai
sa 168
drstah
dam idam
adhikam
tato
pranan
yasasa
169
||
||
[|
||
RV.
6. 35. 1.
1.:
159
"pannayos.
Metrum waren
bei
BC
BC
isi
iti
statt api;
ACD
bis
samsthapayen [mahapathikrtity].
"8 AV.
"' AY. 1. 20. 4.
Unermittelbar.
viliyo'
herstellbar,
BC lassen tya
166 B
fiigt tena
IBS
karat
'ise
5. 13. 4.
1.
ieo
ati
i62
ACD
wenn man
cf.
oben
ie*
ein.
67
2.
und
duskrtam adrstam
tejasabdhrena
i
69
2 letztes Wort.
lesen wiirde:
aus.
tat
les
yah esa
6
ya fehlt
82
J. v. Negelein,
prinati
||
atha yo 'hutva 1
[1913.
purodaam
pipase
sa
A V.
173
2. 4. 8. 7.
171
19. 59. 1.
K.
S. 25. 4.
bestimmt die
ff.
n* AV. 7. 8.
"7 C vrttm
dravarunayeti
72
'
ne Es konnte etwa an T.
1.
S. 1. 3. 14. 4.
178 ABCD
vasyet; cf.
pravrta vrtlr
hierzu Ap. 9. 5. 1; Asv. 3. 11. 4; Asv. Pray. 3b; Ait. Brahm. 7. 3. Auch
bei der Schlaclitung darf das Opfertier nicht briillen: K. 6. 25. 9. 12.
sein.
gedacht
1m
iso
Pray. 3 b
184
isi
tarn
:
u.
BO nrnam
corr.
"2
cf.
Ait.
atha dadhyet
iss
AV.
7. 73.
Brahm.
5. 2. 7. 6.
K.
25. 1. 19.
"huti
der
Anschluft
wahnte
IBS V
unserem Texte.
gl. AV 7. 17. 2; 3. 10. 7; s. auch Paipp. 1. 106. 6.
ise Brahm.
Pray. 35 b kiindigen an: athe Manim agnihotraprayascittany
abhidhlyamte tad-artham idam ucyate
agnihotram cet prag adhisranislded upaviset tatra yasmad bhite 'ty anena
yana[t] skanded iti
.
tada
tradhenur vatsa(m)-sargdd draWiya dohana-paryawitam upaviset
tatas tarn utthapayet
yasmad bhisa .... milhuse ity abhimamtrayet
udasthad .... varunaya ca
ity etadr ubhayam yajamano homakarta va
kuryat atha asya udhasi ca mukhe co 'dapatram upagrhya dugdhva brah|
||
manam
payayet
na 'smyat
189 c f.
||
'pasrstS nislded
iti
nisldanamamtrah
cf.
Ait.
Brahm.
7. 3.
Vol. xxxiii.]
visati
|
Afliarvaprayasciitani 2.
abhistaya
bhita nisidasi
iti
83
5.
cham no
190
ninayec
devir
tarn
dvabhyam
anumantrayate yasmad
no abhayam krdhi pasun nah sarvan
|
192
tato
193
athai 'nam utthapayaity
gopaya namo rudraya mldhusa
uttistha
adite
devan
ty
devy
yajnena bodhaya indraya krnvati bhagam mitraya varunaya ce 'ty
utthitam anumantrayate
udasthad devy adite devan 194 yajnena bodhaya ayuS ca tasya
bhutim ca yajamanam 195 ca 195 vardhaye 'ty atha "havamya
196
ajya-"hutir juhuyan ma no vidan
ity etair abhayai rau4
draiS ca
atha yasya vapam ahutini va grhitam yenah
sakunih sva va nyo va "hared 197 vato va vivamet 19 * ka tatra
divam prthivlm 199 ity abhimantrya 'tha "havaprayascittir
|
||
||
2 o
iti suktena
nlya ajya-"hutlr juhuyad vata Svatu bhesajam
'tha yasya somagraho grhito 'tisravet ka tatra prayascittir
caskande 201
abhimantrya 'tha "havamya ajya"hutlr juhuyan manase cetase dhiya 202 iti suktena 'tha yasya
203 darbhena
'stapadl vasa syat ka tatra prayascittir
hiranyam
baddhva 'dhy-adhi garbham hiranyagarbhena juhuyad yatha
'mum sa garbham abhyacotayad yatha 'mum garbham sadarbham 204 iva sahiranyam tarn uddhrtya praksalya 205 'nupadam
206
srapayitva praksirasam udakpadyam kamasuktena
juhu207 'ti ve
208 astabhir nabhasvatibhir 209
yad anamgandhl
ty
'tha
yasya 'samapte karmani tahiranyagarbhena va
ntriko 'gnir upasamyet ka tatra prayascittir yam tvam agne 21
punas tva "ditya rudra vasava 211 ity anyam 212 pramya pradrapsas
'ty
"o
C f.
Asv.
i9i
3. 11. 3.
AV.
^ AB.
1. 6. 1.
5.
27. 2; 7. 3. 2;
hierher
gehoren auch die folgenden Zitate dieses Abschnitts; vgl. die analogen
193 M. ^. 3. 2. 1,
Partien Ap. 9. 17. 6 f.
fortgesetzt durch Asv. 3. 11. 1;
"6 AV. 1. 19. 1.
i^ 5 D
i9
Ait. Brahm. 7. 3.
A vamn
'manaya
187 Der
gleiche Fall wird in dem korrupten Passus Brahm. Pray. 77 b
behandelt; vgl. unten 3, 10; s. a. Maim 7. 21: Kr'ahen geniefien von einem
Opferkuchen.
3.
21.
7.
198
200 c f.
Crop.
203 Brahm.
vivamet(?)
Brahm.
viramit
CD
viramet
199
201
AV.
18. 4. 28.
202
1. 3. 13.
AV.
AV.
41. 1.
krtva
mada
AV
209
gemeint:
AV
gandhltevety
"gamdhlticety
meint ist wahrscheinlich AV. 18. 3. 6 (yam tvam agne).
Vait. 28. 22; Ap. 6.
9. 10.
212
agnim
2o5
iti
prajvalya
4.
gandhitlvety
210
15?
ge -
211
AV.
12. 2. 6;
84
J. v. Negelein,
213
jvalya
mama
215
sesam
214
'gne varca
samapnuyur
216
adipyeta
215
1
adahad vedya
218
[1913.
iti
vaso
222
221
nirdagdha no amitra
pahi tasmat
yathe 'dam
barhis tatha amitranam sriyam bhutim tarn esam parinirjabi
224
223 te 223
ye deva
juhumas tan no astu viampate
yat-kanaas
duritat
||
yajnam ayanti te no raksantu sarvatah avadagdham duhsvapnyam avadagdha aratayah sarvas ca yatudhanyah ma tva
225 stubi 226
dabbyan yatudhanah ma bradhnah sarmabhih
darbho raja samudriyab pari nab patu visvatah atha 'nyad
dam barbarbir upakalpyo 'dakena samproksya punah strnati
hir amrtene
ha siktam hiranmayam haritam tat strtam 227
nah 227 tad 228 vai puranam abhinavam strmsva vasah prasastam prati me grhane 'ty 229 atha yasya pitrye 230 pramto 'gnir
upasamyet ka tatra prayascittir bhasma "labhya 'bhimantra231 dvisantam
agne dvisatam ca vittam prajam 232 dvisadyed
daksinena
pitrye pramta upasamyamanah papbhyo naya
manam agne tarn ito nudasva dvisantam agne dvisatam ca
vittam 232 gaccha tvam adaya paravato 'nyan 233 pitrye pramta
|
C praksalya
AP. 37. 5. 1.
AB apo. Auch
213
219
AV.
21*
216 c f.
217
alle
fiir
5. 3. 1.
BCD
tarn; bei
die
Mss. der AP., denen dieses Zitat entnommen ist (37. 5. 2) lesen pom resp.
222 AP
220 B
221 Parallel AV. 1. 25. 1.
da
apom D aponnata
223 AB vamaste
225 BC
224 AV. 7. 79. 4.
53. 7. 3: "mitras tu
225-226 AP. 37. 5. 6
227 AD strnamtah B
carmabhi
samyum icchata
tastrtam nah C tatstrtam nah; AP. 37. 5. 8 statt tat strtam nah: te strnami
;
BG
228
*ty
2
_37
upasabhyeti
Ap.
te
gnim
9. 19.
15
fugt hinter
D
233 D
231
pitrya
Worte
liegenden
229
yad
230
f.;
aus.
nyat
upasamyeti
CD
233
vgl.
'ty ein:
yeta
praksalye
unten
5. 6.
232
234
ABCD yam
236
239
241
BC
AV.
7. 111. 1.
varo 8
A upasamyati
A ucyamanena
240 D
varohed;
235
ucyatena
242
Kaus.
S. 125. 2.
Vol. xxxiii.]
Atharvaprayascittdni 2.
85
6.
brahmana 243
bhigupto
etu lokam
||
||
||
||
245 Die
243 r>
244 Kaus. S. 135. 9.
nali
Wiedergabe
namentlich des letzten Pada in den Mss. ist iiberaus liickenhaft und reich
an Irrtiimern.
246
AV.
wiederholt
247
6. 4. 1.
ABCD
visvarupam;
250
AD
253
K.
prapato
^. 25. 6. 9
bharamtam
BC
254
f.
251
prayato
RV.
9. 63. 18.
25 6
j)
255
samsthapaye hadistam
23
"
Agn.
vyapannani havimsi kesa-nakha-kJta-patamgair anyair va bisamsargo [dojsaya
sarira[c] cyuta-kesa-nakha-"dibhir havih
bhavati tatha kita-patamgair amedhya-nivasibhih samsargo dosaya bhavati dustaram havir apsu praksipya punar-nirvapa-"di kuryat atha vaPray. 4 b:
bhatsaih
cf.
Vaj. S.
8. 6. 3.
prabhrtinam ca tyagah
si!)
86
/. v.
Negelein,
[1913.
259
bhuvaya svaha
bhuvanaya svaha bhuvanabhuvampataye svaha visnave svahe ty ete
ta eva 'sya tad dhutam 261 istam
ha vai devanam rtvijas
ahutesu
kurvanti
prag angarah 262 skanded
yat prayajesv
ve
'ty
eke
260
pataye svaha
264
263
adhvaryave ca
paubhyas ca'gham 265 syad
yajamanaya ca
266 brahmane ca
daksina
yajamanaya ca yadi pratyag 267
yadi
dhotre 287 ca patnyai 2 6S ca 26
yady udag agnidhe 269 ca 270
ca
ca
'gham 271 syat tarn anupraharet
yajamanaya
pasubhyas
272
6
atha yasya 'gnayo misahasrasrnga
ity etaya rca
|
||
|j
||
'
||
||
||
||
||
"dina havir-dose jate tasya sthane dhruvatas caturgrhltam ajyam ajr ajet
tatah prayogam samapya vyapanna-haviravyapannais ca yathapurvam
||
||
||
yajusah pra^ dustam havir iti jamyat tada "jyena punar-yagah urdhvam
cet smaranam tada *nvadhana-"di-punaryagah
bahuhaviske yage yad eva
cf. Agn. Pray.
dustam havih smaret tasyaiva punaryago na sarvasya
||
||
||
||
mamdarah
'pi
'ti
ra-
258
tatre
259
Asv.
3. 10.
tace
260
20-22.
Kaus.
S. 116. 2
unter abweichendem
26i
BCD
bhutam
262
27i
BC cadyam
272
AV.
13. 1. 12;
s.
Ap.
9. 3. 1.
Atharvaprdyascittani 2.
Vol. xxxiii.]
87
7.
so
'gnaye
275
vi-
276
nityah purastaddhomah
'stakapalam purodasam nirvapen
samsthitahomesv agnim lie purohitam 28
vivicim ratnadha|
tarisad
iti
madhyata
sam-
opya
282
sthitahomesv
agnih sucivratatamah
suci rocata ahutah
ud agne
viprah ^ucih
2 83
kavih
tava
sukra
ucayas
Irate
tava
svahe
'ti
hhrajamta
madhyata
jyotlmsy arcayah
atha yasya 'gnayo daopya samsravabhagaih samsthapayed
sucir
||
Uberhaupt
s.
hangnisvoll;
prayascittam
gabe in
der
gilt
2 '4
||
275
"havaniyau mithah
285
anna|
Zusammenfall von
Asv. Pray.
5. 4.
praya^cittir
16 a:
Brahm.
7.
6:
yasya garhapatyd-
so
samsrjyeyatam
grhitena srucam purayitva 'gnaye vratapataye svahe 'ti huyate sa purnahutih dvadasa-grhitena 'stagrhitena caturgrhitena sruva-purnena ve 'ti
27 ^ RV.
catvarah pakso (!) bodhayane(!) prayascittestih. saha vikalpyate
|
6.
279
Asv.
16. 10;
3.
13. 7;
Ait.
cf.
Brahm.
Asv.
3. 13.
vivicaya;
vivivaye
sarva eva 'gnayo mithah samsrjyeran
7. 6.
5; aber Ait.
ABC
Brahm.
gramyena
7. 6:
yasya
Brahm. 7.
samvargdya ....
vgl. Ait.
7: yasya 'gnayo
fl
281
Asv.
erweist.
283
RV.
13. 4,
3.
K.
dessen
S. 25. 4.
8. 44. 17.
Komm.
35; Ait.
2 S4
sich
hier
als
vortrefflich unterrichtet
||
88
J. v. Negelein,
[1913.
nityah purastaddhomah
'stakapalam purodasam nirvapen
samsthitahomesv
iti
apascad aghvannasya bhuyasam 289
|
'gnayo
'gnaye jyotismate
purastaddhomah
samsthitahomesu
294
vividyotate dyotate
292 a ca
dyota|
samsravabhagaih samsthapayed}
so
'bhiplaveran ka tatra prayascittih
nityah
madhyata
iti
|
'gnaye
291
290
opya
purastaddhomah
atha
iti
madhyata opya samsravabhagaih samsthapayed
296
so
ka
tatra
abhyuddharet
prayascittih
yady anugatam
|
anenaiva
mamtrena
285
||
Hierzu
2 91
292
Bei
294 cf.
liest
hinter
3. 13.
K.
8;
293
dittographiert.
Asv.
jihva:
25. 4.
offenbar
ursprtinglicher
hang nicht gedenkt. Ygl. aber Agn. Pray. 12 a: anvahitesv agnisu yady
dhavamyo 'nugacchet tada 'nvahitam ahavanlyam anugatam utpadayisyami Hi samkalpya anv agnir usasam atatane 'ti (AV. 7. 82. 4) garhapatyad pramyamto bhur iti manaso 'pasthanam kuryat tata ajyapurnena
|
||
pate (Ap.
japo
na
4. 3. 2)
'nyatha
||
||
Vol. xxxiii.]
Atliarvaprayasdttani 2.
purodaam
89
8.
297
nirvapen
nityah
"
purastaddhomah
300 no 301
302 kavir
'gnina 'gnih samsrjyate
aclya
grhapatir
303
tvam hy agne 304 agnina vipro 305
yuva havyavad juhvasyah
sa no rasva
viprena san sata sakha sakhya samidhyase
samsthitahomesu
sivau 298
bhavatam
[|
||
suviryam
payet
30(i
||
madhyata opya
iti
atha 3
||
<>
ya
307
samsravabhagaih samstha-
'tha
ahitagnis
307
tantre
307
pravase
mamtreno
'ti
pratah
||
tato
tato 'gnaye
pranayana-mamtrena nidhaya 'gnim pratisthapayet
jyotismate svaha agnaye jyotismata idam varuriaya svaha agnaye jyotismata idam
varunaya svaha varunaye 'dam (Ap. 9. 9. 14; corr.) iti
Beim Erloschen
purnahutim hutva tasmin eva 'gnau homa-samaptih
des Ahavaniya-Feuers soil ebenso wie bei dem des Daksinagni (cf. unten
6. 1) verfahren werden; jedoch ist ibid, folgende Differenz vorgeschrieben:
Ahavaniyasyo 'ttara-pascima-dese prahvas tisthan dhata dhatrnam (RV.
|
gnaye
'stakapalam nirvapet
'gnimate
ibid.
cf.
Bl. 56 a folg.:
yasya
Brahm.
7. 6) bhavatam nah
agnim abhyuddhareyur (vgl.
samanasav (Kaus. 108. 2) ity abhimamtrya 'gnaye 'gnimate 'stakapalam
nirvapet yasya yajamanasya daivan manusad va pramadad agnav uddhrte
Ait.
'gna[v]
vidyamana eva
"rddhvam uddhareyur
pranlte
ACD
A to
293
301
1.
sivo
;
304
12. 6.
13. 5;
5.
sive
Kaus. 108.
punar
302
2.
ABC
8. 98. 12.
303
samsrjate
305
RV.
B
B
juhuyaranye C juhuyuranye
306
8. 43. 14.
RV.
RV.
atha ya
308 c f.
Ap. 9.
juyuran
nyavatsaya
ABCD.
sis c f.
309
sio
juhuyatranye
Diese Stelle ist im Original verderbt.
A liest diese und die zwischenliegenden Worte: ahus tad adugdhaya va
sarvam va prtanyayo yajnena 'nyavatsaya gauh sudradugdhaya va BC
ahuh sudradugdhaya va (C vat) sarvam va etyayojanye (C jue) na 'nya
(C 'na-)-vatsaya goh sudradugdhaya eva (eva) D ahu sudradugdhaya va
'nya
sarvam
312
3ii
nyavatsiya
Ait Brahm.
7.
sis fe hlt
2.
bei
CD.
su
fe hlt bei
90
J. v.
Negelein,
[1913.
317
asthnam 317 aharanam 31 s
yavad
tarn
pitrmedhena 32 samapnuyur
ahrtya 'gnibhih
samsprsya
atha yah 321 samaropita-'samaropite mrtah syat katham tatra
so 'gnaye tantumate pathikrte vratabhrte 322 purodakuryat
agnim 316
paricareyur
319
aranl
||
[|
A yavavadasthnam ( ?) B yavadasmam D yavaAgn. Pray. 4b: adhve pramltasya (cf. oben Anm. 308)
'bhivanyavatsayah payasa 'gnihotram tusnim sarvahutam juhuyur a sama31 6
vayat
tusnim
bhakso
317
agnihotram
3is
dastbioam.
a sarirasya 'gni-sambamdhatvat
yady
dhyanam karttavyam
enam purvapaksam hareyuh
ahitagnir
aparapakse
pradbane prajapati"butibhir
mriyeta
||
||
||
||
||
AV. XIX
325
59. 1.
zwiscbenliegenden Worte
liest
syat
327 Asv.
tayor aranyor vihrtyamta
Pray. 7 a folg.: atha samarudhesv
vahnisu
agnisv araninase 'gnyadheyam punaradheyam va kartavyam
|
arani-nasa-nimittani
satsu aram-nase prayascittam punar-adhana-varjam
daho mamtbanam ca
[Sloka:] manusya-'stbi savam vistha rajo vin
mutram eva ca svedo 'sru puyika slesma madyam ca 'medhyam ucyate
)
||
||
srgala- 'mtyaja-
j|
||
||
||
juhuyad
91
Atharvaprdyascittani 2.9.
Vol. xxxiii.]
vayave
328
ka tatra prayascittih
sprtibhir
niyutvate
'te 333
vatat
sprnomi svaha
caksu sprnomi svaha
candrat te mana sprnomi svaha
334
te
jyoti
digbhyas
sprnomi svaha
'dbhyas te rasam
svaha
te
snesprnomi
'sthibhyas
majjanam sprnomi svaha
te
snavanam
svahau
te
lomani
hebhyas
sprnomi
'sadhibhyas
|
'raiiyor
matim
istim kuryat
||
dharayan nistapati
udbudhyasva 'gne pravisasva yonim
devayajyayam vai jatavedah
aranya 'ranim anusamkramasva
tato [ ]yam te yonir rtviyo
jirnani num. (?) ajirnaya nudasva
iti samaropya mathitva 'gnm vihrtya manasvatya
"girali (RV. 3. 29. 10)
tamtumatl-'stim purnahutim va kuryat
ukta-nimicaturgrhita-homah
ttair arani-nase pratyaksa-vahnir yadi nasyet tada gny-adhanam iti bauagiier
upari
||
anyam
||
||
|j
||
agnir pavamanah
purnahutayo va
agnir pavakah agnih sucir iti
asaktau punas tva "ditya rudra vasavah (samimdhatam) punar brahmano
vasunitha rudraih ghrtena tvam tanuvo vardhayasva satyah samtu yaja||
||
[|
jj
manasya kama (VS. 12. 44) iti mamtreno 'pasamimdhanam kuryat udacandala-patita-rajasvala-sutikasya [spajrse
kabimdu-pate 'py etad eva
caturdine snananamtaram sparse samaropya mathitva
agnyadheyam
cf. Agn. Pray. 13 b:
'gnaye sucaye 'stakapalam nirvapet purnahutim. va
|
||
||
||
|j
|]
gleiche Text
uddipyasva
svayam-prajvalana-prayascittam
(TA. 10. 1. 4. 5) pratimamtram ekaikam samidham adadhyat
(m)agnihotra-prarabdha-karmasu a samapter.
329
323 c f. unten 5. 5.
Vgl. hierzu S. Br. 11. 8. 4. 6; K. S. 25. 6.
332 p as
330 BO
si A nirupya B tiruhya CD nirupyam.
yavastam.
Entfliehen und Zugrundegehen des Opfertieres erheischt Siihne: K. S.
333 A
25. 9. 1; cf. unten 6. 7: asvamedhe ced asvo na "gacchet ...
paripataye
ibid.:
'ti
B
"kurvltetyevaidevasprta tayo
jyoti, verandert in digbhya
334
"kurviteyotavai
BCD
disam
CD
kurvitenyotavai
92
J. v. Negelein,
[1913.
sprnomi svaha
svaha
te rajnah
'ndrat te 335
|
balam sprnomi
'ti
'tha
tad yad enam adhigacheyur 343 atha tena yajeta
344 etau sirna-mrtau bhavatas 344
avadatayoh prajnatany
yav
nany avadaye 'tarasya va pa^oh sampraisam krtva brahmanan
vati
345
1
yadi va 'nyah
335
ntariksa
D:
samsprnomi svaha
adhivyagacheyur;
'ndrat te:
33T
34i
'ndraddhi
C divam;
rajna
rtam
verderbt.
ofi'enbar
vya
etatt
liest
yaceto sau
yacai [C vai] taugnau slrna (C rnna) mrtau bha3<s
catasrbhir C
ya vaitagnau sirirnamrtau bhavatah
dieser
sirnamrto bhavata
vatas;
Bei
lesen
manusat
BCD
*
342
Statt
raja
BC
7. 7.
atha
34*
sss
BC
tte;
336
ndradvi
divam
3o y. S.
dieser
statt
liest
BC
346
sprtibhi
BCD
34 ?
syam amitram
Das
folgende,
im Text Aus-
'yam ca harati
sam
'ty
atha nu
kam
iti
tat
harati
yojayet
35i
AV
ty
atha nu katham
349
18. 4. 13.
iti
pamcasa-pamcasa
ABC.
(?)
vahanti
250 c f. Ait.
Brahm.
34S
7.
2.
Vol. xxxiii.]
Atharvaprdyascittani 2.
93
9.
rca
samdahyete
ty
yajna
vitatah
eti
rann
ity
arudhan
jiva
grhebhya
355
ape 'mam
'tha
etayarca
yo diksito
eva 'gnibhir ity ahur
bhavanti tat kavyavahana ity atha
ity
tair
rastat
nam
'ti
352
A upavasathye,
verandert in
au; BC pavasathye
apavasathye;
cf.
Ait.
Brahm.
7. 2.
35
358 A
tahsusamtapayed agnaye BD tamamsamtapaye gnayo C tamam
359 BloGe
samtanam samtapaye gnayo
Wiedergabe einer kaum verstandlichen und jedenfalls sehr korrupten Stelle nach Ms. A. B barhisy
eva bhavamte no vai te tasya C barhir va eva bhavamti tenodaite tasya
teno
ete
te tasya;
36
AB
purasavane
B adiso cf. Gop. Br. 1. 5,
Mss. vyatte
vyadatte;
"Wiederholungen.
368
366
362
22.
so
an dieser Stelle
traistubham
pavisamadhah C parisamadhah
363
pitrmedha
364 D
parisam
C bha
359-370
367
365
und
lafit
bei
BC
diese
1.
etwa:
D
A
asaso
ahah
In den
alien
ihren
parisamdhah
und
die in-
94
J.
yet
Negelein,
ntam upavadet
ryat
v.
[1913.
.........
sa cet prati namas kuryat kusalenai 'vai 'nam 371 yojasa 373 cen 373 na 373 prati namas kuryat tena 'bhicaret|
372
374
375
vatsaro
agranthina prasavyam agnibhih pariyad
376
377
377
tarn
'ti
yadi
parivatsaro *si samvatsaro 'si
jighamsed 377 yayoh 377 sarvam iti suktena badhaklh 378 samidho 'bbya-
savyam
'si 375
379
atha yo hota 'rddhabuta
trtiyaham na 'tijlvaty
380
sahaiva tena "camya 'gnir ma patu vasuucchistah
syat
bbib purastad 381 ity etam japtva yatha-'rtham kuryad yaiti yajnaprayascitte dvitlyo 'dhyayah sathartham kuryat 9
dadbyat
38
||
||
prajapatir manasi
somarupani vyakbyasyamah
vidbanam 384 diksayam brahmavrate savita 385 samdbiyamane 386 ndbo 'cbeto 386 divyab 387
atba
'to
parikbyato
suparnab
391
39
to 389
370
Den
gelassen.
373
sa
375
Bei
zweifellos
3?i
vemta
BCD
sa ce tan ra
fehlt:
sa cenra;
pariyad vatsaro
374 f e hlt
sa cet
376
si
VS
und
sso
utsisthasyat
dasamo 'dhyayah
385
BC
382
19. 17. 1.
u(c)chista syat
ity
333
||
C divyam
390 C
yajne
miyamano BC
379
24. 1. 6.
1.:
377
uttisthaset (vgl.
CD
PW.)
378
u.
Yerbadhaka
natijlvayaty
ssi
AV.
savitaram
387
AP
bei B.
27.45.
sss
'
BCD
storavasa; sprachlich moglich ware es, statt urav: uru zu rekonstruieren, unter Anwendung eines anfechtbaren Sandhi also zu lesen:
396 C dhasur ?
6. 34. 14.
sto "rv asa ; vgl. sipivista asaditah TS. 4.4. 9. 1
39 7
abhidbhiyamano
pasave
399
atithye
8 BCD
abhirhriyamano CD abhihriyamano
401 B
*oo BCD varunah
asadyam vatsadya-
mana C asamccavatsadyamana
403
ABCD
39
asamdyavatsadyamana
402
ABC
gnau
Vol. xxxiii.]
95
Atliarvaprayascittani 3. 3.
sama 405
aindragno 'gnau 404 praniyamane 404
tanunaptre
tapo 'vantaradiksayam pythivy upasady anta406 'bhimo
riksam upasadi
dyaur upasadi
yajnasya prama
406
'nma
pratima vedyam kriyamanayam
pasava uttarave-
mathyamana
403
'ntariksam agnldhrlye
dyaur havirdhane
prthivl
1
sadasi
prana uparavesu
bhratrvya dhisnyesu
paavo
barhisi 407 vedyam stiryamanayam
apsu 408 visarjane 408 pra-
dyam
||
||
409
aprlsu
412
osadhayo rasana-
medha
yam 411
havih paryagnikrtah
asanna-
vaisnava
hriyarnano
'gnir agnldhrlye
karmani
hasto visrsto 410
vaisnavo yupa
japatir
413
pitrde-
indraabhihriyamanasv 416
417 uttaravedi 41
419 avasadhenur
gnyor
daksinasyam
8-sronyam
42
dayati
mitravarunayor dhenur
uttarasyam uttaravedi- 418 sronyam 419 avasadayati 421
visvesam devanam agnl-
samtatir
yajnasya
vasatlvarlsv
426
matihendro
indro vrtratur
427
unmyamana
ayur upamsv-
428
2
antaryamayor
nibhuyapuradhavayamo 'bhihitah
429
43
^ l mamtha 4 3 2 -srlh
suputah putabhrti susukra 0-srlr
||
||
mye
4 os A sarasvato
bei A; D gno
nupapte B sasati
406 A
nuyapte C sasati yapte; D sasatitaghrame
pramabhimatonina pratima vedyantariksamm upasadi dyaur upasadi yajnasya
pramabhimatonma pratima B setzt an Stelle dieser Wiederholung:
404 fehlt
pramadisamonma
pramahisamonma;
barhisu
4 os
A
D
pramabhimate hi
asuvisarjane
4^ 4
paryagnittatam
B vamayam
abhihriyamanamsv
418
von
I)
BC
vamasam nodayati
vedinodayati
BC
(sic!)
sri
429
4 i5
411
413
capapam
BC
vasamnodayati
avasadayati;
vasannodayati
vielleicht
auch
upavasatho; D upavathyo
42 * C
upahatah C upavahutah D uvahatah
426
425 fehlt bei B.
bhimatir
422
427
432
aprltya
patnlja
C vasamnodayati
bhimater
unamsv
tisrsto
BC
sarasvatah
ABC
4 s
abhidriyamanasv B abhihriyamanesv
417 D
uttarasyam; vielleicht besser.
42
vacasam
ABC "nyarn
zu lesen.
upavahatah
"
hier mit
423
4i9
vedih
nodayati
412
ABCD
4ie
apsutisarjane
4i
hiyamane C hriyamane
hriyamano
rasanamyam C rajnasanayam
ma
AD
matha
vrtraghna
nidhaya'
mayah
vrtraghmr
43
BC sukrah
431
96
J. v. Negelein,
kslrasrih
saktuSrlh
435
kakubhah
pravare
[1913.
433
patresu
vayur bahispavasavah prayajesu yaddevatyah
|
436
vaisvadeva unmyamana 437
taddevatyah
paSur
vato m&ruto gano 43S
unmto
rudro
huyamano
aindragna
44
439
bhakso bhaksyamanrcaksah
pratikhyato
'bbyavrtto
somas
436
narasamsa 442
[ajgneyam
aindram
madhyaradinam savanam
yajiio
pr&tahsavanam
aindr&ni prsthani
vaisvadevam trtly a- savadaksin&yam
aindravarunam maitravarunanam vaisvanaro 'gnistomam
444
443
brahmana'ktham
aindrabarhaspatyam
bhavaty
syo
445
aindravaisnavam acbavakasyo
cchamsina uktham
bbavaty
nah
sakha
441
bhaksitah
pitaro
448
aindrah sodasiratrah 447
bhavaty
paryaya
450
448 ratbamtarab sandhih 449
ahar
sauryam asvinam
"gneyo
yajna aditya anuyajesu yad antara kriyate sa samudro varuno
ktbam
446
'vabbrthe
451
samudra
|
yjise
yad
452
vaisnavo vasayam
prayanlyam yat pare tad udayamyam
3 U yasya 455
svar divi kasu 454 brabma 454 samistyam 454
456
455 'mtatah 455 somo
yasya
vyapadyeta tasyai tasyai devataya
457
tvam
istim nirvaped ajyaboman va
tha juhuyat
yajiio
visnur 45 ^ iti ca
tvam yajno visnur yajna-visnu anunam 459
|
||
462
466
yad asmrti
ti
ca karmaviparyase
C pavitresu
vgl. Kath.: hotrah.
438
439 AC nrcaksa
gane
433
434
ABC
'ti
466
466
435
barhi
ca
tad
466
yad
466
hotrah C hotra;
437 C
ne
440 A
praticaksato dann folgt bei A bhakso
^
bhaksiyamanah sarvobhaksitah B bhakso yamanah savobhaksitah C bhakso
44 1 A sarvo BC savo
D sayo.
bhaksiyamanah savobhaksita
4*2 C
444 B
barnarayanamsa 443 AC "varunasyo 'cham B syecchu
445 AC uccham B uccha
447 A soda446 ABC cham
haspatye
449 A samdhi
448 ABCD
saratrih BCD sodaslratri
paryayagneyo
;
450 A asvina
45 A
452 A
samdhirya
yad avare
vabhrthye
453 A
B yad acatireryam CD yad acare tlrtham
udayatiyam
454 B
B udamyam
kasubrahmamistya C kasubrahmasamistyam D kasubrahmanyain istyam 455 A yasyam yasyam amtatah C yasya yasya tatah;
458
457 D tva
456 C
D yasyam yasya amtatah
Korrupt.
devatayah
459 D an
462 D c ti
460 A hatva
46i A
devayamlti
(mit Virama)
463 BD
465
464
mtata
AV 7. 106. 1.
Kaus, 6. 1 f. Vait. 16. 17.
466 A
karmaviparyasetayad rktam om B karmaviparyasotiyacadakta om
C karmaviparyaseti ya ca yaddrktta tu; D karmaviparyaseti ya cad rkta.
BC
tirtham
Zum
folg. vgl.
Gop. Br.
1.
3.
3.
Vol. xxxiii.J
97
3. 5.
Atharvaprdyascittani
468
eva
vanlya
juhuyad
atha
agneyam hautram
candramasam
sauryam audgatram
daivatany
vayavyam adhvaryavam
brahinatvam tasya ha va agnir hota "sid vayur adhvaryuh
473
474
surya udgata candramS brahma
prthivi va ream
ayatanam agnir jyotir antariksam (vai) 475 yajusEm ayatanam 476
|
vayur
477
dyaur
'tharvanam
jyotir
(vai)
samnam ayatanam
475
aditya
475
candrama jyotir iti
apo
ayatanam
47 9 somam^so ce 'ti 481
478
atha yad avocama
ca 4
"pattau
yajamanam ced 482 rajanam 482 stena 483 ha va prathama 484
jyotir
||
|1
adhvaryur
vihita
ity
syur
487
vihitas 488
upaca-rabhaksapratis
490 ce 490
ty
atra 493
yajamana-"sane marva
camasau
tatra
jallye
nidhaya
'sya bhaksakale bhaksany
a
homat
upasthapayeyur
prak samista-yajur 494
samista-yajuso
|
467'
fehlt in
470 fehlt
ABCD.
*68
471
bei A.
C yajustam
yajustham
472
samatain
A.
atharvatam
cf.
469 A bhuva
Brahm. Pray.
rgveo*a-"dinam ca garhapatya-"dibhir abhisambamdhah srutyamtare rgvedo garhapatyo yajurvedas tu daksinah samavedas tu ahava473
myata iti
Vgl. zu diesen Ausfiihrungen KS 25. 1. 4 10.
4
4 ?5 fehlt bei BCD
474 ksavam B unklar C
B fiigt eamna ein.
yam
vidhiyate
477 CD
47
dyauh
Der folgende Passus
AC saumam
C yemd rajanah
48
455 1.:
vittam?
Bei
ABC
yajamanasya
fiigt
BC
avocamo
BCD
C
492
karmabhyuddhvaryau
49
sabhaksanapaya
VOL. XXXIII.
D
4 94
Part
488
apavarabhaksapratiscety
[ujpapattau?
ACD
pay ay a?
* 7 9 1.:
ist
fehlt atra
bhaksapratiscaity
avovama
karmabhyadhvaryo
459
bhaksabhaksanapaya
BC
L
yajna
vihitat
(?)
upacara491
BC
4 3
bhaksabhaksanaparya C bhak1.:
anyatra bhaksabhasanat
yaju
7
98
J. v. Negelein,
[1913.
homac 495 ced 495 yajamana 495 agacchet samastan eva bhabhaksayec chesam
samapya 'vabhrtham
496
5
atha ha yam 497 jivan 497 na 497 srutipatham
abhyupeyuh
498
kiyantam asya kalam agnihotram juhuyur yady
gachet
eva hitam ayus tasya 'sesam prasamkhyafya] 4 " tavantam 500
kalam 500 tad 501 asya 501 'gnihotram hutva 'tha 'sya prayaksajapan japtva
|j
\\
502
503
'pi
myena pracareyur vyakhyatah patraviniyogo
yathai 'va
sariradarane sa cej jivann 504 agachet 504 katham va prosya 505
505
"gataya
yathakaryam 505 karmani kuryat sa 506 cet svayam|
507 vacako
asya 'gnm adhaya 'dbhutani
japam
ha
iti
agnihotram
srutir
bhavati
512
||
atha
||
agnibhih
pramlyeta
ahitagnir
vipravasann
515
tatra patraviniyogam pratiyad
ity aha 'smarathyo
|
D5
516
ya
513
katham
yady
upasadya vihrtya gnim
|
ty
517 va
ahrtya prajvalya vihareyur nirmathyam
prajvalya vihared
518
etavata
'mgaprabhrtibhih
samsthapyai Vam patraviniyoity
|
gam
ity
519
520
anuchadayed
yad yad utsannah
syur varam522
esa
te 'gne 523
patram
ty apsu samavaped
|
sahitani 521
49
upahareyuh C hareyuh
7Bjlvantah
498 Ein ahnlicher. z. B. Ait. Brahm. 7. 9
jivanah;
yo)
erwahnter Fall 1st der, dafi man von dera Ahitagni falschlich hort, er sei
gestorben; cf. (Asv. Pray. 8b): yasmimst ahitagnau jlvaty eva mrtasabdah
495
49G
homadyajamaua
(st.
yam
1.
502
viniyoge
5 os
fe hlt bei
BCD
504
jivanamntagachet
CD
ji-
jararaarya
vadati
jaramardyam
511
jaramayam
sarvatra
512
ABC
si* cf.
Vol. xxxiii.]
yo agnis
Atharvaprdyascittdni
524
99
3. 8.
526
smamayani
52
dyad $ dasaratram niyatavrata[h] syuh
ty a-
prada-
gotrina
ekadasyain
'dbhutani prayascittani 53
vacakam 531 japam
532 tato
533 bhavanti
rjayitvS,
yathasukhacarino
|
enam anahitagnim
5
samvatsaram ca 'pi
kegasmasru - lomanakhani 529 vapayitva
yady
taya me
hy aroha taya me hy avie
va 527 lohamayani va brahmanebhyah
525
sa 535
iva
534
vrtha-'gnina
536
hutva ma-
iti
7
atha
daheyur evam
|j
||
537
bhavatl
patnya
'ty
aha 'smarathyo
ne 'ty ahatuh kanvagopayanau
yadai Va
karma 'bhy 53 adhvaryur 53 vihitas tadai 'va sarvakratun praty
atha katham asyam apattau
apado vihita ity ahur acarya
asyai
mrtpatraviniyoge
'ti
yathai
Va
tham
tatra
agnin
'ranyor
sarlra-'darsane
'smarathyo
esa 54
545
charlra- darsane
kurya[c]
ahrtya 'thai
palasa-tsaruny
tani purusa-"krtlni krtva ghrt[en]a 'bhyajya mamsa 546 -tvag|
547
yady
ghrtam ca bhavatl ti ha vi(r)jnayate
ahavaniyo devalokam yadi daksinagnih pitrlokam yadi garha-
asthy asya
patyo manusyalokani
avaruddham bhavatl
548 lokesv 54 ^
yadi yugapat sarvesv asya
tasmad yugapad
eva sarvamt sadayitva 'tha yady enam an[v]alabheta punar
dahet stenam 549 iva 549 tv 549 eva bruyad yat kim ca Vidhi3
ha
ti
vijnayate
AY.
52 4
527
K.
BCD
12. 2.
bei
AC
asyaisa
1.:
52 8
patriyo?
EC
534
'
53
rorna
3. 6:
varino
asyaisat
*
unverstandlich;
oben
vgl.
AB
526 s.
Gop. Br. 2.
pre
4. 1 und
unter
unten
das
Vgl.
32 folg.
633
<>
52 9
vacakam
statt
hi 55
5:5
7?
ca
S. 25. 7.
kam
'ti
|
Va
536
4. 9;
6.
fehlt
karmabhy uddhvaryau
mrt
"9
s. a.
citta
532 fehlt
vacako japam
bei D fehlt gnina
bei
5 Gegebene;
535
537
asyaiva;
patrya;
apadlm
esam
"namedham
543
545
So
mamsam
547
ity
549
svenam
der Rest
fehlt.
c f.
asame
vgl.
100
J. v. Negelein,
ayata
552
masu samanv a
'tra
553
samanvagamevavam
"gamayed
yat kimcid
kar-
viristam
yajiie
ti
||
||
mah
pah
bhavati
'sai 'va
apadyeta tasyai
ce
552
somatanur
[1913.
pravrtte
557
555
55S
yasya
tantre
559
"yur
grhi[t]va
56
upata-
kamam
561
'nugacheh
562
samapnuyur
tasya putram bhrataram vo 'padiksya
563
va rtvijam cai kam iva 564 ne 'tj
samapnuyur) na
3
(na 563
564
aha
na
hi
565
upadiksa
566
grhapatim
567
eta
ahoratrav
jived
ayam
ity
ekahany
samlksya
yadi many
(ekadvivasavane) 568 sarvani savanani samavesayed
yasmims
satu samave^ayet tasya savanasya vasam upayantl tarani
vanani nanatantrani ced api bhavanft durgapattau ca 56y sa-
'smarathyo
grhapater
vidyate
istaya[h]
573
syur avyavahitah
574
yah
572
kamam
ta
575
||
||
57
578 esa
pasyed ya
ma(ma)vasyayam 8 agneyah purodasas tarn
579 karoti
Had yajnas chipathikrtam
prakrtye taram vinai
dyate ya etam antarestim tanvite 'ti hi srutir bhavaty atha
|
553 B
samalage vacam C samansama tv agamayed (vavam) karmasu sama va tra
"gamayed agapayed statt agamayed zu lesen? also: im ersteren Falle
soil man zu ihm wie zu einem Diebe
1.: samanv(d. h.: leise) reden?
554 ABC sattranam
sss ABD
agame vacam?
552
1.
vagevaca
so 'tanur?
apattau?
(tva
karma
?)
||
sso
praklpte.
559
560
"yu
grhapati
set
gahiva
562
padi
C padiksam
ses
ivanitya
557 BD
553 BCD
sya
upatapa
CD nugachah; dem Wortlaut nach
Dem Sinne nach: ,,Wenn der Hausherr
ditt:
eines Opfers
563
ABCD
ne C
see
tir
lafct
upadiksya;
stirbt
564
."
ABCD
wiederholt die
568 Soil
Worte von samapnuyur bis upadiksa (sic!).
C samiksa
569 A vasamaso
wohl Glosse sein und gelautet haben: ekadivasani
570 B vaistinam
57
BCD casamasau.
A sama BC saniavesa1
vaksakamo
574
572
avyavahita
krta
C pavi
577
(?)krtam
BC
BC
yascaika
avyaveditah
yathavaidanena
kascaikam
575
578
B yekatantrai
B yesama
573
drstayah
576
5 ^9
ABCD
pakrtam
Vol. xxxiii.]
Atharvaprayascittani 4.
101
1.
580
)
yasya paurnamasyam (va
vyapadyeta kamam tatra prakrtih 581 kuryat
tad 582 ya[h] kratur [dyavakrato va vayo]
|
582
nirvapaty
agneyam astakapalam aindram
ekadasakapalam asadya havimsi praya^cittir 583 juhuyad yad
udagan mahato mahima asya 584 mano asya jagatah parthi585 kacid
kasmai devaya
vasya ma nah prapad uchuna
anya
vidyate
'tha
havisa paridadema
svahe
ty
pari
587
586
mo 588 ye 589 kecit tayajnasya bhojyasya
bhojyavatka
59
trasthah pasavah somakarina
tesam bhaksabhaksanam tad
|
yatha
hotram airayat svahe ti saddhotaram hutva 594 prajaiti hi srutir bhavati 595
patih sarvam eve 'dam utsrjed
||10i:
divi
596
(ity
daso
atharvavede
'dhyayah
595
vaitanasutre
iti
prayascitta
yajnaprayascitte
tritlyo
prasamge ekasa-
'dhydyah
mdptdh.
597
599
yad udbo-) dhayeyus 598 ced vatsa
vayavya(sannayyam
599
599
599
600
(ya)
yavagva
sa[nnay]yam
yajeta
'pyeoo ekasya[m]
|
sso
liest
va fehlt bei B.
statt
dieser
AC
prakrti
582
krtl
'
bei
59s A
udabodhayeyus B udbhaddoyeyus ....
samajyam; cf. Ap. 9. 1. 24ff.
599 B
vatsayayavyathavagvasainyam C vatsavayavyayayavagvasa; D vatsavayavyaya yavagva sayam; zu diesem Abschnitt vgl. Asv. 3. 13. 13 folg.
600
AD
tath
102
J. v. Negelein,
[1913.
601
samatha
cf.
thakrtyah
sva B sruh
;
6 2
604
vasanapankrtya
Brahm. Pray. 17 b
vatsanasakrta
(aufierst korrupt)
K. &
. .
tsanaeos
25. 4. 39.
"dhanam vidhiyate kirn tarhi mitratveno 'padiyate tatraidam prayascittam vaks[y]amanam bhavati vatsaprahanam kim vatsanadhane prayascittam
mrganapasunamdhane prayascittam ma "bhud ity apakrta iti
j
dhane prayascittam
apakrtair
'chanti
vardevata-visesa-niyamartham
yavagve 'ti
ttamane vatsan apakrtya punar yajete 'ti ... vayavya yavagva pracatatra nimittakala eva nirvapah
ryeta
nirvapakalo na visasyate
kuta etad gamyate
sayamdohartta vaksyati imdraya vrihin nirvapeta
vayavye
'ti
svobhute tesv anunirvaped iti .... svobhutesv eva vrihi-yavesu va prakrtebhyo 'gnyadibhyo 'nyadibhyo 'nunirvapet
sannayyabhavad dhota
nirgatayanabhyuditesti yasya sanDayyam candrama abhyuditi darsanat ... vgl. oben 2. 1 u. Brahm. Pray. 22 a: sayamdoham iti samastata
.
yam doham
tatra
rtham
pasukamo 'mavasyam
istva tusiiim
cf.
Agn.
Vol. xxxiii.]
Atharvaprdyascittdni 4.
103
1.
tardoham
>
yavagum nirupya
srapayitva yastavyam
(RV.
7.
sa
vajy asi va
90. 2);
Pray. 68 a:
mathya
21
tatha 'nyatarauass
zu
ity eke;
nir9.
Asv. Pray. 17 b:
sayamdohe naste pratardoham dvidha vibhajyai kam bhagam atamcya tabhyam yagam kuryat
pratardohe naste
amiksanase 'py etat tasyah pratad-devatyam purodasam krtva yagah
tardoba-vikaratvat
amiksam eva utpadya taya yajete 'ti kecit vajinanase ajyena yagah
sannayye ubhaya-dose aimdram pamcasaravam oda1.
cf.
ff.;
[|
||
||
||
||
||
nam
atra sarva-prayascittam
garhapatye srapayitva tene 'mdra-yagah
608 A
609 A cedvaivisnu-smaranam ca karyam
pratardhi cen
6io A
en
dham B dvaidhyam
dvaidham
A yajneto
"nyatarata
612 A
B yajete
pancasaravodanam; cf. Asv. 3. 10. 27; K. S. 25. 5. 2;
6 13 ABC
s. auch unten in 4. 4.
D setzt mit dem
nirupya
korrupten Passus wieder ein: tau bhau ce dusyen ma tarn aimdram
614 Brahm.
Pray. 7 a bringen folgende
pamcasaravam odanam nirupya
Klassifizierung des rituell Unreinen: dustam trividham varnayanti
||
||
ibid.
8a:
mayam
iti
sesah
iti
adbhih
nistapen marttikam
athava nirlikhed iti varttate
varttate
nirlikhed daru-
sauvarna-rajatam samsodhayed
nirlekhanam ca samsodhanam
iti
marttikasya nistapanam sauvarna-rajatasya 'dbhir eva samsodhanam
Uber den Begriff des Substituts findet sich ibid.
upasargah
|
||
sambadhyate
104
J. v. Negelein,
[1913.
yajeta
'tha
yatha
paribhadrakah
palasasya
asvatthasya
gardabhandah khadirasya
anyatra
kadira(!) bhavati samanyena tu kvacit tatas tesam aparigrahah
'coditatvat pratisiddhasya ca masade (!) aparigraha eva tatra 'nugrahika
|
Hand:
eis cf.
||
617
Stellen.
tatra
svistakrt
"jyena
na yajeta
verstandlich
vyapannam havir
prayaja- dy-anga-havir-raase
||
tu
jale viniksipet
[|
na
padyate
6 ts
Nur
||
||
als
||
utsiktam
yugapat sarvatas cet ... vidiksu [cet]
622 So
carum apyayati
BC; A liest: yajnasya tva pramadanmayabhimaya paridadema svahe ty. B).'s. Index verzeichnet nur: yajnasya tva
pramayonmayabhimaya pratimaya, so auch die wahre Meinung der korr.
Fassung von D vgl. Asv. 3. 13. 15 zu vgl. ist ferner: Ap. 9. 13. 6.
.
||
||
Yol. xxxiii.J
Atharvaprdyascittdni 4.
'tputam
623
tantare
sa
agne
105
1.
tvam
na
631
ahutilopavyatyase
633
629
iti
sarvaprayascittam
tvam no
634
juhuyat
[|
623
Audi
AB skamdet C
skande
624 c f.
Ap.
9. 13. 1.
25
c f.
Man.
S. 3. 1. 2. 1.
j|
putam
629_63i
vittam
'ty
||
va cica C ve cinva
63
cf.
Ap.
9. 13.
deyam.
631 A evatamtaravedvittam B devatanamnarecacPassus g-ewesen.
632 Das
cittam C devatamtare cec cittam; so D, jedoch: tara cec ...
Zuviel oder Zuwenig bei dem Hersagen von Mantra erheischt Siihne
(Asv. Pray. 18 a): asravana-pratyasravana-vasatkaresu mamtramtara-nyuna'tireke
juhuyat
sati
||
ekasya
prasangad dhomam lopaprayascittam likhyate
anekadvayor bahunam api vichede caturgrhitam manasvatya juhuyat
'gnihotra-'tipatti-nimittam manasvatya caturgrhitam hosyami 'ti samkalpya
Agn. Pray. 10 b:
tavato(m)
cf.
6S4
tyasenatyata
tyasenamnatah
S. 25. 5. 19.
Asv. 3. 13. 14.
prag dhotur yajya-'nuvakya-viparyase
vgl.
5.
esc
19.
tyasemnatyata D "tyasenvamnata;
637 V
17 b: yagat
gl. Asv. Pray.
sati
und
ibid.:
krte tu yage
yajyayam
anuvakya-viparyasa-jate prayascittam eva na tu yaga-'bhyasah
api avihita-devatayam tad-devatyayam anyadevatyayam va vihita-devata||
"desam krtva vihitam eva devatam dhyayan yadi vasat kuryan na tada
106
J. v. Negelein,
rkto
63
abadhah
'bhy
syad
63 ^
[1913.
bhur janad
iti
garhapatye
juhuyad yadi yajusta
daksinagnau juhuyad
yadi samata om svar janad ity ahavamye juhuyad
yady 639
brahmata
om
bhur
bhuvah
svar
om
anajnata
janad
ity aha-
om bhuvo janad
iti
eva
vaniya
juhuyad
3
hayisyan yasyai
'tani
"jyasyai
641
devatam
645
642
yadi bhaginlm
'nam
tatrai
yajeta
sve 64
Sjyabhagante
ava-
nirupya
smaret
yatra
sthane 644
639
"vahya
upo-'tthaya
skanne 646
643
642
"vapa-
na "driyeta
barhisi
j
na "vahayed
da-
||
||
||
"disu
vyutkramali
'nyadiyam
anuvakya-viparyaso
evam yajya-viparyasah
ajya- viparyaso
anyasya 'nubruyat
jauhavau-"pabhrtayor ity adi
daksinagnau
vgl. dazu ferner
devatanam viparyase yajyanuvakyaviparyase va juhu-'pabhrd-dhruva-'jyanam paryase va purvardbaVadana-samaye aparardba-"dy- avadane va havir- viparyase va yad vo deva
iti
(Asv.
atipatayani
yajamano
3. 13. 18)
mukhyam dhanam
ity
dadyat
||
tasmai
||
jnane prayascittam
||
||
rialien sprechen auch Asv. Pray. 16a: juhu- pabhrd-dbruva-"jyanam vitasmai yajamano
paryase yad vo deva iti Bruvabutim brahma juhuyat
mukhyam dhanam dadyat vgl. ibid. 16 b: havisam viparyaseno 'dvasane
||
||
vaisvanaraya purnahutih
||
||
|j
||
tarn
nigamayet
jj
sthaninim ca 'dhva-
Vol. xxxiii.]
107
4. 1.
Atharvaprayascittdni
dase
652
yajeta
tarn
dvesyaya
daksinam
dadyad
ca653
|
p uro -
||
visnusmaranam
jj
||
iti
||
'sthaninim yajet
yadi kasmims cit karmani yastavya[m] devatam ana[vajhyai 'vo 'ttaram uttaram uttaram karma kuryat tada yavati gate
smarati tad evo [1.: 'aivoj 'potthaya "vahayet yady asthaninim pramadad
|
nigamesu ca niga-
645 A
vapasthane
yajed B yajetta
Asv. 3. 13. 19 cf. Asv. Pray. 17 b: anubruhl ty atra bhaginy-ullekhe
hotary api bhaginlm puro 'nu va vadati prag vadanat smarane sati catur-
mayet
643
44
bahya
BC
||
'tiriktam mamtrena purvavat samsthapya "jyam samskrtya sruksruvam sammrjya tenaiva mamtrena svahakaramtena "havanlye 'dhvaryuh sruva -"hutim juhuyat
yajnaya brahmana idam
ajya-bhaga'namtaram sthalyajyena hutva visnu-smaranam kuryat sakhe-'dhma-bar-
ca
||
||
||
nam
||
||
||
||
||
||
uktam prayascitta-pradipe
ajya-Valokana-'namtaram etat
sarvada
sa ca gre vaksyate
ca
....
va
idhma-barhisoh
nyuna-tireke
samuccayo
prayaja-'nuyajanam
64" AD
648 c f. Brahm.
rddharatrat
yasya purodasau
Pray. 31 b
duhsrtav iti brahmanoktam prayascittam pradhanesv eva tad bhavati
649 c f.
Ap. 9. 15. 18; Asv. 3. 14. 1.
gemeint ist M. S. 1. 4. 13.
scittam
ity
||
iti
kecit
||
||
||
65 o
viksamepato
BCD ksamam
viksabheyato
652 c f.
o ben
2.
M.
cf.
S. 1. 4. 13.
esi
ksama
atha yasya purodasau ksayata iti srutidarsanat pindapitryajfiadisu punahsamskara eva karttavya ity uktam Agn. Pray. 16 a: havisi duhsrte catuhsaravam odanam brahmanan bhojayet yada havir apakvam bhavati tada
|
tenai
Va
havisa
tat
sistene
'stva
108
J. v. Negelein,
[1913.
sarvaksame
dase
pale
655
nasta
656
657
purnahutih)
jj
||
"sadana-"disrapanad
dadhaml
'ti
(ibid.)
mamtrabhyam apsu
niksipet
evam
sva-"dibhir
||
agnaye [vaisjvanaraye
agnaye vaisvanaraya svahe \\
yavac-chrapanam kapala-bhedane gayatrya tva
anusamcarantu
sataksaraya samdadhamiti samdhaya 'bhinno gharmo
trayastrimsacL devan (ibid.) iti mamtrabhyam apsu praksipet||
(Asv. 3. 14. 10)
purayitva juhuyat
'dam
[|
||
||
patra-"sadana-"di
||
||
||
||
||
||
dharayata pranam
me
dharayata prajam
me
dharayata pasun
3.
me
dha-
esa
durgadi-ganah
||
Vol. xxxiii.]
658
pitanasto
'ti
Aiharvaprayascittani
juhuyat
dadhami
655
kapale bhinne gayatrya tva sataksaraya samsamdhaya dhata dadhatv ity eva juhuyad
'ti
109
4. 1.
660
ekakapalam nirvaped asvinam dvikapalam vaisnavam trikapalam saumyam catuhkapalam 661 nas^e bhinne ca
bhargavo hota 662 klta-'vapannam 662 sannayyam madhyamena parnena mahi dyaur 663 ity antahparidhidese ni664
mahi dyauh prthivl ca na imam yajnam miminayen
agneya[m]
bhQmim
ity
prayascittam
|j
kevala-patrabhede
||
|]
Man.
ess
659
S. 3. 1. 25.
M.
].
a gam
eeo
agan
Ap.
6.
wiederholt ksame yato sya ksamam syat tato yajeta dvesyayatam dadyad daksinam ca purodase; cf.
Brahm. Pray. 32 b yadi kapalam bhidyeta gayatrya tva sataksaraya sam6G1 cf. K. S. 25. 5. 1.
dadhamiti samdhayo 'padadhyat
Brahm. Pray.
9. 13. 8.
Asv.
3. 14. 10.
S. 1. 4. 13.
bahunam
praksepah kecid icha(m) ichamti yato jatam tad apy aryo (?) tayato jate
tad apy agatam (?) yato jatani tad apy agur iti ye tu madhyama-puru33 b
atha yasya kapalam
sena pracaramti tad apy aga svahe 'ti
nasyati 'ti (vgl. M. S. 1. 4. 13) praksalya (?) yada tat (?) havih 8amtisthe[t]
tatha-'gnaye vaisvanaraya dvadasakapalam nirvaped iti .... 34 a: nastadhigatam kapalam apsu prahared iti varttate visvayur jato (?) tatam tad
namas te rudra ity anumamtranam.
vgl. Agn. Pray.
apy aga svahe ti
samdadhaml 'ti
17 a
kapalam bhinnam anapavrtta-karma gayatrya
samdhaya po 'bhyavahareyuh purodasa-srapanat prak kapala-bliede gayatrya tva .... m! 'ty anena mamtrena samdhanaka-drayyaih samdhanam
krtva 'bhinno gharmo jlradanur yata arttas (nach Asv. 3. 14. 10) tad
.
agan
evam apalldha
9. 13. 9) iti
Ap.
'bhiksiptesu
svadibhir
'stih
|
abhmnani ca
'bhyavaharet
mrnmayani kapalebhyo
bhumir bhumim agan mata
002
hotyatakitabhih na
'nyani
mrnmayani bhinnany
5;
vgl.
663
RV.
1.
oei
22. 13.
iti
110
J. v. Negelein,
ksatam
bhyo
666
valmikadvare
trena
mahl dyauh
665 cf.
[1913.
prasimcet
apsu va tusmm
Asv. Pray. 16 a
visyamdama(da)nam
na
yajet
||
sarva-n#se
payo-vikaratvat
||
||
pura prayajebhyo
yadi prak prayajebhyo bahihparidhy amgara skandet tarn abhimamtrayeta adhvaryu[m]
ma "himsir ity evam adibhih purastad dakeinatah pascad uttarata iti
mamtravisesair uktam abhimamtranam
yasyam disi skanno bhavati
.
mamtrah
vyam
||
||
||
||
||
||
mamadanta iha no
upasthat
deva
sahasra-srhgo
yacchate \\
prahrtam amgaram abhijuhuyat
vrsabho jataveda
pratikah ma no himsid dhimsito na tva jahami goposam ca no vlraposam ca no yaccha svahe 'ti
tatah sarva-prayascittam
haret
|]
nirrter
j|
[[
||
||
visnusmaranam ca
||
ttaram eve
namas
niyamah
'ti
te astv ayate
ma
tapo
ma yajnapatis tapas
iti pratiyatra nisldasi
ced adhvaryu[m] ma hims![r] yaja
ma
yajnas tapan
ist ein
besonders deutlicher
Bekg
Vol. xxxiii.j
Atharvaprdyasdttdni
ntrya
namo
"ham
deva
mahi
te 663
Ill
4. 2.
astu parayate namo yatra nisidasi669 'ty abhimayajiiam dadhe nirrter upasthat 670 tarn devesu paridadami vidvan suprajas tvam gatam hi mamadanta iha no
|
anuprahj-tya
671
ity
soma|
nam svaranam
jah
||
fl
in der
677
674
anupraharati
ity
RV.
1.
Ry. 1.^18. 1.
AV. 7. 83.
678
25. 21.
675
3.
RV.
679
RV.
676
4. i. 5.
3. 62. 6.
eso BC
ahutavelayam Ap. 9. 2.
fast wortliche Ubereinstimmurig beider Stellen ist textgeschichtlich
682 A
681 A
bemerkenswert.
analambhuki; Komm. zu Ap.
palp
lesen?
9.
2.
68 *
K.
633 AC.
aparudhye B arupadhye
die
menstruierende Frau die zur
daB
bestimmen,
artava-vasad sparsana-'narha
Weihe notwendigen Gerate niederlegen und auf Sand sitzen reap, stehen,
nach Ablauf von drei Tagen mit Wasser, dem Kuhurin beigefiigt worden ist, sich reinigen und erst alsdann zu bestimmten Diensten zugelassen
werden soil; vgl. Asv. Pray. 18 b: Btitikam putravatlm vimsati-ratrena
tatah prag yajamana eva rajasvalakarmani karayet masena strijanim
yam api ca karmani kuryat sutake (!) yajamanah karmakale snatva karAsv. Pray. 12 a anvadhanamani kuryat
(vgl. auch oben Anm. 257).
||
||
||
||
[|
yo
udag-agram vidhaya patnl-mamtran yajamano japet etad [djvitlya-prayovikatisu (1.: vikrtisu) dvitiyo 'pakramo na bhavati
upakramo-'ttarage
kam rtumat! cet sarvatra tarn vibaye stih prathama-prayoge 'nvaram||
||
||
||
bhaniyayain vrato-'panayanad urdhvam ced rtumatl tarn vihaya 'nvarambhaniyam samapya yasya 'nvarambhamya tat-karma samapayet yatha
"huh isty-anvarambhamyayam pasuke vaikrtlstisu vralad urdhvam rtum
s
drstva kuryat karyam na lopayet
prosite yajamane vratye hani rtumatl
||
||
||
||
yagah
prosite 'pi samkalpo-'ttarakalam cet tarn
aparudhya kuryat
caturmagyesu vaisvadeva-parvano yage krte varunapraghasa-^disv anvarabdhesv api malina-'mbarayam sve sve kale paadhane daksina-pratigrahat
rudhyai Va yaga ity uktam saradvayyam
purvam ced rtumatl tada 'gnayo laukika bhavamti sarvam utsrjyam
cet
tada
pamcame
hi
||
||
||
||
daksinaj
112
J. v. Negelein,
[1913.
iti
tasya
ced
692
693 va 694
purodasas ced adhisrita udvijed utpated
tarn udvasya bar hisy asadayet kim utpatasi kirn utprosthah 695
santah santer iha "gahi aghoro yajiiiyo bhutva "sida sadanam
dyat
rtumatl
ced
pratigraha-'namtaram
anamtaram agnihotra-"rambhah
tarn
sudhysamapayet
Ap. 9. 2. 3.
aparudhya
685
||
AV.
||
14. 2. 71 cf.
es? ABC
A "pakuvlta D pa[gr]hm(yi)ta
bahihparidhi (A
690 C
689 A
ess D
dhi aus)
ahre
unklar;
bruya _
wohl: sakrayisyan; denkbar ware samgrahisyan vgl. Ap. 9. 16. 1 und die
c
686
laftt
Bestimmung
69i
3. 13. 16.
bedarf
wenn
es,
eva juhuyat
||
|j
(RV. 4. 1. 4
daya yajeta
ity
folg.)
AB
94 Asv.
693
Asv. 3. 13. 17.
utyuted
Siihneder
a
18
Kasuistik
sieht
auch
fiir
die
Pray.
ausgebildete
folgende,
zeremonien interessante Moglichkeit vor: ekakapalah purodasah sarva-
692
j|
hutah par|y]ava[rta]te
ta[t]
||
||
'numamtrayate pratiksatre
askam dyaur
yajnaye
juhuyat
prajanayatu (Ap. 9. 6. 7) svaha
'dam askan ajani prajani
prajanislmahi (Ap. 9. 6. 7) svaha yajnaye
'dam
cf. Agn. Pray. 17 b: yadi purodasah sphuted vo 'tpated va
yadi
uduched (1.: udvijed?) va tada kim utpatasi
purodaso bhidyat
asminn aslda
sadanam svam iti barhisi nidhaya tato ma himslr
|j
||
||
||
||
||
||
695 cf.
barhisi ity abhimamtrayet
Ap.
Pray. 16 b purodasasya bhedane patane va
11; Asv.
9. 16.
kim
||
||
3. 14.
13; Asv.
ti
||
abhimamtrya sarva-
Vol. xxxiii.]
113
Atliarvaprayascittani 4. 3.
tejasa "jyasva
tv 696
69G
tariyat
iti
697
"Imtim 69 ^
699 va
nirvaped vyapadyeta)
6es(ad apradhanalope 'ntaraye
ced
svistakrd-ide
vadyes)as
vyapadyeta "jyena
samapnuyat
700 na krtam antaram va
samapte ced dusto
vidyat punaristir
|
2
abhyavarteta
yajno yajnasya prayascittir bbavati ti
na
samitsv
ahitasu
na
'gnim grhad uddbareyur
agnyadheye
'nyata
||
na prayayan na 'nugacbed
yadi prayayad anuva
samvatsaram
gacbed
samvatsarabbiprayo va yadi tvared
iihareyur
agni-
ced
paridhidese ninayed
696
BC
tvamtanya
eos
madvijenS
70i
duste
9.
6.
fat)t
10;
dies
cf.
Asv.
"Wort
eva[ni]
'ty
711
adhisritam
sarasarayat
[d]uhyamana
nvayat;
nvamtariyat
ABC hutim
ABCD sarasara
O
11. 19;
3.
712
sarasarayat;
699
(BC
'rat)
Komm.
madvijeta
s.
auch
in
AD.
TOO
mtaye
syad;
Ap
Brahm. Pray. 43 a
sabdam kuryat;
C tvan
vgl.
RV.
atho
"dvasitam
5. 24.
^02
|
704
1.
tapavasena
Ap.
9.
RV.
707
6. 10.
?05
agnis
1.
22. 13;
visyandamanam agni-
homah atha bibhatse dravye madhyama- palasa- parnena valmika-vapayam prajapate na tvad etany anya ity rca praksipya dravyamtarena
708 D
homah athava tusiiim praksipya dravyamtarena homah
7 ^9 Diese
und die inzwischenliegenden Worte fehlen
ityamtani
7ii
7io D
bei B.
Ap. 9. 2. 5; cf. oben Anm. 93
palasaparnena
|
||
und Agn. Pray. 8b: visyandamanam mahl dyauh prthivl ca na ity ahavamyasya bhasmante ninayet visyandanam tu purvavat adhisrita-'vasthayam pay[o]-yavagv-ady-agnihotra-dravya-visyamdanena yadd 'gnim
|
athai 'nad
prdpyate tada sthali-gata-dravyo-'pary udakam upasimcet
daksinena panina 'bhimrsya japati divam trtlyam devan yajno agat
purvahutau (Ait. Brahm. 7. 5. 3) ity etabhyain tata[h] sthallgatam apsu
|
VOL XXXIil.
Part
I.
114
J. v. Negelein,
[1913.
714
713
715
adhiSriyamanam
dohayitva 'dhiSrayed
adhisritam
skanded
unniyamanam 716 unnitain punar eva
ce[t]
sannam 717 ahutam 717 skandet 718 punar amya 'nyam 719 do-
syam sthalyam
720
ti 721
|
bhumim prapyate
ahavanlyasya
ity
712
ABC
abhimamtrayeta
garbham sravamtam agadam akarma 'gnir
parastad (Ap. S_. 9. 4. 1) iti bhinnam
(akarma nach Asv. S. 3. 10. 31)
siktam va 'bhimamtrayeta (soweit \vortlich gleich Asv. Pray. 3 a folg.)
sthali-bhedena viksiptam agnihotra-dravyam dustam bhavati skamdanena
ca viksiptam ubhayam yavat skannam tavan-matram dusta[m] bhavati na
samudram vah prahinomi svam yonim
patragatam (cf. oben Anm. 724)
arista asmakam vlra mayi gavah aamtu gopatav (Asv.
api gachata
sravam
3. 11. 6;
717 A sannamahutam
716 Bei A
dittographiert.
srayamanam
718 Brahm.
C
samnamamhutam
B sannamahutam
Pray. 42 a
werden folgende Moglichkeiten aufgezahlt: yady adhisritam skamded
yad udvasyamanam yad[y "udjvasitam yadi vo 'nmyamanam (?) yady
unnita[m] yadi purah purahrtam (?) [cf. Komm. zu Ap. 9. 6. 2] homaya
varumm nigadya varunya "jyam juhuyat (!) imam
punar avanlyad
ca nigadya tat tva yarn! (RV.
me varuna (RV. 1. 25. 19) ity adya
in den Worten
1.24. 11) 'ty uttaraya juhuyat tatra karma pradarsyate;
ahutam skandet kann eine Korruption von
unseres Textes punar eva
.
719 ABC
anyan
yadi purah parahrtam skandet (s. o.) gesehen werden.
721
720
tanvam hutam
visvabhrti
Vergl. dazu: prajapater
Ap. 9. 5. 8f.
2 BCD
asi svaha Ap. 9. 6. 3; Asv. 3. 11. 11.
homa; 1.: a homat;
723 cf. Asv.
Pray. 3 b atha dohanadi-pracl[na]-haranat prag yadi skanne
samudram va iti mamtrena yad adya dugdham prthivim asrpta .... tan
:
may!
'ti
[Asv.
3. 11. 7]
patragata-sesena
homah
Vol. xxxiii.]
Afharvaprdyascittani 4.
116
3.
724
725
725
d uttamam ity abhimaapo
prahinomi 'ty
niniyo
726
ud uttamam varune 727 'ti
ntryo d uttamam inumugdhi na
3
varuny(en)a
72 s
"jya-"hutir
raria-homa-dravye
skanne
72
juhuya[c]
72
^^
deva)
tanvam hutam
visvabhrti
prajapater
(chavall
asl 'ty
[Ap.
3]
||
adhisrita-'vasthayam
eva
prakrta
homah
visvabhrti
prajapater
tanvam
hutam
asl
'ti
(Ap.
6.
3)
tatra
etad
asesa
'sesa
sa
yatra
syat tena
w D
vanl
8*
116
J. v. Negelein,
homah 732
homah 733
731
[yasya] skanno
[1913.
732
pratar na 'sniyat
731
skanno
prata[r ya]sya
[syat] sayam na 'snlyan
734 ced abhivarsen mitro
(mantraskannam)
janan yatayati 735
sayam
syat
samidham adhaya
">^
mitro
'nya(rp) dugdhva punar juhuyad
mitro
dadhara
bruvano
uta
janan yatayati
prthivim
dyam
mitrah krstir animisa 'bhicaste mitraya havyani ghrtavaj
737 mantra-samskrtam 738
juhota svahe'ti
kita-'vapannam hira740
739 iti
741
valmlkavapayam
avanlya
nyagarbha
'nyam dugdhva
742
ced
3
punar juhuyat
agnihotram
anabhyuddhrtam suryo
ti
||
73i
j|
ABC skanno D
D homa syat
skamnna
C homat
732 A.
733
BCD
homat
homam
cf.
8 a:
J34
wortlich iibereinstiramend)
Asv.
3. 11.
3. 59.
B homasya
Agn. Pray.
syat
9. 6. 9;
Ap.
Ap.
1;
vielleicht:
].
2.
9.
73G
6 (fast
Brahm.
Pray. 42a: avavrstam ua mrd eva karttakasecanam divyadir adbliih samtatra bhur bliuva
pataladi-dravya-vihrtair ity arthah
sarga ity arthah
.
iti
iti
tatra
etat
bruvaiia
iti
samid-adhanam
|
tatas
||
[|
||
amtaram nimitta-'nantaram
ayam tamtrah
739
AV. 4. 2.
^37
|
740
7.
'feva
juhuyat
||
athava prakrta-mamtra-sthane
738
74i
ABCD
mamtram-
Mss. apa
resp. api.
unreinen Gegenstandes zu entauftern, gilt das
Heraufgiefien resp. Aussetzen desselben auf einen Ameisen- oder Maulwurfhiigel, das Aufhangen auf Baumen, das Fortwerfen in Wasser.
Letztere drei Arten bei Beseitigung eines Fotus angewendet: K. ^. 25.
Als
Mittel,
sich
eines
10. 14.
praja(va)patyarca
.
Vol. xxxiii.]
117
Atharvaprayascittdni 4. 4.
743
ihai
'va
743
Brahm. Pray. 51
a:
'gnihotra-patram
samstlrya
745
aham amusyayanam
prahasid idam
746
iti
pravrttapitau
hierzu Ap. 9. 7. 6;
s.
pravrttanipattau
pravrttapipacau (tvau?)
Brahm. Pray. 58 a folg. behandeln das gleiche Thema
pratar agnihotrarn ced abhyudiyad anv agnir usasam agram akasad (M. S. 1. 8. 9) ity
.
unnltam abhimamtrayate
(Komm.) pratar agnihotragrahanat pramte
na hi suryabhyudaya eva
gnau pratar agnihotrartham abhyudiyat
yasya 'hutam agnihotram suryo 'bhyudiyad brahmana-darsanat tatre 'darn
prayascittam anusamgam kuryad anv agnir ity unnltam abhimamtrayate
brahmanadarsanat
anadesad adhvaryur evabhimam tray ate ahavammam amum iti nama
[yam] yajamana ihai Ve 'ty abhimamtrayate
grhnaty amusyayanam iti gotram mam yajnadattam bharadvaja ity evam
anyatra 'tha 'mum iti ... pratar vaster iti amtato 'nusajed iti sayamhutai maitram carum nirvapet
agnihotra-kalatikrama uktam
sauryam
imdhanau damekakakapalam hute hutamatre sadyahkriya syad iti
pat! vagyatav anasnamtau sarvahnam upasiyatarn
agnisamlpe
|
747 ABCD
piak purvasya "huter idam praj^ascittam
vgl. oben 1. 2.
748 A vanaro
B caro; cf. Asv. 3. 12. 8.
saury a; cf. Ap. 9. 7, 7.
749 Auch der Bruch der
Schweigepflicht verlangt Siihne (Asv. Pray. 17 a):
.
yatra vagyamo vihitas tad-bhrese ato deva (RV. 1. 22. 16) iti japed api
va 'nyam vaisnavim
upamsu-madhyama-"dir yatra svaro vihitas tad||
syama
||
yatra
(Taitt.
ekasruty-adi
75
||
752
Brahm.
3. 7. 11.
vihitam
5)
tad-bhrese
753 BC
12. 9.
dvayokamchoh ddvayor gathoh; verbessert nach
754 Brahm.
Ap. 9. 7. 9.
Pray. 47 a: yadi rudrah pasun abhimanyeta
dvayo gavo sthalya dohane ca dohayitva samanlya sajur jataveda (M. S.
1. 8. 6) iti
dvayor gavyo sthalya dohanena
purvam ahutim juhuyat
ca (?) dohayitva .... atha sthalyam samaniya bhur bhuvah svar agni3.
118
J. v. Negelein,
[1913.
yadi hy
755 diva
ayani diva prajasu hi many eta sajur jatavedo
prthi757 va
756 svahe ti
vya haviso vihi
sajuruho
syat sajur agnaye
diva prthivya haviso vihi svahe ti dvadasaratram agnihotram
|
juhuyad
svahe
atipattir
dvadasaratram
aparam
'ty
760
758
susiryatamo
768
nisayah
759
jusasva
sayamahuter
Ap.
756
6. 14. 12.
757
vrlhi
sajurudvo
758
Statt
759
sajuruho
dieser
und
suslryatapto
B susiryatamo C sruslryatamo
c f. K, S. 25. 10. 23; Agn. Pray, 4b:
dasa ghatikah praatha ratreh prathamah praharah Bayamhoma-kalah
tarhoma-kalah svakale pramtesv aguisu(!) uktakala-'tikrame prayascittam
^eo
||
j|
sayamkala-'tipattau
pratar vast(o)r namah svahe 'ti caturgrhltam hutva kusesu 'pasadanamtam krtva gam dattva homasesam samapya (!) ahavaniyam eva 'nuga-
mayen na daksinagnim
||
||
||
nahutyau va karye tato danipati vagyatau (s. oben 4. 4) tan eva 'gnin
homakale anasnaintau ekasya gor dugdham
upaslyatam
tena 'gnihotram hutva
adhisritya tasmin dvitlya-gor dugdham anayet
tatah pratahkale agnihotram
daksinagny-ahavaniyayor na dharanam
hutve 'stih agnir vratabhrd devata tvam agne vratabhrc
jataveatha pradah (A. 6. 3. 12. 14)
purnahutir va
purnamasavad anyat
mtesu homakalatipattau agnln vihrtya "jyam samskrtya juhvam catur|
jvalaya(m)to
||
||
||
||
naman vidhema
te
nama
vidhes tvam
|
asmakam nama
vacaspatih
somam
Vol. xxxiii.]
119
Atharvaprayascittani 4. 4.
mitor
761 aslta
763
apad ma daivyas tamtus chedi ma manusyah namo dive namah prthivyai (M. S. 1. 9. 1 Text variiert vgl. TA. 3. 5. 1) svaha vacaspataye brahDas Verfehlen des richtigen Zeitmana idam ta ity ahavaniye juhoti
punktes ist selbst bei Einzelheiten des Opfervollzuges ominos (Asv. Pray.
|
18
a)
vasatkdre anagate
atlte
va
ver-
||
|]
||
tad
vipascitah
pathikrn-mukhena 'tipanna-yagam va juhuyad iti kecit
etad isty-amtara-"rambhat prag yada tatra karaiia-vasan na krtam tada
||
||
'
||
||
'stih
karya
||
763 B
samany
765 Brahm.
Pray. 2 b
zitiert als mafigebend fur alle Siihnezeremonien
brahma prayascittani
sruvena juhoty etat sutram. Agn. Pray. 19 a sruvena juhuyad brahma
sarvatre 'stika-prayascittesu brahmaiva kartta ^rautapray. Candrika 1 a:
761
762
amtamitor
764
vastah
ABCD
samanya
BCD
-aha ratrim
caturgrhita-"di-visesa-'nuktau juhkartr-visesa-'nuktav
vahni-visesa-'nuktav ahavaniyah
karma -madhye patitani prayascittani tu ajyena bha-
homa-sadhana-patra-'nuktau juhuh
vam ekagrhitam
adhvaryuh
vamti
7 70
766 A
yasyanamnasyat B yasyainnamtadya C yatyanam767 A
dayadyad; BCD 'yadadyat
yasyannanadyat
76
BC daksinagnan
BC bhimloced; D bhiniproced
77 1 B
C "yanim
yu sama" C yuh sama* D yurasa|
nadyat
768
marudho
120
J. v. Negelein,
772
punar adadhita
773
*dhydyah samaptah
"va
772
Asv.
3. 12.
29
(RV.
3. 29. 10)
svad yoner
tata
iti
iti
||
yajnapr&yascitte
caturtlw
||
suryo
garhapatya "havaniyayor
ta
||
[1913.
'bha[v]
garhapatya'bhyastam iyat abhyudiyad va punaraprayascittih; K. 6. 25. 3. 24; cf. Asv. Pray. 10 b:
f.;
anugatau
'havamyav
Atharvaprayascittani,
tu
nase
mamtrena
6)
losclien
des garhapatya-Feuers
krama -'nupatteh
||
|j
||
||
||
Atharvaprayascittani.
of Koenigsberg,
University
Germany.
774
yena 'mtarhita[m]
mayam carum
77*
776
777
nirvaped
779
eva
ita
778
varunam yava-
prathamam
tre
liest statt
bahu*:
eva
ita
iti
6.
;
12.
CD
bahuvid uddhared
777
'ddhrtir
iti
vyakhyatam
yatra
yatra hiranyam
agmm
tam badhva(?)
'grato hared
iti
agner
visesah
caturgrhitam ajyam agrato haret caturgrhitena hiranyam badhyaiti purastat pratyanmukha ajyam juhuyat
cf. Asv. Pray.
atha "havaniye 'pranite yadi surya 'stamanam (!) tada bahuvidam
|
te
(!)
5b
tatha kecid
namtam
karayet
agnipranayana-
kale
'gnim nidhaya purastat pratyanmukha upavisya janav ajya (1.: janu acya)
s
usah ketuna svahe ti [A. S. 9. 7. 10J hutva pratahkala-'tipatti-pratar-vratabhrtisty- amtam
ahavaniya-'nugamavarjam kuryat
pratar-vratabhrtisty-amtam kuryad
VOL. XXXIII. Part II.
ity
eke
kuse[su]
779
'pasadanadi-
Ap.
9
9.
7.
1.
122
J. v. Negelein,
[1913.
780
agnir abbyo yonibbyo adhi jatavedah sa
jajne
gayatrya tristubba jagatya 'nustubba devo devebhyo havyam
prathamam
Kaus.
78i
S. 133. 6; die
prag bhasmana
(!)
'rani
mamthanopakramam krtva pratinidhim laukikagni-pramukham garhapatya-"yatane pratisthapya vihrtya homam krtva 'gnln utsrjya mathitva tapasvatistir jyotismatlstis ca kartavya purnahutl va
sarvesam nase
prari
'gnyadheyam pu-
naradheyam va kartavyam
surya-'stamayo-'daya-'namtaram sarvanugatau purvavan mathitva 'gnihotram hutva tapasvatisti[r] jyotismatlstis ca purnahutl va
vgl. Asv. Pray. 10 b: evam sarva-nase ayatana-tritaya-nistha-bhasmana 'rani ayam ta (RV. 3. 29. 10) iti mamtrena samsprsya purvavan mathitva 'gnidvayam vihrtya purvavat prayascittam
tamtrena krtva pascad daksinagnim vihrtya prayascittim kuryat tasyo
.
'bhaya-sapeksatvat
smana
'gnivichittih
udaya-'stamaya-'namtaram iyam
udayastamaye yugapad-anugamane sarva-'nugatis tatra tu
punaradhanam eva karmanas treta-'gni-sadhyatvad ahavanlya-homa-kale
trayanam agnlnam samyak samimdhanam krtva homah(!) kuryat yasya
kasya cit karmano 'rthaya vihrtesv agnisu yat kimcid agnisadhyafm]
naimittikam utpadyate tasya naimittika-sahitasya ta eva 'gnayo bhaveyuh
na punah-punar vihartavyah sarvams ced anugatan adityo 'bhyudiyad va
*bhyastam iyad va 'gny adheyam punar-adheyam va yadi sarvesv agnisv
anugatesv adityo 'stam udayam va gacheta tada 'gnyadheyam punarutpattih
evo 'tpattih
Vol. xxxiii.]
ahute
Atharvaprayascittani
123
5. 1.
7*
'ddhrtya
790
devesu no dadhad
havlmsi dadyat
iti
sayam abutam
ati 'tara-
sminn 794 etad eva prayascittam anyatra 'pi snutya 795 ced
ahute cet pratah purvo 796 'nugacched avadahesum 797 as"nl|
tesv alabhyainanesu bhasmana 'ranim samsprsya mathitva 'vadadbyad 798 agnaye jyotismata istim nirvaped ahute
yat
AD
"85
|
737 A. ce
B ahute; cf. Ap. 9. 9. 6.
Brahm. Pray. 51 b folg.: yasya 'hute 'gnihotre purvo
'88
786
789
nirmathyas ce
"nodvrtya
'gnir anugachet
thamam
adhasyamane uddhrtam adhasyamanam ca 'gnim abhimamamrtahutim ity asya "dhanamamtrayate samrad aslty (ibid.) adadhati
sarasvatau
tva (ibid.) ity ahitam
trasya 'yam apacadadyambadhakam
avasthapitam agnim abhimamtrayata iti vyavahitam apy anuvarttate
[ ]hute
['jgnaye jyotismate 'stakapalam nirvaped varunam yavamayam
caruin hutasya matre upavasatho na syat idam sayam agnihotre va
ty (MS.
ibid.)
visesa-'bhidhanat
ubhayam tu bhavati
ahutemititi itarascisminn
790
|
3. 12.
27.
bei C;
795
AD
BCD
-purve792
79i
agne
M.
S. 4.
793
Die
794
lesen: agne.
796
sutya
A
A
aparyya
vgl.
9. 9. 7;
9*
124
J. v. Negelein,
[1913.
797
799
va 'nugacched
anugamayitva purvam
pratar aparo
mathitva 'param uddhrtya juhuyat tvaramanah purvam agnim
800
1
anvavasaya tatah pascat prancam uddhrtya juhuyat
cet
||
||
801
yatra dlpyamanam
uparuddhe cen mathyamano na j&yeta
a paristaranad ayur mecheti sadite 'nugate agne(??) eva daksinato 'gnihotradravyasya prayogah(!) yadi hutayam samidha(?) 'nugachet(I) bhuyo
'nugata abhimamtranadayo mamtra avartamte sakrd eva samid bhuyo
ca
iti
mamtratrayam bhavati
dham adhayo
'ttaram
vati
Vol. xxxiii.]
125
5. 3.
Atharvaprayascittdni
huyat tato 'jam na 'smyad yadi tam 803 na vinded darbhastambesu 804 juhuyat tato darbhesu na "sita yadi tan 805 na
vinded apsu juhuyat tato 'dbhih padau na praksalayita 8 <>6|yadi
|
vyaveyad
80S
iti
dhyat
sam nah
"tam
bharai
818
||
sumatya vajavatye
srja
cet 819
anvahitagnis
||
prayayat
819
817
ada-
ty
tubhyam ta
8 8
7. 26. 2.
en Asv.
rath as va
81 *
C vyavayo
vgl.
Asv.
3.
M.
Ap.
ABCD
9. 10.
17;
10. 16.
havisi va nirupte
sis
some va
1.
Ap.
AV.
7.
9. 6.
auch Ap.
11; vgl.
sio
26. 4.
ABD ato
815 A
vyavaped;
sa
ano-ratha-'sva-purusa-vyavaye ?
*n T. B. 1. 4. 4. 10. Ap. 6.
Brahm. Pray. 70
a:
AV.
sis
812
10. 14.
3.
6. 3. 4. 10.
cf.
809
3. 10. 10.
Bvyavaye
816 So
9. 10.
17;
krsnah.
iti
daf5
unter
dem
Pray, der krsnasakuni, also etwa der Rabe, zu verstehen sei, lehrt auch
der Komm. zu dieser Stelle, der den Text erweiternd interpretiert: pu-
126
J. v. Negelein,
[1913.
820
agnir
822
ity
bhyam manaso
syat
826
sincet?]
cittam
vyaharet 824
iti
71 a folg.
[1.
'pasthaya bhur
padam yopayitve
iti
darsayati;
'ti
oben
vgl.
2.
pathikrtl
anadvan daksina
825
sa-
Pray. 3b:
819
vidhih
karttavye
ce mriyayat
RV.
820
istih
['ti]
cet prayayat
2i
8. 43. 18.
'
yajamanah kuryat
vyam
cf.
varria-svara-"di
Asv. Pray. 11 b
kartta-
Ap.
5.
4.
1)
uddhrtya
ity
Jam
no devir (RV.
10. 9. 4)
ity
avoksya
yadi
ahavaniyah samya-pa[ra]sad apy atlyat yadi va (!) ainavasyam
paurnamasim va t!yat yadi va 'nyasya 'gnisu svayam yajet yadi va(!)
tada
asya 'gnisv anyo yajeta
yadi va 'sya 'nyo gnir agnin vyaveyat
.
Vol. xxxiii.j
127
5. 3.
Atharvaprdyascittdni
agmnam
S30
sa
yena
838
841
yas
tatra
tatrai
6. 16. 3)
om
anadvan daksina
829
bei
827
|
sso
unklar
832
sat?
bei
ssi
unklar
BCD
34
AV
18. 3. 7.
833
tan
krtvam
vatam
C chammya
10. 2. 3)
(RV.
828
sa sarvatra
].:
chamya
83 6 c f.
tarn
para-
cet kaksid
oben
(cf.
5. 2)
evam punah-
punar avartta^et ahavanlyam avadipyamanam arvava (1. arvak) sarayaComm.: ahavaniparasad idam ta ekam para u ta ekam iti samvapet
yasyai 'kadesah samasto va yady ayatanad bahir gachet [ta]da "samyaparasat tada idam ta ekam para uta ekam trtiyena jyotisa samvisasva
samvesane tanvas carur edhi priyo devanam parame janitre (RV. 10. 56. 1)
iti tarn adaya "yatane
In unserem Texte
praksipya tato vyahrtihomah
werden wir dem entsprechend zu lesen haben: sa [agnih] samya-parag:
vyahrti-homah karya
ity
eke
na visphulimgam va
'tra 'syaitat
praya-
grhyata
iti
vrttikrto-'ktam
mdane idam
ta
(cf.
oben
ekam
4.
parame
1)
etat-kala-'tirikta-'ngara-ska-
janitre
iti
mamtrena svayatane
na visphulimga-matrasyai 'tat
prayascittam etad ahavanlyasya 'rvak samya-parasat patane yadi samyaparasad apy atiyat tada pathikrtl asaktau purnahutih agnaye pathikrte
punah ksipet
tatah
sarva-prayascittam
svahe
SST
'ti
|
83 9
fehlt
avaksayane?
praya
ABCD
838
paratra
'ti
trtlyam
avaksayas
acaksayas
8*
8 *3
Verstreichenlassen
37. 12. 1 zu reden.
l.
der
vasayet
zum Opfer
dvitiyamsta
1.
etwa
anu-
-tipattve;
vom
841
yasmad
842
844 "D
festgesetzten
anupraya
pati
Zeit scheint
auch
AP
128
J. v. Negelein,
[1913.
tan
848
datre
purodasam nirvaped
ye
sthavisthas tan indraya pradatre dadhani 849 carum
ye ksosrite 850 prag ukte 851 tanduladisthas tan visnave s"ipivistaya
'bhavad ardham va vidyat 3
agnaye vitaye 852 'stakapalam
purodasam nirvaped 853 yasya 'gnayo mithah samsrjyerann ag854
naye vivicaye 'stakapalam purodasam nirvaped yasya 'gnayo
855
'stakapalam
gramyena 'gnina samsrjyerann agnaye sucaye
purodasam nirvaped yasya 'gnayah avena 'gnina samsrjyerann
agnaye 'nnadaya 856 nnapataye 'stakapalam purodasam
nirvaped yasya 'gnayo davena 'gnina samsrjyerann
agnaye
jyotismate 'stakapalam purodasam nirvaped yasya 'gnayo di857
agnaye 'gnimate
'stakapalam
vyena 'gnina samsrjyerann
858
'bhiplaverann
agnaye
purodasam nirvaped yasya 'gnayo
agnaye
'stakapalam
||
|]
BCD
845
licher,
havi
ca
anagate
syad
Brahm. Pray. 37 b
cf.
etad
atra nityavisesam
(!)
846
syat?
der Vordersatz,
Comm.
havih
fehlt
nach Asv.
der
ausfiihr-
trir
iiberlieferter
korrupt
kalatipattau pathikrty
dazu
[d]rastavyam
oben im Text: cet
1.
Pray.
8 a
zu
erganzen sein
diirfte
847 V
gl.
ahitagneh satrunam bhojane 'gnaye vaisvanaraya purnahutih
oben 2. 2; 4.1; Brahm. Pray. 26 a behandelt den gleichen Fall und
dvau va
'ko musti[r]
stellt
die
auf:
yadai
spezielle Moglichkeit
|
niruptau
prakrtlnam
bhavatah
katham karttavyam
tada
(!)
843
sso
dadhati
srute
B ma
CD
esi
vgl.
zu
Keproduktion in
prakte?
garhapatya-
vitaye purnahutih
diesem Abschnitt die im Brahmana-Stil
ausgefiihrte
A;
cf.
BC
Asv. Pray. 8 a:
pratte?
9. 3.
***
syus tad
srte
2. 7.
853
854
Ap.
9.
3.
18; K. S. 25. 4.
3132;
Ap.
,,yasya
zum Opfer
notigen Feuer; vgl. Asv. Pray. 8 a: garhapatya-daksinagni-mukhanam samsarge samaropya mathitva 'gnaye vivicaye
'gnayo"
d. h.: die
sss
Ap. 9. 3. 22; cf. K. S. 25. 4. 2930; danach
purnahutih
kann in diesem Falle von einer Siihne Abstand genommen werden; cf.
oben 2. 7 Asv. Pray. 8 a
agnina savagni-samsarge samaropya ma856 Auch in diesem Falle ist
thitva 'gnaye sucaye purnahutih
nach K. S. 25. 4. 32 folg. eine Siihne nicht unbedingt notwendig. Das
Siihneopfer soil vielmehr nur bei religioser Uberangstlichkeit stattfinden
und dann dem Agni samvarga gelten. Eben dieser devata soil es im ahn|
Ap.
9. 3.
22.
K.
Brahm.
7.
25. 4. 33.
7 geweiht sein.
85s bei
9. 10. 11.
857
AD
psumate;
fehlen diese
und
die
Vol. xxxiii.j
'gnimate
859
129
o. 4.
Atharvaprayascittdni
anugatam abhyuddhared
agnaye ksamavate 860 'stakapalam
purodasam nirvaped yasya "hitagner 861 agnigrhan 862 agnir
dahed anagnir grhan va 'gnaye 8 <>2 vratapataye 'stakapalam
|
859 cf.
aber As"v. Pray. 8a: sagnav ayatane 'gnim praniya athapane 'gnaye
agnimate purnahutih purvapramtagnim nihkasya sthapane prayascittam
na 'sti aranyoh saniarudha-vahninam ucchistady-upaghate caturgrhitena
"havamye manasvati-homah atma-samarudhagnir yadi bhojanadi kuryat
[
86
A "gnir
gehadahe 'gnaye ksamavate purodasah
Diese und die dazwischenliegenden Worte sind korrumpiert. Der
Rekonstruktionsversuch schlief5t sich vorzugsweise an A an.
agnigrhadd agni hedata (na?) gnigrhan ca (va?) B agnigrahamn dehed an-
25. 4. 36
862
grhan abhyacyati [ucah samavaye samavaiti] dahanaya sa ksamah sa[m]adahuko 'sya 'param agnir grhan
bhuya (*pa?) en am api dahati
offenbar urspriinglicher und verbhavati cf. Asv. Pray. 8 a, welches
den Vratapati bei Verletzungen der religiosen Enthaltsamniinftiger
keitsvorschriften
anvadhana - 'namtaram gramamtaram na
empfiehlt
na 'sniyat na buddhi-purvam
oben
4.
madhu-mamsa-"di
gacchet (cf.
3)
.
Zur
skamdayet
ityadi vrata-lope vratapataye purnahutih
Rekonstruktion des Textes sind Asv. Pray. 8_a wichtig: grhadahe 'gnaye
ksamavate purnahutih
Zu obigem vgl. Asv. Pray. 12 a: anvadhana'namtaram buddhi - purvaka-retah - pate imam me varuna [V. S. 21. 1]
retah
nagnih
C kurya
kuryats
wiederbolen hinter *ped:
lafit
asru aus.
see
prasaved;
ya ahitagnir
cf.
Ap.
artvijam
9. 4. 15.
asru
867
ABCD
kuryat pravaset;
130
J. v. Negelein,
[1913.
868
||
caret
das Opfer
ksamavata
ist
fiir
Agni
72
anyam
vivici in
C parivartayed
pativarttayed
unklar.
^74
yajaye va yajen
873
STI
A.
sv
yaja-
>.
STT Brahm.
nayed istir marutah
Pray. 72 a folg.: yadi prsad'sveno (!)
skandet
ajyam
(!) hiranyam antarddhaya bhuyo ['Jbhyunniyo [!)
'paghrapya mano jyotir varddhatam bhutir ity etabhyam ahutim jahuj
.... Bl. 72 b: yadi prsadajyam skamded iti prsaskannam ajyo prsadajyam ajyam dadhimisram ghrtam sadgunavisistam prsadajyam ity abhidhiyate
hiranyam amtarddhaya hiranyam tatra Vasthapya yadi
skanno bhuyo bhyunniyah bhuya tatrai 'va 'bhimukhyena niyeti vacanat
Bl. 73 a:
asvena gamdho padan karayitva mano jyotir
varddhatam bhutir ity etabhyam ahutlr juhuyad .... trayastrmsat tam-
yat
tava ity
samdha[ya?]
AP.
patnl-rasanaya[m]
37.
16.
1,
17.
1)
(cf.
mekhalayam va dvidho
Vol. xxxiii.]
131
5. 6.
Atharvaprayascittdni
||
nirupya 'nyam tad-rupam tad-varnam iti samaatha yasya 'hargane 890 FJvisamapte yupo virohet 891
yavagum
nam
888
||
897
yasmat 898
pavako yad vanaspatm
van
90
hita)
89 ^
virudhani
iti
"
dve
iti
cam 901
ajam pingalam pasum bahurupam alabheta 'gnina tapo nvabhavad 902 vaca brahma manina 903 rupanl 'ndrena devan
vatena pranant 904 suryena dyam
candramasa naksatrani
|
yamena 905
pitfn
rena sarpan
vrsna 'svan
8" Ap.
manusyan
upalena nadeyan
rajiia
879
9. 17. 1.
A skamnadyau
sso
vielleicht:
prayeyatam; gemeint
ya vo yam C yavo ya
RV.
vrsnina
ajaga-
chyenena patatrino
vrlhina
'vir
|
A prayata B prayepratam
ssi A
gavoghani
prajayatam
gemeint:
gavo yam;
8S2
AV.
177. 4.
Ap.
Sr. 9. 17. 1.
885
ABD
886
yatl
C mavadamakarme
madavamakarme
B mavadamakarme
888 Brahm.
Ap. 9. 4. 1.
tada
na
vimdet
77
b
"jyasya Vadyet
Pray.
avadanany api yadi
praisa imdragnibhyam ajyasya 'nubruh! ti darsanat (!) ajyena samsthapya punar yajeta atra kecid acaksate sarvavisayam etad bhavati
89i
889 cf. oben 2. 9.
89
D ahavisargane
Vgl. oben
88 ? cf.
2. 6;
K.
amitraya
AD
agner;
892
RV. 6. 5.
C tapastes
RV.'
3.
898
8
^01
9o2
Ap.
prana
C pranah
903
Mss.: manusyat
AD
tapo
varahais; B tavasyais
yasma; bei C fehlen die Worte yasmat bis vauaspatm
aoo l. : na 'bhihite?
5. 7. 4; Ap.
14. 29. 3.
896
893
18. 2.
895
4.
AV.
" RV.
6. 49. 3.
w*
132
J. v. Negelein,
[1913.
bra-
||
udu-
iti 906
)|
saumikani
tah
atha
pateyatam
grhmyat
|
'ttaram
pura
pratiprasthato
udgrhmyad
'pastabhnuyat
907
|
pratiprasthato
907
upastabhnuyad
yatlia908
909
^) sam asvinor avasa nutanena
prakrti stambhano 'parQanau
910
a
no
vahatam
ota
gamema
rayim
mayobhuva supranltl
vlran a visvany amrta saubhagani 911
siro yajnasya pratidhiadhvaryur
914
pratihriyatam
912
vaisnavyah
amrtam
915
916
)
913
(kriyatam
dyubhir aktubhih
|
yam eva kamcit prachidya 'vadadhyad adhvaryur udgata yajamana urg asy urjam mayi dhehi sriyam tistha pratisthita
ti 921
|
entstellt.
und
lophon:
'dhyayah samaptah
pasamane BD pamane
909
RV.
912
Ap.
akriyata
15
bei
9io
5. 42. 18.
6.
pratihudayatam
der in
ist:
gemeint
Klammern
BCD
Bei
-
plus
9ii
nitam
K.
6. 25. 6. 8.
918
RV.
1.
bharani
913
huyatam)
921
AD
916 fehlt
pratidhiyatam
bhavati
ist
919
BC
9U C upadhinya
gesetzte Passus
112. 25.
,,anas".
ofifenbar
eine
Wieder9l7
patum
Ko-
9 s
Imperative
dhiyatam
ist:
lautet der
prasamge trayodaso
pastha bruyat
vielleicht
Mss.: pratihrlyatain (A
14. 33. 8;
C kryatam; gemeint
BCD;
ABCD
C pamano
906
prayascitta
AC
bhava
vlr
920
Vgl.
Vol. xxxiii.]
Atharvaprayascittani
133
6. 1.
>ti
so 924
iti
raim 931 agnina 'gnih samsrjyata 932 ity ete 933 japec chalamukhlyas ced anugacched garhapatyat pranlya bhadram karnebhir 934
iti catasro japet
bhadram karnebhih srnuyama deva bhadram
'ksabhir
sthirair angais tustuvamsas tanupaSyema
yajatrah
bhir vyasema devahitam yad ayuh
svasti na indro vrddhasravah 935 svasti nah pusa visvavedah 936
svasti nas tarksyo
'rista-nemih svasti no brhaspatir dadhatu
p^sada^va marutah prsnimatarah 935 ^ubhamyavano vidathesu jagmayah 937
|
te
priyani
hotrah
sapta
sapta
yajanti
yonlr
942
'gne varca
tat
mama
vaco
brhaspatih sam
devo
ayam
mama
tva
saptadha
Ap.
korrumpiert;
AC
es
lesen
BCD:
ist
BD
924
926
etayur
927
"patyo-'tpate?
sammenhangend K.
7. 1. 1; Ap. 14. 16.
in der
dharti
brahmatra; korrupt!
bruyuh
930
das Zitat
14. 33. 2;
S.
929
1.
1
c f.
9 25
svaraso
tyo 'nve
tyomte; 1.:
Erloschen der Opferfeuer handelt zutyotpate
etayiva
Yom
ABCD
oben
oben
1.
923
5; 2. 7.
nita;
nite
932
2. 7; 5. 4.
RV.
D m
nlti
Kaus.
S.
A ate
dagegen Ap. a. a. 0.: agnina 'gnih samidhyate
auch
scheinen
Eventualitat
dieser
9 3 * RV. 1. 89. 8;
1.
Von
14.
16.
Ap.
Brahm. Pray. Bl. 114 a zu handeln (durch Korruption fast vollig unver933
108. 2;
standlich geworden).
vatejah
9"
AC
942
AV.
935
RV.
1.
B. 3.
1.
936
89. 6, 7, 9.
RV. 7. 1.
jamayah
yat svagne hrdah B yas tv agne hrdah
937
939
3.
9ii
VS.
ABCD
vis-
17. 79.
radhase
134
J. v. Negelein,
[1913
943
juhuyad
auttaravedikas
||
||
Passus
Anm. 784
na
Cit. 2)
tra
'nvadhanam
salamukhiya-'nvadhana-vya-
hita-prayascittam na syad
dvayor apy anvahitatvat
patyat tarn
9" RV.
7.'
9n RV.
4.
iti
|
anvahita-salamukhiya-nase tu
purana-garha-
uktam prayascitta-camdrikayam
ity
janu(r) upavisya
mahyam
'gnyor nase";
tusmm
tata
'ti samkalpya yonitah pranayet
ahavaniye 'gnaye tapasvate janadvate pavakavate svahe ti purnahutim
950 RV. 3. 9. 2.
95i M. S. 2. 7. 15: 98.
juhuyat
11; Ap.
"
15. 17. 5.
Vol. xxxiii.]
Atharvaprayascittani
135
6. 2.
tanva urjo nama tabhis tvam ubhayibhih samvidanah Satam cinvanas tanva nisidata sakam hi Sucina ucih 952 prasasta kratuna
|
'jani
vaya
953 iva
vasatlvarls 961
cet
962
skandeyuh
vibhuvari
prthivl
963
'ti
|
calyakam 964 cety 964 avrtte namas te bhuvo vi^va[m] tad grhltva
manda vasa 965 iti catasrbhir agmdhrlye juhuyat manda vasali sundhyur ajirah
undatlh suphenah jyotismatis tamasvatir
mitrabhrtah ksatrabhrtah svarastra iha ma'vata
yysno a6vasamdanam
deva
vasava
asi
tvo
agne
sya
vrstyai
'panahyami
indra surya 966
deva udno datto 'dadhira bhintta divas pa|
952
RV.
2. 5.
4;
Ap.
piert.
AC
954
lesen statt:
BD
yugam dhenu
2. 7. 16.
Das
rohate ity:
Zitat
958
ist
rohosaty;
"gam dhenum
16. 26. 6.
Ap.
953 C viddha
artvijya
den Mss. sehr korrum-
16. 15. 7.
dhruva vrata
956
AD
ca kuryan;
in
955
rohasity
lafit
9& 7
va aus.
AC
M.
S.
ca kuryam',
959
Infolge seiner
cakurya
39. 3.
gemeint ist wohl die Fassung von K.
Korruption fiir mich nicht identifizierbar. BD: stavadejarudhiramadrir
962 Asv.
6i A
960 A
C wie B. nur: stadeja
variyas
yeta
sehr
sicherlich
a
erwahnen einen in der Opf erpraxis
h'aufig aufPray. 13
tretenden analogen Fall: pramtanam proksaninam ca 'mbuskandane
964 Durch Kor963 K.
samsrave va
.35. 3; Ap. 14. 17. 3.
.
gegangen,
verunstaltet;
liest:
tamasvatir
136
J. v. Negelein,
[1913.
deva yujo
rjanyad antariksat samudrat tato no vrstya 'vata
mitravaruna 'ryama yuktam devah sapitayo apam napat tanunapan narasamsa udno datto 'dadhim bhintta divas parjanyad
J
amtariksat samudrat tato no vrstya 'vate ti
pravrttas cet
967
968
iti samsiiicen
nivrttas cet syur apam
syuli samasincantv
urmi 969 'ti grhitva sadbhir ahavamye juhuyad
indriyavan
|
madintamas tarn vo
97
prthivya anu gesam
ca tva prthivl ca
ma
kramisam
achinnam tantum
iti hutva
2 abhivrste 971 some dyaus
rmtam antariksam ca indur indum avagad
'va
||
||
ca tva
yajiia^
srnitam
tva
sarva
arka
,
973
076
bhaksayami
'pahiito
mam
camasam
cec
977
'ty
abhimrstasya
978
bhaksayet
saso|
979 it 979
garbhas tad
padam 979 iti 979 dvabhyam 979 jubuyat 9 80
tad it padam na viciketa vidvan 981 yan 982 mrtah 932 punar apy
|
jlvan
pravrtta
983
"lirtya
987
sukra-dbruvau
968
33. 1.
969
AY.
AD
988
samvam
970
97i A
abhiprsta
Ap. S. 10. 19. 10.
K. S. 35. 11; Ap. 14. 29. 2.
die Mss. geben nur diese Silben
974
975 BCD
als Rest des Textfragments ,AD srutva
3. 6. 15.
8
976 A:
soma
(somas) tat savita imdavah BC ( ma) bhut sarva tasya
9
977 V
ta imdav
D bhus tat savitasya ta
1.:
gl. Y. S. 38. 28.
979 BQ
930 Brahm.
93 a:
abhivrstasya?
Pray.
aditidvabhyam
31. 22.
972
M.
va;
cf.
984
AP
zu erganzen.
nyascehaprayanahumyad B anyas cemdragrayanad grhnlyad C anyas cedagrayanat grhnlyad
vgl. K. S. 25. 12. 25. folg.
985 BC nac
ess ABC
937 ABC
'hutya cf. Brahm.
grhebhyo
Pray. 82 a: yady agrayanah skamded upa va dasyed itarebhyo grahebhyo
nirgrhmyat
yadi 'tare graha skamdeyur upa va dasyeyur puro graya
;
. .
apo nigrhnlyat.
988
A|dhruvo
V
ol. xxxiii.]
varjam
a tva
jajnasye
989
137
6. 4.
Atliarvaprayascittani
catasrbhir
'ti
a tva
juhuyad
990
vyali
gosa
kavyah
pati
tarpayantu
992
adityas tva tarpayantv ity utsrjya dhruva dyaur
ity
svaha
asi
tejoda
dhruvah saho
me dah
7
marutasya brahmasamena stuvirann " ity eke bhaksaniyam 998
9"
3
some krtamtvad 100
uparavesv apinayet
apidagdhe
1001 vacanat 1002
1003
upakrameranyam
japtva pura dvada^ya
||
||
100:
1005
tatra ta dadyad
punar!004 diksavamtadviti
yah
1009
^^
Q$ bhavati
nam
tva
'vai
tathai
rtvijo^oo
kasyai
dasya
|
1011
1012
1010
apahareyur
anyah
|yady akrita-somam
1013
1014
nastah
syat sa nitya 'bhisikrltavyo
yadi krito
1015 iti
tena 'sya sa
kimcid deyam^ie
raja- hara
cyo
I009
yajayeyur
59
9S9
RV.
ACD
9. 6. 8.
99i
fehlt bei B.
993 feHlt
994
bei A.
atmayajnasceti
992
S. 74. 12.
AV.
6. 87.
996
S. 6. 4. 12. 10.
dyota asya;
atvayasyeti
Kaus.
dhyata asya
Ap.
AV.
^ _RV.
6. 88. 1;
14. 27. 7.
995
BC
9. 2.
10;
14. 27. 7.
Ap.
Ap.
14. 27. 6
gravni sirne
9s
ABCD
A krte ta
apidagve BCD apidagdham
ooi Brahm.
B krtam tva C vrttam tva?; 1. wahrscheinlich: kritatvad
Pray. 95 a: yadi raja 'bhidahyeta grahan adhvaryu[h] sparsayeta stotrany
999
yam
hota 'tha [a]dhvar[yur] yajnam sa[m]bhrtya purva cesteb folg. yadi raja 'bhidahyata krayat prag daksinakalat
sarvesv eva Vadhisu praptam kamam vipracarad eka ichamti
cavanam; zu diesem vollig verderbten Passus scheint Asv. 6. 8. 1 parallel
sastraiii
udgata
ram ....
zu
Bl. 96
1003
sein.
1004
dasa
punad B puna
1005
oo9
AD
wiederholt: tatra
C wie B;
1012
BC
cesta
AD
cet
138
/. v.
parikrito bhavati
na putlk&n arjunany
1018
1019
1017
nuyur
yadi
eva kas
yadi
[1913.
Negelein,
abhisu-
ya 1018
paiicadaksinam
atha loi s
|
kratum samsthapayeyur ekadaksinam va yena yajiiena kamayeta tena yajeta [a]tra yat kamayeta tatra tad dadyat pra|
<>
022
pavamane sa-madhyam(madhyamdinas ceU
1025
I024
1025
)
pavamana
yadi madhyamdina
"rbhavasya
1021
stuyur
dinat 1023
pavamanasya
ryad
vasat-kara-nidhanam
purastad
1027
eva
102 s
4
||
rdhyasma putraih
yan marttikana
pasubhir yo no dvesti sa bhidyatam iti
1031 tathaiva
103
tada
po gamayet
bhiclyeta
darumayam ya
agat
abhisrisa 1032
cid
rte
etaya
ity
"labhya
'bhimantrayate
Dem
alohita entspricht hier vollstandig: avyaktaragaAls Surrogate werden genannt (der Stufenfolge nach
eins fiir das andere) syenahrta, putika, adara, arimadurva, haritakusa; die
ion Wortlich gleich
Schilderung die_ser Pflanzen 1st von Wichtigkeit.
PB 9. 5. 3 cf. Asv. 6. 8. 5 f.; Brahm. Pray. 83 a; K. 6. 25. 12. 18; Pet. Wb.
puspani trnani.
1018 A.
soma-'bhave bhavet ptitividhih pratinidhav uta
D
B
C
arjunanaisyaya
arjananaithaya
arjjananaithaya
arjunanairthaya
1019 Brahm.
Pray. 83 a: yadi na putikan atha 'rjunani yadi na putikatrnani ca vimde[t] tata abhisunuyad iti varttate lohita-tulani haimavatasya sthdne haimavato lohitakara iti bhavah .... maujavatasthdne
u. pratinidhi:
babhrutulany
varttate ca ca
iti
.
vimded yah kamas cau 'sadhir aranya darbhakas adika abhisunuyat somavikrayinas ca kimcid dadyad iti .... 93 a gedenkt noch des Falles dronakalase cet somam na vimded skanded (?) upadasyed (?) va
tad dhi:
ranya[m]
6.
rjlse 'py
statt trca
6;
dina
arbha
BC
ware grammatisch
1020.1021
ci
unten
^23 A
cf.
cit
1025
1025
richtig.
1027 fehlt bei C
C sama me
sama
dina
samana
1023 Brahm.
Pray. 87 a: (yadi
oben 6. 3] ...)... yadi pratahsavane
kalaso diryeta vasatkaranidhanam
ekasmin darumaye kalase
dronakalasa iti prayoga
etesam astanam yadi kascid diryeta
87 b [ganz verderbt]
yadi pratahsavane dronakalasam kalaso diryeta
madhyamdine grava
slryate
[cf.
'bhimarsanakale tatra somasurya 'smin patre samavapati ya tritlya (?)sthana[t] tu krtvo 'dgatrbhih prahitam sammrstam avasthapya tasmin
1029
spmam avanayet
2
Ap.
9. 16.
BC
yo maye;
25. 5. 29
f.
f.;
Asv.
3. 14.
12;
cf.
yo gamayet
1147.
Ap. 3. 20.
oben 3. 78.
1032
9; 9. 16. 2.
1031
AV.
1030 cf.
14. 2. 47;
yogamayait
vgl.
K.
6.
Vol. xxxiii.J
139
6. 6.
Atharvaprdyascittdni
sarvatra slrne bhinne naste 'nyam kj-tva punar mai 'tv indriio33
1034
jty adadlta
y am
bahispavamanam cet sarpat&m 1035
I
prastota vichidyeta
tarn
tatas
eva
punar vj-niyad
yad udgata vichidyeta sarvavedasa-daksinena
'vam sarvesam vichinnanam sarpatam ekaiyajnena yajetai
kasmin kuryad dyaus ca ma indraS ca me 1036 tantum tanma pragama patho vayam 103 ^ iti sastrac 1039 cec
van 1037
chastram anusamsan 1040 vyapadyeta ma 1041 pragama patho
|
1038 iti
vayam
nam
1042
1|
'hutasya
ghrtam
yasye 'ndragnivitam
'sya
dvabhyam juhuyat
iti
pratahsavanac
imana
pibata ghrtam
cet 1052
1051
stuyuh
1033
die
1035
1055
1
Kaus.
ABC
irdener
lose
sarpatatam
Ap. 9. 8/7.
10. 53. 6;
sa
K.
dhita;
interessanter Weise.
in
GefaGe
1037 KV.
TS. 4. 7. 6. 2.
AV.
1033
AC
1040
sastram
AD
1034
9. 2.
EntstehuDgsgeschichte
1039
13. 1. 59.
B sam
AD
bimdum avanayet
AV. 7. 33. 1; cf. Ap.
Kaus.
io
1045
10*6 1. unnita?
uttasasam; 1.: uttarabhy am ?
narasamsa
89
a
Brahra.
upadasyeyuh
yadi
vgl.
Pray.
patisthera tasya
'044
15. 1.
1041
cf.
K.
uttarasam
6. 25. 12.
11;
89. 13.
Gemeint
7. 17. 1:
liest
juhuykt
gavimdragnlvltam
A:
se
vgl.
K!
pivata
105 i
i
ABC vanam
54 ABC visu
tarn
J
cf. 6.
052
loss
pibata
ca tad
Brahm.
140
J. v. Negelein,
[1913.
1056
parigrbmyat
purvo devatah parigrhniyat na 'tirapratar-anuvakam upakuryad abhistavya 'tha 105 8 samtrya
1059
vesayo
'pavesaya gayatryai chandase 'bhibhutyai svahe 10 so 'ti
1
purastat prataranuvakasya juhuyat tristubha " 61 iti madhyamdine 1062 vidvisanayoh samsavav 1063 iti vijiiayate 1064 savamya'nantaram agnaye yavisthaya stakapalam ity ahavanlye 1Q 65 ma1056
'gnim
1057
1069
prabhrty
anujamyat| sarvesu ca 'bhicarikesu samdiksitanam
ca vyavartteta 'gneran brahmanah 1070 procya jiva nama stha
jive(s)t(v)e
1073
arvak
1072
'ty
apahio
72
paribruyat
'0:2
|
tasam udag-
1074
kuryad
rtupatre
patv
1075
atmanam
ta agrayanah patv
'tiridhyeti
angani ca ta ukthyah
'ty
adityavatisu
iti
juhu-
gaurlvitena
sapte
loss
K.
^. 25. 14.
ratrya
iti
ACD
1057
folg.; P. B. 9. 4. 2.
gnir grhmya.
tani ratryah
Vgl.
tani
tani ratryat
IOSQ
bhistavyatha
ioeo
p.B. 9.4. 6.
c
nena D neva
gnir grhmyat
loci
abhistavyartheh BC atistavyatha
samdesatho B savesayo D samvesayo
1062
fehlt bei A.
ACD
BCD
samavov;
savanam
!067
1069
samse
iocs
vasatkara
"myamahrdabhyamdadhyat
samse B samse
CD vasatkarah
10 6 8
1070
1066
A "sayanasya BC
CD brahmanah
A mamam
O
visana_sya
1Q 7i
Ap.
8 in erweiterter Fassung; cf. AV. 19. 69. 2ff.; in den Mss. korrumpiert; vgl. Asv. 6. 9. 1. Die Fehlerhaftigkeit des vorausgegangenen
Textes macht es schwer verstandlich. daft es sich bei diesen Spriichen
14. 20.
um
1072
pracet pra
1075
AB
rcupatre
Vol. xxxiii.]
141
6. 7.
Atliarvaprayascittani
1076
pustina pustim
pranena pranam tejasa teja caksusa
caksuh srotrena srotram ayusa "yuh punar dehl 'ti sakrd etani
yftt
||
panim^ 82
dadhyus
84
1086
tasya
putrara
bhrataram
>
somam 1099
1099
110
'tiratrena
yady asvina
ni[su]
sasyamanasv
adityam purastan
pasyeyur a^vam
svetam rukmapratihitam 1103 purastad avasthapya 1104 sauryam
svetam (g)ajam 1105 upalambhyam alabheta tasya 1106 tany eva
vibhajya
1101
1076 c f.
Ap.
1078
ACD
iosi
vemdra
1Q 79
grhnati yat
C bhayeta
1083 B dam
mryeta
1077
10. 10. 6.
caimdra"
loso
visvajita
^2
C bhava
bhyas
BCD
C
te
1082
ven
1084 A tathaiva
CD fehlt
panih
dagdha
C dadhya; L: pratidhaya; der vollig korrupte Text Brahm. Pray. 112 a
loss Diese und die dazwischengibt die gleichen Worte wieder.
liegenden
Worte
loss
K.
S. 25. 13.
hotrh
1091
sayamrajnlnamurttaya
1094
A klrttanastotre BD
bei
AC.
1096
AD
CD
kha
101 a:
B
g
dasva
1092 fehlt
noa
lalot
dagdhva
aus.
"93
AD
klrttiyannastotre
sthiputrim
hierzu K. ^. 25.
S. 25. 10.
C
bei
C sayamrajnlnamurtyaya
BC
yasya "svine
klrttiyantastotre
sthiputa
ios?
uyannidhyus
sayamsajninamurttaya
1098 V
C puram
gl.
noo K.
somam avibhajya
11 02 C O
nastv D nahsv
Pray.
28
1089
eine
1090
ioss
fehlen bei A.
dlkseram
09?
13.
4 folg.
ABCD
1095 fehlt
"tsarasthipumtha
3136.
1099
1101
asvini
no* Brahm.
ohatam
no "diyad asvam svetam
sasyamane
rukma-pratimuktam purastat pratyanmukham avasthapayet kurmena purvam avedam naimittikam abhidhlyate yasya yajamanasya "svina sasyamane suryo no Miyat tatro 'ktam udite suryo mti tad yadi no 'dgiyat(V)
tato
suryas
suryo
tata
iti
pratimuktam
142
J.
tantrani
v.
Negelein,
[1913.
samdhi camasa
asvamedhe ced asvo na
anupradanam syad
"gacched agneyo 'stakapala iti mrgakhare 11 ^ saddhaviskam 1
istim 1109 nirvaped dasa-havisam ity eke 11
vadavam ced asvo
yani
savaniyasyuh
purastat
1108
"savanam
||
|j
ekanna
ity
1112
1113
-trimso
pakanagnim
1114
asvanam
111 ^
ity
arthalopan nivrttis
ete
acarya
arttir
ched
1128
indraya harivata
tispbhih
iti
1129
8
damsamsy asvinav avocam 1130 iti paiicabhir juhuyat
avocam
vam
asvinav
damsamsy
asya patih syam sugavah
pra
||
uta
suvirah
|
ive
'j
HOT
1109
mo
^2*
chakro
D divocha
rttav
13. 17. 2.
"rttav
AV.
use
2. 11.
rtav
use RV.
5; 17.
sutyam
1123
1.
1.
116. 25.
n'*
20.
sutya
deva 'cha
C sutyam
adhyagached
il2 9
1127
Ap.
S.
Vol. xxxiii.]
AtliarvaprdyascMtani
143
6. 9.
1
madhvah somasyasvina madaya
hota
vivasate
yam
barhismatl ratrir visrita glr isa
pratno
2
yatam nasatyo 'pa vajaih
yo vam avina manaso javlyan
rathab svasvo visa ajigati
yena gachathah sukrto duronam
tena nara vartir asmabhyam yatam
3
rsira narav amhasah
pancajanyam rblsad atrim mumcatho ganena minamta dasyor
1131
jarimanam jagamyam
|;
j|
||
aSivasya
||
avam na
||
gudham
tarn
krtani 5 iti pratahsavanam cen madhyamdinam savanam abhyastamiyad agnir ma patu vasubhih purastad 1132 iti juhuyad
agnaye svaha vasubhyah svaha gayatryai svaha madhyamdinam
|
ma
somo
rudrair daksin5,ya
disah patv 1133 iti juhuyat somaya svaha 1134 rudrebhyah svaha
tristubhe svaha
trtiyasavanam ced abhyastamiyad varuno
|
ma
1135
ma
suryo
iti
'ndranyai
svistakrte svahe
'ti
|
cai
ti
prajapataye svaha
visnave svaha
ta visnu-varuna-devatya
uktani prayascittany
athai
|
H3i
RV.
1134
VS.
1{ 37
ferner
1.
rtvijo
H35
fi'.
7.
rtvijoc
iu2
AC
ce
133
AV.
1139 cf.
ca
19. 17. 3.
1.
109. 7.
760; vgl.
|
1140
(unklar) [kuryat];
n^ RV.
25. 1.
Asv. Pray. 18 b:
purusa-sammito yajno
kuryat
H32
117. 1.
22. 27
AV.
7. 86.
IU1
1.
upta(?)
kas tatra
chedanabhedanavadanadahanesusasu
BC
1143
J1 * 4
AB
ava
B kamsu
AV.
.
1145
chedanavadaranadahanesukhasu
144
J. v, Negelein,
Atharvaprdyascittani
6. 9.
[1913.
||
||
durva-"jyam
1153
'ntariksaya
suryaya
slokah
'dhipataye
svahe
ti
sutraprayascittis
1154
tatra
|
tasmad
|
ity
maptam
1155 sa-
1155
\
ii46
Agn. Pray. 5b: kathina-dravyesu bhedanam dru (?) va-dravyesu
die auf die
ksaranam ubhayatra bhumi-gatam eva dustam bhavati
u*? Brahm.
Erde oder ins Feuer gefallene Opfergabe ist unrein.
6.
105
a:
ukha
oben
2; vgl. AP.
Pray.
yady (a)sra[vam] gache[t] (cf.
|
tatah
45. 2. 19)
ukha
praniya
mahaviro
'bhibhidyeta
Bl. 107 b
"havaniye punah
va kapalani curnapesam pist[v]a
yady
mrda
kapalani
ukham kuryat
iti
dyeta
ins AV.
.
7.
sakrtyahutir
juhuyat
(?)
H49
67. 1.
AV.
yadi
(!)
1. 19.
diksitasyo
'paramed
1.
|j
nasutre prayascitti-prasanga-pustakam
B fiigt hinter 14 hinzu: srisri- guru- ramadasa-caranl- tat -para- visnuyajfia-purusa-'rpanam astu
|
||
||
seke
1785
randranama-samvatsare mahemaghanaraya devadhara
suddha induvara idam pustakam samaptam
Colophon zu D s. bei
"Weber, Berl. Handschr. Cat.
J
||
]|
Vedic, Sanskrit,
and Middle
SON.
Ethnologist
1
Washington, D. C.
in
Indie.
the
has
discussed
and Middle
the
Indie.
By TRUMAN MICHEL-
Smithsonian
32, pp.
general
It
Sanskrit,
may
'Prakrit' in the sense of 'Mittelindisch'.
Institution.
414428) Mr. W.
interrelations
of Vedic,
is
presented by
overlooked the evidence of the Asokan dialects in a number
of cases.
Sanskrit.
ii,
88; Michelson,
JAOS.
31,
TAP A.
40, p. 26.
The position taken, that during the period of the composition
of the Vedic hymns two distinct groups of Indie dialects were
and the writer have made it clear that the dialect of the
Shahbazgarhi and Mansehra versions of the Fourteen Edicts
(for their speech is essentially one) is far closer to Vedic or
Sanskrit than the other dialects are. There is no uncrossable
bridge.
It
dialect,
though
has certain ear-marks of the Middle Indie stage of development, such as the assimilation of stops of one order to those
it
of another
order,
Now
of development.
if it is not feasible to draw hard and
fast lines in the time of Asoka, what right have we to assume
Truman
146
Michelson,
[1913.
dadmi
Pali kummi,
dammi
respectively).
dialects.
and
so modified
it
to
suit
their
own
char-
be maintained until
it
An
if it
that the
be shown that
the
non- Aryan languages do not possess the groups of consonants which suffer assimilation nor such consonants as are
lost when intervocalic, even if the non- Aryan languages do
not agree precisely with the Middle Indie languages. In the
same way the change (or substitution) of one sound for another
such as s for s cannot be charged directly or indirectly to the
Vedic, Sanskrit
Vol. xxxiii.]
147
Indie.
of
influence
and Middle
positive
morphological characteristics of
Middle Indie languages such as the almost complete loss of
the perfect tense, the formation of other tenses on the present
evidence.
Similarly
certain
languages unless
it
be
like
groupes
that the assimilation in certain cases
clear
the
state
of r in consonan-
is
of affairs
in
it is
From
is
recent.
it
might well be
Moreover,
it
assimilations
teristic
Skt. Gr.3
"Whitney,
p. Ixvii
Yeda,
228, 232;
and on
22. 1,
i.
Whitney-Lanman," Atharva
iv.
19. 6,
v.
20. 12.
This
is
against any theory of direct influence on the part of the nonAryan languages; and it supports the view that the phonetic
changes were gradual and not due to mere substitution of
sounds.
tions
for
sette
KT
And
are
example
Latin
and
TTT
may be
it
found
Thus
Indo-European languages.
from ct and pt (Italian otto,
tt
septem respectively), Cretan Greek TT from
vvrri for AWCTMH, WKTI; Buck, Greek Diand pt in
from
1, 2) are parallel to tt
popular Latin
octo,
(AvTTtot,
alects, p. 68,
86.
parallel
in other
satta,
sitta-
Skt, sapta,
sikta-
respec-
Truman
148
Michelson,
[1913.
may be compared
The analogy
of the
English
of the
American Negro
to
is
liarities
of his
speech
are
ican
negroes
of
Educated Amer-
The English
of such
Nassau (Bahama
far as pronunciation is
It is likely that the faulty English of the American negro is
due to his wrong perception of the sounds * and his unfamil2
In the same
iarity with the English of cultivated society.
ear
of
an
there
the
untrained
to
are sounds
American,
way
to
after
characteristic
pronunciation
of
their
own
native
languages
p.
1, p.
16
ff.
tains (pp. 75
80)
Beriihrung abhangig
ist",
1913, main-
"daft die
Vol. xxxiii.]
Vedic, Sanskrit
and Middle
149
Indie.
own
Clay Cart",
excuse his
by
ascribed
appealing
languages.
slip in
As
am
G-r.
d.
Pkt. Sprachen,
6,
note
2.
But
satisfactory answers
can be given.
By
Tirurai Language.
D.,
University of
Chattanooga, Tennessee.
1. Tirurai
(sometimes called Tedurai) is one of the numerous
Indonesian languages of the Philippine Islands. It is spoken
hy ahout four thousand people in the mountains south of the
town Kotabatu (Cotahato) on the southern coast of Mindanao.
The
chief
2.
is
Tamontaka.
Bibliography.
The author
of the three items that follow is given anony"un Padre Misionero", who, however, is known to
have heen Padre Bennasar.
Observacioms gramaticales sobre la lengua Tiruray, Manila
mously as
1892.
el
al
Costumbres de
los indios
la
Compania de Jesus,
3.
un Padre
Chief Peculiarities.
apparent are:
(a)
are
Vol. xxxiii.]
4.
Indonesian
151
a.
Under
ently only in a final syllable, e. g., Tir. limo, lifot (Phil, lipai
"to forget").
"Where it occurs in the penult, as in Tir. onok,
it is by assimilation to the o
a) of the following (final)
syllable.
Tirurai
baga
bard
layag
layag
gapas
gafas
"cotton"
labi
labi
"more"
laki
Idgei
"male"
batu
bateu
"stone"
kayu
kdyeu
"tree,
>
(a)
IN
Tir. o in
to itself
wood, firewood"
final
syllables
an original a of
152
(b) before
[1913.
(k, t):
anak
onok
"son, daughter,
young
(of animals)"
Bagobo
awak
Bikol
IN
Bagobo
owok
"waist"
lipdt
lifot
epat
efot
"forget"
"four"
alat
olot
"basket"
dogot
"sea"
Bisaya
(c)
ddgat
before a final nasal
Bisaya
man
Bisaya
Bisaya
Tag. Bis.
luldwan
n,
m):
mon
"also"
belowon "gold"
dolon
"road, way"
utofi
"debt"
ddlan
Utah
Ibanak
ittam
torn
Bisaya
Jcamu
Ibanak
nandm
"you (pi.)"
gom
nonom "flavor"
5.
y,
(n,
intens. part.
is
"we" (inclusive)
prevented by an adjacent
Change prevented by
s:
Non-Tirurai
Tag.
pisd
Tag.
lisa
Phil.
lasa
Phil.
legos
Phil.
tegas
Tag.
tdwas
Phil.
gatas
Mgd.
usan
(b)
TN
Change prevented by y:
ayam "bird, animal"
Phil.
layag
Bis.
sayap
Mgd.
paydk
Bgb.
layah
Bis.
duyan
(c)
Mgd.
Tirurai
Change prevented by
r:
l)ild
lira
ddra
bard
s or
by u and
Vol. xxxiii.J
Toba
Ibanak abagd
"west wind"
abara,
barat
Mai.
Mgd.
suag
Bagobo alcar
(d) But final a
bum
Tag. putt
Ilk.
Tag.
Indonesian
IN
6.
As
a rule
ward
"shoulder"
barat
suar
"tempest"
"thorn"
akar
"deceive"
153
sugd
(ELD)
buroburo
"foam"
furo
surd
"red"
*"puas escondidas"
and u.
and u remain unchanged
in Tirurai every-
Indonesian
(a)
final
> ei in Tirurai:
on-Tirurai
.Tirurai
Phil.
tali
Mai.
diri,
Phil.
Phil.
"tie
lilei
"post"
tani
tanei
Idki, lalaki
Idgei
"male"
Sangir dihi
Bis.
(Samar) siki
Ui
Pang.
Indonesian
(b)
IN
IN
IN
IN
IN
IN
IN
IN
-tetelu,
with cord"
tdlei
final
sekei
"foot"
bei
"woman"
> eu in Tirurai
Tag. tatlu
"three"
tetleu
pitu
batu
"seven"
fiteu
bateu
"stone"
kutu
kuteu
"louse"
kayu
Myeu
"tree,
ulu
uleu
"head"
siku
sigeu
"elbow"
abu
aweu
"ashes"
wod"
7.
IN
Tir. fitlu,
colorless,
enem
"six".
Indonesian p.
vol.
IN
Of.
VII
IN
Of. Conant,
IN
Law
in
or not, becomes
afei,
IN
/in
Tirurai:
Philippine Languages,
Anthropos,
920947.
and
ii,
11
154
IN
ate/,
name
9.
is
Indonesian
b.
IN
The
atep "roof".
Policarpio
[1913.
Tir. pronunciation
of the Spanish
Fulicarfiu.
IN
bateu,
Tag.
ward Reward,
IN
abu "ashes";
wogo
Tir.
<*ewogo, Phil.
abaka.
Indonesian
10.
k.
An
IN
as in Tir. sekei,
tionally,
sika
Mgd.
sonant
"cat",
e.
g,
laki "male";
g.,
Bis.
and regularly
Tir. sigeu,
IN
siku "elbow";
(0r
BG-H
Tir. Idgei,
cons.) "tail";
Phil.
Tir.
digur, Bis. likud "back, behind"; Tir. (be)gom, Bis. kamu "you".
k also regularly becomes g in accentless prefixes and
IN
suffixes
pronominal
Tir.
gelimo-nue,
IN
k,
(or enclitics) beginning with
Bis. ikalimd "the fifth"; Tir. uleu gu,
e.
g.,
Bis.
ulu ko "my head"; Tir. uleu go, Bis. ulu ka "your head". In
the foregoing examples the original k is, of course, really in
intervocalic position, and hence in the same category as the
intervocalic k ot the foregoing paragraph, but by analogy this
g (<&) has been extended so that it may follow any consonant,
e. g., Tir. i onok
gu, Bis. an anak ko "my son"; Tir.
gom (gom = Bis. kamu with apocopation of u) "your
and the
original
after a\ e\
word,
e.
o',
g.,
is
safut
cloth";
Tir.
sebad'
ku sa "I only";
Tir.
libu
ku "my
sister".
as g,
4
'tail":
KGH consonant.
RGH consonant appears
The
11.
The
e. g.,
but Tir.gakit,
Ilk.
Cf. Conant,
The
7085.
r,
exceptionally
As
Tirurai
vol. xxxi,
(1910), pp.
regularly as
Mai. rebah
"fall to ruins".
Vol. xxxiii.j
155
ELD
The
12.
is
law.
The phenomena
of
the
RLD
Indonesian
interchange in
a general
rule,
and
while others,
The
r,
Bikol
like
or, exceptionally, d.
RLD consonant
without regard to
its
initially
ticles
Tir.
ro
re,
ruo
(Phil, ra,
la,
Ibanak,
Ilk.,
Tagbanwa dua, Bis. duha, Pamp. adwd, Tag. dalawa "two"; Tir.
etur Phil. *tued, Ibk. tudt (written tudd in the Spanish sour:
Pamp. tud, Tag., Bis., Bkl., Sulu tuhud "knee". (For the
metathesis of Tir. etur Ctuer, cf. Tir. ebuk Pang, buck, Pamp.
ces),
cf.
Of
For
final
in medial position,
the
many examples
of r
(RLD)
ilun
following three will suffice: Tir irun (IN irun
idun)
"concealed
sula
"nose"; Tir. surd (IN sura
barbs";
suda)
Tir. drek (Samar Bis. liarok, Cebii Bis. lialok, Tag. lialik, Mgd.
:
ofefc,
Bkl.,
Bgb. hadok)
"sniff, kiss".
77.
RLD
RGH
series
Law,
in Ibanak,
p. 83,
Pang.,
and the
Ilk.,
Karo, Toba,
11*
156
[1913.
Examples of
Bkl. sugud,
sigir, Bis.,
Examples of medial
Pamp.
d:
Tir. sedo
Ilk. opro,
Tag.,
Bkl. apdu,
Bis.,
Malg.
fl/erw) "gall".
RLD
Rarely the
Tir.
lilei
kirai,
cf.
(initially,
Tag.
exceptional
consonant appears as
above, 11)
Ilk. kidai)
kilai,
and
doubtless
and
Tir.
in Tirurai, as in
An
(Mgd. Ibk.
kilai
is
entirely
of other
I.
"nit";
Tir.
Bagobo,
(Tag.
(Toba
The change
of
IN
s to
hiku (IN siku) "elbow", puha (Ilk., Pamp. pusa) "cat", ohm
(Tag. asin) "salt'*. Sambali (Zambales Province, NW. Luzon)
also changes IN s to h, but apparently only in initial and
final
position,
e.
Ma,
g.,
Sbl.
IN
"elbow";
Utih (Bkl.,
siku)
Pamp. Utis) "foot, lower leg"; but Sbl. pusa' (Ifg. puha, Tag.
pusa') "cat"; Sbl. asin (Ifg. ahin, IN asm) "salt".
In large portions of Samar and Leyte s has been weakened
in pronunciation to h, initially, in the Bisaya "articles" and
1
See E. E. Schneider, Notes on the Mangy an Language, Philippine
Journal of Science, vol. vii, no. 3, sec. D, Manila 1912, pp. 157178.
I am indebted to this work for the general statement: "Ifg. regularly has
h for gen. Phil, s." (p. 165, no. 17), and for the Ifugao and Sambali
examples. The Ifg. examples were furnished Mr. Schneider by Mr.
Vol. xxxiii.]
pronouns:
where.
si,
san,
sa,
siya,
sira,
and
sin'o,
but
not
157
else-
altho appearing
of regularity
languages, e.
ning of a phonetic
to h,
which
IN
e. g.,
itself
sm,
has in
siau,
spiritus
same
and
loss
in
of h
tho
is
it
have
as
intervocalic
position
it
was already
lost
in
classical
Attic.
Of.
same word,
see
N. Eomualdez,
above
(11).
p. 7
never used, but the s instead, for these articles. Generally it is conmore solemn to use the s instead of the h in speeches, letters
and poetry. But many times it is considered as a ridiculous affectation
is
,sidered
in places
where the h
is
used".
Baltimore, Md.
1.
November
for
1891,
p.
may be
without natural
heirs.
To
choose a
royalty (viz. the state elephant, the horse, the pitcher with
the consecrated water, and the chowries) are resorted to, and
fate or divine will is supposed to give some sign through their
instrumentality,
by which someone
is
selected
to
rule
the
country.
Another story (p. 155) names all five: "Then the ministers
had recourse to the five ordeals. The mighty elephant came
into the garden outside the city. There the elephant sprinkled
Prince Amaradatta and put him on its back. Then the horse
neighed. The two chowries fanned the prince. An umbrella
was held (i. e. held itself) over his head. A divine voice was
heard in the air: 'Long live King Amaradatta!'" The voice
1
p. 131
Vol. xxxiii.]
the air
in
an additional divine
is
ratification
159
of the choice
of the
coronation
ceremony,
is
made
king.
is
his
shoulder,
whereupon he
is
man
made
king.
Two
other parallels,
referred to by Tawney,
are found in
The horse
by marching around the man to the right. The ceremony occurs again on p. 62, this time with the five regular
emblems; upon seeing the fated man, the elephant trumpets,
the horse neighs, the pitcher of water sprinkles him, the
chowries fan him and the white parasol places itself above
The people then salute him with cries of hail, and a
him.
of fate
divine voice,
as
giving to the
ratifies
the choice,
of Vikrama.
this
Again
in
ff.
(ed.
i
It should be remembered that a king in India is always distinguished
by the chowries and the white parasol as his chief emblems of royalty,
while both the elephant and the horse belong especially to the royal
state.
160
Franklin Edgerton,
[1913.
just as in the
man, the son of a courtezan by a barber), the elephant trumpets and pours the water upon him and places him upon his
own
lotus at
man up and
tamani
(Tawney's
translation,
p.
181)
In the Prabandhacinthe
elephant (again
the chosen man
alone)
(with
(p.
chariot of state
ratha
does
not
mean
"flower
chariot"
as the
translator
of
Jat. 378 wrongly states, but "auspicious, festive car" or, specifiIn Jat. 539 it is yoked to four
cally, the royal chariot.
lotus-colored horses (the lotus is an emblem of majesty) and
upon
it
are placed the five "ensigns of royalty", rajakakudhaThe chariot is attended by a complete fourfold
bhandani.i
The
car
finds the
as if to be ascended.
ceremony
is
1
In Sanskrit these are generally referred to as (rdja-)kakuddni ; they
are not to be confused with the pancadivydni; they consist of sword,
Vol. xxxiii.]
161
in the
folklore
of a
of the
modern Hindus.
To be
sure,
the re-
of five
instruments of choice
group
cognition
seems not to have come down to modern times; we never find
more than two, and generally it is the elephant alone.
definite
choice
is
places
we have
occurs alone,
made
p.
p.
of Mitik had died leaving one daughter .... The ministers and Pounhas
began to deliberate among themselves about the choice of a match
worthy of the Princess .... At last, not knowing what to do, they
resolved to leave to chance the solution of the difficulty. They sent
out a charmed chariot, convinced that by the virtue inherent in it they
would find out the fortunate man .... The chariot was sent out, attended
by soldiers, musicians, Pounhas, and noblemen. It came straight forward to the mango trees garden and stopped by the side of the tablestone Phralaong was sleeping upon .... They awakened him at the
p. 159.
Franklin Edgerton,
162
s.
v.
ahiydsei)]
[1913.
it
Tawney
(Proc.
translates
Kathakosa,
p.
1
tatas tanhowever, reads:
mnntribhih panca divydny adhivdsitdni, tdis ca dattam tasya
rdjyam mahatd mahena: This clearly shows that adhivdsitdni,
not
adhydsitdni
is
the
Sanskrit
equivalent
of
the
Prakrit
ahiydsiydni. The Parisistaparvan (vi. 236, pancadivydny abhisiktdni mantribhih) gives a further hint as to the meaning of
a king. 2
As to the
and the
vdsana
(1)
it'
to
and
etc.,
As
oil.
its
Vol. xxxiii.]
163
1.
1890) gives for adhivdsana
odorous substances (samskdro
*
gandhamdlyddydih, Amarakosa" ;) 2. "Preliminary consecration
(pratisthd) of an image, its invocation and worship by suitable
Sanskrit-English Dictionary,
with
"Scenting
mantras
perfumes
before the
etc.,
or
commencement
of a sacrifice (yajndram-
bhdt
it
gives besides
"iiber
(1)
Nacht
vas
liegen
lassen",
also
volume
v.
s.
statement
erfullen", this
assigned to the
second meaning of this denominative, "weihen". To this later
view Bohtlingk adheres in the smaller Petersburg Lexicon.
Under
is
is
omitted
is
the
Yikramacarita
of the
meaning
adhivdsamya
(Ind.
XV.
Stud.
noun adhivdsana
in the
Nachtrage
1)
(cf.
359)
also
is
quoted.
The
adhivdsanaka and
vas, causat.,
distinguishes between (1) adhivdsana (from
with adhi) "causing a divinity to dwell in an image", and (2)
adhivdsana (from
vdsay- with adhi) "application of perfumes";
"the ceremony of touching a vessel containing fragrant ob-
1
Of the native Hindu lexicographers, some define adhivdsana simply
by samskdra, samskriya, saying nothing about perfumes; others define
it by samskdra or
samskriya dhupanddibhih or gandhamdlyddibhih. But
we remember
"perfume",
one
that there
who
164
jects
Franklin Edgerton,
(that
[1913.
purification of
idol)";
"preliminary
an image".
is
another
passage
of the
Agnipurana
18;
(64.
Dutt's
transl.
i.
ranajiram
compound
for
ca
adliivasitaastra
|
krtdkautumangalali,
shows a
them. 4
1
dtmdnam
Dutt
translates:
"we
shall
march
to
having worshipped our weapons and duly performed all the auspicious
ceremonies"; Pratap Chandra Roy: "having
worshipped our weapons
march to the field
(with offerings of flowers and perfumes) w e will
of battle"; Fauche: "nous marcherons vers le
bataille les armes
de
champ
.
sacrifice
et toutes les
Vol. xxxiii.]
suptdm
(viz.
adhivdsya
165
presence)",
whereupon he
is
to set
it
up formally at
and
fasting,
day
a
(select)
large-sized, middle-aged,
uninjured Muskaka tree, bearing
dark flowers and growing in an auspicious spot on a (lonely)
mountain, and perform the adhivdsana or 'preliminary cere-
mony',
fiery
lost!
my
saying
the
incantation:
following
of
When
work!
once
my work
is
me
former
1
is
accomplished.
Jdgarakdih (var.
Kern wrongly
lect.
translates
it
as
is
an adjective.
Soc.,
new
series,
"after the sleeping idol has been consecrated with wakes, dancing, and song"; so also both Petersburg Lexicons: "das Wachen".
2 In the foot-note Hoernle adds
"The adhivdsana is an oblation (balivi.
334):
for a
'
"
high object."
It is noteworthy that in all the passages where the adhivdsana ceremony
is mentioned, so far as I have discovered, no reference is made to perfumes, although the frequent use of fragrant substances at religious ceremonies in India would make such references not at all surprising. In any
event the employment of perfumes at the adhivdsana would be a mere
3
accident, without
this
ceremony.
[1913.
to
"parfumant"
for
adhivdsya
nam
it
adhivdsitdni,
then,
means "the
five
of the Pariistaparvan.
The neuter noun divya is frequently
found in the law-books in the sense of "ordeal". In our passages the word is used in a concrete instead of an abstract
sense.
ment
1
it
means "the
instru-
of divine test". 2
Insignien".
Tablets
from Drehem
the Public
in
land, Ohio.
From
as
They are
said
neighborhood
numun
to
of
Mppur;
name
a ruin in the
of the
month $M-
Umma
(Jocha) and
at Lagash (Tello), and there is reason to suppose that number
one of this collection came from Jocha.
The Drehem
accounts
great
sanctuary,
Nippur, with
are
tablets
of the
in
all
probability
the
temple of Ellil at
Attention has also been
and Genouillac
has pointed out the conclusion, namely, that Drehem was near
called to the large
number
of Semitic names,
9 Ob.
5,
Rev. 6
10 Eev.
9,
I-din-
1
Some 430 tablets from Drehem have been published, as follows:
"La Trouvaille de Drehem", in Eev. VAssyr., t. 7 (190910), pp. 186
191 (13 tablets). "L'Ordre des Noms de Mois sur les tablettes de
Drehem", ibid., t. 8 (1911), pp. 8488 (2 tablets), by Fr. Thureau-
tablets),
in Rev.
by
S.
d'Assyr.,
Langdon.
t.
(1911),
"Tablettes de Drehem", by
pp.
183198
(22 tablets).
9 (1912),
pp.
3966
(42 tablets).
Mary Inda
168
d
Da-gdn, 5 Ob. 6
5 Ob. 7
Hussey,
[1913.
Na-ra-am-E-a,
La-ma-za-tum, 1 Rev. 2
6 Eev. 5: 7 Rev. 6: 8 Eev. 9, Seal,
|
Nu-ur- d Sin,
d
1
Samaxedge of Rev., Col. 2
Wa-da-ru-um, 5 Ob. 11.
ba-ni, 5 Ob. 8
The tablets published here range in date from the year
line 1: 10
Rev.
Seal on
6,
left
x + 32).
No.
1.
REVERSE.
OBVERSE.
^JllLJr-1
/^>HU-S_
r\
Tello
Cf.
ZA. XXV,
p. 19, n. 1;
p. 330;
BA
VI,
5, p.
Vol. xxxiii.]
Tablets
from Drehem,
No.
169
&c.
2.
OBVERSE.
Account of the delivery of sheep and goats by Ab-bawhich are taken in charge (ni-KU) 2 hy Na-lul on the
13th day of the month Ezen-an-na, the year that the great
3.
$&(g)'ga,
Of. Inventaire,
VOL. XXXIII.
1,
Part. II.
p. 6, n. 4.
12
Mary Inda
170
Hussey,
[1913.
high priest of Anu was invested high priest of Nanna(r) (BurSin 4). Note: udu-$e gu(d)-e u$-sa Ob. 3, mas-gal-$e gu(d)-e
u$-sa Ob. 8, and sil-ga, Rev. 2, sucking lamb.
No.
3.
OBVERSE.
REVERSE.
destroyed
is
unknown
(Bur-Sin
to me.
6).
The
last
sign
in
1
Huber in Hilprecht Ann. Vol., p. 194 translates "mit Abzug der
Gebiihren"; Genouillac, Inventaire, 2, no. 629, "paiement de dettes",
no. 789, "en paiement d'interet".
For a discussion of
this
t.
9, p. 42, n. 6.
Vol. xxxiii.]
Tablets
171
4.
OBVERSE.
REVERSE.
5. An account of 21
slieep and goats, supplied (mu-tum) by
16 different persons, among whom are Ur- d Nin-kur-ra pa-te-si
(of
month Ezen-mali, the year the high priest of Eridu was invested (Bur-Sin
Note: udu-a-lum* Ob. 5, 12, 14, Rev. 45
8).
1
lists
2
They
Cf.
Dhorme
ganam-a-lum, in Genouillac.
in Eev. d'Assyr., t. 9, p. 40,
Prehem
Tab.
calls
tablets.
Cf. the
name-
172
uz ma$-nu-a
Mary Inda
8e
Ob.
7,
fat
Hussey,
[1913-
No.
5.
OBVERSE.
REVERSE.
Vol. xxxiii.]
Tablets
173
of 12
No.
6.
OBVERSE.
REVERSE.
the
month
fat
a-lum sheep
for the
t.
9,
2
Ct. Genouillac,
p. 53,
Of.
SA
208.
Dhorme, Eev.
d'Assyr.,
t.
9, p. 54, n.
3.
Eev. d'Assyr.,
174
able with slg-ma$
The
somewhat from
No.
7.
OBVERSE.
REVERSE.
Of.
[1913.
t.
9, p. 45, n. 2.
Tablets
Vol. xxxiii.]
from Drehem
175
&c.
la
(REG.
8.
OBVERSE.
SEAL.
REVERSE.
366), Ob. 3.
Mary Inda
176
Hussey,
[1913.
An
d
day of the month Ezen- Dun-gi, the year Simanu
was destroyed (Grimil-Sin 3). The seal of Nu-ur- d S[in
]
dup-sar [du]mu I-ti-ir~ra has been run over the entire tablet,
but the seal impression is in every case indistinct. Note:
the
first
Ob
6..
An
No.
9.
OBVERSE.
Huber
in Kilprecht
it as a
of grain, regards
t.
9,
p. 53,
AM.
made by a high
13,
Ann.
renders
official
Vol.,
synonym
it
Of.
GenouillaCj
See Inventaire^
AM
13.
2,
t.
no. 796,
8,
p. 195.
Dhorme
No. 18 ob.
8.
in Rev. d'Assyr.,
t.
9,
p. 53,
Tablets
IVol. xxxiii.]
from Drehem
177
&c.
REVERSE.
SEAL.
on behalf of the
10. Expended
(ba-zi) by Ur-azag-nun-na:
king 1 bullock, 10 sheep from the pasture (udu-$am) as $u-gid
e-mu in the name of the commissaries (mu lu'8uk(um)-ra-gene-$u)
ti);
les
2
;
the
Dun-gi-uru-mu has received (Su-ba-an25th day of the month Ezen^Me-Tti-gal, the year
10 dead sheep
REG.
Of. iu-gid
no. 344.
chauffeurs
(?)
e-mu mu-uku-us-ge-ne-Su,
ibid.,
SA
t.
9, p. 51,
SA
cuisine
172;
pour
Su-gid
178
Mary Inda
No.
Hussey,
[1913.
10.
OBVERSE.
SEAL
SEAL.
REVERSE.
(Gimil-Sin
REG.
9).
no. 458.
of
Umma
Tablets
Vol. xxxiii.]
179
times,
1)
ki
ag-ga lugal uri- ma lngal-an-ub-da tab-ba (Col. 2) Hu-u[n
]
d
dup-sar dumu Gimil- Adab sahar arad-zu. To Gimil-Sin, the
mighty king, king of Ur, king of the four quarters of the
world, Hu-u[n
thy servant.
The
son
the scribe,
left
edge
of
of the
reverse
For other
5354.
same
ruler,
see Janneau,
by
AV
Une Dy-
character.
As an
illustration
of the
unfavorable
27 of the beginning
view, the account given in Genesis 9, 20
of viniculture furnishes a characteristic illustration.
In this
addition to the Jahwist's account of the Deluge, 1 the
planting of the vine leading to Noah's fall from grace is
little
clearly introduced as a protest against the use of wine. Similarly, in the folk-tale, Gen. 19, 3138, of the origin of the
tribes
of
Ammon
daughters.
incident is
is
with his
two
himself.
is
Old Testament which looks with disfavor on the advance to a higher form of culture. Abel the
shepherd is given the preference over Cain the tiller of the
soil and the city builder.
In the Pentateuchal Codes agriin
many
parts of the
1
See Budde Urgeschichte, p. 313 seq. Gunkel, Genesis, p. 71, and Skinner,
Genesis, p. 182 seq., though it is not necessary to assume with Budde,
Skinner, and others, that the section does not know anything of the
Deluge.
2
It matters
artificial.
(p.
197 seq.)
Wine
Vol.xxxiii.]
culture
is
The simple
Kingdom 2
is
181
advancing form of
luxury which comes with the higher culture. The prophets
are full of protests against what from the
ordinary point of
view would be regarded as material and political
progress.
surviving to the period of the Exile, represent this protest of the lower culture against the
higher one,
emphasized by their opposition to wine and by their dwelling
The Rechabites, 3
in
tents in preference to
houses
life.
The Book
red,
when
it
etc.;
Pr. 20,
1,
"Wine
is
is
"He who
"It
Nor
is
for rulers to
mix strong
drink;
Wine
to
him who
is
is perishing,
in bitter distress;
practices
Jahweh
Sam.
the
9,
15.
Book of Proverbs,
p. 539).
182
[1913.
Wine
was
still
temptuous attitude
be sure, e. g., Pr.
is
9,
and
5,
"mixed wine"
is
Elsewhere, to
introduced by
Psalm
104, 15.
And
of the
establishment
of the
of
wine had become common; and it is significant that according to the Deuteronomic Code (Deut. 14, 26) both wine and
strong drink may be indulged in on the occasion of the festivals, showing that by the end of the seventh century opposition
to
juxtaposition
of "bread
and wine",
18. 3
as
is
the
reflected in
the
to
the
accessory
Pre-exilic
and
post-exilic
(Is.
Amos
48,
5,
33;
11;
9,
Zeph.
14; Is. 16, 10; 24, 11; Jer. 13, 12; 40, 10. 12;
1,
13;
Micha
6,
15;
in
cf.
Polychrome Bible,
ed.
Haupt.
39.
Gunkel, Genesis p. 263, has happily and tersely described this chapter
as a "legend of the time of Judaism", based on some historical reminiscences which are woven into the story, intended to bring Abraham into
3
away
Wine
Vol.xxxiii.]
Lam.
12.
2,
183
the
in
late
passage
Zach.
On
the
other
his father,
17 and she placed the "dainties and the food"; v. 19, "eat
venison" cf. v. 31
33) food only is referred to, and the
(v.
of
my
manner
in
between
distinction
earlier
and
$1Tn
2
for
}^\
(ddgdn,
summing up
the products of the land, where tirdS takes the place of the
later yayin and represents a preparation of the grape juice in
less
It has, of course,
usage by
D^n
(Jiittim)*
and )&$
($emeri)
so
p. 279.
13; 11, 14; 12, 17; 14, 23; 18, 4; 28, 51. The occurrence of
the phrase in such passages as Hos. 2, 10. 24, Haggai 1, 11, Joel 2, 19
and II Chron. 31, 5, and Neh. 5, 11; 10, 40; 13, 5. 12 is of course a
2
Deut.
7,
reminiscence
]}1
7,
Driver, Deuteronomy,
Ddgdn, however, continues
p. 103.
e. g.
my
184
[1913.
II.
The
all
religions with
(vv. 8
9)
in which
this
prohibition
is
set
forth
is
is,
I think,
an indication
an early
of
There
9.
is evidently
retained with intent to reflect the conditions prevailing during the nomadic
period of Hebrew history. Mohammed's prohibition of wine is a trace
of the same opposition of the "nomadic" stage of culture against the innovations of higher civilization. See the incident referred to by Mittwoch, "Zur Entstehungsgeschichte des Islamischen Gebets" (Abh. d. Egl.
Preuf. AJcad. d. Wiss., 1913, PhiL-Hist. Klasse Nr. 2, p. 14).
Wine
Vol.xxxiii.]
185
as sketched
and
functions, but
were
it
much
looks very
as
though
this
were a con-
made
cession
(Num.
6,
7;
cf.
Lev. 21,
I),
and
it
is
therefore
a fair
placed in juxtaposition,
9,
32; etc.
The
later
the
that the exceptions do not apply to the high priest (v. 11), we may conclude that the law not to touch a dead body under any circumstances
The law
shall
in its original
separate himself".
all
priests.
What
follows
(v.
4)
is
in
the nature of a
"Gemara" to the law, specifying the answers to such questions, does wine
and strong drink include vinegar of wine and of strong drink? Yes.
about grape juice? Yes forbidden. How is it with fresh or dried
grapes? They also are forbidden. In fact anything made of grapes is
included in the prohibition (v. 4). Haggai 2, 11 17 furnishes an inter-
How
esting example of such questions and priestly decisions (note the technical use of tord in the passage!) as constituting a regular practice. For
further illustration of this method of superimposing layers embodying
decisions
paper
on
Part IL
186
[1913.
among the
ingredients of a sacri-
Jahweh's sanctuary?
III.
find
in three
it
in the
sections
all
is
a miriha
or meal offering consisting of fine flour with oil and wine. The
amount of the wine is throughout regulated to correspond to
3
the amount of the oil
1/4 of a Hin of oil for a lamb and
Hin
Hin
of wine for a
of
oil
of
oil
This in itself is
young of cattle or bullock.
an indication that the wine is dependent upon the oil constituting an additional ingredient added to the conventional
4
represents the combination of two distinct themes (1) the nazir law and
(2) the laws regarding the one who vows to "separate" himself for a limited
i. e., to become a
temporary nazir a later practice. The detailed
analysis of this chapter must be left for some other occasion.
1
16 is a little Tora furnishing general regulations for sacriv. 1
period,
and has no connection- with the following sections which deal with
ordinances, put together without any apparent method.
The chapter is sandwiched in between a narrative of the people's murmurings against Jahweh and the rebellion of Korah.
2 These two
chapters form a little Tora of sacrificial regulations for
fices
miscellaneous
the daily offerings, for the Sabbath, for the new moon, for the Passover,
for the "day of firstlings", for the first and tenth days of the seventh
month and
3
Num.
for the
15,
49;
Hag
28,
or pilgrimage festival.
14. In the latter passage "and their libations
57.
are 1/2 of a Hin for a bullock, 1/3 of a Hin for a ram and 1/2 of a Hin
for a bullock"
thus specified once for all, so that in the rest of the two
chapters, the amount is briefly indicated by the phrase "their libations".
*
Num.
15, 8 "i|?a-)2
"IS
Num.
The combination
redundant designation.
Num.
Num.
8,
Chapt. 28,
11. 19;
Wine
Vol.xxxiii.]
187
minJja of "flour
wine
as
is
is
the libation.
Similarly, in Lev. 23
the
for
regulations
three
of wine
for
festivals
and tenth 3
first
Passover
13)
(v.
is
tacked on to "flour
the
day of
mixed with oil" in an
first
unmistakable manner. 4
Note how
in
Num.
38.
minha
(v.
1617)
is
first
specified as
nBUJi) with seven lambs, one bullock, two rams (v. 18) representing an
addition to the "grain" offering to which as a second supplement (v. 19)
a goat as a sin-offering and two lambs as a "peace-offering" are attached.
3
X-in
D'n.BSn
later gloss.
4
v.
ing to
there
is
is
in Lev. Chap. 2.
s
Lev.
2,
13.
I use the conventional renderings for the technical term rnsiK, IT"!,
ntrpi, Wtibti, nNten, ntfN etc., though I am satisfied that all of them need
6
investigation
are conveyed
188
[1913.
the miriha
is
45)
a
any leaven, (v. 11) it is evident that the wine as
exthis
be
of
virtue
fermented product would by
absolutely
consist of
cluded.
ritual
oil 3
*
Lev. 7, 9 where these three forms of minhd are again mentioned,
but no reference is made to any azkdrd.
b
2 Lev.
20.
See the study of this ritual in the writer's paper
14, 8
on Leviticus, 13 and 14 above referred to.
3 The amount of oil is here
specified in a gloss as "one log" (Lev. 14,
10.
12;
minhd
this
is
also
is
v.
(v. 10)
done in order to
of attaching a
offering).
Although the term
and the amount of flour specified as 3/20,
make the ritual conform to the later practice
24 in the "substitute"
introduced
minhd
Numbers
15
and 2829.
This
driven
is
tive rite to
case the
animal
have been superimposed upon the "oil" rite; and here again two
layers may be recognized (a) an earlier one represented by an ewe (v. 10
cf. Lev. 5, 6) as a guilt offering (v. 14) and (b) two lambs (v. 10) one as
a sin offering, the other as a burnt offering (v. 19) in accordance witli
sacrifices
the conventional later practice. With the growth of the priestly organization especially in the sanctuary at Jerusalem necessitating the providing of an income for the priests, animal sacrifices became predominant
and the minhd became an adjunct to the various kinds of animal offerings
with the natural
sin-offerings, burnt offerings and peace-offerings
1115,
new moon,
viz:
67
Wine
Vol. xxxiii.]
189
minim which
12
to
is
offering"
13).
(Lev.
7,
sacrificial re-
in Ezekiel
It
is
clearly
Numbers
Ezekiel
]
2 bullocks
bullock
6 lambs
1
On
the other
7 lambs
ram
is
Numbers
Ezekiel
ram
larger in Ezekiel.
the bullock
lamb
lambs
One Kin
of
oil
for each
The amount of
Num. 28,
and 1/4 Hin
in Numbers !)
(cf.
oil is
Epha
not specified in Numbers but the assumption
is
5; 15, 4. 5. 9) 1/2 Hin for the bullock, 1/3 Hin for the ram
for each lamb as is shown by the amount of wine (only
2829
dsdm" or Lev.
14,
Num. 15 and
where the minhd appears as the regular addition
represents the later practice.
1
The dsdm is not to be distinguished in the Codes from the hattat,
as the statement, Lev. 7, 7 "There is one law for the hattdt as for the
13
-"the
dsdm
is
like
the hdttaf
shows.
which
is
Whether
probably
Morris
190
Jastroiv, jun.,
[1913.
had become
as in
common
all
opposition
when it had
but when wine
10, 7;
(cf.
also
10, 19)
old feeling
subject
is
wine was put in the later Jewish ritual where, as is wellknown, the wine becomes the symbol for the sanctification of
the Sabbath and of the Jewish festivals 2 and which is reflected in the New Testament passages regarding wine. 3
It is thus a far cry from the opposition to viniculture expressed in Genesis maintained by the Rechabites down to
the time of the Exile and implied in the Nazir's abstention
from wine to the use of wine as indicated in the latest layers
of the Pentateuchal Codes, and it is a still wider step to the
blessings over the "fruit of the wine" which is such a significant feature of the official
four cups of wine as marking the divisions of the family serthe so-called Seder on the eve of the Passover festival.
vice
14,
23-25
= Luke
22,
but to "use a
little
significant,
especially
the 4th
part
Wine
Vol.xxxiii.]
191
many
of the pro-
many
that
it
conclusions
his
up the thesis that all the Codes conventionally recogby critics show evidence of having originated at a time
when the
religious
scattered
the
cific
'application
of any given
law;
(c)
character
comments
definition
of
an ex-
of
terms,
including glosses,
variant expressions and the like. In other words we have in
these Codes the same process that is to be seen in the super-
planatory
imposition of the
of
For the
of the post-exilic temple service.
largely theoretical
sake of convenience, such designations as the Priestly Code
with its various subdivisions J may be retained, but it must be
recognized that the terms do not convey any sense of organic
unity, and that the subdivisions recognized have nothing more
than a formal value. Each little section consisting frequently
of a
into
layers
its
differentiate
I, p.
between the
155 seq.
Wine in
put,
civilization
Hebrew
of
which
will,
valuable results.
the
etc.,
At
The Emperor
to the Ta-ts'in
of the
later
p. 31.)
Yang-ti's Fu-lin.
name
Han
period,
is
first
applied in
We
which
it
it
for
realize the emperor's wish was made through P'e'i Kii and his
emissaries.
Knowing from the passage referred to that P'e'i
Kii failed in this attempt "to his regret," as the text adds,
we have in the first instance to look for the motive of the
emperor's desire and the reason which
with the desired communication.
may have
interfered
K.
E.
Chap. 221 A,
0.,
33.
p. 25
B, quoted J.A.O,
8.
xxx
8,
Friedrich Hirth,
194
[1913.
Turks, and
it
being taken in the country is the remark found in the T'angshu about Yang-ti' s having in vain tried to communicate with
Fu-lin.
Who knows whether he did not even then call the
country Ta-ts'in
substituted for
come
familiar
it
name
the Sui-sliu,
in
P'e'i Kii, 3
biography of
fell
rians.
If
we enquire
the
into
possible
motives
prompted Yang-ti's wish for intercourse with India and Fulin, we have to dismiss- from the outset all political schemes.
a kind
of personal
luxurious
splendour.
life
of
to the
St.
Chap.
83,
Chap. 67.
The Mystery of
Vol. xxxiii.]
Fu-lin.
195
felt flattered
of so
at
many foreigners
gorgeous shows. Among these
the strangers from the west seem to have monopolized his interest.
P'e'i Kii had acquainted him in his work, the
Si-yil1
with the result of his enquiries among the Centralt'u-Jd,
Asiatic traders he had met during his residence in Chang-ye
his
the
says,
of the Eastern
Han
tation of this country as a producer of all the mineral treasures and the manufactures in jewelry required to feed the
market of a luxuriant race was not confined to the Roman
fejc
Friedrich Hirih,
196
[1913.
Dorado
We
see
need
quantities.
the
cultivate
friendship of nearer countries which sent to his court ambassadors with tribute in the shape of articles of intrinsic value
made him
P'e'i
visit
arose
the court.
From
this
of the "Western
regions,
millions to the inter-
We
class,
From
fact it would
sent
been
have
appear
during any of
may
the thirteen years of the Ta-ye period, i. e. 605 to 617. During
all this time fighting took
place somewhere in Western Asia
the
that
the mission
&w&
s
v. i
ft & tt m & s. n $
* A M a s w & ig m tt * & m
15 1M
JM m H 1 &, M 35 f
* i m i a * a a an 9 ft n fi x *
z &*
% m
*fc
-ft
-t
w>
t-
The Mystery of
Vol. xxxiii.]
benefactor
of
King Khosru
creating a casus
197
Fn-lin.
of Persia,
to be murdered,
thus
belli
strife
it
him
safe
it
him
On
it is most
likely that the ambassador's
was further stimulated by the existence
Madain, one of the cities where Persian
formed of the union of the two cities Ctesiphon
for which reason we find either of these old
rulers resided,
and Seleucia,
names occassionally applied
"The
capital",
is
it
stated there,
"is
is
clearly identical
middle of the
refers to
to other cities,
i.
e.
%mm m%*
* 3 ? * m ft.
4
wm
*x
tt
*M &
198
Friedrich Hirth,
[1913.
the one city of Madain, the Tigris flowing south between the
It is scarcely possible that the Chinese visitors
cities. 1
two
could have spent some time at King Khosru IPs court without
coming into contact with the Nestorians living under their
patriarch on the other side of the river in Ctesiphon. It is
this
Khosru
order to
happened
to
who according
to
time,
II,
be in high
favour just
with
also
a Christian,
it
in
is
true, but strongly opposed to Nestorian heretics, the adversaries of the orthodox Boman church and friends of the Persians.
He had for this reason taken the church of Edessa
from the orthodox clergy and handed it over to the Nestorians
and forced all the other Christians under his jurisdiction to
embrace the Nestorian "heresy". 2
The patriarch
of the Nestorians,
all
10.
"When the
first
**
ft
"Omnium Persarum regum maxime
M IS
rites,
dat-
Nestorianis favit
Chosroes Abrui-
zus, qui ut Heraclio Imperatori aegre faceret, Edessenam Ecclesiam Orthodoxis ereptam, Nestorianis tradidit, et reliquos suae ditionis Christianos
Po-ssz-shi
ftf
Assemani,
Po-ssi-
IV
p. 94.
Vol. xxxiii.]
199
and
at times
pulation
at
leaders,
was
as friends
Their
others.
exiles, prisoners,
treated as slaves
and a most
in Syria. 2
It prohahly took the Chinese over ;i
to
realize
this.
For it appears that the Christ i:m
years
hundred
came from
Ta-ts'in
[i.
e.
Syria], the
the
whose leaders had come from India, called their counBuddha's home "Magadha", they followed this pretry
cedent and called their country, Syria, after Christ's home
"Bethlehem", of which "Fu-lin" in its old pronunciation but-lim
dhists,
after
is
the transcription.
ii.
The name
The outcome
literature
of
of this
court of the Nestorian patriarch in Madain or Ctesiphon together with the Christian population of Persia, which
1.
The
Syria itself;
the Roman empire with Byzantium as
Reprinted in Havret, La
J. A. 0. S. xxx 6 seqq.
its
capital.
ft
4
J.
X JR $
A. 0.
S.
xxx
Qfc
34.
fi
* Jl .$
Havret,
1.
c.
* *
Friedrich Hirth,
200
As an example
of the first-named
[1913.
among
1
pretations, I wish to refer to a passage in the T'ang-shu,
an
on
an
in
account
of
in
the
Persia,
episode
treating,
history
of that country regarding which we happen to possess some information in western authors. "After the murder of Khosru II,"
the
text
says,
"his
son
Slri-li
[Slier oe]
a minor,
situation
time.
to his
perils
alliance
is
hold.
Chap. 221
B., p. 15.
i*mf
? Mm Agm & n K&nm
K m x t E A * m ft * i * i x
JK m
cha.
* m m -% & m fi A m A z, % n 9 11 $
2
cr.
The Mystery
Vol. xxxiii.]
of Fu-lin.
201
no other place
to
than Ctesiphon.
we may
first
instance.
in the country who might have been able to smooth over the
difficulties in which Persia found herself at the time was the
c
had been
[the
sent
government
this
of]
father [Yeshu'yabh]
his
4
king supported him against his adversaries.
Whichever of the two versions may be correct, it appears that
Yeshu'yabh held a confidential position with either Ardeshir's
the
Persian
father, or his
Or Kobad
Vol. II p. 31.
II.
14
Friedrich Hirth,
202
by the wish
dictated
tection
of the
to benefit
patriarch,
the
[1913.
Madain. l
12.
I have
speaking in
Fu-lin standing for Syria, or let us say
Orient generally, the identification I had proposed
favour of the
the
Roman
for
the
Greater Fu-lin.
name
name
Ta-ts'in.
little
England.
We
now
are
as
and who knew that, besides the Fu-lin of the early Nestorians, there was a Greater Fu-lin to the North-west of it.
This knowledge, which might have changed materially the
accounts of Fu-lin in the two T ang-shu had their authors
known of the existence of the little work recently recovered
from the rubbish of an abandoned Buddhist library, has been
J
e.,
Five Indies."
literature.
It
is
among
that
J. A. 0. S.
xxx
7.
The Mystery of
Vol. xxxiii.]
203
Fu-lin.
by Pelliot to Prodated Tun-huang, March 26, 1908, and reproduced in B.E.F.E.-O., Tome VIII, Nos. 3-4, 1908 (p. 11 seq.
of the Reprint). On his way from Tun-huang to Paris, where
fessor
Senart,
Mr. Lo Chon-yii
i-shu
title
in four fascicules.
thesaurus I-ts'ie-king-yin-i, chap. 100. But here the first character, Hui, in the traveller's name in the title, as given in
of the book,
the body
is
1&
instead of |j,
which character
Pthe
king-yin-i
I-ts'ie-
contains names not found in the fragment. In the text itself (p. 14)
the traveller says that he came to An-si, b the seat of a Chinese
1
m m sFor
loan I
its
am
& ft % t *
of Japanese
the first to
**.
14*
Friedrich Hirth,
204
[1913.
The few
as the time to
ment, as far as
it
Yet
books.
it is
Ta-?ang-si-yu-ki, which
or confirms, many of the facts
is
it
repeats,
older
full
most
It
it
in-
also
anyone were
instance,
sound "Kashgir",
is
The headings
(Persia, etc.)
Translation, pp. 10
u.
[Persia.]
From
had held sway over the Ta-shi [Arabs]. The Ta-shi [Arabs]
had been camel drivers to the kings of Po-ss'i [Persia]. Afterwards they had rebelled and then killed the other kings and
set themselves up as masters of the country.
So it happened
now
that
shirt.
only
this
They
in
ground into
*
2
3
See
cut beard
pastry
my
m
*h
B A*
ft
m m. m
B-
35.
Vol. xxxiii.]
205
from each other and from those of the remaining counThe inhabitants being by nature bent on commerce, they
are in the habit of sailing in big craft on the western sea,
differ
tries.
and they enter the southern sea to the Country of Lions [Ceywhere they get precious stones, for which reason it is said
lon],
it
to fetch gold.
They
They
also go
Han
Heaven
[Allah]
[The Ta-shi,-Arabs.]
From
into
the
but they saw their residence (moved) into the country of Siaufu-lin. 4
On account of their having gained possession of that
country by overcoming it, that country has retreated to places
[on the continent?] and on islands but rarely
That country produces camels, mules, sheep, horses,
cotton cloth and wollen rugs. They have also precious stones.
Their dress consists of a wide shirt of fine cotton and they
in
the
hills
visited. 5
throw over
it
Coast of Africa? Of. Hirth and Rockhiil, Chau Ju-Jcua, etc., p. 149.
Probably the western part of it, because Po-ssi' was said in the
preceding paragraph to be a month's journey west of Tokhara.
1
Europe.
6
Caftan.
206
JFriedrich Birth,
wide
Men
shirts.
[1913.
women keep
down. 2
[Ta-Fu-lin.]
The country
of Little Fu-lin
3 is
near the
sea.
North-west
had encroached on
its
The
the language
is
different
from either of
Fagir
be one dish better than the rest, let him not be greedy on his own
account, but let him offer it to others."
2 Before the
king,
apparently referring to the first Arab embassy
to the court of China, when the ambassadors refused to perform the
prostration before the Emperor, because with their people "one knelt only
before Heaven and not before the King."
3
The characters
}$j
$j?p
here
of writing the name, viz., J^j Jfc, and their ancient sound,
fat-lam or pat-lam, is the same.
* The
great final defeat of the Arabs in 718 must have been fresh in
usual
way
the traveller's
5
this
paragraph.
first
Constantinople.
The Mystery
Vol. xxxiii.]
tt
*
II
t*
$ W ^ Jf & X i &
* ^ 1* tt IS
J
* ft ^ * A * It *
f
4fc
i^r
Hi
^m mi
f*
Jg
&
IB
3E
AI
-f JE
g|
* *
sa ff ?- P^
ft
ffi
^ a ^ A
fif
li
JJ ft iR
Mr
ff
ffl
it
,S|
>$
*T
+ m
*H*^
a M, i
fl
fe
ft
H S
JKi
fc
i *
^ ^ S $ H *
>k
^B
% *
is fl
IR!
IS te
9i
ft ft
* W
JS ft
W S i
*fi
SI
a * JR
@ ^
s
JR 13 ff w i
^
III
ft dt
ft
J9f
life
tt tt
If
J3
ft
I* ft tt IS ii ie
^ SH^
as
3? it jR
a m a A m
ft
B*
A x A
15 *
B B - A
if
IS fi
ft fe
^c
^ ^
% a
flf
ET
ft 8t 6S
^
4
^^WW
te
ro
'
f& ft ax
ft ft fl
s x
ffi
w s
K OJ
*fc
It f^
S*
jR ti
--*-
^c
207
of Fu-lin.
1$
Ommeyad
course, only refer to the Roman empire with its military power
as opposed to "the remaining countries", i. e. Persia, the Arabs,
etc.
If the ambassadors of Nicephorus Melissenus were accepted
came
of the
first
208
Friedrich Hirth,
The Mystery
of Fu-lin.
[1913.
with
the
For the
Ta-sh'i ~fc
name Ta-shi
;/
JL
of
is
Tamil
the Christian
Era.
Two
Centuries of
The
From
very obscure.
ditions
are
literature
found in
or
in
stray passages
occasional references
in
of trade
with
Greece
and Rome.
be gathered that before the time of Alexander, the
comprising some of the earliest racial elements
in India, had been organized under a
dynasty that had originated in northern, that is Aryan, India, and that in all probIt
may
Tamil
states,
name
father
Whatever
named Pandsea
after her".
Wilfred H. Schoff,
210
[1913.
in the second
A.D.,
finally
indications
is
known
ment
whom they despised as outcasts and sacrilegious innovators in settled Hindu customs. It is therefore not imPallavas,
possible that
felt
as
Tamil
Vol.xxxiii.]
211
while
Chola
the
allegiance.
differing
political
elements.
And
as
state being
ground, as it were, between two mill-stones.
Strabo (XV, iv, 73) mentions an embassy from "King
Pandion" to the Emperor Augustus in 20 B.C. Pliny (VI, 23),
and
and
Chola
textile industries
spices of the
in the
in the
gems
gems
From
the
the
during
that the
intermediate
position
B.C.
to
of
150
Pandya enabled
A.D.,
it,
approximately,
to
if
all
We
infer
successfully,
by Chera.
for
Wilfred H. Schoff,
212
[1913.
23),
approximately, belonged to
on the other hand, written some ten
Pliny
years later, makes Bacare again Pandyan (
54).
mentions the Pandyan capital, Madura, but knows nothing
The Periplus, on the other hand, after
of the Chola capital.
Chera.
The
A.D.,
Periplus,
in a recent
this
Argaru
transcription
Now
is
A.D.,
the
Raghuvamsa (dating
Uragapura
How
Uraiyur subject
to,
make
Pandya with those earlier
independent? The explanation seems
or dependent on,
dependent kingdom
is
referred
to
as Pa<n\aa
Now
is
very
An
in-
and a subject
"coast country";
A.D.,
the Chola
state,
while
not conquered
and
in-
That
its
it
was practically
Tamil
Vol.xxxiii.]
fered with
is
213
tell
of the
active trade of the capital and of its eastern seaport, Kfiviripaddinam, which appears in the Periplus as Camara. It was
unable to
I.
and
38,
(Elliot,
II. 45).
This
of the
time during that century, when one of its kings named Karikala, according to a Tamil poem, invaded Ceylon and carried
of thousands of coolies to work on the embankment along
the Kaviri River, 100 miles in length, which he is said to
have constructed. (Pillai, The Tamils 1800 years ago, pp. 64-78;
gands.
district,
con-
naming a
as
periods
For
not exer-
titles
Schoff, The Periplus of the Erythraean Sea, and Mookerji,
History of Indian Shipping, both pub. by Longmans, 1912,
1
following
king,
Classical Parallels to
Gr.
a Sanskrit Proverb. - -
By ROLAND
<
KVVOL
yevo-ai
Theocritus
"'Tis
(x. 11),
105;
edition
(Bombay Sanskrit
iii,
(p. 92;
(p.
iii.
p. 68;
xi),
i.
56): sva
yadi kriyate
11; Buhler's
i.
10.
no. 5433
ff.,
nos. 57
61.
K ^va
i.
ytew appears
376
(Gregorius
719 (Apostolius);
ed. Bekker, p. 1116.
However, they take xopiov in another sense; the interpretation of Apostolius, to which that of the others is very similar, is as follows: tirl T&V
ii.
tirl
els
t/j,[3ptois
5t& rb
ol
a Sanskrit Proverb.
Classical Parallels to
Vol. xxxiii.]
ovSc
O-CUT'
if
leather,
eating
215
stop
and
so"),
in
iii.
47),
("for a
bitch
In the form Non leviter corio canis dboccurs in Alanus de Insulis' Doctrinale
Minus s. Liber Parabolarum (Migne, Patrol. Lat., vol. 210,
col. 581 c).
Bale manuscript of the fifteenth century has
Non canis a corio suUto depellitur undo (J. Werner, Latein.
absterreUtur uncto. 3
undo 4
strdhetur ab
it
Gregorius Gyp.
KVUV
ov8
irava-aiT^
(Leutsch,
&v atra
ii.
Cf.
TU>V
irl
Cf.
Frag.,
41, p. 64)
(Leutsch
evad^ixjiv
ii.
/caicias
VKIJTOVS
643)
ru>bs
Kal
^vena.
ourw
fj.rf
the
iii.
this
cites
126)
ffKVTorpayeiv /iaflowra;
160
Kfav
fj.\eTirj<Ta.s
iii. 380)
compares Demosthenes, XXV. 40,
r&v irpopdruv KaTOLKbirreiv ^>aal 5eiv.
3 Peter
of Blois cites this verse, Epist.
(Migne's Patrol. Lat.
vol. 207, col. 55 B; Petri Blesensis Opera omnia, ed. I. A. Giles, i. 57).
In spite of the scholiast and modern editors I am inclined to construe
XV
are cited
5 In
general, the fondness of dogs for a hide is referred to in Aesop's
fable (218 Halm
134 Schneider) Kvves Xi/ucirrovo-at (/cifres Xt/icirrouj-cu us
tdediravTo
tv
TIVI
KOIVUV tvvo&v
TWUV
irorafj.^
19,
p.
jSvpiras
1067
tfj,ir\ebvTwv etc.),
Ppexofjt.tva.s
(ovdtv
etc.),
a7roheliroi>Tas
quoted by Plutarch,
T&V KVV&V
as
1.
<pi)<ru>
20
(3,
irepl
AtirwTros
corium
lernt
der
[1913.
Hund Leder
Deutsclies
1683,
meaning;
its
oldest
occurrence
is
in
codex
ter
vol.
Sangallensis
no. xxvii,
is,
1;
if
the connection of
also
Atharvaprayascittani.
Germany.
Sa chindex
(Die einzelnen Stellen sind von einander stets durch Semicola getrennt;
die Anmerkungen, weil im Text mit fortlaufenden Ziffern versehen,
hier nur durch diese, nicht zugleich durch die Angabe der ent-
Agnihotra
cf.
unterbleibt
rechtzeitig
Opferspeise
fallt
herab
4. 3;
kocht
Anm.
Anm.
keit
49, 93;
besudelt
brechungen
Milch wird
2.
verschiitten);
(cf.
1.
3;
(s.
es wird
durch UnreinigUnter-
erleidet
(cf. Unreinigkeit);
eindringen); die zum
gemolkene
des Verreisten
1.
1;
2. 7;
5. 4.
Zwischen
15
218
J. v.
Negelein,
[1913.
oder unreiner Tiere oder Gegenstiinde unterbrochenen Zusammenhang beim Opfer her Anm. 63 64, 143;
die storende Spur eines durch den Opferbezirk gelaufenen
Hundes wird mil Asche bestreut Anm. 143, 818 (cf. Tiere);
heifie Asche dient an Stelle eines Brandscheites zur Feuererzeugung Anm. 79; wird zur Wiedererzeugung eines heiligen
Feuers beriihrt 2. 5; Anm. 772, 784; cf. 5. 1; die verunreinigte
Opferspeise wird in Asche (oder Wasser) geworfen 2. 6
wenn die Asche von Opferfeuern sich vermischt, bedarf
profaner
Anm.
870.
(cf.
Ahavamya) Anm.
63,
(s. d.)
1.
143
3;
2)
in
den Opfer-
Kuh
818
6.
9;
cf.
Agnihotra.
haltung beim Opfer Anm. 257; die Milch beim Agnihotraopfer wird nicht genossen, wenn der Opferveranstalter auf
einer Reise zugrunde gegangen ist Anm. 318; dieser mufi sich
der Speise enthalten, wenn das ganze Opfermaterial verloren
gegangen ist Anm. 723; vgl. 4. 3; mufi samt seiner Gattin
219
Sachindex.
Vol. xxxiii.]
geniefien von der Opferspeise des Ahitagni Anm. 846. Brahmanen dtirfen unreine Speisen nicht geniefien 4. 1.
Frau s, Unreinigkeit. Die Gattin des Opferveranstalters
beteiligt sich am Agnihotra-Opfer 4. 4; ist unrein, wenn sie
Zwillinge gebart 5. 5; Anm. 875 6; menstruiert ist 4. 2;
Anm. 684; unrein ist die Wochnerin Anm. 684; beide ver-
unreinigen deshalb nicht minder als ein Sudra das Opfermaterial Anm. 257, 327.
Garhapatya vgl. Ahavanlya. Wann soil das AhavamyaFeuer dem G.-Feuer entnommen werden? 1.1; in welcher
Weise? 1.2; wenn der Garhapatya- oder der Daksina-'gni
von seinem Platz herunterfallt (und iibergreift), so soil man
(wahrend bei dem gleichen, indes vom Ahavanlya-
ihn
s.
zu sprechen ist)
das Herabfallen
Anm.
G-Feuer
1;
Gegenseitige Vermischung:
des G.- und des Ahavaniya-Feuers Anm. 852; des G., des
Daksinagni und anderer Opferfeuer Anm. 854; von Opferfeuern iiberhaupt (s. d. und: vertauschen); von Soma 6. 6;
Anm. 1049.
des G.-Feuers oder des Daksinagni
erlischt
6.
Anm.
949; das
927.
Anm.
oder
Anm.
257;
2. 5;
oder
beschnuppert
andere Opferteile
frifit,
beschnuppert oder verunreinigt Opferaus ihnen Anm. 657, 661; seine das Opfer
storende Spur mufi entsiihnt werden (s. Asche; Wasser).
Neu- und Vollmondopfer, ihr unrechtzeitiger Vollzug 2. 2;
Anm. 142 3; verungliickter Vollzug 3. 10; Anm. 142; Verschalen; er
leckt,
frifit
2. 1;
220
J. v. Negelein,
[1913.
beim Verderben der Opferspeise gebraucht 2.1; das niederiiber die, aus
gefallene Opfertier damit besprengt 2. 9;
PalasVBlattern gebildete, Figur eines Vermifiten gegossen
3.8; als Substitut fur das avadana angewendet 5.5; Anm. 888.
Dem
Vollzug einer gewissen Siihnehandlung mufi das Anblicken von Opferbutter vorausgehen Anm. 646 die Verunreinigung der Opferbutter verlangt Siihne Anm. 625; das
;
fallt
prsadajya
herab
5. 5;
Anm.
877.
erloschenen Feuers
2. 7; 5.
Wiederholung ihrer
4;
rituellen
Anm.
s.
Unreinigkeit; Wasser;
Wege)
seine Ent-
Anm.
327.
Anm.
Die Opfer-
ahavaniya,
ukhya,
auttaravedika,
garhapatya,
daksinagni,
tJberstromen alles
alles
festen,
OpfergeiaB.
Zerplatzen
Materials
Anm.
fliissigen
1146; Zerbrechen, Spalten, AufYerbrennen
der
ukha (cf. 6. 2; Anm. 1147), des
platzen,
mahavira
und
der xibrigen Opfergefafie 6. 9;
somakalasa,
Anm. 1147;
wenn ein O. bricht, soil man in einem anderen,
festeren,
221
Sachindex.
Vol. xxxiii.]
kochen
5. 5;
nen O.
6. 5;
des Opferbechers
4. 3;
6. 3.
Behandlung der O.
wird
fiir
Hunde oder
Hohe
4. 2;
1. 2;
1;
Varuna
fiir
misrat,
1; 4. 1;
als
was Siihne
springt oder
um Anm.
Anm.
694; kippt
694;
oder platzt Anm. 695 s. verschutten; schwindet
dahin Anm. 652; wird durch Wiirmer usw. besudelt s. Un-
fallt
um
reinigkeit.
Opferpfosten. Der O. schlagt wahrend der heiligen Handlung
aus 2. 6; 5. 6; Anm. 247; wankt oder entwurzelt Anm. 248;
fallt nieder 2. 6; eine Krahe lafit sich auf ihni nieder 2. 6.
Opferspende
ungliicken
(vgl.
Anm.
vgl.
2. 1;
Opfertrank. Einzelne oder alle O. verwerden vertauscht (s. d.); sind ungar
4. 1
dem
Anm. 126;
geraubt; werden genossen, bevor
s.
2;
fasten;
werden
unreinigt
(s.
d.);
in
sie
durch ein
werden;
cf.
des Pravargya
6. 8.
222
J. v. Negel&in,
[1913.
Anm.
7412;
664, 707,
Anm.
lauft iiber
Anm.
Opfersprucli.
646.
Anm.
691.
Opfertier.
die
Kuh
2.4;
nieder
fallt
5. 5;
krank oder
stirbt
Anm.
Anm.
1049.
geraubt
3. 4,
6. 4;
5; 6. 4;
Somalibationen mi&lingen 6. 3; Zufalligkeiten und Mifibei den drei taglichen Pressungen 6. 9; Anm. 1055.
KonkurrierendeSomaopfer unterLandsleuten und Feinden 6.6.
Der zur Auspressung des Somatrankes verwandte Prefistein
6.
6;
griffe
Anm.
platzt 6. 3;
Opferveranstalter.
1028.
Stellvertreter ersetzbar
magisch
Speise
als sein
empfangen
Zauber (?)
haben
6. 6;
diePriester
(?)
des Agnihotra
1
Unklare
bevor
geniefien,
Stelle.
Anm.
die
wird krank
2.
schlecht herbei
2.
9;*
3.
6. 9;
9; cf.
Anm.
1071; treibt
nach Anlegung
einem Dorfe Anm. 143;
stirbt
cf.
3.
am Upavasatha-Tage
6;
Opfer
Amn.
2. 9;
schollen
223
Sachindex.
Vol. xxxiii.]
3. 6;
erscheint wieder
Der
2.
9;
O.
fallt
Opferwagen.
Pferd s. Opfertier; Tier.
urn
3. 6;
2.
erscheint nicht
3. 6.
6. 1.
opfer
7;
Schimmel
begattet
sicb
vertritt die
reisen
cf.
sannayya
Silber
Opferspende.
G old. Verwendung
4. 3;
5.
3;
Anm.
863.
s.
cf.
Brahmanen
man
tragen
5. 2.
soil
6.
4;
Anm. 10167,
ein
5.
5;
1019.
opferreines
Tiere
s.
Hund
Anm.
Ekaha
224
/. v.
Negdein,
63),
[1913.
werden
(s.
Pferd wird angewendet, wenn die Rezitation der Friihgebete nicht mit dem Sonnenaufgang zusammenfallt 6. 7;
Anm. 1104; das Pferd entsiihnt das herabgefallene prsadajya
weifies
ist
unrein,
wenn
sie
menstruiert
ist 4. 2;
Anm.
Krahe;
ferner der
Hund
1.
3) sie
verderben
Vol. xxxiii.]
225
Sachindex.
desgl.
ein
Anm.
327;
Wassertropfen,
cf.
feuer mischt
Anm.
5.
859;
Anm.
4;
das
wenn
Opferfeuer
verunreinigen
855.
dem Opfer
deshalb
Anm.
tropfen s. Wasser;)
Art, sowie Leichen
unreinigend
gilt
Anm.
das Feuer
indem man
711;
es in
Asche
Ameisenhaufen schiittet
Die Yerunreinigung mag besonders
Opferspende.
des iiberaus oft vollzogenen und haufigen Storungen ausgesetzten Agnihotra betroffen haben 1. 3. Unter den ihr ausgesetzten Opfer ger at en spielten die carusthall (Topf zum
des Opfermuses) eine Rolle 1. 3; aber auch die iibrige
Kochen
begonnen werden
verschiitten
cf.
4. 1.
1. 3,
5;
Yerschiitten
4. 3;
Anm.
49, 93, 186, 707, 711, 714, 718, 723, 727; des Opfermaterials
Anm.
butter
Somabechers 2. 5; des
Opfermuses Anm. 621; der Opfer-
Somatrankes
4. 1;
3.
4;
des
der vasatlvar!
brauchten Wasser
6. 2;
Anm.
226
J. v. Negelein,
[1913.
hotra
760;
844;
(s.
d.);
Anm.
soil
man
weiften
einen
ihr
die
Ziegenbock opfern
soil
6. 7;
man
die
spatete Erwahnung
Anm. 633,
Anm. 642);
4. 1;
4. 1;
ausgehen 6. 5. Ein Wasserstrahl stellt die durch einen Einbruch zwischen zwei Opferfeuern unter diesen verloren-
Anm.
614.
4. 1;
Dinge iiberhaupt
grundsatzlich und
verunreinigte
Anm.
stets alle
(s.
geworfen Anm.
Unreinigkeit) Opferspeise
cf. 2.
ins
Wasser
Anm.
Anm.
holzerne G-efaBe
eines
Toten
3. 7;
6. 5;
cf.
Anm.
657, 661;
Opfergefafi.
die
irdenen GTefafie
2. 7.
bhyam prajapataye
6. 9.
agnijihva
6.
manavah
suracaksasah
1.
6. 1.
6. 2.
bhumyam
agnir
ma
2.
2. 4.
agnih sucivratatamati
agne vgl. a 'gne.
2. 7.
5. 3.
2. 3.
1.
6. 1.
atharvabhih
2'.
santah
sukrtam
etu
6.
3.
anamgandhf (?) 2. 5.
anupurvam vrsana codayamta 6. 9.
anulbanam vayata joguvam apah
3.'
anunam
1.
1. 3.
9; 6. 9.
2. 9.
ta ukthyah patu 6. 6.
angani
achinnam tantum prthivy anu gesam 6. 2.
lokam
3. 9.
hitva
Stmanam
3. 4.
3. 4.
amtarikse turiyam
1. 5.
anv agnih 5. 3.
apascadaghvannasya bhuyasam 2. 7.
apam agnis tanubhih 2. 7.
apam urmih 6. 2.
ape 'mam jlva arudhan grhebhyah
2. 9.
apsu turiyam 1. 5.
apsv antah 2. 1.
abhayam vo 'bhayam me 'stu 1.
amitranam sriyam bhutim 2. 5.
amum samuha
4. 3.
1.
228
J. v. Negelein,
amrtam devatamayam 6. 1.
amrtahutim amrtayam juhomi 1.
amo 'ham asmi sa tvam 4. 2.
ayam devo brhaspatih 6. 1.
ayam no agnir adhyaksah 1. 5.
ayam no 'gnih 6. 5.
aristebhir asvina saubhagebhih
6. 1.
me
2. 4.
sadanam svam
asida
dah
6. 3.
6. 1.
4. 2.
6. 3.
6. 9.
asapatnam purastat 1. 5.
ya udayat pascad vasano
lalohitah 2.
nl-
6. 9.
asthibhyas
te
majjanam sprnomi
6. 9.
prathainani jajne
5. 1.
asti
papam
payaka dldyat
5.
4. 2.
5.
1. 2.
ta
agrayanah patu 6.
atma yajnasya ramhya 6. 3.
adityanam tva devanam vyatte
dadhami 2. 9.
adityas tva tarpayantu
6.
bhyam svaha
5.
'ndravisnu-
6. 9.
apattau somam ca 3. 5.
a pavasva hiranyavat 2.
2. 9.
dobhyah svaha
indraya harivate
6. 9.
6. 8.
indriyavan madintamah
indrena devan 5. 6.
6. 2.
4. 1.
4. 1.
2. 5.
ihanvlcamatibhih
ihai 'va
6. 3.
(?) 6. 8.
ksemya edhi
4. 4.
'va-
6. 2.
6.
3.
1.
1.
2.
2. 4.
2. 9.
atmanam
eva
a^nih
ksayami
3.
jarimanam j agamy am
ita
1.
6.
asau
astam ive
sthat 4.
idavatsaraya
3.
dhruva ayur
asi
5. 1.
5. 1.
a '^ne
ayurda
svaha
svaha
[1913.
6. 9.
1.
3.
1. 2.
garbho na mrtah 6. 3.
gavlmdragni kalpata yuvam 6. 6.
gayatrim parsam adhahsira 'vapadyasva 2. 9.
gayatrya tva sataksaraya samdadhami 4. 1.
gayatryai chandase'bhibhutyai svaha
6. 6.
undatlh
suphenah jyotismatis
masvatih 6. 2.
upajiva
ta-
grnano havyadataye
gosa indo nrsa
nau patam 6. 6.
upe 'mam sustutim
mama
gharmo visvaynh
calyakam
5. 1.
ca(?) 6. 2.
2. 2.
rtaye tya
'
6. 9.
esa te agne
3.
yaca
4; 4.
3.
ma loko
jagatim parsam
dyasva 2. 9.
adhahsira Vapa-
janat
nama
jlvala
nama
'nu-
5.
1.
stha ta
samjiveta 6. 6.
jiva nama stha ta
jlvika
imam
jiveta
imam jiveta 6. 6.
imam jiveta
stha ta
samjiveta 6. 6.
justo hota varenyah
7.
chidraya
10.
janita yayam
sanitanutani
6. 9.
2. 1.
(cf.
svar janat)
1.
om bhuvo
3.
3.
svar janat
4; 4.
jihra(?)
2. 9.
4. 1.
chidraya
oiji
2. 7.
asi 6. 3.
'
229
Vol. xxxiii.]
1. 3.
(cf.
bhuvo janat)
1.
6. 2.
tato
'tarn
5. 2.
kaksiyantam ya ausijah
4.1.
dhehi
tad
it
2."
ca
6.
tad vai
10.
2. 5.
4. 2.
4. 1.
tatre
2. 5.
1.
a-
3; cf. 6. 5.
1.
230
J. v. Negelein,
1.
[1913.
daksakratu
pataip
te
mitravarunau
6. 6.
6.
1. 2.
aroha
3. 7.
diva vrdham(?)
2. 7.
6. 2.
tam esam
parinirjabi 2. 5.
ta angirastama 5. 3.
asi
svaba
dbruvas
tejo
me dab
6. 3.
(?) 6.
(?)
3. 10.
8.
2. 5.
asmabbyam yatam
6. 9.
no raksantu sarvatah
2. 5.
trataram indram
1. 5;
trayatam asmat(?)
2. 1, 2; 6. 9.
ktam
2. 2.
trivrd yad
bbuvanasya ratbavrt
tredba nidadbe padam 5. 2.
6. 3.
padyasva
10.
5. 3.
3.
divi turiyam 1. 5.
divi botram airayat svaba
divo 'cbata
tubhyam
6. 1.
drat 6.
tvam
tvam
tvam
tvam
tvam
tvam
tvam
tvam
tvam
srni-
6. 3.
divas
me by
me by
avisa 3. 7.
taya
tava jyotimsy arcayah
te
tam
2. 9.
taya
6. 3.
2. 9.
4.
1. 3.
6. 2.
6. 2.
3.
6. 5.
dvitiyam dvitiyena 5. 3.
dvisantam agne dvisatam ca vittam
2'.
5.
1. 3.
me daivyam
tvastre svaba 2.
2. 1.
vacab
2. 6.
6.
6. 1,
2. 4.
Vol. xxxiii.J
dhruvam dhruvena
dhruvS dyauh 6. 3.
link
na
6.
tat te
prsadasva
6.
suryaya
marutah
prsnimatarah
1.
2. 5.
te astv ayate 4. 1.
te
pathya revatl
te
bhuvah
(?)
prajapataye svSha
pusne svaha 6. 8.
1. 4.
6. 2.
narasamsa
bhintta
datto
6.
Madhim
10.
6. 2.
7.
4.
1.
pranlta upasamyasi 2.
pra tad visnuh 5. 2.
ekam
pra
vam damsamsy
pari
papmanam agne
tarn
ito
8, 9.
nudasva
upasamyamanah
mai
2. 5.
6.
6.
'tv
indriyam 1.4; 6. 5,
tva "ditya rudra vasavah 2.
tva pranah 2. 4.
tvo 'ddipayamasi
1.
9.
5.
2. 5.
pustina pustim pranena pranam tejasa tejas caksusa caksuh srotrena srotram ayusa "yuh punar
dehi 6. 6.
prtanajitam
sahamanam
2. 1.
prthivi vibhuvarl(?)
prthivyam ca drdha
6.
9.
1. 3.
yama devah
6. 1.
bhadram pasyema
'
6.
'ksabhir yajatrafr
1.
bhuvo janat
cf.
bhupataye svaha
om bhuvo
2. 6.
janat.
4. 1.
6. 2.
bhava
6. 1.
5. 6.
piprtam no bharlmabhih 4. 1.
pibata ghrtam imam ghrtam 6.
punar
punas
punas
punas
5. 5.
pitrye pranlta
6. 2.
2. 4.
2. 5.
9.
5.
6. 1.
asvinav avocam
3.
5.
5.
na im surabhmi vyantu
prati
6.
ta
2. 7.
svaha
dhatre
4.
para
'dhipataye
2.
namas
namas
namas
na
am
6. 3.
231
4. 1.
5. 3.
6. 1.
manina rupani
5. 6.
cetase dhiye 2. 5.
6. 9.
232
J. v. Negelein,
nam
ja-
1. 3.
mantravanti
ca
karyani
adhyayanam ca yat
mama
1.
'gne varcah 2. 5;
sarvany
3.
6. 9,'
10.
ma no mahantam 4. 1.
ma no medham ma no diksam 1. 4.
ma no vidan 2. 4; 6. 9.
ma no himsista(m) yat tapah 1. 4.
ajirah 6. 2.
(?)
yatkamas
ma brahma pramathistana 1. 4.
mam amum amusyayanam 4. 4.
ma himslr deva presitah 4. 2.~
asivasya
4. 3.
mayah
6. 9.
6.
6. 5.
madema
tanunam
1.
2. 5.
(?)
2. 5.
yad asmrti 3. 4.
yad udagan mahato mahima asya
3. 10.
2. 6.
2. 6.
1.
3.
2. 5.
yan
yan
me skannam 3. 4.
me skannam manaso
jatavedab
3.
raja
no yayau
yayor ojasa
1.
yayoh sarvam
2. 6.
1. 2.
yamo
marudbhih
'dam varuna
ce
4. 1.
1. 3.
1.
ya imam 2. 2.
ya rte cid abhisrisah
te
ma
'vata 6. 2.
dasyor
py avam (?)
juhumah 2. 5.
kim
6. 6.
2, 5.
minamta
6. 5.
stuhi
1.
yat
ma
6. 3.
(1.
iha
daksina ca srnltam
4. 1;
4.
1.
2. 9.
kalpamanah
6. 5.
vitatah
1.
6.
3.
eti
yajiias ca tva
6. 1.
cf. 4. 3.
ma nah
[1913.
(?) 2.
3.
5; 6. 9.
2. 9.
2. 5.
Vol. xxxiii.]
6. 2.
nama
6. 2.
tarn
asi
9.
5. 6.
4. 2.
yogaksemasya santya
2. 6.
asvina
manaso javlyan
raksobhyas tva
6. 9.
9.
2.
6.
asti
1. 2.
6.
vayave tva 2. 9.
vasah prasastam prati
2/5.
pasam madhyamam
'pi
'si
'si
'si 2. 9.
3.
jagatyai svaha
ma
6.
9.
"dityaih suryo
ma
dya-
6.
3.
tva
Part III.
pramumugdhy asmat
iha
devanam vyatte
'pi
2. 9.
samvidanah
3.
2. 6.
vedabhigupto
6. 3.
3.
1.
visnave svaha
4.
1.
1.
1.
4. 1.
visvesam
parivatsaro
saijivatsaro
6. 2.
crta 4.
6.
3.
5. 6.
2. 7.
9.
me grhana
dadhami
vatsaro
5. 6.
visva dvesamsi
9.
papam
varuno
1. 2.
vi te
vam
dharami
vaca brahma
'pi
srotrena "gnidhrenai
yo
3.'
2. 6.
2.
1.
6. 2.
233
2.
asi vrstyai
brahmana parivrtah
6.
(?)
2. 5.
234
J.
vaisvanarah
pathikrd
v.
Negelein,
visvagrstih
[1913.
tvam no 'gne 4. 1.
tvam no agne 'vamo bhavo"tl 4. 1
sa no rasva suviryam 2. 7.
sam tat sincatu radhasa 6. 1.
sam tarn rinitho viprutam damsosa
sa
2. 3.
vaisvanaro na utaye
2. 3.
satam in
deyah 6.
1111
sarado anti
1.
satam cinvanas
data
6. 1.
(1.
6. 2.
bhih
6.
9.'
samdadhatu brhaspatih 1. 3.
sam nah srja sumatya vajavatya
dhama
priyani
6.
6. 1.
1.
2. 4.
4. 2.
saptarslnam
sasa ittha
mahan
sukrtam
'
asi 2. 3.
5.2.
6. 1.
6.
1.
lokah
yatra
2. 6.
yajnasya pratidhiyatam 6. 1.
siva nah samsvamta ayuse 1. 4.
sivau vayam uttarema 'bhi vajan2.6.
bhavantu matarah 1.
sivau bhavatam adyo nah
siro
siva
4.
2. 7.
2.
7.
1.
susyada
(1.;
dhvam
susma
?)
yuyam syanda-
1. 4.
srnltam antariksam ca
6.
loke
3.
svaha
6.
asi
svarad
2. 7.
bha
5.
1.
eamjlvika
nama
stha ta
imam
jlveta
6. 2.
satyah
gasah 2. 6.
sarvasmad enasa
tasmat 1. 2.
1.
sa
yajamanasya kamah
3.
tvam nah
4.
1; 6. 1.
munca
uddhrto
sahoda
asi
svaha
2. 6; 4.
5.
1.
1.
6. 3.
hi sucina sucih
6.
2.
sukalpam agne
5.
1.
tat tvaya 2. 5.
suparna vacam 5. 6.
suprajastvam satam hi mamadanta
4.
1.
rasmm anvatatana
10.
5. 2.
2. 9.
2.
asi 5. 1.
suryat te
6. 6.
4. 3.
5.
sarasvatl
sakam
6.
1.
6. 2, 5.
sahasrasriigah
6.
2. 6.
samrad
1.
samasincantu
2. 7.
6.
suryo
ma
somat
te
1. 2.
dyavaprthivlbhyam
6. 9.
somanam svaranam
svaha
somaya
ma
4.
6.
svaha
9.
6. 9.
patu
5.
snavanam sprnomi
6.
svasti
narayanah (?) 1 4.
svasti nah pusa visvavedah
6. 1.
6.
1.
ma parayanah (?)
ma punarayanah
svasti
5.
na indro vrddhasravah
svasti
1.
rudrebhyah
tristubhe svaha
sorao
235
Wortindex.
Vol. xxxiii.]
svasti
4.
1.
1.
4.
havyavad juhvasyah
2.
5.
7.
1.
2/5.
2.
4. 3; 6. 3.
hiranyagarbhah
Wort index,
amhomuc
akrta
6.
10.
3.
akrltasoma
6. 4.
atipatti 4. 4.
2. 9.
agada
8.
3.
agatha
6.
5; 6.
3,
5,.
1.
4;
agnihotrin
2,
5.
2. 8;
3,
1,
2, 4.
1.
3.
3.
acheta
aja
5.
6; 6. 7.
ajagara
5.
3. 6;
4.
3,
adarsana
6.
4;
6.
10.
1; 6. 10.
s.
1.
5.
2. 9.
sarira
aditi 3. 1.
2. 8.
2. 9.
4. 1.
adbhuta
6.
10.
adya 2. 2, 3.
adhas 2. 2, 3.
3.
adhastat
adhi
1.
4. 4.
3.
3.
1.
adhisrita 2. 9;
3. 7.
3.
3. 1.
1.
2. 4.
adahpurah
adosa
2. 6; 4. 1; 6.
achavaka
2,
4. 4.
adhipati
angaprabhrti
ac
atharvan 3.
atharvaveda
adobarhisa
2. 6.
angara
atisista 1. 3.
adugdha
2. 4.
agnidh 2. 6; 3. 8.
agnidhrlya 1. 2.
agnisomiya 3. 1.
agnyanvadhana 5.
agnyadheya 4. 3.
agra 5. 1.
agranthin 2. 9.
agha
atiratra 6. 7.
adattapurvadhana
smrtagnihotrin.
s.
3.
kala.
s.
+ api
5. 4.
agnimant 2. 7;
agnistoma 3. 3.
agnihotra
atipata
ad
4.
5.
2. 2.
atipanna
anahitagni; ahitagni;
s.
agni
aja 5. 2, 6.
abhi 3. 8.
anj
atithi 3. 1.
7.
7.
4.
2.
adhyadhi 2. 5.
adhyayana 1. 3.
adhyatmam
1.
adhvaryu 1. 2;
anagni 5. 4.
anagnigrha 5.
1.
2. 6; 3. 4,
4.
16*
6.
1.
236
J. v. Neyelein,
anadvah 5.
anantaram
anas
5.
2; 6.
1.
2; 4. 3, 4; 5.
1, 2.
1.
analambhuka
3.
4. 2.
3.
anahitagni
8; 5. 3.
8.
apahatapapman 1. 5.
apana s. prana
apidagdha 6. 4.
apita s. pi tap it a.
apsumant 2. 7; 5. 4.
abhaksadusta
9.
2. 4, 7; 4. 4;
anugata
anucara
anuttha
6.
3.
6. 9.
anajnata
anitya
aparahnika
aparena 1.
3.
6. 6.
anabhyuddhrta
[1913.
1.
1.
abhaya
abhava
3.
6.
abhicarika
5. 4.
4.
taridula
s.
6.
sam vatsara
abhipraya
s.
abhima
1.
anupadam 2.
anupramta 6.
abhimatihendra
abhimrsta 6. 3.
anupradana
anuvaka
anta
3.
abhihita
7.
6.
3.
3.
anuyaja
1.
pratar";
s.
4; 5. 5;
8.
6.
1.
6.
antahparidhidesa 4.
antara s. devata
1,
3. 3.
antariksa
antarena
3.
1.
3.
1.
2;
abhySvrtta
3.
3.
3,
5;
2.
ayomaya
ar
3; 5. 2.
antaresti 3. 10.
arani
arampani
aranya 2.
antaryama
antarhita
1.
7.
5.
anvadhana
5.
apara
3. 9,
agny.
aparadha
s.
3. 2, 4,
7;
5.
2;
6.
1.
s.
5.
3.
3.
avaskanna
1. 3.
avara
3.
yatha
3.
5. 5.
klta
avabhrtha
avaruddha
6. 5.
3, 5.
3. 8.
avapasthana
;
9.
avantaradiksa
9.
vidhy
5.
10; 5. 5.
avapanna
5. 1, 5.
6.
4. 1.
avadarana
6.
aparajita
6. 8.
avadanakarman
3.
anvahitagni 5. 3.
anvlcamati (?) 6. 8.
3 ap 1. 5; 2. 6;
6. 5,
7.
6. 4.
alabhyamana
8.
s.
1.
5.
avakhya(?) 5. 3.
avadana s. devata
1.
2.
anyavatsa
anvahita
9.
4. 1.
anyatarat
anyatra
1; 2. 7; 5. 4.
6. 4,
3.
arddhahuta 2. 9.
ardh + sam 1. 1.
ardha 5. 3.
arvak s. udag".
1; 2. 7; 5. 4.
annadya 2.
anya 2. 5;
2.
4. 4.
arddharca
1.
annapati
6.
arthalopa
5. 6.
artti 6. 8.
1.
5. 3.
4. 1
annada
6.
drsta
2,* 3.
3; 2.
1.
8, 9.
2. 8; 3. 8; 4. 4; 5. 1.
arjuna
3. 9.
antahsadas
anna
6. 6.
5. 1.
antastantra
antika
upamsv";
s.
s.
6.
6. 8.
antardesa
2. 9.
2.
3. 8.
ayata
1.
1.
3. 2.
amedhya
antaragamana
(?) 3.
abhyastam
abhyuddrsta
amavasya 2.
amrta 6. 1.
3.
4. 2.
antara
3.
(>.
anutputa 4. 1.
anudesana 2. 9.
5.
1.
1; 2. 4; 6. 9.
1.
3.
1.
4. 1.
2.9
avi 5. 6.
ajya
avidhivihita
3. 8.
9.
2. 4.
asanapipasa
3.
atithya
adarsana
asesa
adhavanlya
adhvaryava
6.
3. 7.
asmamaya
asm
6. 8.
asvanam(?)
asvamedha
astan
4,
7;
3.
5.
10;
1,
6. 6, 7.
astapad
asaman
sam
s.
asuravant
astamita
8;
6.
7.
3. 3.
avrtta 6.
asu
9.
-\-
purusa
s.
agata
3. 6.
agnihotri
agnldhra
1.
agmdhriya
agneya 3. 3,
3.
1, 7.
4. 4.
upa
yajamana
s.
asandi
asava
1,
4,
2;
6.
10;
6. 3.
5,
acaryakalpa
8; 6. 8.
6. 8.
1,
4-1;
2, 6.
6. 7.
1.
3.
3. 2.
6. 7.
asrava
2; 4. 2.
3.
acarya
3. 3; 4. 1.
asannakarman
2. 4.
agrayana
1.
6.
asvina
asana
akrti
2.
as 1. 3; 5. 2.
2. 4.
3;
3.
8.
1. 2.
arseya
asvini 6.
3; 2. 6; 4. 3; 5. 1; 6.8.
ahoratra
6.
6. 4.
asis 2. 9.
ahargana 5. 6.
ahuta s. skanna;hutahuta;1.2,
1.
8.
6.
(?).
arbhava
tau(?); trtiyaha;
aharahas 4. 4.
ahutva
5; 2. 1; 3. 4.
artvijya(?)
aparahnika; tadahar-
s.
10.
3.
1.
artija 5. 4.
3.
6. 7.
asthiputa
5.
artti 6. 8.
4. 4.
asthi 2. 8;
3.
8; 5. 2.
3. 5,
ayatana
arta
5.
1.
abhy.
s.
avisamapta.
s.
ayu 3. 2, 9.
ayudha s. yajna
aranya 5. 6.
1; 6. 10.
3.
8; 6. 7.
durga
s.
1.
3.
aeamapta; samapta
vi-j-sam
amavasya
samaropita
8.
3.
10.
aprl 3. 2.
5, 6.
4. 4.
s.
2. 9.
-j-
apad
asamaropita
asarva 2. 8.
3. 4.
3. 9.
+ pra
3; 6. 7.
3.
2;
anu
apatti
2. 5.
asamapta 2.
asamarudha
alaan
1,
5; 2. 1,
3. 3.
6.
2. 2,
2.
1. 1, 3,
1.
2. 5.
4;
astam
ap
6. 7.
astakapala
asura
antariksa
6. 7.
2, 6;
1.
anupurvya
anustubha
5. 4.
asva 5.
3,
5, 7, 8, 9.
3.
asmarathya
4.
1.
asisa(?) 3. 10.
3.
9;
4. 3.
9;
4, 5,
5. 5.
2. 1, 3,
1.
panca';
s.
ajyahuti
1.5;
7.
3. 4.
ajyahoma
2. 4.
pra
2.
ajyahavis
4. 3; 5. 2.
durva
s.
ajyabhaga 6.
ajyabhaganta
6.
avisamapta 5.
avyavahita 3.
avratya 5. 4.
2 as
237
Wortindex.
Vol. xxxiii.]
5. 5.
aharana
2. 8.
ahavamya
3. 4,
8;
1.
1, 2, 3,
5; 2, 1, 4, 5, 9;
1; 5. 1, 4; 6. 2, 6, 10.
ahavanlyagarhapatya
ahara s. raja
.
1.
3,
5;
2. 3.
238
/. v.
an
s.
ahitagni
ahuti s.
anv
6.
adhi
abhi
-f-
+ dus
+ prati
5. 4.
upa
2.
3.
5. 3.
3.
(?)
3.
5.
9.
2.
9.
3. 9;
3.
7.
6.
2; 6. 3.
rudh
s.
upa.
6.
3. 2.
upavasatha
6. 6.
3.
1.
3.
1.
1.
4. 4.
upamsvantaryama
;
punar
3.
4,
9;
3.
upayana s. vrato
ubha 4. 4.
usna
2; 6.
6.
2. 9; 5. 5.
upakrta
3.
1.
9.
3.
5.
1; 6. 7.
3.
uh
+ nis
re
s.
4.
1.
3.
arddharca;
s.
tadahartau.
rtvij 1. 2; 2. 6; 3. 9; 6. 4, 7, 9.
rddhi
6. 5, 8.
rsabha
2. 9.
3.
an
1.
1.
5.
5.
6.
1.
uttaravedisroni
;
2.
ekakapala
3. 2.
svayam
3. 3.
ekatantra
ekahayana
3.
8; 4.
1,
4.
9.
4.
1.
utputa 4. 1.
utsanna 3. 7.
ekagni 1. 1; 2. 9;
ekadasa 3. 7.
udak
ekadasakapala
2. 6.
trc; 1.2, 5;
4.1.
4, 6, 9; 3. 4;
rjisa 3. 3.
rtu
9.
2;
3.
2.
uru
1,
2.
1,
uttaravedi
ildhas
urj 5. 6.
2.
3.
utthita
5.
6.
3.
5.
upala
5.
3. 5.
upasad
6. 6.
s.
1,
1.
9.
uttaratas
uttha
6.
4;
5.
6.
uttara
3.
1.
upasthana
6.
uttama
6.
upasamnaddha
sain
ucchista
3.
upatapin
upadiksa
7.
3; 3. 2; 5. 3, 6.
uktha 3. 3.
uks + pari 5. 6.
+ sam + pra 2.
ukha 2. 9; 6. 2, 9.
ukhya
5.
3. 2.
1.
ukta
3. 3.
udumbara
upatapTi
1: 6. 7.
isvara
udayaniya
upavesa
antare
3.
upacarabhaksaprayascitti
ista 2. 6.
Iks
1.
2. 4.
upacara
samnaddhedhmaba-
2. 2,
indragni
indha (?)
4.
udatantu
uparuddha
5.
5.
udapatra
unma
7, 8.
B.
2.
6. 6.
unnetar(!)
9.
rhis.
isti s.
2. 5.
udakpadya
udagarvak
uparava
itara 2. 4; 3. 9, 10;
indra
udaka
[1913.
udgatar 1. 2;
unnita 3. 3.
durita.
s.
idhma
pra-
2.
+ antar 4. 2.
+ api 1. 5.
+ abhi 6. 7.
+ abhyastam 1. 2; 8,
+ vi + ava 1. 5; 5. 2.
+ ud 1. 3.
+ abhi + ud 1. 2; 4. 4;
+ abhi + upa 3. 5.
-f
4. 1.
ahutilopavyatyasa
ahutivela 4.
2. 85 3. 7,
ajya; pancajya
tar; 1. 2; 2. 5; 4. 2.
Negelein,
3.
6.
10,
9.
2.
Vol. xxxiii.]
Wortindex.
ekannatrimsah
ekaha 3. 9.
ekaika 6. 5.
edha 3, 8.
6. 8.
(?)
239
karya
kala
varttaraana
6.
aindravayava
3.
aindragna
10; 4.
7.
3.
3.
klrtay 6.
kusala 2.
odana
s.
brahmau
osadhi
3.
2; 5. 6; 6. 4.
4.
audumbara
6.
1.
6.
9.
10.
6. 4.
6. 8.
klpti 3. 8.
1, 2.
kesasmasru
1.
kratu
kram
2. 9.
3. 7.
sarva
s.
+ ati 3.
+ upa
katham
3. 3.
1.
1,
5; 2. 3, 8, 9; 3. 5, 7, 8.
6. 4.
krayana s. so ma",
kri 3/1; 6. 4.
ekadasa catuh";
trayodasa
tri; dvadasa";
dvi;nava; sapta;4. 1; 6.2.
kam 6. 4.
ksal
kar
ksama
kapalas.eka
krita
krta.
apa 4- a 4. 1.
4- upa -J- a s. upakrta;
4. 2; 6.6,8,9.
4-
abhi 4- upa
paryagni
punas 1.
4-
karna
6.
2.
9;
s.
kalpa
ad ana
1.
2.
as
anna
5,
6;
3.
khya
5,
s.
kanva
kama
acarya
karin
s.
5. 4.
I
;
5. 3.
3.
1,
s.
vyakhyata;
6; 6.
1. 1;
1.
+ pari 3. 1.
+ pra 2. 4.
sam + pra 2. 4.
-f pra + sam 3. 6.
+ prati pratikhyata.
nitya
6.
gana
gam
.
2. 9.
2. 5.
so ma".
s.
ahar
3. 3.
6. 5.
+ adhi
4-
1.
vaksya
kamasukta
1.
s.
6. 4,
3. 5, 8.
s.
2.
-J-
3. 4.
tat; soraa
klpta.
upa 2. 5.
kavyavahana
kanks + a 1.
2.
+ yi +
khya
s.
5. 5*
ksainavant
8; 4. 2.
s.
5. 2.
vi; sarva
s.
ksodistha
3.
1.
karmaviparyasa
karmasesa 2. 5.
kalp
2.
2. 9.
yajamana";
kalasa
a.
s.
+ pra
2. 9;
av
parikrlta.
ksirasri 3. 3.
5. 2.
karman
6,
-j-
kritasoma
ksamavatl
4-
4-
s.
pari
3. 1; 6. 4.
s,
6. 4.
9.
(?)
kakubha
7.
7.
krtamtva(?)
krsna 6. 2.
3. 4.
aupavasathya
4.
2. 6; 4. 1, 3.
2. 2, 3; 3.
klpta
6.
1,
6.
kirttanastotra
krta
audgatra
3.
kiyant
3. 3.
auttarayedika
9; 6.
kltavapanna
aiudrabarhaspatya
aindravaruna 3. 3.
aindravaisnava
3. 8,
kirn 2. 2, 3.
1.
3.
1,
bhaksa
3. 6.
5. 3.
kalatipata
2. 1; 3. 3,
3.
1.
nityahoma
kimcit
aindra
yatha
s.
s.
2. 4, 9.
anu
s.
anugata;
4.3;
5.
1,3;
6.
+ a agata.
+ a 2. 4; 3. 5, 6,
+ apa + a 6. 8.
1.
5; 3. 9
1.
s.
3. 9, 10.
3 gar
1.
5.
8;
6.
7,
240
J.
garbha
hiranya
s.
2 ga
ud
5.
gayatri
10.
cinta 3. 8.
6.
s.
6.
ahavaniya";
3.4, 8; 4.
garhapatyajya 2.
1.
4; 6. 1.
1,
chandas
chid
1; 5. 4.
2. 5.
3. 5, 8.
6. 6.
grab
caturgrhita;
grhlta;
s.
samkrahisyam;
3.
+ vi
6.
9.
+ ud 3. 2;
+ pari 4. 1
6. 1.
;
gravan
2,
jaramarya
ji
9;
6.
1,
6.
9.
4.
3. 6.
1.
3.
6. 8.
jiv 3. 6, 9.
2. 7; 5. 4.
-f-ati 2. 9.
6. 3.
3. 8.
+ anu
+a
ghar H- abhi 2. 1, 9.
gharmadugha 2. 4.
4.
2.
aparajita.
s.
jna
ghrta
2, 5.
sam ana
bhaksa
jamim(?)
2. 7.
grama
gramya
6.
s.
janu
6. 6.
6. 3, 7.
graha
9;
japa
5.
s.
jagata 2. 9.
j an gala 3. 10.
3, 7, 10.
s.
-f-
1.
pra
6. 6.
anajnata.
prajnata.
s.
H- vi 3. 8; 6. 6.
+ a 2.
+ pari
caksus
2,
3.
1. 2.
candramas
+a
3.
1. 5; 2. 3;
tamlula
10; 5. 3, 6.
9.
6.
3, 7.
+ abhi 2. 9.
+ pari 2. 9.
+ pra 3. 6, 9; 4. 1.
ami + pra 4. 1.
-j-
cam
1. 2; 4. 4;
carusthali 1. 3.
candramas a
3.
+ vi
7.
3. 1.
2. 7; 5. 1, 4.
5.
3. 4.
5; 3. 4.
1.
1,
5; 3. 7, 8.
2.
6. 8.
4. 1.
5;
3. 2.
jval-f pra
4. 1.
3. 4,
2.
sam
jyotismant
jyotis
caturgrhita
catuhsarava
camasa
-f-
B. 2,
catuhkapala
ci
10;
1,
6. 9.
jan 2. 9;
janapada
2. 9.
granthi
carin
2.
3. 7.
gaurivita
car
1.
6; 6. 6.
vichinna;
s.
abhi
chedana
gopayana
cam
6.
7.
5.
1.
vi
-f-
gotrin
caks
2;
+ pra
-f-
3.
(?)
1,
5. 1; 6. 5.
catur
s.
3.
1.
chaya
2. 8; 5. 5, 6.
go
+ ami
chad
1.
3.
1.
5.
1.
3. 9.
grhapati
grhlta
5.
cyu
3. 5.
(?)
1. 1, 3,
5.
agni";
s.
6. 2.
3.
'
guspita
sam
cittavyapattyus
garhapatyalaksana
grha
[1913.
8.
6;
2. 3;
ci
2. 5.
Negelein,
3.
garhapatya
5;
v.
3.
5. 3.
tandulabhava
5. 3.
tatkalasa
6. 6.
tatrastha
3.
tadahartau
10.
(?) vgl.
ah an; rtu;
3. 3.
taddevatya
taddaivatya
6. 8.
tadrupa 2. 9; 5. 5.
tadvarna 2. 9; 5. 5.
tan
1. B.
-\-
tanu
tantu
sam
s.
s.
s.
samtata;
sorna
uda e
6. 8.
1. 3.
6. 8.
tantumant
tantra
s.
8; 5.
1,
4.
2.
3.
3. 9,
5.
das -f upa
dah
palasa
s.
3.
tanunaptra
tantrika
tavant
dahana
6.
3.
8;
tirtka 3. 3.
1.
9; 3. 8.
+ a 6. 5, 9.
+ vi + a vyatta;
da + ava 2. 9 5. 5.
da
6. 4.
datar
2. 4.
darumaya
dava
trtiya 5. 3.
3. 3;
trtlyasavana
6. 4, 9.
tejas 2. 3.
taittiriyabrahmana
6.
6. 5.
2. 7; 5. 4.
6. 4.
divya
2.
dis
pratidisam.
6. 8.
6. 8.
trayastrimsat
s.
-\-
anu
2.
pra
2. 9.
s. upadiksa; 6. 7.
sam s. samdlksita.
s. avantara
3. 1; 6. 8.
diksa
trikapala 4.
diksavamtva
1.
6.
dip
tvaj 3. 8.
tvar
sam
1. 5.
dus
1.
5;
3,
2.6;
3.2;
drdha
9.
sars. pancadaksina;
vavedasa 3. 3; 5. 3, 5; 6, 1.
daksina
1.
5;
1,
3. 4,
8; 4. 1,4;
daksinagra
dadhi 5. 3.
dar
1.
vi 6. 4, 6.
darbha
s.
2. 2,
sa;
darbhastamba
dars
3;
3; 2. 4; 4. 1.
6.
drsta
5. 2.
6.
10.
3; 6. 10.
2.
drstabhyuddrsta
deva 2. 6; 5. 6;
2. 2.
6.
10.
4. 4.
a 4.
5. 5.
devata
5,' 1.
abhaksa 2. 6; 4. 2.
adugdha; sudradugdha;
1.
4.2;
1.
s.
s.
durvajya
5/2; 6.1,7.
daksinatas 2.
3. 9.
4. 1.
dusta
6.
duh
daksinagni
2. 5.
durgapatti
duhsrita 4.
5.
7.
6. 8, 9.
5. 1.
tvastra 2. 6;
daksina
durita
2. 9.
1,
5. 2.
2. 2; 5. 3.
-{-
6. 4.
(?)
diksita.2. 9; 6.
trivrt 5. 6.
traistubha
9.
5. 5.
tri 2. 9; 6. 7, 8.
tredha
1; 5. 4; 6. 10.
3.
7;
diks -f upa
1.
trayodasakapala
6.
2; 5. 3.
2.
dasya(?)
2. 9.
2.
trca
tristubh
9.
s.
3. 8.
1;
trayodasa
1.
6. 9.
trna
trtiyaha
apidagdha.
s.
+ ava 5.
+ sam 2.
1.
tirasca 4. 4.
tusmm
2.
7.
(?) 6.
6. 3, 5.
4- api
2. 5.
2.
5. 3.
3. 7.
dasahaviska
1.
1.
1.
taruni
abhi + ud s. abhyuddrsta;
drstabhyuddrstu.
dasaratra
2. 9.
1; 5. 6.
tapasvati
dars
8;
darsapurnamasa
+ sam
tapas
tar
2. 1,
eka; nana;
6. 7.
10;
tap
241
Wortindex.
Vol. xxxiii.]
10.
s.
devatantara
4.
devatamaya
6.
devatavadana
devaloka
3.
1.
1.
4.
8.
devaspj-ti 2. 9.
1.
242
J.
daivata
2. 2,
daivatya
dohana
[1913.
nasta.
s.
nasta
2.
8; 4. 1; 6. 4,
4. 3.
dyo 3. 1, 4; 5. 6.
dyotana 6. 3.
dru 4- anu 5. 1.
upa 4- sam
naddha.
-|-
5.
nadeya
4. 4; 5. 3.
dvadasakapala 2. 3;
dvadasaratra 4. 4.
6.
nanatantra 3. 9.
narasamsa 3. 3;
nigama
4.
6. 5.
brahmana*.
6.
dvikapala
4. 1.
nityakalpa
dvitiya 5.
dvis 4- vi
3.
6.
nityahomakala 2. 1 5.
nidhana s. vasatkara
diiaiia
(?)
dhar
4.
niyatavrata
1.
2. 2, 3.
bar; 1.
ud 5. 1
4-
dha
nibhuyapur
cf.
myutvant
6. 7.
abhi
ava
ava
avyavahita.
s.
5.
4- a 5. 2; 6. 2.
+ anu 4- a
s.
4-
pra
4-
upa
4-ni
a 2.
a
4-
1.
sam
4-
4-
pra
6.
4-
dhav
sam
1.
s.
vihita.
4; 4. 1;
3. 1,
1 dhu 2. 9.
dhenu 3. 2; 5.
dhruva 6. 3.
4-
pra
1.
4-
anu
-f-
4. 3;
1. 5.
pra
s.
anupranlta.
1.
6.
1, 2; 2. 4; 5. 6; 6. 5, 8.
8.
2. 9.
pancajya
pan
pat
3.
2, 8,
3.
4- ni 2. 6.
s. samnipatita.
prapatita; 2. 6, 9;
4-sam-j-ni
5.
.
9.
1.
4- ut 4. 2.
s.
5; 6. 1.
patatrin
patui
2. 4.
6. 4.
4. 1.
pancajyahuti
5; 6. 2.
2. 9.
6.
pancadaksina
2. 6.
navakapala
ni
nyagrodha 5.
nyaya 6. 8.
nyupta 3. 1.
naksatra 5. 6.
nakha s. loma e
nava
3;
3. 3.
-f-pra
namas
3. 2,
2. 4; 4. 1.
pancasarava
3. 2.
dhvariksa
unnita;
upa 4-
panca
rukmapratihita.
4- abhi 1. 3.
dhisnya
2. 5; 4. 4.
1; 3. 3, 5, 8; 6. 7.
4- ni 6. 7.
s.
1.
2. 9.
upa
4- vi
1.
4.
4. 3; 6. 3.
s.
nrcaksas
4-
4- prati
7; 5.
3.
4-
9.
4- a 2. 9.
4- vi 4-
3. 7.
1.
4-ni
anvadhana.
4- abhi 4- a 2. 5, 9; 4. 3; 6. 6.
+ pari 4-
6. 4.
6. 2.
nI4-api
4- ud
5. 1; 6. 1.
4- vi 4-
nisa 4. 4.
a b hi hit a.
s.
1.
nivrtti 6. 8.
3. 3.
4-
8; 6. 4.
3. 3.
(?)
nirvapanaprabhrti
nivrtta
7,
8.
2. 9.
nirmathya
2.
dhavamya
3, 4,
2,
1,
6.
(?)
4. 1.
adattapur va.
s.
2; 2.
6.
dvaipayana
s.
1.
nitya
upasam-
8.
dvadasi(?)
dvi 2. 4.
dvesyayata
dvaidha 2.
9.
5,
nah-{-sam s. samnaddhedhraabarhis.
2.
1.
daivya
Negelein,
nas
3. 4.
3;
tad
s.
v.
2.
5. 6.
6; 4. 2.
patnya(?)
2 path 5,
3. 8.
3.
Vol. xxxiii.]
2. 3, 8.
pathikrt
+ ati
+ ava
pad
atipanna.
s.
avapanna; kitaiva
1
s.
+ 1. 3;
+ vi+a
-a
3. 2.
3. 8.
pitrloka
2.
1; 3. 8.
2.
1;
3. 4,
2. 5.
pitrya
10; 4. 2;
2.
as an a".
s.
pipaaa
pita
8, 9.
2.
pitrraedha
6. 5.
5.
3; 5. 6.
3.
pitar
pitrdevatya
p an na.
pada
243
Wortindeoc.
a.
s.
6.
pltapita
6.
puta s. asthi
putra 3. 9; 5. 5;
punar 3. 6; 6. 4.
parak 5. 3.
parasa 5. 3.
punaristi 4.
3. 1.
parikhyata
bahis
dhidesa.
s.
2.
3.
paryaya s. ratri
parvan 5. 4.
parsam(?) 2. 9.
pavamana
pas
3.
1,
2,
3,10;
5.
1.
5.
2.
3.
9;
6.
10.
ut
1.
purnapatra
4. 2.
purnamasa
s.
3.
1.
1.
1, 4.
prsadajya
5. 5.
3.
3.
prstha
pani
paurnamasya 3. 10.
paurnamasyamavasya
patra
2; 6. 7.
purna";
prakrti
6,
7,
8.
10.
3.
5. 3.
papman
(m.)
1.
5.
6.
pratistha
s.
1.
pratyak
palasatarum
5. 6.
sakrt
(?)
3. 8.
4.
pradatar
1.
2. 2, 3.
2. 6.
pratyanc
prathama
.
6. 1.
1.
pratiharana
10.
6. 8.
3. 3.
3.
pratima
1,
2; 4. 3;
6. 6.
pratiprasthatar
6. 5.
palasatsaru
pingala
1,
2. 2.
3. 10.
2. 9.
pratidisam
3. 3.
parthiva
3.
prajapati
pratikhyata
5. 2.
pannejan!
pinda
3.
yatha
s.
prajnata
pathikrt!
para
mrt;
s.
pathikrta
pada
3. 3, 7.
2. 2.
pathikrt
3.
darsapurnamasa.
5. 6.
3.
prthivi
2; 2. 3, 9; 3. 10; 5.
patraviniyoga
8;
6. 4.
putika
pusan
1.
s. aplta;
pltapita.
pakanagnim (?) 6. 8.
s.
7,
6. 9.
pa
5.
4,
3,
5; 2. 3.
1.
3.
purnahuti
1.
3.
2.
2;
s.
putabhrt
2. 6;
pasustha(?)
puta.
5, 6.
pascat
pu
pasugava 5.
pasubandha
pasusrapana
2, 3,
1,
8.
10;' 4. 1, 2; 5. 3, 4;
5. 2.
1;
1.
purodasa
3.
para
1.
pasu
3. 3.
2.
2;
8.
3.
purusakrti
;
1.
8; 5. 1.
6. 4.
3.
pavitra
7,
pura 6. 1, 4.
purusa 5. 2.
purusavidhi 6.
1.
paryagnikrta
9; 5. 3; 6. 4, 6, 7.
purastaddhoma
antahpari-
10.
6.
parimana
parna 4.
5. 6.
2. 2,
purastat
6. 7.
2.
punahsamaya
6. 4.
parikrita
paridhi
1.
3.
2.
5.
5(?); 5.
2;
5. 3.
1,
5.
244
J. v. Negelein,
2. 5.
pranabhasvatT
2.
prapatita
anga.
s.
prabhrti
prama 3. 1.
pramukha 6.
7.
2. 6;
3.
prayaja
3. 9,
6.
8.
prakrta
2.
prak
2,
6.
6.
6. 7.
1.
5; 2. 6, 7; 3. 5, 9; 5.
1.
1,
2. 3;
5;
2,
3.
2;
1;
5. 6.
pranapana
3.
3. 2;
prataranuvaka
pratarahuti
4. 4.
pratardoha
2.
pratahsavana
pradesa 4. 1.
3.
prayamya
1,
3.
s.
4.
1. 2,
3; 6. 4,
pri 2.
plu
s.
6.
3,
sarva
1.1, 3;
3.
8;
barhis
s.
6. 10.
bhaga
6.
4. 2.
3.
2; 4.
3, 5.
5,
10.
devatavibha-
s.
3.
2;
5. 3; 6. 7.
1.
3.
2. 4.
1.
bhaga
3; 2.
1.
6; 5. 1,2.
s.
ajya; samsrava
ma.
bhagadheya
6.
bahisparidhi
3.
-{- sam 5. 3.
bhasman s. sabhasmaka;
6.
adobarhisa; samna5;
5; 6. 3.
3,
3. 1.
bhaj 4- vi
5,
2.
3.
3.
bhaya 1. 3;
bhar 5. 2.
2; 2. 5.
3.
ktendra;
2. 7; 5. 4.
ddhedhma
5.
3; 6. 7.
6.
6.
bhaksanlya 6. 3.
bhaksabhaksana 3.
bhaksita
upacarabhaksa(?);
phatkaraprablirti
1.
3.
bhaksita;
s.
bhadra
bandh
1.
1.
bhaksajapa 3. 5.
bhaksana 3. 5.
9.
3.
+ abhi
basta
6,
6j 2. 1; 3.8,10.
3,
+ pari
va-
9.
bhaksa s. a; upacara
bhaksakala 3. 5.
1.
prayascittaprakarana
prayascitti
2, 6;
1,
taittirlya
s.
;
bhaks
5; 6. 9, 10.
1,
n.
jasaneyl 2.
brahmanamgama
bru
8.
6,
4. 1.
pratardohasthana
5.
6.
4. 4; 5.
8.
4.
pratarasa 4.
prayascitta
6. 8.
brahmanachamsin
brahmanokta 2. 2.
6.
2; 4.
1.
pratar
n. 3. 3; 5. 6.
brahmana
1.
4.
6,
6; 3. 4; 5. 6;
2.
7.
6,
brahmasama 6. 3.
brahmaudana 4. 3.
brahmana m. 3. 7;
3.
1.
6.
5,
brahmabali 5. 6.
brahmavrata 3. 1
10.
3.
pracinavitam
1,
brahman
4. 3.
pracina
aindrabarhaspatya;
s.
brahmatva 3. 4.
brahman m. 1. 2;
3.
5.
pranmukha
pranc
prana
6.
10;
4;
2.
praksiras
aindra
cf.
+ ud 4. 1.
+ ni 6. 10.
3. 1.
5.
6.
prastotar
9.
brhaspati
3; 2, 9.
1.
prasiddha
2.
budh
2. 9.
prasavya
bahu
barhaspatya
1.
prayukta 6. 10.
pravara 3. 3.
pravargya 6. 8.
pravasa 2. 8.
pravrtta
2. 9.
bahurupa 5. 6.
bahuvid 5. 1.
badhaka 2. 9.
4.
3;
bahis
3; 6. 1, 5.
3.
bahispavamana
9.
6. 10.
prabhu
[1913.
bhagin!
4.
1.
3.
2.
so-
bhanda s. yajna
bharundasaman 3.
4.
bhargava
bharya 5.
bhid
2,
5.
mas
5.
6.
mitravaruna
bhram
3. 9;
man! 5. 6.
1 math 2. 4,
man
nis
manas
medha
3.
nir-
abhimata.
1,
2; 3. 1; 5. 3; 6. 8.
5.
6.
mantray
manth
-f-
anu
abhil. 3;
5.5;
3.
1; 5.
1,
2; 6,
1.
daru; devata
loha.
3.
6,
mahapathikrti
mahavlra 6. 9.
3
ma
3.
+
mamsa
2.
1.
manusyaloka
yaj
s.
yajamana;
samista
yajus
s.
yajna
1.
s.
yathartha
6.
vag
yathaprakrti
3. 6.
6. 1.
2. 9.
6.
yathalingam
3.
yamasu
10.
s. s
c
;
3.
9; 5. 5; 6. 4,
6. 4, 6, 9.
yava
5.
2;
5.
5.
3. 3.
5. 5, 6.
5.
6; 6. 5.
yavamaya
3.
6. 9.
yajiiabhanda
yama
1.
3. 8.
2.
3. 5;
4; 4.
3. V, 2, 3, 7; 6.
5;
yaddevatya
upa(?)6.
madhyamdina
s.
yathavadanam 3. 9.
yathasukham 3. 7.
yathoktam 2. 4.
2. 3.
1.
3. 8,
1.
yathakaryam
vi 1. 3.
marya s. jara.
mars + abhi s. abhimrsta.
mahant 6. 6.
mahendra
a 4.
yata
7.
abhi
mna +
3.
3.
yajnasambandhin
yajnayudha 3. 7.
2. 9; 6. 7.
marj
6. 8.
yajamana 1. 3; 2. 4, 9;
yajamanakarman 3. 5.
yajamanasana 3. 5.
3.
1.
mamthasri 3. 3.
maya s. asrna
mar
2. 5; 4. 1;
5.
3,
nis 3. 8.
yava
mogha
5; 2. 4; 6. 2.
1.
2. 4, 8;
2; 4. 4.
-f-
+
mantravant
1.
+ sam a samamnata.
mluc + abhi + ni 4. 4; 5. 1.
8.
6.
8.
2.
maitravaruna
1.
6.
3.
1.
3. 8.
maitra
1.
5. 3.
s.
9.
1.
medhya
2.
3.
mrtyu
manusya
mantra
5. 2.
nirmathya;
s.
+ abhi
prari
mrtpatraviniyoga
8;
1.
mrgakhara 6. 7.
mrgara 6. 7.
mrta s. sirnamrta; 2.8.
manthy a.
madhya(?)
raadhyama
s.
6.
4;
2.
3.
7.
3. 2.
bhratrvya
-f-
mukha
6.
2.
3.
2. 7; 5.
mithuna
vi 2. 5.
-\-
bhratar
mithas
10.
3.
3. 10.
mahendra 2. 1.
2 mi + pra 3. 7.
bhuyas 1. 5.
bhedana 6. 9.
bhojya(?)
10.
3.
mahisa
1; 6. 5, 9.
a nu
10.
3.
marjallya 3. 5.
marttika 6. 5.
4. 4.
bhuj
bhu
6.
3; 5. 5; 6. 3.
3.
marjara
4. 3.
4.
6. 8.
maruta
8.
5.
ava
bhinna
maya
1.
bhinna;
s.
245
Wortindex.
Vol. xxxiii.]
5.
1.
8.
7.
6. 1, 7.
1.
1,4,10.
246
J. v. Negelein,
6.
1 11
+ pra
5.
3.
4.
-(-
vacana
prayukta.
s.
pra
vadava
ram
2.
5.
3;
rathamtara
6. 5.
dasaratram; sodasara-
tra.
ratri 6. 6.
rathamtara
1 ris
-j-
vi
3.
vapa
vam
rukmapratihita 6. 7.
rudra 3. 1, 3.
2 rudh + apa 4. 2.
4-
ava
s.
var
vara
avaruddha.
sam
-f-
s.
2.
+
+
vi 2. 6;
sam
5.
9.
3.
6;
7.
8.
3.4;
valmika
2.
5; 3. 2.
vi 2. 5.
6. 5.
6. 5.
10.
3.
varuna
asamarudha;
4;
3. 8.
6.
sorna
5.
s.
varesadha 6.
varna s. tad
varj
sam
7.
,
2. 7.
varjam s. sampraisa
varna s. tad
2. 4.
rupa s. tad
raudra 2. 4.
s.
varaha
+ upa 5. 2.
+ vi 1. 1.
ruh
2.
5. 6.
4. 1.
3.
virista.
s.
1. 3.
upa
s.
9.
6.
ratriparyaya
7.
+ abhi 3. 2.
+ a 1. 2; 2. 1, 2, 4, 6, 7,
+ vi + a 3. 4.
+ sam-j-a 3. 7.
+ upa 2. 6; 5. 2.
+ ni nyupta.
+ ms 2. 1, 3,4, 5, 8, 9;
6. 4.
rajahara(?)
s.
any a",
2.
vap
3. 2.
raj an 5. 6.
ratri
ahuti
6.
vanaspati
-f vi 4. 4.
rasana
3. 7.
6.
s.
+
+
vad
2.
3.
1.
6.
vart
+ a avrtta; 1. 3.
+ abhi + a 3. 3 4. 2.
+ vi-|-a vyavrtta; 6. 6.
+ ud 1. 5.
+ ni nivrtta; 1. 3; 6. 2.
s.
labh
s.
alabhyamana.
+ a 1. 3; 2. 5, 9; 5. 6;
+ ami -f- a 3. 8; 4. 2.
+ upa a 6. 7.
-f-
4-
7.
6. 4.
vajra 6.
vatsa
raksas
3.
thoktam.
9.
yupa 2. 6; 3. 2.
yupavirudha 5. 6.
ratha
manusya
yaks + upa 5. 3.
vaksyakama 3. 9.
vac s. ukta; brahmanokta; ya-
2.
3. 8.
yugapat
8.
yuga s. vaso
yugamdhara 6.
2.
lomanakha
1.
lohamaya
yana 1. 3.
yavant 2.
p i tr
artha
s.
lopa
10.
yajyanuvakyavyatyasa
yuj
deva
s.
3.
1. 3.
6.
yajnika
4.
1.
1.
yajna
+ vi 1. 5; 2.
+ ava 5. 6.
lup
loka
3. 9.
upa
-f
yatha
G.
linga
6.
2. 3.
yasas
ya
lahgali 2. 2, 3.
2. 9; 5. 5.
yavagu
yavistha
[1913.
upa
6.
10.
s.
6.
7.
B.
-f pari 5. 5.
+ pra
s.
pravrtta;
3.
9; 6. 2.
varttamanakala 3.
vars + abhi 4. 3;
+ pra
varh
3. 9.
vasa
2. 5; 3. 3.
visnu
+ pra
+ vi +
pra
visrsta 3.
vihita
3.
-f pra
2. 5; 3.
5.
6.
6;
3;
5.
8.
6. 8.
6.
2.
9; 3.
1,
7.
3.
1. 2, 5;
1.
4. 3.
2. 4.
2. 3; 3. 2.
6.
5.
veda s.
vedasa
atharva
s. sarvavedasadaksin
vedi
s.
uttara
vela
s.
3.
vaitanasutra
6.
10.
5.
5.
vaisvadeva
3. 3.
vaisvarupa
vaisvanara
2. 6.
2.
vaisriava
aindra
s.
3.
3;
vichedana
vyatyasa
3.
6. 4.
3.
vidhi
a; purusa
1; 6. 8.
vimrgvan
1.
virudha
patra
s.
karma
-|-
upa
6. 5.
vraj
2.
4;
+ ati
s.
6.
niyata
3.
vratavela
5. 4.
1.
visvajit 6. 7.
3. 9.
6.
2.
vratopayana
vratapati
8;
brahma
5. 4.
5. 3.
5. 5.
vrihi 5. 6.
3; 2. 4.
6.
4; 5. 4.
5; 3. 8.
5.
8.
2. 3.
2.
yupa;
yajya-
cittavy apattyuh.
s.
vyavrtta
vyahrti
.
3. 6.
vratapati
vratabhrt
+ sam + a
2, 3;
6.
vyapatti
vrata
vivici 2. 7; 5. 4.
vis
3.
mrtpatra
6.
1.
3.
2. 9.
vyatta
.
vidhyaparadha 1. 1.
vidhyardhasamapta 5.
a.
5;
5. 6.
vyaghra
vidhana
viparyasa
vibhuti 6.
1.
ahutilopa
s.
vyakhySta
s.
nuvakya
1 vid 2. 3.
virista
6.
4. 2.
viniyoga
5. 3.
3; 4. 4;
4/1.
1, 4, 6.
5;
'2.
vrata".
6.
s.
1,
3. 9.
vaisnavant
5. 3,
8.
8.
vaisnavl
3 vid
9.
6.
vichiiina 6. 5.
1,
5; 6.
3. 2.
vasoyuga 6. 2.
viksama 4. 1.
ud
1.
3. 5,
3.
vaivicl
varanlsahita
vidhi
vrthagni
vrsan 5.
vestin
3,4.
2;
6. 8.
vrtrahan
vrsni
vayavya 3. 4; 5. 5; 6. 7.
vayu s. aindra -ayava;
vij
2.
6. 8.
s.
vrtratur
1.
vajasaneyibrahmana
vas
v;i
vrtti 2. 4.
2.
3.
vagyata 4. 4.
vac 1. 2; 3. 1;
varunya
na
viti 2. 7; 5. 4.
3. 2; 6.
+ abhi 1.
+ a 4. 1.
2;
1,
viharana
7.
3.
3. 3.
varuna
3. 2.
visarjana
1; 3. 6; 5. 4.
1.
5. 3.
vasatlvari
vata
ui
visnuvarunadevatya
6. 4.
+ ud 4. 2.
+ upa 4. 1.
vah
aindra v
8.
5. 3.
vasatkaranidhana
vasu
4. 3.
visama(?) s. syena".
viskanna 4. 3.
4. 3.
vasa
5 vas(?)
visvabhrt
6.
6. 3.
5. 6.
vahmkavapa
3 vas
247
Wortindex.
Vol. xxxiii.]
6, 7.
248
J. v. Negelein,
sams + anu 6.
sakuna 3. 10.
sakuni
2.
saddhotar
2. 4.
sam
10.
upa
1 sar
sodasiratri 3. 3.
5; 2. 5.
1.
samyatsara
sirna.
sam
2. 9.
samsthita
sarira 3. 8.
sariradarsana
sasvat
1. 1.
sastra
6. 5.
6, 8.
2.
6. 1.
7;
+ ati
+ ut
sirna
1.
sukrasrl
3. 3.
-f-
syena
5; 5. 2,
2.
3.
syenavisama 6.
srapana 1. 1.
5; 4.
sadas
2.
6.
sri
-1-
dus
adhi
s.
adhisrita; 2.9;
4.
4.
(?)
ma
s.
3. 2.
8.1, 10;
ud
8.
s.
antah';
samtata
5. 4.
samtati
1. 3;
6.
7,
samasta
3.
1.
1.
sroni
uttaravedi
1. 3;
svas 4. 1;
svahsuti(?)
3.
2;
6.
7.
1.
1.
samadhyamdina
samana 5. 5.
2.
5; 5. 2.
samamnata
5.
1.
samaya
6. 8.
10.
5.
6. 4.
6.
samanajanapada 6.
samapta 6. 7, 10.
2.
10.
svan
3.
3. 5.
samadhana
6.
srutipatha
8.
samdhiyamana 3. 1.
samnaddhedhmabarhis
1.
sreyams
1; 6. 3.
6.
2. 8.
sruti 3. 6, 8, 10.
3.
3. 2.
6.
sabhasmaka
1.
samasanna.
utsanna.
saptakapala
5. 3.
6.
4. 2.
s.
sruta
srotra
3. 6.
8.
ava
sri 3. 3.
sloka
2.
;
10.
9,
5. 5.
1.
s.
14, 68.
6.
samnipatita
3; 5.
2, 3, 4,
3.
samdesa 6. 6.
samdhi 3. 3;
duhsrita.
s.
2.
2;
1,
3. 3.
samdiksita
6.
sra 1/3, 5; 2. 5; 5. 5.
2.
2;
-f-upa 3. 7.
sadarbha 2. 5.
2. 8.
kesa.
s.
6.
-j-sam-f-a
karma
s.
3.
-j-
suci 2. 7; 5. 4, 5.
smasru
1.
+*
2. 9.
sudradugdha
sesa
samsravabhaga
sad
3.
ucchista.
6. 3, 5, 9.
sirnamrta
1.
8.
sattrin 3.
s.
6.
7,
sattra
6. 4, 6.
siras 6. 1.
sis
3.
samkrahisyam
sipivista 2. 2; 3. 1; 5. 3.
sipivistavant
6.
samsthitahoma
sakhi
5. 4.
7.
6.
4. 3.
4. 3.
sakrt 2. 1;
saktusrl 3.
2. 9.
salamukhiya
sava
3.
3. 7;
samvatsarabhipraya
samsava 6.
samskanna
sarasaray 4. 3.
sarava s. catuh*.
samitra
7.
6.
3.
5.
s.
10.
3.
sas 6. 1, 2.
6.
samya
6. 7.
saddlia visk
2. 9.
sakrtpinda
sank
2.
5.
5;
sveta
5.
[1913.
s.
3. 8.
punah
samaropitasamaropita
2. 8.
Vol. xxxiii
Wortinrlex.
samasa 3. 9;
samasanna 2.
10.
6.
samidh 2. 5,
s ami stay aj us
9; 4. 3, 4; 6. 2.
9.
samudra
sura
6. 6.
1.
sarva
6.
7.
5.
6.
3;
2.
3.
1,
savyam
2. 9.
sasoma
6.
anu
1.
pratah
stabh
sarasvata
abhi
(?) 6.
stamba
ava
7.
3; 2. 6; 3. 4;
1.
1; 4.
1.
bharunda
3.
8.
avaskanna.
viskanna; 1. 5.
s. samskanna.
4.
1; 5. 5.
1.
6.
1.
darbha
1,
4;
(?)
3. 5, 8.
kirttana
stotra
s.
stoma
5. 6.
stha
+
-{-
3; 5.
1.
6.
Part HI.
3,
7.
5. 3.
ava
6. 7.
ud
s.
uttha; utthita;
4,9.
+ upa + ud 4. 1.
+ upa 1. 1; 3. 5;
+ prati 1. 5; 2.
5. 3.
1.
6. 4.
VOL XXXIH.
s.
sthavistha
4.
2; 6.
4. 1.
s.
star 2. 5; 3. 2, 8.
stu 6. 1, 3, 4, 5.
5. 1.
4. 4.
3.
6.
3. 9.
skanna;
+ upa
6.
8.
skanna 1. 3; 3. 4;
skannahuta 4. 3.
7.
6.
(?)
stena
1;
1.
4; 4. 4;
3,
+ adhi
+ ava
+ vi
+ sam
9;
3.
sayamakuti
2.
2. 5.
-j-
6. 3,
10.
s.
sayamdoha 2. 1; 4. 1.
sayamdohasthana 4. 1.
sayam 1. 2; 2. 2, 3; 4.
sic
3.
samnayya 2.
saman s. a;
4.
s.
6. 9.
varuna
sahiranya
sadhu
skand
5.
1.
3.
4;
6. 1.
3.
saurya
1.
6.
6.
3. 3,
4. 1, 2, 3; 6. 2.
3/9;
s.
6.
6.
1,
sa;
6. 9.
3.
sauvistakrta
trtiya";
savaniya
sahita
2; 6.
9.
savamyasyuh
10.
5.
6.
4. 1.
saumya
9.
5,
4.
4. 4.
s.
akrlta
6.
5;
6.
4; 4. 4;
saumika
sarvarupa 2. 6.
sarvavedasadaksina
savitar
3.
s.
2.
somabhaga 6. 6.
somarupa 3. 1; 6.
4. 1.
sarvaprayascitta
sarvahna
s.
somakrayana 3.
somagraha 2. 5.
somatanu 3. 8.
3. 5, 8.
sarvaksama
savana
sutra
somakalasa
6.
1,
1.
sarvasas
2. 9.
somakarin
sarvakratu
sa
6.
5. 1.
sarvatra
s.
karna
vaitana
sukta
4, 6, 7.
5. 6.
sarpis 4.
3. 1.
soma
6. 5.
sarparajn!
sutraprayascitti
s.
sarpa
prasiddha.
yatha
s.
surya
+ ut 3, 10; 6. 3.
+ vi visrsta.
+ sam 2. 7; 5. 4;
sarp
2, 5.
6. 4.
susamtapa
3. 1.
samraj
3.
suparna 3. 1.
suputa 3. 3.
1. 1; 2. 9.
1.
abhi
-f-
sukha
5.
sampraisavarjam 1. 1.
sambandhin s. yajna
sarj
su
3. 3.
sambhara
sambheda
1.
s.
3. 3.
sampraisa
ni
+ sam 6.
sidh + pra
(?) 2.
3.
sic
9.
samasasattra
saimsti
249
17
2.
250
J. v.
+ sam
stha
2; 2.
1.
Negelein, Wortindex.
1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7,
8;
har
1; 6. 4.
5.
sthana
pratardoha
s.
doha e
sthali s. caru;
sthita
spars'
4.
3;
6.
s.
3.
samsthita.
8; 5. 1.
havirdhana
havirbhuta
sprti 2. 9.
smar
4. 1.
smrtagnihotrin
ati 2. 5.
sru
eruva
viska;
3.
1.
3. 9; 4.
3.
10; 4.
hi
3. 9.
2. 9.
s.
apahatapapman;
-j-
bar
cf.
6.
7.
pari
-{-
nis 2. 5.
dhar; 1.2;
2. 9;
+ apa 2. 1; 4. 1; 6.
+ abhi 3. 1, 2.
abhi + ava 4. 1.
+ upa ava 3. 2.
+ a 2. 5; 3. 5, 7; 6.
3.2; 5.1.
1,
-\-
-f-
anu
-f a 1. 1, 3.
5. 3.
1; 6. 1.
4.
4.
pra
s.
2,
1,
6,
3,
4.
8,
3.
sa;
s.
1.
2.
2;
2.
5; 5.
1,
2.
5.
hotra
3. 3.
homa
s.
ajya;
homakala
hautra
hva
3. 2,
6.
tva; huta; 1. 3;
huta 1. 3; 2. 6.
hutahuta 6. 6.
hotar 1. 2; 2. 6, 9;
saddha9;
2. 9.
2. 8;
3. 4,
6. 7.
-}-
+ vi + a
2.
hiranyagarbha
hu
1. 5.
+a
1.
5.
hiranya
apa
3.
7; 5. 4.
2; 4. 2.
1.
hita 3.
ban
2.
2;
1.
3.
2 ha
3.
1,
svistakrt
1,
4. 1.
havyavahana
hasta
3.
1.
svarga
5. 5.
3. 6.
svayamuttha
svar
4;
anabhyu-
s.
1.
havisy(?) 5. 3.
havis s. dasahaviska;
4. 4.
sruc
ud
+ sam + ud 5. 1.
+ abhi + upa 2. 9.
+ pari 1. 5.
+ anu + pra 2. 6; 4.
+ vi 2. 8; 3. 7; 5. 2.
6. 9.
+ sam
+ sam 2.
2; 2. 5; 5.1; 6.7.
ddhrta;
sthalipaka
+ ud 1. 1,
+ abhi +
sayam-
[1913.
3.
+a
s.
3.
5.
nitya*.
4.
1. 3.
3. 3,
10;
4.
10.
1;
Berichtigungen.
3.
S.
73
Z. 8
1.5.
S.
77
Z. 1
2. 2.
S. 79
Z. 2
2. 7.
S.
89
Anm.
2.
9.
S.
93
3.
1.
S.
94
1.
lies statt
dharayed: dharayed
|.
cyavate79; cyavate.
Anm.
Z. 3 streiche:
lies statt
cyavamte.
1314
brahma vrate
samrad asandyam.
von unten lies nibhuyapur adhavamye.
:
j.
S.
95
Z. 2
3.
5.
S.
97
3.
8.
S.
99
Z. 12 lies: va 'samamnatanam.
3.
10. S. 101 Z.
4.
1.
S. 104
12
Anm.
lies
ty: ce'ty
atmanam: vatam
bhutam: bhutam.
statt vato
S.
105 Z. 9
lies statt
usaso: usaso.
S.
106 Z. 4
lies statt
om: om.
Anm.
'
te
atma
Z.33
trarthiya: trarthiya.
S. 107
Z. 3
S. 108
Z.32
Z.44
Z.21
-samkhya-: -samkhya-.
sunavama-soma sunavama soma.
S. 109
fiige hinter
apy aga
tato py avam.
ein:
gemeint
ist
S.
110
Z. 6
S. Ill
4.
2.
Z. 3
lies statt
Z. 5
Anm.
4. 3.
lies statt
saham: aham.
"gahi: "gahi.
von unten
lies statt
113
Z. 9
S.
114 Z. 5
lies statt
Z. 12
4. 4.
amiksa-
lies statt
S.
Anm.
jataveda: jatavedah.
Anm.
S. 112 Z. 6
amiksa-
lies statt
Z. 28
sabdayet: sabdayet.
"dvasitam: 'dvasitam.
prajapater: prajapater.
Z. 17 lies statt oben: unten.
akasad: aksad.
S. 117
Z. 12
S. 118
Z. 10
pramtesv: 'pranltesv.
Z. 23
visvadarsatas
Z. 28
vratabhrc: vratabhrt.
Z.29
S. 119 Z. 2
Anm.
S.
120
lies statt
visvadarsatah.
'havaniyav: "havaniyav.
Z. 7
die: das.
17*
yato jatah
252
5.
1.
J. v. Negelein,
S. 121
Anm.
S. 122 Z. 5
S.
123
Anm.
[1913.
samrad: samrad.
lies statt
Z. 15 lies statt
abbimamtranadmi
Z. 17
samrad: samrad.
Z. 21
Z. 22
abbimamtranadini.
unterste Zeile
5.
2.
S.
125
Z. 3
prasidhy5. 3.
S.
Z. 2
126
lies statt
Z.32
S.
127 Z. 2
(!):
kuryat
(!).
dvipadaprasidhy-
dvipada-
siiicet: sincet.
vasam33i
lies statt
836
kuryat
lies statt
-siddhy-.
vasamssi.
'-siddy-':
Z. 6
Anm.
lies statt
von unten
anuprayaya: anupreyaya.
Rekonstruktionsversuch des
Dem
hier gegebenen
und sodann
weisen
ist u. a.
ihm nachgehen
.
128 Z. 6
S.
129 Z. 4
Anm.
ist
zu ver-
34
eine
angesichts
prag ukte
4.
.";
lies btatt
Z. 7
5.
3. 7. 1.
lies statt
Z. 12
srite
|
srte
|.
anagnir: anagni-.
und
waren dann
dem
Opfer-
Z. 28
S.
130
5.6.
5.5.
S. 131
6.
S.
1.
132
Z. 1
15-16
Anm. Z. 2
Z.
Z. 14
lies
statt
dagnaye: agnaye.
(nabbihita): 'nabbihita,
17.1.).
vielleicbt
u
mb'glicb ist es auch, daB
pamanau
des Textes durcb Fortfall einer Silbe
,,
ist.
Vol. xxxiii.]
6.
S. 134
1.
253
Berichtigungen.
Anm.
Z. 6
lies statt
pranitvena: pranl[ta]tvena.
Z. 14
nimitta-prayascittam):
(!.:
pra-
(1.:
yascittam).
n
20
6. 3.
S. 136 Z.
6. 4.
S. 137 Z. 14
6.
5.
6.
6.
6.
5.
6.
6.
smartavaj: smartavad.
urddhvam: urddhvam-.
Anm.
S.
Z. 22
Z. 23
Z. 12 streiche: ,,zu".
Z. 14 lies statt krameranyam:
138
krame 'ranyam.
Z. 23
S. 139 Z. 12 lies
Z. 14
prayoga: prayogah.
statt narasamsa(d): narasamsad.
iti
Z. 2
samsincet.
von unten
letzte Zeile:
S. 140 Z. 6
lies statt
ist
gemeint
T. B.
1. 4. 5.
. ;
'tiri-
cyeta.
7.
1.
stakapalam: 'stakapalam.
Z. 9
6amse[tj: gamse[d].
Anm.
057
fiige
hinzu
T. S.
mahati ratryah
lies
7. 5. 5. 1.
T. B.
1. 4. 6. 4.'
vgl.
Pane. Br.
Wb.
9. 4. 1.
und
Pet.
1097
nidadhyuh
u. pra-
taranuvaka.
6.
S. 141 Z. 13
7.
lies:
(samvatsare
1007
'sthiputam
loss).
samvatsare).
Z. 17 lies statt "diyad: 'diyad.
Z. 22
['Jsvavadva: ['Jsvavad va.
|
Anm.
'
S.
142 Z. 1
lies statt
Z. 4
savaniyasyuh
6.
9.
lies statt
Z. 18 lies etwa:
8.
Anm.
6.
Z. 3
S.
143 Z. 10
Z. 9
savanlyasya syuh.
Msse
rectur der
Anm.
,,dasa-havisam":,,dasa-haviskam",undbemerke
unter dem Texte, daft diese Form eine Cor-
ist.
erwahnten: erwahnen.
lies
11 lies:
abhyastamiyad.
Z. 13 lies: cet (trtiya-) savanam.
Z. 22 lies statt rtvijam: rtvijas.
S.
144
Anm.
Z. 3
von unten
sake
1.:
|
||1785j|
magha-
raudranamasamvatsare mase
Additions
to
By
The
are Hexaplaric
following
dunensis,
edited
and therefore
work:
5,
is
constituent
.ordinarily goes
see
XXVIII
AJSL.,
[1911],
Hexapla sub
inserted in the
4);
asterisco)
Roman
is
printed in Italics;
it
is
is
modO pur-
Oapev
Circumdsa
7r/otT/*ev
hel
omnis
ex
exierat
plebs quae
OmmaSCUli
Aegypto
viri
vies
est
bellatores
in
ipsis
via
exeuntibus
ex Aegypto quid
omnis plebs
quae
7re/otKa-
wovs
TOVS
fyo-ous
Ioy>co?A||K<uovTosoAoyosov
Aaos
Ir)<rovs'
Tras
eKTro/aevo/xevos
ev
TroAe/xov
avS/oes
aTrtOwov
OVTWV
ej
e/>^a>
rrj
oSw
rrj
^XOovrwv
Aiyvirrov.
TrepireT^^voi
o
*<
Aaos
TT<XS
04
Aao?
ot
or*
10
Additions
Vol.xxxiii.]
cum
ex
ipsi
exierunt
non
Aegypto
XL
quia
annis
habitaverant
20 Istrahel
donee
exie-
qui
ex Aegypto qui
audierant vocem
non
25
deserto
in
bettatorum
runt
filii
consummaretur
plebs virorum
omnis
Domini
TT7
rrj
08(1)
ep'iyj.0)
cv
efcAfloKTWV
ClVTtoV
AtyVTTTOV
OV
erant
circumcisi
or'
the
from
in
deserto
in
fuerat
15 via
Field
to
quern admocircumci-
ort
<r
p.
err)
ot
vtot
6v8tT/on^ai/
ev
IcrpavyA
TTtts
TTJ
Aaos
ot
TroAe/xto-rat
^ovrcs
e^eX-
AiyviTTov
aKov<ra.v76<s
fir]
prjfj.at
Kvpiov
ov
||
rys
Se
ot
(fxDvrjs
TpoTrov
dum autem
aliquando
fuerant
itinere
30 quia
in
et
incir-
quando
TOVS vtous
OCTOL 7TOT6
/cat
6yVOVTO
V Tf] oStU
irore
a7re/)t-
oo-ot
omnes
fecti
XL
35 lesus
Travra? TOVTOVS
enim annis
If](rov<s
//,
rum
de Aegypto
qui
obaudierant
praecep-
Domini
tis
non
1 lioc
O~TOt
aVT(UV
TWV
T(i)V
CK
AtyvTTTOV
yr)<s
ot
TOV
quibus
et definierat etc.
4,
autem modo]
T/307TCO
iz
(0
TTOV
wKTt
B.
/<tvry
?1D
De
*\y
y m sine
nom.=A
the grosser
30, 6
Le
(a' Tre/MTe/zvav)
and
Tre/ot/ca&x/oiCeu' TT^V
ra
23 (but aK/)o/?vo-Ttfv Tr;v cwc/)o/?vcrTiav
Field). Nevertheless (0 employs in the sequel,
19,
Tre/nTe/mtv
2 ^?205 Istrahel]
TODS
wovs
tr?A,
so
Max
256
omitted in
Observe the
verbum.
De
15, 2
ouros
comp. Trpayfrnraa
rOTDH "Dl /D/> Kara
!"ttn
QH^
'lin?
for
19,
Travra
XP
yJOfcJH
19,
15)
(Taro
)
Bead
Iwc
and
for Se
Aoyos (comp.
TO 7rpoo~ray/za
si
7L is
4 but
for
Ngkn have
Trpay/m
(comp.
Nu
18, 7
Ovo-iaa-Trjpiov;
De
1,
T/OOTTOS
TOV
Tpo-rrov
[1913.
hoc verbo]
3
\
KO.I
ODTCDS
also
poo-ray pa
III
435
literalness:
Aoyos
TT
in I| M
Not
28.
1.
L. Margolis,
TW
WTOIS
T/OOTTOV
TOVTOV
14
free)
est
m sine
verant] evSitrpityav on the basis of ei/6W/o6i/fv
singular is inexact; in marginal citations the scribe
ested in the
main point
verb, but he
is
nom
is
(the
inter-
careless in details
b*W
^W
2124
^a
aja.flj,
VQJO*
Greek by Field
Jiis^-ffl
l-f^^laav
m
^
(ai/aAw&j is
parallel rendering of a
oj^li; j^o^
m oa
In the
is
not
l^K Mi 7, 2;
Ez
15, 18; on the other
hand TeAeiovo-ftw DH Nu 14, 33; De 2, 14; I
16, 11; III
14, 10; Ps 9, 7 (consummates sunt *^); Je 14, 15 and
TAetow=Dnn Da 9, 29; similarly vaaojsij Je 44, 12 will go back
avaA7/3r0at for DPI is found in <r' elsewhere:
to T\a<i)0-r)orovTai.
Ps 72 (73), 19, also Ez 24, 10. 11, and in agreement with <#
TAeu&?. K\uriv is found in
31, 15 and the part, for 2JDN Je
but
of
for
Nu
avrjp
while ^i m has
With
The
m^rite WX.
Jba^.
both for
a'
and
telltale
o-',
word
Field
is
is
o-'
Is 42, 13
Aaos;
plebs
right in writing
in
a's
rendition; cQvos
is
e. g.
Ge
11,
Additions to Field
Vol.xxxiii.]
from
Le
25, 45;
the
also
comp.
and
fecti erant]
37
r>7
ruf
naSfiapfiTiSi]
portion of
result
v.
35
avrw
ot
TrAewrrot
rs
|
the rendering
is
Prob.
ideoque]
of
Om % =
K<U 8vo]
Om % = C
38 illorwn plurimi]
The net
6,
Inner-Latin addition
= K<U
<
TOVTO
Sta
41 de Aegypto\
or'
6.
11 According to the margin of the Syrohexaplaris Symin a future (imperative) sense, thus
Koip^^Tw and
circumeat
v.
et
then
12: praecedant.
59;
6,
rats
o-aATTtyJt
118; 20 tubas=-at
Triyyes ,54. 59. 75.
additions
in Hexaplaric
is
for 1&1$.
The
three use
in
it
v.
and elsewhere.
9, 1
f.
of the
of the
to
Law
follow after
8,
29
instead of after
ut
autem
may be
audierunt
reges
channanei
et
factum
est
ut
audierunt
magni
contra
faciein
libani
Max
258
euchaei et
et
et ferezei
L. Margolis, Additions
et iebussaei
gessaei
nerunt
eus
ger-
unum
in
expugnare
iesum et istrahel simul omnes
The text of the second version
several
translation
[1913.
congregaverunt se in
et
is
defective
But the
out.
Contrast
unmistakable.
is
Field &c.
conve-
et
to
iesu
the Latin,
in
literalness of the
two
the
in
versions
Greek:
6e
WS
ot
TreSiv^
Tr^s
(V
ot
lopSavov
crrys
ot
ijKOvcrav
A/JiOppaMDV
T"r\
KOH
ot
/cat
Kat
Tov
cv
/cat
TrapaXia
//eyaA^s
AvrtAt/;?a]/tu
TWI/
TTCpav
opavr)
rr)
ei>
J3acri\a<s
TO)
Trj<s
ot
Tracrrj
TW
Kat
^ov
all
6poicr6r)(rav
of
literation
Jerem. 39
struction
r6gtf
TroAc/xetv
ev
the source
(elsewhere
40
(32), 44;
fj.Ta
T?;S
CTTL
TO avTO
a>o~T
TTO-
K7roAe/xr^o"at Iryo-ow
likelihood,
OaXaarcr^
Xavavatos Kat
In
ot
Evatos <Kat o
TO av-o
Trai/Tes
ot
7rt
rjKOVcrav
Tra/oaAta rrys
TTTJ
/xeyaAr^s
Xerratot Kat ot
(us
TCO
rr)
BaXacr-
TT/OOS
eycvero
o~TO/iaTi
en
Maccab.
(33), 13; I
for D^ Dn^i
(comp.
12, 38),
22.
al.
the con-
Jerem. 41
(48), 12),
ei't
o-To/xaTt
"iriK
vtot la-payX
ai/Spt
Ir/A
rell
aV
(?r/)os)
C^.
Comp. De
27,
but
14
TravTt
I^A $,
ff Trpos 7ravTa.<s
o'
iravTt
viovs I^A
Kingdoms; contrast
(51), 26. 27
avS/oos
avSpes Iov8a in
(o-v-rip)
TOV lovSa.
In Chron.
omnes II
34,
30 or
Jerem.
sub *; Isaiah
av^p (I^A)
om B II
BA
5,
5,
(e.
3.
g.
4, 4),
but 44
7 writes av0/oo>7ros
that the o
to a,
and that
was extend-
was *asvos
dravati,
-6 is
of -z (from
loss
-iz- and -uz- before voiced dentand u (Am. Journ. of Phil. iii. 27). But we
als
(where
date:
-o is
that
sets of phonetic
of final
to
-as
extended to use in
-o
changes of very
appears in Avestan
regardless of the
all positions,
following sound, except before certain enclitics), but compensatory lengthening of a short vowel before z or z + d or dh
is unknown in Avestan; 2 thus Skt. mldha-, Av. mi%da-\ Skt.
It is manifest,
therefore, that the
dftdhi-, Av. duzda(y)-.
final
-o
same as
became a sound
similar
1
Wackernagel, Altind.
Grundr. i. 2 886, and KVG.,
to
Gr.
i.
i.
264;
the
This 7i-sound
Skt. visarga.
Thumb, Handhich
d.
Sanskrit,
184ft'.;
Av.
Grundr.*,
hiS-afti
i.
(A*5-)
172; 504;
is
Wide,
sldati,
v, sedeo.
cf.
Bruginann,
Roland Q. Kent,
260
[1913.
from
*-es
initials as -a,
-as,
not as
-o,
-o
while IE.
-6s,
before sonants.
Similarly, in Avestan, IE. final -as, -es, -os appear as -<J, while
IE. final -os, etc. appear as -o. This difference of treatment
-6,
-e
and a from
converting
IE.
6,
to
oper-
ating.
down
1
siBartholomae, KZ. xxix. 572 ff.; Brugmann, Grundr.*, i. 886.
milar suggestion by Brockhaus (1842): "Sollte nicht vielleicht auch der
Nominativ auf -as wie -os ausgesprochen worden sein, dessen dumpfes
vor alien tonenden Buchstaben verloren gehen muftte, aber wie fast
Sanskrit, wenn ein Consonant abfallt, dieser durch die Ver-
immer im
langerung des vorhergehenden Vocals ersetzt wird, auf diese Weise aus
-os die Form -6 wurde",
(Zt. Kunde d. Morg. iv. 85).
2 On the
debatable question whether the Aryan possessed such an -e
(from
i.
-es)
886,
3
see "Wackernagel,
5, note.
Altind. Gr.,
i.
338;
Brugmann, Grundr.^
1005,
Of. the
237, b,
/3;
Brugmann, Grundr.*,
ff.;
i.
Bloomfield,
i.
KVG., p.
AJP. iii. 27 ff.
735;
p. 37,
545,
34; p. 274,
Joh.
710, 2;
iii.
30;
i.
p.
38 (middle),
34; p, 44,
40.
The
Vol.xxxiii.]
261
sasddhi, cakddhi;
Lat
cf.
*oz-d,
The
os).2
That IE.
1.
e,
became d
-li
in the primitive
before voiced stops.
Aryan period
That IE.
2.
final
-Ji
That IE.
3.
changes
following
Palatalization
1.
stops.
table
of the
Aryan Changes.
of gutturals
'i.
2.
Change
of IE.
3.
Loss of
final -h
new
and
The
chronological
presented:
Primitive
and
and cerebral
ind. Gr.
d to a,
d.
giving
o.
of so-dasa
o
i.
e,
p. 38,
34, b)
"sixteen",
may be
so-dha
"sixfold"
(Wackernagel, Alt-
The
Gr.
i.
p. 112,
dddhvam
etc. is frequent.
262
and Iranian.)
Iranian Changes.
Indian Changes.
1.
Cerebralization of dentals
dental
and
cerebral
ening.
3.
Change of IE.
e,
[1913.
6 to #,
a.
1.
Change
becoming
of IE.
e,
6 to a,
part of
final
Bar
my
.zL-oULl
.otto^x kijt
Cj)^rL
e.
altered
i.
e.
to
:CH^O)
JLLit
^o
JLiJLp
become
slack;
to
^^a
^<**~ -&-^
lose the
^.sama ooi
Genesis in
passage in
And
faulty tradition.
in his reprint
for the
London Bible
is
also to
OOAV.;?
Bar Ebhraya,
O*L'O;JL
Kijtp
is
careful to punc-
M*o
264 Richard
Gottheil,
homonyms: KLat
Nestoriana,
00-02*,.**
poem
[1913.
otto^x*
p. 68, 8).
Of
and
KJo
is
this
(see
in
2471
s.
The
v. *iu),
25.
evdpKrjarev
Here
ypm
In
this
(5
icliicli
became dumb.
thus renders
cfr.
v. 25.
JU.i^.
"the
sciatic
medical works.
nerve"
common
j^
expression in Arabic
in his Thesaurus.
which Payne-
A/O
///////
N'_T
^J
J.A.M
Plate
1.
JT
-A
The Qantikalpa of
the Atharvaveda.
E. Johnston Jr.
By
G. M. BOL-
Henry
Hopkins University, Baltimore, Md.
LING,
tion,
vol.
tion,
translation
as found in
127,
collate the
From
this
published text,
text could be
manuscripts.
is
chief result,
little
There
improved by
are, to
as
regards the
the corroboration of
my
but the
(cf. p.
3. 4. L ugratejasam.
3. 2. LRoth mrdukarmaprasddhaki.
Read: dhruvasddhike ; Roth reads -sddhaki; L -sddhakim, but
has -sddhakdi or -sddhakdim corrected to -sddhakdi or -sddhake, and from
6. 7. imd dpa iti rethis J would restore (cf. p. 91) the normal form.
12. 3. 'Read:
fers to Qantik. 1. 14. 16.
12. 2 Roth phalgunlbhydm.
14. 2 L visdsahim
Roth abhijitaye.
ibid.
masurd, -with LMRoth.
15. 3. L va15. 1. LRoth daksindpare.
ityddayo; Roth ityddayor.
17. 3. L (a)dbhutotpraty-abhicdlima lomikd; Roth balimam lomakd.
17.4. L jalabhaya-jalaksayayoh
desu; Roth (d)dbhutotpany-abhicdresu.
and
12. 2.
4. 4.
III.
18. 1.
The
M.
G.
266
Boiling,
[1913.
main importance of the new material lies in a different direcThat the published text was incomplete, was suspected
tion.
as far as I know
neither by myself, nor
by anyone else
who has handled it. There was, indeed, no ground for such
a suspicion. The colophon of the Chambers Codex gives no
hint of it; the contents of the text, a description of the mahdgdnti and its preliminary naksatraydga, seem complete in
themselves; and the tract begins with an abruptness no greater
than the beginnings of several Parigistas. Under such circumstances it was impossible to divine that the mahdgdnti required two other preliminary ceremonies, a propitiation of
the Vinayakas (cf. MGr. 2. 14) and a grdhaydga. Nevertheless,
after giving a brief introduction, both the London and the
Tuebingen manuscripts proceed to give a description of these
ceremonies, and then label this portion of their text the first
chapter, or the first half, of the malidgdnti.
Immediately afjer this new material (of which I now present
an edition to the Society) follows in each manuscript the text
already published from the Chambers Codex. Curiously enough
this
not
is
designated
in
either
iti
mahagdntih
Not
only
is
the
first
pagination
it
is
text.
pikdh
\.
19. 6.
arcanaydndddu stapandrthdn.
25. 3.
Roth badhydu.
Roth tathddhikam.
25. 1.
25. 4.
vrihiyavo.
The gantikalpa of
Vol. xxxiii.]
With
the
into
sight
267
the Atharvaveda.
we
ancillary
Atharvan
literature.
to
ii.
5.
p.
645 f.
xxxiii. 7. 3,
cf.
of the Qantikalpa
xlii.
and
p. 233,
is
proved in detail in my commentary. The source of the quotations from the Qantikalpa was unknown, but now proves
to be the first chapter of that text. That Sayana has simply
blundered, is to my mind clear beyond the possibility of discussion,
of his
origin
an edition
in three volumes, containing respectively AVPar. i=the true
Naksatrakalpa, AVPar. ii xxxvi and AVPar. xxxvii Ixxii.
If we assume that Sayana had only a broken set, namely
vol. ii., of such an edition, we can understand why his citations from the Parigistas are so limited and also his ignorance
of the Naksatrakalpa.
He was however familiar with the
tradition of the five kalpas, and as the second chapter of the
Qantikalpa began with an elaborate nciksatrayaga, he iden-
mistake.
tified
this
portion
of the
text
with
the
is
Naksatrakalpa of
griyah.
brahmanah sarvakamaptim
sarvatas tu samrddhim ca
griyam
||
ksatriyah prthivijayam
vaigyah samadhigachati
||
Roth samrddhigachati.
3.
antariksam athapi va
divyam va parthivam vapy
anyad va bhayam utthitam
mahagantih gamayaty
||
Roth
4.
va.
parthivaim.
18*
||
0.
L
1.
M.
O.
268
mabadevabhimrstasya
Boiling,
[1913.
mrtyor asyagatasya va
mabagantir vimocani
grabagborabbitaptasya
Roth ca. Roth vimocanim.
-bhisrstasya.
||
danavair abbimrstasya
||
||
Roth mahaganti.
2.
vrhaspatir amanvata.
gankamanah parajayam
anayam valagam krtyam
icbann rddhim samrddbiih ca
mabagantim prayojayet
gamkyamanah Roth gikyamanam; perhaps gankyamanah was intended.
|
||
L
3.
||
L
4.
5.
piyasam.
bilvabarab pbalaharab
mabagantim prayojayet
vartayitva yatbavidbi
payasa vartayet sakrt
prayunjmah; prayunjlta should perhaps be
2.
yasyividhi.
kaman naksatrasaihyogad
karmasiddber mabayogi
babih karma prayunjlta
LRoth -siddhir mahayoga. JRoth
4.
||
||
read.
||
istayuktah samabitah
3.
clear, ara- in
||
mabagantim prayunjanab
||
saptaratram gbrtagi va
1.
gakabbaksah payobbaksah
bbutva dvadagaratram tu
karmasiddbim avapnuyat
||
istamuktah.
margin.
||
prajnata.
Roth
-vidha.
With pada
loka in L.
||
1.
L
2.
nir
laksmyam iti
AV. 1. 18.
laksyam.
1.
Quoted by Sayana
at 7. 118, p. 542.
||
||
(not clear).
3.
269
Vol. xxxiii.]
janag cety
L
4.
5.
galakr-.
-rSjayutrag.
MG.
gives third
name
as: utsmita.
mufldan
hastinah
jatilan pagyati
kasayavasasah pagyati
antariksam sthanarii cankramanam iva manyate
pagyati
pagyaty
'dhvanarii vrajan manyate
divah patanam iva manyate
ma
cid
ankag
prasadarohanam
pi-sthato
anuvrajatlti
tariksat
kramanam ity.
L sarpana.
LRoth kalukhah.
Roth
6.
diva.
Roth cakramanam.
Roth kakhaya-.
Roth dhvina vrajam. L manyato. L na kag; Roth va kag.
na labhante
.L
7.
1.
ghnakarani bhavanti kysatam krsir alpaphala bhavati vanijam yanijyam alpaphalam bhavati
L labhate. Roth omits: kanyah .. labhante. LRoth
prajaputra.
krsitam. LRoth bhavamti vanijam.
.
tatra prayagcittam
||
L
2.
||
-vijani.
upahlatya.
L puraddharad vahlmlkad. L
adhidevatadvegya-; Roth adhidevanavegyalengthening in dual cmpd., but prob. read -vegma-. L -rajaganabhyam.
L mrtti. Roth -sarpisi. LRoth carry the samdhi over to next sentence.
;
4.
5.
L
6.
pavane krtva
gramacatuspathe nagaracatuspathe va vrsabhacarmastu-ya
va va rsabham-.
tatrainaiii
Roth
1.
tatraitam.
snapayet pavamanlbhih
5
||
||
pavamamdbhih.
omits.
270
G.
M.
[1913.
2.
Boiling,
||
3.
||
panipadau ca sevate
ya girasi grivayam <ca>
tarn ito nagayamy aham
gronyam prsthe tu yalaksmis
4.
gronyo.
nu.
||
Roth yalaksmi.
5.
||
tabhis
tvam
iddhe
datta.
parisam.
40.
apo varunasammitah
pavamanih punantu tva
6.
aiihdrl.
abhisiiicami
||
||
daksinam digam avadhaya yamam daivatam yamirii parisadam yah kanya ye siddhah
apo
yamena datta osadhaya
varunam
daivatam varunim paripratlclm digam avadhaya
sadam yah kanya ye siddhah
7.
||
8.
||
9.
||
prati.
10.
vahanam.
apo
parisadaiii
||
13.
||
11.
vaisnavliii
||
||
pari-
||
16.
Q
apo
vayuna datta osadhaya
urdhvam digam avadhaya brhaspatim daivatam barhaspatyam parisadam yah kanya ye siddhah
|
17.
||
||
18.
apo
||
avadhaya brahmanaiii
vatam brahmim parisadam yah kanya ye siddhah
||
also
some confusion
after brahmanaiii.
dai-
The Qdntikalpa of
Vol. xxxiii.]
the Atharvaveda.
20.
271
apo varunasariimitah
AV.
1.
||
||
||
3.
atha snato
dehlty
snato.
saubhagavyati.
and
4.
ty.
sarvabbutegvari devi
saubbagyakamah subbage
7
*nityam
Roth athendrany-.
||
-kama.
jabi
mabyam vinayakan
||
||
-duhitrakani
The gloka
is
urdbvam vinayakopabarab
1.
ata
2.
guklah
sumanasa upabared
guptag caguptag ca
dbana matsyah
purodagah
gigruka-bhustrnaka-mulako-'padanganam
ricapanam surapanam iti
gaskulyah
upaharemd.
kulmasa
ajaka-
gandbapanam ma-
upahareta.
L, phalikrtog.
mansa.
3.
4.
atbopatistbate
1.
||
||
G. M. Boiling,
272
[1913.
bhamdaraksahputrau.
namo
2.
vaigravanaya rajne
3.
yas tisthati vaigravaiiasya dvare kubjah karalo vinato vinayakas tarn ahaiii garanaiii prapadye brahmacarinam amum
L
4.
vaigvavanasya.
amusya kamam
L
7.
9.
L
1.
amum.
omits:
sairardhaya
Roth somaddhaya.
kapayimam.
namas
jahi
asm.
L
8.
imaiii
Roth prapate.
kuhbjah.
chataragme tamonuda
te astu bliaga^^an
tya jahi
(i.
e.
scribe started to
MG.
cf.
pralipte sthandile
2. 14. 31.
||
||
same
|
guklavasah pramathnita
proksate gantivarina
Roth gner mahagantih. Roth -vasa pramathnita.
2.
me deva daurbhagyaih
saubhagyena ma saiiisrjety
L bhagavam; Roth bhagavah. L chataragmi; Roth not clear.
||
||
Roth kravyadagnim
Roth gubhi.
pranirhrtya.
khake.
Qantik.
ii.
15.
||
16.
samastvlyena havyau hi
purnakhyam sarpisahutim
nutva samindhayed agnim
aliutlr juhuyat tatah
AV. 2. 6. 1. L havyu. L purnaksam. L samedhayed; Roth samidhayed;
4.
||
finite
5.
divas prthivya
AV.
6.
19. 3.
akutim
(and elsewhere);
cited.
'ndro rajeti
kamasyendrasye
4. 2; 9. 2. 6;
19. 5.
1.
dro;
||
7.
||
Roth
-ganti.
-putrarthe.
-prada.
||
Roth ndra.
||
Vol. xxxiii.]
The gdntikalpa of
273
the Atharvaveda.
2.
ete
kal-
payasveti
Roth upasusrur.
3. tan abravid brahma
stavingato-.
Roth rahu.
somarkaryoh.
iti
||
deva abruvann
atba yasya naksatram grabenartani
bhavati tarn arto 'dbitisthati nasyartbah sidbyanti
Roth ta; L t omits. L abruvann. L naksatre. L -artta; Roth -artham.
Roth artho. L narsyarthah. There is a lacuna at this point.
4. te
5.
L
6.
degasya gramasya
surabbir abatavasah
Lj gramasya.
va
is
iti
not clear.
*slnam ami*
Roth
va sisthmuni.
svastipracan
diks-dtab
dlksitah
karmanyah
anudiksitah.
-vasa.
this
atbamisaiii
9.
grabanaih
cbatrany
biramnayani
asanopanat-
padapltbani nidhaya
-yanatyada-.
nidadhaya.
11.
L
1.
Roth grahany.
-adlna.
12.
acatsadya.
yam
vabanti gonakarna
iti
navabbih
||
11
||
ya.
yaiii
vabanti gonakarnah
pratiloma vajinab
abam sarvatejomayam
adityam avabayamlba
L ryam. L pratiloma. L -yami ha. The meter is too bad to
tarn
corrections for
2.
anulomS vajinab
yam
vabanti bansavarna
Roth raktam.
raktavarnabbaiii
-leyanag.
somam avabayamlba
raktanulepanag ca yah
warrant
improvement.
tarn
L yam.
3.
its
||
bhaumam avahayamiba
stuvarnabham.
||
||
274
tarn
pltai.
5.
Boiling,
devanaiii ca purohitah
aham hiranyavarnabham
mgirasah. L vrhaspatim.
tarn
yo
6.
aham
budham avahayamiha
aham pltavarnabham
L vudham.
[1913.
pltanulepanag ca yah
4.
M.
Or'.
||
brhaspatim av&hayamiha
guklanulepanag ca yah
gukram avahayamiha
Quklavarnabhaiii
||
||
-yami ha.
ayasa ca prakrtih
yasyayasam rupam
aham *adityatejoniyasthapyayamanam
avahayamiha
7.
tarn
mrtyuputram
||
Koth ayasaya
yasyayesam.
ca.
adityenoniyastliapyamanaih.
8.
krsnanulepanag ca yah
yasya krsnam rupam
rahum avahayamiha
tarn aham krsnavarnabham
9.
tarn
mukham
vrahmanah.
ca parimandalam
||
ketum avahayamiha
-lie
||
ty;
Roth
-he
|
||
ty.
10. ity
||
||
vaksamayir.
grahapratimamh
Roth pratima
asanesupa-.
^vetau ^ukrani^akarau
bhaskarangarakau raktau
pitau budhabrhaspati
rahuketuyamah krsnah
1.
||
L-amg5rako.
-vrhaspatl.
candanau somagukrau tu
haridrakav ubhau jneyau
2.
is
viprair budhabrhaspati
rahuketucanai^carah
||
also* possible
bhaskarangarakau tamrau
3.
bhaumarkau raktacandanau
emendation.
Roth krsnagaror;
raukmau budhabrhaspati
L
4.
L
1.
grahanam
t
divyacestanaiii
naksatrapathacarinam
vasansy evanulepanam
yathavarnani puspani
vasaumsy; Roth vasasy. LRoth aivanu-.
||
13
||
ima apah givah givatamah gantah gantatamah putah putatamah punyah punyatama amrta amrtatamah padyag carghyag cacamaniyag cabhisecamyag ca pratigrhnantu bhagavanto deva graha
ity
apo ninayati
||
The Qdntikalpa of
Vol. xxxiii.]
Roth purya
Roth abhi-.
pur-.
Roth deva.
pratigrhantu.
275
the Atharvaveda.
cardhyag.
gnaha.
2.
||
pati
||
brahmapavitrana suryara
3.
ca.
Roth anulimpayati.
sumanaso divyah
surabhivrkayonijah
put a vayupavitrena
suryasya ca ragmibhih
pratigrhnantu bhagavanto deva graha iti sumanobhir
iinah
||
bhyarcayati
ima sumanasare.
4.
vanaspatiraso
a-
||
surabhirvrksa-.
vayuh-.
aharah sarvadevanam
vinaspati-.
gandhad atuttamah
iti
anuttamah).
(for:
||>
dhupaih dahati
||
Roth uttamah.
||
balarcir
timirarih svayamprabhuh
dhumagikhas <tu>
osadhlsnehasampanno
dlpo 'yam <pratigrhyatam ||>
pratigrhnantu bhagavanto deva graha iti dlpam dadati.
|
diva;
||
nivedayati
Roth bhiksa. L sarvabhaksaih; Roth sarvabhiksam.
||
7.
L
8.
9.
Roth
sarpisa upahara.
omits punctuation.
Kauc.
10.
1.
36; 58.
5.
ity
adity<ady>ebhyo grahebhyo
havii-
||
1.
Quoted by Sayana
Roth samid.
AV.
17. 1. 1.
sagid;
iti
^akadhumam
2.
AV.
3.
M.
G.
276
6.
128. 1.
tvaya
AV.
yas te
32. 1.
[1913.
somaya
at 6. 127, p. 268.
Quoted by Sayana
manyo
4. 31.
Boiling,
manyo
angarakaya
ity
at 4. 31, p. 675.
Quoted by Sayana
sa
brhaspataye
AV. 4. 1. 5; 7. 8.
Roth
6.
prahi.
1; 51. 1.
1.
Quoted by Sayana
nunam tad
33. 1; 4. 1. 6; 17. 1.
20
'siti
asya gukro
(2.
11. 5).
11
gukraya
nam.
7.
iti
vrhaspatir.
biranyavarna
AV.
budhaya
Roth somasyango.
yajnyajanah.
5.
iti
iti
ga-
nai^caraya
AV.
p. 86; 19.
6, p.
266.
Quoted by Sayana
-vahuh.
8.
KauQ.
Roth
99. 2; 100. 2.
rahu.
pranaya.
iti
rahave
rajanama.
9.
AV.
7. 11. 1;
Roth
ketu.
Cf.
Sayana
at
7.
11, p. 328.
ttatena.
krnvarim.
||
||
madhukir lobitangaya
naiyagrodblr budbaya ca
samidbah
sakslra bhargavaya tu
adadhyat
plaksih
1.
Cf.
AVPar.
4
||
xxvi.
(incl.)
5.
ff.
17.
saksira.
arkis tu ravaye
rahor aranyagomayam
dadyad
agvattbis tu ganaigcare
audumbaryo guroh prokta
samidbah
ketor ghrtayutah kugah
candraya
palagih
2.
arkl ravaye.
3.
Cf.
L omkrdumbaryo. Roth
agvatthas.
||
ganaiQcara.
198;
namabhi.
11, p. 243;
juhuyatd.
in fragments
14, p. 260;
8.
3, p.
by Sayana
589.
at
1.
gantai.
7,
p. 48;
matr-
The
Vol. xxxiii.]
Cf.
5.
1.
277
4.
16
||
||
daksina.
||
Roth
2.
-angaja.
||
L
3.
L
4.
ganaigcare havisyannam
krgarannena ketunam
rahor mansaudanena tu
L kslraudanu Roth kslradanam.
||
be.
7.
L
8.
L
1.
2.
tad
vadhlyate.
vudhe
modakaih samalamkrtam
|
samidadhanam etesam
annadanam athaitesam
ekesam.
||
||
grahapuja vidhiyate
etesam daksina<h> smrtah
L athaikesamm ekesam. Roth daksina.
|
||
eta junmani.
Roth grahesu
||
Qantir-.
17
ahu.
Roth manlslna.
||
bhavati.
yantrena pratihanyate
glghram gantir vinSgayet
|
vana-.
3.
dharmarjitadhanasya ca
ahinsakasya dantasya
ca
sada canugraha grahah
nityam
niyamasthasya
kevacam.
||
||
tadvard devo-.
|
Lj -dhasya
ca.
next note.
sanu, omitting:
graha which
is
||
in margin,
but
cf.
278
4.
G.
M.
Boiling,
The Qdntikalpa
&c.
[1913.
L
5.
omits: graha,
cf.
last note.
narendraiiQ ca vra-.
arogyabalasampanno
Roth -sampanna jlvema
garadah gatam
||
aradah.
jivec ca
iti
||
18
||
||
Zum
Brest-Litowsk, Rutland.
ist
Zunachst
zu lesen
ist
am
KITS
,,Zah,
zah
(fort! fort!)
denn
Yerbannungsinterjektion
wie das vorhergehende iT, syr. und
mand. &0, aram. Papyri n s
ist in einem talmudischen Zauberzur
eines
Lowen erhalten: iTHfcO NnP3
spruch
Yerbannung
des Hauses".
fond)
nt
als
eine Interjektion,
es
ist
nt
nt, Pes.
IISM K"DD
ist
,,H6ne
des
Hauses", nicbt
Talmudische
,,Siiden"
8D111
Kpfiiy
p]m
eines
unser Text,
gebraucbt
,,sudlich
Hauses.
wie
wir
BB. 63 b
64a
sehen werden,
fur
ein
anderes Aquivalent.
Yon K^B1^1
fc6B1jn
3) Ibid,
und
* .
dalier
unten,
1.:
,,Untersagt
eucb die
sei
Sonne und der Mond, verboten sei euch der Norden und
Wes[tenJ der [OJsten und Siiden, ihre (der Teufel) Fessel
sind eberne Ringe und eiserne Riegel" usw.
iHD, talmudiscb )HD, Kino, syr. sei ten Jfo*[, ass.-bab.
Nor den" (zu unser er Stelle vgl. den ,,Nordwind" im
tetdnu
1
s.
a
Sab. 67 :
280
N. Epstein,
J.
Zendavesta:
amwu
ass.
Es
ass. $utu.
magischen Texte.
daevo" ,,Damonenwind")
,,vato
wie im Talm.,
Zum
fcOTlK
NJW
B. talm. NU'O
z.
Ni:6, 1:6
der Tafel
fc6n.i
*ony
ist
Westen",
im
Talni.,
fcPTO, ass.
sein,
o^
ist
,,0sten,,, wie
(avuru);
noch der ,,Siiden" (im Talm.
nun
fehlt
[1913.
welches
ist,
wie
Sendschhii
denn nach
Es bedeutet viel-
we
Wn
(das D in
4) Ibid.
ist
t^1,
vgl. das
5)
n^
(S.
nt,
oben.
436)
ist
daher jedenfalls
KTP ^D
1.
ein haufiger
sicher).
JinPil, statt
pp-5^1
Name im
b.
Talmud.
K^M
eine
ist
,,Berg" abgeleitet
zu
n-J?to,
bei
dem Samaritaner
HWB.
s. v.).
N^3i (Levy,
Vgl. das
TWB.
N^m
I, 123),
(Gesen.-Buhl,
s.
Gegend ja im
bei
Rawl.
(,,Gehen"), Del.
2
Hervorzuheben
ist
HWB.
193 a
6, 1:
u.
tfmn
642 b
paw,
^1S ^Zy\
tni
-en.
Iranian Miscellanies.
By
Scotland.
a)
On
Indogermanische Forschungen,
(!).
xvii,
108, reading
6 loc. cit.
9,
64
f.,
f.
Wohnung(en)"
5
Altpersische
like Justi,
Keilinschriften
III.
vidbis.
am
13,
51
f.,
Louis H. Gray,
282
[1913.
The Babylonian
the two
New
and
their
houses". 1
occurs seven
plurale tantum,
times in the Old Testament, the Septuagint rendering being
II Chronicles i, 11 f., v7rdpxoi>Ta in
Xprj/j-oiTa in Joshua xxii, 8,
Ezra
vi, 8,
Ecclesiastes
v, 18, vi, 2,
and
C^/zta
rov fttov in
Ezra
vi,
8),
and
in
Joshua
xxii, 8,
D^DDi,
"wealth",
is
expressly
confronted by some difficulty. So far as the syntax is concerned, I see no reason to depart from the view which I
formerly expressed although incorrectly reading viQaibi$ that
the form is an instrumental neuter plural, used with accusatival
force. 3
As
to the form, I
in Bartholomae's
5
to explain the difficult
suggestion
Old Persian word viOibi^ in Dar. Pers. d, 14, 22, 24, from a
stem viQin-, I feel the difficulty of meaning, since -an- normally
similar
(Vs), p. 91.
2
of
See, further,
the
3
4
P. 126.
Zum
Iranian Miscellanies.
Vol. xxxiii.]
283
to
2
invariably represent exactly the Old Persian text.
The translation of the Old Persian passage abicariS gaiddmcd
maniyamca vidabi^cd would accordingly be, "the pasturage, and
the live stock, and the wealth, and the home possessions".
There is in these Aramaic fragments a very remarkable passage
mnn
Tny v TK jnin [.
ID&O ims n yt? TON" "P"[
nn 7 inj; poo n in [.
*)
[7]Ki ru
'
"Thou who
".
".
who
man who
lieth,
lieth.
how hath
saith,
Hear what he
saith before. 7
p. 83.
Ungnad,
An
the form see Bartholomae, Grundrifi, I, i, 220 f., Altiranisches Worterbuch, col. 501), in Bh. ii, 43, 52, 58, by til W33J1N, "they assembled, they
went", corresponding to Babylonian ip-hu-ru-nim-ma it-tal-ku- or ip-hu-
ru-nim-ma
3
il-li-ku-.
Ungnad,
see Sachau,
87,
NR
b, 1
^
7,
etc. (add,
The word
"inns
akwiaui)?
represents Old Persian *frafara-, "prior" (see Ungnad,
19*
Louis H. Gray,
284
".
. .
".
who maketh
alms, that
good unto
thee," etc.
b)
A New
man hath
Fragment
also
[1913.
of the Avesta.
(p.
15
1.
p. 180,
1.
10),
but
all these,
in
first,
who
1.
letter
of
Barzu
b.
Qavam-ad-Din
written in 1015 A. Y.
of the
the
(p. 431,
1.
19
b.
Kaikubad
p. 432,
1.
b.
10).2
Ormazdyar,
The
variants
first
mazdqm
text, according to
the
with
runs
thus: aliurdm
occurrence,
translation,
v
raevantdm x ardnanhvantdm yazamaide. amdMspantd
v
yazamaide. gaerim uSi-dardiwm mazdaldtdm a$ax dQrdm yazatdm yazamaide. a$anq,m vawhdS surd spdntd fravtyo yazamaide.
uSehenem paiti-radum
vispehe a[$a]vana yazata yazamaide.
bdrdzlm namdnlmca paiti-ratum yenJie hdtqm', "Ahura Mazda,
radiant,
ruling,
glorious,
fair
of form,
worship;
living
ing
living
On
Iranian Miscellanies.
Vol.xxxiii.]
285
In this fragment the occurrence of the termpaiti-ratti-, "counterwhich seems to be found nowhere else in Avesta literature
ratu",
ary
c)
In the
The
Name
Iranian
volume of
this
Montgomery
words
angel
"Wnfcttf is
3
frequently mentioned in post-Biblical Hebrew,
his
fcOKTQ
is
composed
of to,
"God",
is,
is
WPI#
E.
3 See
Levy, Chalddisches Worterbuch uber die Targumim, ii, 492, and
Neuhebrdisches und chalddisches Worterbuchj iv, 573; Jastrow, Dictionary
of the Targumim, etc., p. 1594; for the legends especially Griinbaum,
Zeitschrift der deutschen niorgenlandischen GeselZschaft, xxxi, 225 248.
4
5
Name,
i.
e.
God.'
or Ktn
knew
ii.
fcWStP,
fif.;
Ency-
Louis H. Gray,
286
d) Parsi-Persian
Omen
[1913.
Calendars.
442) and in
Dastur Hosliang Memorial Volume (pp. 454 464) two
studies on Parsi-Persian omen-lists: one on the JBurj-Namah,
copied for me on 29 June, 1909, by Darab Dastur Peshotan
Sanjana from a manuscript in the Library of the University
of Bombay (BIT 29); and the other on two brief madnavis
edited by Salemann in Travaux du Ill me Congres des OrienIt was then unknown to me that another
talistes, ii, 497 f.
the
has not yet been published, but has been exhaustively analysed
by Rosenberg, in
his Notices
de litterature parsie.
Through
it
me
seems to
>
iLo
^L>
y^ y ^
r
2
BU C
'
Iranian Miscellanies.
Vol.xxxiii.]
287
IN THE
NAME
By
NEW MOON
IN
Who
I shall
of each
sign of Aries, at
(2)
that instant gaze on fire;
(3) In order that thy affairs may be better that month,
consider now the word of the sage.
(5)
When
in the sign of
Gemini thou
4
7
9
BU, \j*j~*.
BU, yul? f b\.
*l.
BU, jj*l
.Rosenberg (Byp4ac-HaM3, p.
BU
seest
omits.
BU, yt ^-wlol.
8
BU, CX*<ot t^+A.
8,
the moon, at
BCJ,
BU,
y ^ J>.
Burj-Namah.
10
Louis H. Gray,
288
[1913.
(6)
that
(11) When in the sign of Virgo thou seest (the new moon),
be thou wise; of its signification hear thou from me thus:
1
(12) Look not thou, under these circumstances, with sadness
on the face of any one else, in order that thou mayest not
make
(14) When in the sign of Libra thou seest the moon, gaze
at that instant on a mirror and on gold;
(15) Implore thy necessities from the Creator of the world.
Likewise of the sign of Scorpio I shall tell; be thou wise!
Gaze
When
in
Rosenberg
(p. 9,
cf.,
however, his
uncertainty expressed on p. 4)
Iranian Miscellanies.
Vol. xxxiii.]
289
(24) When thou seest the moon in the sign of Pisces, gaze
straightway on rubies and pearls;
(25) Look and be joyful at that time; be joyous, and it is
no harm to
(26)
Even
thee.
so
Protector [God]
remember our
may
be guardian.
On
[if]
thou seest a
and palace.
the Sabbath, which is the day of the
On
Sun,
be
Mercury,
[if
it
of Jupiter,
Iblis.
Louis H. Gray,
290
[1913.
Friday
is
[if
[if]
[the snake's]
(4)
When
moon
[is]
in Cancer,
[if
stock.
[if
then
Rosenberg suggests j
Iranian Miscellanies.
Vol. xxxiii.]
291
[if
oppression and
(12) [If] the
of the Fish,
[if
[i.
e.
sufferest]
much
cruelty.
moon
[be]
sovereignty.
(13) If [thou art] prudent, if happy and joyous, thou causest
the divine compassion to come unto [thy] weakness. 2
As supplementary
to
former studies, I
my
may
note that
ibn
this
by al-Blrunl
translates "drink
wine in an earthen
cup".
2
Rosenberg, Notices,
1113,
49, BypAJK-Ha.via, 4.
feeble".
Louis H. Gray,
292
as
Rosenberg
says,
[1913.
and
and Arabic.
It
would indeed
new moon
are
form
drawn from moon and snakes, and the possibility that Indian
works upon these omens were translated by Persians or Arabs,
although no Indian book of this character is thus far known
to exist. My own belief is still the one which I expressed in
the Hoshang Volume: "In view, then, of the facts that omens
from snakes cannot be explained as Zoroastrian, and that,
while sporadic portents are drawn from serpents among Hebrews,
Hindus, Burmese, Melanesians, Romans, Greeks, and Lithuanians,
is no systematic development of ophiomancy among any
of these peoples, there seems to me but one possible derivation
for the Persian Mar-Namah, for only among the ancient
there
have
all
haps,
is
In
Iranian Miscellanies.
Vol.xxxiii.]
In
same
293
De
this
article I
of
Ostentis
tablets.
Babylonian
to Greece,
long survived in
work showing
its
native home.
Modern Persian
bi-:
Lithuanian
to be derived
be-.
found in
Af/an as ba-, in
ba-, in Gilaki as
etc. 2
Modern
Persian), and
be- is regularly
in
Pazand
60-.
The
fact that in
some
(-^V)),
Pahlavi
"except.
of Avesta bd-
it. b
The cognates
of bd are numerous, 6
and
handlung
vii.
Darmesteter,
the source of
ib. I, ii, 20,
4
s
be,
Etudes iraniennes,
213
I, ii,
220, 396.
f.,
160.
GrundriJ, I, i, 311.
Bartholomae, Altiranisches Worterbuch,
coll.
962, 912.
p. 619,
Feist,
Etymo-
294
garian
-ba(i),
ba(y)
(P),
Old Bul-
bo',
Reduced
2
Armenian
[1913.
or
Lettish
la,
Gothic
-ba.
Prussian
Lithuanian
null grade:
first
Lithuanian
be,
be,
Old
bhe.
particle
is
am
con-
give
similar
modification
of meaning,
as
laidi-ba,
"let
it
continue to be". 4
logisches
p.
On
427
2
this
difficult
word
see
f.
On
Grammatik
Brugmann,
p. 669.
Kurschat,
der
littauischen Sprache,
357, and Trautmann, p. 311, seems uncertain, for bei would appear to
be the reduced grade of the base *b(h)ei. Osthoff, Morphologische Untersuchungen, iv, 229, connects bel with Old High German 62; the latter is
connected with Sanskrit abhi, with the form abht- in abhitvari-, "onrushing", abhimanin-, "one of the Agnis", abhildpaldp-, "lamenting".
4
Bielenstein, Lettische Spraehe, ii, 372 f.
The
flames
BARTON,
Mawr,
By GEORGE
College,
A.
Bryn
Pa.
The same
und Akkadischen
Koniginschriften, 1907, 152, 153, transliterates as in his earlier work, rendering: "E-sar, der machtige
schen
Adab
Thureau-Dangin
the
cepted as Esar.
We
many
inscriptions
G-eorge A. Barlon,
296
he
probably Mefei)
iMB-K-I
is
2LUOAL
name
[1913.
more
(or
The inscription
KlS 3E-SAE *IL-IL sBIE-IS-St
in front proof of
PA-TE-SI UD-NU ki
Birissi
&c.
Barki,
calls
it.
reads:
GAE
vase.
p.
E-MAH
temple named
also the value
E-MAH
in
MAH
had
SAE. "it runs: (I) d MAH 2E-I-NIM-PAUD-DU 3QAE PA-TE-SI 4UD-NUN ki E-MAH MU-NAEU (II) 1UE-BI KI KU 2ITTJ JBASI, "(For) the god Makh
Eshinimpauddu, being Patesi of Adab, Emakh built its foundi
2
Dr. Poebel
(were laid) in the earth, month Basi."
has shown me a list of temple-names, which is to appear in
his forthcoming volume, in which the temple at Adab is spel-
ations
E-SAE-E&
MAH
dilemma
to
temples in Adab,
accept.
it
is
The name
of another king of
inscription pictured
Adab
by Banks, Bismya,
is
264.
given us in a vase
It reads:
E-SAE
of Adab".
BAR
Tlie reading
cf. the writer's
would require
|e
not
>|-.
to be
Kugler's
Mawr
College,
During the year that has passed Father Kugler has proposed
und Sterndienst in Babel, Buch II, II. Teil,
in his Sternkunde
AN
BA-AN
Kugler himself
is,
however,
month name is the same, the numbers sometimes vary. Thus in the fourth year ofUrkagina a month is
marked IV BA-AN and in his fifth year, III BA-AK. Kugler
that,
when
the
i
Presented in March, 1913.
VOL. XX XIII. Part III.
stat.
V.
12; G
20
III.
5.
298
George A. Barton,
[1913.
moment we
the
its
but for
end,
Langdon has
that
be
Harvard
of
tablets
has given us a
much
number
larger
of
texts
all
the
by which to
case
of
test
EZEN- d BAU
the
month
for
subscription
XII BA-AN,
(Nik.
64),
IV BA-AN, (TSA
TSA
XI BA-AN (DP
GAR- AN
viz:
HJ
de-
27,
but
112), another
XI
10;
20;
10).
If,
BAU
month!
BULUK-KU- d NINA.
is
conflicting in the
case
of
EZEN-
it
the
PSBA. XXXIV,
257.
24.
Vol. xxxiii.]
299
<&c.
the authority of
of Nik. 63.
not needed.
In
are not
all
AN
these tablets
merous.
RTC
55,
first
TSA
35,
ETC
51,
occurs
which
Pinches thinks
exception
is,
whatever
it
and Nik.
57.
31
was, figures in the donkey tablets also; see
It is quite possible that the yearly accounts of
ass-hire might, for economic reasons, begin with a different
of the
of the harem.
An
examination of the
BA-AN
that they are not all of one class. Thus TSA 20 and
10,
which are dated in EZEN- dBAIJ and have the subscription
IV BA-AN,
record payments to
gardeners
chers'
ME),
scribes
Another group of
These
also
bear
it
is
clear that
BA-AN
PSBA. XXXV,
31.
20*
300
DP
George A. Barton,
[1913.
Nik.
pa-ud-du was
1,
SIB-DUN;
i.
e.
and
TSA
ETC
54,
DP
2,
16,
15,
18,
26 and 27.
Thus
number.
KI-SIGr,
enter,
TSA
NAGAE,
women
a carpof the
palace,
ETC
SIB-GUD
"scribes",
NU-SAE
"ox-herds",
of she-asses", SIB-ANSU
herds of wool-sheep", and
men".
"gardeners",
DUP-SAE
To
"herders
SIB-UDU-SIG
"ass-herds",
HA-A-DUG-GA
"shep"fresh-water fisher-
DP
113,
and Nik.
NIMGIE
"stewards",
SAG-NANGA
"chiefs
of districts" or
This group of
"sections", STJ-I "branders" or "barbers" etc.
identical
with
the
first group,
tablets at times seems almost
case.
upon no basis of
all.
fact.
As
DP
Vol. xxxiii.]
month. 1
It
301
month
intercalary
2
Lagash, as previously shown, began in the autumn. Before
the time of the dynasty of Ur a new calendar was introduced
XANA
II
which corresponds roughly
systems; ITU KINthe
to August, being
intercalary month in CT VIII, 3, No. 12,
while ITU DIR-SE-GUB-KUD, which corresponded roughly
d
kam
with February, was ordinarily the intercalary month. Originally the ordinary succession of the months in the year was
Intercalary months were inserted at the end.
the beginning of the year had been pushed back to
the spring by the introduction of a new calendar, two precedents survived; one favored the introduction of the inter-
not disturbed.
When
six
months
that
for
it.
3
Kugler has called attention to the fact that the label sent
by Barnamtarra, wife of Lugalanda, with her contributions to
certain festivals (DP 25), shows that the feast EZEN-AB-E
occurred in the same month as EZEN- d BAU. This had been
me
as a possibility, 4
recognized by
the view. It
JAOS. XXXI,
253.
Op.
cit.
219.
302
George A. Barton,
[1913.
The mutilated
DUB
at
sign
de la
as Allotte
of feasts:
made
LUGAL-EKEM
immediately preceded
ITU
EZEN- d BAU.
Langdon and Pinches have both written on the calendar
Lagash in PSBA during the past year. The latter mentions the calendar only incidentally and with all reserve; the
of
former
himself beset
evidence.
developed.
month name
reference
Since
it
the
is
the
and
its
heliac rising
however, no change in
my
"be bright",
is
inter-
"shine"
probably right.
It
previous arrangement of
the calendar.
Dr. Talcott
environs, but not true of southern Babylonia.
Williams, whose boyhood was passed in that region, writes me:
"The harvest in Mosul comes May-June. It is earlier from
Baghdad
for
is
to
Mosul
is
is
the prob-
able reading.
2
1853, 361
ff.
Vol. xxxiii.]
303
by from one
to
All European
on a statement intended
for
Nineveh.
Their
Lagash
systems are
The
accordingly wrong.
we can
Two
the
build.
month
In order to
firms the conjecture.
necessary to quote two sections.
57.
make
it is
made an agreement with the owner of the field, and without the consent
of the owner has pastured his sheep, the owner of the field shall harvest
the field, and the shepherd, who without the consent of the owner of
the field caused his sheep to eat the field, shall pay the owner of the
of land.
in addition 20
of grain for each
58.
If, after the sheep have come up out of the fields and are
BUR
GUR
field'
mingled' on the public common by the city gate, a shepherd turn his
sheep into a field and cause the sheep to eat the field, the shepherd shall
oversee the field which he has caused to be eaten, and at harvest time
shall measure to the owner of the field 60 GUR of grain for each BUR
of land.
Of.
JAGS. XXXI,
259 n.
1.
Johns, "have passed into" (the common fold by the city gate); Ungnad
haben" Rogers, "closed within"
[sie sich ein Schlupfloch (?)] "gegraben
of the 8th stem of
(the gate). This Babylonian ittahlalu has the force
;
disorder" or "confusion".
significations,
"be put in
304
George A. Barton,
sufficiently so that crop
grown
ing of sheep
and that
[1913.
and turned
fields
safe to
call
they
the goats",
would naturally
fall
to
e.
previous
me
are indicated
the
in
First month,
Sept.-Oct.,
]
i
Third month
(??),
-IT
i.
month, Jan,Feb.,
ITU GAL-SAG-GA
JTU GAL . UNUGki GA
.
ITU AMAE-A-A-SIG-GA
ITU AMA TJI)U TIj K
_
March- April,
ITU SI-GAE-MA
ITU UZ-NE-GU-EA-A
Seventh month,
Nov.-Dec.,
tvm,
Fifth
ITU-EZEN- dBAU
ITU-EZEN-AB-E
ITU EZEN-AB-E-LAGA& ki
ITU SE-GUE-KUD
ITU GA-UDU-UE
^^
^^ _-p
jmrj qyp -DA
ITU SIG- d BA-U-E-TA-GAE-EA-A
17.
Vol. xxxiii.]
305
26.
[March, 1813.]
Two Forged
fessor in
Antiques.
By RICHARD
Columbia University,
GOTTHEIL, Pro-
New York
City.
and
of
many
their
kinds.
time
private collections.
It has fallen to
such
frauds.
my
lot to assist in
In 1890 I
A.
During the
lets
made
of gold or silver
foil
have come to
light,
covered for
in
graves
which
rests entirely
Professor
of these
amulets.
Since
then,
translation of two
brought to this country, which raises the number of these obNew York Public Library to six. It is with the
sixth that the present paper has to do.
jects in the
In
size
it
is
easily recognized as
Two Forged
Vol. Txxiii.]
it
inary amulet,
would not
307
Antiques.
it,
our curiosity
which are
fields,
Aramaic
a strange circumstance in
itself,
finds
during the
first
as the previous
living in Irbid
first
and secondly
in
its
member
the
early times
Even so, we
when we re-
class of simple-
in the story of
Luther, who told merely the alphabet on their beads, prefering that G-od himself should put the letters into words
pleasing in His sight.
of the simple-minded
man
and
title it gives.
Kib-
Shar ganni
|
nun
ki
p, 161, note.
Shar
|
all
|
Shar A-ga-de
(=Sippar). See,
e.
g. Ball,
"
a-na
|
Light from
^ Shamash
in Hi
|
UdRadau
308
Richard
Gottheil,
[1913.
and a sense of historical proportion, if historical importance is measured by bigness. He has roamed at will over
a space of some three or four thousand years; but we should
be thankful to him for this, for it has enabled us the more
easily to follow his somewhat tortuous footsteps.
ation,
The
B.
"Kitab
Dlwan
Misr".
Authentic documents from the early centuries of Mohammedan dominion are of rare occurrence, and therefore are
highly prized. It is only of late that the finds of Egyptian
papyri have begun to yield of their fulness something in the
service of Mohammedan studies.
The hand of time and the
negligence of man have ruthlessly destroyed the mass of records that must have existed in the chancelleries of the various
Moslem
empires.
lighted when, in
had left many traces on the pages. The edges of the codex
had been frayed, and each page was set in paper that was
very evidently of
was deepened
est
much
still
later date
than the
original.
My
inter-
come
not
to write in a well-defined
the
intertwisted
development
The account of
it
script?
script in
True,
which
it
was
later
entangled
bore all the hall-marks of this extra-
of Arabic
this forgery
Maghrebl
and
writing.
was read
at a
The manuscript
meeting of
this Society
Two Forged
Vol. xxxiii.]
309
Antiques.
to
fit
None
that I
was intended
to be
but it was the most impossible Arabic that I had ever
seen.
Very soon certain peculiarities which were easily recognized as Maltese and Tunisian came to view, but most of
could find.
could not
sentences
the
construed
be
And
The
very
Through some
an Italian word
willing believer.
scripts;
Oriental and
story
artistic
design
of the
as un- Arabic as
it
frontispiece
could be.
was
as
un-
as follows:
is
came
in
Naples,
because
1782
he
as
visited
Mohammed
St.
ibn
Martin's
near
Uthman and
Palermo.
"Whether
students
of Arabic.
del-
ing kept up by correspondence his connection with the Moroccan delegate, he noised abroad the receipt of another im-
Eichard Gottheil
310
students to Fez
upon a mission
[1913.
Archbishop
and of the
hiding
1
appeared between the years 1789 and 1792, Vella
his own personality behind that of a suppositions
Mustafa ibn
Hs/nl.
Airoldi had
"Writers on the history of Sicily generally accepted the manuscript as genuine, and Wahl, Rossi, Ferrara, Piazzi, etc. made
it in their works.
Even so good a scholar as Olaus
Gerard Tychsen at Rostock was caught in the trap of the
wily Maltese, and republished a small portion in his "Elementale arabicum" (Rostock, 1792), and a professor in Stuttgart,
use of
(1791
92). The Pope even lent his consideration to the fraud
by a profuse letter of thanks, dated 1790. But there were
not wanting conscientious students who quickly saw through
the very evident fraud. Joseph Hager was called to Palermo
in 1794 by the king himself; and in 1796 Monseignor Adami,
1
Mustafa ibn Hani, Codice diplomatico di Sicilia sotto il governo degll
Arabi, publicato per opere e studio di A. Airoldi. Palermo, 1789 1792.
See Catalogue of the Printed Books in the British Museum; Graesse,
I,
48.
Cfr.
Amari, Storia
del
2 Codex
diplomaticus Siciliae sub Saracenorum imperio ab anno 827
ad 1072; nunc primum, ex Mss. Mauro-occidentalibus depromptus cura et
studio A. Airoldi. Panormi 1788 (pp. 148).
3
Geschichte der Ardber in Sicilien und Siciliens unter der Herrschaft
der Ardber. In gleichzeitigen Urkunden von diesem Volk selbst. Aus dem
Italidnischen. Mit Anmerkungen und Zusatzen. 4 vols. Konigsberg 179192.
4 The
report of Adami is published, together with a letter by the
Chevalier d'ltalinsky, in von Hammer's Fundgruben des Orients, vol. 1
Two
Vol.xxxiii.]
311
Forged Antiques.
In the
was afterwards published in a French translation,
meanwhile Vella had gone ahead with the printing of his
second manuscript containing the correspondence between the
Norman princes and the Egyptian Caliph. This was undertaken by the king himself and gotten out in two editions
one folio and one quarto in regal style, the Arabic text side
2
by side with the translation. In this edition Guiseppe Yella's
name is mentioned as translator with the ornate title, "Cappelano del sac. ordine Gerosolimitano, Abate di Sant. Pancragio, Prof, di lingua araba nella reale academia di Palermo
e socio nazionale della reale academia della scienze". The first
volume, containing no less than 370 pp., appeared in 1793
and the second was in the press when the bubble burst. Vella
was arrested and tried before three different tribunals and
condemned. But it is evident either that the authorities did
i
not consider the crime to be a serious one, or that strong influence was exerted in his behalf.
He was condemned simply
to seclusion in a small villa at
of
Palermo.
life
may
but that he
I have not been able to see the German original. The title of the
r
French translation is
Relation d une insigne Imposture Litteraire decouverte dans un Voyage fait en Sidle en 1794. Par Mr. le Dr. Hager.
1
"del
Bon Gusto"
Richard
312
Gottheil,
Two
Forged, Antiques.
[1913.
might
Sicily in its
he
in
informed,
Vella
at Palermo.
to
the
villa
It
in
course
Dlwan
It
Misr.
is
corpus
this last
delicti,
its
way
Nallino
for
the
information
1
part of this paper.
Le
Mohammedanism
BRYAN
THE whole
medanism
in
in
question of the nature and history of Mohamis much larger than the
scope of the
Borneo
intimately familiar with the various manifestations of Mohammedanism I may gain some valuable suggestions for further
investigation of
its
In studying the
history in Borneo.
of environment
effect
upon the
religion of
roundings and
sensibilities.
Of
the
coast
settlements
during
the
is
Mohammedanism, brought
centuries by Arab
several
traders
of a
new
definite eco-
ment, and ideas that have come from the north, south, east,
or west.
Having traced the religious elements to their
geographical or linguistic sources, the historian leaves the
VOL. XXXin. Part IV.
21
314
Scott,
[1913.
matter,
scientific, it
and formulate
reasons
these
corresponding to the
now
to go further, to gather up
them into laws of borrowing
Malay Archipelago
open
seas. 2
in
i,
St.
pp.
2
"Indian Archipelago" 2
vols.
London
1853.
4, 44.
St.
Inhabitants and
its
Hugh Low,
Sarawak,
its
pp.
199201
Mohammedanism
Vol. xxxiii.j
The
teachers of
first
Mohammedanism
pirates,
315
in Borneo.
in the Archipelago
to seek
their
Later, as the
Ceylon was wholly in the hands of the Arabs; by the middle of the
eighth century A. D. there were many Arab traders in Canton; from the
tenth to the fifteenth centuries, until the coming of the Portuguese, they
were the undisputed masters of trade with the East. They were probably early in the Malay Archipelago, but no mention is made of these
islands in the
G.
p.
work
of
Arab geographers
W.
quoted by T.
294.
C.
1906,
ii,
p. 279.
Some
Seriff.
Which
of the
from the Malabar coast, where the Shafi'ijah sect is predominant to-day
as it was in the fourteenth century.
Voyages d'Ibn Batoutah, Paris
184358, iv, pp. 66, 80, quoted by Arnold p. 294. For the Shi'ah Klings
in Borneo cf. below p. 28.
The predominant influence to-day, however,
is that of Mecca. Besides the annual pilgrims who come to Mecca merely
in
keep
Archipelago. And religious books printed in Mecca are carried to all
parts of the Archipelago. The number of annual pilgrims to Mecca from
in
Hague 1889,
2 With
the Mohammedan conquest the Perso-Arabic Alphabet was
introduced among the Malays. Hugh Clifford, ibid. p. 477; Marsden's
Malay Grammar, London 1812, pp. 1, 2. Crawfurd, iii, p. 207, gives the
following dates for the introduction of Mohammedanism into the Archipelago 1204 A. D. the Achehnese, 1278 the Malays of Malacca, 1478 the
Javanese, 1495 natives of the Spice Islands. Cf. also ibid, ii, pp. 304 to
306; and St. John, ibid, i, pp. 4851. cf. also Arnold, passim, pp. 296
:
343.
21*
Mrs. Samuel
316
Bryan
Scott,
[1913.
and rivermouths
The
it
of the
island.
natural
A
the
barrier,
at the coast.
coastal population of
Borneo
composed of colonists
Malays and Bugis
and others, from Sumatra, Java, the Malay Peninsula and
Most of these colonies were, however, formed before
Celebes.
is
Mohammedanism.
The Malay
The
introduction of
Mohammedanism
1 P. J.
Veth, Borneo's Wester- A fdeeling, 1854, i, p. 180, quoting van
Lijnden, Aanteekingen over de landen van het stroomgebied der Kapoeas,
Natuurkundig Tijdschrift voor Ned. Indie, 1851, p. 587; ibid. p. 181,
quoting Logan, Traces of the Origin of the Malay Kingdom of Borneo
Proper, Journal of the Ind. Arch, and Eastern Asia, iii, pp. 513, 514;
ibid. p. 184 quoting Tobias, de Westkust van Borneo, Nederlandsche
Hermes, 1828, 12, p. 47; Earl, The Eastern Seas, p. 241 St. John, i, p. 197;
;
37, 41;
Java,
Head Hunters
of Chinese Trade with India and the Ind. Archip., in J. I. A., iii, pp. 604,
605, also Dulaurier, Collection des principals Chroniques Malay es, pp. 107,
109; and Journal Anatique, [should this be Journal Asiatique?] 1846,
pp.
544571, and
p. 185,
and
Mohammedanism
Vol. xxxiii.]
317
in Borneo.
Sultans on the
to Borneo.
work, gold and diamonds; by raids on the weak Dyaks, cargoes of slaves; by barter with them, a wealth of rattans,
towns
at
Godsdienst overgang in den Malayischen Archipel, p. 113, identifies Tandjoeng Poera, mentioned in the History of the Hindu- Jav an kingdom of
Madjapahit as among the conquests of the great monarch of that realm,
Hayam Woeroek, who reigned from 1351 (?) 1389, as probably Matan,
on the southwest coast of Borneo. Basing his evidence largely on a
Portuguese report of 1514, published in 1892, and on corroborative
notices especially in the Livro of 1516 of Duarte Barbosa, he concludes
that the kingdom of Madjapahit cannot have succumbed entirely to
Mohammedan domination until sometimes between 1516 and 1521. However uncertain may be the date of the colonies in Borneo, they seem at
Cf. also Earl, p. 336;
least to have been much earlier than this time.
Mohammedanism was introduced into Succadana on
Raffles, ii, p. 171.
the
West Coast
of Borneo
in
Sumatra
in
that
rose
t.
L.
J.
vk.,
Hageman, Beidrage
Deel
by Arnold, p. 316.
1
C. J. Temminck, Coup d'Oeil general sur
les
vi,
tot
de
possessions neerlandaises
dans VInde arckipelagique, Leiden, 1846, p. 176; Leyden, ibid. app. p. 97;
J. J. K. Enthoven, Bijdragen tot de Geographic van Borneo's Wester- Afdeeling, Leiden, 1902, pp. 132, 138, 158, 209; Veth, i, p. 193, following
G. M. Muller, Proeve een.er geschiedenis van een gedeelte the Westkust van
Borneo, Indische Bij, p. 124, puts the date of the coming of the first
Mohammedan
318
Scott,
[1913.
home country
We
may take as a typical instance of the turn to Mohammedanism in Borneo the narrative, which comes to us from
and is apparently as reliable as any hundred
year old story of these regions can be, of the founding of one of the chief Mohammedan kingdoms of Borneo,
that of Pontianak, the great Malay trading centre of to-day
many
and
sources,
fifty
at the
mouth
of the
river.
Kapuas
to
received
the
title
two left
on the
mouth
of the
Kapuas
river
Bouffaer,
p. Ill;
H. M.S. Dido,
Earl, p. 310;
57;
Hunt
Low, pp.
7,
18,
2028;
in Keppel's Expedition to
Dalton in
Borneo of
Office, Eastern Archipelago, London, 1890, ii, pp. 7, 296; for description
of the up-river trading posts of the Malays, cf. Molengraaf, Geological
Mohammedanism
Vol. xxxiii.]
319
in Borneo.
The
trading prahus.
was a shrewdly chosen location, not only for its accessithe sea and because its evil ghostly reputation secured
to
bility
him from attack, but it commanded the Kapuas river, the
immense navigable artery, by which all the inland wealth of
the whole western district of Borneo must come down to the
sea.
The Seriff Abdoe'r Rahman soon found it more profitable
to give up piracy, turn into a respectable and pious Moslem,
and become the protector instead of the assassin of traders,
gaining his income by a levy on all boats using the river.
He built a mosque, established the Mohammedan ritual, and
made pious pilgrimages to the grave of his father, who had
long before his death repudiated this scape-grace son. Thus
was founded the Arab dynasty racially half-Dyak of the
island
Malay kingdom
And
thus
of Pontianak. 1
Mohammedanism came
to the
Kapuas
river.
It
took
it
region.
only in
And
is
It
is
Mohammedanism
in their provinces.
W.
L. Hitter, Indische her inner ing en, Amsterdam, 1843, pp. 192, 193,
Hartmann, Algemeen verslag van de residentie Pontianak over 1823
pp. 2, 3 (unpublished MS.), van Lijnden, p. 601, Muller, p. 346, and
Tobias, p. 51, quoted by Veth, i, pp. 249266; A. Pompe, Geschiedenis
der Nederlandsche Overzeesche Bezittingen, 2nd ed. Schoonhaven 1872, p. 225;
Leyden in Moor's Notices, pp. 101, 102. The town was afterwards named
So great was the fear of this
for the spectre of the haunted Island.
place that the Arab founder had to shoot up the woods for two hours
1
C. L.
about in lonely places naked with loose hair, and moaning (i, p. 14); in
the Malay Peninsula the pontianak is the ghost of all still-born child,
while the ghost of a
woman who
320
But
-to
return for a
moment
Scott,
[1913.
What
had the establishment of the Malay and Bugis semicivilized colonies, and their subsequent conversion to Mohammedanism upon the native savages who occupied Borneo
effect
live
a wild free
of thought
life
and custom. 1
who
and
organization and
jungle
The hold on
acknowledge as overlord.
Malay prince
is
very slight
entirely simply
of the village)
by going
the
Malay habit
of
life.*,
1
"The aborigines, distributed by the geographical character of the
region into numerous communities, have been further isolated by foreign
rule and colonisation. The superior races have frequently turned their
more deeply in their jungles." St. John, i, p. 18; cf. also Temminck,
p. 135.
Throughout this paper I have used the word Dyak in the widelyaccepted though somewhat inexact sense as denoting all the native jungle
tribes, as contrasted
The Dyaks
layers
cultural uniformity and may be classed as "aboriginal" in contrast with
the Malays and Bugis and other comparatively recent colonists.
The population
of Borneo
is
estimated at 1,800,000,
of
whom
semi-civilized peoples.
only
All the
Mohammedanism
Vol. xxxiii.]
in Borneo.
321
of the Malays,
by conquest or
and given
is
ity,
and
since
medans are
called Malays,
Bugis, slaves from
fugitives
gold,
Low,
p. 17;
S. Miiller,
ii,
p. 385,
quoted by Roth, i, p. 387 note; Earl, p. 318; Bock, pp. 210211: Nieuwenhuis, Centraal Borneo, i, pp. 16, 26 Ida Pfeifier, Meine Ziveite Weltreise,
;
Engl. Transl.
New
322
Scott,
[1913.
Nevertheless
it
is
the
Malay language,
Dyak or part Dyak
dress
and manner
descent
who keep
manner
of
life.
and turned
it
into a definite
religion of the
region.
They
are:
1.
is
faith to be success-
stitiousness.
in
de Arabieren
bewaard hebben,
zijn
p. 239240.
Dyaks who were converted to Islam about 1850. Enthoven, p. 205. The
Malay language is the same sort of composite as the people, containing
Earl,
words from Sanskrit, Persian, Singhalais, Tamoul, Arab, Chinese, Portuguese, Dutch, etc., cf. Holbe, op. cit., p. 431 Marsden, Malay Grammar,
;
Introd. p. xviii.
Vol.
Mohammedanism
xr.ziii.]
323
in Borneo.
religion of the
As
Mohammedanism gained
way
its
in
their
Some
ity
sea-products,
local
and
articles
of value,
merchants.
European
policing
1
secretely, to their sources of revenue.
greater
skill as
The general
characteristics. 2
articles
in Boyle, Adventures
won
own
of
Far
East,
London
cf.
Moor's Notices, p. 6; Bock, pp. 87, 202, 203; Boyle, pp. 98, 321; Sir
Charles Brooke, i, p. 45, ii, pp. 162, 164; Nieuwenhuis, In Centraal Borneo,
263.
i, pp. 15, 22, 24-26, 120, 129; Earl, p.
2
Crawfurd, i, p. 139; Holbe, Revue Anthropologique, 1911, p. 430;
in the ArchiRaffles, i, p. 259; Crawfurd, i, p. 139, says of the Arabs
adventurous
fair
and
are
Arabs
"the
that
spirited,
genuine
pelago,
merchants. The mixed race is of a much less favorable character, and
considered as a supple intriguing, and dishonest class." It was very
who took the leadership of the Malays in
largely the half-breed Arabs
account of
Borneo, and directed piratical exploits. Cf. above p. 318 the
of the Arab dynasty of Pontianak. For their influence in
the
is
founding
in Keppel, pp.
Sarawak, cf. the Journal of Sir James Brooke
303,
54, 302,
324
With this
won converts,
prejudice
in its
favor,
Scott,
[1913.
Mohammedanism
easily
was regarded
War
Holy
hecame
familiar seas,
Arabs
in the Archipelago;
and Veth,
cf.
CCCLXXXIX
Reinaud,
ff.,
quoted
by Veth,
i,
p. 246,
-i,
Snouck Hurgronje, it owes its popularity "to its harmonizing with their
war-like and predatory pre-Mohammedan customs." In both these places
the ritual prayers are very laxly observed. Wilkinson says of the Malay
Peninsula that
"
it is
popular.
It
is
interesting to note
how
in different nations
and among
where in the Archipelago, the laws of trade and property are not those
of the Koran, but of the Adat (native customary law). Snouck Hurgronje,
ii,
pp. 279,
16, 17;
304309,
Spenser
St.
320, 337;
John
II, 325.
8,
Mohammedanism
Vol. xxxiii.]
325
in Borneo.
the wealthy who exalt the Holy War and become Hadjis.
In keeping with their lawless, irresponsible manner of life they
are gamblers, opium eaters and hard drinkers. And they ignore
the precepts which would interfere with these customs, though
as a rule they draw the line at eating pork.
It is naturally
the powerful princes who have encouraged, if not started, the
unorthodox deification of living and dead rulers. The Sultan
of Kotei is supposed to have been descended from a god, who
in answer to the supplication of a dweller of Kotei, came
down to earth and married one of his children. From them
is
descended
all
the
rulers
of Kotei.
The
following
curious
Chinese account from about the year 1618 shows the divine
right of the early officials of Brunei:
"In this country there is a temple in which three men are
deities, who were superintendents of public works
of the treasury at the time the country was founded; they
in battle, and were buried together at this spot; a temple
worshipped as
and
fell
again,
W.
compiled from
p. 224.
monds, these are owned by the princes. Enthoven, p. 165 Pfeifier, p. 93.
For the different classes of society, cf. Low, pp. 117 122; Brooke in
;
326
Among
Scott,
[1913,
unveiled.
The
of the Archi-
that led to freedom and prominence of women under the preMohammedan code the orthodox theory of women's position
has had
With
little
influence. 1
the poorer Malays, the artisan, small-trading and fishBorneo, there was less incentive than among the
ing class in
medan
intelligence in general as well as more knowledge of the meaning of Mohammedanism, both in their journeyings abroad and
Keppel, p. 50. In parts of the country where there are fewer opporfor enrichment there is slighter difference between the ruling
tunities
We
find
cf. Enthoven, pp. 131, 138, 190196.
different writers very conflicting accounts of the character of the
Malays. Probably the apparent conflict is due to the fact that the
class
among
medan prince
opium and strong drink." The prince of Silat who died in 1871 was
Enthoven, pp. 190, 677, 678. There seems to be no
given to opium.
religious scruple against opium among the Malays of Borneo, and the
princes, at least, drink wine freely, not always refraining even in public.
of
Low,
p. 126,
use of pork.
Earl, p. 235.
Bock, p.
They
31, note;
do, however,
seem
to refrain
from the
Malay Archi-
Mohammedanism
Vol. xxxiii.]
327
in Borneo.
drink, gambling
women
medan
is
theory.
The second
factor of Indonesian
Mohammedanism
the sur-
vival of Indonesian
in the Peninsula,
Malays
Malasia.
of these
Characteristic
the
customs of taboo,
Low,
women
countries
that the
the
higher class
are
Mohammedan women,
as being possible only to the wealthy, and in accord with the religious
teaching of the superior Arabs. The poorer women are too important
factors in the economic life to bother about such things, religion or no
religion.
Mohammedanism
women
ing
its
dicta as to
theory."
Wilkinson, p.
semi-agricultural
ii,
ii,
p. 335.
p. 298;
Low, pp.
i,
p. 38;
St.
John,
328
Scott,
[1913.
as
over
possession of which
fetiches
p. 25.
all
things, even in
what we should now consider inanimate objects is known as the semengat." Wilkinson, Malay Beliefs, p. 49.
The yellow rice was used by the Malays of Sarawak in a ceremony
performed on the return of chiefs from a successful war expedition, and
was supposed to give them -equally good luck the next time. The old
chief's three wives and female relatives came dressed in their best "Each
of the ladies in succession taking a handful of yellow rice, threw it over
repeating some mystical words, and dilating on our heroic deeds."
us,
p. 289.
Sir
Charles
him
by Roth,
i,
p. 248,
Mohammedanism
Vol. xxxiii.]
and which,
like
in Borneo.
the "rijksieraden"
are
329
regarded as having
supernatural
Besides the survivals of pagan Malay ideas we find also in
Borneo relics of other pre-Mohammedan influences, varying in
qualities.
also
in
quoted by van den Berg, p. 79. These Chinese jars, many of them of
antiquity, are valued at enormously high prices all over Borneo.
They are held in reverence by Malays and Dyaks alike, and are supposed
In the Malay kingdom of Semitau, on
to possess supernatural powers.
the Kapuas river in western Borneo, the royal insignia consist of a kris,
said to have come from Madjapahit with the original settlers, a "pinggreat
little
dishes,
"anak pinggau",
belong, and a pinggau half a meter in diameter with three anak pinggau.
The pinggaus are kept in the ground except on special occasions when
they are shown to the people, and then must not be kept above ground
more than one day, or a great hurricane will burst over the country.
The little dishes must always be buried on" the same side of the mother
dish, otherwise they
p. 139.
The burying
For
Enthoven,
of slain enemies as the insignia of office of the chiefs, possessing supernatural power and to be touched only by certain individuals, cf. Brooke
in Keppel, p. 54, and Dr. Win. Furness, Home Life of the Head Hunters,
for regard of royal regalia in the Malay Penin., cf. Skeat, Malay
p. 65;
Low,
p. 126.
22
330
Scott,
[1913.
Another foreign nation, the Hindu- Javan kingdom of Madjapahit has left material and cultural evidences of its former
colonies all around the west, south and southeast coasts of
Borneo. Strong Hindu-Javan influence can he traced in the
Mohammedanism of the Malays in these districts of Borneo
to-day.
Of nearly
believe
it
all
these survivals of a
pre-Mohammedan
era, I
milk in Sarawak, where until a few years ago men still dated
"
the days of the Hindus." The Malays here, like
events from
the Dyaks, do not use the milk or butter of the cow. Concerning the Dyak custom Sir Hugh Low says "Their not
using the milk and butter of the cow, in which the Hindus
delight, has been accounted for by the supposition that at the
first
introduction
came
of the
to Borneo, this
the breed, by not depriving the calves of their natural sustenIt may be mentioned that cows are still scarce in
ance."
Mohammedanism
are,
everywhere their
Malay
Hindu-Javan and Chinese colonies.
Of the third factor producing Indonesian Mohammedanism
of
1
Of. above p. 4 note 2.
Traces of Hindu-Javan influence can be
found equally prevalent among the Malays and Dyaks of the regions of
the former colonies of Madjapahit. Denison, Jottings of a Tour among
the
Ch.
i,
Land Dyaks
Borneo who
in 1559.
"While this
which point
of
is
of the
butter, p. 10.
Mohammedanism
Vol. xxxiii.]
in Borneo.
331
Mohammedan
ideas
and
distortions of
Mohammedan
customs.
The Malays
We
life
has changed
lives as
greater similarity in the divination and inDyaks and those of the Malays than arises
fact that both peoples are below the intellectual
whether there
is
cantations of the
from the
We
stitions.
sympathetic
stage
of intellect
to
general.
i Furness
in his Folk-lore in Borneo, p. 10, says that the Dyaks are
the
"closely akin in every respect to the Malays, and no doubt adopted
22*
332
Scott,
[1913.
We
say this
much:
1.
Dyak method
of
life.
2.
live like
do
Moham-
their
They are not found among the Malays who are foreign
much as among those whose occupation keeps them
3.
traders so
4.
by Malay
Dyak
coast,
but are
influence.
Some
of these customs
to those of the
Dyaks
same
An
account'
palace a three day ceremony to "drive away Satan" participated in by Malays and
took the prominent part
Dyaks
they
together, in which
customarily hold in
women
Dyak
ritual, !
which were rife among the Malays both before and after the
became converted to Mohammedanism." On the other hand Sir
Charles Brooke who spent many years among the Malays and Dyaks of
Sarawak says of the Malays that "since their arrival they have been
mixed with the Dyak and Malanau populations adopting many of their
traditions
latter
p. 45.
"The Malays
also
have their
manangs, who
of the Straits Asiatic Society, 19, quoted by Roth, i, p. 282. The pelandok, or mouse-deer is an omen animal in Borneo of Malays, Milanaus,
Sea Dyaks and Kalamantans, whose warnings must be rigorously heeded.
The mouse-deer
figures
in
some of the
folk-stories of the
Malay Pen-
Mohammedanism
Vol. xxxiii.]
Some
333
in Borneo.
Dyak "Nampok",
in
call
wooden figures
The Malays have
which a
ain and spends the night alone on its summit, coming back
with great power from the spirits. Malay parents give feasts
to their relations to celebrate the different periods in their
education, and for a lesser festival kill a fowl, for a
greater one goats, buffalo or deer. This is exactly the way
the Dyaks use the ordinarily forbidden animals in festivals,
sons'
for
a greater one.
The Dyaks use pigs ceremonially, however, where the Mohammedans use goats and buffalo. In both cases the reason is
undoubtedly the same, the comparative scarcity of fowls, the
greater scarcity of flesh.
When the Malays lead the
1
Dyaks on
piratical expeditions,
they no less than the head hunters take pride and delight in
the captured heads of the enemies. Though Sir Charles Brooke
says that "they do not place them in their houses nor attach
any superstitious ideas to them," we have evidence that the
for the
"pantaks" or sacred
Dyaks bring the heads after an exrites over them; and believe with
to
the
first
perform
pedition
the Dyaks that " whoever does the least damage to any of the
enclosures to which the
in
"
If the cry of a deer, a pelandok, or a gazelle be heard, or if a rat
crosses the path before you on your way to the farm, a day's rest will
be necessary; or you will cut yourself, get ill, or suffer by failure of the
says,
Perham, Journal of
crop."
Roth,
i,
quoted by
p. 193.
i
Bock, p. 32; Low, pp. 139, 140; Sir Charles Brooke, i,
by Roth, i, p. 287; Sir Spenser St. John, i, pp. 143, 144.
p. 156,
quoted
334
wooden
figures
be attacked by
will
Scott,
evil
[1913.
spirits
and shortly
those birds of
rice-fields, roost
happy
and
fruits.
The
great
heaven except the rebel Eblis protected his faith. Eblis went
to the Orang Ka-benuar-an and persuaded them to cease
being woodland spirits and follow him and he would make
them
angels.
to
the
same
we
Dyaks
find
them,
without regard to their Mohammedanism, holding the same
do,
superstitions as
their
the
Dyak
influences,
companions.
on
rivers
In many
places, for
have become
expert
Malays living
an activity in which the Dyaks excel, and here they
have the same superstition as the Dyaks about the bad luck
instance,
canoeists,
3
consequent upon holding the paddle in a certain way.
are
that
few instances may be given also of notions
purely local and due to the impression of some out-of-the-way
Brooke in Keppel,
From
p. 285;
i,
p. 23,
Mohammedanism
Vol. xxxiii.]
335
in Borneo.
twenty years after the event the Malays would not bring their
boats at night for fear of ghosts.
purely local custom on
and
in-
1
corporated them into their different religions.
The Malay Mohammedans show the same tendency as do
the Dyaks to attribute supernatural powers to Europeans who
or
ill.
Ida
Pfeiffer's
wonder or
made
Mohammedan
feasts; the
it
for
God
336
Scott,
[1913.
medans
G-od."i
name
higher
primitive
true character.
For
this reason
we cannot regard
it
as proof
Malay
which
name
is
known
in
many
parts
of
Borneo
taboo by Malays in
applied to
all
as "pamali" the
parts of the Archi-
Malay language
is
easily learned
for things
and
spirits are
believe in a
Allah.
From
the
first
name we might
had
the
Dyak
religion
it
is
2
already existing ideas.
Un Voyage a
p. 260;
For the
i, p. 388.
different tribes; cf. St. John, i,
ii,
p. 242;
Bock,
Vol. xxxiii.]
Mohammedanism
in
Borneo.
337
life
is
harvest
taboos.
The
utility
of these
to
1
For the taboos on
already discussed in a previous paper.
eating the flesh of certain animals there would be the same
practical reasons
among
the Malays as
common
the
the pagan Dyaks begin. They shade into one another like
red into yellow. The extremes are easily distinguishable. But
and support
manners of
Brooke in Keppel,
p. 231;
p. 328;
Low,
p. 249;
De
Crespigny, Journal of
ii,
i,
p.
J.
W.
338
The key
to
Scott,
[1913.
is
think best
well known.
river
is
known
who within
One
tribe of these
"Embahoe Malays".
as the
They
are
Dyaks
the last
medanism.
Allah and Mohammed, at the urgence of their Malay overlord, and added to their old customs some Mohammedan ritual
and a few brass cannon. They continue in a unchanged
environment and gain a living in all their old Dyaks ways,
and they have dropped none of their Dyak festivals and spiritworship. They are head-hunters and openly eat pork and
drink arrack. 1
way of living. Analysis of the customs of the native Mohammedans shows that there is much native and little Mohammedan in the up-river districts, where the conversion has
taken place through the agency of isolated missionaries and
traders, and where there, has been no real change of environ-
in
the
villages
natives' real
economic environment. 2
Mohammedans keep
Mohammedanism
Vol. xxxiii.]
in Borneo.
339
description of what one might call this cultural conversion of the natives is given hy Holbe in a recent article
in the Revue Anthropologique. He describes the houses of a
"Malay"
village
constructed
Malay
Quand un Dyak
Malay ou
centre
il
et
fashion.
pigs,
deserte
le
prononce
La
formule:
of
un
paternel, vient a
kampong
le
ila hill'
Allah
Dyak
of three great rivers, those arteries by which Mohammedanism and the Malays have penetrated at certain points
tribes
manner
farther
of
life
up-river
of both
island.
we
It
go, the
is
important to note
closely does the
more
the primitive jungle type, and the more loosely are the precepts
of Islam followed by both Malays and native converts. There
are far fewer Hadji from
to Mecca are
who do go
Among
among
little
2
respected on their return.
European influence has made the environment more cosmopolitan than Bornean, we find greater power of the generally
There are mosques and prayers;
familiar customs of Islam.
verbal knowledge of the Koran, even if it is only used
to determine the ceremonial of marriages and burials, or recited
there
is
plete
in
human
many
localities,
sacrifice.
p. 433.
Bock, p. 49; Enthoven, pp. 131 134, 176180. Low says of the coast
"
Malays that they seldom apply themselves to gardening or agriculture,
to the industrious
trusting entirely for their supplies of rice and fruits
to the Chinese gardens in the town for the
and
the
of
interior,
Dyaks
Mrs. Samuel
340
Bryan
Scott,
[1913.
Sarawak
in
their
stands
alongside
antagonism. The number and influence of the Klings is so
small as not to be, so far as I have been able to find out, a
real factor. 3
1
Sir
p. 266;
Charles Brooke, i, pp. 77, 78, 331, 360; Bock, p. 25; Keppel,
Boyle, pp. 131, 173; Miss Quigley in Missionary Review of the
Holbe,
loc.
cit.,
p. 430;
Brooke in Mundy,
i,
Boyle,
Keppel, p. 269; Veth, i, p. 248; Low says that the seriffs "have
always been held in high consideration. They are always addressed by
the title of Tuan-ku, or 'your highness,' and on state days and festivals
occupy a position more eminent than that of the highest hereditary
p. 298;
nobles," p. 123.
For the
real intellectual
supports this prestige, cf. accounts of the Arabs above p. 323. In Acheh
"Teungku" is the title given to all "who either hold an office in connection with religion or distinguish themselves from the common herd
strict
observance
of religious laws."
Mohammedanism
Vol. xxxiii.]
341
in Borneo.
in converting the
mere
to the tributaries
neighbors.
Their seclusion
is,
however,
not
likely
to
be long-lived.
result has
last
decade
sequence
travellers'
tales;
through
the
schrift
voor
Enthoven,
Ned.-Indie,
p. 209;
1851,
van Meulen,
by Veth,
quoted by Enthoven,
ii,
p. 322;
p. 673;
Bock,
342
Mrs. Samuel
Bryan
Scott,
[1913.
attention
down
of Europe;
to the accounts
of scientific
we
of the country.
Even
yet
Mohammedans
accounts
in
local conditions,
which I believe
will
significance.
Prom
the
notes
definitely
new
religion
is
accepted:
In
so far as it
fits
new
2.
In
religion
is
so far as
it
accepted:
does not enforce precepts which are antato the economic
gonistic to the peoples' ideals or unsuitable
conditions.
We
have
seen
how
the
ritual
prayers,
the
prohibitions
then,
it
made
so little change,
It
Mohammedanism
Vol. xxxiii.]
343
in Borneo.
Borneo
new
3.
When
is
accepted
new
ideas
religion
the
offer
of a
in the
bonds
offered wider
new
religion is accepted:
so far as the forces that bring the
1
bring a change in civilization.
4.
In
The Dyaks have for the most part not accepted Mohammedanism at all, while they remain in their jungle environment, and a few have accepted the superficial Malay Mohammedanism just in so far as they have left the jungle and taken
to the Malay manner of life. Mohammedanism has not brought
Borneo any change in
to
civilization
A
1
new
An
religion
is
that
accepted:
interesting instance of protest against a pre-Mohammedan supercoming first of the Mohammedan traders and then of
i,
p. 287.
is
During a
trees
344
Mrs.
S.
B,
Scott,
Mohammedanism
in Borneo.
[1913.
We
the Malay
mode
of
in the
life.
Malay faith,
pre-Mohammedan Malay
or
Dyak
influences in
on because
and
forms.
We
see
ideas
"to
the
life
of the people.
his
the various peoples since they embraced the creed of Islam," p. 277. "It
of course quite possible to admit the validity of a law without observing its precepts
Eeligious teaching, however, must neither
is
admit any elements which are unacceptable to a large part of the community, nor reject things which are indispensable to a great number of
the faithful," p. 290.
A Tammuz
rev. 1,
general idea
"may
it
jured 6. by the
name of the spouse,
sadly wailing, etc."
appears also in CT.
is
un-na-te-(ga)
by Nana,
The
etc.,
9.
'wailing for
obv. 14: er
him
let
con-
by the
XV.
it
(A&I)-n
Tammuz,
e-ne-ir oci-mu-
AJSL.
xxvii. p. 85).
the sorrows of
Tammuz and
Tammuz and
his consort
as
his
Nana.
set forth
The
idea of
this text,
by
grieving mother,
seems to imply that their divine sorrows had a certain theological value; in other words, that they constituted a vicarious
to
physical ailments.
ing prototype of
1.
-ta
2.
3.
-ge
(KIT)-fo
4.
-ge
(KIT)-ta
5.
-ge
VOL.
XX XIII.
Part IV.
23
346
J.
-KA
6.
by the
mu
7.
[1913.
mu-ud-na-zu-ta
name
by the
Dyneley Prince,
of thy spouse
8.
by Nana
dam-ma
9.
is-gig-ga-ab-ta
is
sadly wailing
Dumu (AN-TUR)
Ci-ir-tur>ra-ge (KIT)-ta
XU-SI
d-ib-ba-ta
LAX-BA
12.
(?)
DU
(siba)
XU-SI
(=
(KIT) ga
alu) ib-la-ge
(?)-DU (?)-da
eri
the lofty
when he goes
d
13. u me-a am
Dumu-zi, ag-gad (RAM-SU) dug (KA)-^a,
lax (DU)-Zoa? (DTJ)-^a gud (by) him who is the wild bull Tammuz, who speaks love, when
one,
LAX-BA
14.
(siba)
ag (RAM)-ta im ga (GrA-TU)-a-ta-^
(KU)
who
is
to
(KU)
who
(LAL)
ba-
is
(LAL)
la-da-gaz-ta-
-.
la
slain
17.
XU-SI
is
slain
Reverse
Sub (RTJ)-aim-ga (GA-TU) by the exalted lord who is abased, the exalted lord
1.
imga (GA-TU)
to his horns
(is
abas-
A Tammuz
Vol. xxxiii.]
347
Fragment.
3.
e-ci-gim qin
(by him who) like sheep (?)
4.
tur-gim (db-)
(by him who) like a pasture
5.
number
of lines
may
follow.)
Commentary
1
5.
6.
-ta
of;
cf.
Some
610.
KA
adjective qualifying
Note that
of Nina'.
-ta
'word'
is
For
omitted.
of the phrase.
7.
mu-ud-na=xdiru
8.'
Apparently
Br. 1304.
'spouse',
sib is correct, as
LAX-BA
'shepherd' =siba
The -ma
oblique
in
1 p.
XXVII.
10.
p. 85; Prince).
Ci-ir-tur-ra;
cf.
(KIT) 'mother
11.
Ci-ir-tur
of
I render,
M.
ama
Dumu-zi-ge
Sadu 'mountain').
8aqu 'high' (M. 1220:
also parallel here with ga (GA-TIT).
the Erne-Sal form ci-ib-ba, for Eme-Ku dug-ga 'good,
1221:
XU-SI
Note
XIT-SI,
(cf.
BIT-DA
XU-SI
M.
is
excellent'.
ag-gad (RAM-SIT)
'love';
cf.
$apli$,
14: ag
IV.
(EAM)
21, 13b.
ta.
gaz == daku
double postposition,
is
23*
la
'slay',
not un-
348
J.
Dyneley Prince,
common
Drehem
in
contracts;
cf.
A Tammuz
Fragment.
William M. Nesbit,
Tablets
[1913
from
mu
Reverse
2.
3.
e-ci
4.
tur
5.
7.
(SI).
passim.
The name of
the
By WILFRED H.
Erythraean Sea.
The origin of geographical names is often beyond explanation: they arise by accident, pass from mouth to mouth and
from age to age, taking on new meanings and new locations,
until they become mere arbitrary words, and imagination
come in to explain them. So it is with the name of the
And
thraean Sea.
while no
man may
must
Ery-
himself
beyond
all conjecture".
puzzling
questions, are
not
1721).
Now
Red
it is
Sea,
Roman
Mare Rubrum,
separates Egypt from
times onward
Arabia; and
of
little
ficient
too simple, too obvious. The presence of algae in sufquantity to color the surface over a large area would
the
Wilfred H. Schoff,
350
[1913.
red,
is
Greek:
It
is
Red
The
the mental horizon of the Greeks was pushed outwas seen that this scheme must be modified, and that
the surrounding ocean here and there penetrated into the
solid earth. Such irregularities were noted in the Sea of Azov
and the Caspian Sea, supposed to communicate with the ocean
stream; such also was our Red Sea, known to the Greeks as
the Arabian Gulf. Of the navigation of the outer ocean the
early Greeks knew very little.
Vague stories came to them
of Phoenician and Carthaginian trading beyond the Pillars of
Hercules, and of a circumnavigation of Africa by Phoenician
ships in the service of Egypt. Of the eastern ocean they had
no knowledge until they were brought into contact with the
great empire of the Persians, which had overthrown that of
the Chaldaeans, and under both of which there had been seatrading since time immemorial between the Euphrates and
Western India. That was the sea-route which they meant
by the word Erythraean, which came to them from Persia.
It is through that connection that its origin and meaning must
little
as
ward
it
be sought.
os
to
in
Greek means
blush;
there
is
red,
epvOpawa)
to
Greek personal
dye
red,
name
and
'EpvQpas
The name of
Vol. xxxiii.]
tlie
Erythraean Sea.
351
found region.
the
with
all
it.
Hecataeus, the first of the Greek geographers, knows nothing of an Erythraean Sea. The first writers that give us the
name are Herodotus, as quoted below, and Pindar (P. 4, 448),
the latter in one passage only. From Herodotus, however, we
sufficient information clearly to explain the meaning of
have
the
who reach
Colchians
Phasis discharges
from sea to sea
.
itself.
.
"Another tract beginning at Persia, reaches to the Eryit comprises Persia, and after that Assyria, and
thraean Sea;
the
is
Asia."
The
first
is
itself into
Wilfred H.
352
rely
make
to
true
report,
Sclioff,
and
also Scylax
[1913.
of Caryanda.
The
truth
of this
story
in
Peshawar
Hecataeus mentions this place as a city of the GanPactyice, or the Pactyan land, was the upper course of the
Kabul valley; or more generally the territory in which Pukhtu was
spoken southeastern Afghanistan, See Lassen, 1, 142 2, 631. Vincent
Smith, Early History, 2nd edition p. 35; Schoff, Periplus of the Erydistrict.
dharians.
Vol. xxxiii.]
353
to his
is
with any other sea; for the whole of that which the Grecians
navigate, and that beyond the Pillars, called the Atlantic,
and the Erythraean Sea are all one."
And
that the
name Erythraean
in the
mind
of
Herodotus
Red Sea
is
"There
is
branching from the Erythraean Sea, a bay of the sea, of the length
and width I shall here describe. The length of the voyage, beginning from the innermost part of this bay to the broad sea,
occupied forty days for a vessel with oars; and the width where
the bay is widest, half a day's passage, and in it an ebb and
flow takes place daily; and I am of opinion that Egypt was
formerly a similar bay, this stretching from the Northern Sea
toward Ethiopia; and the Arabian Bay, which I am describing,
from the south toward Syria; and that they almost perforated
their recesses so as to meet each other, overlapping to some
small extent. Now, if the Nile were to turn its stream into
the Arabian Gulf, what would hinder it from being filled with
I think
called the
This
is
Erythraean Sea".
confirmed by Arrian in his Indika (19), E. J. Chin-
nock's translation
"This narrative
made
(Bohn
is
Wilfred H. Schoff,
354
Still
[1913.
is
Again (43):
"The country on the
on Arabia.
sea,
possible
The
various
first
explanations
of
the
name Erythraean
E/w0/oa
or
pying a prominent official position in Egypt under the Ptolemies, he was fully acquainted with the southern incense
and
and wealth
trade
in
therefore
of Alexander's captain
sailing
of the
heat and
desolateness
Centuries
later,
the
of
cut under
the
country.
During the
Oman
coal.
The name of
Vol. xxxiii.]
the
Erythraean Sea.
355
name Erythraean, red, from the fact that the sea is,
we should still be away from the truth.
as
water.
This
is
certainly
entire.
There was a
after this manner.
and wealth, by name Erythras, a
Persian by birth, son of Myozaeus. His home was by the
sea, facing toAvards islands which are not now desert, but
were so at the time of the empire of the Medes, where Ery,,The Persian account
man
famous
thras lived.
for
his
is
valor
fire
of hell."
i
Chau-Ju-Kua: his work on the Chinese and Arab Trade in the 12th
and 13th centuries, entitled Chu-fan-chi: Translated and annotated by
Friedrich Hirth and W. W. Rockhill: St. Petersburg, 1911.
(See
map
at end: also
page
12.
Wilfred H. Schoff,
356
at his
own
[1913.
cost;
of his
flock
life.
of his
Now
of a
mare.
first
were
all
because of these his deeds, that even down to our own time
they have called that sea, infinite in extent, Erythraean. And
so for the reason here set forth, it
is
to be well distinguished
color of tlie
water.
Now
of the name, as due to the color, is false (for the sea is not
it to the man who ruled there,
red), but the other, ascribing
is
The
testifies."
conjecture.
to the
by the Persians
as their arch-devil?
Vol. xxxiii.]
The name of
Arrian likewise
refers
357
Erythraean Sea.
the
to
this
in
his
to
sea
full
first
Sea."
Strabo, in the passage already quoted (16, 3, 1) in describing Arabia bounds it on the east by the Persian Gulf, on
the west by the Arabian Gulf, and on the south "by the great
sea lying outside both the gulfs, the whole of which is called
the Erythraean Sea." Strabo likewise, though in one passage
(Hamilton & Falconer's translation, Bohn Ed.) he adopts the
color theory of the origin of the name, admits the
story of
In
this island is
mound
to
after
his
retreat
from
In
We
Vorochtha-Vroct-Kismis-Kish.
Wilfred H.
358
Sclioff,
[1913.
chief went regularly to the Persian capital "at his own expense," presumably to offer tribute. During his absence, shall
we say because the tribute was insufficient, a lion attacked
The
lion
is
parti-
of powerful
is
entitled
"Turanian-Hamitic",
may
be traced through
Makran
the mediaeval
"Sea of Habash".
Arabic name
Had we
for
this
sea
(e.
g,
Masudl),
we might
and
blushing morn
so,
poetically,
we may
call
it
Especially in this
The name of
Vol. xxxiii.]
359
Erythraean Sea.
the
How
Tennyson
beautifully
in the
hymn
at the
end of
hi?s
once
thee
is
Every morning
thy
birthday
gladdening
and
Every morning here we greet
Thee the
G-odlike,
thee
the
it,
again
we
see
rise,
human
hearts
eyes.
changeless
fore thee,
in thine ever-chang-
ing skies.
"Shadow-maker, shadow-slayer,
monarch
in their
wood-
land rhyme.
Warble bird, and open flower, and men, below the dome
of azure,
Kneel adoring
Him
Time!"
earlier
connotations in the
name
of that
ancient so-called king Erythras, the sun and the color red
2
carry us to the very core of the Zarathushtrian faith.
With
we
need not concern ourselves. There are relics of this worship still on the
island of Haftalu, the Astola of the Greeks, off the shore of Makran,
that magic island of the Arab voyagers which magnetically attracted
nearby ships to their destruction so that the use of iron
ing was
made
in shipbuild-
impossible.
still remains.
Zarathushtra was said to have been born of the mingling of his
guardian spirit with a ray of heavenly glory during a sacrifice, and the
sun worship was centered in Mithra, one of the great spirits of the
Mazdean faith "who first of the celestial Yazatas soared above Mount
Hara before the immortal sun with his swift steeds, who first in golden
splendor passes over the beautiful mountains and casts his glance benign
on the dwellings of the Aryans".
Wilfred H. Schoff,
360
[1913.
The
we might
connect with
also
Yet I
Persian
its
believe
that
or
the
faith
the
coast.
We
darkly"
that
Aristotle (Color.
7rop<f>vpeos.
2,
4;
also
Probl.
38,
2)
describes
we
as
tint
(9,
the
most
6063, Bohn
treasured
of
the
shades
of
the purple
translation):
juice
of the
when
it
buccinum.
It
is
hue to the
sight,
The name of
Vol. xxxiii.]
the
361
Erythraean Sea.
the
to
light;
of which
hence
used to
at
sell
all
100
denarii;
the fashion.
Ocean, and who, they say, were called Phoenician from the
color of the
Was
or
it
was
it
Erythraean Sea."
and the
from
its
artificial
color
of the
waters? I believe we
first
cities
and
industries
and maritime
commerce.
Whether
there was anything more than an accidental conname of the Greek city Erythrae in Boeotia
exiled
find
it
familiarity
Greek
ears.
VOL. XXXIII. Part IV.
24
362
Milfred H.
Schoff',
The name of
the
Erythraean Sea.
[1913.
The
CocJc.
'By Dr.
JOHN
New York
P. PETERS,
City
of Biblical Literature
in which I sought to
from the animals there mentioned as sacrificial, and
particularly from the non-appearance of the cock, that, before
the time of the Babylonian captivity "the torah of animal
sacrifice had completed the creative and reached the legal or
prove,
The
first
six chapters
of Leviticus constitute
its
is
present form,
sacrificial
both a compila-
final compilation is
presumably postbut I fancy that the code itself represents pretty well
the sacrificial practice of the Jerusalem Temple before the
exilic,
period.
The
go back in essence to a
sacrificial
domesticated.
among
much
the
older
Hebrews
Xow
sacrificed.
in
whole burnt
sacrifices,
like
in
two
varieties,
was permitted
I.,
be-
rw
and
added
This permission is
to be offered.
a sort of codicil at the end of Leviticus I. It gives the
-later
is
leading.
24*
John P.
364
Peters,
[1913.
impression of an afterthought, as though of later origin. For trespass and sin offerings, where the flesh was not to be eaten,
provided for in Chapters 4, 5 and 6, and for some other offerings, like the purification offering (Chap. 12), a similar pro-
Hebrew
sacrifice of oxen,
which
is
fowl
One
of these
Solomon's
fatted,
is
table.
gazelles,
Kings
5: 3,
Of. the
calls attention to
Hebrew
Hebrew
Ball (Light
from
Targum
the
word
is dove.
These two tablets, while themselves not very old
(somewhere, probably, between 300 and 500 B. C.), give us, presumably,
the old Phoenician custom of sacrifice. If the translation suggested above
be correct, then the old Phoenician code was practically identical with
that pjit
Hebrew; and the natural conclusion would be that the Hebrew code
was borrowed from a pre-Hebraic Canaanite source, considerably antethe
The
Vol. xxxiii.]
365
Cock.
them themselves
or
obtained
them from
It
others.
would
else.
Even
if
known within
the cre-
the
into
sacrificial
code,
either
for
general
or
for
special
sacrifices.
We
at a
Egyptian
also.
ill
little
it.
tion
of either
or ducks,
little
temptation to
natural, therefore, that we should not find any menof geese or ducks in the Old Testament, in or out of
It
is
no doubt as to
which only
identification or its origin;
that
at
the
time
this
was
shows, however,
written,
passage
and traditionally since Solomon's time, the peacock was known
to the Jews as a wonder bird, fit possession of great kings,
its
and that it came originally from India, reaching the Mediterranean lands by way of the Red Sea.
i The Hebrew
and the Greek, like the Sanskrit, borrowed the
of the bird from the Tamul togei.
name
John P.
366
The
yard
fowl,
it
[1913.
which,
Peters,
is
names in three
and Prov. 30: 31.
different
is
different
passages:
Is. 22:
17,
Job
Dominus asportari
The word did in
biblical
Hebrew. 1
te faciet, sicut
It
virile.
LXX
"OJ appears
as the
mean
name
cock. 2
Mishnah
as
cock.
2
The
"DJ.
In
v.
his ostentatious
v.
17
"
figures
Wrapping thee with a wrapping, winding he windeth thee
with a winding." The resemblance in letters of *px and arfyv made the
puzzled Greek translators translate rbv (rrtyavov a-ov rbv &'5ooj'="thy glo:
rious
crown,"
further
still
LXX
twisted into
coronans
The Cock
Vol.xxxiii.]
367
In the next passage, Job 38: 36, the word rendered cock
not "OS but *W. According to R. Hash, in "the district
of K. N." the cock was called ^Dt? (sehhvi). Y. Ber. says that
in Rome also it was so called; and Lev. R. that in Arabia
the hen was called sihhvaya (WDt?). 1 In classical Hebrew
this word is an cwra^ Xeyopwov, occurring only in this passage.
is
LXX
The
&
"Who
e&oxei/
gave
ywawcl v<a-
woman wisdom
ingly:
the sea (4-11), the morning, the deep and the light (12-21),
the snow, wind, lightning and rain (22-30), the stars and sky
(31-33), the clouds (34-38); then the beasts, lions (39-4),
"Canst thou
lift
That abundance
up thy voice
Our
to the clouds,
may
go,
Who
And
Evidently there
is
this passage.
thus
"Behold,
Yahaweh
John P.
368
Peters,
[1913.
The
Peshitto
the
Targum
however, that at a fairly early postwas connected with the cock, and there is
shows,
biblical period it
mean
(if
THf.
is
in threes
and
word
THt;
(3)
Hebrew
the
text
is
(3)
The
he-goat, leader of
And
member was
the cock.
here and in
i
(4).
The
Hebrew
con-
<I
13IP
to see, foresee.
The
Vol.xxxiii.]
369
Cock.
Sry/xr/yo/awi/
by the
Hebrew
letters
text.
member was
emended
the cock.
and that the same word has the same meaning in Syriac and
Arabic. The word is to an extent onomatopoetic, as are cock
and cuckoo. These latter were in fact originally one, applied
to both cock and cuckoo, but ultimately differentiated to apply
each to one specific bird. Somewhat similarly, I fancy, TPT,
as a word supposed to represent a bird sound, was applied to
this
commentary
known
those
at
birds
matters
of
the time
in
fairly
being introduced
of writing
Kings.
Certain of
Possibly, of course, this riddle may have originated among the Jews
Egypt or elsewhere, and been imported into Palestine; which does
not. however, affect the question of its date in Palestine.
i
in
John P. Peters,
370
sense in Biblical
Hebrew.
How
the
[1913.
word
*QJ,
male,
came
to
Jews
to the
and
name
31,
or ^Ijyifi, a loan
coming of the dawn. Similarly in Persian Sraosha, the heavenly watcher, awaked by Atar, the fire, in his turn awakes
the cock. With this may be compared further the Slavonic
Enoch
ready
(xvi. 1),
according to which,
when the
come
to be a designation of time
(cf.
all
Mark
13: 35).
About 70
wedding
cock
is
i
Already referred to on
Persian influence.
p.
The Cod:
Vol. xxxiii.J
371
Kam. 82 b
an atonement 2
as
offering
The
creature
is killed,
but
is
not burned; as seems to have been the rule with doves, when
used as offerings, according to the old temple ritual. Its flesh
may
it
may be
eaten by those
who
the
money
also
date.
The cock also has been, or is now used among Jews
in various places for special sacrificial purposes of the purification or sin type (Kapparali)^ also for apotropaic sacrificial
purposes.
experienced;
and
Jewish Enc.,
Among
so
in
art. cock.
among
cock by the
common
was
in use,
folk.
For the woman enceinte two hens and one cock are offered. For
references and verification in Jewish Literature and practice, I am especially indebted to Pres. Adler and Profs. Ginzberg, Gottheil and
*
Jastrow.
John P. Peters,
372
[1913
into Palestine?
is
the wild
Red
1
Junglefowl (Gallus gallus), whose habitat extends from Kashmir eastward along the southern slopes of the Himalayas, through
Eastern India, Burma and the Malay Peninsula, and some of
unknown,
extinct
perhaps
wild
many
from
The
semi-tropical
and
tropical
Red
its
present distribution.
Red Junglefowl
is
Vol. xxxiii.J
nor
it,
Ttie
Cod:
373
its
Newton
likely
that
Malayan
says:
"Several
fowls
were
first
genera.
circumstances
seem to render
domesticated in
Burma
or
it
the
In China we
the
cock,
such
than in India,
which carry us back to such a very early period, and the datcan really
ing of literary records is extremely uncertain.
do little more than say that there is abundant evidence of
We
C. William Beebe,
Park.
The
line of
line of
2
John P. Peters,
374
It
[1913.
first
to
breed
retains
and
since pigeons, ducks and geese are not in the habit of indicating
I think we are pretty safe in assuming that the word in those
time,
days and probably centuries before had the present meaning of domestic
fowl or cock. But these are comparatively recent times. The most ancient source for the occurrence of
words throwing
light
on Chinese
cul-
ology between the years 1766 1122 B. C. The names of birds are very
poorly represented in it and the domestic fowl is not mentioned at all.
But this may be purely accidental, since the material now on record
of Index: "Ki-jin, officier de coqs; il presente les coqs que Ton sacriThe word ki occurs also in that most ancient Chinese Glossary,
fice").
(fifth
constellations;
question,
may
C.).
quite apart
historical ground,
B. C.) ascending a
e.
g. the
hill called
Ki-t'ou,
i.
e.
Cock's
Head
(E. Chavannes,
note
3), which,
other stories of the kind, is clearly a late fabrication, which
does not deserve any .notice in serious research.
like
I, p. 30,
many
The Greeks bred the bird for fighting purposes, continually drawing fresh blood from Media, as we do for horses from Arabia. See
1
Helm.
The
Vol. xxxiii.]
375
-Cock.
Central Asia.
There
were flourishing
cities
make
to that civilization,
his
way
to the west
my
attention to
The
old Turkish
name
for cock
was
India.
From
We
would seem
A date
my
other
John P.
376
Peters,
[1913.
this
May we
The first two chapters of this text are the liturgical formulae which
accompany the new-moon and full-moon sacrifices. This particular verse
is addrest, not to a cock, but to a sacrificial implement with which the
press stones are beaten, and which is likened to a cock on account of
(Cf. Sacred books of the East, XII. 30 and notes.)
the oldest occurrence that I know, except in so far as a replica of this formula is found also (according to Bloomfield's Concordance) in several other closely related texts (Concordance, p. 328 a, kukkuto'si
This
is
What
or
what
made
maker).
This
is
may be
as
make
it
to revert
upon
Veda
its
passage,
or possibly older.
In the Mahabharata
to fight.
to get up early.
3. to eat with your family.
4. to protect your spouse when she gets into trouble.
1.
2.
becomes useless
Because)
241:
offerings)
rite)
useless
(of the
wings; &c.
Vol
Cock
TJie
xxxiii.]
377
From this it would appear that the Aryans did not find
the bird in the Indus valley, but met him first when they
occupied the Ganges valley, about the 10th century B. C. (or
12th, see note), either themselves domesticating him, or
more
on the other
by
of the very oldest, the first dialog of the Digha NikSya (text, vol. I,
This book may
9: see David's transl. p. 19, rendered "fowls").
page
Rises early.
seductions of senses.
5.
Cock
25
John P.
378
Peters,
[1913.
we
we
possess of the
is
The name
go back to
There
this
period.
it
in Vendidad,
lifts
his voice
up
to fight the
demon
of idleness.
is
He
By
his
B. C.
question.
2
Of.
Yd.
18. 15,
16=23, 24;
also
Yasht
The Cock
Vol. xxxiii.]
379
but after
to reform, and above all with the great underlying folk cult
of that religion, compromising with its forms and practises
may be taken
as evidence
mon
More than
From
to Indians
known
that
and Iranians,
it
is
clear
that
he was not
the
separation
of
these
For further information about the cock among the Persians, cf.
Jackson A. 0. S. vol. xiii p. 15. I am also indebted personally to Prof.
Jackson for much assistance in this research, and especially for pointing
1
25*
John P.
380
Peters,
[1913.
later
(occasionally
cock
is
also
abundantly represented
on monumental remains a
same age
the
Archaiologi~ke,
is
1897.
place,
is
dated 600
550; and
* Cf.
Head, Historia Numorum. One coin ascribed to Dardanus (p. 544),
however, an electrum stater with a cock on one side, seems to belong to
Chios. This is "one of a series of primitive types, among which are
found
2
bulls, lions,
Sir
istic
The
Vol. xxxiii.]
381
Cock.
health, he
was
sacrificed to Asclepius.
In
this relation,
also,
he became the chthonic bird, and is used on tombs, as emblematic of the hope of a reawakening to life. He was a bird
of good omen among the Greeks as among the Romans, and
used sacrificially to avert evil.
1
about 700 B.
C., is
Head,
s
Numorum
fig. 135.
John P.
382
Pet&rs,
[1913.
Thruout the whole Greek world, then, from 700 JB. C. onthe cock, always represented most unmistakeahly on
monuments and coins, reproducing the game cock characteristics which belong to the original breed, was a familiar and
ward,
among domestic
mentions,
animals,
the horse,
ass,
mule, ox,
for COck,
TO/HS)
is
umably
aAe/cr/outov,
If
fem.
aAe/cr/waii/a,
we could
trace
(poetic aAeKTWp,
its
foreign.
find the source of the cock for
fem.
aAe/c-
naturally toward Asia Minor. The remains found in the inAsia Minor, both the Hittite and the proto- Armenian
terior of
konnte".
The pigeon is commonly included in the list, but, according to Seymour, Life in the Homeric Age, the pigeon, whi lewell known to Homer,
was a wild, not a domesticated bird.
3 The feminine formations
are uncertain and variable, evidence of for2
eign origin.
The
Vol. xxxiii.]
of Alektryon
('AAeK-rpvoVos
connection with a
Code.
XVII.
II.
602).
Appearing in
man
may be observed, the early importation of the peacock by sea from India, and of the guinea fowl, in the time
of Sophocles, from tropical Africa by way of the Red Sea and
parallel, it
the Mediterranean.
Italy.
From Greece the cock spread with the early Greek colonies
to Italy, where the monumental remains on which he appears
are almost as early as those of Greece itself. The cock appears
on the earliest coinage of Himera, a Chalcidic colony on the
river
an
god
altar,
bull,
Sicily,
The coinage
in front of
which
is
and above it
and connected apparently with the
sacrificial
sun. 4
In Etruria
1 Leitus
is also mentioned by Apollodorus, Diodorus and Pausanias.
His tomb was shown at Plataea. According to these later authorities
the wife of Alektryon or Alektor, his father, was Cleobule. It will be
noted also that the 'AAe/cr/>i;c6{> of Homer becomes 'AXticrwp in later writers,
according to the dictionary the poetic form of the word. The latter is
what
later
by
this
same route,
by
3
The
Do.
168.
e.
coins themselves
i.
cities.
John P. Peters,
384
[1913.
had begun
to
it is
influence Etruscan
art.
that of Gales:
among
the Greeks.
the bird of the word Gallus goes further, and indicates that
the Italians actually received him from the Gauls. In that
case he was domesticated in Central Italy before the coming
of the Greeks.
Now we know
of the cock
them.
The
cock,
we
in language that
Part of the Gallic rac'e, he
regarded
it
as a sacrilege to eat
Certain
to the
The
Vol. xxxiii.]
it is
Roman
385
Cock.
various parts of the country, 1 and that from that time to this
he has played a part in France which fairly entitles him to
But how did the cock reach Gaul? From the Greek
on the
colonies
On
common name
foreteller
dawn than with the Grecian fighting bird. Everywhere he has a religious character, and apparently the superstitions and religious usages connected with him among the
Germans, as among the Gauls, point, in the same direction. 2
The evidence is far from conclusive, but I am inclined to
of the
Maury
cites also
first
and the
like.
John P. Pet&rs,
386
[1913.
think that at the same time that the cock traveled from the
eastern end of the Euxine thru the Dardanelles to the Aegean,
Cyprus.
to
earliest
Cyprus.
circa
500 B.
C.,
appearance
is
on the sarcophagus
that date he
is
is
Syria.
too late to be of any service in this
is a curious lack of representations
monuments, coins, gems and the like from
Syriac literature
investigation,
of the cock
is
and there
on
old Syrian gems there are representations of
some
Syria.
in
but
no
case a characteristic representation of the
birds,
The earliest representations of the cock which I can
cock.
find is in a tomb at Marissa, 2 dating from about 200 B. C.
This tomb belonged to a Sidonian colony settled in an Edomite city.
The language used in the inscriptions was Greek;
the animals depicted in the interior of the tomb showed distThe cock himself is on the outer
inct Egyptian influence.
face of the door posts of -the inner main chamber. He seems
about to crow. In form, coloring and feathering he is still
As already stated, the only mention
the, Eed Junglefowl.
of the cock in the Old Testament is in Prov. 30: 31, perhaps
about or after 300 B. C. He has no fixed name in Hebrew,
and at that period seems to have been known to the Jews
On
as a bird possessed
by neighboring
When
in Palestine.
estine
Exploration Fund.
The Cock
Vol. xxxiii.J
3H7
coming in contact with him as early as 300, thru the Phoenicians or other neighboring people, refused him admission because
of the religious and sacrificial character which he possessed
among heathen peoples; the same ground on which their
ancestors
had
mean
name
confirmatory evidence,
India was not by sea but
jr
as
it
late
to be of
any value
for
into
acteristic
viz.
dujdj or dajaj,
Is this
also Jacob,
in itself an interesting study, which has not yet received the attention
deserves. In general each people uses popularly an onomatopoetic
name, an attempted reproduction of the sound made by the cock (less
it
John
388
P. Peters,
[1913.
Egypt.
Earlier Egyptian scholars were inclined to find the cock in
some of the Egyptian hieroglyphics, or in some of the bird
forms on the monuments, apparently arguing from the present
universal use of the bird that
familiar
among the
all either
it
old Egyptians.
known
utensils and animals, creatures used for food and the like,
that the cock, if in use, could not have been omitted. "Why
this was the case is another question.
Had the cock been
known
forms, but invented by each locality for itself. Almost equally frequent
are the semi-onomatopoetic names, which do not imitate but merely
suggest the sound made "(not sound pictures but sound hieroglyphs),
and which often are or may be equally applicable to other birds, like
cock (cuckoo) and kuru (crow). There is' a great deal of similarity
between names of this class over considerable areas, apparently due,
1
good illustration of the older method is found, by the way, in a
recent article in the Zoologist for Jan. 1912, entitled "The Prehistoric
Origin of the Common Fowl", by Frederick J. Stubbs and A. J. Eowe.
The
Vol. xxxiii.]
Cock.
389
the Ptolemies?
The
silence
to geese
In the
Helm
und Hausthiere,
that
the
cock
the
Gudean monuments
appearance of
in
and
sacrificial list
of that
John P.
390
The cock
Peters,
[1913.
istic peculiarities.
who has
this.
else,
list,
poetic
characters so transliterated might, so far as our present
ledge goes, equally well be transliterated hudurranu
rather
and
know- -
or
still
the word
list
in
which
word appears
But
further,
given as
has
been
which
the
with
of
the equation
equated
tarlugtillu,
2
cock.
Now
so
far
as
our
Aramaic tarnegul or tufnegal,
presin
this
it
is
So Prof. Clay
calls
my
first
VII. 339; and has since been adopted by a number of Assyrian and
Syrian scholars.
s As a
curiosity
it
may be noted
JLjj/
that
(aMoya)
Brockelmann
as cock,
in his Lexicon
with a note from
The
Vol. xxxiii.]
391
Cock.
is
equated later
Imdurranu
(1.
Aramaean
the
period,
still
list 2
by another unknown
might be transliterated ku-ku-ra-nu, which sounds like an
onomatopoetic name for the cock; and that one element of
the word transliterated tarlugallu is actually translated in a
bilingual list by the Assyrian (Semitic) word 'burrumtu "variegated", a description which might be applicable to the chicken
as a bird of variegated color.
As an argument by itself to
prove acquaintance with the cock in Babylonia in the Sumerian period (2000 B. C.), it can scarcely be accepted as
possessing validity.
There are also in the Sumerian word-lists some fifteen forms
On
passage
this Prof.
cited,
Prince writes
"but in the
full
me
form
that the
in the
'
variegated';
lugallum.
also
Dar
word, meaning
in loc.
(tar)
in
He
ification
So far
as this
word
is
concerned, the
list
it
may be
further noted
John P.
392
Peters,
[1913.
As
by
pictorial representations."
is in fact to these pictorial representations that
It
we must
bird type.
we
idenitify
The
is
earliest
on the
monument on which
two bow heads
finials of
the
iires
Brit.
Mus.
Koom XXVIII,
slab 14.
The
Vol. xxxiii.]
B. C.
Nothing further
393
Cock.
identifiable
is
found
(rods.
and
basket,
an
altar,
the
moon
like the
moon,
is
plainly the
emblem
of a god.
It
is
on these
we anything
a
sacrifice.
Both
1
2
symbolized by the cock. Who that god was we do not know.
There are similar representations of the cock on neo-Babylon-
Ward. 3 In general
it
may
be said that
*
In view of the relation of the cock to Persia, one is inclined to
ask whether these two representations, attesting the introduction of the
sacred bird of Persia into Babylonian mythology as a god emblem, do
1
combination of the cock emblem with that of the moon, suggests that
the cock here also represents the sun in some form or phase. Layard
calls attention to the supposition of Jewish commentators that the
nergal, made by the men of Cutha (II Kings 17: 30), was the cock, and
suggests that the Melek Taus of the Yezidis may also have been a
cock, not a peacock. The identification of the cock as the emblem of
Nergal seems not improbably correct.
W. H. Ward,
and
Cf.
You
will
have been all over the kudurrus and I do not believe that the cock
on them. The tail of the cock nowhere appears. I have suspected
the lesser or larger bustard, and yet the bird on the plow, or apart
from the plow, might be a sparrow, or some such bird that follows the
VOL XXXIII Part IV.
26
I
is
John P.
394
Peters,
[1913.
first after
is
name
identification.
date,
to
in Ashurbanipal's time a
more
relation
established
plow."-
Nippur our
was a rattle
in
the excavations at
earliest
evidence
and J should be
The Cock
Vol. xxxiii.J
395
up the
follow
than
line of the
Why, when
it
did
not
more rapidly
place
of
which
it
When
date.
The cock
into
Central Italy.
The Greeks
first
came
in contact with
eastern
end
and
1000 B.
and
C.,
later
carried
islands of the
ever, well-establisht as
John P.
396
Peters,
The
Cock.
[1913.
about or a
Roman
little after
200 B.
C.,
1
period, 150 years later.
i
Besides those mentioned in the notes, I also owe my thanks to the
Smithsonian Institution and to Dr. T. Leslie Shear, Prof. Jas. R. Wheeler
and Prof. Egbert of Columbia for helping me "hunt chickens". After
this article was in print my attention was called to the Arabic
j**j^=>
(sarsar or sirsir), an onomatopoeticon for cock of the same type as the
Hebrew Tnt
and Babylonian,
the Babylonian.
under these
differences
five heads.
As
lowing
after
t,
The Assyrian
altdlcan.
or
n to g or d
Assyrian:
atta Jjar=amtaJiar t
Baby-
The Assyrian
experiences no difficulty in
the pronunciation of a double sonant, the Babylonian resolves
the combination and simplifies the pronunciation by means
lonian: amdahar.
is
ihabbutu
= iJiabl>atu,
398
8. C.
Ylvisaker,
[1913.
to the
that of the
genitive,
its
irregular
nadanu
is
iddan,
Assyrian preterite
of
The Assyrian
also
bylonian.
as the idiomatic use of prepositions, etc.
IY. Closely connected with the syntactical differences are
issuri,
aid,
adu,
ul,
present apparent.
detailed study
in the
two
dialects,
to be accomplished.
To summarize: If
We
among the
exists
is
interesting
logian,
important also in several respects: 1) it furnishes
a very necessary key to the understanding of the epistolary
it is
literature;
detailed study
instance,
down
the
for
400
8. C.
decide
to
difficult
and
text,
Babylonian
Ylvisaker,
But
vice versa.
how
[1913.
becomes
which are
it
still
more
so rigidly
compared
as analogous
in
this
it
is
for
for
in Assyria.
But on
I think
we have one
of the most
problems before
difficult
certain
amount
us,
this
difficulty,
become necessary to
made
later
kings to illustrate.
Tiglath-Pileser I of Assyria (1115
tions side
time),
by
side i$tu (a
altakan,
lultaksiru,
ultallitu,
multaSpiru
(specifically
and madatta,
Babylonian forms),
Tukulti-NIiST. IB. II
attamdili
asapar,
asakan r
Salmaneser II (859
madatu (Assyrian).
has
u$te$$era,
attdkanu,
iMeni'a
(old
forms),
(Assyrian).
The
difficulties.
earlier.
of
of
Homer?
problem of the
language
DUN
By
up the
determining
The
give
known about
facts
this
its identity.
us
Sumeriennes Archatque has indicated some of the facts regarding this animal; others may be found in Gudea Cylinder
B, and in Hussey's Sumerian Tablets in
De Genouillac after putting together
A.
collected (T. S.
p.
former
DUN
XLIII f.)
DUN,
(1)
Harvard Museum.
the
facts
which he
a wild
DUN
of the
DUN
swamps
The
XV,
12
DUN
DUN
another animal
IX,
16,
we
is
same phrase
On
Cyl. B,
on Cyl. A, VII,
case, which would
as
DUN
DUN
Vol. xxxiii.]
The Animal
Was
403
it
it
in herds in the
swamps
asses
M.
ments.
the
that
bison
remote
a very
antiquity.
When we
discover the
numerous
DUN
asses,
C.,
of large animals
lists
De
asses.
we
49,
DUN,
find one
and
all
list
of 17 she-
totaled as 30 (31)
which
is
value
an
called
value of each
is
of the
"affair
set side
is
by
attached to the
side
DUN.
DUN
DUN of
DUN
DUN
300 qa,
When
asses".
DUN,
the
money
was 4
month was 50
for an adult
where
consists
we
Genouillac cites
Another case
deal
less
In R. T.
cases:
with
classified
asses.
is
a year or
of
probably
designating
animal.
a large
especial interest
ia-DUN
is
(R. T. C.
DUN
Is
this
to
cow
or the goat?
An
DUN-nig-ku-a, that
DUN
is,
title
indicating
"care-taker of the
be eaten".
This
title
is
DUN
du
is
herd.
called
He
also
is
named
Another man,
16),
or rather
DUN-
Rev. VII,
DUN,
404
DUN &c.
[1913.
and
though
DUN or asses,
DUN mentioned in
raising the
The
seum
DUN
On
and oxen
that of the
What
ass,
and
modern equivalent
It
is
it
required
less
food for
now almost a
DUN?
its
1
maintenance.
Have we
the
them?
Volume, p. 126, N. 2,
and again Thureau-Dangin in In27, Note 3, offer suggestions for
Thureau-Dangin in R. A.
ventaire
VI
p. 137,
BINDING LIST
JUM
PJ
1955
2
A5
v. 32-33
PLEASE
CARDS OR
DO NOT REMOVE
SLIPS
UNIVERSITY
FROM
THIS
OF TORONTO
LIBRARY